OPM Technical Specification Sections

WBRJ-12-C-0001
OPM Classroom & Conference Facility

Technical Specification
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
W90BRJ-12-C-0001
Desert Rose Tent Lite
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK

SECTION 02510 WATER SYSTEMS
SECTION 02530 SEWER & DRAIN SYSTEMS
SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-SITU CONCRETE
SECTION 04200 MASONRY
SECTION 07100 MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
SECTION 07160 BITUMINOUS DAMP-PROOFING
SECTION 7450 INSULATED SANDWICH PANEL SYSTEM
SECTION 07500 ROOFING
SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
SECTION 08120 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES
SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
SECTION 08700 BUILDERS HARDWARE
SECTION 08721 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
SECTION 08810 GLASS AND GLAZING
SECTION 09200 LATHING AND PLASTERING
SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD
SECTION 09310 CERAMIC TILES
SECTION 09311 PORCELAIN TILES
SECTION 09400 TERRAZZO TILES
SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
SECTION 09515 CEMENT BOARD CEILINGS
SECTION 09545 LINEAR METAL CEILINGS
SECTION 09550 WOOD FLOORING
SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING
SECTION 09671 RESINOUS FLOORING
SECTION 09680 CARPET
SECTION 09690 CARPET TILES
SECTION 09699 ACCESS FLOORING
SECTION 09841 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS
SECTION 09900 PAINTING
SECTION 10160 TOILET PARTITIONS
SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES
SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
SECTION 13310 TENSILE MEMBRANE STRUCTURE
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 15100 VALVES
SECTION 15135 METERS AND GAGES
SECTION 15145 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
SECTION 15241 VIBRATION CONTROL
SECTION 15250 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 15411 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
SECTION 15420 DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEM
SECTION 15488 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS
SECTION 15780 PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (ROOF TOP
SECTION 15891 METAL DUCTWORK
SECTION 15895 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION AND EXHAUST
SECTION 15970 CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
SECTION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF HVAC AND PLUMBING
SYSTEMS
SECTION 16415 ELECTRICAL WORK, INTERIOR
SECTION 16528 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
SECTION 16721 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM
SECTION 16740 TELEPHONE SYSTEM
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK

C-1
(1)
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
(a)
(2)
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
(a)
This Section includes the following:

i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
(b)
Related Sections include the following:

i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
(3)
Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns and grasses and
exterior plants.
Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
Drainage course for slabs-on-grade.
Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.
Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.
Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.
Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits
for buried utility structures.
Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities" for temporary controls, utilities, and support
facilities.
Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for temporary erosion and sedimentation control
measures, site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of
above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.
Division 2 Section "Dewatering" for lowering and disposing of ground water during
construction.
Division 2 Section "Excavation Support and Protection" for shoring, bracing, and sheet
piling of excavations.
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course if placed over vapor
retarder and beneath the slab-on-grade.
Divisions 2, 15, and 16 Sections for installing underground mechanical and electrical
utilities and buried mechanical and electrical structures.
DEFINITIONS
(a)
Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

i.
ii.
Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
Section 02300 - Earthwork
Page | 1 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
(b)
Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
(c)
Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
(d)
Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary
flow of pore water.
(e)
Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and
dimensions indicated.
i.
ii.
Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 3M in width and more than 9M in length.
Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as
remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.
(f)
Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
(g)
Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, un-stratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders
of rock material that exceed 0.75 M3 for bulk excavation or 0.50M3 for footing, trench, and pit
excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in
size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting,
when permitted:
i.
ii.
Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic

excavator; equipped with a 1065-mm- wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rock bucket;
rated at not less than 103-kW flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than
125 kN and stick-crowd force of not less than 83 kN; measured according to SAE J-1179.
Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 157-kW
flywheel power and developing a minimum of 216-kN breakout force with a generalpurpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J-732.
(h)
Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical
and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below
the ground surface.
(i)
Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt
pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement
concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
(j)
Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or
backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
(k)
Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
(4)
SUBMITTALS
(a)
Product Data: For the following:
Page | 2 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
i.
ii.
Each type of plastic warning tape.

Geotextiles.
(b)
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
(c)
Pre-excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction

and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused
by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins.
(5)
QUALITY ASSURANCE
(a)
Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified

according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented
according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548.
(b)
Pre-excavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Coordination."
(6)
PROJECT CONDITIONS
(a)
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted in writing by Owner and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated.
i.
ii.
(b)
C-2
(1)
Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owners written permission.
Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be
removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
PRODUCTS
SOIL MATERIALS
(a)
General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
(b)
Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, ML, MH,
and SM, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 150 mm in any
dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
i.
Unsuitable soils are satisfactory soils not maintained within 2% of optimum moisture
content at time of compaction.
Page | 3 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
(c)
Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, OL, CH, OH, and PT according
to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.
(d)
Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 37.5-mm
sieve, 70 percent passing a 9.5 mm sieve, 30 percent passing a 2.0 mm sieve and not more than
12 percent passing a 0.075-mm sieve.
(e)
Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; and shall be low to moderate plasticity soil (PI less than 30),
containing less than 3 percent by weight of organic matter and be free of deleterious materials
and rock fragments larger than 0.15 m in any dimension.
(f)
Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 25-mm
sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a 0.075-mm sieve.
(g)
Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel;
ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 37.5-mm sieve and
0 to 5 percent passing a 2.36-mm sieve.
(h)
Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and
natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 25mm sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a 4.75-mm sieve.
(i)
Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand.
(j)
Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
(2)
GEOTEXTILES
(a)
Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Non-woven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for

subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater
than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test
methods referenced:
i.
Grab Tensile Strength: 700 N; ASTM D 4632.
ii.
Sewn Seam Strength: 630 N; ASTM D 4632.
iii. Tear Strength: 250 N; ASTM D 4533.
iv. Puncture Strength: 250 N; ASTM D 4833.
(b)
Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications,

made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with
AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.

Grab Tensile Strength: 1100 N; ASTM D 4632.
Sewn Seam Strength: 990 N; ASTM D 4632.
Tear Strength: 400 N; ASTM D 4533.
Page | 4 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
(3)
Puncture Strength: 400 N; ASTM D 4833.

Apparent Opening Size: 0.250-mm sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.
ACCESSORIES
(a)
Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 150 mm wide
and 0.1 mm thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core
encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is
buried up to 750 mm deep; colored as follows:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
C-3
(1)
Red: Electric.
Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
Orange: Telephone and other communications.
Blue: Water systems.
Green: Sewer systems.
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
(a)
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
(b)
Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil,

debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 2
Section "Site Clearing."
(c)
Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 2
Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations.
(d)
Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against
freezing temperatures or frost.
(2)
DEWATERING
(a)
Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared
subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
(b)
Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
Page | 5 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
i.
ii.
(3)
Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to
accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.
Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from
excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.
EXPLOSIVES
(a)
(4)
Explosives: Do not use explosives.

EXCAVATION, GENERAL
(a)
Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface

and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil
materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be
authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.
i.
ii.
If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials
and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent
construction without exceeding the following dimensions:
600 mm outside of concrete forms other than at footings.
300 mm outside of concrete forms at footings.
150 mm outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade.
Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without
forms or exterior waterproofing treatments.
150 mm beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade.
150 mm beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 600 mm wider than pipe or
1065 mm wide.
(5)
EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

(a)
Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 25 mm. If
applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing
concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
i.
ii.
iii.
Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.

Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim
bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 150 to 300 mm above bottom of pile cap before piles
are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. Excavate
to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps.
Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility
Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or
minus 25 mm. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.
Page | 6 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
(6)
EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

(a)
(7)
Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and
subgrades.
EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY AND INFILTRATION TRENCHES
(a)
Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

i.
(b)
Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 300 mm higher than top of pipe
or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
i.
(c)
Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below
frost line or as detailed in the plans.
Clearance: 300 mm each side of pipe or conduit.
Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 100 mm deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for
bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe.
i.
Excavate trenches 150 mm deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding
bearing material to allow for bedding course.
(d)
Once infiltration trench is completely excavated, install sub-drainage geotextile on bottom and
on walls overlapping sides and ends.
(e)
Place stone (75 mm 100 mm in diameter) into the trench to the depth indicated in detailed
plans.
(f)
Stone backfill will be complete 1000 mm below finished grade elevation and shall be covered
with the sub-drainage geotextile overlapping sides and ends.
(g)
Complete backfill operations in accordance with Section 3.12.
(8)
SUBGRADE INSPECTION
(a)
Notify The Geotechnical Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade.
(b)
If The Geotechnical Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation
and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
(c)
Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired
equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or
saturated subgrades.
i.
Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction

perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 5 km/h.
Page | 7 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
ii.
iii.
(d)
(9)
Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 22
tons.
Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as
determined by The Geotechnical Engineer, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as
directed.
Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or

construction activities, as directed by The Geotechnical Engineer, without additional
compensation.
UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
(a)
Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation
of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean
concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 17.2 MPa, may be used when approved by
The Geotechnical Engineer.
i.
(10)
(a)
STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
i.
(11)
(a)
Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
(12)
(a)
Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
BACKFILL
i.
(b)
Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by The
Geotechnical Engineer.
Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, sub-drainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.
Testing and inspecting underground utilities.
Removing concrete formwork.
Removing trash and debris.
Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
Page | 8 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
(b)
Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,
fittings, and bodies of conduits.
(c)
Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 450 mm of bottom of footings with
satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
(d)
Provide 100-mm- thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 750 mm
below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in
a minimum of 100 mm of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase.
(e)
Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing.
(f)
Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.
(g)
Install warning tape directly above utilities, 300 mm below finished grade, except 150 mm
below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
(13)
SOIL FILL
(a)
Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
(b)
Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
(c)
(14)
(a)
Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.

Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 3 percent of optimum moisture content.
i.
ii.
Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 3 percent and is too wet to compact to specified
dry unit weight.
Page | 9 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
(15)
COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
(a)
Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 200 mm in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 100 mm in loose depth for
material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
(b)
Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
(c)
Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 1557.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
(16)
(a)
GRADING
General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply
with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
i.
ii.
(b)
(17)
Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
i.
ii.
iii.
(c)
Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 500
mm of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 98 percent.
Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 150 mm below subgrade and compact each
layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.
Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 150 mm below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.
For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95
percent.
Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 25 mm.

Walks: Plus or minus 25 mm.
Pavements: Plus or minus 13 mm.
Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 13 mm when tested with a 3m straightedge.
SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
(a)
Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
(b)
On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows:
i.
ii.
Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
Place subbase and base course 150 mm or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.
Page | 10 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
iii.
iv.
(18)
Place subbase and base course that exceeds 150 mm in compacted thickness in layers of
equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 150 mm thick or less than 75 mm
thick.
Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines,
cross sections, and thickness to not less than 98 percent of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 1557.
DRAINAGE COURSE
(a)
Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
(b)
On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabson-grade as follows:
i.
ii.
iii.
(19)
Place drainage course 150 mm or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.

Place drainage course that exceeds 150 mm in compacted thickness in layers of equal
thickness, with no compacted layer more than 150 mm thick or less than 75 mm thick.
Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not
less than 98 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
(a)
Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
(b)
Footing Subgrade: The Geotechnical Engineer shall inspect foundation excavations to confirm
that soils exposed are as anticipated by the designers. Such inspection may include proof
rolling as described in 3.8 shallow borings (2 to 3 meters), dynamic cone penetration tests, or
other tests to confirm that foundation soils are undisturbed and that soil composition and
consistency is similar to that encountered in the geotechnical borings.
(c)
Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556,
ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at
the following locations and frequencies:
i.
ii.
iii.
(d)
Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill
layer, at least 1 test for every 186 sq. m or less of paved area or building slab, but in no
case fewer than 3 tests.
Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 30 m
or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests.
Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each
46 m or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests.
When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth
required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
Page | 11 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
(20)
PROTECTION
(a)
Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
(b)
Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
i.
(c)
Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
i.
(21)
(a)
Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and
recompact.
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,
trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK
Page | 12 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 02510 - WATER SYSTEMS

PARTI-GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
1.3
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes water systems piping for potable water service outside the building.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
Division 15 Sections for water distribution systems inside building.
2.
Section 15 410 Pipe-work Specialties
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A.
Minimum Working Pressure Ratings: Except where otherwise indicated, the following are
minimum pressure requirements for water system piping.
1.
1.4
Underground Piping: 1035 kPa.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following under the provisions of Section 01 301.
B.
Product data, including pressure rating, rated capacity, and settings of selected models for
the following:
1.
2.
3.
Valves.
Identification materials and devices
Water pressure regulators.
C.
Record drawings at Project closeout of installed water system piping and products
according to Division I Section "Project Closeout"
D.
Test reports specified in 'Field Quality Control' Article in Part 3.
E.
Maintenance data for inclusion in "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in

Division 1 Section 'Project Closeout." Include data for the following:
1.
Valves.
2.
Water pressure regulators.
Section 02510 - Water Systems
Page | 1 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Environmental Agency Compliance: Comply with regulations pertaining to potable water

and pressurized piping systems.
B.
Utility Compliance: Comply with regulations pertaining to potable water systems. Include
standards of water and other utilities where appropriate.
C.
Product Options: Drawings indicate general sizes, profiles, connections, and dimensional
requirements of system components, and they are based on specific manufacturer types
indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be
considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Substitutions."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.
Do not store plastic pipe, structure or fittings in direct sunlight.
B.
Protect pipe, pipe fittings, valves and seals from moisture, dirt and damage.
C.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end-caps. Maintain end-caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
D.
Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed
structural capacity of floor when storing inside.
E.
Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Perform site survey, research utility records, and verify existing utility locations.
B.
Verify that water system piping may be installed in compliance with original design and
referenced standards.
C.
Site Information: Reports on subsurface condition investigations made during the design of the
Project are available for informational purposes only; data in reports are not intended as
representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity of conditions (between soil borings).
Government assumes no responsibility for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this
information.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDUUNG

A.
Coordinate connection to water main with utility company and service provider.
B.
Coordinate with pipe materials, sizes, entry locations, and pressure requirements of
building fire protection systems piping.
Page | 2 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
C.
Coordinate with pipe materials, sizes, entry locations, and pressure requirements of
building water distribution systems piping.
D.
Coordinate with other utility work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
Gate Valves:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
1.
2.
Water Pressure Regulators:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.2
American Darling Valve Div., American Cast Iron Pipe Co.

Clow Valve Co. Div., McWane, Inc.
East Jordan Iron Works, Inc.
Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp.
Hammond Valve Corp.
Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc.
Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc.
Mueller Co., Grinnell Corp.
Nibco, Inc.
Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
U.S. Pipe & Foundry Co.
Waterous Co.
Bermad.
Cash by A.W. Cash Valve Mfg. Corp.
Cla-Val Co.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
G.A. Industries, Inc.
Honeywell Braukmann.
Keckley by O.C. Keckley Co.
Spence Engineering Co., Inc.
Watts Regulator Co.
Wilkins Regulator Div., Zurn Industries, Inc.
PIPES
A.
Refer to Part 3 Article 'Piping Applications" for identification of systems where pipe and
tube materials specified below are used.
B.
Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L (ASTM B 88M, Types A and B), seamless
water tube, annealed temper.
Page | 3 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
C.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 80.

1.
2.3
PIPE FITTINGS
A.
Refer to Part 3 Article 'Piping Applications" for identification of systems where pipe and
tube fitting materials specified below are used.
B.
Copper Tube Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type.
C.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic, Schedule 80, Socket-Type Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 2467.
1.
2.4
Pipe Marking: NSF 14, 'NSF-pw' or 'NSF-pvc cto only.'
Pipe Marking: NSF 14. "NSF-pw" or "NSF-pvc cto only.'
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to Part 3 Article 'Piping Applications" for identification of systems where joining
materials specified below are used.
B.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCUP (copper-phosphorus) Series.
C.
Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32, Alloy Sn95; tin (approximately 95 percent), silver
(approximately 4.5 percent), with 0.10 percent maximum lead content.
D.
Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32, Alloy Sn95, Alloy Sn94, or Alloy E; tin (approximately
95 percent), silver or copper (approximately 5 percent), with 0.1 0 percent maximum lead
content.
E.
Primers for PVC Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: ASTM F 656.
F.
Solvent Cement for PVC Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: ASTM D 2564.
G.
Pipe Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of pipes
to be joined.
1.
Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron.
2.
Followers: ASTM A 47, Grade 3251 0, or ASTM A 536 ductile Iron.
3.
Gaskets: Rubber.
4.
Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C l I 1.
5.
Finish: Enamel paint
6.
Encasement AWWA C l 05, polyethylene film tube or sheet.
Page | 4 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.5
VALVES
A.
Non-rising Stem Gate Valves, 50 mm and Smaller: MSS SP-80; body and screw bonnet of
ASTM B 62 cast bronze; with Class 125 threaded ends, solid wedge, non-rising copper-silicon
alloy stem, brass packing gland, polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) impregnated packing, and
malleable iron hand-wheel.
B.
Valve Boxes: Cast4ron box having top section and cover with lettering 'WATER,' bottom
section with base of size to fit over valve and barrel approximately 124 mm in diameter, and
adjustable cast iron extension of length required for depth of bury of valve.
1.
2.6
WATER PRESSURE REGULATORS

A.
B.
2.7
Provide a steel tee-handle operating wrench with each valve box. Wrench shall have
tee handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate valve, and socket-fitting
valve-operating nut.
General: ASSE 1004, water pressure regulators, rated for initial working pressure of 1035 kPa
minimum, of size, flow rate, and inlet and outlet pressures indicated. Include integral factory
installed or separate field installed Y type strainer.
1.
2 Inches and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2.
Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
Single-seated, direct-operated type.
ANCHORAGES
A.
Clamps, Straps, and Washers: ASTM A 506. steel.
B.
Rods: ASTM A 575, steel.
C.
Rod Couplings: ASTM A 197, malleable iron.
D.
Bolts: ASTM A 307, steel.
E.
Cast-Iron Washers: ASTM A 126, gray iron.
F.
Concrete Reaction Backing: Portland cement concrete mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa).
1.
Cement: ASTM C 150, Type V.
2.
Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
3.
Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
4.
Water: Potable.
Page | 5 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.8
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape, 150 mm- wide by 1 mm thick,
solid blue in color with continuously printed caption in black letters "CAUTION - WATER
LINE BURIED BELOW' in Arabic & English.
B.
Metallic-Lined Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape with

metallic core, 150 mm wide by 1 mm thick solid blue in color with continuously printed
caption in black letters "CAUTION - WATER LINE BURIED BELOW' in Arabic &
English.
C.
Nonmetallic Piping Label: Engraved plastic-laminate label, for installation on main

electrical meter panel; not less than 25 mm by 75 mm, with caption "CAUTION - THIS
STRUCTURE HAS A NONMETALLIC WATER SER\/ICE."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EARTHWORK
A.
3.2
Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork.'
SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING

A.
Extend water system piping and connect to water supply source and building water distribution
at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated.
1.
3.3
Terminate water system piping at 1.50 meters from building wall units building water
systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for
piping material. Make connections to building water systems when those systems are
installed.
B.
Water distribution systems are specified in Division 15 Sections. Sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.'
C.
Install restrained joints for building piping within 1.5 m of building. Use restrained-joint pipe
and fittings, thrust blocks, anchors, be-rods and clamps, and other supports at vertical and
horizontal offsets.
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fittings products
listed below. Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to the following
applications. Piping in pits and inside building may be joined with flanges or couplings,
instead of joints indicated, for grooved-end AWWAE piping.
B.
Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to following applications.
Page | 6 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.4
50 mm and Smaller Copper tube, Type K (type A), copper tube fittings, and soldered
or brazed joints.
2.
50 mm and Smaller Schedule 80 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe, Schedule 80

PVC fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
3.5
1.
Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1
Pit and aboveground Installation, Valves 50 mm and Smaller: MSS, non-rising stem
gate valves.
2.
Pit & aboveground Installation, valves 50mm & smaller: UL/FM, OS&Y gate valves.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Copper Tube and Fittings, Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS 'Brazing
Manual," Chapter "Pipe and Tube."
B.
Copper Tube and Fittings, Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS "Soldering
Manual,' Chapter 'The Soldering of Pipe and Tube' and according to CDA No. 404/0 "Copper
Tube Handbook."
C.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM
D 2672 and ASTM D 2855.
1.
D.
3.6
Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners: Comply with procedures in

ASTM F 402 for safe handling when joining plastic pipe and fittings with solvent
cements.
Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Construct joints using adapters that are compatible with both
piping materials, outside diameters, and system working pressure. Refer to 'Piping Systems Common Requirements' Article for joining piping of dissimilar metals.
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A.
General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate general location and arrangement of
piping systems. Indicated locations & arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate
friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as
indicated except where deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B.
Install piping at indicated slope.
C.
Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
D.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
Page | 7 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.7
3.8
E.
Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
F.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
G.
Piping Connections: Except as otherwise indicated, make piping connections as specified

below.
2.
Install dielectric fittings to connect piping of dissimilar metals.
A.
Water Main Connection: Tap water main with size and in location as indicated according
to requirements of Project Director.
B.
Comply with requirements of NFPA 24 for materials and installation.
C.
Install copper tube and wrought-copper fittings according to CDA No. 404/0 "Copper Tube
Handbook.'
D.
Install ASTM, NPS polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe according to ASTM D 2774.
WATER PRESSURE REGULATORS

Install pressure-regulating valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance cock
bypass. Install pressure gage on valve outlet and install valved bypass where indicated.
ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION
A.
B.
3.10
Install unions, in piping 50mm and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment having 50mm or smaller threaded pipe
connection.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
3.9
1.
Anchorages: Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, and valves.
Include anchorages for the following piping systems:
1.
Gasketed-Joint, Ductile Iron Piping: According to AWWA C600.
2.
Gasketed-Joint, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping: According to AWWA M23.
3.
Fire Service Piping: According to NFPA 24.
Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-retarding material to surfaces of

installed ferrous anchorage devices.
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
General Application: Use bronze corporation stops and valves, with ends compatible with
piping, for 50 mm and smaller installation.
Page | 8 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
B.
3.11
ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS

A.
3.12
3.13
AWWA-Type Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried valves with stem
pointing up and with cast-iron valve box.
Install roughing-in piping and specialties for water meter installation according to utility
company's instructions and requirements.
IDENTIFICATION INSTALLATION
A.
Install continuous plastic underground warning tape during back-filling of trench for
underground water service piping. Locate 150 mm to 200 mm below finished grade,
directly over piping.
B.
Attach nonmetallic piping label permanently to main electrical meter panel.

A.
Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust blocks have
hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours prior to testing and apply test pressure to
stabilize system. Use only potable water.
S.
Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1-1 /2 times working pressure for 2 hours.
1.
3.14
Increase pressure in 350 kPa increments and inspect each joint between increments.
Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 kPa. Slowly increase again to the test
pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 1.89 L per hour
per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until
leakage is within above limits.
CLEANING
A.
Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows:

1.
Purge new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have
been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use.
2.
Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authority having jurisdiction

or, if method is not pr by that authority, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or
as described below:
a.
b.
Comply with NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean,
potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet.
Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50
parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) system or part thereof and
allow to stand for 24 hours.
Page | 9 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
c.
d.
e.
B.
Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with

water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine;
isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.
Following allowed standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until
chlorine does not remain in water coming from system.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authority having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedure if biological examination made by authority shows evidence of
contamination.
Prepare reports for purging and disinfecting actions.

END OF SECTION 02510
Page | 10 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 02530 - SEWER & DRAIN SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.3
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary
This Section includes sanitary and storm drainage systems outside the building. Systems
include the following:
1.
Sanitary sewerage distribution piping
2.
Concrete lift station & manhole assemblies for the sanitary sewer system, including
pump & controls.
3.
Storm Sewer collection piping and catch basins
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section.
2.
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for cast-in-place concrete structures.
3.
Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for Manhole covers, gratings & frames.
4.
Division 15 Section "Basic Plumbing Materials" for building drains and general
piping.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Sewerage Piping: System of sewer pipes, fittings, and appurtenances for forced main and
gravity flow of sanitary sewage.
B.
Storm Water: System of water pipes, fittings, and appurtenances for gravity flow of storm
water sewage.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Gravity flow, Non-pressure-Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system test pressure.
For forced main, pressure rated Pipe tested to 150% required value.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Manufacturer who has fabricated precast concrete and PVC lined manhole assemblies similar in material, design, and extent to
that indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance. Installer
of the pre-cast manhole units shall be similarly experienced.
Section 02530 - Sewer & Drain Systems
Page | 1 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
C.
1.5
1.6
Guarantee: Obtain all pre-cast manhole sections from a single source with resources to
provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without
delaying the Work. Manholes are to have a 5-year guarantee against latent defects in the
PVC lining workmanship or materials.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit each item in this Article under the provisions of Section 01 301.
B.
Shop drawings for all concrete lift-station, manholes, catch basins and other structures.
Indicate gratings, frames and covers.
C.
Coordinated shop drawings for lift-station, manholes, and all other concrete structures,
drawn accurately to scale and coordinating connections to piping elements and foundations.
Show the following:
1.
Lift-station, manhole/catch basin/inspection chamber size, elements, invert level, etc.
2.
Method of connecting sewage distribution piping to manholes and other structures.
3.
Lift-station/manhole covers, ladders and special fittings at junctures of piping system.
D.
Samples for selection in the form of manufacturer's actual lining materials.
E.
Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency that are based on its testing
of current products for compliance of ASTM and BS performance requirements and
material during under extended exposure to sewage gases and other dissolved chemicals
that may occur in sanitary sewer systems. Include reports and calculations for design mixes
for each class of cast-in-place concrete.
F.
Coordination drawings showing lift-station, manholes and other structures, pipe sizes,
locations, and elevations. Include details of underground structures and connections. Show
other piping in same trench and clearances from sewerage system piping. Indicate interface
and spatial relationship between piping and proximate structures.
G.
Inspection and test reports specified in the "Field Quality Control" Article.
H.
Maintenance Data for Pumps:

1.
Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of manufactured piping
specialty and lift-station pump.
2.
Include this information, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual in
accordance with requirements of Sections 15010 and 01 301.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Environmental Agency Compliance: Comply with regulations pertaining to sanitary and

storm sewer systems.
Page | 2 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.7
1.8
1.9
B.
Utility Compliance: Comply with regulations pertaining to sanitary sewerage systems.

Include standards of water and other utilities where appropriate.
C.
Product Options: Drawings indicate general sizes, profiles, connections, and dimensional
requirements of all system components. Although drawings are based on specific
manufacturer types indicated, other manufacturers' products with equal performance
characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Substitutions."

A.
Do not store plastic pipe, fittings or structures in direct sunlight.
B.
Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
C.
Handle pre-cast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's rigging
instructions.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Site Information: Perform site survey and research utility records, and verify existing utility
locations.
B.
Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned.
C.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the
Government or others except when permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide acceptable temporary utility services.
1.
Notify Project Director not less than 48 hours in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
2.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without receiving Project Director's written
permission.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A.
Coordinate sanitary sewerage system connections to existing on-site sanitary sewer.
B.
Coordinate with interior building drainage systems.
A.
Coordination: Coordinate each manhole location, support installation, and sequencing with
other work to avoid interference with other trades, and ensure proper installation, operation,
adjustment, cleaning, and setting of manhole assemblies and accessory items.
B.
Inserts and Anchorage: Furnish accessory manufacturers standard inserts and anchoring
devices that must be set in concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate delivery with other
work to avoid delay.
Page | 3 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPES AND FITTINGS

A.
Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, service and extra-heavy
classes, gray cast iron, for gasketed joints.
1.
B.
C.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3034. SDR 35, for solventcemented or gasketed joints, pressure rated Schedule 80 for force main.
1.
Polymer: ASTM F 656,
2.
Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
3.
Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 679, T-1 wall thickness, bell
and spigot for gasketed joints, for gravity sanitary and storm lines.
1.
D.
Pre-cast Concrete Storm Water Pipe: Bell & Spigot type, complying with ASTM C-497.
1.
2.2
Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber, compression type, thickness to match class of pipe.
SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS

A.
B.
Sleeve-Type Pipe Couplings: Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and band assembly fabricated to
match outside diameters of pipes to be joined, for non-pressure joints.
1.
Sleeves for Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber.
2.
Sleeves for Cast-iron Soil Pipe: ASTM C 564, rubber.
3.
Sleeves for Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal.
4.
Sleeves for Dissimilar Pipes: Compatible with pipe materials being joined.
5.
Bands: Stainless steel, at least one at each pipe insert.
Gasket-Type Pipe Couplings: Rubber or elastomeric compression gasket, made to match

outside diameter of smaller pipe and inside diameter or hub of adjoining larger pipe, for
non-pressure joints.
1.
Gaskets for Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber.
2.
Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM C 564, rubber.
Page | 4 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.3
3.
Gaskets for Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal.
4.
Gaskets for Dissimilar Pipes: Compatible with pipe materials being joined.
LIFT-STATION & MANHOLES

A.
B.
Pre-cast Concrete Manholes, Inspection Chambers, Catch Pits: ASTM C 858, pre-cast,
reinforced concrete, designed according to ASTM C 857 for structural loading. Include
depth, shape, and dimensions indicated, with provision for rubber gasket joints.
1.
Ballast Increase thickness of one or more pre-cast concrete sections or add concrete
to structure as required to prevent floatation.
2.
Shape: Round or square as indicated in the drawings to a typical maximum depth of

1500mm.
3.
Grade Rings: Include 2 or 3 reinforced-concrete rings or blocks, of 152- to 229-mm

total thickness, that match a 610-mm frame and cover or grating.
4.
Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each
pipe connecting to base section.
Block Manholes: Block and mortar, of depth indicated.

1.
Base, Channel, and Bench: Concrete.

a.
2.
Wall: ASTM C 32, Grade MS, manhole block; 200-mm minimum thickness and an
inside diameter of 1220 mm with tapered top for a 610-mm frame and cover. Include
305-mm minimum wall thickness for section of manhole deeper than 2400 mm.
a.
C.
Ballast: Increase thickness of or add concrete to base, as required to prevent

floatation.
Option: ASTM C 139, concrete masonry units may be used instead of block.
3.
Mortar and Parging: ASTM C 270, Type S, using ASTM C 150, Type 11, Portland
cement, 13-mm minimum thickness on exterior surface.
4.
Steps: Fiberglass, individual steps or ladder. Include a width that allows a worker to
place both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off the step.
Cast steps or anchor ladder into sidewalls at 300- to 400-mm intervals. Omit steps
for manholes less than 1500 mm deep.
Cast-in-Place Concrete Lift-station and Manholes: Construct of reinforced-concrete bottom,

walls, and top, designed according to ASTM C 857 for loading. Include depth, shape,
dimensions, and appurtenances indicated.
1.
Ballast: Increase thickness of concrete, as required to prevent floatation.
Page | 5 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
D.
2.5
2.
Steps: Fiberglass, individual steps or ladder. Include a width that allows a worker to
place both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off the step.
Cast steps or anchor ladder into sidewalls at 300- 400-mm intervals.
3.
Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each
pipe connecting to base section.
Manhole Frames and Covers: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, heavy-duty ductile iron.
Include 610-mm inside diameter by 178- to 229-mm riser with 100-mm minimum width
flange, and 660-mm cover. Include indented top design with lettering, equivalent to the
following, cast into cover:
I.
Sanitary Sewerage Piping Systems: SANITARY SEWER.
2.
Piping Systems Containing Storm Water: STORM SEWER.
SUMP PUMPS FOR LIFT STATION

A.
A complete assembly including duplex submersible motor driven pumps, complete with all
necessary auxiliary components, controls, wiring, and interconnecting wiring and piping
within a covered basin. Pumps and motors shall be submersible with rails to allow pulling
the pump and motor for service by lifting a chain or cable to which the pump and motor are
connected. Arrange to automatically filter solids from sewage entering the pump and
discharge solids and sewage during pump operations.
B.
Pumps shall be centrifugal, fully submersible assemblies, non-clogging grinder type,

capable of mechanically disintegrating sewerage solids. Units shall be able to pass solids
up to 2" (50mm ).
C.
Casing shall be cast iron with open type impellors keyed to a stainless steel shaft coupled to
the ball bearings, mechanically sealed chamber, which shall form part of the motor shaft.
D.
The motor may be air or oil filled, NEMA 6 design with neoprene jacketed armored
cable.
E.
Furnish each motor with moisture sensor within the motor shell for indication of any
moisture entry into motor windings.
F.
Imbed in each motor a thermal overload to read temperature with the submersible cable for
connection to the control panel.
G.
Control shall be by means of four liquid level submersible mercury float switches, or other
approved method, for alternate pump operation, to pump standby and alarm systems. Mount
switches on a wall bracket adjustable clamp. Provide NEMA IV junction box with
compression fittings for pump power and level switches.
Page | 6 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.6
H.
The contractor shall furnish and install, as shown on the drawings and described in these
specifications, submersible sewage sump pump systems, with all pipes, gate valves and
check valves. Pump capacities and characteristics are indicated on drawings.
I.
Each pump shall have a gray iron volute, and a semi-open type impeller specifically
designed to pump sewage and wastewater.
J.
Each motor shall be designed for continuous duty and have tandem mechanical shaft seals
and built-in thermal overload protection. As mentioned above.
K.
The inner seal chamber shall have two moisture sensing probes. As mentioned above.
L.
A ground level sump cover and curb frame shall be furnished complete with manhole plate
and vent flange.
M.
Motor controls shall consist of a control panel in a weatherproof enclosure.

1.
Panel will contain circuit breakers or fusible disconnects, magnetic starters with
ambient compensated overload relays and quick-trip heaters, electric alternator, handoff-auto selector switches, moisture sensing relay, panel alarm light, alarm signal to
externally mounted flashing red light.
2.
Each control panel shall be pre-wired and factory tested.
3.
Level sensors shall be of the bulb type designed for wet well sump application.
4.
A sun shield will be installed above each control panel.
CONCRETE
A.
B.
General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and the following:
1.
Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.
2.
Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
3.
Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
4.
Water: Potable.
Structures: Portland-cement design mix, 4000 psi (35 MPa) minimum, unless otherwise
specified on the drawings, with 0.45 maximum water-cement ratio.
1.
Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.
1.
Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 (ASTM A 615M, Grade 400) deformed
steel.
Page | 7 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.
C.
D.
2.7
2.8
All reinforcement associated with cast-in-situ concrete structures for sewage and
waste handling, including manholes, collection boxes, and underground lift station
chambers shall have an epoxy protective coating in compliance with ASTM A 775/A
775M - 96.
Structure Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement
design mix, 30 MPa minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cement ratio.
1.
Include channels and benches in manholes.
2.
Include channels and benches in sanitary sewerage manholes.
3.
Include channels and benches in sanitary sewerage and combined sanitary sewerage
and storm drainage manholes.
a.
Manhole Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected

piping, with height of the vertical sides to 3/4 of the pipe diameter. Form
curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope.
1)
Invert Slope: 30 mm through manhole.
2)
Invert Slope: 1:40 through manhole.
3)
Invert Slope: None.
b.
Manhole Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.

1)
Slope: 1:12.
Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland-cement design mix, 20.7 MPa minimum, with 0.45
maximum water-cement ratio.
1.
Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.
2.
Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 (ASTM A 615M, Grade 400),

deformed steel.
PROTECTIVE COATINGS
A.
General: Include factory- or field-applied protective coatings to structures & appurtenances

according to the Following:
B.
Coating: 1-or 2-part, coal-tar epoxy, 0.381-mm minimum thickness, except where
otherwise indicated.
1.
Manholes, Lift Station chambers & Catch Basins: On all interior surfaces.
2.
Block Manholes: Over parging on exterior surface and on interior surface.
3.
Manhole Frames and Covers: On surfaces that will be exposed to sewer gases.
CLEANOUTS
Page | 8 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
A.
B.
2.9
1.
Light Duty: In earth or grass, foot-traffic areas.
2.
Medium Duty: In paved, foot-traffic areas.
3.
Heavy Duty: In vehicle-traffic service areas.
4.
Extra Heavy Duty: In roads.
Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, service class, cast-iron soil pipe and
fittings.
DRYWELLS
A.
2.10
Description: ASME Al 12.36.2M, round, cast-iron housing with clamping device and
round, secured, scoriated, cast-iron cover. Include cast-iron ferrule with inside calk or
spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug. Use units with total
loading classifications according to the following applications:
Description: ASTM C 858, pre-cast, reinforced, perforated concrete rings. Include the
following:
1.
Floor Cast-in-place concrete.
2.
Cover: lift-off-type concrete cover with cast-in lift rings.
3.
Wall Thickness: 100mm minimum.
LEACHING FIELD & UNDERDRAINS

A.
Description: Construct leaching pits and under-drains as indicated in the drawings and with
the following special materials.
B.
Geo-textile: Provide synthetic geo-textile filter fabrics with the following properties.
C.
1.
Construction: Needled Polypropylene, pre-compressed and thermic bonded one side.
2.
Weight: 140-160 g/M2 per DIN 53854 or equal.
3.
Thickness: 0.95mm per DIN 53855
4.
Strength: 7-8 kN/M, with 50/60% elongation at rupture
5.
Water permeability of 90l/sec/M2 at 100mm water column, 2kPa mechanical load
Perforated Pipe: un-plasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (uPVC), Class 4 Pipe with solvent
welded joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Page | 9 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.1
3.2
GENERAL
A.
Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
B.
Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and as indicated.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.3
3.4
Materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." Arrange
for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of
underground structures.
1.
Use warning tapes or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping.
2.
Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground
structures.
SEWERAGE PIPING APPLICATIONS

A.
General: Include watertight joints.
B.
Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed
below. Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to the following applications.
C.
Pipe Sizes 100 to 200mm : Hub-and spigot, extra-heavy class, uPVC soil pipe and
fittings; compression-type gaskets; and gasketed joints for gravity lines.
D.
Pipe Sizes 100 to 150 mm: Hub-and-spigot, service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings;
compression-type gaskets; and gasketed joints.
E.
Pipe Sizes 63 to 150 mm: ASTM D 3034, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sewer pipe and
fittings; solvent-cemented joints; or with gaskets and gasketed joints for pressure lines.
SPECIAL PIPE COUPLING AND FITTING APPLICATIONS

A.
Special Pipe Couplings: Use where indicated and where required to join piping and no
other appropriate method is specified. Do not use instead of special joining methods.
I.
Use the following pipe couplings for non-pressure applications:

a.
b.
c.
d.
Straight-pattern, sleeve type to join piping, of same size, with small difference
in outside diameters.
Increaser/reducer-pattern, sleeve type to join piping of different sizes.
Gasket type to join piping of different sizes where annular space between
smaller pipe's outside diameter and larger pipe's inside diameter permits
installation.
Internal expansion type to join piping with same inside diameter.
Page | 10 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.5
3.6
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans and details) indicate the general
location and arrangement of underground sewerage and drainage systems piping. Location
and arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. Install
piping as indicated, to extent practical.
B.
Install piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated
with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install
gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's recommendations for use
of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line
and pull past each joint as it is completed.
C.
Use manholes for changes in direction, except where fittings are indicated. Use fittings for
branch connections, except where direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D.
Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings, where different sizes or materials of
pipes and fittings are connected. Reduction of the size of piping in the direction of flow is
prohibited.
E.
Install gravity-flow-systems piping at constant slope between points and elevations

indicated. Install straight piping runs at constant slope, not less than that specified, where
slope is not indicated.
F.
Extend sewerage piping and connect to building's sanitary drains, of sizes and in locations
indicated. Terminate piping as indicated.
G.
Install sewerage piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1:50 and
1000-mm minimum cover, except where otherwise indicated.
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION

A.
General: Join and install pipe-and fittings according to the following.
B.
Hub-and-Spigot Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: With rubber compression gaskets
according to CISPI 'Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,' Volume 1. Use gaskets that
match class of pipe and fittings.
1.
C.
Install polyethylene film encasement over cast iron soil pipe and fittings according to
ASTM A674 or AWWAC105.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings: As follows:

1.
Join solvent-cement-joint pipe and fittings with solvent cement according to ASTM
D 2855 and ASTM F 402.
2.
Join pipe and gasketed fittings with elastomeric seals according to ASTM D 2321.
Page | 11 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
D.
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.
Join profile sewer pipe and ribbed drain pipe and gasketed fittings with elastomeric
seals according to ASTM D 2321 and manufacturers written instruction.
4.
Install-according to ASTM D 2321 -
Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this
application. Use couplings that are compatible with and fit both systems' materials and
dimensions.
MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install manholes complete with accessories, as indicated.
B.
Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets & outlet, where indicated.
C.
Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface where manholes occur in
pavements. Set tops 76 mm above finished surface elsewhere, except where otherwise
indicated.
D.
Place precast concrete manhole sections as indicated, & install according to ASTM C 891.
1
Provide rubber joint gasket complying with ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), at
joints of sections.
2.
Apply bituminous mastic coating at joints of sections.
E.
Construct block manholes as indicated.
F.
Construct cast-in-place lift-station and manholes as indicated.
FACTORY TEST
A.
Before shipment, the manufacturer shall test components hydrostatically at 150 percent of
rated design pressure for ability to withstand maximum design pressures and for tightness.
B.
Conduct factory performance test on actual pumps to be furnished. Furnish sufficient lead
notice to the Project Director to permit witnessing of test. Furnish certificate of test.
INSTALLATION
A.
Construct apparatus of materials and pressure ratings suitable for the conditions
encountered during continuous operation.
B.
Where corrosion can occur, appropriate corrosion-resistant materials and assembly

methods shall be used including isolation of dissimilar metals against galvanic interaction.
C.
Balance impellers and other moving components statically and dynamically.
D.
Completely align and level equipment as per manufacturer's recommendations.
Page | 12 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.10
E.
Grout base plates completely to provide a rigid non-deflecting support.
F.
Provide connections for vent, drain, suction and discharge pressure gauges.
G.
Provide OSHA approved sheet metal guards over couplings.
PUMP IDENTIFICATION
A.
Provide nameplates; attach to pump units showing the following information:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
3.11
3.12
Maker's name, date of manufacture, size and type.

Rated capacity, design and operating pressure ratings.
Rated horsepower, full load amperes.
Voltage, number of phases, frequency.
Temperature rise or class of insulation.
Provide arrow indicating direction of rotation of pump and where pumps are included in
assembly.
FIELD TESTS
A.
Perform field tests to demonstrate the ability of the equipment to meet contract
requirements.
B.
Should any part of the apparatus or system fail to meet contract requirements, adjust, repair
or replace any defective or inoperative parts and, on completion, again conduct the
complete performance tests.
C.
Refer to appropriate sections for additional required test data. Include results of factory and
field tests in the Instruction Manual as described in the appropriate sections.
D.
The Contractor will test, adjust, and balance the systems. The work included in this section
consists of furnishing labor, instruments, and tools required in testing, adjusting and
balancing sewage lift station systems, as described in these specifications shown on
accompanying drawings. Services shall include checking equipment performance, taking
the specified measurements and recording and reporting the results.
DRYWELL INSTALLATION
A.
Excavate hole to a diameter of at least 6 inches (150 mm) greater than outside of drywell.
Do not extend excavation into ground water table.
B.
Install precast, concrete-ring drywells according to the following:

1.
Assemble rings to depth indicated.
2.
Extend rings to a height where top of cover will be approximately 8 inches (200 mm)
below finished grade.
Page | 13 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.
3.13
3.14
CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A.
Install cleanouts and user extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Use cast-iron
soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for user
extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.
B.
Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in a cast-in-place concrete block, 450 by 450 by
300 mm deep. Set with tops 25 mm above surrounding earth grade.
C.
Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete paving with tops flush with surface of paving.
TAP CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so finished work conforms
as nearly as practical to requirements specified for new work.
B.
Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove
section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire Wye
fitting plus 150-mm overlap, with not less than 150 mm of 20.7-MPa, 28-day, compressivestrength concrete.
C.
Make branch connections from side into existing piping, sizes 100 to 500 mm by removing
a section of existing pipe and installing a wye fitting into existing piping. Encase entire
wye with not less than 150 mm of 20.7-MPa, 28-day, compressive-strength concrete.
D.
Make branch connections from side into existing piping, sizes 600 mm or larger or to
underground structures by cutting an opening into existing unit large enough to allow 76
mm of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe
passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall,
unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe or structure wall, encase entering
connection in 150 mm of concrete for a minimum length of 300 mm to provide additional
support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground.
E.
3.15
Install cover over top of rings.
1.
Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 30 MPa,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Use epoxy bonding compound as an interface between new and existing concrete and
piping materials.
Protect existing piping and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while
making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.
CLOSING ABANDONED SEWERAGE SYSTEMS

A.
Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping that is indicated to
remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth
Page | 14 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either of
the following procedures:
B.
3.16
1.
Close open ends of piping with at least 200-mm thick block masonry bulkheads.
2.
Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable
methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.
Abandoned Structures: Excavate around structure as required and use either following
procedure:
1.
Remove structure and close open ends of remaining piping.
2.
Remove top of structure down to at least 1000 mm below final grade. Fill to within
300 mm of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with
concrete.
3.
Backfill to grade according to Division 2 Section "Earthwork."

A.
B.
C.
Clear dirt and superfluous material from interior of piping and structures as the work
progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as work is completed.
1.
In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning.
2.
Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and whenever work stops.
3.
Flush piping between manholes and other structures, if required by Project Director,
to remove collected debris.
Inspect interior of all piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has
occurred. Inspect after approximately 600 mm of backfill is in place, and again at
completion of the Project
1.
Submit separate reports for each system inspection.
2.
Defects requiring correction include the following:

a.
Alignment Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visual between
structures.
b.
Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of a ball or
cylinder of a size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
c.
Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
Inspect each installed manhole for damages, particularly to protective lining. Repair any
damaged units, surfaces or components to the satisfaction of the Project Director.
Page | 15 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.17
D.
Test lift-station and manholes to demonstrate proper functioning upon completion of

installation and flow of sewage after pipe work is installed. Replace malfunctioning items
and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until all manholes function properly.
E.
Installed lift-station and manholes shall be filled and water-tested for a period of not less
than 72 hours, after which the complete unit is to be thoroughly examined for leaks.
F.
Isolated leaks may be patched where permitted by the Project Director, but significant leaks
resulting from basic structural flaws in elements will require replacement of the unit.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A.
Clean exposed manhole surfaces and PVC lining, piping, fittings, and accessories with
manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.
B.
Review data in O&M Manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section 'Completion & Closeout.'
Page | 16 of 16
SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
GENERAL
REFERENCES
SUBMITTALS
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
03200-2/4
03200-2/4
03200-3/4
03200-3/4
PART 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCTS
REINFORCING STEEL
WELDED WIRE FABRIC
WIRE TIES
SUPPORTS
03200-3/4
03200-3/4
03200-3/4
03200-3/4
03200-3/4
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
REINFORCEMENT
3.1.1 PLACEMENT
3.1.2 SPLICING
WELDED WIRE FABRIC
03200-3/4
03200-3/4
03200-3/4
03200-4/4
03200-4/4
3.2
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement
Page | 1 of 4
SECTION 03200
PART 1
1.1
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
SAUDI ARABIAN STANDARDS ORGANIZATION (SASO)
SASO 2
SASO 107
SASO 223
SASO 224
SASO 690
Steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete.

Tensile testing of steel.
Methods of test for steel fabric for concrete reinforcement
Steel fabric for reinforcement of concrete
Methods of test for steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete
ACI INTERNATIONAL (ACI)
ACI 318/318R (1995) Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 53
(1995) Pipe, Steel, Black and

Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless
(1995) Steel Wire, Plain, for
Concrete Reinforcement
(1990) Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar
Mats for Concrete Reinforcement
(1994) Steel Welded Wire Fabric,
Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
(1994a) Steel Welded Wire Fabric,
Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement
(1995b) Deformed and Plain
Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
(1995b) Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A 82
ASTM A 184
ASTM A 185
ASTM A 497
ASTM A 615
ASTM A 706
CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE (CRSI)

CRSI MSP-1
1.2
(1990) Manual of Standard Practice
SUBMITTALS
Contracting Officer approval is required for submittals with a "GA" designation; submittals
having an "FIO" designation are for information only. The following shall be submitted in
accordance with Section 01300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-04 Drawings
Page | 2 of 4
Concrete Reinforcement System; GA.

Detail drawings showing reinforcing steel sizes, grades, splicing and bending details.
SD-13 Certificates
Reinforcing Steel; FIO.
Certified copies of mill reports attesting that the reinforcing steel furnished meets the
requirements specified, prior to the installation of reinforcing steel.
1.3

Reinforcement and accessories shall be stored off the ground on platforms, skids, or other
supports.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
REINFORCING STEEL
Reinforcing steel shall be deformed bars conforming to ASTM A 615 or ASTM A 706, grades
and sizes as indicated. Cold drawn wire used for spiral reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A
82.
2.2
WELDED WIRE FABRIC

Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A 185 or ASTM A 497.
2.3
WIRE TIES
Wire ties shall be 16 gauge (1.58 mm diameter) or heavier black annealed steel wire.
2.4
SUPPORTS
Bar supports for formed surfaces shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with CRSI
MSP-1 and shall be steel or precast concrete blocks. Precast concrete blocks shall have wire ties
and shall be not less than 100 by 100 mm when supporting reinforcement on ground. Precast
concrete block shall have compressive strength equal to that of the surrounding concrete. Where
concrete formed surfaces will be exposed to weather or where surfaces are to be painted, steel
supports within 13 mm of concrete surface shall be galvanized, plastic protected or of stainless
steel. Concrete supports used in concrete exposed to view shall have the same color and texture
as the finish surface. For slabs on grade, supports shall be precast concrete blocks, plastic coated
steel fabricated with bearing plates, or specifically designed wire-fabric supports fabricated of
plastic.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
REINFORCEMENT
Reinforcement shall be fabricated to shapes and dimensions shown and shall conform to the
requirements of ACI 318/318R. Reinforcement shall be cold bent unless otherwise authorized.
Page | 3 of 4
Bending may be accomplished in the field or at the mill. Bars shall not be bent after embedment
in concrete. Safety caps shall be placed on all exposed ends of vertical concrete reinforcement
bars that pose a danger to life safety. Wire tie ends shall face away or shall be 10mm from the
forms.
3.1.1 Placement
Reinforcement shall be free from loose rust and scale, dirt, oil, or other deleterious coating that
could reduce bond with the concrete. Reinforcement shall be placed in accordance with ACI
318/318R at locations shown plus or minus one bar diameter. Reinforcement shall not be
continuous through expansion joints and shall be as indicated through construction or contraction
joints. Concrete coverage shall be as indicated or as required by ACI 318/318R. If bars are moved
more than one bar diameter to avoid interference with other reinforcement, conduits or embedded
items, the resulting arrangement of bars, including additional bars required to meet structural
requirements, shall be approved before concrete is placed.
3.1.2 Splicing
Splices of reinforcement shall conform to ACI 318/318R and shall be made only as required or
indicated. Splicing shall be by lapping unless otherwise indicated. Lapped bars shall be placed in
contact and securely tied or spaced transversely apart to permit the embedment of the entire
surface of each bar in concrete. Lapped bars shall not be spaced farther apart than one-fifth the
required length of lap or 150 mm.
3.2 WELDED-WIRE FABRIC
Welded-wire fabric shall be placed in slabs as indicated. Fabric placed in slabs on grade shall be
continuous between expansion, construction, and contraction joints. Fabric placement at joints
shall be as indicated. Lap splices shall be made in such a way that the overlapped area equals the
distance between the outermost crosswires plus 50 mm. Laps shall be staggered to avoid
continuous laps in either direction. Fabric shall be wired or clipped together at laps at intervals
not to exceed 1.2 m. Fabric shall be positioned by the use of supports.
Page | 4 of 4
SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-SITU CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL 03300-3/23
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
PART 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
PART 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
REFERENCES
SUBMITTALS
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.3.1
STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS
1.3.2
AIR ENTRAINMENT
1.3.3
SPECIAL PROPERTIES
1.3.4
SLUMP
PROPORTIONS OF MIX
1.4.1
MIXTURE PROPORTIONING, NORMAL
WEIGHT CONCRETE
1.4.2
AVERAGE STRENGTH
SAMPLE CONCRETE PANEL
STORAGE OF MATERIALS
PRODUCTS
ADMIXTURES
2.1.1
ACCELERATING ADMIXTURE
2.1.2
AIR-ENTRAINING ADMIXTURE
2.1.3
FLOWING CONCRETE ADMIXTURE
2.1.4
WATER-REDUCING OR RETARDING
ADMIXTURE
CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS
2.2.1
CEMENT
AGGREGATES
2.3.1
NORMAL WEIGHT AGGREGATE
CURING MATERIALS
2.4.1
BURLAP
2.4.2
IMPERVIOUS SHEET
2.4.3
MEMBRANE FORMING COMPOUNDS
EMBEDDED ITEMS
NONSHRINK GROUT
NONSLIP SURFACING MATERIAL
FLOOR HARDENER
WATER
EXECUTION
PREPARATION OF SURFACES
3.1.1 FOUNDATIONS
3.1.2 PREPARATION OF PREVIOUSLY
PLACED CONCRETE
INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
BATCHING, MIXING AND
TRANSPORTING CONCRETE
3.3.1 ADMIXTURES
3.3.2 CONTROL OF MIXING WATER
Section 03300 Cast-In-Situ Concrete
03300-3/18
03300-5/18
03300-5/18
03300-5/18
03300-6/18
03300-6/18
03300-6/18
03300-6/18
03300-6/18
03300-7/18
03300-7/18
03300-8/18
03300-8/18
03300-8/18
03300-8/18
03300-8/18
03300-8/18
03300-8/18
03300-8/18
03300-8/18
03300-8/18
03300-9/18
03300-9/18
03300-9/18
03300-9/18
03300-9/18
03300-9/18
03300-9/18
03300-9/18
03300-9/18
03300-9/18
03300-10/18
03300-10/18
03300-10/18
03300-10/18
03300-10/18
03300-10/18
03300-10/18
03300-10/18
03300-11/18
Page | 1 of 19
3.4
SAMPLING AND TESTING

3.4.1 AGGREGATES
3.4.2 SAMPLING CONCRETE
3.4.3 EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE
OF CONCRETE
3.4.4 INVESTIGATION OF LOW-STRENGTH
TEST RESULTS
3.5
CONVEYING CONCRETE
3.5.1 CHUTES
3.5.2 BUCKETS
3.5.3 BELT CONVEYORS
3.5.4 PUMPS
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
3.6.1 PLACING OPERATION
3.6.2 CONSOLIDATION
3.6.3 WARM WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
3.7 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
3.8 FINISHING CONCRETE
3.8.1 FORMED SURFACES
3.8.2 UNFORMED SURFACES
ROUGH-SLAB FINISH
3.8.2.1 FLOAT FINISH
3.8.2.2 TROWEL FINISH
3.8.2.3 BROOM FINISH
3.8.2.4 FLOOR HARDENER
3.8.3 BITUMINOUS COATING
3.9
CURING AND PROTECTION
3.9.1 GENERAL
3.9.2 MOIST CURING
3.9.3 MEMBRANE CURING
3.10 SETTING BASE PLATES
3.10.1 NONSHRINK GROUT
03300-11/18
03300-11/18
03300-11/18
03300-12/18
03300-12/18
03300-12/18
03300-12/18
03300-13/18
03300-13/18
03300-13/18
03300-13/18
03300-13/18
03300-14/18
03300-14/18
03300-14/18
03300-15/18
03300-15/18
03300-16/18
03300-16/18
03300-16/18
03300-16/18
03300-16/18
03300-16/18
03300-16/18
03300-17/18
03300-17/18
03300-17/18
03300-17/18
03300-17/18
03300-18/18
Page | 2 of 19
SECTION 03300 - CAST IN-SITU CONCRETE
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
SASO 142
Physical and Mechanical Testing Methods of Portland Cement
SASO 143
Portland Cement, Ordinary and Rapid - Hardening
SASO 226
Methods for Sampling of Concrete Aggregates
SASO 227
Methods of Testing of "Test Sieves"
SASO 230
Test Sieving
SASO 226
Methods for sampling of concrete aggregates
SASO 249
Methods of test for concrete aggregate Part 1: Sieve Analysis
SASO 250
Methods of test for concrete aggregate Part 2:

impurities in natural sand.
SASO 251
Methods of test for concrete aggregate Part 3: Determination of impact strength

for coarse aggregate.
SASO 278
Methods of test for concrete aggregate Part 4: Determination of percentage of

clay, silt and fines in natural aggregates.
SASO 279
Methods of test for concrete aggregate Part 5: Determination of coarse aggregate

resistance to abrasion by Los Angeles machine.
SASO 378
Aggregates from natural sources for concrete.
SASO 379
Consistency test for fresh concrete Part 1 : Slump test.
SASO 391
Methods of sampling fresh concrete.
SASO 1068
Ready-mixed Concrete
SASO 805
Mineral aggregates and sands Determination of soundness
SASO 806
Mineral aggregates and sands Determination of chlorides and sulphate.
SASO 872
Testing concrete: Compacting factor test.
SASO 873
Testing concrete: Method for determining of vebe time.
SASO 874
Testing concrete:
concrete.
SASO 875
Testing concrete: Methods for determination of air content of fresh concrete.
SASO 701
Potable Water Non Bottled
Determination of organic
Method for determination of density of compacted fresh
Page | 3 of 19
SASO 1052
Preparation of concrete specimens for compressive strength test.
SASO 1053
Determination of concrete specimens for compressive strength test.
SASO 570
Sulphate Resistant Portland Cement

ACI INTERNATIONAL (ACI)
ACI 117/237R
ACI 211.1
ACI 301
ACI 305R
ACI 318/318R
(1990; Errata) Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and

Materials
(1991) Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,
Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete
(1989) Structural Concrete for Buildings
(1991) Hot Weather Concreting
(1995) Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete

ASTM C 31
ASTM C 33
ASTM C 39
ASTM C 42
(1991) Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field

(1992a) Concrete Aggregates
(1986) Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
(1990) Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams
of Concrete
(1994) Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam With
Third-Point Loading)
(1994) Ready-Mixed Concrete
(1993) Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars
(Using 2-in. or 50-mm Cube Specimens)
(1990a) Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
(1994) Portland Cement
(1992) Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
(1990) Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
(1993) Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method
(1990a) Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Laboratory
(1991b) Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure
Method
(1994) Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
(1993) Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete
(1992) Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
(1983; R 1991) Pulse Velocity Through Concrete
(1990) Penetration Resistance of Hardened Concrete
(1985) Rebound Number of Hardened Concrete
(1992) Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing
Concrete
(1991a) Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)
ASTM C 78
ASTM C 94
ASTM C 109
ASTM C 143
ASTM C 150
ASTM C 171
ASTM C 172
ASTM C 173
ASTM C 192
ASTM C 231
ASTM C 260
ASTM C 309
ASTM C 494
ASTM C 597
ASTM C 803
ASTM C 805
ASTM C 1017
ASTM C 1107
FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FS)

FS CCC-C-467
(Rev C) Cloth, Burlap, Jute (or Kenaf)
Page | 4 of 19
NATIONAL READY-MIXED CONCRETE ASSOCIATION (NRMCA)

NRMCA-01
NRMCA CPMB 100
NRMCA QC 3
(1992) Truck Mixer Agitator and Front Discharge Concrete

Carrier Standards of the Truck Mixer Manufacturers Bureau
(1990) Concrete Plant Standards
(1984) Quality Control Manual: Section 3, Plant Certifications
Checklist: Certification of Ready-Mixed Concrete Production
Facilities
SAUDI ARABIAN STANDARDS ORGANIZATION (SSA)

SSA 142
SSA 143
1.2
Physical and mechanical methods of testing Portland concrete.

Portland cement, ordinary and rapid-hardening.
SUBMITTALS
SD-08 Statements
Proportions of Mix; GA.
The results of trial mix along with a statement giving the maximum nominal coarse aggregate
size and the proportions of all ingredients that will be used in the manufacture of each strength of
concrete, at least 14 days prior to commencing concrete placing operations. Aggregate weights
shall be based on the saturated surface dry condition. The statement shall be accompanied by test
results from an independent commercial testing laboratory, attesting that the proportions selected
will produce concrete of the qualities indicated. No substitutions shall be made in the materials
used in the work without additional tests to show that the quality of the concrete is satisfactory.
SD-09 Reports
Sampling and Testing; FIO.
Certified copies of laboratory test reports, including all test data, for aggregate, admixtures, and
curing compound. These tests shall be made by an approved commercial laboratory or by a
laboratory maintained by the manufacturers of the materials.
SD-13 Certificates
Cementitious Materials; FIO.
Manufacturer's certification of compliance, accompanied by mill test reports attesting that the
materials meet the requirements of the specification under which it is furnished, for cement and
pozzolan. No cement or pozzolan shall be used until notice of acceptance has been given.
Cement and pozzolan may be subjected to check testing by the Contracting Officer from samples
obtained at the mill, at transfer points, or at the project site.
Page | 5 of 19
1.3
Tolerances for concrete construction and materials shall be in accordance with ACI 117/237R.
1.3.1
Strength Requirements
Structural concrete for all work shall have a 28-day compressive strength as shown. Concrete
made with high-early strength cement shall have a 7-day strength equal to the specified 28-day
strength for concrete made with Type I or II portland cement.
1.3.2
Air Entrainment
Concrete structure shall contain from 3 to 5 percent total air.
1.3.3
Special Properties
Concrete may contain other admixtures, such as water reducers, superplasticizers, or set retarding
agents to provide special properties to the concrete, if approved.
1.3.4 Slump
Slump shall be within the following limits:
Structural Element
Slump in millimeters
Minimum
Maximum
Walls, columns and beams
50
100
Foundation walls, substructure

walls, footings, pavement, and slabs
25
75
Any structural concrete approved

for placement by pumping
None
150
* Where use of superplasticizers is approved to produce flowing concrete these slump

requirements do not apply.
Page | 6 of 19
1.4 PROPORTIONS OF MIX

1.4.1 Mixture Proportioning, Normal Weight Concrete
Trial batches shall contain materials proposed to be used in the project. Trial mixtures having
proportions, consistencies and air content suitable for the work shall be made based on
methodology described in ACI 211.1, using at least three different water-cement ratios. Trial
mixes shall be proportioned to produce concrete strengths specified. Trial mixtures shall be
designed for maximum permitted slump and air content. The temperature of concrete in each trial
batch shall be reported. For each water-cement ratio at least three test cylinders or beams for
each test age shall be made and cured in accordance with ASTM C 192. They shall be tested at 7
and 28 days in accordance with ASTM C 39 or ASTM C 78. From these test results a curve shall
be plotted showing the relationship between water-cement ratio and strength. For each strength
of concrete the maximum allowable water-cement ratio shall be that shown by these curves to
produce an average strength as specified in paragraph AVERAGE STRENGTH.
1.4.2 Average Strength
In meeting the strength requirements specified, the selected mixture proportion shall produce an
average compressive strength exceeding the specified strength by the amount indicated below.
Where a concrete production facility has test records, a standard deviation shall be established.
Test records from which a standard deviation is calculated shall represent materials, quality
control procedures, and conditions similar to those expected; shall represent concrete produced to
meet a specified strength or strengths within 7 MPa of that specified for proposed work; and
shall consist of at least 30 consecutive tests. A strength test shall be the average of the strengths
of two cylinders made from the same sample of concrete and tested at 28 days or at other test age
designated for determination of the specified strength.
1.4.2.1 Test Records Exceeding 29
Required average compressive strength used as the basis for selection of concrete proportions
shall be the larger of the specified strength plus the standard deviation multiplied by 1.34 or the
specified strength plus the standard deviation multiplied by 2.33 minus 3.5.
Page | 7 of 19
1.4.2.2 Test Records Less Than 29

Where a concrete production facility does not have test records meeting the above requirements
but does have a record based on 15 to 29 consecutive tests, a standard deviation may be
established as the product of the calculated standard deviation and a modification factor from the
following table:
No. of tests (1) Modification factor for standard deviation
______________________________________
_________
less than 15
See Note
15
1.16
20
1.08
25
1.03
30 or more
1.00
_________________________________________________
(1) Interpolate for intermediate numbers of tests.
When a concrete production facility does not have field strength test records for calculation of
standard deviation or the number of tests is less than 15, the required average strength shall be:
a. The specified strength plus 7 specified strength of less than 21 MPa.
b. The specified strength plus 8 for specified strengths of 21 to 35 MPa.
1.5
SAMPLE CONCRETE PANEL

Prior to construction of structural formwork, a sample concrete panel shall be constructed on the
project site where directed. Sample panel shall not be built in or be part of the structure. Panel
shall be not less than 2.4 m long and 1200 mm high and constructed of concrete conforming to
the approved mix design. Panel shall be of typical wall thickness for the construction
represented. Forming, reinforcement, and construction method shall reflect the proposed method
to be used for the wall or section represented. Panel forms shall be designed and constructed to
provide a simulated defect on one wall of the panel. Simulated defect shall be irregular in shape,
40 to 50 mm deep, and covering approximately 40,000 square mm. After removal of forms, tie
rod and form tie holes shall be patched and the simulated defective area repaired. Patching and
repair work and final finish of the panel shall be indicative of that proposed for the project. The
approved panel shall be used as a standard of workmanship required. If the panel is not
approved, the Contractor shall construct additional panels until an acceptable panel is produced.
Sample panel shall be protected from weather and construction operations and shall not be
removed until concrete work for which it represents is complete.
Page | 8 of 19
1.6 STORAGE OF MATERIALS

Cement shall be stored in weather tight buildings, bins, or silos which will exclude moisture and
contaminants. Aggregate stockpiles shall be arranged and used in a manner to avoid excessive
segregation and to prevent contamination with other materials or with other sizes of aggregates.
Reinforcing bars and accessories shall be stored above the ground on platforms, skids or other
supports. Other materials shall be stored in such a manner as to avoid contamination and
deterioration. Admixtures which have been in storage at the project site for longer than 6 months
or which have been subjected to freezing shall not be used unless retested and proven to meet the
specified requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ADMIXTURES
Admixtures shall conform to the following:
2.1.1 Accelerating Admixture
ASTM C 494, Type C or E.
2.1.2 Air-Entraining Admixture
ASTM C 260.
2.1.3 Flowing Concrete Admixture
ASTM C 1017, Type 1 or 2.
2.1.4 Water-Reducing or Retarding Admixture
ASTM C 494, Type A, B, D, F, or G.
2.2 CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS

Cementitious materials shall each be of one type and from one source when used in concrete
which will have surfaces exposed in the finished structure. Cementitious materials shall conform
to one of the following:
2.2.1 Cement
ASTM C 150 or SASO 143, Type I, for above grade concrete; Type V for below grade concrete.
For coastal areas use type I with 8% microsilica of cement weight for below grade concrete.
2.3
AGGREGATES
Aggregates shall conform to the following:
Page | 9 of 19
2.3.1 Normal Weight Aggregate

ASTM C 33. Grading requirement for coarse aggregate shall conform to size number 67 (20
mm).
2.4
CURING MATERIALS
2.4.1
Burlap
FS CCC-C-467.
2.4.2
Impervious Sheets
ASTM C 171, type optional, except that polyethylene film, if used, shall be white opaque.
2.4.3
Membrane-Forming Compounds
ASTM C 309, Type 1-D, Class A or B.
2.5
EMBEDDED ITEMS
Embedded items shall be of the size and type indicated or as needed for the application. Dovetail
slots shall be galvanized steel. Inserts for shelf angles and bolt hangers shall be of malleable iron
or cast or wrought steel.
2.6
NONSHRINK GROUT
Non-shrink grout shall conform to ASTM C 1107 Grade B and shall be a formulation suitable for
the application.
2.7
NONSLIP SURFACING MATERIAL

Non-slip surfacing material shall consist of fifty-five percent, minimum, aluminum oxide or
silicon-dioxide abrasive ceramically bonded together to form a homogenous material sufficiently
porous to provide a good bond with portland paste; or factory-graded emery material consisting
of not less than 45 percent aluminum oxide and 25 percent ferric oxide. The material shall be
well graded from particles retained on the 0.600 mm sieve to particles passing the 2.36 mm sieve.
2.8
FLOOR HARDENER
Floor hardener shall be a colorless aqueous solution containing zinc silicofluoride, magnesium
silicofluoride, or sodium silicofluoride. These silicofluoride can be used individually or in
combination. Proprietary hardeners may be used if approved by the contracting officer.
2.9 WATER
Water shall be potable, except that non-potable water may be used if it produces mortar cubes
having 7- and 28-day strengths at least 90 percent of the strength of similar specimens made with
water from a municipal supply. The strength comparison shall be made on mortars, identical
except for mixing water, prepared and tested in accordance with ASTM C 109. Water for curing
shall not contain any substance injurious to concrete, or which causes staining.
Page | 10 of 19
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
Surfaces to receive concrete shall be clean and free from dirt, mud, and water. Conduit and other
similar items shall be in place and clean of any deleterious substance.
3.1.1 Foundations
Earthwork shall be as specified in Section 02221 EXCAVATION, FILLING, AND
BACKFILLING FOR BUILDINGS. Flowing water shall be diverted without washing over
freshly deposited concrete. Rock foundations shall be cleaned by high velocity air-water jets,
sandblasting, or other approved methods. Debris and loose, semi-detached or unsound fragments
shall be removed. Rock surfaces shall be moist but without free water when concrete is placed.
Semi-porous subgrades for foundations and footings shall be damp when concrete is placed.
Pervious subgrades shall be sealed by blending impervious material with the top 150 mm of the
in-place pervious material or by covering with an impervious membrane.
3.1.2 Preparation of Previously Placed Concrete
Concrete surfaces to which other concrete is to be bonded shall be roughened in an approved
manner that will expose sound aggregate uniformly without damaging the concrete. Laitance and
loose particles shall be removed. Surfaces shall be moist but without free water when concrete is
placed.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
Embedded items shall be free from oil, loose scale or rust, and paint. Embedded items shall be
installed at the locations indicated and required to serve the intended purpose. Voids in sleeves,
slots and inserts shall be filled with readily removable material to prevent the entry of concrete.
3.3 BATCHING, MIXING AND TRANSPORTING CONCRETE
Ready-mixed concrete shall be batched, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C 94,
except as otherwise specified. Truck mixers, agitators, and non-agitating units shall comply with
NRMCA-01. Ready-mix plant equipment and facilities shall be certified in accordance with
NRMCA QC 3. Site-mixed concrete
shall be mixed in accordance with ACI 301. Onsite plant shall conform to the NRMCA CPMB
100.
3.3.1 Admixtures
Admixtures shall be batched within an accuracy of 3 percent. Where two or more admixtures are
used in the same batch, they shall be batched separately and must be compatible. Retarding
admixture shall be added within one minute after addition of water is complete or in the first
quarter of the required mixing time, whichever is first. Superplasticizing admixtures shall be
added at the project site, and the concrete with the admixture shall be mixed 4 to 5 minutes before
placing. Concrete that shows evidence of total collapse or segregation caused by the use of
admixture shall be removed from the site.
Page | 11 of 19
3.3.2 Control of Mixing Water

No water from the truck system or elsewhere shall be added after the initial introduction of
mixing water for the batch except when, on arrival at the jobsite, the slump of the concrete is less
than that specified. Water added to bring the slump within the specified range shall not change
the total water in the concrete to a point that the approved water-cement ratio is exceeded. The
drum shall be turned an additional 30 revolutions, or more, if necessary, until the added water is
uniformly mixed into the concrete. Water shall not be added to the batch at any later time.
3.4 SAMPLING AND TESTING
Sampling and Testing is the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be performed by an
approved testing agency.
3.4.1 Aggregates
Aggregates for normal weight concrete shall be sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM C
33. Gradation tests shall be performed on the first day and every other day thereafter during
concrete construction.
3.4.2 Sampling of Concrete
Samples of concrete for air, slump, unit weight, and strength tests shall be taken in accordance
with ASTM C 172.
3.4.2.1 Air Content
Test for air content shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231. A
minimum of 1 test per day shall be conducted.
3.4.2.2 Slump
At least 2 slump tests shall be made on randomly selected batches of each mixture of concrete
during each day's concrete placement. Tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C
143.
3.4.3 Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete
3.4.3.1 Frequency of Testing
Samples for strength tests of each class of concrete placed each day shall be taken not less than
once a day, nor less than once for each 50 cubic meters of concrete, nor less than once for each
450 square meters of surface area for slabs or walls. If this sampling frequency results in less than
5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, tests shall be made from at least 5 randomly selected
trucks or from each truck if fewer than 5 truck loads are used. Field cured specimens for
determining form removal time or when a structure may be put in service shall be made in
numbers directed to check the adequacy of curing and protection of concrete in the structure. The
specimens shall be removed from the molds at the age of 24 hours and shall be cured and
protected, insofar as practicable, in the same manner as that given to the portion of the structure
the samples represent.
Page | 12 of 19
3.4.3.2 Testing Procedures

Cylinders and beams for acceptance tests shall be molded and cured in accordance with ASTM C
31. Cylinders shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 39 and beams shall be tested in
accordance with ASTM C 78. A strength test shall be the average of the strengths of two
cylinders or beams made from the same sample of concrete and tested at 28 days or at another
specified test age.
3.4.3.3 Evaluation of Results
Concrete specified on the basis of compressive strength will be considered satisfactory if the
averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength
and no individual strength test result falls below the required strength by more than 3.4 MPa.
3.4.4 Investigation of Low-Strength Test Results
When any strength test of standard-cured test cylinder falls below the specified strength
requirement by more than 3.4 MPa, or if tests of field-cured cylinders indicate deficiencies in
protection and curing, steps shall be taken to assure that load-carrying capacity of the structure is
not jeopardized. Nondestructive testing in accordance with ASTM C 597, ASTM C 803 or
ASTM C 805 may be permitted by the Contracting Officer to determine the relative strengths at
various locations in the structure as an aid in evaluating concrete strength in place or for selecting
areas to be cored. Such tests, unless properly calibrated and correlated with other test data, shall
not be used a basis for acceptance or rejection. When strength of concrete in place is considered
potentially deficient, cores shall be obtained and tested in accordance with ASTM C 42. At least
three representative cores shall be taken from each member or area of concrete in place that is
considered potentially deficient. The location of cores shall be determined by the Contracting
Officer to least impair the strength of the structure. If the concrete in the structure will be dry
under service conditions, the cores shall be air dried (temperature 16 to 27 degrees C, relative
humidity less than 60 percent) for seven days before testing and shall be tested dry. If the
concrete in the structure will be more than superficially wet under service conditions, the cores
shall be tested after moisture conditioning in accordance with ASTM C 42. Concrete in the area
represented by the core testing will be considered adequate if the average strength of the cores is
equal to or at least 85 percent of the specified strength requirement and if no single core is less
than 75 percent of the specified strength requirement. If the core tests are inconclusive or
impractical to obtain, or if structural analysis does not confirm the safety of the structure, load
tests may be directed by the Contracting Officer in accordance with the requirements of ACI
318/318R. Concrete work evaluated by structural analysis or by results of a load test and found
deficient shall be corrected in a manner satisfactory to the Contracting Officer. All
investigations, testing, load tests, and correction of deficiencies shall be performed at the expense
of the Contractor, and approved by the Contracting Officer.
3.5 CONVEYING CONCRETE
Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to forms as rapidly as possible and within the time
interval specified in paragraph CONCRETE PLACEMENT by methods which will prevent
segregation or loss of ingredients.
3.5.1 Chutes
When concrete can be placed directly from a truck mixer or other transporting equipment, chutes
attached to this equipment may be used. Separate chutes will not be permitted except when
specifically approved.
Page | 13 of 19
3.5.2 Buckets
Bucket design shall be such that concrete of the required slump can be readily discharged.
Bucket gates shall be essentially grout tight when closed. The bucket shall provide means for
positive regulations of the amount and rate of deposit of concrete in each dumping position.
3.5.3 Belt Conveyors
Belt conveyors may be used when approved. Belt conveyors shall be designed for conveying
concrete and shall be operated to assure a uniform flow of concrete to the final place of deposit
without segregation or loss of mortar. Conveyors shall be provided with positive means for
preventing segregation of the concrete at transfer points and point of placement.
3.5.4 Pumps
Concrete may be conveyed by positive displacement pumps when approved. Pump shall be the
piston or squeeze pressure type. Pipeline shall be steel pipe or heavy duty flexible hose. Inside
diameter of the pipe shall be at least three times the maximum size of the coarse aggregate.
Distance to be pumped shall not exceed the limits recommended by the pump manufacturer.
Concrete shall be supplied to the pump continuously. When pumping is completed, the concrete
remaining in the pipeline shall be ejected without contaminating the concrete in place. After each
use, the equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. Flushing water shall be wasted outside the
forms.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
Mixed concrete which is transported in truck mixers or agitators or concrete which is truck
mixed, shall be discharged within 1-1/2 hours or before the drum has revolved 300 revolutions,
whichever comes first after the introduction of the mixing water to the cement and aggregates or
the introduction of the cement to the aggregates. These limitations may be waived by the
Contracting Officer if the concrete is of such slump after the 1-1/2 hour time or 300 revolution
limit has been reached that it can be placed, without the addition of water to the batch. When the
concrete temperature exceeds 29 degrees C, the time shall be reduced to 45 minutes. Concrete
shall be placed within 15 minutes after it has been discharged from the truck.
3.6.1 Placing Operation
Concrete shall be handled from mixer to forms in a continuous manner until the approved unit of
operation is completed. Adequate scaffolding, ramps and walkways shall be provided so that
personnel and equipment are not supported by in-place reinforcement. Placing will not be
permitted when the sun, heat, wind, or limitations of facilities furnished by the Contractor prevent
proper consolidation, finishing and curing. Concrete shall be deposited as close as possible to its
final position in the forms, and there shall be no vertical drop greater than 1.5 m except where
suitable equipment is provided to prevent segregation and where specifically authorized.
Depositing of the concrete shall be so regulated that it will be effectively consolidated in
horizontal layers not more than 300 mm thick, except that all slabs shall be placed in a single
layer. Concrete to receive other construction shall be screeded to the proper level to avoid
excessive shimming or grouting.
Page | 14 of 19
3.6.2 Consolidation
Immediately after placing, each layer of concrete shall be consolidated by internal vibrators,
except for slabs 100 mm or less. The vibrators shall at all times be adequate in effectiveness and
number to properly consolidate the concrete; a spare vibrator shall be kept at the jobsite during all
concrete placing operations. The vibrators shall have a frequency of not less than 8000 vibrations
per minute and the head diameter and amplitude shall be appropriate for the concrete mixture
being placed. Vibrators shall be inserted vertically at uniform spacing over the area of placement.
The distance between insertions shall be approximately 1-1/2 times the radius of action of the
vibrator so that the area being vibrated will overlap the adjacent just-vibrated area. The vibrator
shall penetrate rapidly to the bottom of the layer and at least 150 mm into the preceding layer if
there is such. Vibrator shall be held stationary until the concrete is consolidated and then
withdrawn slowly. The use of form vibrators must be specifically approved. Vibrators shall not
be used to transport concrete within the forms. Slabs 100 mm and less in thickness shall be
consolidated by properly designed vibrating screeds or other approved technique.
3.6.3
Warm Weather Requirements

The temperature of the concrete placed during warm weather shall not exceed 30 degrees C
except where an approved retarder is used. The mixing water and/or aggregates shall be cooled,
if necessary, to maintain a satisfactory placing temperature. In no case shall the placing
temperature exceed 35 degrees C. Placing concrete during hot weather shall conform to the
recommendations of ACI 305.
3.7
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Refer to General Notes in the structural drawings for recommended locations of construction
joints and control joints.
Construction joints shall be located as indicated or approved. Where concrete work is interrupted
by weather, end of work shift or other similar type of delay, location and type of construction
joint shall be subject to approval of the Contracting Officer. Unless otherwise indicated and
except for slabs on grade, reinforcing steel shall extend through construction joints. Construction
joints in slabs on grade shall be keyed or doweled as shown. Concrete columns, walls, or piers
shall be in place at least 2 hours, or until the concrete is no longer plastic, before placing concrete
for beams, girders, or slabs thereon. In walls having door window openings, lifts shall terminate
at the top and bottom of the opening. Other lifts shall terminate at such levels as to conform to
structural requirements or architectural details. Where horizontal construction joints are required,
a strip of 25 mm square-edge lumber, beveled and oiled to facilitate removal, shall be tacked to
the inside of the forms at the construction joint. Concrete shall be placed to a point 25 mm above
the underside of the strip. The strip shall be removed 1 hour after the concrete has been placed,
and any irregularities in the joint line shall be leveled off with a wood float, and all laitance shall
be removed. Prior to placing additional concrete, horizontal construction joints shall be prepared
as specified in paragraph PREPARATIONS OF SURFACES.
Maximum slab area to be placed at one time is the area shown on plans and bounded by the
shrinkage strips.
Maximum length of basement retaining wall to be placed at one time is as shown on drawings but
not more than 12 meters.
Page | 15 of 19
3.8 FINISHING CONCRETE

3.8.1 Formed Surfaces
3.8.1.1 Repair of Surface Defects
Surface defects shall be repaired within 24 hours after the removal of forms. Honeycombed and
other defective areas shall be cut back to solid concrete or to a depth of not less than 25 mm,
whichever is greater. Edges shall be cut perpendicular to the surface of the concrete. The prepared
areas shall be dampened and brush-coated with neat cement grout. The repair shall be made
using mortar consisting of not more than 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand. The mixed mortar
shall be allowed to stand to stiffen (approximately 45 minutes), during which time the mortar
shall be intermittently remixed without the addition of water. After the mortar has attained the
stiffest consistency that will permit placing, the patching mix shall be thoroughly tamped into
place by means approved by the Contracting Officer and finished slightly higher than the
surrounding surface. Repaired surfaces shall be cured as required for adjacent surfaces. The
temperature of concrete, mortar patching material, and ambient air shall be above 10 degrees C
while making repairs and during the curing period.
Concrete with defects which affect the
strength of the member or with excessive honeycombs will be rejected, or the defects shall be
corrected as directed.
3.8.1.2 Class C Finish
Where a Class C finish is indicated, fins shall be removed. Concrete surfaces shall be relatively
smooth with a texture imparted by the forms used.
3.8.1.3 Class D Finish
Where a Class D finish is indicated, fins exceeding 6 mm in height shall be chipped or rubbed off.
Concrete surfaces shall be left with the texture imparted by the forms used.
3.8.2 Unformed Surfaces
In hot windy weather when the rate of evaporation of surface moisture, as determined by
methodology presented in ACI 305R, may reasonably be expected to exceed 1 kg per square
meter per hour; coverings, windbreaks, or fog sprays shall be provided as necessary to prevent
premature setting and drying of the surface. The dusting of surfaces with dry materials or the
addition of water during finishing will not be permitted. Finished surfaces shall be plane, with no
deviation greater than 8 mm when tested with a 3.05 m straightedge. Floor tolerance
measurements shall be made as soon as possible after finishing. When forms or shoring are used
the measurements shall be made prior to their removal. Surfaces shall be pitched to drains.
For finished areas of large open areas and corridors where appearance of the finish surface is
critical such as narrow corridor surfaced with vinyl composition, no deviation greater than 3 mm
when tested with a 3.05 m straightedge is allowed.
3.8.2.1 Rough-Slab Finish
Slabs to receive fill or mortar setting beds shall be screeded with straightedges immediately after
consolidation to bring the surface to the required finish level with no coarse aggregate visible.
Page | 16 of 19
3.8.2.2 Float Finish

Slabs to receive a steel trowel finish and to receive roofing materials shall be given a float finish.
Screeding shall be followed immediately by darbying or bull floating before bleeding water is
present, to bring the surface to a true, even plane. After the concrete has stiffened to permit the
operation and the water sheen has disappeared, it shall be wood floated. Concrete that portrays
stickiness shall be finished with a magnesium float in lieu of a wood float, and left free of ridges
and other projections.
3.8.2.3 Trowel Finish
Floor slabs, except at "rough slabs", shall be given a trowel finish immediately following floating.
Surfaces shall be trowelled to produce smooth, dense slabs free from blemishes including trowel
marks. In lieu of hand finishing, an approved power finishing machine may be used in
accordance with the directions of the machine manufacturer. A final hard steel troweling shall be
done by hand.
3.8.2.4
Broom Finish
After floating, exterior platforms, ramps, loading docks, stair treads, landings, and entrances shall
be lightly trowelled, and then broomed with a fiber-bristle brush in a direction transverse to that
of the main traffic.
3.8.2.5 Floor Hardener
Floor hardener shall be applied to exposed interior slabs after the concrete had been air dried for
at least 28 days. Three coats shall be applied, each the day after the preceding coat was applied.
For the first application, 0.12 kg per liter of the silicofluoride shall be dissolved in water. For
subsequent applications, the solution shall be 0.24 kg per liter. Floor should be mopped with
clear water shortly after the preceding application has dried to remove encrusted salts.
Proprietary hardeners shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. During
application, area should be well ventilated. Precautions shall be taken when applying
silicofluorides due to the toxicity of the salts. Any compound that contacts glass or aluminum
should be immediately removed with clear water.
3.8.3
Bituminous Coating
All concrete footings grade beam surfaces in contact with soil, except those covered by
membrane water proofing, shall be coated with bituminous coating for protection.
Page | 17 of 19
3.9 CURING AND PROTECTION

3.9.1 General
All concrete shall be cured by an approved method for 7 days.
Immediately after placement, concrete shall be protected from premature drying extremes in
temperatures, rapid temperature change, mechanical injury and injury from rain and flowing
water. Air and forms in contact with concrete shall be maintained at a temperature above 10
degrees C for the first 3 days and at a temperature above 0 degrees C for the remainder of the
specified curing period. Exhaust fumes from combustion heating units shall be vented to the
outside of the enclosure and heaters and ducts shall be placed and directed so as not to cause areas
of overheating and drying of concrete surfaces or to create fire hazards. All materials and
equipment needed for adequate curing and protection shall be available and at the site prior to
placing concrete. No fire or excessive heat shall be permitted near or in direct contact with the
concrete at any time. Curing shall be accomplished by any of the following methods, or
combination thereof, as approved.
3.9.2 Moisture Curing
Concrete to be moist-cured shall be maintained continuously wet for the entire curing period. If
water or curing materials used stains or discolors concrete surfaces which are to be permanently
exposed, the concrete surfaces shall be cleaned. When wooden forms are left in place during
curing, they shall be kept wet at all times. If the forms are removed before the end of the curing
period, curing shall be carried out as on unformed surfaces, using suitable materials. Horizontal
surfaces shall be cured by ponding, by covering with a 50 mm minimum thickness of
continuously saturated sand, or by covering with waterproof paper, polyethylene sheet,
polyethylene-coated burlap or saturated burlap.
3.9.3 Membrane Curing
Membrane curing shall not be used on surfaces that are to receive any subsequent treatment
depending on adhesion or bonding to the concrete; except a styrene acrylate or chlorinated rubber
compound meeting ASTM C 309, Class B requirements may be used for surfaces which are to be
painted or are to receive bituminous roofing or waterproofing, or floors that are to receive
adhesive applications of resilient flooring. The curing compound selected shall be compatible
with any subsequent paint, roofing, waterproofing or flooring specified. Membrane curing
compound shall not be used on surfaces that are maintained at curing temperatures with free
steam. Curing compound shall be applied to formed surfaces immediately after the forms are
removed and prior to any patching or other surface treatment except the cleaning of loose sand,
mortar, and debris from the surface. Surfaces shall be thoroughly moistened with water and the
curing compound shall be applied to slab surfaces as soon as the bleeding water has disappeared,
with the tops of joints being temporarily sealed to prevent entry of the compound and to prevent
moisture loss during the curing period. Compound shall be applied in a one-coat continuous
operation by mechanical spraying equipment, at a uniform coverage in accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions. Concrete surfaces which have been subjected to rainfall
within 3 hours after curing compound has been applied shall be resprayed by the method and at
the coverage specified. On surfaces permanently exposed to view, the surface shall be shaded
from direct rays of the sun for the duration of the curing period. Surfaces coated with curing
compound shall be kept free of foot and vehicular traffic, and from other sources of abrasion and
contamination during the curing period.
Page | 18 of 19
3.10 SETTING BASE PLATES

After being properly positioned, equipment base plates shall be set to the proper line and
elevation with nonshrink grout. The thickness of the grout shall be approximately 1/23 the width
of the plate, but not less than 20 mm. Concrete and metal surfaces in contact with grout shall be
clean and free of oil and grease, and concrete surfaces in contact with grout shall be damp and
free of laitance when grout is placed.
3.10.1 Non-shrink Grout
Non-shrink grout shall be mixed and placed in accordance with material manufacturer's written
recommendations. Forms of wood or other suitable material shall be used to retain the grout. The
grout shall be placed quickly and continuously, completely filling the space without segregation
or bleeding of the mix. Exposed surfaces shall be left untreated. Curing shall comply with
paragraph CURING AND PROTECTION.
Page | 19 of 19
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 04200 MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL
04200-2/16
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.3 SAMPLE MASONRY PANELS
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
04200-2/16
04200-4/16
04200-5/16
04200-6/16
04200-6/16
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU)
2.2 FLUTED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
2.3 PRECAST CONCRETE ITEMS
2.4 MORTAR
2.5 ANCHORS, TIES AND BAR POSITIONERS
2.6 JOINT REINFORCEMENT
2.7 CONTROL JOINT KEYS
2.8 EXPANSION JOINT MATERIALS
2.9 INSULATION
04200-7/16
04200-7/16
04200-7/16
04200-8/16
04200-9/16
04200-10/16
04200-10/16
04200-11/16
04200-12/16
04200-12/16
04200-12/16
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
3.2 LAYING OF MASONRY UNITS
3.3 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
3.4 CONCRETE MASONRY VENEER JOINTS
3.5 MASONRY HEAD RESTRAINT
3.6 SHELF ANGLES
3.7 LINTELS
3.8 SILLS AND COPINGS
3.9 ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE AND STRUCTURAL STEEL
3.10 INSULATION
3.11 POINTING AND CLEANING
3.12 PROTECTION
3.13 TEST REPORTS
04200-12/16
04200-12/16
04200-13/16
04200-13/16
04200-14/16
04200-14/16
04200-14/16
04200-15/16
04200-15/16
04200-15/16
04200-15/16
04200-15/16
04200-16/16
04200-16/16
Section 04200 Masonry
Page | 1 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 04200 - MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI)
ACI SP-66 (1988)
ACI 530
ACI 530.1
ACI Detailing Manual

Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures
Specifications for Masonry Structures

ASTM A 82
ASTM A 153
ASTM A 615
ASTM C 55
ASTM C 62
ASTM C 67
ASTM C 90
ASTM C 91
ASTM C 126
ASTM C 129
ASTM C 140
ASTM C 216
ASTM C 270
ASTM C 476
ASTM C 494
ASTM C 578
ASTM C 641
ASTM C 652
ASTM C 744
ASTM C 780
ASTM C 1019
ASTM C 1072
ASTM D 2000
ASTM D 2240
ASTM D 2287
ASTM E 119
ASTM E 447
(1990a) Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement

(1982; R 1987) Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
(1993) Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
(1993a) Concrete Building Brick
(1992c) Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale)
(1993a) Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile
(1993) Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units
(1993) Masonry Cement
(1991) Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing Brick, and Solid
Masonry Units
(1993) Non-Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units
(1991) Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units
(1992d) Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale)
(1992a) Mortar for Unit Masonry
(1991) Grout for Masonry
(1992) Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
(1992) Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation
(1982; R 1991) Staining Materials in Lightweight Concrete Aggregates
(1993) Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale)
(1992) Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units
(1991) Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and
Reinforced Unit Masonry
(1989a; R 1993) Sampling and Testing Grout
(1993) Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength
(1990) Rubber Products in Automotive Applications
(1991) Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness
(1992) Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and Extrusion
Compounds
(1988) Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
(1992b) Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms
Page | 2 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001

FS HH-I-1972/1
(Basic; Notice 1) Insulation Board, Thermal, Polyurethane or

Polyisocyanurate, Faced With Aluminum Foil on Both Sides of the Foam
SASO 87
SASO 143
SASO 145
1.2
Methods of test for concrete (cement) building bricks and blocks.

Portland cement ordinary and rapid-hardening.
Concrete (cement) hollow blocks for buildings.
SUBMITTALS
having an "FIO" designation are for information only. The following shall be submitted for
approval in accordance with SECTION 01300 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Data
Prefaced Concrete Masonry Units; GA
Glass Block Units and Accessories; GA
Insulation; GA
Manufacturer's descriptive data.
SD-04 Drawings
Masonry Work; GA.
Drawings including plans, elevations, and details of wall reinforcement; details of expansion
joints; and wall openings Wall dimensions, bar clearances, and wall openings greater than one
masonry unit in area shall be shown. No approval will be given to the shop drawings until the
Contractor certifies that all openings, including those for mechanical and electrical service, are
shown. If, during construction, additional masonry openings are required, the approved shop
drawings shall be resubmitted with the additional openings shown along with the proposed
changes. Location of these additional openings shall be clearly highlighted. The minimum scale
for wall elevations shall be 1 to 50.
SD-09 Reports
Field Testing of Mortar; GA. Field Testing of Grout; GA. Fire-rated CMU; GA.
Test reports from an approved independent laboratory. Test reports on a previously tested
material shall be certified as the same as that proposed for use in this project.
Special Inspection; GA.
Copies of masonry inspector reports.
SD-13 Certificates
Page | 3 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Concrete Masonry Units (CMU); FIO. Prefaced Concrete Masonry Units; FIO. Control Joint
Keys; FIO. Anchors, Ties; FIO. Expansion-Joint Materials; FIO. Joint Reinforcement; FIO..
Mortar Coloring; FIO. Insulation; FIO. Precast Concrete Items; FIO. Mortar Admixtures; FIO.
Grout Admixtures FIO.
Certificates of compliance stating that the materials meet the specified requirements. SD-14
Samples
Concrete Masonry Units (CMU); GA.
Color samples of three stretcher units and one unit for each type of special shape. Units shall
show the full range of color and texture Anchors, Ties; GA., Two of each type used. ExpansionJoint Material; GA, One piece of each type used.Joint Reinforcement; GA., One piece of each
type used, including corner and wall intersection pieces, showing at least two cross wires.
1.3
SAMPLE MASONRY PANELS

After material samples are approved and prior to starting masonry work, sample masonry panels
shall be constructed for each type and color of masonry required. At least 48 hours prior to
constructing the sample panel or panels, the Contractor shall submit written notification to the
Contracting Officer's Representative. Sample panels shall not be built in, or as part of the
structure, but shall be located where directed.
1.3.1
Configuration
Panels shall be L-shaped or otherwise configured to represent all of the wall elements. Panels
shall be of the size necessary to demonstrate the acceptable level of workmanship for each type of
masonry represented on the project. The minimum size of a straight panel or a leg of an L-shaped
panel shall be 2.5 m by 1.8 m.
1.3.2
Composition
Panels shall show plane of wall surface, mortar joints, masonry units, and bond pattern of the
masonry work. The Contractor's method for mortar joint tooling; grouting of reinforced vertical
cores, collar joints, bond beams, and lintels; positioning, securing, and lapping of reinforcing
steel; positioning and lapping of joint reinforcement (including prefabricated corners); and
cleaning of masonry work shall be demonstrated during the construction of the panels.
Installation or application procedures for anchors, wall ties, glass block units, CMU control
joints, insulation, flashing, row lock courses and weep holes shall be shown in the sample panels.
The panels shall contain a masonry bonded corner that includes a bond beam corner. Panels shall
show installation of electrical boxes and conduit. Required reinforcing shall be provided around
this opening as well as at wall corners and control joints.
1.3.3
Construction Method
Where anchored veneer walls are required, the Contractor shall demonstrate and receive approval
for the method of construction; i.e., either bring up the two wythes together or separately, with the
insulation and appropriate ties placed within the specified tolerances across the cavity. Temporary
provisions shall be demonstrated to preclude mortar or grout droppings in the cavity and to
provide a clear open air space of the dimensions shown on the drawings. Where masonry is to be
grouted, the Contractor shall demonstrate and receive approval on the method that will be used to
Page | 4 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
bring up the masonry wythes; support the reinforcing bars; and grout cells, bond beams, lintels,
and collar joints using the requirements specified herein. If sealer is specified to be applied to the
masonry units, sealer shall be applied to the sample panels. Panels shall be built on a properly
designed concrete foundation.
1.3.4
Usage
The completed panels shall be used as the standard of workmanship for the type of masonry
represented. Masonry work shall not commence until the sample panel for that type of masonry
construction has been completed and approved. Panels shall be protected from the weather and
construction operations until the masonry work has been completed and approved. After
completion of the work, the sample panels, including all foundation concrete, shall become the
property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the construction site.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Perform work in accordance with ACI 530 and 530.1, and Masonry Design Manual.
1.5
DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE: Materials shall be delivered, handled, stored, and
protected to avoid chipping, breakage, and contact with soil or contaminating material.
1.5.1
Masonry Units
Concrete masonry units shall be covered or protected from inclement weather and shall conform
to the moisture content as specified in ASTM C 90 when delivered to the jobsite. In addition,
glass block units and prefaced concrete units shall be stored with their finish surfaces covered.
Prefabricated lintels shall be marked on top sides to show either the lintel schedule number or the
number and size of top and bottom bars.
1.5.2
Reinforcement, Anchors, and Ties

Steel reinforcing bars, coated anchors, ties, and joint reinforcement shall be stored above the
ground. Steel reinforcing bars and uncoated ties shall be free of loose mill scale and rust.
1.5.3
Cementitious Materials, Sand and Aggregates

Cementitious and other packaged materials shall be delivered in unopened containers, plainly
marked and labeled with manufacturers' names and brands. Cementitious material shall be stored
in dry, weather-tight enclosures or be completely covered. Cement shall be handled in a manner
that will prevent the inclusion of foreign materials and damage by water or dampness. Sand and
aggregates shall be stored in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The source of materials which will affect the appearance of the finished work shall not be
changed after the work has started except with Contracting Officer's approval.
2.2
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU)
Page | 5 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Hollow concrete masonry units shall conform to SASO 145 or ASTM C 90, Type I, Normal
weight. Cement shall have a low alkali content and be of one brand. Fluted and fairface CMU
shall be used for external walls as shown on drawings. Normal CMU and plaster shall be used for
internal walls.
2.2.1
Aggregates
Lightweight aggregates and blends of lightweight and heavier aggregates in proportions used in
producing the units, shall comply with the following requirements when tested for stainproducing iron compounds in accordance with ASTM C 641: by visual classification method, the
iron stain deposited on the filter paper shall not exceed the "light stain" classification.
2.2.2
Kinds and Shapes

Units shall be modular in size and shall include closer, jamb, header, lintel, and bond beam units
and special shapes and sizes to complete the work as indicated. In exposed interior masonry
surfaces, units having a bull-nose shall be used for vertical external corners except at door,
window, and louver jambs. Radius of the bull-nose shall be 25 mm. Units used in exposed
masonry surfaces in any one building shall have a uniform fine to medium texture and a uniform
color.
2.2.2.1 Architectural Units

Units shall have patterned face shell. Face shell pattern shall be fluted. Units shall be in natural
cement color. Paint shall be applied to fluted and/or exterior blocks. . Color shall be as shown on
drawings. Patterned face shell shall be properly aligned in the completed wall.
Use fluted units for exposed exterior block work, and normal units treated with plaster for
interior block work
2.2.3
Fire-Rated CMU
Concrete masonry units used in fire-rated construction shown on the drawings shall be of
minimum equivalent thickness for the fire rating indicated and the corresponding type of
aggregates indicated in TABLE I. Units containing more than one of the aggregates listed in
TABLE I will be rated on the aggregate requiring the greater minimum equivalent thickness to
produce the required fire rating.
TABLE I
FIRE-RATED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
See note (a) below
Minimum equivalent thickness in mm for fire rating of:
Aggregate Type
4 hours
3 hours
2 hours
_______________
_______
_______
_____
Pumice120
Expanded slag
Expanded clay, shale, or slate
Limestone, scoria, cinders or
unexpanded slag
Calcareous
Siliceous gravel
(a)
100
130
145
150
75
110
120
130
85
95
100
(6.2)
170 (6.7)
135 (5.3)
145 (5.7)
105 (4.2)
115 (4.5)
Minimum equivalent thickness shall equal net volume as determined in conformance

with ASTM C 140 divided by the product of the actual length and height of the face shell
of the unit in millimeters. Where walls are to receive plaster or be faced with brick, or
Page | 6 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.3.
otherwise form an assembly; the thickness of plaster or brick or other material in the
assembly will be included in determining the equivalent thickness.
FLUTED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
2.3.1. Fluted hollow concrete masonry units shall comply with the following:
i.
ASTM C 90, Type I, normal weight, moisture-controlled units.
b.
Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area

compressive strength at 28 days as indicated below:
1)
5 MPa.
2)
Not less than the unit compressive strength required to produce concrete unit
masonry construction of compressive strength indicated.
2.3.2 Size: Manufactured to dimensions indicated on drawings, with 25 mm deep, 8 flutes per
CMU, on one face.
2.3.3. Color and Pattern: Integrally colored during manufacture. Provide color and pattern
selected by Contracting Officer from manufacturer's full range of standard colors and
patterns.
2.4
PRECAST CONCRETE ITEMS

Trim, lintels, copings, splash blocks and door sills shall be factory-made units from a plant
regularly engaged in producing precast concrete units. Unless otherwise indicated, concrete shall
be 28 MPa minimum conforming to Section 03300 CAST-IN-SITU CONCRETE using 13 mm to
No. 4 nominal-size coarse aggregate, and minimum reinforcement shall be the reinforcement
required for handling of the units. Clearance of 20 mm shall be maintained between
reinforcement and faces of units. Unless precast-concrete items have been subjected during
manufacture to saturated-steam pressure of at least 827 kPa for at least 5 hours, the items, after
casting, shall be either damp-cured for 24 hours or steam-cured and shall then be aged under
cover for 28 days or longer. Cast-concrete members weighing over 35 kg shall have built-in loops
of galvanized wire or other approved provisions for lifting and anchoring. Units shall have beds
and joints at right angles to the face, with sharp true arises and shall be cast with drip grooves on
the underside where units overhang walls. Exposed-to-view surfaces shall be free of surface
voids, spalls, cracks, and chipped or broken edges. Precast units exposed-to-view shall be of
uniform appearance and color. Unless otherwise specified, units shall have a smooth dense finish.
Prior to use, each item shall be wetted and inspected for crazing. Items showing evidence of
dusting, spalling, crazing, or having surfaces treated with a protective coating will be rejected.
2.4.1
Lintels
Lintels shall be of a thickness equal to the wall and reinforced with two No. 4 bars for the full
length, unless otherwise shown on the Structural Drawings.
2.4.2
Sills and Copings

Sills and copings shall be cast with washes. Sills for windows having mullions shall be cast in
sections with head joints at mullions and a 6 mm allowance for mortar joints. The ends of sills,
except a 20 mm wide margin at exposed surfaces, shall be roughened for bond. Treads of door
sills shall have rounded nosings.
MORTAR
2.5
Page | 7 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Type S, for masonry below grade and masonry in contact with earth and ASTM C 270, Type N,
for above-grade nonloadbearing walls and parapet walls and for interior loadbearing and
nonloadbearing partitions, all in accordance with the proportion specification of ASTM C 270
except Type S cement-lime mortar proportions shall be 1 part cement, 1/2 part lime and 4-1/2
parts aggregate; Type N cement-lime mortar proportions shall be 1 part cement, 1 part lime and 6
parts aggregate; when masonry cement ASTM C 91 is used the maximum air content shall be
limited to 12 percent and performance equal to cement-lime mortar shall be verified. Evaluation
of performance shall be based on ASTM C 780 and ASTM C 1072. Pointing mortar in showers
and kitchens shall contain ammonium stearate, or aluminum tri-stearate, or calcium stearate in an
amount equal to 3 percent by weight of cement used. Cement shall have a low alkali content and
be of one brand. Aggregates shall be from one source.
2.5.1
2.6
Coloring
Mortar coloring shall be added to the mortar used for exposed colored masonry surfaces to
produce a uniform color matching approved sample. Mortar coloring shall not exceed 3 percent
of the weight of cement for carbon black and ten percent of the weight of cement for all other
pigments. Mortar coloring shall be chemically inert, of finely ground limeproof pigment, and
furnished in accurately pre-measured and packaged units that can be added to a measured amount
of cement.
ANCHORS, TIES, AND BAR POSITIONERS
Anchors and ties shall be fabricated without drips or crimps and shall be zinc-coated in
accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B-2. Steel wire used for anchors and ties shall be fabricated
from steel wire conforming to ASTM A 82. Anchors and ties shall be sized to provide a minimum
of 16 mm mortar cover from either face.
2.6.1
Wire Mesh Ties

Wire mesh for tying 100 mm thick concrete masonry unit partitions to other intersecting masonry
partitions shall be 13 mm mesh of minimum 16 gauge steel wire. Minimum lengths shall be not
less than 300 mm.
2.6.2
Wall Ties
Wall ties shall be rectangular-shaped or Z-shaped fabricated of 5 mm diameter zinc-coated steel
wire. Rectangular wall ties shall be no less than 100 mm wide. Wall ties may also be of a
continuous type conforming to paragraph JOINT REINFORCEMENT. Adjustable type wall ties,
if approved for use, shall consist of two essentially U-shaped elements fabricated of 5 mm
diameter zinc-coated steel wire. Adjustable ties shall be of the double pintle to eye type and shall
allow a maximum of 13 mm eccentricity between each element of the tie. Play between pintle and
eye opening shall be not more than 2 mm. The pintle and eye elements shall be formed so that
both can be in the same plane.
2.6.3
Dovetail Anchors
Dovetail anchors shall be of the flexible wire type, 5 mm diameter zinc-coated steel wire,
triangular shaped, and attached to a 12 gauge or heavier steel dovetail section. These anchors
shall be used for anchorage of veneer wythes or composite-wall facings extending over the face
of concrete columns, beams, or walls. Cells within vertical planes of these anchors shall be filled
solid with grout for full height of walls or partitions, or solid units may be used. Dovetail slots are
specified in Section 03300 CST-IN-SITU CONCRETE.
Page | 8 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.6.4
Adjustable Anchors
Adjustable anchors shall be 5 mm diameter steel wire, triangular-shaped. Anchors attached to
steel shall be 8 mm diameter steel bars placed to provide 2 mm play between flexible anchors and
structural steel members. Spacers shall be welded to rods and columns. Equivalent welded-on
steel anchor rods or shapes standard with the flexible-anchor manufacturer may be furnished
when approved. Welds shall be cleaned and given one coat of zinc-rich touch up paint.
2.6.5
Bar Positioners
Bar positioners, used to prevent displacement of reinforcing bars during the course of
construction, shall be factory fabricated from 9 gauge steel wire or equivalent, and coated with a
hot-dip galvanized finish. Not more than one wire shall cross the cell.
2.7
JOINT REINFORCEMENT
Joint reinforcement shall be factory fabricated from steel wire conforming to ASTM A 82,
welded construction. Tack welding will not be acceptable in reinforcement used for wall ties.
Wire shall have zinc coating conforming to ASTM A 153, class B-2. All wires shall be a
minimum of 9 gauge. Reinforcement shall be ladder type design, having one longitudinal wire in
the mortar bed of each face shell for hollow units and one wire for solid units. Joint reinforcement
shall be placed a minimum of 16 mm cover from either face. The distance between cross wires
shall not exceed 400 mm. Joint reinforcement for straight runs shall be furnished in flat sections
not less than 3 m long. Joint reinforcement shall be provided with factory formed corners and
intersections. If approved for use, joint reinforcement may be furnished with adjustable wall tie
features.
2.8
CONTROL JOINT KEYS

Control joint keys shall be a factory fabricated solid section of natural or synthetic rubber (or
combination thereof) conforming to ASTM D 2000 or polyvinyl chloride conforming to ASTM D
2287. The material shall be resistant to oils and solvents. The control joint key shall be provided
with a solid shear section not less than 16 mm thick and 10 mm thick flanges, with a tolerance of
plus or minus 2 mm. The control joint key shall fit neatly, but without forcing, in masonry unit
jamb sash grooves. The control joint key shall be flexible at a temperature of minus 34 degrees C
after five hours exposure, and shall have a durometer hardness of not less than 70 when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 2240.
2.9
EXPANSION-JOINT MATERIALS
Backer rod and sealant shall be adequate to accommodate joint compression equal to 50 percent
of the width of the joint. The backer rod shall be compressible rod stock of polyethylene foam,
polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, or other flexible, nonabsorptive material as recommended
by the sealant manufacturer. Sealant shall conform to Section 07900 SEALANTS.
2.10
INSULATION
2.10.1 Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular, polystyrene thermal insulation with
closed cells and integral high-density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in
an extrusion process to comply with ASTM C 578, Type IV; in manufacturer's standard lengths
and widths; and in thickness indicated, but not less than 50 mm thick. For further details refer to
Section 07212 BUILDING INSULATION.
Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application indicated.
Page | 9 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1
Hot Weather Installation

The following precautions shall be taken if masonry is erected when the ambient air temperature
is more than 37 degrees C in the shade and the relative humidity is less than 50 percent. All
masonry materials shall be shaded from direct sunlight; mortar beds shall be spread no more than
1.2 m ahead of masonry; masonry units shall be set within one minute of spreading mortar; and
after erection, masonry shall be protected from direct exposure to wind and sun for 48 hours.
3.2
LAYING MASONRY UNITS

Perform work in accordance with ACI 530 and 530.1, and Masonry Design Manual. Masonry
units shall be laid in running bond pattern. Facing courses shall be level with back-up courses,
unless the use of adjustable ties has been approved in which case the tolerances shall be plus or
minus 13 mm. Each unit shall be adjusted to its final position while mortar is still soft and plastic.
Units that have been disturbed after the mortar has stiffened shall be removed, cleaned, and relaid
with fresh mortar. Air spaces, cavities, chases, expansion joints, and spaces to be grouted shall be
kept free from mortar and other debris. Units used in exposed masonry surfaces shall be free from
chipped edges or other imperfections detracting from the appearance of the finished work.
Vertical joints shall be kept plumb. Units being laid and surfaces to receive units shall be free of
water film and frost. Mortar for veneer wythes shall be beveled and sloped toward the center of
the wythe from the cavity side. Units shall be shoved into place so that the vertical joints are tight.
Vertical joints of brick and the vertical face shells of concrete masonry units, except where
indicated at control, expansion, and isolation joints, shall be completely filled with mortar. Mortar
will be permitted to protrude up to 13 mm into the space or cells to be grouted. Means shall be
provided to prevent mortar from dropping into the space below. In double wythe construction, the
inner wythe may be brought up not more than 400 mm ahead of the outer wythe. Collar joints
shall be filled with mortar or grout during the laying of the facing wythe, and filling shall not lag
the laying of the facing wythe by more than 200 mm. Vertical bar reinforcement and joint
reinforcement for external walls, joint reinforcement for internal partitions shall provided as
shown on structural drawings.
3.2.1 Surface Preparation

Surfaces upon which masonry is placed shall be cleaned of laitance, dust, dirt, oil, organic matter,
or other foreign materials and shall be slightly roughened to provide a surface texture with a
depth of at least 3 mm. Sandblasting shall be used, if necessary, to remove laitance from pores
and to expose the aggregate.
3.2.2 Forms and Shores
Forms and shores shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent deflections which may result in cracking or
other damage to supported masonry and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout.
Supporting forms and shores shall not be removed in less than 10 days.
3.2.3 Concrete Masonry Units
Units in piers, pilasters, columns, starting courses on footings, solid foundation walls, lintels, and
beams, and where cells are to be filled with grout shall be full bedded in mortar under both face
shells and webs. Other units shall be full bedded under both face shells. Head joints shall be filled
solidly with mortar for a distance in from the face of the unit not less than the thickness of the
face shell. Foundation walls below grade shall be grouted solid. Jamb units shall be of the shapes
and sizes to conform with wall units. Solid units may be incorporated in the masonry work where
Page | 10 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
necessary to fill out at corners, gable slopes, and elsewhere as approved. Double walls shall be
stiffened at wall-mounted plumbing fixtures by use of strap anchors, two above each fixture and
two below each fixture, located to avoid pipe runs, and extending from center to center of the
double wall. Walls and partitions shall be adequately reinforced for support of wall-hung
plumbing fixtures when chair carriers are not specified.
3.2.4.1 Wetting of Units
Wetting of clay, shale brick, or hollow brick units having an initial rate of absorption of more
than 0.155 gm per minute per square cm of bed surface shall be in conformance with ASTM C
67. The method of wetting shall ensure that each unit is nearly saturated but surface dry when
laid.
3.2.4.2Hollow Units
Hollow units shall be laid as specified for concrete masonry units.
3.2.5 Tolerances
Masonry shall be laid plumb, true to line, with courses level. Bond pattern shall be kept plumb
throughout. Corners shall be square unless noted otherwise. Except for walls constructed of
prefaced concrete masonry units, masonry shall be laid within the following tolerances (plus or
minus unless otherwise noted):
TABLE II - TOLERANCES
Variation from the plumb in the lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises
In adjacent masonry units 3 mm
In 3 m 6 mm
In 6 m 10 mm
In 12 m or more 13 mm
____________________________________________
Variations from the plumb for external corners, expansion joints, and other conspicuous lines
In 6 m 6 mm
____________________________________________
Variations from the level for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous
lines
In 6 m 6 mm
____________________________________________
Variation from level for bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls
In 3 m 6 mm
____________________________________________
Page | 11 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Variations from horizontal lines

In 3 m 6 mm
In 6 m 10 mm
____________________________________________
Variations in cross sectional dimensions of columns and in thickness of walls
Minus 6 mm
Plus 13 mm
3.2.6
Cutting and Fitting

Full units of the proper size shall be used wherever possible, in lieu of cut units. Cutting and
fitting, including that required to accommodate the work of others, shall be done by masonry
mechanics using power masonry saws. Concrete masonry units may be wet or dry cut. Wet cut
units, before being placed in the work, shall be dried to the same surface-dry appearance as uncut
units being laid in the wall. Cut edges shall be clean, true and sharp. Openings in the masonry
shall be made carefully so that wall plates, cover plates or escutcheons required by the installation
will completely conceal the openings and will have bottoms parallel with the masonry bed joints.
Reinforced masonry lintels shall be provided above openings over 300 mm wide for pipes, ducts,
cable trays, and other wall penetrations, unless steel sleeves are used.
3.2.7
Jointing
Joints shall be tooled when the mortar is thumbprint hard. Horizontal joints shall be tooled last.
Joints shall be brushed to remove all loose and excess mortar. Mortar joints shall be finished as
follows:
3.2.7.1 Flush Joints

Joints in concealed masonry surfaces and joints at electrical outlet boxes in wet areas shall be
flush cut. Flush cut joints shall be made by cutting off the mortar flush with the face of the wall.
Joints in unparged masonry walls below grade shall be pointed tight. Flush joints for architectural
units, such as fluted units, shall completely fill both the head and bed joints.
3.2.7.2 Tooled Joints
Joints in exposed exterior and interior masonry surfaces shall be tooled slightly concave. Joints
shall be tooled with a jointer slightly larger than the joint width so that complete contact is made
along the edges of the unit. Tooling shall be performed so that the mortar is compressed and the
joint surface is sealed. Jointer of sufficient length shall be used to obtain a straight and true mortar
joint.
3.2.7.3 Door and Window Frame Joints
On the exposed interior side of exterior frames, joints between frames and abutting masonry walls
shall be raked to a depth of 10 mm. On the exterior side of exterior frames, joints between frames
and abutting masonry walls shall be raked to a depth of 10 mm.
Page | 12 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.2.8 Joint Widths

Joint widths shall be as follows:
3.2.8.1 Concrete Masonry Units
Concrete masonry units shall have 10 mm joints, except for prefaced concrete masonry units.
3.2.9 Embedded Items
Spaces around built-in items shall be filled with mortar. Openings around flush-mount electrical
outlet boxes in wet locations shall be pointed with mortar. Anchors, ties, wall plugs, accessories,
flashing, pipe sleeves and other items required to be built-in shall be embedded as the masonry
work progresses. Anchors, ties and joint reinforcement shall be fully embedded in the mortar.
Cells receiving anchor bolts and cells of the first course below bearing plates shall be filled with
grout.
3.2.10 Unfinished Work
Unfinished work shall be stepped back for joining with new work. Toothing may be resorted to
only when specifically approved. Loose mortar shall be removed and the exposed joints shall be
thoroughly cleaned before laying new work.
3.2.11 Masonry Wall Intersections
Each course shall be masonry bonded at corners and elsewhere as shown. Masonry walls shall be
anchored or tied together at corners and intersections with bond beam reinforcement and
prefabricated corner or tee pieces of joint reinforcement as shown.
3.2.12 Partitions
Partitions shall be continuous from floor to underside of floor or roof deck where shown.
Openings in firewalls around joists or other structural members shall be filled as indicated or
approved. Where suspended ceilings on both sides of partitions are indicated, the partitions other
than those shown to be continuous may be stopped approximately 200 mm above the ceiling
level. An isolation joint shall be placed in the intersection between partitions and structural or
exterior walls as shown. Interior partitions having 100 mm nominal thick units shall be tied to
intersecting partitions of 100 mm units, 125 mm into partitions of 150 mm units, and 175 into
partitions of 200 mm or thicker units. Cells within vertical plane of ties shall be filled solid with
grout for full height of partition or solid masonry units may be used. Interior partitions having
masonry walls over 100 mm thick shall be tied together with joint reinforcement. Partitions
containing joint reinforcement shall be provided with prefabricated pieces at corners and
intersections or partitions.
3.3
CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

3.3.1
General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Spacing
of control and expansion joints shall conform to Structural Drawing G-S001 (General
Notes), ACI 530 and 530.1, and Masonry Design Manual. Build-in related items as
masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless
provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition.
Page | 13 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.3.2
Shop drawings indicating details and location of these joints shall be submitted by the
Contractor to the Contracting Officers' approval. Control joints shall be constructed by
using mortar to fill the head joint in accordance with the details shown on the drawings.
The vertical mortar joint at control joint locations shall be continuous, including through
all bond beams. This shall be accomplished by utilizing half blocks in alternating courses
on each side of the joint. The control joint key shall be interrupted in courses containing
continuous bond beam steel. In one or more open areas, with at least one area being 20
mm or greater in width.
3.3.3
Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:

3.3.3.1 Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units
on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake joints in
exposed faces.
3.3.3.2
Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
3.3.3.3
Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips
at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake joint.
3.3.3.4
Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit
masonry is complete.
Build in horizontal, pressure-relieving joints where indicated; construct joints
by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width
required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
3.3.3.5
3.3.3.6
Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting

masonry veneer and attached to structure behind masonry veneer
3.4 CONCRETE MASONRY VENEER JOINTS

Concrete masonry veneer joints shall be provided and constructed as shown on the drawings.
Joints shall be kept free of mortar and other debris.
3.5
MASONRY HEAD RESTRAINT

Shall conform to ACI 530 and 530.1, and Masonry Design Manual. However, for external
reinforced masonry walls and non-reinforced internal partitions head restraint shall be not more
than 4000 mm.
3.6
SHELF ANGLES
Shelf angles shall be adjusted as required to keep the masonry level and at the proper elevation.
Shelf angles shall be galvanized. Shelf angles shall be provided in sections not longer than 3 m
and installed with a 6 mm gap between sections. Shelf angles shall be mitered and welded at
building corners with each angle not shorter than 1.2 m, unless limited by wall configuration.
Page | 14 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.7
LINTELS
3.7.1 Precast Concrete and Steel Lintels

Precast concrete and steel lintels shall be as shown on the drawings. Lintels shall be set in a full
bed of mortar with faces plumb and true. Steel and precast lintels shall have a minimum bearing
length of 200 mm unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
3.8 SILLS AND COPINGS
Sills and copings shall be set in a full bed of mortar with faces plumb and true.
3.9 ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE AND STRUCTURAL STEEL
3.9.1 Anchorage to Concrete
Anchorage of masonry to the face of concrete columns, beams, or walls shall be with dovetail
anchors spaced not over 400 mm on centers vertically and 600 mm on center horizontally.
3.9.2 Anchorage to Structural Steel
Masonry shall be anchored to vertical structural steel framing with adjustable steel wire anchors
spaced not over 400 mm on centers vertically, and if applicable, not over 600 mm on centers
horizontally.
3.10 INSULATION
3.10.1 Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 300 mm o.c., both ways on inside
face or attach to inside face with plastic fasteners designed for this purpose. Fit courses of
insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly
both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown. Fill
cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and masonry.
3.11
POINTING AND CLEANING

After mortar joints have attained their initial set, but prior to hardening, mortar and grout daubs or
splashings shall be completely removed from masonry-unit surfaces that will be exposed or
painted. Before completion of the work, defects in joints of masonry to be exposed or painted
shall be raked out as necessary, filled with mortar, and tooled to match existing joints.
Immediately after grout work is completed, scum and stains which have percolated through the
masonry work shall be removed using a high pressure stream of water and a stiff bristled brush.
Masonry surfaces shall not be cleaned, other than removing excess surface mortar, until mortar in
joints has hardened. Masonry surfaces shall be left clean, free of mortar daubs, dirt, stain, and
discoloration, including scum from cleaning operations, and with tight mortar joints throughout.
Metal tools and metal brushes shall not be used for cleaning.
3.11.1 Concrete Masonry Unit and Concrete Brick Surfaces

Exposed concrete masonry unit and concrete brick surfaces shall be dry-brushed at the end of
each day's work and after any required pointing, using stiff-fiber bristled brushes.
Page | 15 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.12 PROTECTION
Facing materials shall be protected against staining. Top of walls shall be covered with
nonstaining waterproof covering or membrane when work is not in progress. Covering of the top
of the unfinished walls shall continue until the wall is waterproofed with a complete roof or
parapet system. Covering shall extend a minimum of 600 mm down on each side of the wall and
shall be held securely in place. Before starting or resuming, top surface of masonry in place shall
be cleaned of loose mortar and foreign material.
3.13 TEST REPORTS
3.13.1 Field Testing of Mortar
At least three specimens of mortar shall be taken each day. A layer of mortar 13 to 16 mm thick
shall be spread on the masonry units and allowed to stand for one minute. The specimens shall
then be prepared and tested for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 780.
3.13.2 Field Testing of Grout
Field sampling and testing of grout shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of
ASTM C 1019. A minimum of three specimens of grout per day shall be sampled and tested.
Each specimen shall have a minimum ultimate compressive strength of 13.8 MPa at 28 days.
Page | 16 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1 BITUMINOUS SHEET MEMBRANE
WATERPROOFING
1.1.2 LININGS
1.2
REFERENCES
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.4
TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE
1.5
WARRANTY
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.7
JOB CONDITIONS
07100-2/6
07100-2/6
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
WATERPROOFING MATERIALS
2.1.1 GENERAL WATERPROOFING
2.1.2 PLANTER BOXES
2.1.3 LINING FOR WATER TANKS
2.1.4 LINING FOR SWIMMING POOL
AND FOUNTAIN
2.1.5 LINING OF LIFT STATION, SEWER
MANHOLES AND SUMP PITS
07100-4/6
07100-4/6
07100-4/6
07100-5/6
07100-5/6
2.2
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
2.2.1 PRIMERS
2.2.2 PROTECTION BOARD
2.2.3 SEPARATION LAYER
2.2.4 VAPOR BARRIER
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
Section 07100 Membrane Waterproofing
07100-2/6
07100-2/6
07100-2/6
07100-3/6
07100-3/6
07100-3/6
07100-3/6
07100-3/6
07100-5/6
07100-5/6
07100-6/6
07100-6/6
07100-6/6
07100-6/6
07100-6/6
07100-6/6
07100-6/6
Page | 1 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
PART 1 - GENERAL
0.1
SECTION INCLUDES
0.1.1 Bituminous sheet membrane waterproofing for the following:
0.1.1.1.
0.1.1.2.
1.1.1.3
0.1.1.4.
General waterproofing for all areas below grade as indicated on Drawings.

Toilets, washrooms and other wet areas.
Roof
Planter boxes.
0.1.2 Lining for the following:

0.1.2.1.
0.1.2.2.
0.1.2.3.
0.2
Water tanks.
Swimming pool and fountain.
Lift stations, sewer manholes and sump pits.
REFERENCES
0.2.1 ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
ASTM D 471
ASTM D 570
ASTM D 638
ASTM D 828
ASTM D 1004
ASTM E 96
ASTM E 154
0.3
Test Method for Rubber Property - Effect of Liquids

Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
Test Method for Tensile Breaking Strength of Paper and
Paperboard
Test Method for Initial Test Resistance of Plastic Film and
Sheeting
Standard Method of Test for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials
Test Method for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Earth under Concrete Slabs, on walls, or as Ground Cover
SUBMITTALS
0.3.1 Submit product data, samples, and general recommendations from waterproofing
materials manufacturer, for types of waterproofing required. Include data showing that
materials comply with the specified requirements.
0.4

0.4.1 Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened, labeled packing and in compliance with
the manufacturers storage, handling, installation and protection requirements.
Page | 2 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
0.5
WARRANTY
0.5.1 Provide written warranty, agreeing to replace and repair defective materials and
workmanship. Warranty includes responsibility for removal and replacement of other
work which conceals sheet waterproofing. Warranty period is 10 years after date of
substantial completion.
0.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
0.6.1 Manufacturer: Obtain primary waterproofing materials of each type required from a
single manufacturer, to the greatest extent possible. Provide secondary materials only as
recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
0.7
JOB CONDITIONS
0.7.1 Substrate: Proceed with waterproofing after completing substrate construction, openings
and penetrating works.
0.7.2 Weather: Proceed with waterproofing and associated works only when existing and
forecast weather conditions permit work to be performed in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
0.1
WATERPROOFING MATERIALS
0.1.1 General Waterproofing: High performance polymer modified bituminous sheet
membrane; reinforced with 200 g/m non-woven polyester fabric and complying with
the following requirements:
-
Softening Point: 155oC as per ASTM D 36
Penetration at 25oC: 20 - 30 dmm as per ASTM D 5
Heat Resistance, 2 hours at 120oC: No flow
Tensile Strength:
*
Longitudinal: 23 kN/m as per ASTM D 828
*
Transverse: 15.8 kN/m as per ASTM D 146
Elongation:
*
Longitudinal: 55 percent as per ASTM D 828
*
Transverse: 60 percent as per ASTM D 146
Tear Resistance:
*
Longitudinal: 195 N per DIN 53859
*
Transverse: 210 N as per DIN 53859
Puncture Resistance: 1155 N as per ASTM E 154
Page | 3 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Water Absorption: Less than 0.12 percent as per ASTM D 570 and ASTM D 471
Water Vapor Transmission: Less than 0.28 g/m2/24 hrs as per ASTM E 96,
Procedure E (37.8oC at 90% RH)
Water Permeability of Membrane at Seamed Joint: Absolutely impermeable
Waterproofing membrane shall be applied in accordance with the following:

2.1.1.1.
Horizontal and Vertical Waterproofing Applications for swimming pools,

fountains, potable and non-potable water tanks and other areas below grade as
shown on Drawings: Membrane shall be applied in 2 layers, fully bonded and
torch applied to the primed substrate as follows:
a.
b.
First Layer: 4 mm thick, black finish.

Second Layer: 3 mm thick, black finish.
2.1.1.2.
Wet areas (Kitchens, Toilets and Wash Areas): Single membrane (one layer)
with minimum thickness of 4 mm, fully bonded, torch applied to the primed
substrate.
2.1.1.3
Roof: Double membrane (two layers) with minimum thickness of 4 mm each

layer, fully bonded, torch applied to the primed substrate Refer to Section
07500 ROOFING for detailed requirements on roofing system.
2.1.2 Planter boxes: Double membrane (two layers) fully bonded torch applied to the primed
substrate as follows:
2.1.2.1.
First Layer: 3 mm thick, black finish with fine talcum on one side and a torchoff polyethylene foil fixed to the other side and contains a special anti-root
chemical additive.
2.1.2.2.
Second Layer: 3 mm thick, black finish with mineral granules on the top side
and a thin torch-off polyethylene foil fixed to the other side and contains a
special anti-root chemical additive.
0.1.3 Lining for Water Tanks:

0.1.3.1.
A two-component epoxy resin based, non-toxic, high build solvent-free

coating applied in two coats, 200 micron thick each, with glass-fiber
reinforcement grade 110 g/m (between coats) on the internal surfaces of the
tank unless recommended otherwise by the lining manufacturer.
0.1.4 Lining For Swimming Pool and Fountain:

0.1.4.1.
A single component pitch modified polyurethane coating conforming to

ASTM C 836 or BS 3900 applied in a single coat, 1.3 mm thick on the
internal surfaces as per the recommendations of the lining manufacturer and
suitable for ceramic tile application.
Page | 4 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
0.1.5 Lining for Lift Stations, Sewer Manholes and Sump Pits:
0.1.5.1.
0.2
A three-component system consisting of epoxy resin without solvents and

chemical resistant fillers applied in 2 coats, 300 microns thick each on
internal surfaces unless recommended otherwise by the lining Manufacturer.
2.2.1. Primers: Provide the type of primer as recommended by the waterproofing material
manufacturer.
2.2.2. Protection Board: Provide minimum 2.5 mm thick multi-layer pressure bonded board
with asphaltic impregnation as a protection for the waterproofing where indicated on the
Drawings.
2.2.3. Separation Layer: Non-woven polyester fabric, density 180 g/m and to be laid above the
membrane where shown on Drawings.
2.2.4. Vapor Barrier: Polyethylene sheeting conforming to ASTM D 4397, minimum 200
microns thick having a vapor permeance rating not exceeding 0.063 perms, and shall be
laid with 300 mm overlapping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
0.2
INSTALLATION
0.1.1 General: Waterproofing works shall be executed by a specialized Sub-Contractor
recommended by the waterproofing and/or lining manufacturer and approved by the
Contracting Officer.
0.1.2 Comply with waterproofing and/or lining manufacturer's recommendations regarding
installation details, surface preparation, torch applied process, priming of surfaces as well
as the overlapping.
0.1.3 Substrate shall be smooth, hard dry and free from high spots and depressions. Substrate
shall be swept clean and free from dust, loose cement scale, oil, grease, foreign
substances and debris.
0.1.4 Starting at the low point of the slab, apply the waterproofing membrane loose laid for
horizontal areas with minimum 50 mm overlap. All the joints shall be welded with hot
air. Lay non-woven polyester fabric separation layer over waterproofing membrane prior
to application of other finishing.
0.1.5. On vertical areas, apply the waterproofing membrane mechanically fixed to walls with
minimum 50 mm overlap. Use waterproofing manufacturer's standard fasteners with
PVC covering for welding to the membrane. All the joints shall be welded with hot air.
Apply protection board prior to backfilling.
0.1.6. Test the work after completion by water flooding to a minimum height of 75 mm for a
period of 48 hours.
Page | 5 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
0.1.7. For the application of waterproof lining, follow manufacturer's written instructions.
0.1.8. Submit 10 years guarantee for the waterproofing works done and the associated works
covering the failure of materials or workmanship. Guarantee shall be signed by
waterproofing Sub-Contractor and shall indicate which (Contractor or Sub-Contractor)
has assumed the responsibility for the removal and the replacement of the works
concealing the waterproofing work in case of failure of material or workmanship.
Page | 6 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING OVER
SURFACES
1.2
REFERENCES
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.4
QUALIFICATIONS
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
07160-2/4
07160-2/4
07160-2/4
07160-3/4
07160-3/4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SOLVENT-BASED ASPHALT DAMP-PROOFING
2.1.1 ASPHALTIC PRIMER
2.1.2 FIBRATED ASPHALT
07160-3/4
07160-3/4
07160-3/4
07160-3/4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SURFACE PREPARATION
3.2
APPLICATION OF BITUMINOUS DAMP-PROOFING
3.3
CLEAN-UP
3.4
PROTECTION
07160-3/4
07160-3/4
07160-4/4
07160-4/4
07160-4/4
Section 07160 Bituminous Damp-Proofing
07160-2/4
07160-2/4
Page | 1 of 4
WBRJ-12-C-0001

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1
Bituminous damp-proofing over surfaces of:

1.1.1.1.
1.1.1.2.
Structural concrete surfaces.

Non-structural concrete surfaces
Below grade as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein.

1.2 REFERENCES
ASTM D 41
(1993) Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing,

Damp-proofing and Waterproofing
(1993) Asphalt Roof Coatings - Asbestos
Free
ASTM D 4479

SASO 816
1.3
Damp-Proofing Bitumen Felts
SUBMITTALS
approval in accordance with SECTION 01300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-13 Certificates
Certificates attesting that the materials meet the requirements specified.
1.4
QUALIFICATIONS
Work shall be performed by skilled laborers thoroughly experienced in the type of bituminous
damp-proofing work specified to meet the requirements of the contract.
Page | 2 of 4
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Damp-proofing materials shall be delivered to the project site in the original sealed containers
bearing the name of manufacturer, contents and brand name, and stored in a weather-tight
enclosure to prevent moisture damage and absorption. Damp-proofing materials shall be
protected from freezing. Asphalt shall be stored off the ground on pallets, and covered on top and
all sides with breathable-type canvas tarpaulins. Plastic sheets cause condensation buildup and
therefore shall not be used to cover damp-proofing materials. Care shall be taken during storage
to avoid separation or settlement of the emulsion components. Damaged or deteriorated materials
shall be removed from the project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOLVENT-BASED ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
2.1.1 Asphaltic Primer

Primer for cold-applied solvent-based asphalt damp-proofing shall conform to ASTM D 41,
asbestos-free, non-fibrated, manufactured with highly ductile soft asphalts and selected
hydrocarbons.
2.1.2 Fibrated Asphalt
Fibrated solvent-based asphalt damp-proofing shall be cold-applied type conforming to ASTM D
4479 Type I, asbestos-free, manufactured with selected asphalts, stabilizers, mineral spirits and
fibrated with mineral fibers. Solvent-based asphalt shall contain 72 percent solids by weight, 65
percent solids by volume.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SURFACE PREPARATION
Surfaces scheduled for bituminous dampproofing shall be prepared in accordance with dampproofing manufacturer's recommendations. Surface preparation shall be approved prior to dampproofing application.
3.1.1 Protection of Surrounding Areas

Before starting the damp-proofing work, the surrounding areas and surfaces shall be protected
from spillage and migration of asphalt onto other work. Drains and conductors shall be protected
from clogging with asphalt.
3.1.2 Concrete Surfaces
Surfaces shall be properly cured, free of form release agents, oil, grease, dirt, laitance, loose
material, frost, debris and other contaminants. Form ties shall be cut flush with surface. Sharp
protrusions and form match lines shall be removed. Holes, voids, spalled areas and cracks which
can damage the damp-proofing materials and impair performance shall be repaired. Rough
surfaces shall be parged with a well-adhering coat of cement mortar.
Page | 3 of 4
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.2
APPLICATION OF BITUMINOUS DAMP-PROOFING
3.2.1 Solvent-Based Asphalt

Solvent-based asphalt damp-proofing work shall not be performed in temperatures below 4
degrees C. Damp-proofing materials shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's
published instructions to produce a smooth uniform dry film not less than 0.3 mm thick without
voids or defects. Dull or porous spots shall be recoated. Damp-proofing materials shall seal
tightly around pipes and other items projecting through damp proofing. Rates of application shall
be as follows:
a.
Primer: 0.4 liters per square meter, cold-applied.
b.
Damp-proofing Coat: 0.8 liters per square meter, cold-applied with spray, brush or
trowel.
3.3 CLEAN-UP
Surfaces of other work which are stained with damp-proofing materials shall be cleaned with a
cleaner recommended by damp-proofing manufacturer.
3.4 PROTECTION
The completed damp-proofing work shall be protected from damage during and after
construction.
Page | 4 of 4
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 7450 INSULATED SANDWICH PANEL SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.3
Contract Drawings and general provisions of the Construction Contract, including

CONTRACT CLAUSES and CONDITIONS, and other Division I Contract Specification
Sections apply to work of this Section.
The scope of these works shall include the design, fabrication, supply, and installation of
insulated sandwich panel system as indicated in these specifications and as noted below.
1.
Engineering design of insulated sandwich panel building system including the

preparation of fixing details, shop and erection drawings.
2.
The fabrication, surface finishing, packaging and delivery of insulated sandwich panel
materials to the job site.
3.
The installation and erection of insulated sandwich panel building system under
supervision of manufacturers qualified technical staff.
The extent and location of insulated sandwich panel building enclosure are as indicated on
the Contract Drawings and as noted below.
1.
Insulated sandwich paneling system to the new building enclosures as shown on the
drawings
2.
Factory made corner and special pieces as required to complement standard straight
panels
3.
Wall/roof closure panels as required to suit design and field conditions
4.
Factory made custom trim, lintels and accessories as required
The intent of these specifications and drawings is to establish a quality and performance level
for design, material, finishing, durability, and workmanship.
SUBMITTALS
For insulated sandwich panels, submit the following in accordance with the general contract
provisions.
1.
Product data for each prime material used in fabrication. Brochures and catalog
information shall be submitted to describe in detail the insulated sandwich panels to be
furnished.
Section 7450 Insulated Sandwich Panel System
Page | 1 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The panels and supports shall be the design of a manufacturer who is regularly engaged in the
fabrication of an insulated sandwich panel system. All materials shall be new, unused, and
free from defects.
B.
The following standards and criteria (of most recent issue) shall be used where applicable in
the structural design of the building covered by these specifications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
1.5
Shop drawings for each type and size of fabricated unit, at 1:50 scale for plans, elevations,
and sections; and size for details of support, framing, and interface with other work.
Shop drawings must clearly indicate the geometric layout of the main structural enclosure
as well as the secondary support members. They shall comprise layout plans, sections,
anchor and connection details, as well as all other relevant fixing details between wall and
roof panels and adjacent components.
ANSI standards for cementious backer units (CBU), A118.9-1990

Underwriters' Laboratory standards as required for any fire-rated assemblies.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards for masonry, cements,
aggregates, mortars, grouts, admixtures, reinforcements, accessories etc that are
applicable to this section.
Steel Construction Manual American Institute of Steel Construction
Cold Formed Steel Design Manual- American Iron and Steel Institute
Code for Welding in Building Construction American Welding Society
The design, fabrication, surface finishing & building frame erection shall be in accordance
with ISO 9001, Quality System procedures.

A.
Comply with design criteria for packaging, handling, protection, storage, and delivery of all
wall panel and cladding components.
B.
Delivery: Deliver panel materials to project site in manufacturer's containers, bundles, pallets
or other standard packaging devices, fully identified with name, type, grade, color and size.
C.
Storage: Store panels and accessories on platforms and protect from weather, soiling,
moisture and damage. Panels are to be handled and not dumped during delivery and
installation to minimize damage. Store cementious ingredients in dry, weather tight
enclosure and protect against contamination and warehouse set. Stockpile and handle
aggregates to prevent contamination from foreign materials.
D.
Co-ordination: Co-ordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work of all
other trades.
E.
Protection:
Page | 2 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.
Protection of Work: During erection, if rain is imminent, cover top of walls with heavy
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures
when work is not in progress.
2.
Uniform Loads: Do not apply uniform wall or roof loading for at least 12 hours after
erecting insulated sandwich panel system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATED SANDWICH PANELS (ISP)

A.
The insulated sandwich panels covered by this specification shall be an integrated assembly
of synthetic polystyrene insulation foam between fiber-reinforced cement board sheets. The
overall system shall be sandwich type construction, interconnected face sheets with
unfinished exposed surfaces.
B.
The typical insulated sandwich panel sizes shall be in 600mm modular widths in lengths up to
3.0M. Overall nominal thickness shall be 150mm for typical wall panels, roof panels to be
200mm thick or as otherwise required per structural performance.
1.
Overall panel weight: 87 kg/M2 (150mm thickness)
2.
Polystyrene foam density: 40 kg/M3
3.
Thermal U-value: 0.32 W/MK at 100mm thick in accordance with ASTM C-236
(ASHRAE winter design) with 15 Mph wind outside, still air inside.
4.
Jointing system: tongue & groove, with reinforcing dowels and setting grout, square
ends
5.
Performance Characteristics:
a.
Water Resistance: non-penetrable per AEST (Australian Standard)
b.
Fire Resistance: 3-hours per CSIRO (Australian Standard)
c.
Compressive strength (composite panel) > 3.5Mpa
d.
Airborne Sound Transmission loss > 47dB per ASTM E90
6.
Overall strength: maximum deflection of L/180 at 1000 N/M2 pressure per ASTM E72
a.
Axial panel load bearing: 122kN per panel
b.
Bending: 5 kN/M
c.
Anchor Pullout test: 4.35 kN
d.
Anchor Shear test: 7.4 kN
C.
Support anchors shall include stainless steel rivets, corrosion resistant power nails and bolts
in conjunction with assorted clip angles and hold-down channels.
D.
Corners, lintels and special panels shall be factory fabricated using the basic panel
components to match colors, modular dimensions and panel joints. Polymer coated glass
fiber reinforcing mesh and tapes for joints and plastering lath.
Page | 3 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Materials shall conform to the requirements specified for the particular item, and where these
requirements are not specified in detail the material shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer and designed for the intended use. All materials shall be subject to the approval
of the Project Director prior to the fabrication of the insulated sandwich panel materials.
1.
External panel layer shall be rigid board composed of fiber-reinforced cement and
calcium silicate, 6.0mm thick, natural gray color.
2.
Internal panel layer shall be composed of same sheet material as the external layer with
a smooth exposed surface for skim plaster & paint finish.
3.
The external and internal layers shall be bonded together by a solid lightweight core of
Portland cement and expanded polystyrene bead aggregate, continuously poured in
place and cured into a rigid board form, free from air pockets, bubbles or blistering.
Foam insulation shall be 95% closed cell structure with the following properties.
a.
b.
c.
B.
2.3
Minimum density of 40 kg/M3 as determined by ASTM D 1622-75

Minimum tensile strength of 350 N/M2 as determined by ASTM C 297-76
Minimum compressive strength of 0.34 MPa as determined by ASTM C 365-76
Certificate of compliance for all approved materials used in fabrication of the insulated
sandwich panels shall be submitted. A method of fabrication statement shall also be
submitted for approval.
SUPPORT SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A.
Fasteners
Insulated sandwich panels shall be secured to supporting frame structure by means of
concealed clip angles and mating brackets. Clip angles and brackets shall be fixed to the
panels and support frame by self-tapping sheet metal screws, Hilti power nails and/or rivets.
All attachment devices and related fasteners shall be of stainless steel or equal corrosion
resistant materials.
B.
Support Frame and Secondary Structure

1.
Supporting frame members shall consist of steel I beam sections and rectangular
hollow tubes conforming to ASTM A53, BS EN 1387 steel, or as specified in the
design. Tubes shall be closed at both ends and fixed to primary structural elements via
steel angles welded in place. The supports shall transmit both compressive and tensile
forces of the panels as required.
2.
Supports and angles shall be included as a secondary structure for connection of the
roof decking materials. Component members for the secondary system shall be
manufactured from appropriate I, C, or U profiles of formed steel or box sections
(tubes).
Page | 4 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
C.
3.
Flashing & closure elements shall be roll formed of galvanized sheet material, into
ribbed profiles using required materials gauges for structural stability.
4.
All flashings, perimeter edge trim, gutters, closures, etc shall be provided as needed to
ensure the finished building enclosure will be air & dust-tight. Trim pieces and
flashings shall be factory formed from galvanized steel sheet of suitable gauge.
5.
All welding shall conform to ANSI/AWS D1.1 standards.
Related components
1.
2.
2.4
All related components including profiled joint stripping, neoprene sheet, foam cell
closures, sealants, etc shall be provided as required to insure a weather tight installation
for the composite building panel system.
Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 0.86-mm minimum
thickness.
GROUT MATERIALS
A.
The following raw materials for grout and mortar setting mixes shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Portland Cement: ASTM C-150, Type I. Provide natural color gray cement as required
to produce the required mortar or grout mix.
Aggregates: ASTM C-144, except for joints less than 6mm (1/4") use aggregate grades
with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve.
Water: Clean, free of deleterious materials that would impair strength or bond.
Elastisizer: An approved proprietary mortar additive which improves workability,
elasticity, adhesion and strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
The insulated sandwich panel system shall be in compliance with building design codes, or
equivalent internationally approved standard. All loading criteria shall be clearly stated and
all load cases and load combinations must comply with ANSI-ASCE 6-95, or equivalent
internationally approved standard.
B.
The basic design loads shall include live, wind, and seismic, in addition to dead load. All
other design loads, whether they are static, dynamic or kinetic in nature, shall be considered
as auxiliary loads.
C.
The Contractor shall ensure that the building frame supporting structure can safely
accommodate all loads, reactions and moments induced by the insulated sandwich panels and
super-imposed equipment loads according to the design analysis.
Page | 5 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.2
FABRICATION
A.
The manufacturer shall provide all panel members, anchor bolts, bearing plates and
accessories necessary for a complete building installation. Each panel shall be clearly
marked in accordance with all shop and erection drawings for ease of identification and
installation. The wall panel system shall be manufactured in accordance with the
requirements of BS EN ISO 9001:1994 or the approved equivalent.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install insulated sandwich panels as indicated, including materials, accessories, and devices
which have been shipped disassembled, in compliance with manufacturer's/fabricator's
instructions. Set plumb and level, true to line and location. Reinstall elements of steel
support or accessory units, which have been disassembled for shipment/handling/installation.
B.
All installation works shall be carried out by a qualified erection company with extensive
experience in installation of such insulated sandwich panel system.
C.
Bonding Slurry
A bonding slurry for joints between insulated sandwich panels shall consist of the following
components & mix design.
1. 1-part fine washed sand by volume
2. 6-parts Portland Type GP cement by volume
3. Sufficient water to form a slurry of workable consistency
Mixing should be performed either by hand, using a clean container and mixing tool or in a
cement mixer by adding sand and cement to water, whilst mixing continuously to ensure a
smooth, homogenous consistency that is free of lumps. The volume of mix made at any one
time shall not exceed amount required to lay the quantity of wall panels within 45-60 minutes
from initial mixing time and is dependent on climatic conditions.
D.
Mortar Bed
The mortar bed mix for setting insulated sandwich panels onto concrete foundations shall
consist of the following components & mix design.
1. 3-parts blended washed sand by volume
2. 1-part Portland Type GP cement by volume
3. 1-part water/elastisizer mix (more may be added during mixing to achieve optimal
consistency).
Mixing should be performed in a cement mixer free of fresh or loose mortar residues by
adding aggregates to the water/elastisizer mix (initially proportioned as one part by volume),
whilst mixing continuously to ensure a smooth, homogenous consistency that is free of
lumps.
All components shall be measured by means of calibrated containers.
Water/elastisizer mix may be added in the specified proportions to impart a consistency such
that it may be loosely shaped by hand into ball form leaving hands moist but not wet. The
volume of mix made at any one time shall not exceed amount required to lay the quantity of
Page | 6 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
wall panels within 45-60 minutes from initial mixing time and is dependent on climatic
conditions.
E.
Joint Grout
Grout fill for dowel & reinforcement joints between insulated sandwich panels shall be a drybagged proprietary brand, fine aggregate/cement/admixtures type grout with high-flow and
shrinkage properties, non-staining in the course of its application and of a compressive
strength in excess of 20Mpa. Mixing shall be in accordance with the Manufacturers
instructions.
3.4
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES:
A.
Variation from Plumb

For vertical lines and surfaces of walls, do not exceed 6mm in 3 meters or 10mm in a story
height not to exceed 6 meters, nor 13mm in 12 meters or more. For external corners,
expansion joints, control joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 6mm in any story
or 6 meters maximum nor 13mm in 12 meters or more.
B.
Variation from Level

For lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines,
do not exceed 6mm in any bay or 6-M maximum, nor 20mm in 12 M or more.
C.
Variation of Linear Building Line

For position shown in plan and related portion of columns, walls and partitions, do not
exceed 13mm in any bay or 6 meters maximum, nor 20mm in 12 meters or more.
D.
Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions

For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed 6mm.
3.5
REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING

A.
Loose or broken panels:

Repair or replace panels which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or
if panels do not match adjoining surfaces, adjust and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed
to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B.
Pointing:
Point-up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform
appearance, properly prepared for application of caulking, sealant compounds, painting
primers or under layers, finishing materials and textures.
C.
Cleaning:
Page | 7 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Clean exposed panel finishes by dry brushing at the end of each day's work and after final
pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings.
Clean overall panel finish surfaces not less than 6 days after completion of work, using clean
water & stiff-bristle brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid type cleaning agents or other
cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers. Installer shall advise Contractor of proper
procedures to protect insulated sandwich panel work from deterioration, discoloration or
damage during construction and until acceptance of the work.
Page | 8 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.2
REFERENCES
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.3.1 PRODUCT DATA
1.3.2 SAMPLES
1.3.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
1.4
1.5
WARRANTY
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6.1 MANUFACTURER
1.6.2 INSTALLATION
1.6.3 THERMAL RESISTANCE
1.6.4 FIRE PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
1.7
JOB CONDITIONS
07500-2/6
07500-2/6
07500-2/6
07500-2/6
07500-2/6
07500-2/6
07500-2/6
07500-3/6
07500-3/6
07500-3/6
07500-3/6
07500-3/6
07500-3/6
07500-3/6
07500-3/6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INVERTED ROOFING SYSTEM
2.1.1 ROOF SCREED
2.1.2 BITUMINOUS SHEET MEMBRANE
WATERPROOFING
2.1.3 ROOF THERMAL INSULATION
2.1.3.1 CONSTRUCTION
2.1.3.2 RIGID ROOF INSULATION
BOARDS
2.1.4 SEPARATION LAYER
2.1.5 PROTECTION LAYER
2.1.6 FLASHING MATERIALS
2.1.7 ROOF TOPPING
2.1.7.1 GRAVEL SURFACING
2.1.7.2 CONCRETE TILES
07500-4/6
07500-4/6
07500-4/6
07500-4/6
07500-4/6
07500-4/6
07500-4/6
07500-4/6
07500-4/6
07500-4/6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
3.2
3.2.1 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE
3.2.2 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
3.2.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION
3.2.4 ROOF TOPPING
3.3
PROTECTION OF ROOFING
07500-5/6
07500-5/6
07500-5/6
07500-5/6
07500-6/6
07500-6/6
07500-6/6
07500-6/6
Section 07500 Roofing
07500-4/6
07500-4/6
07500-4/6
Page | 1 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001

PART 1 GENERAL
0.1
0.2
SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1. Inverted roofing system and the integral accessories related to the system installation as
indicated on Drawings and as specified herein.
1.1.2.
REFERENCES
1.2.1. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
ASTM C 495
Test Method for Compressive Strength of Lightweight Insulating
Concrete
ASTM D 471
Test Method for Rubber Property - Effect of Liquids
ASTM D 570
Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
ASTM D 638
Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
ASTM D 828
Test Method for Tensile Breaking Strength of Paper and
Paperboard
ASTM D 1004
Test Method for Initial Test Resistance of Plastic Film and
Sheeting
ASTM E 84
Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
ASTM E 96
Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
ASTM E 119
Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
ASTM E 136
Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace
at 750oC
ASTM E 154
Test Method for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Earth under Concrete Slabs, on walls, or as Ground Cover
1.2.2 SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization
SASO 1335
Thermal Insulation Conditions for Buildings.
SASO 1554
Expanded polystyrene insulation boards Part 1: Boards
manufactured from expandable beads
SASO 1555
Expanded polystyrene insulation board Part 2: Extruded boards.
SASO 1029
Cement Tiles
SASO 1028
Methods of Test for Cement Tiles.
SASO 142
SASO 143
Portland Cement, Ordinary and Rapid Hardening
0.3.
SUBMITTALS
1.3.1. Product Data: Submit specifications, installation instructions, and general
recommendations from the roofing materials manufacturer for each type of roofing
product required. Include the manufacturer's data substantiating that the materials used
are in compliance with the requirements.
0.3.2. Samples: Submit samples of each roofing system material for the Contracting Officer's
approval.
Page | 2 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
0.3.3. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings showing roof configurations and sheet
layout, perimeter details as well as special conditions.
0.4 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE
1.4.1. Deliver materials in the manufacturer's unopened, labeled packing, and conform to the
manufacturer's storage, handling, installation and protection requirements.
0.5
WARRANTY
1.5.1. Provide a written warranty, signed by the Manufacturer of the primary roofing materials
and the Installer, agreeing to replace and repair defective materials and workmanship
for a period of 10 years starting from date of substantial completion.
0.6.
0.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
0.6.1.
Manufacturer: Provide primary products for the roofing system produced by a single
manufacturer to the greatest possible extent. Provide secondary products which are
acceptable to the manufacturer of primary products.
0.6.2.
Installation: Work under this Section shall be performed by a specialized SubContractor approved by the Contracting Officer, recommended by the waterproofing
membrane manufacturer, and having at least 10 years experience in successfully
completed projects.
0.6.3.
Thermal Resistance: Where thermal resistance properties of insulating materials are

designated by the R-values they represent the rate of heat flow through a material of
thickness indicated, measured by the test method included in the referenced material
standard or as otherwise indicated.
0.6.4.
Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials which are identical to

those whose fire performance characteristics, as listed for each material or assembly of
which insulation is a part, have been determined by testing according to the methods
indicated below:
0.6.4.1.
Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84 or equivalent standards.
0.6.4.2.
Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119 or equivalent standards.
0.6.4.3.
Combustibility Characteristics: ASTM E 136 or equivalent standards.
JOB CONDITIONS
1.7.1. Weather: Proceed with roofing work when the existing and forecasted weather conditions
permit work to be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
and warranty requirements.
Page | 3 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
PART 2 PRODUCTS
0.1.

0.1.1
Roof Screed: Lightweight concrete with oven dry density of 640 - 800 Kg/m, when
tested as per ASTM C 495 and minimum compressive strength 3 MPa, when tested
in accordance with ASTM C 495. Foaming agent shall be as recommended by the
Manufacturer. Mix design shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and
approved by the Contracting Officer. Thickness as recommended by the
manufacturer (but not less than 50 mm thick), and shall be applied to roof to
maintain the required slope.
0.1.2.
Bituminous Sheet Membrane Waterproofing: Refer to Section 07100 MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING.
0.1.3
Roof Thermal Insulation:

0.1.3.1. Construction: Close-celled, extruded polystyrene rigid foam, 80 mm
thick, with integral high density skin, conforming to ASTM C 578 or
DIN 18164 Part 1; flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84; 5-year aged average thermal conductivity
of 0.032 W/mK when tested at 24oC in accordance with ASTM C 518;
water vapor permeability of 0.60 perm-inch average; average water
absorption of maximum 1 percent by volume; with rebate details on four
edges of board.
0.1.3.2.
Rigid roof insulation boards: shall have compressive strength of 300 kPa
average when tested according to ASTM D 1621 and minimum density
32 kg/m.
0.1.4.
Separation Layer: Non-woven polyester fabric of a minimum density of 200 g/m

and to be laid above the roof insulation.
0.1.5.
Protection Layer: High density polyethylene sheeting conforming to ASTM E

154, 250 microns (10 mils) thick. Similar material having a vapor permeance
rating not more than 0.3 perm as determined by ASTM E 96, Procedure E will be
considered suitable when approved by the Contracting Officer.
0.1.6.
Flashing Materials: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum system

compatible with the roofing membrane.
0.1.7.
Roof Topping:
2.1.7.1
Gravel Surfacing: Where indicated on Drawings, provide round edge
pea gravel aggregates with diameter size of 15 - 30 mm, and total
thickness of 50 mm only for areas shown on the Drawings.
2.1.7.2
Concrete Tiles: Lay concrete tiles where indicated on Drawings. Size

shall be as shown on Drawings.
Page | 4 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
PART 3 EXECUTION
0.4
GENERAL:
0.5
3.1.1. Roof waterproofing works shall be executed by a specialized Sub-Contractor

recommended by the waterproofing membrane manufacturer and approved by the
3.1.2.
3.2.1. Preparation of Substrate:
3.2.1.1.
After completion and curing of roof screed, inspect condition of substrate to
receive roofing system, and conditions under which work will be
performed.
Correct unsatisfactory conditions including inadequate
provisions in substrate for bonding roofing. Do not proceed with roofing
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2.1.2.
Install cant strips, fillets, and accessory items as indicated, or as

recommended by the manufacturer even though not shown on Drawings.
3.2.1.3.
Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for
waterproofing application.
3.2.1.4.
Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent

spillage affecting other construction.
3.2.1.5.
Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form release agents, paints, and other
penetrating contaminants from concrete.
3.2.1.6.
Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb,
aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids.
3.2.1.7.
Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrate. Remove dust
and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
3.2.1.8.
Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations

and penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions.
3.2.2. Roofing Membrane Installation:

3.2.2.1.
Installation details: Perform external and internal corners, upstands,
drainage and pipes penetrations strictly in accordance with those shown
on the Drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.2.2.2
Membrane Installation: For Inverted Roofing System: Unroll, align

membrane then re-roll and bond to the primed substrate by melting
underside of membrane using a torch with gas burner. Lap seams
minimum 75 mm, and seal seam with hot trowel and excess mastic
Page | 5 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
sealer. Roofing membrane shall be fully bonded to the primed substrate.

Start laying of the roofing membrane from the lowest point when laid on
a surface to falls to ensure weathered overlaps.
3.2.2.3.
Test roof membrane after completion by flooding 75 mm water height

for a period of 48 hours.
3.2.3. Insulation Installation:

3.2.3.1.
Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instruction for particular
conditions of installation. Lay polyethylene sheet protection layer over
waterproofing membrane prior to installation of insulation boards.
3.2.3.2.
Extended insulation full thickness over entire area to be insulated. Cut and
fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove
projection interfering with placement.
3.2.3.3.
Lay non-woven polyester fabric separation layer over insulation prior to

installation of roof topping.
3.2.4. Roof Topping:

3.2.4.1.
After completing waterproofing membrane, composite flashing and set-on
accessories, as well as laying the insulation on each substantial area of
roofing, cover the area with the separation layer.
3.2.4.2.
0.3
Provide one of the following roof toppings as indicated on Drawings and as

follows:
a.
Aggregate Surfacing: Loose-fill the surface with a uniform layer of

pea gravel 50 mm thick.
b.
Concrete Tiles: Lay concrete tiles as per drawings.
PROTECTION OF ROOFING
0.3.1. Protect roofing upon completion of roofing work and during the remainder of
construction period. At the end of construction, or at the time when remaining
construction work will in no way affect or endanger the roofing, make a final inspection
of roofing and prepare a written report describing the nature and the extent of
deterioration or damage found in work.
0.3.2. Repair or replace the deteriorated or the defective work found at time of final inspection.
Repair or replace the roofing and associated work to a condition free of damage and
deterioration at time of substantial completion.
Page | 6 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001

PART 1 GENERAL
08110-2/6
1.1
REFERENCES
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
1.4
WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DOORS AND FRAMES
2.2
FIRE RATED DOORS
2.3
THERMAL INSULATED DOORS
2.4
SECURITY DOORS
2.5
WEATHERSTRIPPING
2.6
TRANSOM AND SIDELIGHT PANELS
2.7
LOUVERS
2.8
GLAZING
2.9
FACTORY FINISH
08110-2/6
08110-3/6
08110-4/6
08110-4/6
08110-4/6
08110-4/6
08110-4/6
08110-4/6
08110-5/6
08110-5/6
08110-5/6
08110-5/6
08110-5/6
08110-5/6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
3.1.1 THERMAL INSULATED DOORS
3.1.2 SECURITY DOORS
08110-6/6
08110-6/6
08110-6/6
08110-6/6
Section 08110 Steel Doors And Frames
Page | 1 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)

AAMA 603.8
Pigmented Organic Coatings On Extruded Aluminum
ASTM C 236
ASTM C 976
ASTM D 2863
ASTM E 90
ASTM E 152
ASTM E 283
DHI-02

(1993) Steady-State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of
a Guarded Hot Box
(1990) Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Calibrated
Hot Box
(1991) Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to Support Candle-Like
Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index)
(1990) Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of
Building Partitions
(1981a) Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
(1991) Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen
DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTITUTE (DHI)
(1986) Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware
NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM)

NAAMM HMMA
862 (1987) Hollow Metal Manual; Section: Guide Specifications for
Commercial Security Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
NAAMM HMMA
865 (1992) Hollow Metal Manual; Section: Guide Specifications for Swinging
Sound Control Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
NFPA 80
NFPA 80A
NFPA 101
SDOI SDI-100
SDOI SDI-106
SDOI SDI-107
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

(1992) Fire Doors and Windows
(1993) Protection of Buildings from Exterior Fire Exposures
(1994) Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures
STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE (SDI)
(1991) Standard Steel Doors and Frames
(1991) Standard Door Type Nomenclature
(1984) Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement - Application)
Page | 2 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Contracting Officer approval is required for submittals with a "GA designation; submittals
approval in accordance with Section 01300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-04 Drawings:
Steel Doors and Frames; GA.
Drawings using standard door type nomenclature in accordance with SDOI SDI-106 indicating
the location of each door and frame, elevation of each model of door and frame, details of
construction, method of assembling sections, location and extent of hardware reinforcement,
hardware locations, type and location of anchors for frames, and thicknesses of metal. Drawings
shall include catalog cuts or descriptive data for the doors, frames, and weatherstripping including
air infiltration data and manufacturers printed instructions.
SD-09 Reports:
Fire Rated Doors; FIO.
A letter by a nationally recognized testing laboratory which identifies the product manufacturer,
type, and model; certifying that the laboratory has tested a sample assembly in accordance with
ASTM E 152 and issued a current listing for same.
SD-13 Certificates:
Fire Rated Doors; GA. Thermal Insulated Doors; FIO. Security Doors;GA. Sound Rated Doors;
FIO.
a. Certification of Oversized Fire Doors: Certificates of compliance in accordance with the
requirements of ASTM E 152 for fire doors exceeding the sizes for which label service is
available.
b. Certification of Security Door, Sound, Thermal Insulating Rating: Certification or test report
for security rating, sound rated thermal insulated doors shall show compliance with the specified
requirements. The certification, or test report, shall list the parameters and the type of hardware
and perimeter seals used to achieve the rating.
SD-14 Samples:
Steel Doors and Frames; GA.
Manufacturer's standard color samples of factory applied finishes.
Contractor shall submit proposed color schemes showing all finishing materials coordinated
together, for color selection.
1.3

During shipment, welded unit type frames shall be strapped together in pairs with heads at
opposite ends or shall be provided with temporary steel spreaders at the bottom of each frame.
Materials shall be delivered to the site in undamaged condition, and stored out of contact with the
ground and under a weathertight covering permitting air circulation. Doors and assembled frames
shall be stored in an upright position in accordance with DHI-02. Abraded, scarred, or rusty areas
shall be cleaned and touched up with matching finishes.
Page | 3 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.4
WARRANTY
Manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that extend beyond a 1 year
period shall be provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DOORS AND FRAMES
Doors and frames shall be factory fabricated in accordance with SDOI SDI-100 and the additional
requirements specified herein. Door grade shall be extra heavy duty (Grade III) 1.5mm thick
galvanized sheet. Doors and frames shall be prepared to receive hardware conforming to the
templates and information provided under Section 08700 BUILDERS' HARDWARE. Doors and
frames shall be reinforced, drilled, and tapped to receive mortised hinges, locks, latches, and flush
bolts as required. Doors and frames shall be reinforced for surface applied hardware. Frames
shall be welded type located as shown. Frames for interior doors shall extend 15mm beyond wall
edges both sides. Rubber silencers shall be furnished for installation into factory predrilled holes
in door frames; adhesively applied silencers are not acceptable. Where frames are installed in
plaster or masonry walls, plaster guards shall be provided on door frames at hinges and strikes.
Full glass doors shall conform to SDOI SDI-100, Model 3, and shall include provisions for
glazing. Reinforcing of door assemblies for closers and other required hardware shall be in
accordance with SDOI SDI-100 and the conditions of the fire door assembly listing when
applicable. Exterior doors shall have top edges closed flush and sealed against water penetration.
2.2 FIRE RATED DOORS
Fire rated door assemblies shall bear the listing identification label of a nationally recognized
testing laboratory qualified to perform tests of fire door assemblies in accordance with ASTM E
152 and having a listing for the tested assemblies. The fire resistance rating shall be as shown.
Doors exceeding the sizes for which listing label service is offered shall be in accordance with
ASTM E 152. Listing identification labels shall be constructed and permanently applied by a
method which results in their destruction should they be removed.
2.3 THERMAL INSULATED DOORS
The interior of thermal insulated doors shall be completely filled with rigid plastic foam
permanently bonded to each face panel. The thermal conductance (U-value) through the door
shall not exceed 2.33 W/sq m times K when tested as an operational assembly in accordance with
ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976. Doors with cellular plastic cores shall have a minimum oxygen
index rating of 22 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2863.
Page | 4 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.4 SECURITY DOORS

Security type doors and frames shall be factory fabricated in accordance with NAAMM HMMA
862 and the additional requirements specified herein Doors and frames shall be galvanized 1.7
mm construction.
Doors shall have 1.7 mm steel plate on both sides, and be internally
reinforced vertically with continuous 1.0 mm
steel stiffeners spaced 150 mm on center
maximum. Doors shall be fully welded seamless construction with no visible seams or joints on
their faces or vertical edges. Door thickness shall be 44.5 mm. Exterior doors shall be insulated to
provide a thermal conductance (U-value) not to exceed 2.33 W/ sq m times K when tested as an
operational assembly in accordance with ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976. Doors with cellular
plastic cores shall have a minimum oxygen index rating of 22 percent when tested in accordance
with ASTM D 2863. Door frames shall be all welded type, with double rabbet jamb profile. At
meeting stiles, an astragal shall be provided by extending the face panel of the active leaf not less
than 16 mm across the gap between the two leaves. Astragal shall be flush with the face panel of
the inactive leaf. Frame corners shall be machine-mitered, full (continuously) welded. All
exposed welds shall be ground and finished smooth.
2.5 WEATHERSTRIPPING
Unless otherwise specified in Section 08700 BUILDERS' HARDWARE, weather-stripping shall
be as follows: Weatherstripping for head and jamb shall be manufacturer's standard elastomeric
type of synthetic rubber, vinyl, or neoprene and shall be installed at the factory or on the job site
in accordance with the door frame manufacturer's recommendations. Weatherstripping for bottom
of doors shall be as shown.
2.6 TRANSOM AND SIDELIGHT PANELS
Panels for transom and sidelight shall be constructed in accordance with SDOI SDI-100. Panels
shall be non-removable from the outside of exterior doors or the unsecure side of interior doors.
2.7 LOUVERS
Where indicated, doors shall be provided with full louvers or louver sections. Louvers shall be
sight-proof type inserted into the door. Inserted louvers shall be stationary. Louvers shall be nonremovable from the outside of exterior doors or the unsecure side of interior doors. Insect screens
shall be a removable type with 18 by 16 mesh aluminum or bronze cloth. Full louver doors shall
be in accordance with SDOI SDI-100, Grade III, Model 3.
2.8 GLAZING
Glazing shall be as specified in Section 08810 GLASS AND GLAZING. Removable glazing
beads shall be screw-on or snap-on type.
2.9 FACTORY FINISH
Doors and frames shall be factory finish enamel paint complying with requirements of Section
09900 PAINTING. Color shall be as selected and approved by the Contracting Officer.
Page | 5 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Installation shall be in accordance with DHI-02. Preparation for surface applied hardware shall be
in accordance with SDOI SDI-107. Rubber silencers shall be installed in door frames after finish
painting has been completed; adhesively applied silencers are not acceptable. Weatherstripping
shall be installed at exterior door openings to provide a weathertight installation. Installation and
operational characteristics of fire doors shall be in accordance with NFPA 80, NFPA 80A and
NFPA 101. Hollow metal door frames shall be solid grouted.
3.1.1 Thermal Insulated Doors
Hardware and perimeter seals shall be adjusted for proper operation. Doors shall be sealed
weathertight after installation of hardware and shall be in accordance with Section 07900 SEALANTS.
3.1.2 Security Doors
Door frames shall be rigidly anchored in place and provided with antispread space filler
reinforcements to prevent disengagement of the lock bolt by prying or jacking of the frame.
Jambs shall be filled solid with concrete grout.
Page | 6 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 08120 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.2
REFERENCES
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.3.1 PRODUCT DATA
1.3.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
1.3.3 CERTIFICATION
1.3.4 SAMPLES
1.4
1.5
WARRANTY
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
08120-2/7
08120-2/7
08120-3/7
08120-3/7
08120-3/7
08120-3/7
08120-3/7
08120-3/7
08120-3/7
08120-3/7
08120-4/7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
2.2
MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
2.3
FINISH
2.4
FABRICATION
08120-4/7
08120-4/7
08120-5/7
08120-5/7
08120-6/7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
3.2
ADJUST AND CLEAN
08120-7/7
08120-7/7
08120-7/7
Section 08120 Aluminum Doors And Frames
Page | 1 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 08120 - ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1.
1.2
Aluminum doors and frames as shown on Drawings and as specified herein.
REFERENCES
1.2.1
AAMA - American Aluminum Manufacturer Association

AAMA 101
AAMA 603.8
AAMA 605.2
AAMA 606.1
AAMA 607.1
AAMA 701.2
1.2.2
Aluminum Prime windows and Sliding Glass Doors

Pigmented Organic Coating on Extruded Aluminum.
High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and
Panels
Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum
Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum
Voluntary Specification for Pile Weather Stripping
AA - Aluminum Association:
Aluminum Association Designation System for Aluminum Finishes
1.2.3
ANSI - American National Standards Institute:

A134.1
1.2.4
Specification for Aluminum Prime windows
ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials:

ASTM B 136
ASTM B 137
ASTM B 209
ASTM B 211
ASTM B 221
ASTM B 244
ASTM D 2287
ASTM D 3656
ASTM E 283
ASTM E 330
ASTM E 331
Stain Resistance of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum

Weight of Coatings on Anodically Coated Aluminum
Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Bars, Rods and Wire
Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes
Thickness of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum with Eddy-Current
Instrument
Non-Rigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and
Extrusion Compounds
Insect Screening and Louver Cloth Woven From Vinyl-Coated Glass
fiber Yarn
Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and
Doors
Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors
Under the Influence of Wind Loads
Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by
Uniform Static Pressure Difference Loads
Page | 2 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
ASTM E 547
ASTM F 468
1.2.5
DIN - Deutsches Institut fuer Normung

DIN 4108
DIN 18055
1.2.6
1.4
Structural Welding Code, Steel.

Structural Welding Code, Aluminum.
SUBMITTALS
1.3.1
Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's specifications, standard details, and installation

recommendations for components of aluminum doors and framing required for project,
including data that products have been tested and comply with performance requirements.
1.3.2
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of aluminum doors
and framing, including elevations, detail sections of typical composite members, anchorages,
reinforcement, expansion provisions, and glazing
1.3.3
Certification: Submit statement certified by registered structural engineer that systems

including glass will withstand specified wind-loads.
1.3.4
Samples: Submit samples of each type and color of aluminum finish, on 300 mm long
sections of extrusions or formed shapes and on 150 mm square sheets.
1.3.5
Color Scheme: Contractor shall submit proposed color schemes showing all finishing
materials coordinated together, for color selection.

1.4.1.
1.5
Heat Insulation in Buildings.

Windows; Air Permeability of Joints, Water Tightness and Mechanical
Strain.
AWS - American Welding Society:

D1.
D1.2
1.3
Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by

Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference Loads
Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs for General Use
Deliver aluminum entrance material to the site in packages or containers; labeled for
identification with the Manufacturer's name, brand and contents. Store aluminum entrance
material in weather tight and dry storage facility. Protect from damage from handling,
weather and construction operations before, during and after installation.
WARRANTY
1.5.1.
Submit 2 copies of written guarantee signed by the Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor,
agreeing to replace aluminum door units which fail in material or workmanship within 1
year of date of substantial handing over.
Page | 3 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6.1
Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of Metal Curtain Wall, Window,

Storefront and Entrance Guide Specifications Manual - AAMA.
1.6.2
Performance and Testing:

1.6.2.1
Thermal Movement: Fabricate exterior components from Manufacturer's stock

systems which have been designed to provide for expansion and contraction
resulting from ambient temperature range of 48oC
1.6.2.2
Wind Loading: Fabricate exterior components from Manufacturer's stock systems

which have been tested in accordance with ASTM E 330 to withstand at least the
following loadings:
-
Uniform Pressure: 97.6 kg/m inward; 97.6 kg/m outward.
Maximum Deflection: 1/175 of clear span any framing member.
1.6.2.3
Weather Resistance: Fabricate exterior components from Manufacturer's stock

systems which have been tested to demonstrate permanent resistance to leakages
as follows with test pressure differential of 10 percent of design loading
(excluding operable door edges).
-
Air Infiltration: Tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 and shall have a
minimum of 0.6 m3/min/m of crack.
Water penetration and leakage shall not be allowed when tested in

accordance with ASTM E 331 at a water application rate 10 percent more
than the design rate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.2
SCHUCO
TECHNAL
Or approved equal manufacturer

2.2.1
Aluminum Members:
2.2.1.1
2.2.1.2
Extrusions of Bars, Rods and Tubes: 6063-T6 Alloy conforming to ASTM B 221
or DIN 1748.
Sheets and Plates: 5005-H14 alloy conforming to ASTM B 209 or DIN 1748.
Page | 4 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.2.1.3
2.2.1.4
2.2.2
Doors and frames shall be manufacturer standard systems of extrusions not less
than 3 mm thick.
Use manufacturer's standard thermal-break sections for all aluminum doors,
unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
Fasteners: Aluminum, or non-magnetic stainless steel, or other materials warranted by

Manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum components.
2.2.2.1
2.2.2.2
Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for application of

hardware. Match finish of adjoining metal.
Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners.
2.2.3
Glazing Gasket: Manufacturer's standard EPDM glazing gasket.
2.2.4
Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's high- strength aluminum units where feasible;
otherwise, non-magnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized complying with ASTM A 386.
2.2.5
Concrete/Masonry Inserts: Cast iron, malleable iron, or hot-dip galvanized steel complying
with ASTM A 386.
2.3.
Bituminous Coatings: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC - Paint 12, compounded for
20 mil thickness per coat.
2.4.
Glass: Double glazing as specified in Section 08800 - GLAZING and as indicated on Drawings with
all doors factory glazed.
2.5.
Hardware: Provide aluminum doors with Manufacturer's standard, factory-installed hardware

conforming to the requirements of Section 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE.
2.3
FINISH
2.3.1
2.4
Exposed aluminum surfaces shall have the manufacturer's standard powder-coated finish, 60
- 80 micron thick. Color shall match existing and approved by the Engineer.
FABRICATION
2.4.1.
Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for door and frame units including profile requirements,
shall be as shown on Drawings. Variable dimensions shall be indicated, together with
maximum and minimum dimensions required to achieve design requirements and
coordination with other work.
2.4.2.
Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other

work before shipment to project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation.
Page | 5 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.4.3.
Sequence: Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal work prior to
cleaning, finishing, surface treatment, and application of finishes. Remove arises from cut
edges and ease edges and corners.
2.4.4.
Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations to avoid discoloration; grind exposed welds
smooth and restore mechanical finish.
2.4.5.
Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as necessary for performance requirements; separate

dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or other separator which will prevent corrosion.
2.4.5.1.
Provide continuous steel reinforcing stiffening members within jambs and heads
of all door frames, except omit at jambs that are secured to adjacent fixed walls.
2.4.5.2.
Cut vertical reinforcing 50 mm less than mullion height and cut horizontal
reinforcing 75 mm less than door head framing member.
2.4.5.3.
Securely fasten in a manner so that fasteners will not be visible in finished work.
Fasten aluminum sections to steel reinforcing 150 mm from each end and
intermediately at a maximum spacing of 600 mm on centers.
Door frames shall be free of vibration and distortion when doors are used.
2.4.5.4.
2.4.6.
Door and frames shall be manufacturer standard systems of extrusions not less than 2.5 mm
thick.
2.4.7.
Use manufacturer's standard thermal-break sections for all double glazed doors, unless
otherwise shown on Drawings.
2.4.8.
Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting members.
2.4.9.
Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible.
2.4.10. Weatherstripping: For exterior doors, provide compression weatherstripping against fixed
strip; at other edges, provide sliding weatherstripping retained in adjustable strips mortised
in other edge.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1.
INSTALLATION
3.1.1.
Comply with Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of aluminum

doors and frames.
3.1.2.
Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors, or
panels. Anchor securely in place, separating aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces
from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials with
bituminous coating.
Page | 6 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.2.
3.1.3.
Set sill members and other members in bed of compound as shown, or with joint fillers or
gaskets as shown to provided weathertight construction.
3.1.4.
Expansion and Contraction: Allow for expansion and contraction due to temperature and
building movement, and for practical building tolerances in connections to basic structure
and in connections to work by others. At no place should window wall grid or framing
impart any expansion or contraction forces on panels or glass.
3.1.5.
Hardware Preparation and Installation: Cut, reinforce, drill and tap aluminum work for
application of finish hardware. Provide cover boxes in frames back of cutouts for hardware
also install finish hardware in accordance with hardware Manufacturer's instructions and
template requirements also use concealed fasteners wherever possible.
3.1.6.
Caulking: Seal joints between metal members and between metal and adjacent surfaces in
accordance with the requirements of Section 07900 - SEALANTS.
3.1.7.
Refer to Section 08800 - GLAZING for installation of glass and glazing requirements.
ADJUST AND CLEAN

3.2.1
Adjust operating hardware to function properly, without binding, and to provide tight fit at
contact points and weatherstripping.
3.2.2
Clean completed systems, inside and out, promptly after erection and installation of glass
and sealants. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances
from aluminum surfaces.
3.2.3
Remove protective coating when completion of adjoining works and construction activities
no longer requires its retention.
3.2.4
Institute protective measures and other precautions required to assure that aluminum doors
and frames will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of
acceptance.
Page | 7 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.2
REFERENCES
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.4
1.5
WARRANTY
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
08520-2/8
08520-2/8
08520-2/8
08520-3/8
08520-4/8
08520-4/8
08520-5/8
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1 GENERAL
2.1.2 ALUMINUM MEMBERS
2.1.3 FASTENERS
2.1.4 BRACKETS AND REINFORCEMENTS
2.1.5 CONCRETE/MASONRY INSERTS
2.1.6 BITUMINOUS COATINGS
2.1.7 SEALANTS
2.1.8 GLASS
2.1.9 WEATHER-STRIPPING
2.1.10 GLAZING GASKET
2.1.11 HARDWARE
08520-5/8
08520-5/8
08520-6/8
08520-6/8
08520-6/8
08520-6/8
08520-6/8
08520-6/8
08520-6/8
08520-6/8
08520-6/8
08520-7/8
08520-7/8
2.2
FINISHES
08520-7/8
2.3
FABRICATION
2.3.1 GENERAL
2.3.2 SIZES AND PROFILES
2.3.3 PRE-GLAZED FABRICATION
2.3.4 WEEPHOLES
2.3.5 WEATHER-STRIPPING
2.3.6 MULLIONS AND COVER PLATES
08520-7/8
08520-7/8
08520-7/8
08520-7/8
08520-7/8
08520-7/8
08520-8/8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
3.2
INSTALLATION
3.3
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Section 08520 Aluminum Windows
08520-8/8
08520-8/8
08520-8/8
08520-8/8
Page | 1 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1
1.2
Aluminum windows as shown on Drawings and specified herein.
REFERENCES
1.2.1
1.2.2
SASO - SAUDI ARABIAN STANDARDS ORGANIZATION

SASO 79
Aluminum and aluminum alloys products for architectural

application Part 1: Sheets, strips, bars and structural sections.
SASO 80
Testing methods for aluminum and aluminum alloys products for

building purposes Part 1: Sheets, strips, bars and structural
section.
SASO 1032
Methods of test for aluminum windows and doors.
SASO 1033
Aluminum windows.
AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturer Association

AAMA 101
Aluminum Prime windows and Sliding Glass Doors
AAMA 603.8 Pigmented Organic Coating on Extruded Aluminum
AAMA 605.2 High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions
and Panels
AAMA 606. Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum
AAMA 607.1 Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum
AAMA 701.2: Voluntary Specification for Pile Weather Stripping
1.2.3
AA - Aluminum Association
Aluminum Association Designation System for Aluminum Finishes
1.2.4
ANSI - American National Standards Institute:

A134.1
1.2.5
Specification for Aluminum Prime Windows.
ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials:

ASTM B 136
ASTM B 137
ASTM B 209
ASTM B 211
Stain Resistance of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum

Weight of Coatings on Anodically Coated Aluminum
Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Bars, Rods and Wire
Page | 2 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
ASTM B 221
ASTM B 244
Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes

Thickness of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum with Eddy-Current
Instrument
ASTM D 2287 Non-Rigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and
Extrusion Compounds.
ASTM D 3656 Insect Screening and Louver Cloth Woven from Vinyl-Coated
Glass fiber Yarn
ASTM E 283 Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and
Doors
ASTM E 330 Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and
Doors under the Influence of Wind Loads.
ASTM E 331 Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and
Doors by Uniform Static Pressure Difference Loads
ASTM E 547 Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and
Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference Loads
ASTM F 468 Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs for General Use
1.2.6.
DIN - Deutsches Institut fuer Normung

DIN 4108
DIN 18055
1.2.7.
Heat Insulation in Buildings

Windows; Air Permeability of Joints, Water Tightness and
Mechanical Strain
AWS - American Welding Society:

D1.1 - Structural Welding Code, Steel
D1.2 - Structural Welding Code, Aluminum
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.3.1
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, standard details, and

installation recommendations for components of aluminum windows required for
project, including data that products have been tested and comply with
performance requirements.
1.3.2
Certification: Submit statement certified by registered Structural Engineer that

systems including glass will withstand specified wind loads.
1.3.3
Samples: Submit samples of each type and color of aluminum finish, on 300 mm
long sections of extrusions or formed shapes. Contractor shall submit proposed
color schemes showing all finishing materials coordinated together, for color
selection.
Page | 3 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.4

Deliver aluminum window to site in packages or containers; labeled for identification
with the manufacturer's name, brand and contents. Store aluminum window material in
weather tight and dry storage facility. Protect from damage from handling, weather and
construction operations before, during and after installation.
1.5
WARRANTY
Submit 2 copies of written guarantee signed by the manufacturer, installer and contractor,
agreeing to replace aluminum window units which fail in material or workmanship within
2 years of date of substantial handing over.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6.1
Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of the Metal Curtain Wall,

Window, Storefront and Entrance Guide Specifications Manual - AAMA.
1.6.2
General: Provide aluminum window units that comply with performance

requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's corresponding
stock systems according to test methods indicated. Type of windows shall be as
shown on the drawings.
1.6.3
Testing: Test each type and size of required window unit through a recognized
independent testing laboratory or agency approved by the Contracting Officer, in
accordance with ASTM E 330 for structural performance, ASTM E 283 for air
infiltration, and ASTM E 331 and ASTM E 547 for water penetration. Provide
certified test results. Sizes of test units for the air infiltration, water resistance,
and structural performance shall conform to the AAMA Guide Specification GS001 - Chart A requirements. Tested units shall be glazed, completely assembled,
and constructed in accordance with requirements indicated. Perform tests on
units with window sash and ventilators closed and locked. Materials and
workmanship used in test units shall be identical to those proposed for the
project. Use of non-representative measures or techniques is prohibited.
1.6.4.
Design Requirements: Comply with structural performance, air infiltration, and

water penetration requirements indicated in AAMA 101 for type, grade and
performance class of window units required.
1.6.4.1.
In addition to AAMA design standards, component parts and

completed window assemblies shall be designed, fabricated and
installed to withstand design pressure of minimum 98 kg/m, for wind
loads normal to wall, acting both inward and outward.
Page | 4 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.6.4.2.
Uniform Load Deflection: No window member (glazed) shall deflect

more than 1/175 of its span at the specified design load when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 330 at a static air pressure difference of at
least 98 kg/m, with ventilators closed and locked and the pressure
applied first on one side of the unit then on the other.
1.6.4.3.
Air infiltration rate of aluminum windows shall not be more than 0.30
cfm per ft of operable sash joint for inward test pressure of 30 kg/m,
when tested in accordance ASTM E 283.
1.6.4.4.
Water Penetration: There shall be no water penetration, as defined in

ASTM E 331, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at an
inward test pressure of 39 kg/m.
1.6.4.5.
Condensation Resistance: Where window units are indicated to be of

"thermal-break construction," provide units that have been tested for
thermal performance in accordance with AAMA 1503.1 showing a
condensation resistance factor (CRF) of 45.
1.6.4.6.
Forced-Entry Resistance: Provide window units having a Performance

Level 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM F 588.
1.6.5
Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Engage on experienced manufacturer

and installer who has minimum 5 years experience of manufacturing and
installing aluminum windows similar in design and finish to those required for
the project and which has resulted in construction with a record of successful inservice performance. Manufacturer and installer shall be subject to approval of
the Contracting Officer.
1.6.6
Single Source Responsibility: Provide aluminum window units from one source
and produced by a single manufacturer.
1.6.7
Field Measurements: Check actual window openings by accurate field

measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop
drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid
delay.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1

2.1.1.
General:
2.1.1.1.
Provide manufacturer's standard windows complete with members,

hardware, weather-stripping, glazing beads, setting blocks, and glazing
wedges.
Page | 5 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.1.2.
2.1.3.
2.1.1.2.
Exterior windows and sliders shall have dead locks. Sliders shall have
stainless steel V-channel over the slider track with nylon roller.
2.1.1.3.
Operable exterior sections of sliding windows shall have aluminum

insect screens.
Aluminum members:
2.1.2.1.
Extrusions of bars, rods and tubes: 6063-T6 alloy conforming to

ASTM B 221.
2.1.2.2.
Sheets and plates: 5005-H14 alloy conforming to ASTM B 209.
2.1.2.3.
Window frames and sashes shall be manufacturer standard systems of

extrusions not less than 1.80 mm thick.
Fasteners: Aluminum, or non-magnetic stainless steel, or a non-corrosive

material, compatible with the aluminum components and warranted by
manufacturer.
2.1.3.1.
Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for application

of hardware. Match finish of adjoining metal.
2.1.3.2.
Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners.
2.1.4
Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer standard high-strength aluminum

units where feasible; otherwise, non-magnetic stainless steel or hot-dip
galvanized complying with ASTM A 386.
2.1.5
Concrete/Masonry Inserts: Cast iron, malleable iron, or hot-dip galvanized steel

conforming to ASTM A 386.
2.1.6
Bituminous Coatings: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC - Paint

12, compounded for 20 mil thickness per coat.
2.1.7
Sealants: Aluminum frames shall be sealed using a sealant of a type conforming

to Section 07900 - SEALANTS, and a color matching with the aluminum
profiles.
2.1.8
Glass: Conform to Section 08810 GLASS AND GLAZING. Type of glazing

shall be as shown on the Drawings.
2.1.9
Weather-stripping: For horizontal sliding or double-wing window units provide

sliding type woven pile weather-stripping of wood, polypropylene or nylon pile
and resin-impregnated backing fabric, and aluminum backing strip complying
with AAMA 701.2. For other types of windows provide compression-type
Page | 6 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
weather-stripping, compressible molded expanded EPDM or neoprene weatherstripping gaskets in accordance with ASTM C 509.
2.1.10 Glazing Gasket: Manufacturer's standard vinyl glazing gasket.
2.1.11 Hardware: Provide manufacturers standard hardware fabricated from aluminum
or stainless steel compatible with aluminum and of sufficient strength to perform
and function as intended.
2.2
FINISHES
2.2.1.
Exposed aluminum surfaces shall have the manufacturer's standard finish,

powder-coated for the inside surfaces and outside surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings and in accordance with the following:
2.2.1.1.
2.3
Powder Coated Finish: 60 - 80 micron thick. Color shall be as selected

and approved by the Contracting Officer.
FABRICATION
2.3.1
General: Provide manufacturer's standard fabrication and accessories which

comply with indicated standards and are re-glazable without dismantling of sash
framing, except to extent more specific or more stringent requirements are
indicated. Include complete system for assembly of components and anchorage
of window units, and prepare sash for glazing except where pre-glazing at factory
is indicated. Fabrication and installation of aluminum windows shall be executed
by an approved specialized firm having at least 5 years experience of
successfully completed projects.
2.3.2
Sizes and Profiles: Required section module for window units shall be 52 mm
minimum. Details, where shown, are based upon standard details by one or more
manufacturers. It is intended that similar details by other manufacturers shall be
acceptable, provided they comply with size requirements, minimum/ maximum
profile requirements and performance standards as shown or specified.
2.3.3
Pre-glazed Fabrication: Pre-glaze window units at factory where possible and

practical for applications indicated. Comply with requirements of Section 08810
GLASS AND GLAZING in addition to requirements of ANSI/AAMA 302.9.
2.3.4
Weep-holes: provide weep-holes and internal passages to drain infiltrating water

and condensation to exterior.
2.3.5
Weather-stripping: Provide compression-type weather-stripping at perimeter of

each operating sash where sliding-type is not appropriate. Provide sliding-type
weather-stripping at all locations where sash rails slide horizontally or vertically
along frame of units.
Page | 7 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.3.6.
Provide mullions and cover plates as shown matching window units, and
complete with anchors for support and installation. Allow for erection, tolerances
and provide for movements of window units due to thermal expansion and
building deflections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
INSPECTION
3.1.1
Window openings shall conform to dimensions and tolerances shown on

drawings.
3.1.2
Examine substrates, adjoining construction, and the conditions under which work
is to be installed. Installation shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are
corrected.
INSTALLATION
3.2.1
Comply with the manufacturer's written instructions for installation of units and
other components.
3.2.2
Units shall be set plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames.
3.2.3.
Frames shall be anchored solidly to surrounding construction to prevent

distortion or misalignment.
3.2.4.
Apply protective coating to separate aluminum from galvanically incompatible

materials, including concrete and steel casting as recommended by aluminum
manufacturer.

3.3.1
Upon completion of installation of aluminum windows, clean exposed metal and

glass surfaces of excess sealants, dirt and other substances. Exercise care to avoid
damage to protective coatings and finishes. Lubricate hardware.
3.3.2
Protect the installed work until substantial completion and replace or replace the
damaged work as required by the Contracting Officer.
Page | 8 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 08700 BUILDERS HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
1.4
SPECIAL TOOLS
08700-3/15
08700-4/15
08700-4/15
08700-5/15
08700-5/15
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
2.2
TEMPLATES
2.3
HINGES
2.3.1 CONTRACTOR'S OPTION
2.3.2 PIVOT HINGES
2.3.3 SPRING HINGES
2.3.4 BUTT HINGES
2.4
LOCKS AND LATCHES
2.4.1 MORTISE LOCK AND LATCHSETS
2.4.2 AUXILIARY LOCKS AND ASSOCIATED
PRODUCTS
2.4.3 LOCK CYLINDERS (MORTISE, RIM
AND BORED)
2.4.4 LOCKSETS FOR LEAD-SHIELDED DOORS
2.4.5 LOCK TRIM
2.5
EXIT DEVICES AND EXIT DEVICE ACCESSORIES
2.5.1 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS
2.5.2 DOOR COORDINATOR
2.5.3 AUTOMATIC FLUSH BOLTS
2.6
KEYING
2.7
DOOR CLOSING DEVICES
2.7.1 SURFACE TYPE CLOSERS
2.7.2 FLOOR CLOSERS AND PIVOTS
2.8
DOOR CONTROLS - OVERHEAD HOLDERS
2.9
SMOKE DETECTORS AND MAGNETIC HOLDERS
2.10 ARCHITECTURAL DOOR TRIM
2.10.1 DOOR PROTECTION PLATES
2.10.1.1 ARMOR PLATES
2.10.1.2 KICK PLATES
2.10.1.3 MOP PLATES
2.10.2 DOOR EDGE GUARDS
2.10.3 PUSH PLATES
2.10.3.1 COMBINATION PUSH-PULL PLATES
2.10.3.2 FLAT PLATES
2.10.4 DOOR PULLS AND PUSH/PULL UNITS
2.10.4.1 ARM PULLS
2.10.5 PUSH AND PULL BARS
08700-6/15
08700-6/15
08700-6/15
08700-6/15
08700-6/15
08700-6/15
08700-6/15
08700-6/15
08700-7/15
08700-7/15
Section 08700 Builders Hardware
08700-7/15
08700-7/15
08700-7/15
08700-7/15
08700-8/15
08700-8/15
08700-8/15
08700-8/15
08700-8/15
08700-9/15
08700-9/15
08700-9/15
08700-9/15
08700-9/15
08700-9/15
08700-10/15
08700-10/15
08700-10/15
08700-10/15
08700-10/15
08700-10/15
08700-10/15
08700-10/15
08700-10/15
08700-10/15
08700-10/15
Page | 1 of 15
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
AUXILIARY HARDWARE
MISCELLANEOUS
2.12.5 GASKETING
2.12.6 KEY CONTROL STORAGE SYSTEM
FASTENINGS
FINISHES
HARDWARE FOR FIRE DOORS
SPECIAL LOCKING HARDWARE ITEMS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION 08700-13/20
3.1.1 HARDWARE FOR FIRE DOORS AND
SMOKE-CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES
3.1.2 DOOR-CLOSING DEVICES
3.1.3 KEY CONTROL STORAGE SYSTEMS
3.1.4 KICK PLATES AND MOP PLATES
3.1.5 AUXILIARY HARDWARE
3.1.6 WEATHERSEALS
3.1.7 GASKETING
3.2
OPERATIONAL TESTS
3.3
HARDWARE SETS
08700-11/15
08700-11/15
08700-11/15
08700-11/15
08700-11/15
08700-11/15
08700-11/15
08700-11/15
08700-12/15
08700-12/15
08700-12/15
08700-12/15
08700-12/15
08700-12/15
08700-12/15
08700-13/15
08700-13/15
08700-13/15
Page | 2 of 15
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 08700 - BUILDERS' HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
ASTM E 283
(1991) Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows,

Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across
the Specimen
ASTM F 883
(1990) Padlocks
BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA)

BHMA-01
BHMA-02
BHMA A156.1
BHMA A156.2
BHMA A156.3
BHMA A156.4
BHMA A156.5
BHMA A156.6
BHMA A156.7
BHMA A156.8
BHMA A156.13
BHMA A156.15
BHMA A156.16
BHMA A156.17
BHMA A156.18
BHMA A156.21
(Effective thru Jun 1994) Directory of Certified Locks & Latches

(Effective thru Jul 1994) Directory of Certified Door Closers
(1988) Butts and Hinges
(1989) Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches
(1989) Exit Devices
(1992) Door Controls - Closers
(1992) Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products
(1986) Architectural Door Trim
(1988) Template Hinge Dimensions
(1988) Door Controls - Overhead Holders
(1987) Mortise Locks & Latches
(1986) Closer Holder Release Devices
(1989) Auxiliary Hardware
(1993) Self Closing Hinges & Pivots
(1987) Materials and Finishes
(1989) Thresholds
DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTITUTE (DHI)
DHI-02
DHI-03
DHI-04
DHI-05
DHI A115-W
(1986) Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware

(1989) Keying Systems and Nomenclature
(1976) Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom
Steel Doors and Frames
(1990) Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames
(1993) Wood Door Hardware Standards (Incl. A115-W1 thru A115-W9)
Page | 3 of 15
WBRJ-12-C-0001
FEDERAL STANDARDS (FED-STD)

FED-STD 795
(Basic) Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards

NFPA 80
NFPA 101
NFPA 105
(1992) Fire Doors and Windows

(1993) Smoke-Control Door Assemblies
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Contracting Officer approval is required for submittals with a "GA designation; submittals having
an "FIO" designation are for information only. The following shall be submitted in accordance
with Section 01300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Data
Hardware and Accessories; FIO
Manufacturer's descriptive data, technical literature, catalog cuts, and installation instructions.
Spare parts data for locksets, exit devices, closers, electric locks, electric strikes, electro-magnetic
closer holder release devices, and electric exit devices, after approval of the detail drawings, and
not later than 1 month(s) prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall include a
complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply.
SD-04 Drawings
Hardware Devices; GA.
Detail drawings for hardware devices for computerized keying systems, magnetic cards, and
keyless push button access control systems showing complete wiring and schematic diagrams and
other details required to demonstrate proper function of units.
SD-07 Schedules
Hardware Schedule; GA
Hardware schedule listing all items to be furnished. The schedule shall include for each item: the
quantities; manufacturer's name and catalog numbers; sizes; detail information or catalog cuts;
finishes; door and
frame size and materials; location and hardware set identification
cross-references to drawings; corresponding reference standard type number or function number
from manufacturer's catalog if not covered by ANSI or BHMA; and list of abbreviations and
template numbers.
Page | 4 of 15
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Keying Schedule; GA.

Keying schedule developed in accordance with DHI-03, after the keying meeting with the user.
SD-13 Certificates
The material supplier's or hardware manufacturer's certificates of compliance stating that the
supplied material or hardware item meets specified requirements. Each certificate shall be signed
by an official authorized to certify in behalf of material supplier or product manufacturer and shall
identify quantity and date or dates of shipment or delivery to which the certificates apply. A
statement that the proposed hardware items appear in BHMA-01 and BHMA-02 directories of
certified products may be submitted in lieu of certificates. A separate Certificate of Compliance
attesting that hardware items conform to the "Buy American Act" shall be included.
SD-19 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Six complete copies of maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures, possible
breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides. The instructions for electric locks, electric
strikes, electro-magnetic closer holder release devices, and electric exit devices shall include
simplified diagrams as installed.
Hardware Samples: Submit samples in accordance with requirements of Section 01300
SUBMITTALS.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Hardware shall be delivered to the project site in the manufacturers original packages. Each
article of hardware shall be individually packaged in the manufacturer's standard commercial
carton or container, and shall be properly marked or labeled to be readily identifiable with the
approved hardware schedule. Each change key shall be tagged or otherwise identified with the
door for which its cylinder is intended. Where double cylinder functions are used or where it is not
obvious which is the key side of a door, appropriate instructions shall be included with the lock and
on the hardware schedule. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions, fasteners, and special
tools shall be included in each package.
1.4 SPECIAL TOOLS
Special tools, such as those supplied by the manufacturer, unique wrenches, and dogging keys,
shall be provided as required to adjust hardware items.
Page | 5 of 15
WBRJ-12-C-0001
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Hardware shall conform to the requirements specified herein and the HARDWARE SETS listing at
the end of this section. Hardware set numbers corresponds to the set numbers shown on the
drawings. Hardware items providing accessibility and usability for physically handicapped shall
comply with FED-STD 795
2.2 TEMPLATES
Requirements for hardware to be mounted on metal doors or metal frames shall be coordinated
between hardware manufacturer and door or frame manufacturer by use of templates and other
information to establish location, reinforcement required, size of holes, and similar details.
Templates of hinges shall conform to BHMA A156.7.
2.3 HINGES
Hinges shall conform to BHMA A156.1. Hinges used on metal doors and frames shall also
conform to BHMA A156.7. Except as otherwise specified, hinge sizes shall conform to the hinge
manufacturer's printed recommendations.
2.3.1 Contractor's Option
Hinges with anti-friction bearings may be furnished in lieu of ball bearing hinges, except
where prohibited for fire doors by the requirements of NFPA 80.
2.3.2 Pivot Hinges
Pivot hinges shall conform to BHMA A156.4.
2.3.3 Spring Hinges
Spring hinges shall conform to BHMA A156.17.
2.3.4 Butt Hinges
Butt hinges shall conform to BHMA A156.1.
Page | 6 of 15
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.4 LOCKS AND LATCHES

To the maximum extent possible, locksets, latchsets and deadlocks shall be the products of a single
manufacturer. Lock fronts for double-acting doors shall be rounded. Strikes for wood frames and
pairs of wood doors shall be furnished with wrought boxes. Lock and latch set trim (knobs, lever
handles, roses and escutcheons) shall be of a simple design in accordance with manufacturer's
standard practice. Provide handles, pulls, latches locks and other operating hardware that are easy
to grasp with one hand and do not require twisting of the wrist, tight grasping or tight pinching to
operate. Acceptable designs include, but are not limited to lever-operating hardware, push-type
hardware, and U- shaft hardware.
2.4.1 Mortise Lock and Latchsets
Mortise lock, latchsets, and strikes shall be series 1000 and shall conform to BHMA A156.13,
operational Grade 1. Strikes for security doors shall be rectangular without curved lip. Mortise type
locks and latches for doors 44 mm thick and over shall have adjustable bevel fronts or otherwise
conform to the shape of the door. Mortise locks shall have armored fronts.
2.4.2 Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products
Bored and mortise deadlocks and latchsets, narrow style locks, rim locks, and electric strikes shall
conform to BHMA A156.5. Bolt and latch retraction shall be dead bolt style. Strike boxes shall be
furnished with dead bolt and latch strikes for Grade 1.
2.4.3 Lock Cylinders (Mortise, Rim and Bored)
Lock cylinders shall comply with BHMA A156.5. Lock cylinder shall have not less than six pins.
Cylinders shall have key removable type cores. A grand master keying system shall be provided. A
construction master keying system shall be provided. Disassembly of knob or lockset shall not be
required to remove core from lockset. All locksets, exit devices, and padlocks shall accept same
interchangeable cores.
2.4.4 Locksets for Lead-Shielded Doors
Locksets for lead-shielded doors shall be provided with factory-installed lead linings. Lead linings
shall not be less than the thickness of the lead in the door in which the lockset is required.
2.4.5 Lock Trim
Lock trim shall be cast, forged, or heavy wrought construction of commercial plain design. In
addition to meeting the test requirement of BHMA A156.2 or BHMA A156.13, knobs, lever
handles, roses, and escutcheons shall be 1.27 mm thick, if un-reinforced. If reinforced, the outer
shell shall be 0.89 mm thick and the combined thickness shall be 1.78 mm except that knob
shanks shall be 1.52 mm thick.
Page | 7 of 15
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.5 EXIT DEVICES AND EXIT DEVICE ACCESSORIES

Exit devices and exit device accessories shall conform to BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.
2.5.1 Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items
Trim shall be of wrought construction and commercial plain design with straight, beveled, or
smoothly rounded sides, corners, and edges. Adjustable strikes shall be provided for rim type and
vertical rod devices. Open back strikes shall be provided for pairs of doors with mortise and
vertical rod devices; except open back strikes shall be used on labeled doors only where
specifically provided for in the published listings. Conventional crossbars and arms shall be
provided. Escutcheons shall be provided not less than 175 by 55 mm. Escutcheons will be cut to
suit cylinders and operating trim.
2.5.2 Door Coordinator
Door coordinator with carry bar shall be Type 21 and shall be provided for each pair of doors
equipped with an overlapping astragal. The coordinator may shall be capable of holding the active
door of a pair open until the inactive door has preceded it in the closing cycle. When used as fire
exit hardware, the coordinator and carry bar shall be listed or labeled by a nationally recognized
independent testing laboratory.
2.5.3 Automatic Flush Bolts
Automatic flush bolts shall be Type 25 in accordance with BHMA A156.3, and shall be installed at
the top and bottom of the inactive leaf of pairs of fire rated doors where specified in the hardware
sets. Flush bolts shall be mortised in the lock edge of the door.
2.6 KEYING
A keying system shall be developed so that the NGMS Command has a grandfather key to open all
doors on the campus, Individual School Command has key to open all doors for individual school,
and each section has a key to open all doors in that section.
Coordinate with JET for keying schedule and for supply of master key system. Locks shall be
keyed in sets or subsets as scheduled. Locks shall be furnished with the manufacturer's standard
construction key system. Change keys for locks shall be stamped with change number and the
inscription " Do Not Duplicate." Keys shall be supplied as follows:
Locks:
Master keyed sets:
Construction keys:
Blank keys:
2 change keys each lock.

3 keys each set.
2 total.
two extra blanks for each lock
The keys shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer arranged for key control system storage in
sets or subsets as scheduled.
Page | 8 of 15
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.7
DOOR CLOSING DEVICES

Door closing devices shall conform to BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. Closing devices shall be products
of one manufacturer for each type specified.
2.7.1 Surface Type Closers

Surface type closers shall be Grade 1, Series C02000 Full Cover with options PT-4H, Size 1 or 2
through Size 6, and PT-4D with back check position valve. Except as otherwise specified, sizes
shall conform to the manufacturer's published recommendations. Closers for out swinging exterior
doors shall have parallel arms or shall be top jamb mounted. Closers for doors close to a wall shall
be of narrow projection so as not to strike the wall at the 90-degree open position.
2.7.2 Floor Closers and Pivots
Floor closers shall be Grade 1 with internal dead stop for all exterior doors. Floor closers shall
have cement boxes. Pivots used on doors with floor closers shall be of the same manufacturer as
the floor closers. Floor plates are not required where thresholds cover the closer cement box. Floor
closers shall have independent latch and sweep speed adjusting valves, back-check, mechanical
selective hold-open (except fire rated openings), and optional delayed action. Setting tools shall be
furnished for use in installing floor closers. Electric pivots and floor closers shall comply with
BHMA A156.4 with modifications to ensure correct operation of electric hardware items.
2.8
DOOR CONTROLS - OVERHEAD HOLDERS

Door controls - overhead holders shall conform to BHMA A156.8.
2.9
SMOKE DETECTORS AND MAGNETIC HOLDERS

Smoke detectors and magnetic holders shall conform to Section 16721 FIRE DETECTION AND
ALARM SYSTEM and BHMA A156.15. Door closers with integral holders connected to a
separate detection device, or closers with integral holders and detector units sensing particles of
combustion, which when activated will release the holder mechanism causing the closer to close
the door, may be used in lieu of separate closers, detectors and magnetic holders. Alternate closers
shall provide the same function as closers specified and shall be listed or labeled by a nationally
recognized independent testing laboratory.
2.10 ARCHITECTURAL DOOR TRIM

Architectural door trim shall conform to BHMA A156.6.
2.10.1 Door Protection Plates
Page | 9 of 15
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.10.1.1 Armor Plates

Armor plates shall be category J100, stainless steel, 1000 mm in height, and 50 mm less in width
than the width of the door for single doors and 25 mm less for pairs of doors. Edges of metal plates
shall be beveled. Where the door has a louver panel, the armor plate shall be omitted if top of
louver frame is more than 500 mm above the bottom of the door.
2.10.1.2 Kick Plates
Kick plates shall be Category J100, stainless steel. Width of plates shall be 50 mm less than door
width for single doors and 25 mm less for pairs of doors. Height shall be 250 mm, except where the
bottom rail is less than 250 mm the plate shall extend to within 13 mm of the panel mold or glass
bead. Edges of metal plates shall be beveled.
2.10.1.3 Mop Plates
Mop plates shall be Category J100. Width of plates shall be 50 mm less than door width for single
doors and 25 mm less for pairs of doors. The height shall be 100 mm. Edges of metal plates shall
be beveled.
2.10.2 Door Edge Guards
Door edge guards shall be furnished to protect door edges with the required cut-outs for hardware
items such as hinges, flush bolts, and locks. Door edge guards shall satisfy fire door ratings.
2.10.3 Push Plates
2.10.3.1 Combination Push-Pull Plates
Combination push-pull plates shall be Category J300, 3 mm thick minimum stainless steel beveled
four edges.
2.10.3.2 Flat Plates
Flat plates shall be Category J300, stainless steel, size as shown on drawings Edges of metal plates
shall be beveled.
2.10.4 Door Pulls and Push/Pull Units
2.10.4.1 Arm Pulls
Arm pulls shall be Category J400, double base, stainless steel.
2.10.5 Push and Pull Bars
Push and pull bars shall be Category J500, stainless steel. Edges of mounting plates shall be
beveled.
Page | 10 of 15
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.11 AUXILIARY HARDWARE

Auxiliary hardware, consisting of door holders, door stops, and roller latches, shall conform to
BHMA A156.16. Lever extension flush bolts shall be Type L14081. Dust-proof strikes shall be
Type L04011 for doors that are not fire rated. Dust-proof strikes shall be Type L04021 for fire
rated doors. Other auxiliary hardware of the types listed below, shall conform to BHMA A156.16.
2.12 MISCELLANEOUS
2.12.5 Gasketing
Gasketing shall be a compression type seal, silicon based, self-adhesive product for use on steel
door frames with wood and steel fire labeled doors. Color shall be white. Air leakage rate of
weatherstripping shall not exceed 0.775 L/s per lineal meter of crack when tested in accordance
with ASTM E 283 at standard test conditions.
2.12.6 Key Control Storage System
Key control storage system shall conform to BHMA A156.5, capacity suitable to hold project keys,
and shall be properly labeled for key identification.
2.13 FASTENINGS
Fastenings of proper type, size, quantity, and finish shall be supplied with each article of hardware.
Machine screws and expansion shields shall be used for attaching hardware to concrete or masonry.
Fastenings exposed to the weather in the finished work shall be of brass, bronze, or stainless steel.
Sex bolts, through bolts, or machine screws and grommet nuts, where used on reverse-bevel
exterior doors equipped with half-surface or full-surface hinges, shall employ one-way screws or
other approved tamperproof screws. Screws for the jamb leaf of half-mortise and full-surface
hinges attached to structural steel frames shall be one-way or other approved tamperproof type.
2.14 FINISHES
Finish shall be BHMA 630 or US32D. Where painting of primed surfaces is required, painting is
specified in Section 09900 PAINTING
2.15 HARDWARE FOR FIRE DOORS
Hardware for fire doors shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 80 and NFPA 101.
2.16 SPECIAL LOCKING HARDWARE ITEMS
Assembly shall contain exit device which complies with both fire and exit requirements. Electric
voltage shall not exceed 30 volts ac or 48 volts dc. In hazardous locations, products shall use safe
power supplies or shall be pneumatic.
Page | 11 of 15
WBRJ-12-C-0001
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
Hardware shall be located in accordance with DHI-04 and DHI-05. When approved, slight
variations in locations or dimensions will be permitted. Application shall be in accordance with
DHI-02 or DHI A115-W. Door control devices for exterior doors such as closers and holders,
shall normally attach to doors with thru bolts and nuts or sex bolts. Electric hardware items and
access control devices shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation
procedures.
3.1.1 Hardware for Fire Doors and Smoke-Control Door Assemblies
Hardware for fire doors shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 80. Exit
devices installed on fire doors shall have a visible label bearing the marking "Fire Exit Hardware".
Other hardware installed on fire doors, such as locksets, closers, and hinges shall have a visible
label or stamp indicating that the hardware items have been approved by an approved testing
agency for installation on fire-rated doors. Hardware for smoke-control door assemblies shall be
installed in accordance with NFPA 105.
3.1.2 Door-Closing Devices
Door-closing devices shall be installed and adjusted in accordance with the templates and printed
instructions supplied by the manufacturer of the devices. Insofar as practicable, doors opening to
or from halls and corridors shall have the closer mounted on the room side of the door.
3.1.3 Key Control Storage Systems
Key control storage system shall be installed where directed.
3.1.4 Kick Plates and Mop Plates
Kick plates shall be installed on the push side of single-acting doors and on both sides of doubleacting doors. Mop plates shall be installed on the pull side of the single acting doors.
3.1.5 Auxiliary Hardware
Lever extension flush bolts shall be installed at the top and bottom of the inactive leaf of pairs of
doors. The bottom bolt shall operate into a dust-proof floor strike or threshold.
3.1.6 Weatherseals
Weatherseals shall be located as indicated, snug to door face and fastened in place with color
matched metal screws after door and frames have been finish painted. Screw spacing shall be as
recommended by manufacturer.
Page | 12 of 15
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.1.7 Gasketing
Gasketing shall be installed at the inside edge of the hinge and head and latch sides of door frame.
Frames shall be toleranced for a 3 mm clearance between door and frame. Frames shall be treated
with tape primer prior to installation.
3.2 OPERATIONAL TESTS
Prior to acceptance of any electrical hardware system, an operational test shall be performed to
determine if devices are operating as intended by the specifications. Wiring shall be tested for
correct voltage, current carrying capacity, and proper grounding. Stray voltages in lock wiring
shall be eliminated to prevent locking devices from releasing in critical situations.
3.3 HARDWARE SETS
Set
H01
H02
Number
Hardware Item
2 pr.
Hinges
1 ea.
Lockset
1 ea.
1 ea.
Stop
Threshold
1 set
Weatherstripping
1 ea
Closer
4 pr.
Hinges
1 ea.
Lockset
2 ea.
2 ea.
1 ea.
Flush Bolt
Stop
Threshold
1 set
Weatherstripping
2 ea
Closer
Description
Full Mortise, Stainless Steel, Ball
Bearing
Concealed Vertical Rod Exit
Device (No Trim Outside-Exit
Only)
Floor Stop w/ Hold-open Device
Aluminum
Silicon Rubber Based, Self
Adhesive, Compression Type
Surface Type, Heavy Duty,
Aluminum Finish
Bearing
Full Mortise, Stainless Steel,
Cylinder Type, Commercial Grade,
Lever Handle
Mortise Type, Top & Bottom
Aluminum
Coordinator, Aluminum Finish
Manufacturer
Hagar
Von Duprin
Pemco, Dorma
Pemco, Dorma
Pemco, Dorma
Dorma
Hagar
Yale, Arrow
Yale, Arrow
Pemco, Dorma
Pemco, Dorma
Pemco, Dorma
Dorma
Page | 13 of 15
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Set
Number
H03
H04
Hardware Item
2 pr.
Hinges
1 ea.
Lockset
2 ea.
Push / Pull Plate
1 ea.
2 set
Stop
Silencers
3 ea.
Closer
2 pr.
Hinges
Lockset
1
1
Stop
Threshold
Weatherstripping
Closer
Description
Bearing
Dead Bolt, Key Cylinder
Combination Aluminum Push / Pull
w/ Plate, Beveled Four Sides
Silicone Rubber
Aluminum Finish
Bearing
Full Mortise, Stainless Steel,
Cylinder Type, Commercial Grade,
Lever Handle
Aluminum
Aluminum Finish
Manufacturer
Hagar
Yale, Arrow
Pemco, Dorma
Pemco, Dorma
Pemco, Dorma
Dorma
Hagar
Yale, Arrow
Pemco, Dorma
Pemco, Dorma
Pemco, Dorma
Dorma
Notes:
1. Manufacturers name and number are furnished to serve only as examples of the type of products
desired are not a proprietary item
2. All metal kick plates, stretcher plates, armor plates, pull and push plates shall be stainless steel.
3. All door trim protection plates shall be 5 cm less than the width of a single door and 2.5 cm less for
pairs of doors. Armor plates shall be 1.0m high. Stretcher plates shall be 45 cm high kick plates 25
cm high and map plates 10 cm high.
4. All closets shall be provided with the capability for regular arm mounting applications. Delay action
type closers will be provided on doors where cast traffic and handling accessible is a consideration.
5. All doors shall be provided with silencers and stoppers with weather-strip for all external doors.
Functions
F18
F17
F01
F02
- Deadbolt by key outside

- No inside operation
- Deadbolt by key outside or by thumb-turn lever inside
- Latchbolt by grip either side.
- Both grips always free
- Latchbolt by grip either side
- Deadbolt by thumb-turn lever inside or by emergency release tool outside
Page | 14 of 15
WBRJ-12-C-0001
F14
F09
F04
F05
F07
- Latchbolt by grip either side

- Deadbolt by key either side
- Latchbolt by grip either side, unless outside grip is lock by master key form
inside
- Latchbolt by key outside or by grip inside
- Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt
- Latchbolt by key outside or by grip either side, unless outside grip is locked by
toggle-action stop
- Latchbolt by grip either side, unless outside grip is locked by key outside.
- Inside grip always free
- Latchbolt by grip inside or by key outside
- Outside grip always rigid
Page | 15 of 15
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 08721 - AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS

PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
PART 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
GENERAL
REFERENCES
MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS
GUARANTEE
SUBMITTALS
DESIGN CRITERIA
1.5.1 AUTOMATIC DOOR EQUIPMENT
1.5.2 EQUIPMENT
1.5.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING, CONNECTIONS
AND EQUIPMENT
08721-2/7
08721-2/7
08721-2/7
08721-2/7
08721-2/7
08721-3/7
08721-3/7
08721-3/7
PRODUCTS
OPERATORS
2.1.1 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
2.1.2 OVERHEAD MOUNTED OPERATORS
2.1.3 OPERATORS
ELECTRIC TYPE
2.2.1 GENERAL
2.2.1.1 ELECTRICAL TYPE FOR
SLIDING DOORS
COMBINATION SLIDING DOORS
2.3.1 SLIDING AUTOMATIC DOORS
2.3.2 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR MODE
OF OPERATION
2.3.3 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE
GUIDE ROLLERS, DOOR CARRIER
2.3.4 SLIDE DOOR POWER OPERATOR
DOOR CONTROLS
2.4.1 OPENING AND CLOSING ACTIONS
2.4.2 MANUAL CONTROLS
2.4.2.1 PUSH PLATE WALL SWITCH
2.4.3 DETECTOR
SAFETY DEVICES
08721-3/7
08721-3/7
08721-3/7
08721-3/7
08721-3/7
08721-4/7
08721-4/7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
3.1
3.2
SCHEDULE
3.2.1 EXTERIOR AND VESTIBULE DOORS
AT MAIN ENTRANCE
3.2.1.1 OPERATOR
3.2.1.2 CONTROLS
3.2.1.3 SAFETY DEVICES
Section 08721 - Automatic Door Operators
08721-3/7
08721-4/7
08721-4/7
08721-4/7
08721-4/7
08721-5/7
08721-5/7
08721-5/7
08721-5/7
08721-5/7
08721-5/7
08721-5/7
08721-6/7
08721-6/7
08721-6/7
08721-6/7
08721-6/7
08721-6/7
08721-7/7
08721-7/7
Page | 1 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 08721 - AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
A156.10-85
1.2
Power Operated Pedestrian Doors (BHMA 1601)
MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS
Automatic door operators, controls and other equipment shall be products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing such equipment for a minimum of three
years and shall be the manufacturer's best material, construction, design and finish.
Manufacturer of products shall be represented by a factory authorized and trained
distributor for products specified. Distributor shall maintain a parts inventory and trained
service personnel at a location with a 100 mile radius of project to provide prompt service.
One type of automatic door equipment shall be used throughout the building.
1.3
GUARANTEE
Automatic door operators shall be subject to the terms of the "Guaranty" Article, except
that the Guaranty period shall be five years in lieu of one year.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
The following shall be submitted for approval in accordance with Section 1300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
Manufacturer's literature and data describing operators, power units, controls, door
hardware and safety devices.
SD-04 Shop Drawings GA
Showing location of controls and safety devices in relationship to each automatically
operated door.
Showing operator installation.
Maintenance, Report and Parts Manuals for all components and systems
Page | 2 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.5
DESIGN CRITERIA
1.5.1
Automatic Door Equipment

Automatic door equipment shall accommodate heavy traffic as well as the weight of the
doors. Except as otherwise shown, provide operators which will move the doors from the
fully closed to fully opened position in three seconds maximum time interval, when speed
adjustment is at maximum setting.
1.5.2 Equipment
UL approved, applicable code. Provide key operated power disconnect wall switch for
each door installation.
1.5.3 Electrical Wiring, Connections and Equipment
Provide all motor, starter, controls, associated devices, and interconnecting wiring required
for the installation. Provide wiring so that only a single power supply is required. Motors
shall be rated one-half horsepower and larger. Motors shall have voltage rating as
specified in Division 16, ELECTRICAL of the specifications and as shown. Equipment
and wiring shall be as specified in Division 16, ELECTRICAL.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
OPERATORS
2.1.1 Automatic Door Operators

Automatic door operators shall be heavy duty type for institutional doors.
2.1.2 Overhead Mounted Operators
Electric type enclosed in housing concealing operator mechanism and mounting brackets.
Furnish metal mounting supports, brackets and other accessories necessary for the
installation of operators at the head of the door frames.
2.1.3 Operators
Conceal operators for sliding doors in the door frames or surface mount as shown and
equip with complete sliding door hardware including tracks, door guides, hangers and
carriers.
Page | 3 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.2 ELECTRIC TYPE

2.2.1 General
All operators shall have checking mechanism providing cushioning action at last part of
door travel, in both opening and closing cycle. Operators shall recycle doors
instantaneously to full open position from any point in closing cycle when control s witch
is reactivated. Operators shall, when automatic power is interrupted or shut-off, permit
doors to easily open manually without damage to automatic operator system.
Capacity of Unit: Provide unit of the size recommended by manufacturer's published data
for the door size, weight, movement, and condition of exposure, for long-term
maintenance- free operation under normal traffic load for the type of occupancy indicated.
Exposed Housing for Operators: Formed sheet steel cover, 1.5 mm [0.0598"] (16 gage)
minimum thickness, with provisions for maintenance access. Provide with fasteners
concealed when door is in closed position. Provide in manufacturer's standard prime coat
finish for field painting.
Adjustment Features: Provide operators with fully adjustable opening speeds, closing
speeds and checking speeds.
2.2.1.1 Electrical Type for Sliding Doors
Sealed operating cylinder having electric operator: Operators shall have adjustable
opening and closing cycle. Piston shall be powered by self-controlled electric unit.
On pairs of doors, operators shall allow either door to be opened manually without the
other door opening.
2.3 COMBINATION SLIDING DOORS
2.3.1 Sliding Automatic Doors
Sliding automatic doors shall have electric operators, conforming to ANSI A156.10 and the
following requirements as applicable. Assembly shall be single or bi-parting sliding doors
as shown with aluminum frames as specified. Glazing of doors and frames is specified in
Section 08810, GLASS AND GLAZING.
2.3.2 Automatic Sliding Door Mode of Operation
Doors shall be opened by electric motor and mechanical gear transmission pulling door
from closed to open position and shall stop door by electrically reducing voltage and
stalling door against mechanical stop. Door shall be pulled closed by a spring or a
mechanical mechanism in operator, and close shall be controlled by gear system and motor
acting as dynamic break without power. A timing belt shall be used to convert rotating
motion from the operator into horizontal motion of door. Timing belt shall use a spring
loaded idler sprocket to maintain belt tension. System shall permit manual control of door
in event of power failure. Opening and closing speeds shall be adjustable.
Page | 4 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.3.3 Sliding Door Hardware Guide Rollers, Door Carrier

Top door carriers shall ride on delrin rollers incorporating sealed bearings with each door
having two support rollers and one anti-rise roller. Each roller shall have 10 mm of
vertical adjustment with positive mechanical locks. Each door shall als o include two
urethane covered oil impregnated bearing bottom rollers attached with 5 mm thick formed
steel guide brackets. Each door carrier supporting a door leaf shall include a vertical steel
reinforcing member to prevent sagging when door is swung under breakaway conditions.
All carbon steel brackets and fittings shall be plated for corrosion resistance.
2.3.4 Slide Door Power Operator
Completely assembled and sealed unit which shall include helical gear drive transmission,
mechanical spring and bearings, all located in cast aluminum housing and filled with
special lubricant for extreme conditions. Attached to transmission system shall be a DC
shunt-wound permanent magnet motor with sealed ball bearings. Motors shall operate
from 115 volt supply and require less than 5 amps per motor. Complete unit shall be
rubber mounted with provisions for easy maintenance and replacement.
2.4
DOOR CONTROLS
2.4.1 Opening and Closing Actions

Opening and closing actions of doors shall be actuated by controls and safety devices
specified, and conform to ANSI 156.10. Controls shall cause doors to open instantly when
control device is actuated; hold doors in open positions; then, cause door s to close, unless
safety device or reactivated control interrupts operation.
2.4.2 Manual Controls
2.4.2.1 Push Plate Wall Switch
Recess type, cast aluminum or stainless steel push plate minimum 100 mm by 100 mm, 13
mm high letters "To Operate Door--Push" engraved on face of plate.
Unless otherwise specified, all doors shall operate for two way traffic so that door
operation can be controlled from either direction of approach.
2.4.3 Detector
Motion Detecting Control System: Manufacturer's standard self- contained motiondetecting control system composed of micro-wave scanner to activate door operator, and
horizontal photo-cell beam across door opening to prevent door from closing until door is
clear of traffic; in housing finished to match finish of doors and frames; adjustable for
scanner pattern and sensitivity.
Install scanners on both sides of each sliding door, unless otherwise indicated
Page | 5 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.5
SAFETY DEVICES
Area over which doors swing or slide shall be a safety section and anyone standing in path
of door's movement shall be protected by a safety device, except where push to open, push
to controls are shown.
Electric eye shall be provided in door frame on sliding doors to prevent doors from closing
when anyone is standing, or sitting in a wheelchair, in the center of the door or doors.
When electric eye is activated, doors shall recycle to full open position.
Time delay switches shall be adjustable between 3 to 60 seconds and shall control closing
cycle of doors.
Decals with sign "In" or "Do Not Enter" shall be installed on both faces of each door where
shown.
Each swing door shall have installed on the pull side a presence sensor to detect any person
standing in the door swing path and prevent the door from opening.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
Coordinate installation of equipment with other related work. Manual controls and power
disconnect switches shall be recessed or semi-flush mounted in partitions. Secure operator
components to adjacent construction with suitable fastenings. Conceal conduits, piping,
and electric equipment, in finish work.
Install power units in locations shown. Where units are to be mounted on walls, provide
metal supports or shelves for the units. All equipment, including time delay switches, shall
be accessible for maintenance and adjustment.
Operators shall be adjusted and must function properly for the type of traffic (pedestrians,
carts, stretchers and wheelchairs) expected to pass through doors. Each door leaf of pairs
of doors shall open and close in synchronization. On pairs of doors, operators shall allow
either door to be opened manually without the other door opening.
Install controls at positions shown and make them convenient for particular traffic expected
to pass through openings. Maximum height of push plate wall switches from finished
floors shall be 1000 mm unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Officer.
3.2
SCHEDULE
3.2.1 Exterior and Vestibule Doors at Main Entrance

3.2.1.1 Operator
Overhead mounted.
Page | 6 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.2.1.2 Controls
Motion detectors.
3.2.1.3 Safety Devices
horizontal photo-cell beam
Page | 7 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 08810 GLASS AND GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
DEFINITIONS
1.4
SYSTEMS PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.8
WARRANTY
08810-3/15
08810-4/15
08810-4/15
08810-4/15
08810-5/15
08810-7/15
08810-8/15
08810-8/15
08810-8/15
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS PRODUCT
2.2
HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS
PRODUCTS, GENERAL
2.3
2.4
COATED MONOLITHIC GLASS PRODUCTS
2.5
INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS
2.6
FIRE-RESISTIVE GLAZING PRODUCTS
2.7
ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS
2.7.1 GENERAL
2.7.2 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANT
STANDARD
2.7.3 GLAZING SEALANT FOR FIRE
RESISTANT GLAZING PRODUCTS
2.8
GLAZING GASKETS
2.8.1 COMPATIBILITY
2.8.2 LOCK-STRIP GASKETS
2.8.3 DENSE COMPRESSION GASKETS
2.8.4 SOFT COMPRESSION GASKETS
2.9
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
2.9.1 GENERAL
2.9.2 CLEANERS, PRIMERS AND SEALERS
2.9.3 SETTING BLOCKS
2.9.4 SPACERS
2.9.5 EDGE BLOCKS
2.9.6 PERIMETER INSULATION FOR FIRERESISTIVE GLAZING
08810-8/15
08810-8/15
2.10
FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING

PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
3.2
PREPARATION
3.3
GLAZING, GENERAL
3.4
GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
Section 08810 Glass And Glazing
08810-9/15
08810-9/15
08810-9/15
08810-10/15
08810-10/15
08810-10/15
08810-11/15
08810-11/15
08810-11/15
08810-11/15
08810-11/15
08810-11/15
08810-11/15
08810-11/15
08810-11/15
08810-11/15
08810-12/15
08810-12/16
08810-12/15
08810-12/15
08810-12/15
08810-12/15
08810-12/15
08810-12/15
08810-12/15
08810-13/15
08810-14/15
Page | 1 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.5
3.6
3.7
SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 INSULATING GLASS

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING
SEALANT
08810-14/15
08810-14/15
08810-14/15
08810-15/15
08810-15/15
Page | 2 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 08810 - GLASS AND GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
ANSI Z97.1
Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings Safety Performance

Specifications and Methods of Test.
ASTM C 509
ASTM C 864.
ASTM C 920
ASTM C 1036
ASTM C 1048
ASTM C 1115
ASTM C 1172
ASTM E 119
ASTM E 152
ASTM E 163
ASTM E 774
ASTM E 1300
1.2
Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material.

Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks,
and Spacers.
Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
Specification for Flat Glass
Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and
Uncoated Glass.
Specification for Dense Elastomeric Silicone Rubber Gaskets and Accessories.
Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass
Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction
Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
Fire Tests of Window Assemblies
Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units
Practice for Determining the Minimum Thickness of Annealed Glass Required
to Resist a Specified Load
SUBMITTALS
1.2.1
General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1

Specification Sections.
1.2.2
Product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated.
1.2.3
Samples for verification purposes of 300 mm square samples of each type of glass indicated
except for clear monolithic glass products, and 300 mm long samples of each color required
(except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket
sample between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing
system.
1.2.4
Product certificates signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their products
comply with specified requirements.
Page | 3 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.2.4.1
1.3
1.4
Separate certifications are not

manufacturer's permanent labels
provided labels represent a quality
agency or independent testing
jurisdiction.
required for glazing materials bearing

designating type and thickness of glass,
control program of a recognized certification
agency acceptable to authorities having
1.2.5
Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing
materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants. Include sealant
manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and
recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
1.2.6
Compatibility test report from manufacturer of insulating glass edge sealant indicating that
glass edge sealants were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials including
sealants, glazing tape, gaskets, setting blocks, and edge blocks.
1.2.7
Product test reports for each type of glazing sealant and gasket indicated, evidencing
compliance with requirements specified.
1.2.5
Maintenance data for glass and other glazing materials to include in Operating and
Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1.
DEFINITIONS
1.3.1
Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed
to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and
practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's
directions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration
in metallic coating.
1.3.2
Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use due
to causes other than glass breakage and improper practices for maintaining, and
cleaning insulating glass. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust,
moisture, or film on the interior surfaces of glass. Improper practices for maintaining
and cleaning glass do not comply with the manufacturer's directions.

1.4.1
General: Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to
withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where
applicable), without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the
following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or
gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; and other
defects in construction.
1.4.2
Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated on Drawings are for detailing only.
Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions.
Provide glass lites for the various size openings in the thicknesses and strengths
(annealed or heat-treated) to meet or exceed the following criteria:
Page | 4 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.4.2.1
1.4.2.2.
Minimum glass thickness, nominally, of lites in exterior walls is 6 mm.

Tinted and heat-absorbing glass thicknesses for each tint indicated are
the same throughout Project.
Minimum glass thicknesses of lites, whether composed of annealed or
heat-treated glass, are selected so the worst-case probability of failure
does not exceed the following:
1.4.2.3.
a. 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not over 15 degrees off
vertical and under wind action. Determine minimum thickness of
monolithic annealed glass according to ASTM E 1300. For other
than monolithic annealed glass, determine thickness per glass
manufacturer's standard method of analysis including applying
adjustment factors to ASTM E 1300 based on type of glass.
1.4.3.
Normal thermal movement results from the following maximum change (range) in
ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass-framing members and glazing
components. Engineering calculation shall be based on materials' actual surface
temperatures due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
1.4.3.1.
1.5
Temperature Change (Range): 67 C deg, ambient; 100 C deg, material

surfaces.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1.
1.5.2.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product

manufacturers and organizations below, except where more stringent requirements
are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in
this Section or in referenced standards.
1.5.1.1.
FGMA Publications: "FGMA Glazing Manual."
1.5.1.2.
AAMA Publications: AAMA TIR-A7 "Sloped Glazing Guidelines" and

"Glass Design for Sloped Glazing."
1.5.1.3.
LSGA Publications: "LSGA Design Guide."
1.5.1.4.
SIGMA Publications: TM-3000 "Vertical Glazing Guidelines" and TB3001 "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of
16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials.
1.5.2.1.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently

marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council
(SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Page | 5 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.5.3.
Fire-Resistive Glazing Products for Door Assemblies: Products identical to those

tested per ASTM E 152, labeled and listed by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5.4.
Fire-Resistive Glazing Products for Window Assemblies: Products identical to those

tested per ASTM E 163, labeled and listed by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently
marked either on spacers or at least one component lite of units with appropriate
certification label of inspecting and testing agency indicated below:
1.5.5.
1.5.5.1.
Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC).
1.5.5.2.
Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALI).
1.5.5.3.
National Certified Testing Laboratories (NCTL).
1.5.6.
Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed glazing

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project with a record of
successful in-service performance.
1.5.7.
Single-Source Responsibility for Glass: Obtain glass from one source for each product
indicated below:
1.5.7.1.
Primary glass of each (ASTM C 1036) type and class indicated.
1.5.7.2.
Heat-treated glass of each (ASTM C 1048) condition indicated.
1.5.7.3.
Laminated glass of each (ASTM C 1172) kind indicated.
1.5.7.4.
Insulating glass of each construction indicated.
1.5.8.
Single-Source Responsibility for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories

from one source for each product and installation method indicated.
1.5.9.
Field-Constructed Mockups: Prior to glazing, erect mockups for each glass product
indicated below to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and quality of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with
the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work:
1.5.9.1.
Glass Products: Erect mockups with all kinds of glass to match glazing
systems required for Project, including typical lite size, framing systems, and
glazing methods:
1.5.9.2.
Place mockups on site in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Architect.
1.5.9.3.
Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups
will be erected.
Page | 6 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.5.9.4.
Obtain Architect's acceptance of mockups before start of final unit of Work.
1.5.9.5.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
1.5.9.6.
Retain and maintain mockups during construction in undisturbed condition as

a standard for judging completed unit of Work.
a. Accepted mock-ups in undisturbed condition at time of Substantial
Completion may become part of completed unit of Work.
1.5.10. Pre-construction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing:

Submit to sealant
manufacturers, samples of each glass, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing
member that will contact or affect glazing sealants for compatibility and adhesion
testing as indicated below:
1.5.10.1. Use test methods standard with sealant manufacturer to determine if priming
and other specific preparation techniques are required for rapid, optimum
glazing sealants adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates.
a. Perform tests under normal environmental conditions during installation.
1.5.10.2. Submit not less than nine pieces of each type and finish of glass-framing
members and each type, class, kind, condition, and form of glass (monolithic,
laminated, insulating units) for adhesion testing, as well as one sample of
each glazing accessory (gaskets, setting blocks and spacers) for compatibility
testing.
1.5.10.3. Schedule sufficient time to test and analyze results to prevent delay in the
Work.
1.5.10.4. Investigate materials failing compatibility or adhesion tests and get sealant
manufacturer's written recommendations for corrective measures, including
using special primers.
1.5.10.5. Testing is not required when glazing sealant manufacturer can submit
required preparation data that is acceptable to Architect and is based on
previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to and compatibility
with submitted glazing materials.
1.5.11. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
1.6

1.6.1.
Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to

prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes,
direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
Page | 7 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.6.1.1.
1.7
Where insulating glass units will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply
with insulating glass fabricator's recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid
hermetic seal ruptures.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.7.1.
Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturer or
when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1.7.1.1.
1.8
Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above 4 deg C.
WARRANTY
1.8.1.
General: Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition
to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of
the Contract Documents.
1.8.2.
Manufacturer's Warranty on Coated Glass Products: Submit written warranty signed by

coated glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those coated glass units that
deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed
Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only
deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning
practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions.
1.8.2.1.
1.8.3.
Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 5 years after date of
Substantial Completion.
Manufacturer's Warranty on Insulating Glass: Submit written warranty signed by

manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating glass units
that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight
allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers
only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, protecting,
and maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions.
1.8.3.1.
Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years after date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1.
PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS

Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class as indicated below, and
Quality q3 (glazing select).
2.1.1.1
Class as indicated in each Product Data Sheet at end of this Section.
Page | 8 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.1.2.
Refer to Primary Tinted Float Glass Product Data Sheet for tint color and nominal
performance characteristics of Class 2 uncoated tinted glass for monolithic glazing relative
to visible light transmittance, U-values, shading coefficient, and visible reflectance.
2.1.3.
Refer to coated glass product requirements for tint color and performance characteristics of
coated tinted glass for monolithic glazing relative to visible light transmittance, U-values,
shading coefficient, and visible reflectance.
2.1.4.
Refer to requirements for sealed insulating glass units for performance characteristics of
assembled units composed of tinted glass, coated or uncoated, relative to visible light
transmittance, U-values, shading coefficient, and visible reflectance.
2.2
HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

2.2.1
2.3
Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel

to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3.1.
Uncoated, Tinted, Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated

surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 2 (tinted heat-absorbing and light-reducing),
Quality q3 (glazing select), with tint color and performance characteristics for 6 mm thick
glass matching those indicated for annealed primary tinted float glass; kind as indicated
below:
2.3.1.1
2.3.1.2
2.3.2.
Coated, Tinted, Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C (other coated glass),
Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 2 (tinted heat-absorbing and light-reducing), Quality q3
(glazing select), with kind, coating type, and performance characteristics complying with
requirements specified under coated glass products.
2.3.2.1
2.3.2.2.
2.4
Kind HS (heat strengthened) where indicated.

Kind FT (fully tempered)
Kind HS (heat strengthened) where indicated.

Kind FT (fully tempered)
COATED MONOLITHIC GLASS PRODUCTS

2.4.1.
General: Performance characteristics designated for coated monolithic glass products are
nominal values based on manufacturer's published test data for glass products 6 mm thick,
unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements specified including those for primary
and heat-treated float glass products as they relate to properties of glass to which coatings
are applied.
2.4.1.1.
U-values are expressed as W/sq. m x K.
2.4.1.2.
Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) coated float glass except provide Kind FT

(fully tempered) products where coated safety glass is designated or required.
Page | 9 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.5
INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS

2.5.1
2.6
Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed lites of
glass separated by dehydrated air spaces complying with ASTM E 774 and with other
requirements indicated, including those in Insulating Glass Product Data Sheet at the end of
this Section.
2.5.1.1.
For properties of individual glass lites making up units, refer to requirements

specified elsewhere in this Section applicable to types, classes, kinds, and
conditions of glass products comprising lites of insulating glass units.
2.5.1.2.
Provide heat-treated, coated float glass of kind indicated or, if not otherwise
indicated, Kind HS (heat strengthened) where recommended by manufacturer to
comply with system performance requirements specified and Kind FT (fully
tempered) where safety glass is designated or required.
2.5.1.3.
Performance characteristics designated for coated insulating glass are nominal

values based on manufacturer's published test data for units with lites 6 mm thick
and nominal 13 mm dehydrated space between lites, unless otherwise indicated.
2.5.1.4.
U-values are expressed as W/sq. m x K.
FIRE-RESISTIVE GLAZING PRODUCTS

2.6.1
Fire-Resistive, Gel-Filled, Dual-Glazed Units: Proprietary product consisting of two lites of

Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Kind FT
(fully tempered) float glass, each lite 6 mm thick, with a perimeter metal spacer separating
lites and dual edge seal, enclosing cavity filled completely with clear, fully transparent, heatabsorbing gel.
2.6.1.1
2.7.
2.7.1.
Fire-Resistance: as shown on drawings, determined by testing identical products

in metal-framed assemblies per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS

General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:
2.7.1.1.
Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with

other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating
glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and
service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.
2.7.1.2.
Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturer's recommendations for

selecting glazing sealants and tapes that are suitable for applications indicated
and conditions existing at time of installation.
Page | 10 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.7.1.3.
Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following:
a. Match colors indicated by reference to manufacturer's standard
designations.
b. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
standard colors for products of type indicated.
2.7.2.
Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing,

elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that comply with ASTM C 920 requirements
indicated on each Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section,
including those referencing ASTM classifications for Type, Grade, Class and Uses.
2.7.2.1.
2.7.3.
2.8.
Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is

specified in Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Data Sheet, provide products,
when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per
ASTM C 719, with the capability to withstand the specified percentage change in
the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with
other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated.
Glazing Sealant for Fire-Resistant Glazing Products:

assembly to obtain fire-resistive rating.
Identical to product used in test
GLAZING GASKETS
2.8.1.
Compatibility: glazing gaskets are to be fully compatible with glazing sealants.
2.8.2.
Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames
with molded corner units and zipper lock strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.
2.8.3.
Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below,

complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile
and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:
2.8.3.1
2.8.3.2
2.8.3.3
2.8.4.
Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of

material indicated below, complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black, and of profile and
hardness required to maintain watertight seal:
2.8.4.1.
2.8.4.2.
2.8.4.3.
2.9.
2.9.1
Neoprene, ASTM C 864.

EPDM, ASTM C 864.
Silicone, ASTM C 1115.
Neoprene.
EPDM.
Silicone.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for
Page | 11 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces
contacted in installation.
2.9.2
Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
2.9.3
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85 plus or

minus 5.
2.9.4
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness

required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
2.9.5
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (sidewalking).
2.9.6
Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to
obtain fire-resistive rating.
2.10
FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
2.10.1.
Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for
Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with
recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to
comply with system performance requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
3.1.1.
Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance with the following:
3.1.1.1.
3.1.1.2.
3.1.1.3.
3.1.1.4.
3.1.2.
3.2
Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness,

offsets at corners.
Presence and functioning of weep system.
Minimum required face or edge clearances.
Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
3.2.1.
3.3
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates.
GLAZING, GENERAL
3.3.1.
Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and

other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including
those in referenced glazing publications.
Page | 12 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.3.2.
Glazing channel dimensions as indicated on Drawings provide necessary bite on glass,

minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thickness, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
3.3.3.
Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as follows:
3.3.31.
Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not
impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within
openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass lites with flares or
bevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are located at top of opening, unless
otherwise indicated by manufacturer's label.
3.3.3.2.
Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off site. Damaged
glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, weaken
glass and impair performance and appearance.
3.3.4.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
3.3.5.
Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced
glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course
of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
3.3.6.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
3.3.7.
Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 1250 mm (length plus height) as follows:
3.3.7.1.
Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other. Install correct size
and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and glazing
tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and
comply with system performance requirements.
3.3.7.2.
Provide 3 mm minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness
of tape.
3.3.8.
Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications,

unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer.
3.3.9.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
3.3.10.
Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or
gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when
installation is subjected to movement.
3.3.11.
Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in manner recommended by
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints
with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
Page | 13 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.4
GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

3.4.1.
Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit

openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation.
3.4.2.
Secure compression gaskets in place with joints located at corners to compress gaskets
producing a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket
joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4.3.
Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.5
SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

3.5.1.
Install continuous spacers between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face
clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems until
sealants cure. Secure spacers in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant
relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
3.5.2.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or
bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. Install
pressurized gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets.
3.5.3.
3.6
LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING

3.6.1.
3.7
Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's printed recommendations. Provide
supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
3.7.1.
Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
3.7.2
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do
come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass
manufacturer.
3.7.3.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt,
scum, alkali deposits, or stains, and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.
3.7.4.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way,
including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period.
Page | 14 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.7.5 .
Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended by glass manufacturer.
PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - INSULATING GLASS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Designation: Insulating Glass Unit.

Classification of Units: Class C, CB or CBA. per ASTM E 774.
Air Space Width: Nominal 12 mm measured perpendicularly from surfaces of glass lites at
unit's edge.
Sealing System: Dual seal, primary and secondary sealants: polyisobutylene and silicone.
Spacer Specifications: Aluminum with powdered metal paint finish.
1.
2.
3.
F.
Desiccant: Either molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both.

Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction.
Color of Spacer: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
Glass Specifications: Comply with the following requirements:

1.
Thickness of Each Lite: 6.0 mm.
2.
Coated Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass, kind FT (fully tempered) with low-E
coating on surface 3, Condition C (other coated glass)
a. Low-Emissivity Coating: Pyrolytic on third surface.
3.
Uncoated Tinted Outdoor Lite: Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing and light-reducing) float
glass, kind FT (fully tempered) with a tint color of blue.
a. Class of Glass:
4.
Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing and light-reducing), color

of tint: Blue.
Nominal Performance Characteristics of insulated double unit are as indicated below:

a. Visible Light Transmittance: 45%
b. U-Value:
0.37 Btu/ hr.Ft2.F
c. Shading Coefficient:
0.46
PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANT

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Designation: Elastomeric Glazing Sealant.

Base Polymer: Neutral-curing silicone.
Type: M multi-component.
Grade: NS (non-sag).
Class: 25.
Use[s] Related to Exposure: NT (non-traffic).
Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates indicated.
Page | 15 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.
Use Glazing Substrates: Coated glass, aluminum coated with a high-performance coating,
galvanized steel, elastomeric glazing gaskets and glazing accessories.
Page | 16 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09200 LATHING AND PLASTERING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
QUALIFICATIONS
1.4
1.5
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
09200-3/14
09200-4/14
09200-4/14
09200-4/14
09200-4/14
09200-5/14
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NON-LOAD BEARING WALLS
2.2
LOAD BEARING STUD WALLS
2.2.1 STUDS
2.2.2 RUNNER TRACKS
2.2.3 BRIDGING
2.3
METAL WALL FURRING
2.4
SUSPENDED CEILING FRAMING
2.5
ACCESSORIES
2.5.1 HANGERS
2.5.2 FASTENINGS
2.5.2.1 TIE WIRE
2.5.2.2 CLIPS
2.5.3 EXPANDED FLANGE CORNER BEADS
2.5.4 BULLNOSE CORNER BEADS
2.5.5 CORNERITES
2.5.6 STRIPLATH
2.5.7 BASE SCREEDS
2.5.8 CASING BEADS
2.5.9 CONTROL JOINTS
2.5.10 SCREWS
2.6
METAL LATH
2.7
CEMENT PLASTER MATERIALS
2.8
WALL OPENINGS FRAMES
09200-5/14
09200-5/14
09200-5/14
09200-5/14
09200-5/14
09200-5/14
09200-6/14
09200-6/14
09200-6/14
09200-6/14
09200-6/14
09200-6/14
09200-6/14
09200-6/14
09200-7/14
09200-7/14
09200-7/14
09200-7/14
09200-7/14
09200-7/14
09200-7/14
09200-7/14
09200-8/14
09200-8/14
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
3.2
3.2.1
HANGERS
3.2.2
MAIN RUNNERS
3.2.3
FURRING CHANNELS
3.2.4
LIGHT FIXTURES
3.3
FURRED CEILING FRAMING
3.4
LATHING
3.5
OPENINGS
3.6
INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
3.7
PLASTER THICKNESS AND SURFACE EVENNESS
3.8
PLASTER GROUT
3.9
PROPORTIONS AND MIXINGS
09200-9/14
09200-9/14
09200-9/14
09200-9/14
09200-9/14
09200-9/14
09200-10/14
09200-10/14
09200-10/14
09200-11/14
09200-11/14
09200-12/14
09200-13/14
09200-13/14
Section 09200 Lathing And Plastering
Page | 1 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
MACHINE APPLICATIONS
QUALITY CONTROL
APPLICATION OF FINISHES
PATCHING
SAMPLES OF COMPLETED WORK
09200-13/14
09200-13/14
09200-14/14
09200-14/14
09200-14/14
Page | 2 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09200 - LATHING AND PLASTERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
SASO 142
SASO 143
SASO 855

Portland Cement, Ordinary and Rapid-Hardening
White Portland Cement

ASTM A 580
ASTM A 853
ASTM C 29
ASTM C 37
ASTM C 61
ASTM C 150
ASTM C 206
ASTM C 472
ASTM C 645
ASTM C 754
ASTM C 841
ASTM C 847
ASTM C 926
ASTM C 933
ASTM C 955
ASTM C 1002
ASTM C 1047
(1991b) Stainless and Heat Resisting Steel Wire

(1991) Steel Wire, Carbon, for General Use
(1991a) Unit Weight and Voids in Aggregate
(1992) Gypsum Lath
(1991) Gypsum Keene's cement
(1984; R 1992) Finishing Hydrated Lime
(1990a) Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and
Gypsum Concrete
(1992) Non-load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track),
and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum
Board
(1988) Installation of Steel Framing
Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum
(1990) Installation of Interior
Lathing and Furring
(1988; R 1992) Metal Lath
(1990) Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster
(1980; R 1990) Welded Wire Lath
(1993) Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs,
Runners (Track), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application
of Gypsum Board and Metal Plaster Bases
(1993) Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board
or Metal Plaster Bases
(1992) Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer
Base
Page | 3 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001

FS QQ-N-281
1.2
(Rev D; Am 2) Nickel-Copper Alloy Bar, Rod, Plate, Sheet,

Strip, Wire, Forgings, and Structural and Special Shaped Sections
SUBMITTALS
Contracting Officer approval is required for submittals with a "GA" designation;
submittals having an "FIO" designation are for information only. The following shall be
submitted for approval in accordance with Section 01300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Data
Plastering Materials and Accessories; GA.
Manufacturer's pre-printed descriptive data, catalog cuts, and installation instructions for
plastering materials and accessories.
SD-04 Drawings
Lath and Plaster; GA.
Drawings including installation details, ceiling framing, and furring.
SD-13 Certificates
Certification indicating that factory-mixed plaster provides a minimum compressive
strength of not less than 6.9 MPa when tested in accordance with ASTM C 472.
SD-14 Samples
One 1m square sample panel of each specified finish.
1.3
QUALIFICATIONS
Manufacturer shall specialize in manufacturing the types of material specified, and shall
have a minimum of 5 years of documented successful experience. Applicator shall
specialize in the type of gypsum board work required to meet requirements, with a
minimum of 5 years of documented experience.
1.4

Materials shall be delivered to project site in the original containers bearing the name of
manufacturer, contents and brand name. Plaster, cement, and lime shall be stored off the
ground under weathertight cover and away from sweating walls and other damp surfaces
until ready for use. Accessories shall be stored off the ground in a weathertight structure
for protection. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from project site.
Page | 4 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.5
A temperature between 4 degrees C and 27 degrees C shall be evenly maintained in the
building for a period of not less than 1 week prior to application of plaster. Interior
spaces shall be ventilated in accordance with ASTM C 842 immediately after applying
plaster.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NON-LOADBEARING WALLS
2.1.1 Studs
Studs for non-loadbearing walls shall conform to ASTM C 645. Studs shall be prefabricated,
C-shaped with minimum 32 mm high flanges, punched
web for utility access, 1.21 mm thick steel, G60 hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication, or truss-designed studs
fabricated of 1.52 mm thick steel angles with a single
No. 7 gauge rod forming an open-web truss-like pattern
between flanges with all points contact-welded.
2.1.2 Runner Tracks
Prefabricated floor and ceiling runner tracks shall conform to ASTM C 645. Tracks shall be
prefabricated, U-shaped, un-punched web, gauge to match studs, G60 hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
2.2 LOADBEARING STUD WALLS
2.2.1 Studs
Studs for load-bearing walls shall conform to ASTM C 955. Studs shall be prefabricated,
C-shaped with minimum 32 mm flanges, punched web for utility access, 1.52 mm thick
steel, G60 hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
2.2.2 Runner Tracks
Floor and ceiling runner tracks shall conform to ASTM C 955. Tracks shall be
prefabricated, U-shaped with minimum 22 mm flanges, un-punched web, G60 hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication.
2.2.3 Bridging
Bridging in load-bearing walls shall conform to ASTM C 955. Bridging shall be
minimum 19 mm wide x 11 mm deep cold-rolled steel channel with weld attachment
clips at each stud location or V-bar type weld or screw attached to each stud flange.
Bridging shall be adequate to provide lateral support for the stud.
Page | 5 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.3 METAL WALL FURRING

Metal wall furring channels shall conform to ASTM C 645. Furring channels shall be
formed from cold-rolled steel, 19 mm wide x 11 mm deep, G60 hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
2.4

Main carrying channels for suspended plaster ceilings shall conform to ASTM C 645.
Carrying channels shall be formed from 1.52 mm thick cold-rolled steel, 38 mm wide x
11 mm deep. Cross furring members shall conform to ASTM C 645, and shall be formed
from cold-rolled steel, 19 mm wide x 11 mm deep. Carrying channels and furring
members shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
2.5
ACCESSORIES
2.5.1 Hangers
Suspended ceiling runner channel hangers shall be soft, annealed steel wire not less than
4 mm nominal diameter, conforming to ASTM A 853 or flat iron or steel straps, at least
2 by 22 mm size, coated with zinc, cadmium, or rust-inhibiting paint.
2.5.2 Fastenings
Tie wire, rings, and other fastenings shall be corrosion-resisting steel conforming to
ASTM A 580, composition 302, 304, or 316, Condition A, or nickel-copper alloy
conforming to FS QQ-N-281, Class A or B, annealed condition. Walls, partitions, and
other vertical surfaces not incorporated in ceiling construction may be erected with soft,
annealed steel conforming to ASTM A 853.
2.5.2.1 Tie Wire
Tie wire for constructing partitions and vertical furring, for securing metal lath to
supports, and for lacing shall be not less than 1.2 mm diameter. Tie wire for all
other applications shall be not less than 1.6 mm diameter.
2.5.2.2 Clips
Clips used in lieu of tie wire for securing furring channels to the runner channels
in ceiling construction shall be made from strips not less than 3 mm thick or shall
be hairpin clip formed of 8 gauge wire not less than 0.4 mm nominal diameter.
Other clips and rings or fastenings of similar materials shall be equivalent in
holding power to that provided by tie wire for the specific application.
2.5.3 Expanded Flange Corner Beads
Expanded flange corner beads shall conform to ASTM C 1047. Beads shall be fabricated
of aluminum 0.55 mm thick galvanized steel, with 64 mm wide flanges and 5 mm thick
bead.
Page | 6 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.5.4 Bullnose Corner Beads

Bullnose corner beads shall conform to ASTM C 1047. Beads shall be fabricated of 0.55
mm thick galvanized steel, with 64 mm wide flanges and 20 mm bead.
2.5.5 Cornerites
Cornerites shall conform to ASTM C 847. Cornerites shall be fabricated of galvanized
expanded metal lath to form an angle of at least 100 degrees, with outstanding legs of not
less than 50 mm.
2.5.6 Striplath
Striplath shall conform to ASTM C 847. Striplath shall be fabricated of galvanized steel,
1.4 kg per square meter.
2.5.7 Base Screeds
Base screeds shall conform to ASTM C 847. Screeds shall be fabricated of 0.55 mm thick
galvanized steel, 13 mm depth, with not less than 50 mm wide expansion flanges.
2.5.8 Casing Beads
Casing beads shall conform to ASTM C 847. Beads shall be fabricated of 0.70 mm thick
steel 13 mm depth, 25 mm wide expansion wings, front edge of face flange shaved for
intended use, back slightly arched to provide a spring effect.
2.5.9 Control Joints
Control joints shall conform to ASTM C 847, and shall be designed for expansion and
contraction of plasterwork due to thermal exposure. Control joints shall be fabricated of
0.55 mm thick galvanized steel for interior applications and 0.76 mm thick zinc alloy for
exterior applications, with perforated or expanded-metal wings. Provide control joints
where deemed necessary. Shop drawings indicating details and location of these joints
shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Contracting Officers' approval.
2.5.10 Screws
Self-drill steel screws shall conform to ASTM C 1002. Screws shall be Type S for use
with steel framing and Type W for use with wood members.
2.6 METAL LATH
2.6.1 Expanded Metal Lath
Expanded metal lath shall conform to ASTM C 847. Lath shall be flat base lath,
expanded from cold-rolled carbon sheet steel of commercial quality, coated with
rust-inhibitive paint after fabrication, 1.8 kg per square meter, without backing.
Page | 7 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.7 CEMENT PLASTER MATERIALS

2.7.1 Portland Cement
Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C 150, gray Portland cement Type I, white
Portland cement Type I with 13 mm chopped alkali-resistant fiberglass strands, minimum
680 g per sack of cement.
2.7.2 Aggregates
The unit weight of aggregates shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 29.
Aggregates shall conform to ASTM C 35, except that the gradation of natural or
manufactured sand for Portland-cement plaster shall be as follows:
Sieve Size
(mm)
4.75
2.36
1.18
0.60
0.30
0.15
Sand, Percentage by Weight

Retained on Each Sieve
Maximum
Minimum
0
8
38
78
97
100
--2
22
52
65
97
2.7.3 Water
Water shall be clean, fresh, potable, and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis
and organic matter injurious to the plaster and to any metal in the system.
2.7.4 Lime
Lime shall conform to ASTM C 206, Type S-Special hydrated finishing lime suitable for
use in scratch brown and finish coats of Portland-cement plaster.
2.8 WALL OPENING FRAMES
Steel frames for wall openings for doors, pass-through openings, and access panels shall
be as specified in Section 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES or Section 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS. Wood frames, wood bucks, and blocking for wall openings
for doors, pass-through openings, and access panels shall be as specified in Section
06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY.
Page | 8 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
Project conditions shall be verified as ready to receive the work. Field measurements
shall be verified for compliance with manufacturer's published recommendations.
Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.2

Suspended system shall be installed in accordance with ASTM C 754 and ASTM C 841.
Where channels are spliced, the ends shall be overlapped not less than 300 mm for 38
mm channels and not less than 200 mm for 20 mm channels with flanges of channels
interlocked and securely tied near each end of the splice with two loops of the tie wire.
Splices shall be staggered.
3.2.1 Hangers
Wire or strap hangers shall be attached to structural members in accordance with ASTM
C 841, except hangers shall be spaced not more than 1220 mm along runner channels and
900 mm in the other direction or 1050 mm in both directions unless otherwise indicated
or approved. Locations of hangers shall be coordinated with other work. Hangers at
ends of runner channels shall be located not more than 150 mm from wall. Hanger wire
shall be looped around bottom chord of open-web steel joist or structural steel members,
or shall be looped around center I-beam clamps attached to structural steel members with
three full turns around itself. Sags or twists in the suspended system shall be adjusted.
Damaged or faulty parts shall be replaced.
3.2.2 Main Runners
Main runner channels shall be installed in accordance with ASTM C 754. Hanger wire
shall be saddle-tied to runner channels, and the end of hanger wires shall be twisted three
times around itself. Main runners shall not come in contact with abutting masonry or
concrete walls and partitions. Main runners shall be located within 150 mm of the
paralleling wall to support the ends of cross furring.
3.2.3 Furring Channels
Furring channels shall be spaced in accordance with ASTM C 841 for the type of lath
used. Furring channels shall be securely saddle-tied to the runner channels and to
structural supports at each crossing with tie wire, hairpin clips, or equivalent clips or
fastenings. Furring channels shall be located within 50 mm of parallel walls and beams,
and 15 mm from abutting walls. When gypsum lath is used on ceilings, hat-shaped sheet
metal furring channels may be used in lieu of 19 mm rolled steel furring channels.
Gypsum lath shall be screw-applied at 200 mm on centers along supports and not less
than 10 mm from edges of lath.
Page | 9 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.2.4 Light Fixtures

Light fixtures shall not be supported directly from suspended ceiling runners. Where
light fixtures occur (recessed or surface mounted), hanger wires shall be anchored to
structure at four corners of light fixtures, and additional wires provided at appropriate
locations to carry the weight of light fixtures.
3.3
FURRED CEILING FRAMING

Ceiling runners at continuous furred ceilings shall be applied directly to furring channels
and secured thereto with tie wire, bolts, or screws at not more than 600 mm centers.
3.4 LATHING
3.4.1 Metal Lath on Vertical Surfaces
Metal lath shall be applied with the long dimension across the supports, with true even
surfaces, and without sags or buckles. Metal lath on vertical surfaces shall be oriented to
provide maximum mechanical bond with plaster and the lower sheet shall be attached to
overlap the upper sheet. When paper-backed lath is used, the upper sheet shall be
attached to overlap the lower sheet. The lath shall be secured to supports at intervals not
exceeding 150 mm. Nails or staples shall be used for securing lath to wood supports. Tie
wires, rings, clips, or other approved fasteners having equivalent holding power of the tie
wires shall be used for securing the plaster base to metal supports and to concrete or
masonry. Side-laps or junction of sides of plaster base shall be tied or otherwise secured
at intervals not exceeding 225 mm between supports, in addition to being secured to
supports.
3.4.1.1 Metal Lath on Ceilings
Lath on unrestrained ceilings shall not be turned down at junction with wall or
tied to wall lath or furring. Lath on restrained ceilings shall be turned down at
junction with wall, or shall be applied to cornerite or corner bead.
3.4.1.2 Side and End Laps
Side and end laps of metal plaster bases shall be performed in accordance with
ASTM C 841 for flat lath and ribbed lath.
3.4.1.3 Chases and Recesses
Chases and recesses shall be lathed for plastering. Openings over 300 mm wide
shall be bridged with furring channels spaced 300 mm on centers. Openings 300
mm wide and less do not need to be bridged. Lath shall extend 75 mm beyond
the edges of opening. Lath shall be securely fastened by nailing or tying. Lath
shall be tied or clipped to bridging channels, and shall be laced along longitudinal
joints.
Page | 10 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.5 OPENINGS
Reinforcement shall be provided at corners of openings in plastered areas extending 300
mm or more in any dimension by securing striplath diagonally at corners. Striplath shall
be at least 150 mm wide by 400 mm long. Shorter lengths shall be used to preclude
lapping striplath. Striplath shall be secured to lathing without extending fastenings into
or around supporting members. Where plaster is applied directly to concrete or masonry
surfaces, striplath shall be secured to the concrete or masonry.
3.5.1 Ceiling Openings
Framing shall be provided for ceiling openings and supplemental supporting members for
items mounted in ceiling or attached to ceiling suspension system. Frames for openings
shall be secured to lath support members. Frames provided with expanded metal flanges
shall be secured to lath. Intermediate structural members shall be provided for
attachment or suspension of support members.
3.6
INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
Accessories shall be installed in standard lengths level and plumb to straight lines and as
indicated on drawings. Fastenings shall be spaced not over 300 mm on centers for
single-flanged accessories and not over 600 mm on centers on each flange of
double-flanged accessories. Accessories shall be mitered or coped at corners, or
prefabricated corners shall be used. Joints in straight runs shall be formed with splice or
tie plates.
3.6.1 Base Screeds

Base screeds shall be installed approximately 75 mm above finished floor elevation
unless indicated otherwise.
3.6.2 Corner Beads
Corner beads shall be installed in standard lengths at external plastered corners, and shall
be secured to furring members or supports.
3.6.3 Cornerites
Cornerites shall be installed at internal angles formed by abutting surfaces of gypsum lath
or metal lath not turned down at horizontal corners or returned around vertical corners.
Cornerites shall be secured to lathed surfaces. Cornerites shall be secured to concrete or
masonry where plaster is applied directly to concrete or masonry surfaces. Cornerites
shall not be installed at unrestrained ceilings.
Page | 11 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.6.4 Casing Beads

Casing beads shall be installed at the joints of dissimilar base materials in the same plane
and at exposed edges of plaster including junctions of walls and ceilings except that
beads shall not be installed at restrained ceilings abutting plastered surfaces. At the
perimeter of unrestrained suspended ceilings, the casing bead shall be secured to the
ceiling to provide a 10 mm opening between the abutting surfaces. The opening shall be
sealed prior to plastering with sealant as specified in Section 07900 - SEALANTS.
3.6.5
Expansion and Control Joint Accessories

Control Joints: Install at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at locations complying
with the following criteria and approved by the Contracting Officer:
i.
Where an expansion or contraction joint occurs in the surface of construction

directly behind plaster membrane.
ii.
Distance between Control Joints:

a length-to-width ration of 2-1/ 2 to 1.
iii.
Horizontal Surfaces:
iv.
Where plaster panel sizes or dimensions change, extend joints full width or
height of plaster machine.
Not to exceed 6 m in either direction or
Not more than 9 m2 in area.
Expansion Joint Beads: Shall be installed as control joints in plasterwork at the locations
indicated. Plaster base shall not be run continuous through control joints. Additional
supports shall be installed as required to support the beads.
3.6.6 Metal Trim
Metal trim shall be installed where indicated and as required to complete the plaster
work.
3.7 PLASTER THICKNESS AND SURFACE EVENNESS
Plaster thickness and surface evenness shall be controlled by grounds or screeds of
metal, wood, or plaster. Application of cement plaster shall be in accordance with ASTM
C 926. Wood grounds are specified under Section 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY.
3.7.1 Metal Grounds and Screeds
Metal grounds shall be used for securing trim items, and for finished corners and
terminations. Metal screeds shall be installed for base screeds when wood or metal
grounds are not required. Temporary screeds shall be installed when permanent screeds
or grounds cannot be used. On completion of approved base coats, temporary screeds
shall be removed and voids immediately filled with plaster.
Page | 12 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.7.2 Plaster Screeds

Plaster screeds shall be used within the plastered areas to supplement wood and metal
grounds and screeds.
3.8 PLASTER GROUT
Plaster grout shall be scratch-coat material mixed to a non-fluid consistency. Plaster
grout shall be used to fill steel doorframes and partition bases. Grout shall be placed and
grooved prior to gypsum lathing operations. Heads and jambs of frames shall be filled
solid with grout, and 13 mm deep grooves shall be formed in the grout, while plastic, to
receive gypsum lath.
3.9 PROPORTIONS AND MIXING
3.9.1 Base Coat
Base coat shall be proportioned and mixed in accordance with ASTM C 926 coat C.
3.9.2 Portland-Cement-Plaster Finish
The finish coat shall be proportioned and mixed in accordance with ASTM C 926, coat F.
3.10 MACHINE APPLICATION
A plastering machine may be used for the application of scratch and brown coats. Plaster
for machine application shall be a special plaster compounded and packaged by the
manufacturer for this purpose. Slump cone equipment shall be present on the jobsite
when base-coat plastering begins, and until completion. Testing of the mix shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. Additional water shall not be added to the mix to allow
pumping through extended hose lines to the plastering nozzle. The amount of water
added to each batch of plaster shall be that quantity which results in a plaster slump of
not more than 75 mm for gypsum and 65 mm for Portland cement using a standard
plaster slump cone or 150 mm for gypsum and 125 mm for Portland cement using a
concrete slump cone. Application of plaster shall conform to the provisions of ASTM C
842.
3.11 QUALITY CONTROL
Fluidity or stiffness of plaster shall be tested with a standard 50 by 100 by 150 mm
plaster slump testing cone or by a 100 by 200 by 300 mm concrete slump testing cone.
Method of making slump test shall be as follows:
a. Place cone on center of dry base plate located on a level, firm surface. Hold cone
tightly against plate.
b. Fill the cone with plaster obtained from the hose or nozzle, without air on the
nozzle, puddling with tamping rod during the operation to eliminate air bubbles or
voids.
Page | 13 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
c. Screed plaster level with top of cone.

d. Lift cone straight up from base plate in a slow and uniform motion, and place it on
the base plate next to plaster sample.
e. Lay a straightedge across top of cone, being careful not to disturb or jostle the
plate, and measure the slump in millimeters from the bottom of the straightedge to
the top of the plaster sample.
3.12 APPLICATION OF FINISHES
The finish coat shall be applied in accordance with ASTM C 842. The finish coat shall
be omitted back of projecting bases, wainscots, structural-glass wall finish, cabinets,
chalkboards, tackboards, bulletin boards, acoustic treatments, fixed equipment, and other
locations where indicated. Finish coats shall not be applied above wainscots until
wainscots have been installed.
3.12.1 Portland-Cement-Plaster Finish Coat
Portland-cement-plaster finish coat shall be applied over plaster cement base coats in
accordance with ASTM C 926. The finish coat shall be floated to a true and even surface
free from rough areas, checks, or other blemishes.
3.13 PATCHING
Plaster showing oversanding, cracks, blisters, pits, checks, discoloration or other defects
are not acceptable. Defective plasterwork shall be removed and replaced with new
plaster at the expense of Contractor. Patching of defective work will be permitted only
when approved by the Contracting Officer. Patching shall match existing work in texture
and color.
3.14 SAMPLES OF COMPLETED WORK
Samples of completed work may be taken by the Contracting Officer at any time for
laboratory inspection and tests to determine conformance.
Page | 14 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.4
QUALIFICATIONS
1.5
1.6
09250-2/8
09250-2/8
09250-3/8
09250-3/8
09250-4/8
09250-4/8
09250-4/8
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1
NON-LOAD BEARING STUD WALLS
2.2
GYPSUM BOARD
2.2.1 STANDARD GYPSUM BOARD
2.2.2 FIRE-RATED GYPSUM BOARD
2.2.3 WATER-RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD
2.3
ACCESSORIES
2.3.1
TAPING AND EMBEDDING COMPOUND
2.3.2
FINISHING OR TOPPING COMPOUND
2.3.3
ALL-PURPOSE COMPOUND
2.3.4
JOINT TAPE
2.3.5
NAILS
2.3.6
SCREWS
2.3.7
ADHESIVES
2.3.8
FASTENINGS
2.3.8.1 TIE WIRE
2.3.8.2 CLIPS
09250-4/8
09250-4/8
09250-4/8
09250-5/8
09250-5/8
09250-5/8
09250-5/8
09250-5/8
09250-5/8
09250-5/8
09250-5/8
09250-5/8
09250-5/8
09250-6/8
09250-6/8
09250-6/8
09250-6/8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INTERIOR WALL FRAMING
3.2
SHAFT WALL FRAMING
3.3
APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BOARD
3.4
TAPING AND FINISHING
3.5
FIRE RESISTANT ASSEMBLIES
3.6
PATCHING
09250-6/8
09250-6/8
09250-7/8
09250-7/8
09250-7/8
09250-8/8
09250-8/8
Section 09250 Gypsum Wallboard
Page | 1 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
SASO 142
SASO 143
SASO 855
SASO 887

White Portland Cement
Gypsum Board

ASTM A 580
ASTM A 853
ASTM C 36
ASTM C 442
ASTM C 475
ASTM C 514
ASTM C 557
ASTM C 630
ASTM C 645
ASTM C 754
ASTM C 840
ASTM C 955
ASTM C 960
ASTM C 1002
(1991b) Stainless and Heat Resisting Steel Wire

(1991) Steel Wire, Carbon, for General Use
(1993) Gypsum Wallboard
(1992) Gypsum Backing Board and Coreboard
(1989) Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board
(1990) Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board
(1993) Adhesive for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing
(1993) Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board
(1992) Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring
Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board
(1988) Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum
(1988) Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board
(1993) Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and
Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Board and Metal Plaster
Bases
(1991) Predecorated Gypsum Board
(1993) Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster
Bases
FACTORY MUTUAL ENGINEERING AND RESEARCH (FM)

FM P8016
(1993) Specification Tested Products Guide

GYPSUM ASSOCIATION (GA)
GA 600 (1992) Fire Resistance Design Manual
Page | 2 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

UL-05
(1993; supple) Fire Resistance Directory
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.2.1
Fire-Rated Construction
Joints of fire-rated gypsum board enclosures shall be closed and sealed in accordance with UL
requirements, and as required to meet pressurization requirements. Penetrations through rated
partitions and ceilings shall be sealed tight with rated firestopping materials. Fire ratings shall be
as indicated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
SD-04 Drawings
Steel Framing; GA.
Drawings and installation details for ceiling framing, furring, fire-resistant assemblies, special
wall framing, and framed openings in walls and ceilings.
SD-13 Certificates
Gypsum Wallboard; FIO. Water-Resistant Gypsum Board; FIO Steel Framing; FIO.
Certificates stating that the steel framing and gypsum board products meet the specified
requirements.
SD-15 Mockups
Prior to finishing gypsum board assemblies, construct mockups of at least 9 sq. m in surface area
to demonstrate aesthetic effects of finishes as well as qualities of materials and execution.
Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place unit of Work.
1.
Construct mockups for each of the all types of finishes and fire ratings.
2.
Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for
final unit of Work.
a. Locate mock-ups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Contracting Officer.
b. Notify Contracting Officer one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups
will be constructed.
c. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
d. Obtain Contracting Officer's approval of mock-ups before start of final unit of Work.
Page | 3 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
e. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a

standard for judging the completed Work.
1)
Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial

Completion may become part of the completed Work.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
Manufacturer shall specialize in manufacturing the types of material specified and shall have a
minimum of 5 years of documented successful experience. Installer shall specialize in the type of
gypsum board work required and shall have a minimum of 5 years of documented successful
experience.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Materials shall be delivered in original containers bearing the name of manufacturer, contents,
and brand name. Materials shall be stored off the ground in a weathertight structure for
protection. Gypsum boards shall be stacked flat, off floor and supported to prevent sagging and
warpage. Adhesives and joint materials shall be stored in accordance with manufacturers printed
instructions. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from jobsite.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Environmental conditions for application and finishing of gypsum board shall be in accordance
with ASTM C 840. During the application of gypsum board without adhesive, a room
temperature of not less than 4 degrees C shall be maintained. During the application of gypsum
board with adhesive, a room temperature of not less than 10 degrees C shall be maintained for 48
hours prior to application and continuously afterwards until completely dry. Building spaces
shall be ventilated to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials. Drafts shall
be avoided during dry hot weather to prevent materials from drying too rapidly.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 NON-LOAD BEARING STUD WALLS
2.1.1 Studs
Studs for non-loadbearing walls shall conform to ASTM C 645. Studs shall be prefabricated
1.214 mm thick galvanized steel, C-shaped, punched web for utility access.
2.1.2 Runner Tracks
Floor and ceiling runner tracks shall conform to ASTM C 645. Tracks shall be prefabricated,
U-shaped with minimum 22 mm flanges, unpunched web, gauge to match studs, G60 hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD
Gypsum board shall have square-cut ends, tapered or beveled edges and shall be maximum
possible length.
Page | 4 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.2.1 Standard Gypsum Board (C01 and C04))

Regular gypsum board shall conform to ASTM C 36, and shall be 1200 mm wide 16 mm thick.
2.2.2 Fire-Rated Gypsum Board
Fire-rated gypsum board shall conform to ASTM C 36, and shall be Type X, 1200 mm wide.
2.2.3 Water-Resistant Gypsum Board (C02)
Water-resistant gypsum board shall conform to ASTM C 630, regular or Type X as shown on
drawings, with water-resistant paper faces, paintable surfaces, and shall be 1200 mm width, 16
mm thick and maximum permissible length.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
2.3.1 Taping and Embedding Compound
Taping and embedding compound shall conform to ASTM C 475. Compound shall be
specifically formulated and manufactured for use in embedding tape at gypsum wallboard joints
and fastener heads, and shall be compatible with tape and substrate.
2.3.2 Finishing or Topping Compound
Finishing or topping compound shall conform to ASTM C 475. Compound shall be specifically
formulated and manufactured for use as a finishing compound for gypsum board.
2.3.3 All-Purpose Compound
All-purpose compound shall be specifically formulated and manufactured to use as a taping and
finishing compound, and shall be compatible with tape and substrate.
2.3.4 Joint Tape
Joint tape shall conform to ASTM C 475 and shall be as recommended by gypsum board
manufacturer.
2.3.5 Nails
Nails shall conform to ASTM C 514. Nails shall be hard-drawn low or medium-low carbon steel,
suitable for intended use. Special nails for predecorated gypsum board shall be as recommended
by predecorated gypsum board manufacturer.
2.3.6 Screws
Screws shall conform to ASTM C 1002. Screws shall be self-drilling and self-tapping steel, Type
G for gypsum board to gypsum board Type S for wood or light-gauge steel framing].
Page | 5 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.3.7 Adhesives
Adhesives shall conform to ASTM C 557. Adhesives shall be formulated to bond gypsum
board to wood framing members. For securing gypsum board to metal framing, adhesive shall be
as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer.
2.3.8 Fastenings
Tie wire, clips, rings, and other fastenings shall be corrosion-resisting steel conforming to ASTM
A 580, composition 302, 304, or 316, Condition A or except that walls, partitions, and other
vertical surfaces not incorporated in ceiling construction may be erected with soft, annealed steel
conforming to ASTM A 853.
2.3.8.1 Tie Wire
Tie wire for constructing partitions and vertical furring, for securing metal lath to supports, and
for lacing shall be not less than 1.2 mm diameter. Tie wire for other applications shall be not less
than 1.6 mm diameter.
2.3.8.2 Clips
Clips used in lieu of tie wire for securing the furring channels to the runner channels in ceiling
construction shall be made from strip not less than 3 mm thick or shall be hairpin clip, formed of
wire not less than 0.4 mm nominal diameter. Other clips and rings or fastenings of similar
materials shall be equivalent in holding power to that provided by tie wire for the specific
application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INTERIOR WALL FRAMING
Steel framing and furring members shall be installed in accordance with ASTM C 754. Members
shall be in alignment with spacings not to exceed the maximum spacings indicated on drawings.
Runners shall be aligned accurately at the floor and ceiling and securely anchored.
3.1.1 Wall Openings
The framing system shall provide for the installation and anchorage of the required subframes or
finish frames for wall openings at doors, pass-through openings, and access panels. Partitions
abutting continuous suspended ceilings shall be strengthened for rigidity at rough openings of
more than 750 mm wide. Studs at openings shall be 0.912 mm thick minimum bare metal
thickness and spot grouted at jamb anchor inserts. Double studs shall be fastened together with
screws and secured to floor and overhead runners. Two studs placed back-to-back shall be used
for framing solid-core doors, doors over 900 mm wide and extra-heavy doors such as X-ray
room doors.
Page | 6 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.1.2 Wall Control Joints

Control joints shall be provided where deemed necessary. Shop drawings indicating details and
location of these joints shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Contracting Officers' approval.
Control joints for expansion and contraction shall be constructed with double studs installed 13
mm apart in interior walls or wall furrings where indicated on drawings. Ceiling-height door
frames may be used as vertical control joints. Door frames of less than ceiling height may be
used as control joints only if standard control joints extend to ceiling from both corners of top of
door frame. Control joints between studs shall be filled with firesafing insulation.
3.2 SHAFT WALL FRAMING
The shaft wall system shall be reinforced in accordance with the system manufacturer's published
instructions. Bucks, anchors, blocking and other items placed in or behind shaft wall framing
shall be coordinated with electrical and mechanical work. Fireproofing materials which are
damaged or removed during shaft wall construction shall be patched or replaced.
3.3 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BOARD
Gypsum board shall be installed in accordance with ASTM C 840 and as specified. Edges and
ends of gypsum boards shall be cut to obtain neat fitting joints. End joints of adjoining boards
shall be staggered, and shall be staggered on opposite sides of wall. Boards shall be applied with
moderate contact without forcing in place. Holes for pipes, fixtures or other small openings shall
be cut with a tool which will provide a neat fit. Screws shall be driven so that the heads are
slightly below the plane of paper face. Fracturing the paper face or damaging the core shall be
avoided. Trim shall be installed at external and internal angles formed by the intersecting
gypsum board surfaces with other surfaces. Corner beads shall be installed to vertical and
horizontal corners in accordance with manufacturers published instructions.
3.3.1 Backing Board
Gypsum board and water-resistant gypsum backing board used as a substrate to receive ceramic tile and
wall panels shall be in accordance with ASTM C 840, System X.
3.3.2 Adhesive-Applied Gypsum Board
Walls scheduled to receive adhesive-applied gypsum board shall be dry, free of dust, oil, or form
release agents, protrusions or voids, or foreign matter that would affect a proper bond.
3.4 TAPING AND FINISHING
Gypsum board taping and finishing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C840. Boards
shall be kept free of dirt, oil and other foreign matter that could cause a lack of bond. Screw
heads, dents, gouges, and cut-outs shall be filled with joint compound and sanded. Accessories at
exposed joints, edges, corners, openings, and similar locations shall be taped, floated with joint
compound, and sanded to produce surfaces ready for gypsum board finishes.
Page | 7 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.5 FIRE-RESISTANT ASSEMBLIES

Gypsum wallboard construction for fire-rated assemblies shall be in accordance with UL-05, FM
P8016 or GA 600 for the design number indicated on drawings.
3.6 PATCHING
Surface defects and damage shall be corrected as required to leave gypsum board smooth, uniform in
appearance, and ready to receive finish as specified.
Page | 8 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09310 CERAMIC TILES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
1.4
1.5
WARRANTY
09310-2/8
09310-2/8
09310-3/8
09310-3/8
09310-4/8
09310-4/8
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TILE
2.2
SETTING BED
2.3
WATER
2.4
MORTAR AND GROUT
2.5
MARBLE THRESHOLDS
09310-4/8
09310-4/8
09310-5/8
09310-5/8
09310-5/8
09310-5/8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATORY WORK AND WORKMANSHIP
3.2
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
3.3
INSTALLATION OF WALL TILES
3.4
INSTALLATION OF FLOOR TILES
3.5
INSTALLATION OF MARBLE THRESHOLDS
3.6
3.7
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
09310-5/8
09310-6/8
09310-6/8
09310-6/8
09310-6/8
09310-7/8
09310-7/8
09310-8/8
Section 09310 Ceramic Tiles
Page | 1 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
SASO 142
SASO 143
SASO 1030
SASO 1031

Methods of Test for Cement Tiles
Ceramic Tiles
ANSI A108.1A
ANSI A108.1B
ANSI A108.5
ANSI A108.10
ANSI A118.4
ANSI A118.6
ANSI A137.1
(1992) Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland

Cement Mortar
(1992) Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar
Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar
(1992) Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar
or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar
(1992) Installation of Grout in Tilework
(1992) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar
(1992) Ceramic Tile Grouts
(1988) Ceramic Tile

ASTM A 185
ASTM C 33
ASTM C 144
ASTM C 150
ASTM C 206
ASTM C 207
ASTM C 241
ASTM C 373
ASTM C 648
ASTM C 847
ASTM C 1027
ASTM C 1028
(1994) Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement

(1992a) Concrete Aggregates
(1993) Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
(1984; R 1992) Finishing Hydrated Lime
(1991; R 1992) Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes
(1990) - Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic
(1988) - Water Absorption, Bulk Density, Apparent Porosity, and
Apparent Specific Gravity of Fired Whiteware Products
(1984; R 1989) Breaking Strength of Ceramic Tile
(1993) Metal Lath
(1984; R 1990) - Determining Visible Abrasion Resistance of Glazed
Ceramic Tile
(1989) - Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile
and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter
Method
Page | 2 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
MARBLE INSTITUTE OF AMERICA (MIA)

MIA-01
(1991) Design Manual IV Dimensional Stone

TILE COUNCIL OF AMERICA (TCA)
TCA-01
(1994) Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation
1.2 SUBMITTALS
SD-01 Data
Tile; GA. Setting-Bed; GA. Mortar, Grout, and Adhesive; GA.
Manufacturer's catalog data.
SD-06 Instructions
Tile; FIO. Mortar and Grout; FIO.
Manufacturers preprinted installation and cleaning instructions.
Copy of results for electrical resistance tests.
SD-13 Certificates
Tile; FIO. Mortar, Grout, and Adhesive;FIO.
Certificates indicating conformance of products with specified requirements. A master grade
certificate shall be furnished for tile.
SD-14 Samples
Tile; GA. Accessories; GA. Marble Thresholds; GA.
Samples of all products sufficient size to show color range, pattern, type and joints. N.B.
Contractor shall submit proposed color schemes showing all finishing materials coordinated
together,for color selection.
1.3

Materials shall be delivered to the project site in manufacturer's original unopened containers
with seals unbroken and labels and hallmarks intact. Materials shall be kept dry, protected from
weather, and stored under cover.
Page | 3 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.4
Ceramic tile work shall not be performed unless the substrate and ambient temperature is at least
10 degrees C and rising. Temperature shall be maintained above 10 degrees C while the work is
being performed and for at least 7 days after completion of the work. When temporary heaters
are used they shall be vented to the outside to avoid carbon dioxide damage to new tilework.
1.5 WARRANTY
Manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that extend beyond a 1-year period
shall be provided.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TILE:
General: For manufacturer, size, color, texture, type and pattern of ceramic tiles refer to Interior
Design (I.D.) sample boards and drawings. Tile shall be standard grade conforming to ANSI
A137.1. Containers shall be grade sealed. Seals shall be marked to correspond with the marks on
the signed master grade certificate. Tile shall be impact resistant with a minimum breaking
strength for wall tile of 41 kg and 113 kg for floor tile in accordance with ASTM C 648. Water
absorption shall be (5.0) percent maximum in accordance with ASTM C 373.
2.1.1 Unglazed Floor Tile:
Floor tile shall have a minimum static coefficient of friction of 0.5 in accordance with
ASTM C 1028. Tile shall be Class III as rated by the manufacturer when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 1027 for abrasion resistance as related to foot traffic. Tile shall
be 200 by 200 by 9 mm.
2.1.2 Glazed Wall Tile:
Glazed wall tile and trim shall be cushion edged with bright glaze. Tile shall be 200 by
200 by 7 mm.
2.1.3 Accessories:
Accessories not required.
2.2
SETTING-BED
The setting-bed shall be composed of the following:
2.2.1
Aggregate for Concrete Fill

Aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33. Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall not be
greater than one-half the thickness of concrete fill.
Page | 4 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.2.2
Portland Cement
Cement shall conform to ASTM C 150, Type I, white for wall mortar and gray for other
uses.
2.2.3
Sand
Sand shall conform to ASTM C 144.
2.2.4
Hydrated Lime
Hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C 206, Type S or ASTM C 207, Type S.
2.3
WATER
Water shall be potable.
2.4
MORTAR AND GROUT

2.4.1
Mortar, grout, and adhesive shall conform to the following:
2.4.2
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar

ANSI A118.4.
2.4.3
Ceramic Tile Grout

ANSI A118.6; latex-Portland cement grout or commercial Portland cement grout.
2.5 MARBLE THRESHOLDS

Marble thresholds shall be of size required by drawings or conditions. Marble shall be Group A
as classified by MIA-01. Marble shall have a fine sand-rubbed finish and shall be white or gray
in color as approved by the Contracting Officer. Marble abrasion shall be not less than 12.0 when
tested in accordance with ASTM C 241.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATORY WORK AND WORKMANSHIP
Surface to receive tile shall be inspected and shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A108.1A
or ANSI A108.1B for surface conditions for the type setting bed specified and for workmanship.
Variations of surface to be tiled shall fall within maximum values shown below:
Page | 5 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
TYPE
WALLS
Dry-Set Mortar
Latex Portland cement mortar
3 mm in 2.4 meters
3 mm in 2.4 meters
FLOORS
3.0 mm in 3 meters
3.0 mm in 3 meters
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Tile work shall not be started until roughing in for mechanical and electrical work has been
completed and tested, and built-in items requiring membrane waterproofing have been installed
and tested. Floor tile installation shall not be started in spaces requiring wall tile until after wall
tile has been installed. Tile in colors and patterns indicated shall be applied in the area shown on
the drawings. Tile shall be installed with the respective surfaces in true even planes to the
elevations and grades shown. Special shapes shall be provided as required for sills, jambs,
recesses, offsets, external corners, and other conditions to provide a complete and neatly finished
installation. Tile bases and coves shall be solidly backed with mortar.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF WALL TILE

Wall tile shall be installed in accordance with the TCA-01, method W211 (bonded).
3.3.1 Workable or Cured Mortar Bed
Tile shall be installed over a workable mortar bed or a cured mortar bed at the option of
the Approving Authority. Workable mortar bed, materials, and installation of tile shall
conform to ANSI A108.1A. Cured mortar bed and materials shall conform to ANSI
A108.1B.
3.3.2 Dry-Set Mortar and Latex-Portland Cement Mortar
Latex-Portland cement shall be used to install tile in accordance with ANSI A108.5.
Latex Portland cement shall be used when installing porcelain ceramic tile.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR TILE
Floor tile shall be installed in accordance with TCA-01. Shower receptors shall be installed in
accordance with TCA-01, method B414 or B415.
3.4.1 Screed Bed
Floor tiles shall be installed over screed bed laid to falls. Ceramic tiles shall be fixed over
cured screed. Joints between quarry tile shall be between 6.35 mm and 9.53 mm in width
and shall be uniform in width.
Page | 6 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.4.2 Dry-Set and Latex-Portland Cement

Latex-Portland cement mortar shall be used to install tile directly over properly cured,
plane, clean concrete slabs in accordance with ANSI A108.5. Latex Portland cement
shall be used when installing porcelain ceramic tile.
3.4.3 Ceramic Tile Grout
Ceramic Tile grout shall be prepared and installed in accordance with ANSI A108.10.
3.4.4 Waterproofing
Shower pans are specified in Section 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES ,. Waterproofing
under concrete fill shall conform to the requirements of Section 07100 MEMBRANE
WATERPROOFING.
3.4.5 Concrete Fill
Concrete fill shall be composed by volume of 1 part Portland cement to 3 parts fine
aggregate to 4 parts coarse aggregate, and mixed with water to as dry a consistency as
practicable. The fill shall be spread, tamped, and screeded to a true plane, and pitched to
drains or leveled as shown. Concrete fill shall be thoroughly damp cured before
application of setting-bed material. Concrete fill shall be reinforced with one layer of
reinforcement, with the uncut edges lapped the width of one mesh and the cut ends and
edges lapped not less than 50 mm. Laps shall be tied together with 1.3 mm wire every
250 mm along the finished edges and every 150 mm along the cut ends and edges. The
reinforcement shall be supported and secured in the centers of concrete fills. The mesh
shall be continuous; except where expansion joints occur, mesh shall be cut and
discontinued across such joints. Reinforced concrete fill shall be provided under the
setting-bed where the distance between the under-floor surface and the finished tile floor
surface is 50 mm or greater, and shall be of such thickness that the mortar setting-bed
over the concrete fill shall be not less than 19 mm nor more than 31 mm thick at any
point.
3.5
INSTALLATION OF MARBLE THRESHOLDS

Thresholds shall be installed where indicated in a manner similar to that of the ceramic tile floor.
Thresholds shall be the full width of the opening. Head joints at ends shall not exceed 6 mm in
width and shall be grouted full as specified for ceramic tile.
3.6

3.7.1
Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and
isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and
tile. Where not shown on drawings, control joints shall be provided as per
recommendation of TCAs Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. Do not saw-cut
joints after installing tiles.
3.7.1.1
Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
Page | 7 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.7.1.2
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Section

07900 SEALANTS.
Control joints shall be provided where deemed necessary. Shop drawings indicating
details and location of these joints shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Contracting
Officers approval. Joints shall be formed as indicated and sealed as specified in Section
07900 SEALANTS.
3.7.2
Walls: Control joints shall be provided at control joints in backing material. Wherever
backing material changes, a control joint shall be formed to separate the different
materials.
3.7.3
Floors: Control joints shall be provided over construction joints, control joints, and
expansion joints in concrete slabs. Control joints shall also be provided where tile abuts
restraining surfaces such as perimeter walls, curbs and columns and at intervals of 7.2 to
10.8 m each way in large interior floor areas and 3.6 to 4.8 m each way in large exterior
areas or areas exposed to direct sunlight or moisture. Expansion joints shall extend
through setting-beds and fill.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

Upon completion, tile surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with manufacturer's
approved cleaning instructions. Acid shall not be used for cleaning glazed tile. Floor tile with
resinous grout or with factory mixed grout shall be cleaned in accordance with instructions of the
grout manufacturer. After the grout has set, tile wall surfaces shall be given a protective coat of a
non-corrosive soap or other approved method of protection. Tiled floor areas shall be covered
with building paper before foot traffic is permitted over the finished tile floors. Board walkways
shall be laid on tiled floors that are to be continuously used as passageways by workmen.
Damaged or defective tiles shall be replaced.
Page | 8 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09311 - PORCELAIN TILES

1. PART 1 GENERAL
Section Includes
A.
B.
Porcelain Tiles
Miscellaneous materials including tile adhesive, grout and sealants.
References
A.
SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization
- SASO 142
- SASO 143

Portland Cement, Ordinary and Rapid Hardening
B. ANSI American National Standards Institute

- A118.1 Dry Set Portland Cement Mortar
- A118.2 Conductive Dry Set Portland Cement Mortar
- A118.3 Chemical Resistant, water cleanable Tile-Sitting and Grouting Epoxy.
C. EN European Standards
- EN 177
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Complete set of samples of manufacturer's standard products for color selection.

Certification from manufacturer of tile certifying the following:
-
C.
D.
Materials provided are suitable for intended use.
Tile manufacturer's complete installation instructions.

Shop drawing layout showing the tile arrangements.
N.B. Contractor shall submit proposed color schemes showing all finishing materials coordinated
A.
Deliver materials in containers with labels legible and intact and grade-seals unbroken. Store
material so as to prevent damages or contamination.
Section 09311 - Porcelain Tiles
Page | 1 of 4
WBRJ-12-C-0001
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Variation in plane of sub-floor including concrete fills: Not more than 6mm in 3 meters from
required elevation where Portland cement mortar setting bed is used and not more than 3mm
in 3 meters where dry-set Portland cement and latex Portland cement mortar setting beds and
chemical resistant bond coats are used.
B.
Variation in plane of wall surfaces and surface of scratch coat. Not more than 6mm in 2.40
meters from required plane where Portland cement mortar setting bed is used and not more
than 3mm in 2.40 meters where dry-set or latex-Portland cement mortar or organic adhesive
setting materials are used.
2.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PORCELAIN TILES
A.
General
1- Accessories: Provide the necessary manufacturer's standard trims and half pieces required
for the complete installation.
2- Selection and Size: Type, color and pattern shall be as indicated on drawings or approved
by the Engineer.
PORCELAIN TILES
A.
Fine porcelain stoneware tiles shall be manufactured by using top quality fine porcelain
stoneware, obtained by raw materials wet grinding, followed by partial drying by spraying,
silo storage to allow homogenization of properties, and pressing by hydraulic pressure
exceeding 500kg/cm2, and heat treatment in excess of 1200C.
B.
Porcelain tiles shall be 400x400x9mm sizes. Pattern and color as to be selected. Physical
properties, as follows
Properties
U
Dimensions and appearance

Water absorption
Flexural strength
Scratch resistance
Deep abrasion resistance
Linear thermal expansion coefficient
Resistance to sudden temperature changes
Resistant to chemicals etching by acids and bases
Specific Weight
Color stability to light
Applicable Standard
U
EN 98
EN 99
ISO project 10545/3
EN 100
EN 101
EN 102
EN 103
EN 104
EN 106
DN 51057
DN 51094
Value
U
Compliant
< 0.1%
2
> 50.N/mm
> 6MOHS
3
140. mm
-6
-1
6x10 deg C
Compliant
Compliant
Compliant
Compliant
Page | 2 of 4
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Weight of unit of volume
DN 5165
3
2.40g/cm
A.
Adhesive and Grout

1- Tile Adhesive: Shall be white cement-based polymer modified ready-mixed powder
adhesive conforming to BS 5980/1980. Type 1, Class AA, or equivalent standards. Use 36mm bed thickness mixed with admixture as per manufacturers written recommendations.
2- Grouting Material: Shall be cement-based polymer modified ready-mixed powder
conforming to BS 5750. Part 2 or equivalent standards. Use grout with admixture as per
manufacturers written recommendations. Color of grout shall be as approved by Engineer.
B.
3.
Sealant: Electrometric type in conformance with the requirements specified in Section 07900Sealants.
PART 3 EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
Installation of floor and wall tiles shall comply with the requirements of ANSI A108.1
through A108.6 and the TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Protection and Curing:

1- Spaces in which tile is being set shall be closed to traffic and other work. Keep closed
until tile is firmly set. Protect tile from damage.
2- Damp cure for at least 3 days, add dampness as needed to achieve a hard cure.
C.
JOINTING PATTERN:
1- Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on
floor, base, walls and trim are the same size. Layout tile work and center tile fields both
directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of widths
less than 1/2 tile at edge of walls. Provide uniform joints, 2mm, unless otherwise shown.
INSTALLATION OF PORCELAIN TILES
A.
Install tiles over Portland cement mortar bed, not less than 30mm thick with overall thickness
of mortar bed and porcelain tile of 50mm.
B.
Grouting Floor Tiles: Grouting shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and shall be cured as required to produce a hard grout.
Page | 3 of 4
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SEALING
A.
At all points where tiles abut other materials, polyethylene sheeting shall be installed as
waterproof cleavage membrane.
B.
After tiles has set and cured, cleavage membrane shall be carefully cut out and joint shall be
sealed.
A.
Upon completion of placement and grouting, all porcelain tiles surfaces shall be cleaned free
of foreign matter.
1- glazed tiles surfaces shall be sponged and washed thoroughly diagonally across joints and
finally polished with clean, dry clothes.
2- Unglazed tiles may be cleaned with cleaners and/or solvents recommended by tile
manufacturer after completion. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron and vitreous plumbing
fixtures from effects of cleaning materials. Flush and surface with clean water before and
after cleaning.
B.
Finished installation shall be left clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, un-bonded or
otherwise detective tile work.
C.
Before final inspection, remove protection coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile
surfaces
Page | 4 of 4
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09400 TERRAZZO TILES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.2
REFERENCES
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.3.1 PRODUCT DATA
1.3.2 SAMPLES
1.3.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
1.3.4 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
1.4
1.4.1 HANDLING
1.4.2 PROTECTION
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
09400-2/4
09400-2/4
09400-2/4
09400-2/4
09400-2/4
09400-2/4
09400-2/4
09400-2/4
09400-3/4
09400-3/4
09400-3/4
09400-3/4
09400-3/4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
2.2
PRECAST TERRAZZO FLOOR TILES AND BASE
2.3
DIVIDER STRIPS
2.4
SEALER
2.5
MORTAR AND GROUT
09400-3/4
09400-3/4
09400-3/4
09400-3/4
09400-3/4
09400-3/4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
UNDERBED
3.2
INSTALLATION OF PRECAST TERRAZZO
3.3
CLEANING, SEALING AND PROTECTION
09400-4/4
09400-4/4
09400-4/4
09400-4/4
Section 09400 - Terrazzo Tiles
Page | 1 of 4
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09400 - TERRAZZO TILES

1.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1 The work under this Section consist of furnishing and installing all precast terrazzo tiles
as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2
REFERENCES
1.2.1. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials:
ASTM A 815
Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM C 33 Concrete Aggregate
ASTM C 150
Portland Cement
ASTM C 241
Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic
ASTM C 309
Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
1.2.2. NTMA - National Terrazzo and Mosaics Association
NTMA
NTMA
1.2.3

SASO 142
SASO 143
SASO 226
1.3
Terrazzo Design Data Book

Terrazzo Technical Data Book

Methods for sampling of concrete aggregates.
SUBMITTALS:
1.3.1.
Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions for

type of terrazzo, accessory items and materials.
1.3.2.
Samples: Manufacturer's samples for each kind of precast terrazzo for Contracting
Officer's approval.
N.B. Contractor shall submit proposed color schemes showing all finishing materials
coordinated together,for color selection.
1.4
1.3.3.
Shop Drawings: Show layout of divider strips, control, joint strips, base and border
strip.
1.3.4.
Certificate of compliance.
TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE:
Page | 2 of 4
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.5
1.4.1.
Handling: Separate precast units during shipment with polyethylene film or other non
staining protective separator material.
1.4.2.
Protection: Protect terrazzo work against damage throughout the construction period.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1.5.1.
2.
2.1
Reference Standards: Comply with specified provisions and recommendations of

National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association Inc. (NTMA).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
GENERAL: For type, color, texture, size and pattern of terrazzo floor tiles refer to
Interior Design sample boards.
2.2
PRECAST TERRAZZO FLOOR TILES AND BASE:

Terrazzo tiles shall be 250 mm x 250 mm x 20 mm, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
Terrazzo tiles shall consist of natural, sound, crushed marble chips without excessive flats or
flakes, with colors as selected from manufacturer's range of colors. Chips shall be a mixture
of sizes 6 mm (No. 1) - 10 mm (No. 2) of equal parts. Matrix shall be either white or
colored cement. Marble chips shall have a dust content of less than 1% by weight and shall
have an abrasion resistance of not less than HA10 in accordance with ASTM C241. The mix
shall consist of 3 parts of marble chips to one part of cement by weight. The facing layer
shall provide a minimum wearing thickness of 6 mm after grinding. Terrazzo bases (if
required) shall be from the same mix, and shall be 100 x 20 mm thick, unless indicated
otherwise on the drawings.
2.3
DIVIDER STRIPS (Where Required):

2.3.1.
2.4
SEALER:
2.1.1.
2.5
Interior floor penetrating sealer shall be colorless, slip and stain resistance which will
not affect color and physical properties of terrazzo surface.
MORTAR AND GROUT:

2.5.1.
3.
Divider strips, where required, shall be of white alloy zinc or half-hard brass, angle or
"T" type for adhesive bonding to substrate.
Materials shall conform to ANSI A108.1 and A108.2. Mixture of Portland cement and
sand for floors shall be roughly in proportions of 1:6, and for walls shall be Portland
cement, sand, and hydrated lime in proportions of 1:5:1/2 to 1:7:1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1.
UNDERBED:
Page | 3 of 4
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.2.
3.3.
3.1.1.
Underbed shall be composition of one part Portland cement to 4 to 5 parts sand with
sufficient water to provide workability at as low a slump as possible.
3.1.2.
Bed shall be screeded to a level true plane, pitching to drain where required.
INSTALLATION OF PRECAST TERRAZZO:

3.2.1.
Precast units shall be set on underbed.
3.2.2.
Locate control joints where indicated during installation of setting materials and
mortar beds and tile. Where indicated on drawings, control joints shall be provided as
per recommendations of NTMA (National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association).
3.2.3.
Joints shall be raked to depth of at least 19 mm and shall be pointed with a grout
matching the color of the matrix.
3.2.4.
Final installation shall be level and true to grade without projecting edges and corners.
CLEANING, SEALING AND PROTECTION:

3.3.1.
Clean terrazzo after installation and finishing operations are completed, complying
with sealer manufacturer's instruction.
3.3.2.
Apply sealer to cleaned terrazzo surfaces in accordance with the sealer manufacturer's
instruction.
3.3.3.
Protect terrazzo from damage and wear during construction operation.
3.3.4.
When building is ready for occupancy, clean and machine buff terrazzo as
recommended by the sealer manufacturer.
END OF SECTION - 09400
Page | 4 of 4
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
1.2
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.4
1.5
1.6
SCHEDULING
09510-2/6
09510-2/6
09510-2/6
09510-2/6
09510-3/6
09510-3/6
09510-3/6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACOUSTICAL UNITS
2.1.1 UNITS FOR EXPOSED-GRID SYSTEM:
MINERAL BASED LAY-IN TILES,
SCRUBBABLE
2.2
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
2.3
HANGER WIRE
2.4
HANGER WIRE ANCHORS
2.5
ACCESSORIES
2.6
ACCESS PANELS AND IDENTIFICATION
2.7
FINISHES
2.8
CEILING ATTENUATION CLASS AND TEST
09510-4/6
09510-4/6
09510-4/6
09510-4/6
09510-4/6
09510-4/6
09510-4/6
09510-4/6
09510-5/6
09510-5/6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
3.1.1 SUSPENSION SYSTEM
3.1.2 WALL MOLDING
3.1.3 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
3.2
CEILING ACCESS PANELS
3.3
CLEANING
09510-5/6
09510-5/6
09510-5/6
09510-5/6
09510-6/6
09510-6/6
09510-6/6
Section 09510 Acoustical Ceilings
Page | 1 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09510 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
ASTM C 635
ASTM E 1264
ASTM E 1414
(1994) Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings
(1990) Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products
(1991a) Standard Test for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing a
Common Ceiling Plenum.

UL-05
1.2
(1995) Fire Resistance Directory

Acoustical treatment shall consist of sound controlling units mechanically mounted on a ceiling
suspension system. The unit size, texture, finish, and color shall be as specified. The location
and extent of acoustical treatment shall be as shown on the drawings.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
SD-01 Data
Acoustical Ceiling System; GA.
Manufacturer's descriptive data and installation instructions.
SD-04 Drawings
Acoustical Ceiling System;GA.
Drawings shall show suspension system, method of anchoring and fastening, details, and
reflected ceiling plan.
Page | 2 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SD-13 Certificates
Fire Resistive Ceilings; FIO. Ceiling Attenuation Class and Test; FIO.
Test reports by an independent testing laboratory attesting that acoustical ceiling systems meet
specified fire endurance and sound transmission requirements. Data attesting to conformance of
the proposed system to Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. requirements for the fire endurance rating
listed in UL-05 may be submitted in lieu of test reports.
SD-14 Samples
Acoustical Units;GA.
Two samples of each type of acoustical unit and each type of suspension grid tee section
showing texture, finish, and color.
together,for color selection.
1.4

Materials shall be delivered to the site in the manufacturer's original unopened containers with
brand name and type clearly marked. Materials shall be carefully handled and stored in dry,
watertight enclosures. Immediately before installation, acoustical units shall be stored for not less
than 24 hours at the same temperature and relative humidity as the space where they will be
installed to assure temperature and moisture conditions.
1.5
A uniform temperature of not less than 16 degrees C nor more than 27 degrees C and a relative
humidity of not more than 70 percent shall be maintained before, during, and after installation
of acoustical units.
1.6
SCHEDULING
Interior finish work such as plastering, concrete and terrazzo work shall be complete and dry
before installation. Mechanical, electrical, and other work above the ceiling line shall be
completed and heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems shall be installed and operating
in order to maintain temperature and humidity requirements.
Page | 3 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACOUSTICAL UNITS:
Refer to Interior Design Drawings and Specifications for manufacturer, size, texture, color,
pattern and type of acoustical ceiling tiles.
Acoustical units shall conform to ASTM E 1264, Class A, and the following requirements:
2.1.1
Units for Exposed-Grid System: Mineral based lay-in tiles, scrubbable.

Type: III NRC grade: 55 minimum when tested on mounting No. 7.
Pattern as shown on drawings
Nominal size: 600 x 600-x 19 mm thick
Finish: factory applied as per manufacturer standard finish
2.2
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
General: Ceiling tile manufacturer's standard suspension system fabricated of cold-rolled hot-dipped
galvanized sheet steel components providing minimum 170 g/m2 zinc coating conforming BS 2989
or ASTM A 653. System shall be designed and fabricated to meet the requirements of ASTM C 635
or equivalent BS standards. Wall moldings shall have a flange of not less than 23 mm and shall be
provided with outside corner caps. Finish shall be factory-applied baked enamel paint, white color.
Following type of suspension systems shall be provided:
2.2.1.
Exposed grid suspension system shall consist of 15 mm wide T-Section flanges, as indicated in the
I.D. Drawings.
2.3.
HANGER WIRE: Galvanized steel wires, pre-stretched, not less than 2 mm diameter.
2.4.
HANGER WIRE ANCHORS: Drill-in type as approved by the Contracting Officer.
2.5.
ACCESSORIES: Edge Moldings, hold-down clips and other necessary accessories shall be provided
in accordance with the Contracting Officer's selection and approval.
2.6
ACCESS PANELS AND IDENTIFICATION

Access panels for concealed-grid ceiling tile shall match adjacent acoustical units and shall be
designed and equipped with suitable framing and fastenings for removal and replacement without
damage. Panel shall be not less than 300 by 300 mm or more than 300 by 600 mm. An
identification plate of 0.8 mm thick aluminum, 19 mm in diameter, stamped with the letters "AP"
and finished the same as the unit, shall be attached near one corner on the face of each access
panel and on each lay-in panel with mechanical and electrical controls, valves and other similar
mechanism and equipment that is installed.
Page | 4 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.7
FINISHES
Acoustical units and suspension system members shall have manufacturer's standard textures,
patterns and finishes as specified. Ceiling suspension system components shall be treated to
inhibit corrosion.
2.8
CEILING ATTENUATION CLASS AND TEST

Ceiling attenuation class (CAC) range of acoustical units, when required, shall be determined in
accordance with ASTM E 1414. Test ceiling shall be continuous at the partition and shall be
assembled in the suspension system in the same manner that the ceiling will be installed on the
project. System shall be tested with all acoustical units installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
Acoustical work shall be provided complete with necessary fastenings, clips, and other
accessories required for a complete installation. Mechanical fastenings shall not be exposed in
the finished work. Hangers shall be laid out for each individual room or space. Hangers shall be
placed to support framing around beams, ducts, columns, grilles, and other penetrations through
ceilings. Main runners and carrying channels shall be kept clear of abutting walls and partitions.
At least two main runners shall be provided for each ceiling span. Wherever required to bypass
an object with the hanger wires, a sub-suspension system shall be installed, so that all hanger
wires will be plumb.
3.1.1 Suspension System

3.1.1.1 Plumb Hangers
Hangers shall be plumb and shall not press against insulation covering ducts and pipes.
3.1.1.2 Splayed Hangers
Where hangers must be splayed (sloped or slanted) around obstructions, the resulting horizontal
force shall be offset by bracing, counter-splaying, or other acceptable means.
3.1.2 Wall Molding
Wall molding shall be provided where ceilings abut vertical surfaces. Wall molding shall be
secured not more than 75 mm from ends of each length and not more than 400 mm on centers
between end fastenings. Wall molding springs shall be provided at each acoustical unit in
semi-exposed or concealed systems.
Page | 5 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.1.3 Acoustical Units

Acoustical units shall be installed in accordance with the approved installation instructions of the
manufacturer. Edges of acoustical units shall be in close contact with metal supports, with each
other, and in true alignment. Acoustical units shall be arranged so that units less than one-half
width are minimized. Units in exposed-grid system shall be held in place with manufacturer's
standard hold-down clips, if units weigh less than 5 kg per square m or if required for fire
resistance rating.
3.2 CEILING ACCESS PANELS
Ceiling access panels shall be located directly under the items which require access and
maintenance.
3.3
CLEANING
Following installation, dirty or discolored surfaces of acoustical units shall be cleaned and left
free from defects. Units that are damaged or improperly installed shall be removed and new units
provided as directed.
Page | 6 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09515 CEMENT BOARD CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL
09515-2/6
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
09515-2/6
1.2
REFERENCES
09515-2/6
1.3
SUBMITTALS
09515-2/6
1.4
TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE 09515-3/6
1.5
WARRANTY
09515-3/6
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
09515-3/6
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
09515-3/6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
2.2
FIBER REINFORCED CEMENT BOARD
2.2.1 COMPOSITION
2.2.2 PHYSICAL FEATURES
09515-3/6
09515-3/6
09515-4/6
09515-4/6
09515-4/6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
3.2
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
3.3
CEMENT BOARD
3.4
CLEANING
09515-5/6
09515-5/6
09515-5/6
09515-6/6
09515-6/6
Section 09515 Cement Board Ceilings
Page | 1 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09515 - CEMENT BOARD CEILING

1.
1.1
.2
PART 1 - GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
.1.1
Grid suspension system for cement board ceiling.
.1.2
Cement board ceiling as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
REFERENCES
.2.1
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials

ASTM A 446
ASTM A 525
ASTM A 614
ASTM C 523
ASTM E 90
ASTM E 84
ASTM C 635
ASTM C 636
ASTM C 637
.2.2
Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process,

Structural Quantity
Steel Sheet Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire
Light Reflectance of Acoustical Material
Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of
Building Partitions
Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and
Lay-In Panel Ceilings
Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension
System for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels
Tests for Strength Properties of Prefabricated Architectural Acoustical
Materials
BS British Standards Institution

BS 476 Part 6
BS 476 Part 7
Fire Propagation
Surface Spread of Flame
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.4
1.3.1
Samples of grid system components and cement board tiles.
1.3.2
Certification that the components meet the requirements and tests specified.

1.4.1
Deliver cement board units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in
fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from humidity, direct sun
light, surface contamination, and other causes. Handle cement board units carefully to avoid
chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
Page | 2 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.5
WARRANTY
1.5.1
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6.1
1.7
2.1.
Engage an experience installer who has successfully completed cement board ceilings
similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for the Project.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.7.1.
2.
Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor and manufacturer for 1 year from the date
of substantial handover. Guarantee shall cover repair and replacement of defective material
and workmanship.
Do not install cement board ceiling unless temperature and humidity conditions closely
approximate the interior conditions which will exist when the building is occupied. Maintain
temperature and humidity conditions during and after installation. Plastering, concrete and
terrazzo work (including grinding) shall be completely dry. Windows and doors shall be in
place and glazed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
2.1.1
Suspension System: Manufacturer's standard exposed grid system designed and fabricated to
meet requirements of ASTM C 635 as approved by the Engineer.
2.1.2
Materials: Double-web, cold-rolled electro-galvanized steel with the following features:

-
2.2.
Face Dimension: 15/16"

Profile: Exposed Tee
Color: As selected by the Engineer from the Manufacturer's standard range of
products
Finish: Baked polyester paint
2.1.3
Hanger Wires: Galvanized steel wires, pre-stretched, 2.8 mm diameter.
2.1.4
Hanger Wire Anchors: Drill-in type as approved by the Engineer.
2.1.5
Accessories: Edge Moldings, hold-down clips and other necessary accessories shall be
provided in accordance with the Engineer's selection and approval.
FIBER REINFORCED CEMENT BOARDS

2.2.1
Composition: Manufactured from specially treated cellulose fiber, Portland cement and
refined sand. Boards shall be asbestos-free and suitable for ceiling. Cement board ceiling
shall have manufacturers standard pre-finished coating, white color. Pattern of ceiling
boards shall be as selected by the Engineer from manufacturers standard patterns.
Page | 3 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.2.2
Physical Features:
2.2.2.1 Fire Resistance: Not combustible.
BS 476 Part 6, Fire Propagation:

Index of Performance (I):
Sub-index (i):
1.1 to 2.8
0.2 to 1.6
BS 476 Part 7, Surface Spread of Flame:

Characteristics Class (1).
2.2.2.2 Sound Transmission Loss
Estimated average based on mass:
dB 4.5 mm
dB 6.0 mm
23 dB
25 dB
200 Hz
500 Hz
2000 Hz
0.02
0.02
0.03
2.2.2.3 Sound Absorption Coefficient
Estimated at
2.2.2.4 Moisture Content
At 27 20C, 65% - 95% Relative Humidity, the moisture content is 9% based on dry
mass.
2.2.2.5 Thermal Conductivity
Estimated at 400C
0.25 W/mK.
2.2.2.6 Thermal Insulation.
Thermal resistance of 4.5 mm sheet

Thermal resistance of 6.0 mm sheet
2.2.2.7 Flexural Strength.
0.02 c/w
0.03 c/w.
At 7% Saturated Moisture
(Average Modulus of Rupture)

Along Direction of Sheet
Across Direction of Sheet
Average (Along and Across)
14 MPa 9 MPa
24 MPa 17 MPa
19 MPa 13 MPa
Page | 4 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.2.2.8 Effects of Heat
Physical properties are not degraded by exposure to temperatures ranging from

00C to 1050C.
2.2.2.9 Weather Tested:
No physical signs of warping, cracking and deterioration after being subjected to

non-stop heating and water spraying tests, as follows:
-
3 hours of heating at surface temperature 700C, and
Followed by 3 hours of water spraying.
2.2.2.10 Size:
600 x 600 x 3.2 mm (nominal).
2.2.2.11 Abrasion Resistant.

2.2.2.12 Fungus Resistant.
2.2.2.13 Termite free and not affected by vermin.
3.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
3.1.
3.2
The installation of all exposed grid cement board work covered in this section shall be done
by a qualified subcontractor recommended by the manufacturer, having at least 5 years
experience in successfully completed projects.
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
3.2.1
Installation of suspension system shall be in accordance with ASTM C 636 and in

accordance with manufacturer's directions.
3.2.2
Rough Suspension:
3.2.2.1 Space hanger wires at 1200 mm on centers, each direction. Supported from
structural angle runners by looping and wire-tying.
3.2.2.2 Hangers shall be installed at ends of each suspension member and at light fixtures,
150 mm from vertical surfaces.
3.2.2.3 Wires shall not be splayed more than 125 mm in a 1200 mm vertical drop.
Page | 5 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.2.2.4 Wire shall be wrapped a minimum of three times horizontally, turning the ends
upward.
3.3
3.4
3.2.3
System shall be level within tolerance specified and parallel with walls.
3.2.4
Wall moldings shall be installed at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces.
3.2.5
Corners shall be mitered where wall moldings intersect or corner caps shall be installed in
lieu thereof.
3.2.6
Continuous ribbon of acoustical adhesive or caulking compound shall be applied on vertical

web.
3.2.7
Attachment to vertical surface shall be by means of mechanical fasteners.
CEMENT BOARD
3.3.1
Installation of cement board ceilings shall not begin until the building has been closed to
weather with Relative Humidity not more than 70 percent.
3.3.2
Cement board ceiling shall be in a leveled plane and in straight line courses.
3.3.3
Provide cutting and patching for the passage of materials of other trades.
CLEANING
3.4.1
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceiling including trims, edges, moldings and
suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of
minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and
repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
Page | 6 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09545 LINEAR METAL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.2
REFERENCES
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.4
TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING & STORAGE
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
09545-2/4
09545-2/4
09545-2/4
09545-2/4
09545-2/4
09545-2/4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL CEILING
2.1.1 GENERAL
2.1.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM
2.1.3 METAL LINEAR CEILING
2.1.4 ACCESSORIES
09545-3/4
09545-3/4
09545-3/4
09545-3/4
09545-3/4
09545-3/4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
3.2
TOLERANCE
3.3
ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION
09545-3/4
09545-3/4
09545-4/4
09545-4/4
Section 09545 Linear Metal Ceilings
Page | 1 of 4
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09545 METAL CEILING
1.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1.
Metal ceiling as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
1.2
REFERENCES
1.2.1.

ASTM C 635 - Metal Suspension Systems
ASTM C 636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.3.1.
Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's technical data for the metal ceiling components
and the related suspension system showing compliance with the requirements
specified herein.
1.3.2.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating grid layout, related dimensions, and
junctions with other work or ceiling finishes, interrelationship of mechanical and
electrical items related to system.
1.3.3.
Samples: Submit samples of the ceiling components for the Contracting Officer's
review and selection of color and texture.
coordinated together, for color selection.
1.4

1.4.1.
1.5
Conform to the Manufacturer's requirements and recommendations for transportation,

handling and storage.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1.
Job Mock-Up: Prior to the installation of metal ceiling work, erect one sample, 1500 x
1500 mm as directed by the Contracting Officer. Obtain the Contracting Officer's
approval of the mock-up before proceeding with installation. Retain mock-up during
construction as a standard for judging completed metal ceiling work.
Page | 2 of 4
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL CEILING
2.1.1.
General: Refer to Interior Design Drawings and Specifications for type, texture,
pattern, color and finish of metal linear ceiling.
2.1.2.
Suspension System
2.1.2.1.
2.1.3.
Metal Linear Ceiling (C05):

2.1.3.1.
2.1.4.
3.
Manufacturer's standard spring-T concealed grid clip-in type suspension

system manufactured from electro-galvanized mild steel comprising of
channels to which secondary spring tees are attached, and shall be
providing a firm grip for the ceiling panels.
Manufacturers standard non-perforated panels, formed after painting from

0.5 mm aluminum alloy 3005-H26; 84 mm faced width by 16 mm deep;
length 6 meter; formed to snap on and be securely retained on carriers
without separate fasteners. Ceiling shall have baked-on enamel finish,
unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Color shall be as selected and
approved by the Contracting Officer.
Accessories: Provide the Manufacturer's proposed system accessories including access

sections, edge trim, etc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
3.1.1.
Install metal ceiling system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to

produce finished ceiling to the tolerances specified herein, free of warped, soiled, or
damaged grid, panels and other components.
3.1.2.
Coordinate location of hangers with other work. Verify layout of hangers and locate to
accommodate fittings and units of equipment placed after installation of ceiling
system.
3.1.3.
Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest
adjacent hangers and related carrying channels required to span the distance.
3.1.4.
Install hangers/inserts in coordination with overhead work and provide additional

hangers/inserts as required.
3.1.5.
Hang independently of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduits. Where carrying
members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of longitudinal axis or face plane of
adjacent members.
Page | 3 of 4
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.2.
3.1.6.
Install ceilings in accordance with the final reflected ceiling layout and symmetrical in
both directions from the center line of the area.
3.1.7.
Support fixture loads by supplementary hanger located within 152 mm of each corner
when weight of fixture causes the dead load to exceed the deflection capability.
Support the fixtures independently.
3.1.8.
Install angle moldings at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using maximum
lengths, true and level. Miter all corners.
TOLERANCE
3.2.1.
Install ceiling system in a manner capable of supporting superimposed loads with

maximum permissible deflection of 1/360 of span and a maximum surface
deviation of 3 mm in 3000 mm.
3.3.

3.3.1.
Adjust sags or twists which develop in the ceiling system. Replace damaged or faulty
parts.
3.3.2.
Clean exposed surfaces of metal ceilings, including trims, edge moldings and
suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully
cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
3.3.3.
Protect metal ceilings, maintaining such temperature and humidity limitations and
dust control, that the work will be without damage and deterioration till the date of
substantial completion of the Project.
Page | 4 of 4
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09550 WOOD FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
1.2
REFERENCES
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5
1.6
WARRANTY
1.6.1 WARRANTY
1.6.2 WARRANTY PERIOD
09550-2/5
09550-2/5
09550-2/5
09550-2/5
09550-2/5
09550-3/5
09550-3/5
09550-3/5
09550-3/5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOLID WOOD FLOORING AND WOOD BASE
2.2
FINISHING MATERIALS
2.2.1 FLOOR SEALER
2.2.2 FLOOR FINISH
2.2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
2.2.3.1 DAMPPROOFING MATERIALS
2.2.3.2 MOISTURE BARRIER
2.2.3.3 MASTIC ADHESIVE
2.2.3.4 WOOD SLEEPERS
2.2.3.5 WOOD SUBFLOORING
2.2.3.6 NAILS AND SCREWS
09550-3/5
09550-3/5
09550-3/5
09550-3/5
09550-3/5
09550-3/5
09550-3/5
09550-3/5
09550-3/5
09550-3/5
09550-4/5
09550-4/5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
3.2
PREPARATION
3.3
INSTALLATION
3.3.1 GENERAL
3.3.2 SANDING AND FINISHING
3.4
PROTECTION
09550-4/5
09550-4/5
09550-4/5
09550-4/5
09550-4/5
09550-5/5
09550-5/5
Section 09550 Wood Flooring
Page | 1 of 5
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09550 - WOOD FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.
DESCRIPTION:
1.1.1.
1.2
The work under this section consists of furnishing and installing solid maple wood flooring
and related work as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form part of this specifications to the extent referenced.
1.3.
1.2.1
Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association (MFMA)
1.2.2
National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association (NOFMA)
1.2.3
National Wood Flooring Association (NWFA)
SUBMITTALS:
1.3.1.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed technical data and installation instructions
for type of wood flooring. Include instructions for handling, storage, installation,
dimensions of individual components, profiles, edge detail, finishing, protection and
maintenance.
1.3.2.
Samples consisting of sets of range samples for each
1.3.3.
1.4.
The
type of wood flooring.
1.3.2.1.
Include finish samples of factory-finished flooring.
1.3.2.2.
Accessories: Include minimum of 150 mm long samples of each type of

required accessory item such wood or metal feature strips, baseboard, trim,
molding, and nosings.
Shop Drawings showing layout and types of wood flooring, including plans, elevations,
sections, details of anchorage and attachments and conditions requiring feature strips,
reducer strips, baseboard, trim, molding, nosings, or other accessories
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has specialized in

installing types of wood flooring similar to those required for this Project.
1.4.2.
Source Quality Control: Obtain flooring of each type from a single manufacturer or source
to ensure a match of quality, color, pattern, and texture.
Page | 2 of 5
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.5.

1.5.1.
1.6.
Protect wood flooring from exposure to moisture in shipment, storage and handling.
Deliver in unopened cartons or bundles and store in a dry place with adequate air
circulation. Do not deliver material to building until concrete, plaster, masonry, ceramic
tile, and other wet work is complete and cured to a condition of equilibrium and
temperature and humidity are maintained at or near occupancy levels.
WARRANTY
1.6.1.
Warranty: Submit a written warranty agreeing to repair or replace wood flooring that
fails in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include,
but are not limited to:
1.6.1.1. Buckling, warping, squeaking, and loosening.
1.6.1.2. Excessive open joints or cracks.
1.6.1.3. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal wear.
1.6.2.
Warranty Period: 1 year from date of substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1.
SOLID WOOD FLOORING (F14) AND WOOD BASE (B01)

2.1.1.
2.2
Manufacturer, Type, Species, Thickness, Size, Finish and Grade: Refer to Interior Design
sample boards.
FINISHING MATERIALS
2.2.1.
Floor Sealer: Penetrating type, pliable, sealer or sealer/finish; as recommended by flooring

manufacturer and approved by Maple Flooring Manufacturing Association (MFMA).
2.2.2.
Floor Finish: As recommended by flooring manufacturer and approved by MFMA suitable

for floor application or use.
2.2.3.
Accessory Materials: Provide the following where required:

2.2.3.1.
Damp-proofing materials.
2.2.3.2.
Moisture barrier
2.2.3.3.
Mastic adhesive
Page | 3 of 5
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.2.3.4.
Wood sleepers
2.2.3.5.
Wood Sub-flooring
2.2.3.6.
Nails and Screws
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
3.1.1.
3.2
3.3.
Examine substrates where wood flooring will be installed and conditions under which
work will be performed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
PREPARATION
3.2.1.
Where direct application of wood flooring to concrete substrate is indicated, test for dryness
before proceeding with installation. Check levelness of concrete substrate to ensure not
more than 6 mm deviation in any direction when checked with 3 m straight edge. Grind
down high spots or fill in low spots to correct improper conditions.
3.2.2.
Apply moisture barrier over concrete substrate or sub-floor as recommended by flooring

manufacturer.
INSTALLATION
3.3.1.
General: Comply with manufacturers' written instructions and recommendations for

application indicated, but not less than National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association
(NOFMA) standards.
The installation shall be carried out by Specialist Sub-Contractor approved by the Contracting
Officer.
3.3.2.
Sanding and Finishing

3.3.2.1.
Schedule floor finishing to be completed just before final inspection, Project

acceptance and Substantial Completion.
3.3.2.2.
Machine-sand installed, unfinished flooring to remove offsets and non-level

conditions, ridges, cups, and sanding machine marks that would be
noticeable after finishing. Vacuum and tack clean and immediately apply
finish. Do not permit traffic on floor after sanding and until finish is
completed.
3.3.2.3.
Apply stain to match approved sample, if needed.
Page | 4 of 5
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.4
3.3.2.4.
Apply wood filler by brush, then wipe across grain to work into pores and
cracks.
3.3.2.5.
Apply two coats of floor sealer according to manufacturer's instruction.
3.3.2.6.
Apply floor finish according to manufacturer's instructions. Apply as many

coats as needed to build a dry film thickness of at least 3.0 mils (0.08 mm).
PROTECTION
3.4.1.
Protect installed unfinished and pre-finished wood flooring during remainder of construction
period with heavy Kraft paper or other suitable covering to prevent damage or deterioration.
Do not use plastic sheet or film that could cause condensation.
3.4.2.
Do not cover site-finished floors with Kraft paper, rugs or any other material until finish
reaches full cure, usually 6 or 7 days.
Page | 5 of 5
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
1.4
1.5
SCHEDULING
1.6
EXTRA MATERIALS
09650-2/5
09650-2/5
09650-2/5
09650-3/5
09650-3/5
09650-3/5
09650-3/5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOLID VINYL SHEET FLOOR COVERINGS
2.2
RESILIENT BASE
2.3
EDGE STRIP
2.4
ADHESIVE
2.5
HEAT WELDING BEAD
09650-3/5
09650-3/5
09650-3/5
09650-4/5
09650-4/5
09650-4/5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION/VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
3.2
SURFACE PREPARATION
3.3
MOISTURE TEST
3.4
INSTALLATION OF SOLID VINYL SHEET
3.5
INSTALLATION OF EDGE STRIPS
3.6
INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT BASE
3.7
CLEANING
3.8
PROTECTION
09650-4/5
09650-4/5
09650-4/5
09650-4/5
09650-4/5
09650-5/5
09650-5/5
09650-5/5
09650-5/5
Section 09650 Resilient Flooring
Page | 1 of 5
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS
FS RR-T-650 (Rev D) Treads, Metallic and Nonmetallic, Skid Resistant
(Rev B; Int Am 1; Notice 1) Tile, Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl-Asbestos
FS SS-W-40
(Rev A; Int Am 1; Notice 1) Wall Base: Rubber, and Vinyl Plastic
BRITISH STANDARD INSTITUTION (BS)

BS 3261
1.2
Specification for Unbacked Flexible PVC Flooring
SUBMITTALS
SD-01 Data
Resilient Flooring and Accessories; GA.
Manufacturer's descriptive data and installation instructions.
instructions shall be included.
Cleaning
and maintenance
SD-09 Reports
Resilient Flooring and Accessories; FIO.
Copies of test reports showing that representative product samples of the flooring proposed for
use have been tested by an independent testing laboratory within the past year and conform to the
requirements specified.
SD-14 Samples
Page | 2 of 5
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Resilient Flooring and Accessories; GA.

Three samples of each indicated color and type of flooring and base. Sample size shall be
minimum 75 mm by 125 mm.
1.3

Materials shall be delivered to the building site in original unopened containers, shall be stored in
a clean dry area with temperature maintained above 21 degrees C for 2 days prior to installation,
and shall be stacked according to manufacturer's recommendations.
1.4
Areas to receive resilient flooring shall be maintained at a temperature above 21 degrees C for 2
days before application, during application and 2 days after application. A minimum temperature
of 13 degrees C shall be maintained thereafter.
1.5
SCHEDULING
Resilient flooring application shall be scheduled after the completion of other work which would
damage the finished surface of the flooring.
1.6
EXTRA MATERIALS
Extra flooring material of each color and pattern shall be furnished at the rate of 5 tiles for each
1000 tiles. Extra materials shall be from the same lot as those installed. Extra base material
composed of 6 m of each color shall be furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOLID VINYL SHEET FLOOR COVERINGS:

Unbacked Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings: Products complying with ASTM F 1303, Type II BS
3261: Type A, except for wear-layer binder content and backing requirements, and with
requirements specified in the Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering Schedule. Manufacturer, Type, Size,
Color and Pattern shall be as indicated in Interior Design (I.D.) sample boards.
2.2
RESILIENT BASE:
Base shall conform to FS SS-W-40, Type I (rubber). Style B, (coved)-installed with resilient
flooring. Butt toe (set-in cove). Base shall be 101.6 mm high. Preformed outside or Job Formed
corners shall be furnished. Color to match vinyl sheet flooring.
Page | 3 of 5
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.3
EDGE STRIP
Edge strip shall be vinyl, 25 mm wide, and of thickness to match the flooring. Color shall match
wall base color unless otherwise indicated.
2.4
ADHESIVE
Adhesive for flooring and wall base shall be as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.
2.5
HEAT-WELDING BEAD
Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer for heat-welding seams. Color and pattern
to match color and pattern of sheet vinyl floor covering
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION/VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
The Contractor shall verify that site conditions are in agreement with the design package and
shall report all conditions that will prevent a proper installation. The Contractor shall not take
any corrective action without written permission from the Contracting Officer.
3.2
SURFACE PREPARATION
Flooring shall be in a true, level plane, except where indicated as sloped. Before any work under
this section is begun, all defects such as rough or scaling concrete, low spots, high spots, and
uneven surfaces shall have been corrected, and all damaged portions of concrete slabs shall have
been repaired as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Concrete curing compounds, other
than the type that does not adversely affect adhesion, shall be entirely removed from the slabs.
The Contractor shall verify that site conditions are in agreement with the design package and
shall report all conditions that will prevent a proper installation. The Contractor shall not take any
corrective action without written permission from the Contracting Officer.
3.3
MOISTURE TEST
The suitability of the concrete subfloor for receiving the resilient flooring with regard to moisture
content shall be determined by a moisture test as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.
3.4.
INSTALLATION OF SOLID VINYL SHEET

Comply with sheet vinyl floor covering manufacturer's written installation instructions.
Unroll sheet vinyl floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting, if
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
Lay out sheet vinyl floor coverings to comply with the following requirements:
Page | 4 of 5
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.4.1.
Maintain uniformity of sheet vinyl floor covering direction.
3.4.2.
Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and lowtraffic areas, and not less than 150 mm away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.
3.4.3.
Match edges of sheet vinyl floor coverings for color shading and pattern at seams
according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.4.4.
Avoid cross seams.
Scribe, cut, and fit sheet vinyl floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and
permanent fixtures, including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames,
thresholds, and nosings.
3.5.
INSTALLATION OF EDGE STRIPS

Edge strips shall be secured with adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer. Edge strips
shall be provided at locations where flooring termination is higher than the adjacent finished
flooring, except at doorways where thresholds are provided.
3.6.
INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT BASE

Wall base shall be installed with adhesive in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Base joints shall be tight and base shall be even with adjacent resilient flooring.
3.7.
CLEANING
Immediately upon completion of installation of tile in a room or an area, flooring and adjacent
surfaces shall be cleaned to remove all surplus adhesive. No sooner than 5 days after installation,
flooring shall be washed with a nonalkaline cleaning solution, and rinsed thoroughly with clear
cold water.
3.8.
PROTECTION
From the time of laying until acceptance, flooring shall be protected from damage. Flooring
which becomes damaged, loose, broken, or curled shall be removed and replaced.
Page | 5 of 5
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09671 RESINOUS FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
THIS SECTION INCLUDES
1.2
REFERENCES
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
2.1.1 RESINOUS FLOORING
2.1.2 PATCHING AND FILL MATERIAL
09671-2/6
09671-2/6
09671-2/6
09671-3/6
09671-3/6
09671-3/6
09671-3/6
09671-4/6
09671-4/6
09671-4/6
09671-4/6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
3.2
APPLICATION
3.3
3.4
3.5
RESINOUS FLOORING SCHEDULE
3.5.1 RESINOUS FLOORING
3.5.1.1 MATERIAL
3.5.1.2 COLOR AND PATTERN
3.5.1.3 THICKNESS
3.5.1.4 WEARING SURFACE
3.5.2 BASE
3.5.3 COMPONENTS
3.5.4 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
3.5.4.1 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
3.5.4.2 WEIGHT
3.5.4.3 IMPACT RESISTANCE
3.5.4.4 BOND STRENGTH
3.5.5 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE
09671-4/6
09671-4/6
09671-4/6
09671-5/6
09671-5/6
09671-5/6
09671-5/6
09671-5/6
09671-5/6
09671-5/6
09671-6/6
09671-6/6
09671-6/6
09671-6/6
09671-6/6
09671-6/6
09671-6/6
09671-6/6
09671-6/6
Section 09671 Resinous Flooring
Page | 1 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09671 - RESINOUS FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL
SUMMARY
1.1.
1.2
THIS SECTION INCLUDES:

General-use epoxy-resin flooring for electrical and mechanical rooms, warehouses, service areas and
storage areas.
REFERENCES
Section 1.01 ACI - AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE
ACI 503R-93:
Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete

Section 1.02
Section 1.03 ASTM - AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS
ASTM C 267-82
ASTM C 307-94
ASTM C 413-94
ASTM C 531-95
ASTM C 579-91
ASTM C 580-93
ASTM C 811-91
ASTM D 543-95
ASTM D 635-91
ASTM D 1308-87
ASTM D 2240-95:
ASTM D 4060-95:
(Reapproved 1990): Test Method for Chemical Resistance of Mortars, Grouts,

and Monolithic Surfacings
Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortar, Grouts, and
Monolithic Surfacings
Test Method for Absorption of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, and
Monolithic Surfacings
Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of
Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer
Concretes
Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts,
Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes
Test Method for Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity of ChemicalResistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes
Practice for Surface Preparation of Concrete for Application of ChemicalResistant Resin Monolithic Surfacings
Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to Chemical Reagents
Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of SelfSupporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position
(Reapproved 1993): Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear
and Pigmented Organic Finishes
Test Method for Rubber PropertyDurometer Hardness
Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber
Abraser
Section 1.04 MILITARY SPECIFICATION
MIL-D-3134J (Navy), 5 Oct. 1988 (with Amendment 1, 12 Sept. 1989): Deck Covering Materials
Page | 2 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.3
1.4
SUBMITTALS
1.3.1.
Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include manufacturer's technical data,
installation instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component
required.
1.3.2.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of
colors, textures, and patterns available for each resinous flooring system indicated.
1.3.3.
Samples for Verification: Of each resinous flooring system required, 150 mm square,
applied by Installer for this Project to a rigid backing, in color, texture, and finish
indicated. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample
sets showing the full range of variations expected.
1.3.4.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency indicating and
interpreting test results of the resinous flooring's reaction to chemicals and other reagents
and substantiating compliance with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1.
1.5
1.6.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer (applicator) who has specialized

in installing resinous flooring similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for
this Project and who is acceptable to resinous flooring manufacturer.

1.5.1.
Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with
other components.
1.5.2.
Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

deterioration from moisture, heat, cold, direct sunlight, or other detrimental effects.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.6.1.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written

instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and
other conditions affecting resinous flooring installation.
1.6.2.
Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate
permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring installation.
1.6.3.
Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours
after application, unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.
Page | 3 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1.
MATERIALS
2.1.1.
Resinous Flooring: Resinous floor surfacing system consisting of primer; body coat(s)
including resin, hardener, aggregates, and colorants, if any; and sealing or finish coat(s).
Comply with requirements indicated in the Resinous Flooring Schedule.
2.1.2.
Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring

manufacturer and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
PREPARATION
3.1.1.
General: Prepare and clean substrate according to resinous flooring manufacturer's

written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry, and neutral substrate for
resinous flooring application.
3.1.2.
Concrete Substrates:
Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze,
efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other
contaminates incompatible with resinous flooring.
3.1.2.1.
Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements, unless manufacturer's written

instructions are more stringent.
3.1.2.2.
Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring

manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.1.3.
Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous

flooring manufacturer's written instructions.
3.1.4.
Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.1.5.
Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from
reflecting through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
APPLICATION
3.2.1.
General: Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's

written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness
indicated.
3.2.1.1.
Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of

resinous flooring system to substrate and optimum intercoat adhesion.
Page | 4 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.3
3.2.1.2.
Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing
processes.
3.2.1.3.
At substrate expansion and isolation joints, provide joint in resinous

flooring to comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written
recommendations.
3.2.2.
Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
3.2.3.
Apply self-leveling slurry body coat(s) in thickness indicated.
3.2.4.
Apply troweled or screeded body coat(s) in thickness indicated. Hand or power trowel
and grout to fill voids. When cured, sand to remove trowel marks and roughness.
3.2.5.
Apply sealing or finish coat(s), including grout coat, if any, of type recommended by
resinous flooring manufacturer to produce finish indicated. Apply in number of coats and
at spreading rates recommended in writing by manufacturer.

Core Sampling: At the direction of Owner and at locations designated by Owner, take 1 core sample
per 93 sq. m of resinous flooring, or portion of, to verify thickness. For each sample that fails to
comply with requirements, take 2 additional samples. Repair damage caused by coring and correct
deficiencies at no additional cost to Owner.
3.4

3.4.1.
Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction
period.
Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering,
recommended in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer.
Clean resinous flooring not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections
intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each Project area. Use cleaning
materials and procedures recommended in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer.
3.5
RESINOUS FLOORING SCHEDULE

3.5.1.
Resinous Flooring: Provide resinous flooring system complying with the following:
3.5.1.1.
Material: Two coat epoxy resin composition flooring.
3.5.1.2.
Color and Pattern: As selected by Contracting Officer from

manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns produced for resinous
flooring complying with requirements indicated.
3.5.1.3.
Total Thickness of Body Coat(s): 3.2 mm
Page | 5 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.5.1.4.
Wearing Surface: Anti-slip
3.5.2.
Base: 100 mm high integral cove base.
3.5.3
Components:
Provide manufacturer's
requirements, unless otherwise indicated.
standard
components
complying
with
3.5.3.1. Chemical-resistant sealing or finish coat(s).

3.5.4
3.5.5.
Physical Properties: Provide resinous flooring system with the following minimum
physical property requirements when tested according to standard test methods indicated:
3.5.4.1.
Compressive Strength: 772 kg/cm2.
3.5.4.2.
Weight: 14.6 kg/m2.
3.5.4.3.
Impact Resistance: No chipping, cracking, or delamination and not more

than 1.6-mm permanent indentation per MIL-D-3134.
3.5.4.4.
Bond Strength: 100 percent concrete failure per ACI 503R.
Chemical Resistance: Test specimens of cured resinous flooring system are unaffected
when tested according to ASTM D 543, Procedure A, for immersion in the following
reagents for not less than 7 days
Page | 6 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09680 CARPET

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.2
REFERENCES
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.4
1.5
WARRANTY
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
09680-2/7
09680-2/7
09680-2/7
09680-3/7
09680-3/7
09680-4/7
09680-4/7
09680-4/7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CARPET
2.2
ACCESSORIES
09680-4/7
09680-5/7
09680-6/7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
3.1.1 MEASUREMENT
3.1.2 PATCH HOLES AND CRACKS AND LEVEL
TO A SMOOTH SURFACE
3.1.3 VACUUMING
3.1.4 SUBSTRATE
09680-6/7
09680-6/7
09680-6/7
3.2
3.3
3.4
INSTALLATION
CLEANING
PROTECTION
Section 09680 Carpet
09680-6/7
09680-6/7
09680-6/7
09680-6/7
09680-7/7
09680-7/7
Page | 1 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09680 - CARPET

1.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.
1.2
Wall-to-wall carpet, cushion (pad) where required and the accessories as indicated on
Drawings and as specified herein.
REFERENCES
1.2.1.
AATCC - American Association of Textile Colorists and Chemists

AATCC 30 - Anti-Fungal Activity Assessment on Textile Materials; Mildew and Rot
Resistance of Textile Materials.
AATCC 100 - Assessment of Anti-Bacterial Finishes on Textile Materials.
AATCC 134 - Electrostatic Propensity of Carpets.
1.2.2.
CCC - Carpet Cushion Council

Traffic Classifications - 1990
1.2.3.
1.2.4

ASTM C 423
Test Method for Sound Absorption of Acoustical Materials by

Reverberation Room Method.
ASTM D 1335
Test Method for Tuft Bind of Pile Floor Coverings.
ASTM D 2859
Test Method for Flammability of Finished Textile Floor

Covering Materials.
ASTM D 3574
Method of Testing Flexible Cellular Materials - Slab, Bonded,

and Molded Urethane Foams.
ASTM E 648
Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering

Systems Using aRadiant Heat Energy Source.
ASTM E 662
Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated

by Solid Materials.
DOC - Federal Standard, Department of Commerce

FF 1-70 - Methenamine Pill Test.
1.2.5
UL - Underwriters Laboratories
UL 992 - Smoke Chamber Test.
Page | 2 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.2.6
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association

NFPA 253 Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems
Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.
NFPA 255 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
1.2.7

SASO 903/1994 Determination of thickness of pile above the backing.
SASO 904/1994 Determination of number of tufts and/or loops per
unit length and per unit area.
SASO 909/1994 Determination of mass of total pile yarn per unit area.
SASO 910/1994 Determination of measured suface pile density and
maeasured pile fiber volume ration
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.3.1.
Product data for each type of carpet material and installation accessory required.
Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading, and
flame resistance and smoke development characteristics.
1.3.2.
Shop drawings showing layout and seaming diagrams. Indicate pile or pattern
direction and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways,
enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are
required in carpet. Show installation details at special condition.
1.3.3.
Submit 400 x 400 mm samples of each type, color, texture, and pattern of carpet to be
used for the work.
1.3.4.
Manufacturer's standard color chart.
1.3.5.
Certificate of compliance.
coordinated together, for color selection.
1.4

1.4.1.
Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, labeled
with identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number.
1.4.2.
Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well-ventilated

area protected from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
Page | 3 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Lay flat, blocked off ground. Maintain minimum temperature of 20 degree C at least
three days prior to and during installation in area where materials are stored.
1.5
WARRANTY
1.5.1.
1.6
Submit a written 1 year guarantee, starting from substantial handover of project, for all
items specified under this section, signed by manufacturer and the Contractor, against
defective material and workmanship.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6.1.
Installer: Carpet installer shall have at least five years successful experience in carpet
installation similar in size and type to the installation for this Project. Installer shall be
subject to approval of the Contracting Officer.
1.6.2.
Carpet Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide carpet identical to that tested for the
following fire performance characteristics, per test method indicated below, by UL or
other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
organization.
1.6.3.
1.7
2.
Test Method: DOC FF 1-70

Rating: Pass
Test Method: ASTM E 84

Flame Spread: 75 or less
Smoke Developed: 450 or less
Dimensional Stability: Maximum variance not exceeding plus or minus 0.02 percent.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.7.1.
Substrate: Examine the substrate and conditions under which the carpet is to be
installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
1.7.2.
Protection: Protect carpet from soiling and damage during transit, storage, and
installation.
1.7.3.
Temperature: Temperature in the area to be carpeted shall be within the

manufacturer's recommended range.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CARPET:
2.1.1.
Provide high quality carpets complying with the following requirements
Quality:
Axminister/Printemp-3
Page | 4 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.1.2
Construction:
Cut Pile, Plain or Design
2.1.3
Composition:
80% Wool, 20% Nylon.
2.1.4
Pile Height:
+/- 7.5 mm
2.1.5
Total Pile Weight:
+/- 1,350 grams/m2.
2.1.6
Total Height:
+/- 10 mm
2.1.7
Total Weight:
+/- 2,100 grams/m2.
2.1.8
Density:
Width 64 per 10 cm (16.25 per inch)

Length 31.5 per 10 cm (8.0 per inch)
2.1.9
Static Electricity: Anti Static compound (Suppress Static

Electricity below 2.5 to 3.5 kV)
2.1.10
Flammability Rate Requirement: Based on (or equivalent to) any of the following
2.1.11
2.2
U.S. Pill Test, D.O.C. FF 1-70 (ASTM D 2859-70T)

U.S. Tunnel Test (ASTM E-84-70) Flamespread Rate Class A 0-25/Class B
26-75.
B.S. 4790 equal to D.O.C. FF 1-70.
Radient panel 0.25 watts//cm2.
Color Fastness:
Cream T59
L. Green G31
O. Green C63 -
Sanape 1171
56
Pink C62
56
D. Green 12
56
Blue 20
56
2.1.12
Wear:
No more than 10 % face yarn loss in 5 years normal use.
2.1.13
Roll Size:
25 30 meters.
2.1.14
Width:
4 meters (maximum).
ACCESSORIES:
2.2.1.
Carpet Cushion/Pad (Where required):

2.2.1.1.
For Stretch-Over Applications: Provide 6 mm thick polyurethane underlay

foam or as recommended by manufacturer to comply with CCC Class II Heavy Traffic.
Page | 5 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.2.1.2.
3.
For Bonded Applications: Manufacturer standard cushions, factory-bonded,

type as recommended by manufacturer to comply with CCC Class II Heavy Traffic.
2.2.2.
Carpet Edge Guard: Aluminum with fold down edge and concealed griper teeth;
minimum 35 mm wide punched anchorage flange, anodized aluminum finish.
2.2.3.
Seaming Tape: Hot-melt adhesive tape as recommended by carpet manufacturer for

taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and prevent pile
loss at seams.
2.2.4.
Adhesives: Water resistant, non-staining and as recommended by the carpet

manufacturer to comply with the flammability requirements of the installed carpet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2.
PREPARATION
3.1.1.
Measurement: Measure each space to receive carpet as a basis of supplying and

cutting the carpet. Do not scale Drawings or calculate sizes from dimensions shown.
3.1.2.
Patch holes and cracks, and level to a smooth surface: Seal powdery or porous
surfaces with sealer recommended by carpet manufacturer.
3.1.3.
Vacuuming: Immediately prior to carpet installation, vacuum substrate and remove all
deleterious substances which would interfere with the installation or be harmful to the
work.
3.1.4.
Substrate: Prior to installation of the carpet, ascertain that floors are completely dry to
prevent accumulation of moisture under carpet, and that the temperature of the
premises is proper to prevent sag, buckle, and shrinkage of carpet after installation.
INSTALLATION
3.2.1.
Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and

direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At
doorways, center seams under door in closed position; do not place seams
perpendicular to door frame, in direction of traffic through doorway. Do not bridge
building expansion joints with continuous carpet.
3.2.2.
Where required, install carpet cushion.
3.2.3.
Extend carpet under removable flanges and furnishings and into alcoves and closets of
each space.
3.2.4.
Provide cutouts where required, and bind cut edges where not concealed by protective
edge guards or overlapping flanges.
Page | 6 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.3
3.4
3.2.5.
Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate.
3.2.6.
Install carpet by trimming edges, butting cuts with seaming tape to provide sufficient
strength for stretching where carpet length is greater than 20 feet.
3.2.7.
Stretch carpet to provide smooth, ripple-free, taut, trim edges; secure to stripping and
conceal behind edge of stripping. Use power stretcher where carpet length is greater
than 20 feet.
3.2.8.
For bonded application, glue carpet to cushion using approved adhesive materials, in
accordance with the manufacturer recommendations.
3.2.9.
Fit sections of carpet prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges and butt cuts with
seaming tape. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with carpet
manufacturer's written instructions. Butt edges tight to form seams without gaps. Roll
entire area lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond.
CLEANING
3.3.1.
Remove adhesive from carpet surface with manufacturer's recommended cleaning

agent.
3.3.2.
Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. Vacuum with commercial
machine with face-beater element. Remove soil. Replace carpet where soil cannot be
removed. Remove protruding face yarn.
3.3.3.
Vacuum clean carpet.
PROTECTION
3.4.1.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to

manufacturer and the Contracting Officer, to ensure carpet is not damaged or
deteriorated at time of Substantial Completion.
Page | 7 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09690 CARPET TILES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.6
WARRANTY
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS
09690-2/7
09690-2/7
09690-3/7
09690-3/7
09690-4/7
09690-5/7
09690-6/7
09690-6/7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CARPET TILE
2.2
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
09690-6/7
09690-6/7
09690-6/7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
3.2
PREPARATION
3.3
INSTALLATION
3.4
CLEANING
3.5
PROTECTION
09690-6/7
09690-6/7
09690-7/7
09690-7/7
09690-7/7
09690-7/7
Section 09690 Carpet Tiles
Page | 1 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09690 - CARPET TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF TEXTILE CHEMISTS AND COLORISTS
AATCC-16.
AATCC-134
AATCC-165
AATCC-174
Colorfastness to Light
Electrostatic Propensity of Carpets
Colorfastness to Crocking: Carpets AATCC Crockmeter Method
Antimicrobial Activity Assessment of Carpet

ASTM E 84
ASTM E 648
ASTM D 1335
ASTM D 2646
ASTM D 3936
Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Burning Materials

Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a
Radiant Heat Energy Source
Standard Test Method for Tuft Bind of Pile Floor Coverings
Standard Test Method of Testing Backing Fabrics
Standard Test Method for Delamination Strength of Secondary Backing of Pile
Floor Coverings
CARPET AND RUG INSTITUTE
CRI 104
Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floor Covering Materials
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION

NFPA 99.
1.2
Standard for Health Care Facilities
SUBMITTALS
1.2.1
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
1.2.2
Product Data for each type of carpet tile material and installation accessory specified.
Submit manufacturer's printed data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance,
and fire-test-response characteristics. Submit methods of installation for each type of
substrate.
Page | 2 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.2.3
Shop Drawings showing columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in

cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tile. Indicate the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot.

Locations where dye lot changes occur.
Seam locations, types, and methods.
Type of subfloor.
Type of installation.
Pattern type, location, and direction.
Pile direction.
Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
Transition details to other flooring materials.
1.2.4
Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts or Samples of
materials showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type
of carpet tile indicated.
1.2.5
Samples for verification of the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes,

showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare
Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. Label each sample with the
manufacturer's name, material type, color, pattern, and designation indicated on
Drawings and carpet tile schedule. Submit the following:
1.
2.
Full-size sample of each type of carpet tile required.

300-mm Samples of each type of exposed edge stripping and accessory item.
1.2.6
Schedule of carpet tile using same room designations indicated on Drawings.
1.2.7
Maintenance data for carpet tile to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 1. Include the following:
1.
Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including manufacturer's recommended

frequency for maintaining carpet tile.
2.
Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to

finishes and performance. Include cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures.
1.3

1.3.1
General: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104, Section 5: "Storage and
Handling."
Page | 3 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.4
1.3.2
Deliver materials to Project site in original factory wrappings and containers, labeled
with identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number.
1.3.3
Store materials on-site in original undamaged packages, inside well-ventilated area

protected from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures, and humidity. Lay
flat, with continuous blocking off ground.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified by the Floor

Covering Installation Board (FCIB) or who can demonstrate compliance with FCIB
certification program requirements.
1.4.2
Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of carpet tile from one source and by a
single manufacturer.
1.4.3
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide carpet tile with the following fire-testresponse characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet tile with appropriate markings of
applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.
1.4.4
Surface Flammability: Passes CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1630.
2.
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per
ASTM E 648.
3.
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class II, not less than 0.22 W/sq. cm per
ASTM E 648.
4.
Flame Spread: 25 or less per ASTM E 84.
5.
Smoke Developed: 450 or less per ASTM E 84.
Mockups: Prior to installing carpet tile, construct mockups for each form of
construction and finish required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and
to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build
mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final
unit of Work.
1.
Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not
indicated, as directed by Architect.
2.
Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will
be constructed.
2.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Page | 4 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.
Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work.
5.
Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as

a standard for judging the completed Work.
a.
1.5
1.6
1.7
Approved mock-ups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial

Completion may become part of the completed Work.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.5.1
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6: "Site Conditions."
1.5.2
Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tile until space
is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work
above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and
will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
1.5.3
Subfloor Moisture Conditions: Moisture emission rate of not more than 14.6 kg/800
sq. m/24 hours when tested by calcium chloride moisture test in compliance with
CRI 104, 6.2.1, with subfloor temperatures not less than 12.7 deg C.
1.5.4
Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions: A pH range of 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with

potable water and pHydrion paper is applied.
WARRANTY
1.6.1
General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made
by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.6.2
Special Carpet Tile Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by carpet tile
manufacturer and Installer agreeing to repair or replace carpet tile that does not meet
requirements or that fails in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty
period. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber,
tile curling, snags, runs, and delamination.
1.6.3
Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS
1.7.1
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged
with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing
contents.
1.
Carpet Tile: Before installation begins, furnish quantity of full-size units equal to
5 percent of amount installed.
Page | 5 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CARPET TILE
2.1.1 Carpet Tile on Cement Screed (F11): 500 x 500 mm, tufted cut pile carpet with primary
and secondary backing but without underlay.
2.1.2 For type, construction, texture, color, size and performance characteristics refer to
Interior Design (I.D.) drawings, specifications and sample boards
2.2
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
2.2.1
Concrete-Slab Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
2.2.2
Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: As recommended by carpet tile

manufacturer.
2.2.3
Adhesives: Releasable type, water-resistant, mildew-resistant, non-staining type to suit

products and sub-floor conditions indicated and to comply with flammability
requirements for installed carpet tile as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
3.1.1
Examine subfloor and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances,
and other conditions affecting performance of carpet tile. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.1.2
Verify that subfloor and conditions are satisfactory for carpet tile installation and
comply with requirements specified in this Section and those of carpet tile
manufacturer.
PREPARATION
3.2.1
General: Comply with carpet tile manufacturer's installation recommendations to

prepare substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.
3.2.2
Level subfloor within 6 mm in 3 m, non-cumulative, in all directions. Sand or grind

protrusions, bumps, and ridges. Patch and repair cracks and rough areas. Fill
depressions.
1.
Use leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
subfloor as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
Page | 6 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.3
3.4
3.2.3
Remove subfloor coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are
incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone.
3.2.4
Broom or vacuum clean subfloor to be covered with carpet tile. Following cleaning,
examine subfloor for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust.
3.2.5
Concrete-Subfloor Preparation:
Apply concrete-slab primer, according
manufacturer's directions, where recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
INSTALLATION
3.3.1
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 13: "Carpet Modules (Tiles)."
3.3.2
Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of
finished carpet tile floor, install carpet tile before installation of these items.
3.3.3
Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.
3.3.4.
Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,
removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
3.3.5.
Install borders parallel to walls.
CLEANING
3.4.1.
3.5
to
Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation:

3.4.1.1.
Remove visible adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using
cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
3.4.1.2.
Remove protruding yarns from carpet tile surface.
3.4.1.3.
Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
PROTECTION
3.5.1
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 15: "Protection of Indoor Installation."
3.5.2
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to

manufacturer and Installer, that ensure carpet tile is without damage or deterioration at
the time of Substantial Completion.
Page | 7 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09 699 ACCESS FLOORING

PART I - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SCOPE
A.
1. 3
Contract Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including CONTRACT

CLAUSES and CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CLAUSES & CONDITIONS and
other Division 1 Specification Sections apply to work of this Section.
Work under this section consists of furnishing everything necessary for and incidental to
the execution and completion of all access flooring work as indicated on the drawings
and specification herein.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
The extent of access flooring is shown on the drawings.
B.
The type of access floors specified herein are:

1.
C.
1.4
Military Grade Installation, Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) type
Under-floor clearance, offsets, closures, and accessories, as required are to be included as

required.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer: Provide access floor components including accessories and finishes

produced by one manufacturer.
B.
Structural Performance: Provide manufacturers certification that access flooring system

as installed, complies with the following minimum standards:
1.
Pedestals to have a vertical designed load of 25kN with no distortion and an

ultimate load carrying capacity not less than twice the designed strength of the
system with a level and locking device permitting vertical adjustment of plus or
minus 38mm.
2.
Floor Panels:
600 mm x 600 mm
a.
Line or uniform load 36 kN per sq. meter

Deflection = 1.0mm maximum
b.
Concentrated load 25 kN per sq. meter

Center deflection = 2mm maximum
Section 09 699 Access Flooring
Page | 1 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Edge deflection = 2mm maximum
C.
Permanent Deflection: Maximum of 0.25 mm at design load.
d.
Ultimate load carrying capacity not less than three times design strength.
Allowance Tolerances:
1.
Floor Panel Flatness: plus or minus 0.25mm or diagonal on top of panel
2.
Floor Panel Surface Dimensions: Plus or minus 0.125 mm.
3.
Floor Panel Squareness: Plus or minus 0.125 mm.
4.
Finish Floor: Plus or minus 1.5 mm in 3 meter and plus or minus 2.5 mm over
the entire floor.
D.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to presentation of shop drawings (if
any) and fabrication where possible, to ensure proper fitting of the work. However, do
not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting wherever the taking of field
measurements before fabrication might delay the work
E.
Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in
concrete or built into masonry for installation of units. Provide setting drawings,
template, instruction and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate
delivery with other work to avoid delay.
1.
F.
1.5
c.
See concrete and masonry section of these specifications for installation of

inserts and anchorage devices.
Manufacturers Guarantees: Furnish a written guarantee against defects in workmanship

and materials for a period of two years from the date of building acceptance.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturers Data: Submit 2 copies of manufacturers specifications and installation

instructions for each type of access flooring required, including certification that access
flooring meets the requirements. Provide method of installation for each type of support
structure.
1.
B.
Indicate by transmittal that copy of instructions and recommendation has been

distributed to the installer
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for access flooring installation features which are
not fully dimensioned or detailed on manufacturers date sheet. Include plans indicating
proposed panel installation layout, and accessories as required.
Page | 2 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
C.
Samples: Submit 3 samples of each type of floor finish materials. Consultants review of
samples will be for pattern, color and texture only. Compliance with all other
requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the contractor.
1.
D.
In addition, submit one complete full-size floor panel, pedestal and grid unit for
each type of access floor required.
Supply extra 2.0% of contract quantity as maintenance stock for the owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS:

A.
Materials: Fabricate the access flooring system of incombustible materials throughout,

except floor panel surfacing material.
B.
Pedestals: Manufacturers standard, metal construction, with a base not less than 100 mm
square. Construct pedestals with steel or aluminum head, carried by leveling nut on
threaded steel or aluminum column, with provision to prevent vibration displacement of
the leveling nut.
C.
1.
Provide vertical adjustment by threaded rod with positive locking elevating nut to
control the height of pedestal head. Machine moving surface in the elevating
mechanism, such as threads, collars sockets and shaft, to interference fit.
2.
Provide leveling adjustment by means of an eccentric thimble and collar which

can be rotated in a corresponding socket in the base casting for variable
adjustment of from 0 degrees to 4 degrees from the horizontal which full base
contact with sub-floor surface.
3.
Galvanize or paint steel components to prevent corrosion damage.
4.
Include anti-vibration pads for all pedestals.
Floor Panels: 600 mm x 600 mm nominal size, interchangeable panels, easily placed and
removed by a portable lifting device. Panels shall be all steel encapsulated with a solid
thermal and insulating core designed for the above referenced loading criteria. The
panels shall have triple rolled reinforced side edges for added strength and durability.
The steel top panel shall have down-turned edges rolled and overlapping the bottom
panel by 12mm, and shall be turned in a 45 angle to prevent de-lamination.
1.
Welded Steel:
a.
b.
c.
Top Panel: Full, hard cold rolled steel die cut.

Bottom Panel: Hot rolled steel die formed
Finish: Top and bottom of panel, after welding shall be spray cleaned,
phosphate applied and dip coated with baked enamel.
Page | 3 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
d.
e.
D.
Stringers: Access floor system shall include stringers formed from 30 x 15mm galvanized
box sections to interconnect pedestals and perimeter edges. For RFI shielding, stringers
shall be bonded electrically and mechanically to every pedestal head and side support.
Room equipment shall be further earthed to the stringers.
E.
Floor Covering: Finish tops of floor panels with type of floor covering materials specified
below. See finish Schedule for location of covering. Provide materials as selected by the
consultant from standard colors and pattern.
F.
1.
Melamine Laminate, Factory applied 3.2 mm thick, 600 x 600mm, unless

otherwise shown. Lay flush to each panel edge and bond to bearing surface.
Provide vinyl edge trim around panel perimeter.
2.
Carpet: Where carpet or carpet tile finish is shown in the schedule, provide the
floor panels without a surface floor finish. The carpet finish will be site applied.
Resilient Base of Walls:

1.
Provide vinyl wall base complying with FS SS-W-40, Type II, with matching end
stops and preformed or molded corner units as follow:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
Panel to be painted completely exterior and interior.

Panels will be fabricated from completely non-combustible materials
Size: 100 mm high, unless otherwise shown.

Thickness: 3.2 mm unless otherwise shown.
Color: As selected by Consultant.
Style: Straight base without cove for carpeted panels.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Cutouts:
Provide factory made cutouts in floor panels for electrical openings and
air grilles. Verify locations, number and sizes of cutouts. Provide additional support
where required if cutouts lessen panel effective strength. Include edge trim and sealing to
all factory cutouts.
B.
Grilles and Dampers: Provide manufacturers standard loading bearing vent grilles and
dampers in floor panels at location shown isolated grilles dampers from metal to
metal contact. Reinforce floor panel units if required to satisfy performance requirements.
Install units to project not more than 3 mm above the floor finish.
C.
Junction Box Markers: Provide one stainless steel screw type marker per bay located in
center of bay over junction box location.
D.
Vertical Closures: Wherever total floor system items do not meet building walls or
columns, provide a 2-mm thick aluminum side closure Plates (fascia), unless otherwise
shown. Accurately scribe and fit to sub-floor. Set mastic and seal if required for Plenum
effect.
Page | 4 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2. 3
E.
Panel Lifting Devices: Provide twenty double, suction type, panel lifting device for hardsurfaced panel installation and ten special panel-lifting devices for floor panels covered
with carpeting materials.
F.
To the extent practical, special panels to fit edges and other field conditions shall be shop
fabricated and sealed to perform as well as any standard size panel. Where field fitting or
cutting cannot be avoided, provide suitable factory edging profiles and materials to seal
any cut surfaces.
WATER PROOFING
A.
Welded Steel panels shall contain no wood, fiber or other materials subject to water
absorption, penetration, etc.
B.
Edging shall be solid vinyl or an equivalent chemical resistant material.
C.
Edging must be installed such that it seals the floor panels monolithically watertight
throughout all of the exposed finished floor surfaces and shall be removable type
allowing access to under-floor area and flush to surface finish of floor panels.
D.
An identical chemically resistant and waterproof materials will be used to seal the surface
of the system to adjoining walls, partitions, columns and any other structures attached,
abutting or passing through a floor panel and thereby affecting its waterproof integrity.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Installer must examine the area and condition under which access flooring is to be
installed. Notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install floor system under supervision of the manufacturers authorized representative,

rigid, firm, and free of vibration, rocking rattles, squeaks, and other objectionable
features.
B.
Layout floor panel installation to keep the number of cut panels at the floor perimeter to a
minimum. Scribe panel assemblies at perimeter to provide a close fit with no voids
greater than 3 mm where panel abut vertical surfaces. Provide compressible filler
between panel edge on vertical surface when vertical surface is above nominal finish
floor level.
Page | 5 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
C.
Locate each pedestal and complete any necessary sub-floor preparation, and vacuum
clean the sub-floor of all dust, dirt and construction debris before starting installation. Set
pedestals in adhesive as recommended by the floor manufacturer to provide full bearing
pedestal base in the sub-floor. Perform minor sub-floor grinding or filling to provide
satisfactory bearing as part of this work.
D.
Thoroughly vacuum clean the sub-floor area as installation of floor panels proceeds.
Extend cleaning under installed panels as far as possible.
E.
Cutting and trimming or other dirt-or debris producing operations will not be permitted in
the room where the floor is being installed.
F.
Level installed access floor to within 3mm of true level over the entire area and within
2mm of any 3- M distance.
G.
Provide positive electrical grounding of the entire access flooring system.
H.
Edge cut panels with manufacturers standard trim member wherever necessary to fit
panels to perimeter or obstructions.
I.
After completion of installation, vacuum clean the entire floor system and cover with
continuous sheets of reinforced paper or plastic. Maintain and repair damage to
protective covering until directed to be removed by the consultant.
J.
Replace access floor panels which are chipped, broken, stained, scratched, or do not
conform to specified requirements.
K.
Just prior to final inspection, clean the entire floor system and apply wax or other
protective coatings as recommended by the floor covering manufacturer.
Page | 6 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS

SPLINE MOUNTING ACCESSORIES
MATERIAL SELECTION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
INSPECTION
INSTALLATION
3.3.1 CLEANING
3.3.2 PROTECTION
Section 09841 Acoustical Wall Panels
09841-2/3
09841-2/3
09841-2/3
09841-2/3
09841-2/3
09841-2/3
09841-2/3
09841-2/3
09841-2/3
09841-3/3
09841-3/3
09841-3/3
09841-3/3
Page | 1 of 3
WBRJ-12-C-0001
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION:
1.1.1.
1.2
The Work under this Section shall consist of furnishing and installation of acoustical wall
panels as indicated on Drawings and specified herein.
REFERENCES:
ASTM C 423-90a:
ASTM E 84-96:
ASTM E 548-93:
ASTM E 795-93:
Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption

Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method
Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
Guide for General Criteria Used for Evaluating Laboratory
Competence
Practices for Mounting Test Specimens during Sound Absorption
Tests
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1.
ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS:

Provide spline-mounted acoustical wall panels with manufacturer's standard panel construction
consisting of fabric facing material, type as approved by Contracting Officer, laminated to core of
rigid glass fiber board with a nominal density of 96-128 kg/m3; with long edges kerfed and rebated
to receive splines. Nominal overall panel thickness shall be 19 mm with NCR of 0.80 determined
by testing per ASTM C 423. Panels shall be UL listed and shall be of sizes shown on Drawings or
approved by Contracting Officer.
2.2.
SPLINE MOUNTING ACCESSORIES:

Shall be manufacturer's standard concealed stainless steel or extruded aluminum designed and
fabricated for screw attachment to walls.
2.3.
Refer to I.D. Drawings and Specifications for material selection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1.
INSPECTION:
3.1.1.
Examine the substrate, adjoining construction, and the conditions under which the
work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
Page | 2 of 3
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.2.
3.3.
INSTALLATION:
3.2.1.
Install acoustic wall panels in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges
plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other panels. Comply with panel
manufacturer's printed instructions of installation of panels using type of mounted
accessories indicated.
3.2.2.
Remove and replace panels that are damaged and are unacceptable to the
CLEANING AND PROTECTION:

3.3.1.
Cleaning: Upon completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of dust, dirt

stains and other foreign material as per panel manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3.2.
Protection: Protect work during construction and up to handover of project to the

satisfaction of the Contracting Officer.
Page | 3 of 3
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09900 PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
PACKAGING, LABELING AND STORING
1.4
1.5
SAFETY AND HEALTH
09900-2/18
09900-4/18
09900-4/18
09900-5/18
09900-5/18
09900-6/18
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PAINT
2.2
PAVEMENT MARKING
2.3
PAINT FOR SIGNAGE
09900-6/18
09900-6/18
09900-7/18
09900-7/18
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PROTECTION OF AREAS NOT TO BE PAINTED
3.2
SURFACE PREPARATION
3.3
MIXING AND THINNING
3.4
APPLICATION
3.5
PIPE COLOR CODE MARKING
3.6
MISCELLANEOUS PAINTING
3.7
SURFACES TO BE PAINTED
3.8
SURFACES NOT TO PAINTED
3.9
CLEANING
3.10
PAINTING SCHEDULES
09900-7/18
09900-8/18
09900-8/18
09900-9/18
09900-11/18
09900-13/18
09900-13/18
09900-14/18
09900-14/18
09900-14/18
09900-15/18
Section 09900 Painting
Page | 1 of 18
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING, GENERAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES:
SASO 470/1986 Paint and varnishes.
SASO 471/1986 Ready mixed oil-based paints for use on concrete and masonry.
SASO 472/1986 Paints and varnishes Gloss enamel (For interior and exterior surfaces)
SASO 473/1986 Paints and varnishes.
SASO 474/1986 Paints and varnishes Examination and preparation of samples for testing.
SASO 475/1994 Paints and varnishes Determination of the effect of heat.
SASO 477/1986 Paints and varnishes Scratch test.
SASO 478/1986 Paints and varnishes Determination of resistance to water Water immersion
method.
SASO 1188/1997 Methods of test for paints and varnishes: Determination of hard drying time.
SASO 861/1994 Methods of test for paints and varnishes: Preparation of test panels before
coating.
SASO 817/1994 Priming paints.
SASO 818/1994 Alkyd based undercoating paints for general purposes.
SASO 820/1994 Aluminum paints for general purposes.
AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH)

ACGIH-02
(1991) 1991-1992 Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances and

Physical Agents and Biological Exposure Indices
ASTM D 3273
ASTM D 3274
ASTM D 4214
1986; R 1991) Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior

Coating in an Environmental Chamber
1982; R 1988) Evaluating Degree of Surface Disfigurement of Paint
Films by Microbial Fungal or Algal) Growth or Soil and Dirt
Accumulation
1989) Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films
COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS

CID A-A-1500
CID)
(Rev A) Sealer, Surface Latex Block Filler)
Page | 2 of 18
WBRJ-12-C-0001

FS TT-C-535
FS TT-C-555
FS TT-E-489
FS TT-E-496
FS TT-E-508
FS TT-E-509
FS TT-E-545
FS TT-F-1098
FS TT-P-19
FS TT-P-28
FS TT-P-29
FS TT-P-91
FS TT-P-102
FS TT-P-645
FS TT-P-650
FS TT-P-1510
FS TT-P-002119
FS TT-S-711
FS TT-V-51
FS TT-V-86
FS TT-V-121
Rev B; Am 2) Coating, Epoxy, Two Component, for Interior Use on

Metal, Wood, Wallboard, Painted Surfaces Concrete and Masonry
(Rev B; Am 1) Coating, Textured for Interior and Exterior Masonry
Surfaces
(Rev H) Enamel, Alkyd, Gloss, Low VOC Content
(Rev B; Am 3) Enamel: Heat-Resisting 400 degrees F.), Black
(Rev C; Am 1) Enamel, Interior Semigloss, Tints and White
(Rev C) Enamel, Odorless, Alkyd, Interior, Semigloss, White and Tints
(Rev C) Primer Enamel-Undercoat, Alkyd, Odorless, Interior, Flat, Tints
and White
(Rev D) Filler, Block, Solvent-Thinned, for Porous Surfaces Concrete
Block, Cinder Block, Stucco, Etc.
(Rev D; Am 1) Paint, Latex Acrylic Emulsion, Exterior Wood and
Masonry
(Rev G) Paint, Aluminum, Heat Resisting 1200 Degrees F.
(Rev K) Paint, Latex
(Rev D; Am 2) Paint, Rubber-Base, for Interior Use Concrete and
Masonry Floors
(Rev F) Paint, Oil, Alkyd Modified, Exterior, Low VOC
(Rev B) Primer, Paint, Zinc-Molybdate, Alkyd Type
(Rev D) Primer Coating, Latex Base, Interior, White for Gypsum
Wallboard, or Plaster
(Rev A; Am 1) Paint, Latex, Exterior, for Wood Surfaces, White and
Tints
(Basic) Paint, Latex Base, High Traffic Area, Flat and Eggshell Finish
Low Lustre), (For Interior Use
Rev C) Stain; Oil Type, Wood, Interior
(Rev F) Varnish: Asphalt
(Rev C; Am 1) Varnish, Oil, Rubbing for Metal and Wood Furniture
(Rev H) Varnish, Spar, Water-Resisting

FED-STD 313
(Rev C) Material Safety Data, Transportation Data and Disposal Data for
Hazardous Materials Furnished to Government Activities
MILITARY SPECIFICATIONS (MS)

MS MIL-C-83286
MS MIL-P-24441/GEN
MS MIL-P-26915
MS MIL-P-28582
MS MIL-S-12935
(Rev B; Am 2, Notice 1) Coating, Urethane, Aliphatic Isocyanate, for

Aerospace Applications
(Rev B; Am 1, Supple 1) Paint, Epoxy-Polyamide
(Rev C) Primer Coating, Zinc Dust Pigmented, for Steel Surfaces
(Basic; Notice 1) Primer Coating, Exterior, Lead Pigment-Free
Undercoat for Wood, Ready-Mixed, White and Tints)
(Rev D) Sealer, Surface; for Knots
Page | 3 of 18
WBRJ-12-C-0001
STEEL STRUCTURES PAINTING COUNCIL

SSPC Paint 5
SSPC Paint 21
SSPC Paint 25
SSPC SP 1
SSPC SP 2
SSPC SP 3
SSPC SP 6
SSPC SP 7
SSPC SP 10
(SSPC)
(1991) Zinc Dust, Zinc Oxide and Phenolic Varnish Paint

(1991) White or Colored Silicone Alkyd Paint
(1991) Red Iron Oxide, Zinc Oxide, Raw Linseed Oil and Alkyd Primer
without Lead and Chromate Pigments)
(1982) Solvent Cleaning
(1989) Hand Tool Cleaning
(1989) Power Tool Cleaning
(1991) Commercial Blast Cleaning
(1991) Brush-Off Blast Cleaning
(1991) Near-White Blast Cleaning
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "GA" designation; submittals having an
"FIO" designation are for information only. The following shall be submitted in accordance with
Section 01300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Data:
Paint; GA.
The names, quantity represented, and intended use for the proprietary brands of materials proposed
to be substituted for the specified materials when the required quantity of a particular batch is 200 l.
or less.
SD-06 Instructions:
Mixing and Thinning; GA. Application; GA.
Manufacturer's current printed product description, material safety data sheets (MSDS) and
technical data sheets for each coating system. MSDS submittals shall meet the requirements of
FED-STD 313. Detailed mixing, thinning and application instructions, minimum and maximum
application temperature, and curing and drying times between coats for epoxy, moisture-curing
polyurethane, and liquid glaze coatings. Detailed application instructions for textured coatings shall
be provided.
SD-13 Certificates:
Lead; GA
Mildewcide and Insecticide; GA.
Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content; GA.
Certificate stating that paints for interior use contain no mercurial mildewcide or insecticide.
Certificate stating that paints proposed for use contain not more than 0.06 percent lead.
Page | 4 of 18
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SD-14 Samples:
Moisture-curing Polyurethane; GA.
A complete moisture-curing polyurethane system applied to a panel of the same material as that
on which the coating will be applied in the work and for each color specified. The sample panels
will be used for quality control in applying the system.
Paint;GA.
While the material is at the site or source of supply, and at a time agreeable to the Contractor and
the Contracting Officer, a 1 liter sample of each color and batch, except for quantities of 200
liters or less, shall be taken by random selection from the sealed containers by the Contractor in
the presence of a representative of the Contracting Officer. The contents of the containers to be
sampled shall be thoroughly mixed to ensure that the sample is representative. Samples shall be
identified by designated name, specification number, manufacturer name and address, batch
number, project contract number, intended use, and quantity involved.
1.3 PACKAGING, LABELING, AND STORING
Paints shall be in sealed containers that legibly show the designated name, formula or specification
number, batch number, color, quantity, date of manufacture, manufacturer's formulation number,
manufacturer's directions including any warnings and special precautions, and name of
manufacturer. Pigmented paints shall be furnished in containers not larger than 20 liters. Paints and
thinner shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's written directions and as a minimum
stored off the ground, under cover, with sufficient ventilation to prevent the buildup of flammable
vapors and at temperatures between 4 and 35 degrees C. Paints shall be stored on the project site
or segregated at the source of supply sufficiently in advance of need to allow 30 days for testing.
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Unless otherwise recommended by the paint manufacturer, the ambient temperature shall be
between 7 and 35 degrees C when applying coatings other than water-thinned, epoxy, and
moisture-curing polyurethane coatings. Water-thinned coatings shall be applied only when
ambient temperature is between 10 and 32 degrees C. Epoxy, and moisture-curing polyurethane
coatings shall be applied only within the minimum and maximum temperatures recommended by
the coating manufacturer. Moisture-curing polyurethane shall not be applied when the relative
humidity is below 30 percent.
Page | 5 of 18
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.5 SAFETY AND HEALTH

Work shall comply with applicable Saudi Arabia local laws and regulations, and with the
ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN, including the Activity Hazard Analysis as specified in the
CONTRACT CLAUSES. The Activity Hazard Analysis shall include analyses of the potential
impact of painting operations on painting personnel and on others involved in and adjacent to the
work zone.
1.5.1 Worker Exposures:
Exposure of workers to chemical substances shall not exceed limits as established by ACGIH-02,
or as required by a more stringent applicable regulation.
1.5.2 Toxic Compounds:
Toxic compounds having ineffective physiological properties, such as odor or irritation levels, shall
not be used unless approved by the Contracting Officer.
1.5.3 Training:
Workers having access to an affected work area shall be informed of the contents of the applicable
material data safety sheets (MSDS) and shall be informed of potential health and safety hazard and
protective controls associated with materials used on the project. An affected work area is
temperature is between 10 and 32 degrees C. Epoxy, and moisture-curing polyurethane coatings
shall be applied only within the minimum and maximum temperatures recommended by the coating
manufacturer. Moisture-curing polyurethane shall not be applied when the relative humidity is
below 30 percent.
1.5.4 Coordination:
Work shall be coordinated to minimize exposure of building occupants, other Contractor personnel,
and visitors to mists and odors from preparation, painting and clean-up operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PAINT
The term "paint" as used herein includes emulsions, enamels, paints, stains, varnishes, sealers,
cement-emulsion filler, and other coatings, whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coat.
Paint shall conform to the respective specifications listed for use in the painting schedules at the
end of this section, except when the required amount of a material of a particular batch is 200
liters or less, an approved first-line proprietary paint material with similar intended usage and color
to that specified may be used. Additional requirements are as follows:
Page | 6 of 18
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.1.1 Colors and Tints:

Colors shall be as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, as indicated. Manufacturer's
standard color is for identification of color only. Tinting of epoxy, and urethane, paints shall be
done by the manufacturer. Stains shall conform in shade to manufacturers standard color. The
color of the undercoats shall vary slightly from the color of the next coat.
2.1.2 Fungicide and Insecticide:
Paint specified for all coats applied to fabrics and vapor barrier jackets over insulation and surfaces
in high humidity area shall contain a fungicide that will not adversely affect the color, texture, or
durability of the coating. The fungicide shall be incorporated into the paint by the manufacturer
and shall attain a surface disfigurement rating of 8 or greater when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 3273 and evaluated in accordance with ASTM D 3274. Mercurial fungicide shall not be
used in interior paint. Insecticides shall not be used in paint.
2.1.3 Lead:
Paints containing lead in excess of 0.06 percent by weight of the total nonvolatile content
(calculated as lead metal) shall not be used.
2.1.4 Chromium:
Paints containing zinc chromate or strontium chromate pigments shall not be used.
2.2 PAVEMENT MARKING: Refer to Section 02580 PAVEMENT MARKING.
2.3 PAINT FOR SIGNAGE:
2.3.1 Exterior Signage: Sign face shall be 3 mm thick aluminum plate, reflective background and 3M
high intensity graphic cut out reflective vinyl film, Engineering grade at front side and gray
powder-coated finish at backside of sign. Post shall be 76 mm diameter, galvanized steel without
painting.
2.3.2 Interior Signage: Extruded aluminum frame with powder coated finish; panel shall be fabricated
from metal reinforced fiberglass with polyurethane finish. Typefaces shall be vinyl self-adhesive
film. Refer to I.D Specifications for materials and details of room signage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION OF AREAS NOT TO BE PAINTED
Items not to be painted which are in contact with or adjacent to painted surfaces shall be removed
or protected prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Items removed prior to painting
shall be replaced when painting is completed. Following completion of painting, workmen skilled
in the trades involved shall reinstall removed items. Surfaces contaminated by coating materials
shall be restored to original condition.
Page | 7 of 18
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and free of foreign matter before application of paint or
surface treatments. Oil and grease shall be removed with clean cloths and cleaning solvents prior
to mechanical cleaning. Cleaning solvents shall be of low toxicity with a flash-point in excess of
38 degrees C. Cleaning shall be programmed so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on
wet, newly painted surfaces. Exposed ferrous metals such as nail heads on or in contact with
surfaces to be painted with water-thinned paints, shall be spot-primed with a suitable
corrosion-inhibitive primer capable of preventing flash rusting and compatible with the coating
specified for the adjacent areas.
3.2.1 Concrete, Stucco and Masonry Surfaces:
Concrete, stucco and masonry surfaces shall be allowed to dry at least 30 days before painting,
except concrete slab on grade which shall be allowed to cure 90 days before painting. Glaze,
efflorescence, laitance, dirt, grease, oil, asphalt, surface deposits of free iron and other foreign
matter shall be removed prior to painting. Surfaces to receive polyurethane, chlorinated rubber or
epoxy coatings shall be acid-etched or mechanically abraded as specified by the coating
manufacturer, rinsed with water, allowed to dry, and treated with the manufacturer's recommended
conditioner prior to application of the first coat.
3.2.2 Ferrous Surfaces:
Ferrous surfaces including those that have been shop-coated, shall be solvent-cleaned. Surfaces
that contain loose rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances shall be cleaned mechanically
with hand tools according to SSPC SP 2, power tools according to SSPC SP 3 or by sandblasting
according to SSPC SP 7. Shop-coated ferrous surfaces shall be protected from corrosion by
treating and touching up corroded areas immediately upon detection.
3.2.3 Nonferrous Metallic Surfaces:
Galvanized, aluminum and aluminum-alloy, lead, copper, and other nonferrous
shall be solvent-cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP 1.
metal surfaces
3.2.4 Gypsum Board Surfaces:

Gypsum board surfaces shall be dry and shall have all loose dirt and dust removed by brushing with
a soft brush, rubbing with a cloth, or vacuum-cleaning prior to application of the first-coat
material. A damp cloth or sponge may be used if paint will be water-based.
3.2.5 Mastic-Type Surfaces:
Mastic-type surfaces shall be prepared by removing foreign material.
3.2.6 Plaster Surfaces:
Page | 8 of 18
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Plaster shall age at least 30 days before painting. Plaster shall be clean and free from loose matter
and shall have an instrument-measured moisture content not exceeding 8 percent.
3.2.7 Wood Surfaces:
Wood surfaces shall be cleaned of foreign matter. Wood surfaces adjacent to surfaces to receive
water-thinned paints shall be primed and/or touched up before applying water-thinned paints.
Small, dry seasoned knots shall be scraped, cleaned, and given a thin coat of knot sealer, MS
MIL-S-12935, before application of the priming coat. Pitch on large, open, unseasoned knots and
all other beads or streaks of pitch shall be scraped off, or, if it is still soft, removed with mineral
spirits or turpentine, and the resinous area shall be thinly coated with knot sealer. Finishing nails
shall be set, and all holes and surface imperfections shall be primed. After priming, holes and
imperfections in finish surfaces shall be filled with putty or plastic wood filler, colored to match the
finish coat if natural finish is required, allowed to dry, and sanded smooth. Putty or wood filler
shall be compatible with subsequent coatings. Interior wood surfaces to receive stain shall be
sanded. Oak and other open-grain wood to receive stain shall be given a coat of wood filler not
less than 8 hours before the application of stain; excess filler shall be removed and the surface
sanded smooth. Floors of oak or similar open-grain wood shall be filled with wood filler
recommended by the finish manufacturer and the excess filler removed. Moisture content of the
wood shall not exceed 12 percent as measured by a moisture meter, unless otherwise authorized.
3.2.8 Previously Painted Surfaces:
Previously painted surfaces damaged during construction shall be thoroughly cleaned of all
grease, dirt, dust or other foreign matter. Blistering, cracking, flaking and peeling or other
deteriorated coatings shall be removed. Slick surfaces shall be roughened. Damaged areas such
as, but not limited to, nail holes, cracks, chips, and spalls shall be repaired with suitable material
to match adjacent undamaged areas. Edges of chipped paint shall be feather edged and sanded
smooth. Rusty metal surfaces shall be cleaned as per SSPC requirements. Solvent, mechanical, or
chemical cleaning methods shall be used to provide surfaces suitable for painting. Chalk shall be
removed so that when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4214, the chalk resistance rating is no
less than 8. New, proposed coatings shall be compatible with existing coatings. If existing
surfaces are glossy, the gloss shall be reduced.
3.3 MIXING AND THINNING
When thinning is approved as necessary to suit surface, temperature, weather conditions, or
application methods, paints may be thinned in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. When
thinning is allowed, paints shall be thinned immediately prior to application with not more than 0.5
L of suitable thinner per liter. The use of thinner shall not relieve the Contractor from obtaining
complete hiding, full film thickness, or required gloss. Thinning shall not cause the paint to
exceed local limits on volatile organic compounds. Paints of different manufacturers shall not be
mixed.
Page | 9 of 18
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.3.1 Cement-Emulsion Filler Coat:

Cement and aggregate shall be dry-mixed so that uniform distribution and intermixing are
obtained. Mixing liquid and one-half of the total amount of water shall be premixed and added
gradually to the white portland cement and aggregate with constant stirring until a thick, smooth
material is
obtained. Emulsion paint shall then be added to the mixture and stirred until
uniformity is obtained. The blend shall have a thick, creamy consistency. The remainder of the
water shall be added if necessary to obtain a material with adequate application properties.
Blending resin emulsion or emulsion paint with any other component shall be done with caution;
too rapid an agitation will cause air entrapment and foaming.
3.3.2 Two-Component Systems:
Two-component systems shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Any
thinning of the first coat to ensure proper penetration and sealing shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer for each type of substrate.
3.4 APPLICATION
Painting practices shall comply with applicable state and local laws enacted to insure compliance
with Federal Clean Air Standards. Unless otherwise specified or recommended by the paint
manufacturer, paint may be applied by brush, roller, or spray. At the time of application, paint
shall show no signs of deterioration. Uniform suspension of pigments shall be maintained during
application. Each coat of paint shall be applied so dry film shall be of uniform thickness and free
from runs, drops, ridges, waves, pinholes or other voids, laps, brush marks, and variations in color,
texture, and finish. Hiding shall be complete. Rollers for applying paints and enamels shall be of
a type designed for the coating to be applied and the surface to be coated. Special attention shall
be given to insure that all edges, corners, crevices, welds, and rivets receive a film thickness
equal to that of adjacent painted surfaces. Paints, except water-thinned types, shall be applied only
to surfaces that are completely free of moisture as determined by sight or touch.
3.4.1 Ventilation:
Affected areas shall be ventilated during paint application so that workers exposure to chemical
substances shall not exceed limits as established by ACGIH-02, or as required by a more stringent
applicable regulation. Interior work zones having a volume of 280 cubic meters or less shall be
ventilated at a minimum of 2 air exchanges per hour. Ventilation in larger work zones shall be
maintained by means of mechanical exhaust. Solvent vapors shall be exhausted outdoors, away
from air intakes and workers. Return air inlets in the work zone shall be temporarily sealed
before start of work until the coatings have dried.
3.4.2 Respirators:
Operators and personnel in the vicinity of operating paint sprayers shall wear respirators.
Page | 10 of 18
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.4.3 First Coat:

The first coat on plaster, gypsum wallboard, and other surfaces shall include repeated touching up
of suction spots or overall application of primer or sealer to produce uniform color and gloss.
Excess sealer shall be wiped off after each application. The first coat on both faces of wood doors
shall be applied at essentially the same time. Glazed doors and sashes shall be given the specified
coating system within 3 weeks of the time they are glazed, but not before the glazing material has
set; paint shall overlay glass about 1.78mm all around. Each varnish coat shall be sanded lightly
prior to application of subsequent coats.
3.4.4 Timing:
Surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, and otherwise prepared for painting shall be given a
coat of the specified first coat as soon as practical after such pretreatment has been completed, but
prior to any deterioration of the prepared surface. Sufficient time shall elapse between successive
coats to permit proper drying. This period shall be modified as necessary to suit weather
conditions. Oil-based or oleoresins solvent-type paints shall be considered dry for recoating when
the paint feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate pressure of the thumb, and the
application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
Manufacturers instructions for application, curing and drying time between coats of
two-component systems shall be followed.
3.4.5 Stains:
On smooth exterior wood surfaces such as the planed face of bevel siding, the stain shall be applied
at a spreading rate of 9.8 to 12.3 square meters per liter. On rough surfaces such as an unplaned
or scarred face of bevel siding, the stain shall be spread at the rate of 4.9 to 6.1 square meters per
liter or as recommended by the manufacturer. Oil-type uniform color and gloss. Excess sealer
shall be wiped off after each application. The first coat on both faces of wood doors shall be
applied at essentially the same time. Glazed doors and sashes shall be given the specified coating
system within 3 weeks of the time they are glazed, but not before the glazing material has set;
paint shall overlay glass about 1.78mm all around. Each varnish coat shall be sanded lightly prior
to application of subsequent coats.
3.4.6 Fillers:
Concrete and masonry surface voids shall be filled; however, surface irregularities need not be
completely filled. The dried filler shall be uniform and free of pinholes. Filler shall not be
applied over caulking compound.
Page | 11 of 18
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.4.6.1 Cement-Emulsion Filler:

Immediately before filler application, surfaces shall be dampened uniformly and thoroughly, with
no free surface water visible, by several applications of potable water with a fog spray, allowing
time between the sprayings for water to be absorbed. Cement-emulsion filler shall be scrubbed into
the surface vigorously with a stiff-bristled brush having tampico or palmyra bristles not longer than
63 mm. At least 24 hours shall elapse before applying exterior emulsion paint over
cement-emulsion filler. When the ambient temperature is over 29 degrees C, cement-emulsion
filler surfaces shall be dampened lightly with a fog spray of potable water immediately prior to
application of the subsequent paint coat.
3.4.6.2 Solvent-Thinned Filler:
Solvent-thinned filler, FS TT-F-1098, shall be applied to dry surfaces only and may be applied by
brush or roller. Filler shall be allowed to set for 3 to 5 minutes or until the filler becomes tacky,
and the excess material shall then be removed with a rubber squeegee. Surface voids shall be
filled; however, surface irregularities need not be completely filled. Surfaces to which
solvent-thinned filler has been applied shall be given the specified topcoat as soon as practical but
before the filler material starts to discolor or chalk.
3.4.6.3 Latex Filler:
Latex filler, CID A-A-1500, shall be applied according to the manufacturer's instructions. Surface
voids shall be filled and the filler allowed to dry the length of time specified by the manufacturer
prior to applying successive coats of paint.
3.4.7 Textured Coating:
Application of textured coating, FS TT-C-555, shall be as specified in the manufacturer's printed
directions at a rate of 1.1 to 1.3 square meters per liter in one coat.
3.4.8 Ferrous-Metal Primer:
Primer for ferrous-metal shall be applied to ferrous surfaces to receive paint other than asphalt
varnish prior to deterioration of the prepared surface. The semitransparent film applied to some
pipes and tubing at the mill is not to be considered a shop coat, but shall be over-coated with the
specified ferrous-metal primer prior to application of finish coats.
Page | 12 of 18
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.5 PIPE COLOR CODE MARKING

Pipes in exposed areas and in accessible pipe spaces shall be provided with color band and titles
adjacent to all valves, except those provided at plumbing fixtures, at not more than 12 meter
spacing on straight pipe runs, adjacent to change in direction, and on both sides where pipes pass
through walls or floors. Color code marking shall be of the color in TABLE I and the size listed in
TABLE II. The arrows shall be installed adjacent to each band to indicate the direction of flow
in the pipe. The legends shall be printed in upper-case black letters as listed in TABLE I. Letter
sizes shall be as listed in TABLE II. Marking shall be painted or applied using colored,
pressure-sensitive adhesive markers of standard manufacture. Paint shall be as specified for
insulated and un-insulated piping.
TABLE I. COLOR CODES FOR MARKING PIPE
Material
Band
Arrow
Legend
Cold water (potable)

Fire protection water
Hot water (domestic)
Hot water recirculating (domestic)
Chilled water supply
Chilled water return
Treated water
Compressed air
Freon
Fuel oil
Green
Red
Green
Green
Green
Green
Yellow
Yellow
Blue
Yellow
White
White
White
White
White
White
Black
Black
White
Black
POTABLE WATER
FIRE PR WATER
H.W.
H.W.R.
C.H.W.S.
C.H.W.R.
TR. WATER
COMP. AIR
FREON
FUEL OIL
TABLE II. COLOR CODE MARKING SIZES

Outside Diameter
of Pipe Covering
(mm)
Width of
Color Band
(mm)
Arrow
Length x Width
(mm)
Size of Legend
Letters and Numerals
(mm)
Less than 38
38 to 60
60 to 150
200 to 225
Over 250
200
200
300
600
800
200 x 57
200 x 57
200 x 57
300 x 110
300 x 115
13
19
31
63
88
3.6
MISCELLANEOUS PAINTING
3.6.1 Lettering
Lettering shall be provided as scheduled on the drawings and finished with a protective coating of
spar varnish. Samples shall be approved before application.
Page | 13 of 18
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.7 SURFACES TO BE PAINTED

Surfaces listed in the painting schedules at the end of this section, other than those listed in
paragraph SURFACES NOT TO BE PAINTED, shall be painted as scheduled.
Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to
be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a
surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not
schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select
from standard colors and finishes available.
3.8 SURFACES NOT TO BE PAINTED
Surfaces in the following areas are not to be painted:
Prefinished items.
Finished metal surfaces.
Operating parts.
Labels and other code-required labels.
Equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
Walls and ceilings in crawl spaces.
Elevator shafts.
Unexposed interior ferrous surfaces.
Jacketing over insulation pipes in unexposed locations that do not require color coding.
In addition surfaces of hardware, fittings, and other factory finished items shall not be painted.
3.9 CLEANING
Cloths, cotton waste and other debris that might constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in closed
metal containers and removed at the end of each day. Upon completion of the work, staging,
scaffolding, and containers shall be removed from the site or destroyed in an approved manner.
Paint and other deposits on adjacent surfaces shall be removed and the entire job left clean and
acceptable.
3.10 PAINTING SCHEDULES
The following painting schedules identify the surfaces to be painted and prescribe the paint to be
used and the number of coats of paint to be applied. Contractor options are indicated by - or between optional systems or coats.
Page | 14 of 18
WBRJ-12-C-0001
EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

Surface
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
_______________________________________________________________________________
Concrete, unless
FS TT-P-19
FS TT-P-19
None
otherwise specified.
_______________________________________________________________________________
Stucco
primer as
FS TT-C-555,
None
recommended by
Type II
FS TT-C-555
manufacturer
_______________________________________________________________________________
Wood, unless
MS MIL-P-28582
FS TT-P-19
FS TT-P-19
otherwise specified
----------------or-----------------FS TT-P-1510
FS TT-P-1510
_______________________________________________________________________________
Ferrous metal unless
FS TT-P-645
SSPC Paint 21
SSPC Paint 21
otherwise specified
Type I
Type I
_______________________________________________________________________________
Ferrous metal
MS MIL-P-24441/
MS MIL-P-24441/
MS MIL-C-83286
subject to severe
Gen, Formula 159
Gen, Formula 150
atmospheric
Note: near white blast cleaning, SSPC SP 10. Is required.
_______________________________________________________________________________
Galvanized.
SSPC Paint 5
FS TT-P-102
FS TT-P-102
----------------or-----------------MS MIL-P-26915
_______________________________________________________________________________
Aluminum
FS TT-P-645
FS TT-E-489
FS TT-E-489
aluminum-alloy,
and other nonferrous metal
(non-galvanized)
----------------or-----------------SSPC Paint 21,
SSPC Paint 21
Type I
Type I
_______________________________________________________________________________
Page | 15 of 18
WBRJ-12-C-0001
INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

Surface
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
_______________________________________________________________________________
Concrete masonry
FS TT-P-002119
FS TT-P-002119
None
units, plaster,
gypsum board, and
concrete, unless
_______________________________________________________________________________
Concrete ceilings:
Primer as by
FS TT-C-555,
FS TT-P-29 :
recommended
Type I.
manufacturer
_______________________________________________________________________________
Concrete floors:
FS TT-P-91
FS TT-P-91
None
Type I or II
Type I or II.
_______________________________________________________________________________
Plaster and gypsum
FS TT-C-535
FS TT-C-535
None
board: in shower
Type II
Type II,
areas unless otherwise
specified
Concrete masonry
Concrete masonry
units, plaster, and
units
gypsum board for
CID A-A-1500
walls in heavy traffic
Seal gypsum board
areas and areas
and plaster with
requiring high degree
FS TT-P-29
of sanitation
----------------or-----------------FS TT-P-650
FS TT-P-002119
FS TT-P-002119
______________________________________________________________________________
Hardboard
FS TT-E-545
----------------or------------------
FS TT-E-508
None
FS TT-E-509
FS TT-E-509
______________________________________________________________________________
Ferrous metal
SSPC Paint 25
FS TT-E-545
FS TT-E-508
unless otherwise
specified
----------------or-----------------FS -TT-P-645
FS TT-E-509
Page | 16 of 18
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Surface
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
______________________________________________________________________________
Ferrous metal
FS TT-V-51
None
None
in concealed damp
spaces or in exposed
areas having
unpainted adjacent
surfaces
______________________________________________________________________________
Ferrous metal
FS TT-E-489,
FS TT-E-489,
None
factory-primed
mechanical and
electrical equipment
----------------or-----------------SSPC Paint 21
SSPC Paint 21
None
Type I
Type I
______________________________________________________________________________
Galvanized:
SSPC Paint 5
Two coats of paint
unless otherwise
to match adjacent
specified.
areas
______________________________________________________________________________
Wood:
FS TT-P-002119
FS TT-P-002119
None
Unless otherwise
specified.
______________________________________________________________________________
Wood: stain and
FS TT-S-711,
FS TT-V-121
FS TT-V-121
In varnish finishes
fill and sand
addition a fourth coat of as follows:
FS TT-V-121
Surface
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
______________________________________________________________________________
Wood: handrails
FS TT-V-121
FS TT-V-121
FS TT-V-121
______________________________________________________________________________
Wood: natural
FS TT-V-86
FS TT-V-86
FS TT-V-86
finish as follows:
______________________________________________________________________________
Page | 17 of 18
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Surface
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
______________________________________________________________________________
Metal: Convector
Ferrous metal:
FS TT-E-545,
enclosures electrical
SSPC Paint 5
conduit runs, metallic
___________
tubing, uninsulated
SSPC Paint 25
ducts and pipes, pipe,
___________
hangers, louvers,
FS TT-P-645
FS TT-E-508
grilles and air outlets
------or------in areas having painted ___________
FS TT-E-509
adjacent surfaces
Aluminum:
FS TT-P-645
___________
Galvanized surface:
SSPC Paint 5
______________________________________________________________________________
Metal: surfaces
FS TT-E-496,
FS TT-E-496,
None
subject to high
Type II
Type II
temperature, up to 204
degrees C
(400 degrees F),:
______________________________________________________________________________
Metal: surfaces
FS TT-P-28
FS TT-P-28
None
subject to temperature
from 204 degrees C
to 649 degrees C
(400 degrees F to
1200 degrees F),
NOTE: Commercial blast-cleaning, SSPC SP 6 required. No pretreatment. Maximum Total System:
0.102 mm (4 Mil) Thickness.
Surface
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
_______________________________________________________________________________
Facing of vapor
Two coats of paint to match
None
barrier jackets of
adjacent areas.
presized or adhesive
finished cloth over
insulation on pipes,
ducts, and equipment
_________________________________________________________________________
Page | 18 of 18
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 10160 TOILET PARTITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.2
REFERENCES
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.4
TANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORATE
1.5
WARRANTY
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
10160-2/5
10160-2/5
10160-2/5
10160-2/5
10160-2/5
10160-3/5
10160-3/5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
2.1.1 TOILET PARTITIONS
2.1.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS
2.1.3 DOOR HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
2.1.4 ANCHORAGE AND FASTENERS
2.2
FABRICATIONS
10160-3/5
10160-3/5
10160-3/5
10160-3/5
10160-3/5
10160-3/5
10160-3/5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
3.2
INSTALLATION
3.3
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
10160-4/5
10160-4/5
10160-4/5
10160-4/5
Section 10160 Toilet Partitions
Page | 1 of 5
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 10160 - TOILET PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
0.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1 Toilet partitions and the related accessories as shown on Drawings and as specified
herein.
0.2
REFERENCES
1.2.1. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
1.2.2. UL - Underwriters Laboratory
UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
1.2.3. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
1.2.4. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NEMA LD-1 - Standard Publication for Laminated Thermosetting Decorative Sheets
NEMA LD-3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminate
0.3
SUBMITTALS
1.3.1. Submit the following for the Contracting Officer's review and approval:
0.4
1.3.1.1.
Product data for physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading,

and flame spread characteristics for type of partition and accessories
specified.
1.3.1.2.
Shop drawings showing location and extent of partitions. Include plans,

elevations, large-scale details of anchorages, and accessory items. Indicate
unit conditions at openings, typical and special details, and location and
installation requirements for hardware.
1.3.1.3.
Certificates of compliance signed by manufacturer of partitions certifying

that the products comply with the specified requirements.

1.4.1. Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original factory wrappings and containers,
clearly labeled for identification of Manufacturer, brand name and contents.
Page | 2 of 5
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.4.2. Store panels only on edge, blocked off ground to prevent sagging and warping in original
undamaged packages and containers, inside a well-ventilated area protected from
weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
0.5
WARRANTY
1.5.1. Submit written guarantee signed by the Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing
to replace partitions which fail in materials or workmanship within 2 years of date of
substantial handing over.
0.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6.1. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain partitions, mounting hardware and accessories all
from one source from a single Manufacturer.
1.6.2. Fire Performance: Partitions shall have flame spread of 25 or less and smoke
development of 450 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
0.7
MATERIALS
2.1.1. Toilet Partitions: Floor-supported type, constructed of 19 mm thick solid phenolic core
consisting of multiple sheets of resin-impregnated trespa boards or equivalent and matte
finish colored melamine facing sheets fused together at high temperature and pressure to
produce solid phenolic doors, stiles, pilasters and panels of sizes as shown on Drawings.
Color shall be as selected and approved by the Contracting Officer from the
manufacturer standard range of colors.
2.1.2. Mounting Brackets: Provide manufacturer standard brackets for panel assembly as well
as connection to adjacent walls. Brackets shall be stainless steel, type 302 or 304 in
accordance with ASTM A 167 with stain finished.
2.1.3. Door Hardware and Accessories: Heavy-duty type and shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer and approved by the Contracting Officer.
2.1.4. Anchorage and Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with the
following:
0.8
2.1.4.1.
For Concealed Anchors: provide hot-dip galvanized steel or any other rustresistant protective-coated steel.
2.1.4.2.
For Exposed Anchors and Fasteners: provide stainless steel, type 304
complying ASTM A167. Theft-resistant (one way) type heads and nuts
shall be provided for exposed anchorage.
FABRICATION
Page | 3 of 5
WBRJ-12-C-0001
0.2.1. General: Provide standard doors, panels and pilasters fabricated for the partition system.
0.2.2. Panels and Door Dimensions: As indicated on Drawings.
0.2.3. Provide floor-supported pilasters to secure structural carrying members. Provide
anchorage devices complete with standard hex nuts, lock washers, threaded rods and
levelling adjustment nuts as required.
0.2.4. Manufacturer's Standard hardware for each compartment in the partition system shall be
furnished as follows:
0.2.4.1.
Hinges: Cut-out inset type.
0.2.4.2.
Latch and Keeper: Surface-mounted latch unit.
0.2.4.3.
Coat Hook and Bumper: Manufacturer's Standard unit as a combined hookbumper.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
0.9
EXAMINATION
0.1.1. Examine areas and conditions where toilet partitions and related items are to be
installed and remedy any conditions affecting proper installation and completion of
work. Proceed with installation after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
0.2
INSTALLATION
0.2.1. General: Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb and leveled with panels laid out as
indicated on Drawings.
0.2.2. Provide maximum clearance of 1/2 inch between stiles and panels, 1 inch between panels
and walls. Secure panels to walls stirrup brackets using 2 brackets as a minimum. Locate
holes for anchorage of wall brackets at tile joints.
0.2.3. Anchor pilasters to floor using Manufacturer's Standard devices. Adjust bottom of door
with bottom of pilasters when doors are in the closed position.
0.2.4. Hardware shall be adjusted and lubricated for proper operation after installation as
follows:
0.3
0.2.4.4.
Hinges for In-Swing Doors: Set on to hold open approximately 30o from
closed position when unlatched.
0.2.4.5.
Hinges for Out-Swing Doors: Set on to return to the fully closed position.
Page | 4 of 5
WBRJ-12-C-0001
0.3.1. Protect units so that there will be no indication of use or damage at the time of
acceptance.
0.3.2. Perform final adjustment to anchoring devices, door hardware, and other operating parts
of the partition assembly just prior to final inspection.
0.3.3. Clean partition surfaces and clean adjacent surfaces soiled by work of this section. Avoid
use of abrasive cleaners or solutions containing corrosive solvents. Use cleaning
materials recommended by the Manufacturer.
0.3.4. Replace damaged units which cannot be satisfactory field repaired as directed by
Section 1.05 END OF SECTION
Page | 5 of 5
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.5
10522-2/5
10522-2/5
10522-2/5
10522-3/5
10522-3/5
10522-3/5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
2.2
FIRE HOSE CABINETS
2.3
FABRICATION
2.4
FINISHES
2.5
PIPING
10522-3/5
10522-3/5
10522-4/5
10522-4/5
10522-4/5
10522-4/5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
3.2
INSTALLATION
3.3
SCHEDULES
3.4
PIPING INSTALLATION
10522-5/5
10522-5/5
10522-5/5
10522-5/5
10522-5/5
Section 10522 Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets, And

Accessories
Page | 1 of 5
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The

SASO 63
SASO 64
SASO 81
Fire Extinguishers Part 1 Steel Portable Carbon Dioxide Fire Extinguishers

Methods of Test for Portable Fire Extinguishers
Fire Extinguishers Part II: Portable Bromochlorodifluoro Methane Fire
Extinguisher
Fire Extinguishers Part 4: Portable Dry Powder Extinguishers
CO 2 Cylinders for Fire Fighting
Methods of Testing for CO 2 Cylinders for Fire Fighting
Fire Fighting Dry Chemical
SASO 125
SASO 37
SASO 38
SASO 647

ANSI/NFPA 10
ANSI/UL 92
ANSI/UL 711
Portable Fire Extinguishers

Fire Extinguisher and Booster Hose
Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers
NFPA 10
NFPA 14
NFPA 20
NFPA 1961
NFPA 1963
Portable Fire Extinguishers.

Standpipe and Hose Systems.
Fire Protection Equipment.
Fire Hose.
Screw Threads and Gaskets for Fire Hose Connections.
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC. (UL)
UL 154
UL 299
Carbon Dioxide Fire Extinguishers

Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Contracting Officer approval is required for submittals with a "GA" designation; submittals having an
"FIO" designation are for information only. The following shall be submitted for approval in accordance
with Section 01300, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-04 Drawings; GA
Indicate cabinet physical dimensions, rough-in measurements for recessed cabinet, location, and
Accessories
Page | 2 of 5
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SD-01 Data; FIO

Provide extinguisher operational features, color and finish, anchorage details .
SD-13 Certificates; FIO
Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions
Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements.
Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Provide units conforming with NFPA 10, "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers", NFPA 14,
Standpipe and Hose Systems and NFPA 20, Fire Protection Equipment.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Conform to applicable building codes and ANSI/NFPA 10 for requirements for
extinguishers.
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not install extinguisher when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguishers ingredients.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
2.1.1
Dry Chemical Type:

Portable Fire Extinguishers: Multi-purpose dry chemical type (Ammonium phosphate base),
portable fire extinguishers conforming to UL 299, Class A,B,C, Size 4.5 kg, red glossy polyestercoated Cast steel cylinder, with pressure gauge; valve assembly, hose and wall-mounted bracket
Portable fire extinguishers shall be UL Listed and FM approved. Contents shall be pressurized at
approximately 13.4 bars (195 psi). Fire extinguisher cabinets shall be similar to Fire Hose Cabinets.
Mobile Fire Extinguishers: Multi-purpose dry chemical type (Ammonium phosphate base), carriage
and hose hanger assembly fire extinguishers conforming to UL 299, Class A:B:C, Size 50 kg, red
glossy polyester-coated Cast steel cylinder, with quick release non-kink hose with positive
pressure grip nozzle, 25 m length hose and semi- pneumatic tires. Fire extinguishers shall be UL
Listed and FM approved.
2.1.2
Carbon Dioxide Type

Red glossy polyester-coated aluminum cylinder conforming to UL 154, Class B:C, size 4.5 kg ,
Carbon dioxide portable fire extinguishers shall be with pressure gauge, valve assembly, discharge
horn and wall-mounted bracket Portable fire extinguishers shall be UL Listed, FM approved.
Contents shall be pressurized at approximately 50.6 bars (735 psi).

Accessories
Page | 3 of 5
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.2
2.2.1
FIRE HOSE CABINETS

Fire Hose Cabinets/ Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
Fire hose cabinets shall be 20 gauge steel sheet box with 20 gauge tubular steel door with 18
gauge frame and a continuous steel hinge (brass pin). Steel corner seams welded and ground
smooth. Cabinets shall be furnished with radiused frame. Cabinets shall be complete with all
required accessories including 38 single fire hose rack assembly with 30 m long linen hose, angle
valve, and fog nozzle. All accessories as mentioned above shall be UL listed.Fire hose Cabinets
shall be semi ressessed type and be provided with 4.5 kg. multi-purpose dry chemical portable
fire extinguisher. All components shall be powdered coated with electrostatically-applied
thermally fused recoatable red polyester finish. Cabinet shall have steel door with identifying
lettering and manufacturer's standard hardware. Fire
extinguisher cabinets shall be wall
mounted type.Cabinets shall be of size as shown on drawings.
2.2.2
Cabinet Signage:
Graphic Identification should be written in Arabic and English text in readable manner from a
distance.
2.3 FABRICATION
Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trims and door stiles.
Pre-drill cabinet enclosure for anchors. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge.
Provide a roller-type catch for each cabinet door. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.
2.4 FINISHES
2.4.1
Extinguisher
Red glossy polyester-coated.
2.4.2
Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door

Polyester powdered coated, red color.
2.4.3
Cabinet Interior
Polyester powdered coated, red color.
2.5
PIPING
As specified in Section 15330 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION.

Accessories
Page | 4 of 5
WBRJ-12-C-0001
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Verify wall openings. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install in locations and at mounting heights
indicated or, if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities
3.3 SCHEDULES
Install fire extinguishers and fire hose cabinets where shown on drawings
3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION
As specified in Section 15330 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION.

Accessories
Page | 5 of 5
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.2
REFERENCES
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.4
1.5
WARRANTY
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
10800-2/6
10800-2/6
10800-2/6
10800-2/6
10800-3/6
10800-3/6
10800-3/6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
2.2
FABRICATION
2.3
FABRICATED ACCESSORY ITMES
10800-3/6
10800-4/6
10800-4/6
10800-4/6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
3.2
INSTALLATION
3.3
ADJUST AND CLEAN
10800-6/6
10800-6/6
10800-6/6
10800-6/6
Section 10800 Toilet And Bath Accessories
Page | 1 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 10800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
0.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
0.2
REFERENCES
A.
0.3
Toilet and washroom accessories for all toilets, bathrooms and washrooms as shown on
drawings and specified herein.

ASTM A 153
Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware.
ASTM A 167
Specification for Stainless Steel and Heat-Resistant ChromiumNickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
ASTM A 269
Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel

Tubing for General Service.
ASTM A 366
Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial

Quality.
ASTM A 527
Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the

Hot-Dip Process, Lock-Forming Quality.
ASTM B 16
Specification for Free-Cutting Brass Rod, Bar and Shapes for

Use in Machines.
ASTM B 19
Specification for Cartridge Brass Sheet, Strip, Plate, Bar and Disks
(Blanks).
ASTM B 30
Specification for Copper-Base Alloys in Ingot Form.
ASTM B 455
Specification for Copper-Zinc-Lead Alloy (Leaded Brass)

Extruded Shapes.
ASTM B 456
Specification for Electro-Deposited Coatings of Copper Plus

Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium.
ASTM C 1036
Specification for Flat Glass.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product data for each toilet accessory item specified, including details of construction
relative to materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, method of mounting, specified options,
and finishes.
B.
Samples: Full-size samples of each toilet accessory item for verification of design,
operation, and finish requirements. Acceptable samples will be returned and may be used
in the work.
Page | 2 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
C.
0.4

A.
0.5
Deliver materials to the site in manufacturer's original factory wrappings and containers,
clearly labeled for identification of manufacturer, brand name and contents. Store
materials as per manufacturer's written recommendations.
WARRANTY
A.
0.6
Setting Drawings: Where cut-outs are required in other works, provide templates,
substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cut-outs and for
installation of anchorage devices.
Submit a written guarantee signed by the manufacturer, agreeing to change the items
which fail in material or workmanship within a period of 2 years from the date of
substantial handing over.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Inserts and Anchorages: Provide inserts and anchoring devices to be set in concrete or
built into masonry; coordinate delivery with other works to avoid delay.
B.
Single-Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of

accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise indicated on
Drawings.
C.
Coordination: Coordinate the accessories locations, installation, and sequencing with

other work to avoid interference and to assure proper installation, operation, adjustment,
cleaning, and servicing of the accessories items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
0.7
MATERIALS
D.
Stainless Steel:
1.
Bar stock: Conform to ASTM A 276, Type 304.
2.
Plates and Sheets: Conform to ASTM 167, Type 304.
3.
Pipes: Conform to ASTM A 312, Grade Type 304.
4.
Type of Finish: Polished, No. 4 unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Brass: Leaded and unleaded, flat products conform to ASTM B 19; rods, shapes,
forgings, and flat products with finished edges conform to ASTM B 16; Castings
conform to ASTM B 30.
F.
Bronze: Conform to ASTM B 36, Alloy 280 metal with satin chrome finish.
Page | 3 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
0.8
0.9
G.
Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal, conforming to ASTM B

456, Type SC-2.
H.
Sheet Steel: Cold-rolled, commercial quantity conforming to ASTM A 366.
I.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: Conform to ASTM A 527, Designation G-60.
J.
Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: conform to ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
K.
Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and devices of same material as accessory units. Where
concealed, provide galvanized steel screws, bolts, and devices.
L.
Mirror Glass: Conform to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, and 6 mm thick
with silvering, electro-plated copper coating and protective organic coating.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of toilet and bath accessories are not
permitted, except where otherwise indicated. Wherever locks are required for a particular
type of accessory, provide same keying throughout the project. Furnish two keys for each
lock.
B.
Surface-Mounted Accessories: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units with

tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with
continuous piano hinge or minimum of two 38 mm pin hinges of same metal as unit
cabinet. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.
C.
Recessed Accessories: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all welded
construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access panels with full-length
stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage which is fully concealed when unit is
closed.
FABRICATED ACCESSORY ITEMS

A.
Single Robe Hook: Flange 50 x 50 mm, 50 mm projection from wall, bright polished
stainless steel. Provide security grade single robe hook where required.
B.
Liquid Soap Dispenser: Top-filling surface-mounted liquid soap dispenser with 1.2L
capacity, stainless steel construction, type 304, satin polish finish. Provide security grade
wall mounted soap dispenser where required.
C.
Soap Dish and Holder: Recessed type, stainless steel construction, type 304, satin finish.
Provide security grade soap dish and holder where required.
D.
Towel Bar, 610/1050 mm length: 19 mm square bright polished stainless steel.
Page | 4 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
E.
Toilet Paper Holder: Stainless steel type 304 twin-roll shelf toilet paper holder, in hairline
finish. Provide security grade toilet paper holder where required.
F.
Shower Head: with ball-joint; regular to hard needle jet spray, polished chrome
finish.
G.
Grab Bar: 30 mm diameter x 610 mm grab bar stainless steel construction, type 304,
satin finish.
H.
Hand Dryer: Surface-mounted autopilot hand dryer, color as approved by the

I.
Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle: In hairline finish. Stainless steel type 304
body and door frame with an artificial marble door. Surface mounted type 298 x 1400
mm, dispensing minimum 600 C-fold or 1000 single-fold paper towels. Provide security
grade paper towel dispenser where required.
J.
Perineal Spray: Gun pressure heavy duty complete with gun, hose and wall hook,
polished chrome finish.
K.
Shower Curtain Rod and Shower Curtain: 19 mm diameter stainless steel type 304,
detachable curtain rod and holder, with concealed mounting and required length. Provide
opaque, matte white curtains with nickel-plated brass grommets along top including
stainless steel hooks.
L.
Clear Glass Facial Mirror:
M.
1.
Mirror Size: Full counter width x 900 mm height.
2.
Plate glass one piece mirror shall be of quality grade No.1, glass not less than 6
mm thick, electrolyticaly copper backed, guaranteed 5 years against silver
spoilage.
3.
Back shall be protected by shock-absorbing waterproof, non-abrasive 6 mm thick

polystyrene padding and plywood backing.
4.
Galvanized steel back shall have integral horizontal hanging brackets for
mounting on concealed wall hangers and secured with concealed vandal-proof
screws in lower frame.
5.
Polished aluminum frame with manufacturer's standard accessories as required for

proper fixation.
Clear Glass Facial Mirror: 450 x 750 mm clear glass facial mirror with one piece channel
frame of polished aluminum finish. Where required, provide 450 x 600 mm facial mirror
for the handicapped with plywood backing and polished aluminum frame. Provide
security grade facial mirror, 500 x 800 mm, where required.
Page | 5 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
N.
Vacuum Breaker: Vacuum breaker with brass housing, ells and nipples with rebuildable
backflow preventer, polished chrome finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
0.10
INSPECTION
A.
0.11
INSTALLATION
G.
0.12
Examine substrates, previously installed inserts and anchorages necessary for mounting
of toilet and bath accessories, as well as other conditions under which installation is to
occur, and must notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and
timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
Install toilet and bath accessory units in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,
using fasteners which are appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of
units. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated.
ADJUST AND CLEAN

A.
Adjust toilet and bath accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms
function smoothly.
B.
Clean and polish exposed surfaces after removing the protective coatings.
Page | 6 of 6
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 13310 TENSILE MEMBRANE STRUCTURE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.0.1 RELATED DOCUMENTs
1.1
SUMMARY
1.1.1 This Section includes the following: The Scope of work contained in this specification together
with all the drawings which form part of the contract documents provide the instructions
necessary to carry out that part of the contract which includes design, supply, fabrication,
installation, protection, guarantees, testing and, maintaining up to the defects liability period for
Double-cone tensile membrane structure, and associated works and accessories.
1.1.2 The primary components of the tensile membrane structures shall consist of PVC coated, woven
fabric 2-way stretched over hoisting wire rope framing and dual steel central masts with outer
steel pipe columns. The overall tent structure shall consist of a double conical shape with
perimeter bounded by continuous cables covered by the fabric material and attached by
customized plates to the steel frame supports.
1.1.3 Related Sections include the following:
i.
ii.
iii.
1.2
Division 2 Section "Excavation Support and Protection" for shoring, bracing, and sheet
piling of excavations for foundations.
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for reinforced structural foundations.
Division 5 for structural steel sections and metal fabrications.
SUBMITTALS
1.2.1 Product Data: For the following:
i.
ii.
Each type of steel cable & fixing device.

Tensile membrane fabric with technical data sheet.
1.2.2 Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance of the following with requirements indicated plus Membrane selection report.
1.2.3 Calculations: Complete wind load analysis via established computer program for tensile
structures plus foundation design. The following information to be submitted for Consultant
approval:
i.
ii.
iii.
Loading calculations & load combinations done

Reaction forces on all anchors
Verification of all steel members with safety factors
Section 13310 Tensile Membrane Structure
Page | 1 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.2.4 Shop Drawings: Shop drawings mean complete drawings, showing all details of fabrication,
assembly, installation, & fixing method of specific items of components include all necessary
explanatory note and specifications. The contractor warrants that he will produce all detailed
shop drawings for checking and/or approval by the project consultant(s) at such times required
by the contract program. In no case shall be contractor proceed with fabrication and
production of any components until the said drawings are checked and /or approved by the
project consultants / Engineer- in -charge.
1.3
CODES AND STANDARDS

1.3.1 Materials and workmanship shall comply with requirements of the current International
Standards and wherever it is unspecified DIN standards to be used along with relevant codes
mentioned therein as follows:
i.
ii.
iii.
BS 476-10:1983 Fire tests on building materials and structures. Guide to the Principles
and application of fire testing.
BS EN 12385-10:2003+A1: 2008 Steel wire ropes. Safety; Spiral ropes for General
structural applications.
BS EN 12505-3:2004 Protection of metallic materials against corrosion Influencing
factors for hot dip galvanized ferrous metals.
1.3.2 Tensile structure shall be designed in accordance with the following standards and guidelines.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Design of Hot Rolled Sections: BS 5950-2000

Wind Loads: BS CP 3 Chapter V-2, 1972 for 140km/hr wind speed
Steel Designers Manual, 6th Edition, 2003
Welding: BS 5135
1.3.3 The design of the membrane shall take into consideration the safe working load of the membrane
and not its ultimate tensile strength.
PROJECT - CONDITIONS
2.1
EXISTING UTILITIES:
2.1.1 Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in
writing by Owner and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according
to requirements indicated.
2.1.2 Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2.1.3 Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owners written permission.
2.1.4 Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be
removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
Page | 2 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
PART 3 - PRODUCTS
3.1
MEMBRANE MATERIALS
3.1.2 The tensile fabric shall be highest quality PVC membrane with special UV resistant and gloss
PVC coating at top & bottom. Specification of grades, strengths, surface coating and colors
shall b e as set out hereunder. All membrane for this project shall be coated by single
manufacturer and be as part of single batch. Membrane supplied for all the modules are to be of
the same grade; no varying grades are allowed. Quality management shall be according to ISO
9001.
3.1.2 Patterning Design
Membrane form finding design analysis and patterning shall be computer finite element
analysis conducted by an engineer experienced in the field of tensile engineering. Submit shop
drawings to and obtain approval of the design from the Architect/Engineer in- charge prior to
the ordering or cutting for fabrication.
3.2
MEMBRANE CHARACTERISTICS
3.2.1 Base fabric:
i.
ii.
Material: PES per DIN ISO 2076 (OBETEX Brand or approved equal)
Yarn Count: 1100 dtex per DIN ISO 2060
iii.
Weave: P 2/2
3.2.2 Type of Coating & Finish

i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
xi.
3.3
Type of coating: PVC

Finish: Both side lacquered, high gloss
Flame retardancy: ISO 3795 < 100mm/min
Total Weight: 1100 g/M2 to EN ISO 2286-2
Tensile strength (warp/weft): 4300/4000 N/50mm per DIN 53354, DIN EN ISO 1521/V1
Tear strength (warp/weft): 500/500 N per DIN 53363
Adhesion: 20 N/cm LB 3.04-1
Cold resistance: -30 C per DIN 53361
High temperature: +70 C to LB 3.15
Light fastness: >6 per DIN 54004, DIN EN ISO 105 B02
Crack resistance: no cracks < 100000x per DIN 53359A
STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS & ACCESSORIES

3.3.1 The main columns, supports and other members shall be fabricated from mild steel tubes of
different diameter & thickness (conforming to BS 5950, Grade S275) per design load conditions,
painted with two coats of polyurethane paint of approved shade over two coats of polyurethane
primer.
3.3.2 All base plates & gussets to be profile cut from mild steel plates conforming to ASTM A 36.
Page | 3 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.3.3 Galvanized steel core cables of 6 x 19 strand construction of different diameters as required
by design loads. Use flexible, high strength hoisting wire rope to FS RR-W-410 or better.
3.3.4 Stainless Steel items. Comply with the following standards for forms and types of stainless
steel devices as required for the works:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Bar Stock: ASTM A 276

Plate: ASTM A 167
Tubing: ASTM 269
Castings: ASTM 296, iron-chromium-nickel alloy
3.3.5 Fabric to be clamped to the ring beam with Aluminum clamping plates with round edges
3.3.6 All materials shall be approved, of the types specified, the best obtainable quality, free from all
defects and shall comply with requirement of the standard specification for the particular
materials (and/or relevant current Indian standards) together with fixing, sealants and
accessories shall be substances and temper be suited to the function and particular conditions
for which they are used. Any caulking shall be of the type recommended by the supplier for
the particular conditions and be supplied strictly in accordance with t h e manufacturers
written instructions.
PART 4 - EXECUTION
4.1
PREPARATION
4.1.1 Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by placement of
foundations for the tensile structural supports.
4.1.2 The tensile membrane, structural support components, cables assemblies, and connecting
devices shall be fabricated in an industrial workshop to the greatest extent possible. Fabricate
items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on the final
approved shop drawings. Welding work to be done in compliance with guidelines and
standards of AWS.
4.1.3 Provide all hoisting cables, wire ropes and related fabrications from materials of size, type,
shapes and thickness indicated but not less than that needed to comply with project performance
requirements. Work to dimensions indicated on the design drawings adjusted as needed to meet
site conditions using proven details of fabrication, support and stability.
4.2
FABRICATION (MEMBRANE)
4.2.1 Patterning and cutting of the membrane to be done via CNC plotter & cutting machine. The
membranes shall be fabricated under factory shop conditions.
i.
ii.
The contractor shall carefully plan his assembly, to ensure that the seams are always
shingle laid and that a cut edge does not face uphill.
All welded seams, reinforcements, assemblies, ropes reinforced edges and all other
details are to be executed in accordance with the accompanying drawings.
Page | 4 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
Any hole or punching as indicated in the drawings shall be performed by the specialist
contractor. At positions where bolt or other penetration of the membrane is shown or
required, holes shall be punched using a sharp 1mm oversized punch. Holes shall be neat
and have uniform edges.
Rope edges (boltropes) shall be formed using hard PVC or polyester rope of minimum
12mm .
The structure shall be fabricated using field spices only where shown and approved by
the project consultants. Where spices are not specified and the contractor proposes the
use of the same, they shall be described in full in the shop drawings including details of
location and design.
All add-on detail to the membrane is to use the same seaming procedures as for structural
seams.
The contractor shall exercise great care in marking, cutting, aligning, checking, welding
seams and additions as well as general handling and soiling prevention procedures to
produce a smooth uniform surface with even curved edges and interfaces lacking
wrinkling, cuts, abrasions, stains or marks, surface imperfections or welding aberrations.
4.2.2 Membrane Joints:

i.
ii.
iii.
to + 2mm. Adjacent panels shall be lapped by 50mm, and then welded with HF welding
machine. All excess matter, markings etc shall be removed from the membrane before
packing.
All fabricated joints shall have a minimum of 90% of the total strength of the coated
Joints shall be formed at under pressure at the appropriate temperature and to a tolerance
membrane in strip tensile testing. All Structural joint must maintain the integrity of the
coating and ensure complete isolation of the basic membrane from air and moisture.
Joints shall be symmetric all as specified by the cutting pattern; no short pieces of selvage
shall be permitted.
4.2.3 Packing:
i.
ii.
4.3
The contractor shall be wholly responsible for particular measures to prevent any damage
occurring to the membrane coating or to the base cloth. The membrane shall be fold in
such manner as to minimize sharp crease and folds.
All material shall be packed in substantial crates and shall be designed to protect the
materials contained against hazard both during transit and whilst storage.
CONSTRUCTION
4.3.1 Method of Erection:

i.
Erection of the membrane structure shall be done by an approved specialist in this type of
work. Appropriate safety measures are to be followed on the site.
Page | 5 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
4.3.2 Preparation and installation of membrane:

i.
A clear and level site will be provided for undertaking erection and assembly procedure
of the membrane element. Contractor will arrange for activities on the site to cooperatively fit in with the erection procedure of the membrane panels. Prior to
commencement of erection the contractor is required to check all contact surfaces to
remove causes for rips or scratching during installation of the membrane panels.
Prevention of chaffing the surface is required at all times.
4.3.3 Alignment:
i.
All works are supposed to be erected in perfect alignment to the satisfaction of the
architect and project consultant free of damage to any materials.
4.3.4 Pretension:
i.
The Membrane is to be pre-tensioned to maintain a taut surface and avoid local over
stress.
4.3.5 Erection under adverse weather conditions

i.
4.4
Installation of the Membrane roofs and associated works shall proceed only when the
existing and forecast weather will permit work to be performed in accordance with the
establishment procedure and schedules and in accordance with the relevant safely
construction safety procedures. Under no circumstances will the contractor be required
to erect in weather conditions not approved by him.
INSTALLATION
4.4.1 Seam Layout:
i.
Submit to the project consultant for approvals a seam layout indicating the proposed
location and width of all seams to be included in the complete membrane.
4.4.2 Wrinkles
i.
There shall be no wrinkles in the completed membrane which in the project consultants
opinion are visually objectionable whether viewed internally or externally. Some
tolerance on uniformity of the tensioned membrane against wrinkling shall be accepted.
The following limits on the degree of wrinkling shall be used as a guide.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Isolated wrinkles up to 200mm long at seams and stress points-one (1) in only 100
M2.
Isolated wrinkles approximately a panel width in length none (0) per 100 Sq. Mtr.
Continuous line of small wrinkles over on meter in length-one (1) per 100 Sq. Mtr.
General wrinkle across dimension of canopy none (0)
For the purpose of these tolerances, a wrinkle shall be fold in the fabric canopy in the
pre-stressed condition in still air and which is visible from the ground below the
canopy.
Page | 6 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
4.4.3 Patches
i.
There shall be no patches in the completed membrane which in the project consultants
opinion and given reasonable commercial consideration involved in rectification, detract
significantly from the overall aesthetic effect of the complete installation. Minor
patching resulting from events on site during erection shall be permitted as follows and
only to be carried out where the damage to be rectified is relatively minor and the effect
of the patching is not visually dominant.
ii.
Permissible patching is as follows:

a.
b.
c.
Maximum area of 50mm diameter per 100 sq. Mtr

Maximum number of patches one (1) per 100 sq. Mtr.
Patching shall be carried out in an approved manner using appropriate seaming
equipment and techniques.
4.4.4 Fixing Details:

i.
The fixing material used to attach the membrane to the supporting steel framework
shall be of the highest quality compatible with the minimum anticipated life of the
membranes. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required to meet project and
performance specifications.
ii.
Minimum requirements are as follows:

a.
b.
c.
4.5
Fasteners: HT Bolts/Stainless steel bolts where ever applicable.

Provide plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating for exterior use.
The Contractor shall provide and install all anchor bolts and related fastening
devices to connect the steel support structure to the reinforced concrete foundations.
GUARANTEE/WARANTY
4.5.1 Warranty for membrane shall be Minimum 5-Years (From the fabric manufacturer).
4.5.2 All other materials & finishings warranties to be issued as per suppliers/ Manufacturers of the
products as required by the standards.
4.6
DEFECT LIABILITY
4.6.1 The defect liability period for the complete structure inclusive of installation &
workmanship will be the principle contractors responsibility, irrespective of suppliers or
subcontractors counter guaranties, for the period of one year from the date of handing over of the
project.
Page | 7 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
GENERAL
REFERENCES
ENGINEERS DRAWINGS
SHOP DRAWINGS
COORDINATION DRAWINGS
RECORD DRAWINGS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SUBMITTALS
SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES
COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
WARRANTIES
15010-2/16
15010-2/16
15010-3/16
15010-3/16
15010-4/16
15010-5/16
15010-5/16
15010-6/16
15010-7/16
15010-7/16
15010-7/16
15010-8/16
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
15010-8/16
PART 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
EXECUTION
ROUGH-IN
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
CUTTING AND PATCHING
INSERTS AND SLEEVES
EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
DEMOLITION
GROUTING
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING PIPE TRENCHES
PROTECTION OF WORK
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ROOM PRECAUTIONS
PAINTING AND FINISHING
CLEANING
INITIAL OPERATION OF SYSTEMS
NOISE AND VIBRATION
TRAINING
15010-8/16
15010-8/16
15010-9/16
15010-10/16
15010-11/16
15010-12/16
15010-13/16
15010-13/16
15010-13/16
15010-14/16
15010-14/16
15010-15/16
15010-15/16
15010-15/16
15010-16/16
15010-16/16
15010-16/16
15010-16/16
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements
Page | 1 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
publications are referenced to in the text by basic designation only.
AMCA
ANSI
ARI
ASHRAE
ASME
ASTM
AWS
AWWA
BS
DIN
FM
ISO
MSS
NBS
NEMA
NFPA
OSHA
SAE
SMACNA
UL
SASO
Air Moving and Conditioning Association

American National Standards Institute
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
Engineers
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
American Society for Testing and Materials
American Welding Society
American Water Works Association
British Standards
Deutsches Institut fur Normalisierung
Factory Mutual
International Standardization Organization
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry,
Inc.
National Bureau of Standards
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
National Fire Protection Association
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Society of Automotive Engineers
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's
Underwriters' Laboratories Inc.
Saudi Arabian Standards Organization
1.2 ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS

1.2.1
Engineer's Drawings are diagrammatic and are not to be scaled. Measurements are to be
made from established bench marks.
1.2.2
Engineer's Drawings are to serve as working drawings for Contractor's shop drawings.
Since the layout of equipment, accessories, specialties, ducting and piping systems are
diagrammatic, they do not necessarily indicate every required valve, fitting, trap, transition,
or similar items required for a complete installation. Provide such items as are required for
proper and complete installation of the work.
1.2.3
No portion of the work requiring a shop drawing or sample submission is to be commenced

until submission has been reviewed by the Contracting Officer. All such portions of the
work are to be in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and samples.
Page | 2 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.2.4
Check all architectural, structural and electrical drawings in laying out work to verify
adequacy of space in which work is to be installed. Notify the Contracting Officer where
space appears inadequate.
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

1.3.1
Twenty (20) days prior to commencement of work, submit to the Contracting Officer for
review and approval, detailed, dimensioned shop drawings.
1.3.2
Shop drawings are to be new drawings prepared by the Contractor and are not to be
reproductions or tracings of the Engineer's Drawings.
1.3.3
In preparing shop drawings, establish lines and levels for the work specified and check the
drawings to avoid interference with structural features and other work.
1.3.4
Shop drawings are to show to-scale dimensions of equipment, pipes, ducts, etc. in plan and
elevation with clearances and relation of same to space assigned.
1.3.5
Immediately call to the attention of the Contracting Officer any interferences and/or space
limitations for clarification in writing.
1.3.6
Shop drawings are to include floor layouts drawn to a minimum scale of 1/100 with
Mechanical Room and Toilet Room layouts to a minimum scale of 1/50, showing all
equipment and piping to be installed. For critical areas, provide section drawings to a
minimum scale of 1/50.
1.4 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

1.4.1
Shop drawings are to include a set of composite coordination drawings, in plan and
sections, showing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and
materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and other building components.
Drawings to be to an accurate scale of 1/50 or larger.
1.4.2
Prepare floor plans, elevations, sections, and details to conclusively coordinate and
integrate all installations. Show space requirements for installation and access. Indicate
locations where space is limited, and where sequencing and coordination of installations are
of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including, but not necessarily limited to,
the following:
A. Proposed locations of piping, ductwork, equipment, and materials.
following:
a.
b.
c.
Include the
Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve stem
movement.
Planned duct systems layout, including elbow radii and duct accessories.
Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.
Page | 3 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including space for

equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance.
Equipment service connections and support details.
Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.
Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
Sizes and locations of access panels and doors.
B.
Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the

building during construction.
C.
Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and
ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.
D. Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outlets and inlets,
light fixtures, communication systems components, sprinklers, and other ceilingmounted items.
1.5 RECORD DOCUMENTS
1.5.1
Refer to the Division-1 Section: Project Schedule for requirements.

paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.
The following
1.5.2
Prepare record documents and marked-up drawings to indicate revisions made during the
progress of the Work. Indicate the following installed conditions:
A. Ductwork mains and branches, size and location, for both exterior and interior;
locations of dampers and other control devices; filters, boxes, and terminal units
requiring periodic maintenance or repair.
B.
Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and
numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located
(i.e., traps, strainers, expansion joints, tanks, etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete
with valve tag chart. Refer to Division 9 Section "Colour Schedule". Indicate actual
inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping.
C.
Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building

lines.
D. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials

installed.
1.5.3
Mark Specifications to indicate accepted substitutions; Change Orders; actual equipment

and materials installed.
Page | 4 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.6 MAINTENANCE MANUALS

1.6.1
Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with the following:

A. Brief description of each system and piece of equipment with basic operating features.
Include descriptive literature of equipment and components with manufacturer's name,
model number, and capacity rating. Include description of function, normal operating
characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and
complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts.
B.
Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine

and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and
emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.
C.
Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting;

disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.
D. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.

E.
Manufacturer's list of general spare parts for every piece of equipment, with unit
prices.
F.
Manufacturer's list of recommended spare parts for one year of operation for every
piece of equipment, with unit prices.
G. Detailed and simplified one line, colour coded flow diagram of each system with tag
number, location and function of each valve and instrument.
H. Detailed and simplified colour coded as-installed wiring diagrams of motor controllers
and automatic controls with tag number, location of each instrument and electrical
device with description of sequence of operation and interlocks.
1.6.2
Provide six copies of the instruction manuals for the different mechanical systems, in
bound booklet form.
1.6.3
Submit in draft form for review and approval prior to final issue and at least four weeks in
advance of completion date of the system.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
1.7.1
General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1 Section 1300 "SUBMITTAL

PROCEDURES".
1.7.2
Equipment and Materials Lists: Approximately 30 days after award of Contract, submit
lists of equipment and materials, with names of proposed manufacturers and drawings of
interrelated items. All submissions are to show submission dates.
Page | 5 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.7.3
Samples: Submit to the Contracting Officer for approval samples of materials as requested.
Samples of workmanship are also to be performed as required by the Contracting Officer.
1.7.4
Manufacturers' Literature: Submit manufacturers' descriptive literature, data sheets, and

shop and installation drawings of equipment and materials, showing type, arrangement,
component parts, installation dimensions, operating clearances, weights, materials,
construction, and performance information. The performance is to include capacities, rpm,
bhp, pressure drop, design and operating pressure, temperatures, and similar data.
Complete electrical data and characteristics, including power conditions, power
requirements, motor, drive, testing information, and identifying types and numbers, are to
be included. Where pertinent, electrical diagrams are to be provided.
1.7.5
Submit manufacturer's certified drawings, templates and installation instructions for all
equipment showing operating weights, weight distribution, location of vibration isolation
mounts, size and location of anchor bolts, drainage and other openings, and other pertinent
data to assist in design of bases and supports.
1.7.6
Mark clearly in ink catalogues, pamphlets and manufacturer's drawings for proper
identification of item proposed and indicate, with reasons, deviations from the Specification
and the Drawings.
1.7.7
Submit for approval in letter form, materials not covered by drawings e.g. pipes, fittings
and incidentals giving ratings and names of manufacturers.
1.7.8
No equipment or materials are to be purchased or delivered to Site until the required

submittals have been approved.
1.7.9
During the progress of the work, submit shop drawings, to 1/20 or 1/10 scale, as required
by the Contracting Officer and as specified.
1.8 SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

1.8.1
Reference to equipment or material by name, make or catalogue number and lists of

approved manufacturers are to be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and
performance and are not intended to eliminate equivalent products of other manufacturers.
1.8.2
Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and

ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and
equipment spaces are increased. No additional costs will be approved for these increases, if
larger equipment is approved. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of the equipment
are specified, the equipment must meet the design requirements and commissioning
requirements.
Page | 6 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.9 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

1.9.1
1.10
Each piece of equipment is to have a conspicuous certified name plate, permanently

attached at factory, printed or stamped with name of manufacturer, product name, model
number, serial number, date of manufacture, capacity, operating and power characteristics,
performance rating or duty, pressure, temperature or other limitations, labels of tested
compliances, and similar essential data. Nameplates are to be in an accessible location.
1.10.1
Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components.
1.10.2
Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction to allow for mechanical installations.
1.10.3
Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-inplace concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
1.10.4
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring
positioning prior to closing in the building.
1.10.5
Coordinate connection of electrical services.
1.10.6
Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead

utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised
service companies, and controlling agencies.
1.10.7
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors where mechanical items requiring
access are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in
Division 8 Section "STEEL DOORS and FRAMES".
1.10.8
Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting where
devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices prior to installing acoustical
ceilings and similar concealment.
1.11
COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
1.11.1
Cooperate with other trades to permit their work to be installed satisfactorily and with
minimum interference or delay.
1.11.2
Coordinate space requirements with other trades, where work will be installed in close
proximity to and may interfere with work of other trades. Coordinate space requirements in
shafts, chases, double partitions and hung ceilings.
Page | 7 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.11.3
1.12
Furnish to other trades templates, patterns, setting out plans and shop details necessary for
proper installation and coordination of adjacent work.
WARRANTIES
1.12.1
All works are to be guaranteed for a period of one year dated from the final acceptance of
the work by the Owner.
1.12.2
Repairs or replacements made under the guarantee shall bear an additional one year
guarantee dated from the final acceptance of the repair or replacement.
1.12.3
Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment; date
of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, and
telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.
1.12.4
The guarantee is to cover perfect mechanical operation of systems, acceptable noise and
vibration levels, reasonable consumption of power, fuel and water, and perfect attainment
of temperature and humidity within specified design conditions for HVAC systems.
1.12.5
If during the guarantee period any equipment or material proves defective or any part of a
system fails to function properly, equipment is to be replaced and defects and malfunctions
corrected as directed by the Contracting Officer.
1.12.6
If during the guarantee period any piece of equipment is replaced or rebuilt, the guarantee
period for this equipment is to be extended for a new period equal to the original guarantee
period.
1.12.7
Act promptly to correct problems arising in operation of equipment or system.
1.12.8
Spare parts for normal wear and tear during guarantee period are to be provided by
Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
3.1.1
Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types,
grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.
Page | 8 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.1.2
In addition to the specific requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of materials and
equipment specified in the respective Division-15 sections, the following are general
requirements that must be adhered to:
A. Deliver and store materials and equipment in manufacturer's original packing,
shipping containers, crating, shipping skids, etc. Avoid crushing or bending
containers.
B.
Handle materials and equipment carefully to prevent damage, breakage, denting or

scoring.
C.
Protect stored materials and equipment from the weather, dirt, fumes, water,
construction debris, and physical damage from construction traffic.
D. When possible, store inside, under cover, and in a clean dry place. When not stored in
original containers, separate and cover with clean dust sheets or polythene.
E.
Where necessary by manufacturer's requirements, store materials and/or equipment at

recommended temperatures and humidities to prevent damage.
F.
Where it is only possible to store outside, elevate above grade, and enclose with
durable, waterproof wrapping.
G. Do not stack containers or store in such manner that may cause damage.
H. Store equipment on level surface to prevent twisting.
J.
Prevent contact with cement or line.
K. Do not pack in straw unless delivered in this manner from manufacturer.

L.
Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading and
moving to final location.
M. Do not install damaged materials or equipment; remove from Site and replace with
new.
3.2 ROUGH-IN
3.3.1
Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of
the actual equipment to be connected.
3.3.2
Refer to equipment specifications in other Divisions for rough-in requirements.
Page | 9 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.3
MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
3.3.1
Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building

components, and other trades.
3.3.2
Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
3.3.3
Arrange for and provide templates or detailed dimensions for chases, slots, and openings in
the floors, walls, partitions, and other building components, to allow for mechanical
installations.
3.3.4
Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in pouredin-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. Provide
supplemental steel required for supporting or hanging of mechanical equipment.
3.3.5
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring
positioning prior to closing-in the building.
3.3.6
Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the

installation of mechanical equipment and materials.
3.3.7
Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and
overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
3.3.8
Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance and repair or replacement

of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, using unions or
flange connections, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease
fittings to an accessible location.
3.3.9
Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above ceilings with
suspension system, light fixtures, and other installations.
3.3.10
Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead

utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised
service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.
3.3.11
Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data,
including coordination drawings to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements
indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown
only in diagrammatic form. If coordination requirements conflict with individual system
requirements, refer conflict to the Contracting Officer.
3.3.12
Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to
other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces, except
where otherwise indicated.
Page | 10 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.3.13
Arrange for and provide templates or detailed dimensions for the installation of access
panels or doors where work is concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors
are specified in Division 8 Section "STEEL DOORS and FRAMES". Identify access doors
to indicate location of concealed work.
3.3.14
Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to piping systems
required to be installed at a specified slope.
3.3.15
Provide all electrical field wiring between components of packaged equipment shipped
loose in accordance with the requirements of Division l6.
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING

3.4.1
Perform cutting and patching in accordance with the following requirements:
3.4.2
Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent
installations.
3.4.3
Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to:
A. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.
B.
Remove and replace defective Work.
C.
Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract

Documents.
D. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.

E.
Install equipment and materials in existing structures.
F.
Upon written instructions from the Contracting Officer, uncover and restore Work to
provide for Contracting Officer observation of concealed Work.
3.4.4
Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and
materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, heating
units, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new
Work.
3.4.5
Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or
scheduled to be removed.
3.4.6
Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of
dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
3.4.7
Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching
existing materials and experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the materials
and methods required for the surface and building components being patched.
Page | 11 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.4.8
Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the
original installation and experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the
materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched.
3.4.9
Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary
for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades involved.
3.4.10
Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
3.5 INSERTS AND SLEEVES

3.5.1
Refer to Division 15 Section "PLUMBING, ACC" for the installation of pipe sleeves.
3.5.2
Inserts in concrete for supports are to be as specified in other Division l5 section.
3.5.3
Lay out the work in accordance with approved shop drawings. Furnish and set in place, in
advance of placing of slabs or construction of walls, all inserts and sleeves necessary to
complete the Work.
3.5.4
Pipe Sleeves: Unless otherwise indicated or specified, pipe sleeves are to be as given
below. Pipe sleeves for items 1,2,3&4 below shall be UPVC class (5) except for fire
fighting systems and metallic networks where galvanized steel pipes shall be used.
A. General floor sleeves: Shall be with bottom end flush with surface, calked with glass
wool and sealed at top and bottom with butyl mastic. Top end is to extend 25 mm
above floor level in mechanical rooms. Top end of sleeves is to be flush with finished
floor surface in finished rooms.
B.
Sleeves in Foundation Walls: Shall be flush inside and outside, calked water tight.
C.
Sleeves in Concrete Walls: Shall be flush with wall surface at both ends, calked with
glass wool and sealed at both faces with butyl mastic.
D. Sleeves in Interior Partitions and Ceilings.

E.
Sleeves for uninsulated piping are to be approximately 20 mm larger than pipe passing
through. Sleeves for insulated piping are to be large enough to accommodate the full
thickness of the pipe covering with clearance for expansion and contraction.
F.
Fire Rated Wall or Floor Sleeves - Galvanized Pipe: Annular space between pipe and
sleeve in the fire rated wall or the fire rated floor is to be packed with fire rated
silicone foam.
Page | 12 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.5.5
Duct Sleeves: Where ducts pass through walls and partitions, provide sheet metal sleeves
and pack tight between duct and opening with fiber glass. The exposed side of ductwork is
to have galvanized 40 mm angle iron closure around duct. The angle irons are to be
secured to the wall construction. Annular space between pipe and sleeve in the fire rated
wall or the fire rated floor is to be packed with fire rated silicone foam.
3.6 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS

3.6.1
All floor mounted equipment and apparatus are to be provided with necessary concrete
pedestals, bases, pads, curbs and anchor blocks as shown or required. Provide anchor bolts,
slab inserts, supports, cradles, saddles, hangers and sleeves as may be required or necessary
for proper support or attachment to the building structure for all piping, conduit, equipment
and apparatus.
3.6.2
Concrete pads are to be 150 mm high unless otherwise indicated, with steel reinforcing and
necessary bolts, anchors, etc. Where concrete pad is set directly on concrete floor, provide
dowels in floor to tie base to floor. Coordinate size, locations, anchor bolts, etc.
3.6.3
Construct concrete equipment bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 100 mm (4")
larger than supported unit in both directions. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's
setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations.
3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

3.7.1
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
3.7.2
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel".
3.8 DEMOLITION
3.8.1
Disconnect, demolish, and remove existing work as indicated.
3.8.2
Where pipe, ductwork, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged or disturbed, remove

damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity and quality.
3.8.3
Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe and ductwork in its entirety.
3.8.4
Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried pipe abandoned in place, 50 mm (2") beyond
the face of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing finish.
3.8.5
Removal: Remove indicated equipment from the Project site.
3.8.6
Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make good
operational equipment indicated for relocation.
Page | 13 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.9 GROUTING
3.9.1
Use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout to ASTM C 1107, Grade B, specifications.

A. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout,
nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior
applications.
B.
Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.50MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
C.
Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.
3.9.2
Install nonmetallic nonshrink grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump
and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's
printed instructions.
3.9.3
Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
3.9.4
Provide forms for placement of grout, as required.
3.9.5
Avoid air entrapment when placing grout.
3.9.6
Place grout to completely fill equipment bases.
3.9.7
Place grout on concrete bases to provide a smooth bearing surface for equipment.
3.9.8
Place grout around anchors.
3.9.9
Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.10
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING PIPE TRENCHES
3.10.1
Excavation and backfilling of trenches required for the installation of all utility services and
underground piping within the building, and to points of connection with exterior
underground utilities outside of the building, are to be performed by each trade for its work
as specified.
3.10.2
Excavate to the required depths and grade, the bottoms of trenches to secure the required
slope for pipe lines. Rock or existing concrete, where encountered, are to be excavated to a
minimum depth of 150 mm below the bottom of pipe. Where mud or otherwise unstable
soil is encountered in the bottom of the trench which is incapable of supporting the pipe or
utility lines, such soil is to be removed to firm bearing and the trench is to be backfilled
with sand to the proper grade and tamped to provide uniformly firm support. Pipe is not to
be laid on frozen subgrade.
Page | 14 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.10.3
Trench Size: Sides of trenches at a point 300 mm above the top of pipe is not to be more
that 4/3 overall lateral dimension of the pipe, expressed in millimeters plus 200 mm.
Above this point the sides of trenches are to be kept as nearly vertical as possible and are to
be braced and shored to protect foundations, utility pipe lines and workmen. Where
machines are used to excavate pipe trenches, such machine excavation is to terminate
75 mm above the invert of the pipe. Final excavation and shaping of the trench is to be
performed only for short distances in advance of the pipe laying.
3.10.4
Trench Bottom: The bottom of the trench is to be accurately excavated by hand to provide
firm, uniform bearing for the bottom quarter of the pipe. Pipe having bells, sleeves or other
enlargement at the joints is to have recesses excavated to accommodate these joints.
3.10.5
Separation: Separate trenches are to be provided for potable water and sewer lines.
3.10.6
The trenches are not to be backfilled until the piping has been tested by the Contractor as
required and reviewed by the Contracting Officer and any local authorities having
jurisdiction.
3.11
PROTECTION OF WORK
3.11.1
Keep all pipe and duct openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent the entrance of
foreign matter, and cover all fixtures, equipment and apparatus as required to protect them
against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation.
3.11.2
Any fixtures, equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance of the Work are to
be restored to its original condition or replaced.
3.12
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ROOM PRECAUTIONS
3.13.1
No ductwork or piping for heating, refrigeration or any other piping systems not included
as part of the electrical work will be allowed to be installed in any switchgear room,
transformer vault, telephone room or electric closet.
3.13.2
In Mechanical Rooms, where piping runs over motor control centers or other electrical
equipment, provide a sheet metal shield or gutter. Submit shop drawings showing proposed
shielding at each location.
3.13
3.13.1
Refer to Division 9 Section "PAINTING" for field painting requirements.
3.13.2
Damage and Touch Up: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with
materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
Page | 15 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.14
CLEANING
3.14.1
3.15
Refer to Division-15 Section, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing, for requirements for
cleaning filters, strainers, and mechanical systems prior to final acceptance.
INITIAL OPERATION OF SYSTEMS
3.15.1
After installation is complete, operate systems for time required to complete tests specified
under Testing, Balancing and Adjusting, to demonstrate performance in accordance with
design requirements and to provide instruction and training of Owner's designated
personnel.
3.15.2
Obtain approval of commencement date.
3.16
NOISE AND VIBRATION
3.16.1
Equipment is to operate without objectionable noise or vibration under all conditions of

load. Noise and/or vibration noticeable outside a room in which moving equipment is
installed, or annoyingly noticeable inside the room, will be considered objectionable.
3.16.2
Noise level resulting from equipment and heard in the same building or nearby buildings is
not to exceed 40 decibels as measured with a standard sound level meter on the 'A' scale.
3.16.3
Conditions considered objectionable are to be corrected by approved means and as directed.
3.16.4
Noise is to be corrected by the addition of sound attenuators in ducts, internal duct lining,
installation of sound barriers or dampeners on walls and/or ceilings of equipment rooms or
by other method to produce satisfactory noise levels.
3.16.5
Vibration control is to be accomplished by the use of approved vibration isolators applied

and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as specified in Division 15
Section "VIBRATION CONTROL ".
3.17
TRAINING
3.17.1
Instruct and train Owner's designated personnel in the operation and maintenance of every
part, device and piece of equipment in the systems, with emphasis on proper start-up and
shut-down procedures, preventive maintenance and lubrication procedures with
recommended lubricants, overhaul and maintenance methods, adjustment and calibration of
instruments and controls, use of special tools and safe practices. The training shall be
carried out by systems suppliers or their authorized agents. The training period shall be as
recommended by systems manufacturers and approved by Contracting Officer.
3.17.2
All expenses for training Owner's personnel is to be at Contractor's own account.

Page | 16 of 16
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15100 - VALVES

PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL
REFERENCES
SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
15100-2/7
15100-2/7
15100-2/7
15100-3/7
15100-3/7
PART 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
PRODUCTS
VALVE FEATURES
GATE VALVES
GLOBE VALVES
CHECK VALVES
FOOT VALVES
FLUSH VALVES
FLOAT VALVES
DRAIN VALVES
BALL VALVES
VALVE BOXES
15100-3/7
15100-4/7
15100-4/7
15100-4/7
15100-5/7
15100-5/7
15100-5/7
15100-5/7
15100-5/7
15100-5/7
15100-6/7
PART 3
3.1
3.2
EXECUTION
VALVE INSTALLATION
15100-6/7
15100-6/7
15100-7/7
Section 15100 - Valves
Page | 1 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15100 - VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)
ASME B1.20.1
ASME B16.3
ASME B16.23
(1983; R 1992) Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)

(1992) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings
(1992; Errata Jan 1994) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings DWV
(1991; Errata Jun 91) Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges, Class 150, 300,
400,600, 900, 1500 and 2500, and Flanged Fittings, Class 150 and 300
Building Services Piping - ASME Code for Pressure Piping.
ASME B16.24
ASME B31.9
ASTM A 126
ASTM B 62
Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.
Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.

SASO 119/1998
SASO 120/1995
SASO 121/1995
Valves for liquefied petroleum gas cylinders for domestic use.

Methods of test for gas pressure regulators for valves of liquefied petroleum gas
cylinders.
Low pressure regulators for valves of liquefied petroleum gas cylinders.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
1.2.1
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including body material,
valve design, pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, seating
materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and
installation instructions.
1.3 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE:

1.3.1
Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's original new and unopened packages bearing
manufacturer's name and label. Ensure valves are dry and internally protected against rust
and corrosion. Protect valve ends against damage to threads, flange faces, and weld-end
preps.
Page | 2 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.3.2
Protect valves from weather. Store valves indoors. Maintain valve temperature higher than
ambient dew point temperature. Support valve off the ground or pavement in watertight
enclosures.
1.3.3
Use a sling to handle valves whose size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to
avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging
points.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

1.4.1
Comply with the requirements ASME B31.9 and applicable Standards of MSS.
1.4.2
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of valves, of types

and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than 5 years, and shall be subject to approval of Contracting Officer.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

1.5.1
Work shall be installed in accordance with UPC, unless otherwise stated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VALVE FEATURES:
2.1.1
General: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping, and ASME B31.1 for
power piping.
2.1.2
Valve Design: Valves shall have rising stem, or rising outside screw and yoke stems;
except, non-rising stem valves may be used where headroom prevents full extension of
rising stems.
2.1.3
Pressure and Temperature Ratings shall be as scheduled, and as required to suit system
pressures and temperatures.
2.1.4
Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.
2.1.5
Operators: Provide the following special operator features, where required:

A. Handwheels: Fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn.
B.
Lever Handle: On quarter-turn valves 150 mm and smaller, except for plug valves.
Provide one wrench for every 10 plug valves.
Page | 3 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
C.
Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves 63.5 mm and larger, install 1829 mm or higher
above finished floor elevation. Extend chains to an elevation of 1524 mm above
finished floor elevation.
2.1.6
Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated, provide extended stems arranged to receive
insulation.
2.1.7
Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.
2.1.8
End Connections: As specified in the individual valve specifications.

A. Threads: Comply with ANSI B2.1.
2.2
B.
Flanges: Comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron, ANSI B16.5 for steel, and ANSI
B16.24 for bronze valves.
C.
Solder-Joint: Comply with ANSI B16.18.
GATE VALVES:
2.2.1
Gate Valves 50 mm and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, body and bonnet of ASTM B 62
cast bronze, threaded or solder ends, solid disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing
gland, Teflon-impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel. Class 150 valves
meeting the above shall be used where pressure requires.
2.2.2
Gate Valves 50 mm and Larger: MSS SP-70; Class 125 iron body, bronze mounted, with
body and bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B, flanged ends, and Teflon
impregnated packing and two-piece backing gland assembly.
2.3
GLOBE VALVES:
2.3.1
Globe Valves 50 mm and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, body and screwed bonnet of
ASTM B 62 cast bronze, threaded or solder ends, brass or replaceable composition disc,
copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, Teflon impregnated packing, and malleable
iron handwheel. Class 150 valves meeting the above shall be used where pressure requires.
2.3.2
Globe Valves 63 mm and Larger: MSS SP-85; Class 125 iron body and bolted bonnet
conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B, outside screw and yoke, bronze mounted, flanged
ends, and Teflon impregnated packing and 2-piece backing gland assembly.
Page | 4 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.4
CHECK VALVES:
2.4.1
Swing Check Valves 50 mm and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, cast bronze body and cap
conforming to ASTM B62, horizontal swing, Y-pattern, with a bronze disc, and having
threaded or solder ends. Valve shall be capable of being re-ground while the valve remains
in the line. Class 150 valves meeting the above specifications may be used where pressure
requires or Class 125 are not available.
2.4.2
Swing Check Valves 63 mm and Larger: MSS SP-71; Class 125, cast iron body and bolted
cap conforming to ASTM A126, Class B, horizontal swing, with a bronze disc or cast iron
disc with bronze disc ring, and flanged ends. Valve shall be capable of being refitted while
the valve remains in the line.
2.5
2.5.1
2.6
2.6.1
2.7
2.7.1
2.8
2.8.1
2.9
2.9.1
FOOT VALVES:
Manufacturer's standard models, of sizes as shown on the drawings. Operating range
pressure shall be up to 34 bar. Non-sticking, brass spool poppet design. Heavy red brass
body for maximum strength and No.6 perforation. Brass screen strainer and rubber facing
for use with water.
FLUSH VALVES:
Automatic flush (drain) valves shall be installed at the end of each lateral in which bubblers
are installed and where indicated.
FLOAT VALVES:
For water level in water system with working pressure up to and greater than 1.5 kp/cm
(1.5 bar) shall be bronze gate provided with bronze rod and bronze float ball attachment.
The ball shall be made of copper.
DRAIN VALVES:
Drain Valves: Bronze body and angle hose end valve with composition discs and rising
stems; working pressure shall be 10.5 kg/cm.
BALL VALVES:
Ball Valves 25 mm and Smaller: Rated for 150 psi saturated steam pressure, 400 psi WOG
pressure; 2-piece construction, bronze body conforming to ASTM B 62, standard (or
regular) port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable Teflon or TFE seats and seals, blowout
proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.
Page | 5 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.9.2
Provide solder ends for condenser water, chilled water, and domestic hot and cold water
service; threaded ends for heating hot water and low pressure steam.
2.9.3
Ball Valves 32 mm to 50 mm: Rated for 150 psi saturated steam pressure, 400 psi WOG
pressure; 3-piece construction, bronze body conforming to ASTM B 62, conventional port,
chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable Teflon or TFE seats and seals, blowout proof stem,
and vinyl-covered steel handle. Valve ends as above.
2.10
VALVE BOXES:
2.10.1
Shall be precast or of cast-in-place reinforced concrete with cast iron watertight seald cover
and as shown on the drawings. Concrete shall be Class 30 conforming to Section 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE, 30 MPa compressive strength at 28 days, with type V
cement.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
VALVE INSTALLATION:
General Application:
A. Use gate, ball and butterfly valves for shut-off duty; globe and ball for throttling duty.
Refer to drawings and piping system specification sections for specific valve
application and arrangement. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate
support where necessary.
B.
Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment in a manner to allow
equipment removal without system shut-down. Unions are not required on flanged
devices.
C.
Install 3-valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling type valves.
D.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.
E.
Swing check valves shall be installed in horizontal position with hinge pin level.
F.
Solder, threaded and flanged connections shall be as per the approved trade practice.
Page | 6 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.2
3.2.1
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

Testing: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final
adjusting and balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop
leaks; replace valve if leak persists.
Page | 7 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15135 - METERS AND GAGES

PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
15135-2/8
15135-2/8
15135-2/8
15135-2/8
15135-3/8
PART 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
PRODUCTS
THERMOMETERS, GENERAL
LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
DIRECT MOUNTING FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL
THERMOMETERS
INSERTION DIAL THERMOMETERS
THERMOMETER WELLS
PRESSURE GAGES
PRESSURE-GAGE ACCESSORIES
TEST PLUGS
FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS, GENERAL
WAFER-ORIFICE FLOW ELEMENTS
VENTURI FLOW METERS
FLOW INDICATORS
15135-3/8
15135-3/8
15135-3/8
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
PART 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
EXECUTION
METER AND GAGE APPLICATIONS
METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL
THERMOMETER INSTALLATION
PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION
TEST PLUG INSTALLATION
FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEM, FLOW ELEMENT
AND METER INSTALLATION
CONNECTIONS
Section 15135 - Meters And Gages
15135-4/8
15135-4/8
15135-4/8
15135-4/8
15135-4/8
15135-5/8
15135-5/8
15135-5/8
15135-5/8
15135-6/8
15135-6/8
15135-6/8
15135-6/8
15135-6/8
15135-6/8
15135-7/8
15135-7/8
15135-7/8
15135-8/8
Page | 1 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15135 - METERS AND GAGES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1.1.
1.2
1.2.1
This Section includes meters and gages used in mechanical systems.
1.2.2
Related Sections: Division 15 Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section.
A. Meters and gages furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as

part of the equipment assembly in other Division 15 Sections.
B.
1.3
1.3.1
Division 15 Section "Fire Pumps" for flow meters for testing fire pumps.
SUBMITTALS
General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections. Product data for each type of meter, gage, and fitting specified.
Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves, certified where indicated.
Submit a meter and gage schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, scale range,
location, and accessories for each meter and gage. Submit product certificates, certifying
accuracies under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified
requirements, from each manufacturers of meters and gages. Submit "Operating and
Maintenance Manuals" that include data for the following:
A.
B.
C.
D.
Test plugs.
Flow measuring systems.
Flow meters.
Btu meters.
Page | 2 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1
Comply with applicable portions of American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

and Instrument Society of America (ISA) standards pertaining to construction and
installation of meters and gages. Design Criteria: The Drawings indicate types, sizes,
capacities, ranges, profiles, connections, and dimensional requirements of meters and gages
and are based on the specific manufacturer types and models indicated. Meters and gages
having equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered,
provided that deviations do not change the design concept or intended performance as
judged by the Contracting Officer. The burden of proof for equality of meters and gages is
on the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
THERMOMETERS, GENERAL
2.1.1.
Scale Range: Provide thermometers with dual-scale temperature ranges for services listed
as follows:
A. Domestic Hot Water: 0 to 115 deg C, with 1 degree scale divisions (30 to 240 deg F,
with 2 degree scale divisions).
2.1.2.
2.2
2.2.1
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to
maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.
LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
Description: ASTM E 1, liquid-in-glass thermometer. Case to be Die-cast and aluminum
finished in baked-epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured, 230 mm (9") long. Adjustable
Joint to be Finished to match case, 180 degree (3.1rad) adjustment in vertical plane, 360
degree (6.3rad) adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device. Tube is Red-reading
mercury-filled with magnifying lens. Scale to be Satin-faced nonreflective aluminium with
permanently etched markings. Stem shall be Copper-plated, steel, aluminium, or brass for a
separable socket of length to suit installation.
Page | 3 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.3
2.3.1
2.4
2.4.1
2.5
2.5.1
2.6
2.6.1
DIRECT-MOUNTING FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS

Description: Vapour-actuated universal-angle dial thermometer. Case shall be Drawn steel
or cast aluminum, with 115 mm (4-1/2") diameter glass lens. Adjustable Joint shall be
finished to match case, 180 degree (3.1rad) adjustment in vertical plane, 360 degree
(6.3rad) adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device. Thermal Bulb shall be
Copper with phosphor-bronze Bourdon pressure tube. Movement shall be brass, precision
geared. Scale shall be Progressive satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently
etched markings. Stem shall be Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for a separable
socket of length to suit installation.
INSERTION DIAL THERMOMETERS
Bimetal dial thermometer. Dial shall be 25 mm (1") diameter. Case shall be Stainless
steel. Stem shall be Dustproof and leakproof 3 mm (1/8") diameter tapered-end stem with
nominal length of 125 mm (5").
THERMOMETER WELLS
Description: Brass or stainless-steel thermometer well. Pressure Rating shall not be less
than piping system design pressure. Stem Length shall extend 50 mm (2") into fluid. Stem
Length shall extend to center of pipe. Extension for Insulated Piping shall be 50 mm (2")
nominal, but not less than thickness of insulation. Threaded Cap Nut shall be with chain
permanently fastened to well and cap.
PRESSURE GAGES
ASME B40.1, Grade A phosphor-bronze Bourdon-tube pressure gage, with bottom
connection. Case shall be Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 115 mm (4-1/2") diameter
glass lens. Connector shall be Brass, 6 mm (1/4") NPS. Scale shall be white-coated
aluminum, with permanently etched markings. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 1 percent of
range span. Range shall conform to the following; and provide dual readings:
A. Vacuum: 30 inches Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure.
B. Vacuum: 100 kPa of vacuum to 100 kPa of pressure.
C Fluids Under Pressure: 2 times operating pressure.
2.7
2.7.1
PRESSURE-GAGE ACCESSORIES
Syphons shall be 6 mm (1/4") straight coil of brass tubing with threads on each end.
Snubbers shall be 6 mm (1/4") brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous-metal disc of
material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
Page | 4 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.8
TEST PLUGS
2.8.1
Nickel-plated brass-body test plugs in 15 mm (1/2") fitting. Body shall have a length as
required to extend beyond insulation. Pressure Rating shall be 3450 kPa (500 psig)
minimum. Core Inserts shall be 2 self-sealing valve types, suitable for inserting a 3 mm
(1/8") outside-diameter probe from a dial thermometer or pressure gage. Core Material
shall be according to the following for fluid and temperature range:
A. Air, Water, Oil, and Gas: Minus 7 to 93 deg C (20 to 200 deg F), neoprene rubber.
B.
2.8.2
Air and Water: Minus 35 to 136 deg C (minus 30 deg to 275 deg F), ethylenepropylene-diene-terpolymer (EPDM) rubber.
Test-Plug Cap shall be gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain. Test Kit shall
consist of 1 pressure gage and gage adapter with probe, 2 bimetal dial thermometers and a
carrying case. Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges shall be approximately 2 times
systems operating conditions.
2.9 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS, GENERAL

2.9.1
Flow-measuring systems include calibrated flow element, separate meter, hoses or tubing,
valves, fittings, and conversion chart that is compatible with flow element, meter, and
system fluid.
2.9.2
Flow range of flow-measuring element and meter covers operating range of equipment or
system where used.
2.10
WAFER-ORIFICE FLOW ELEMENTS
2.10.1
2.11
Wafer-orifice, differential-pressure-design, orifice-insert flow element made for installation

between pipe flanges. Construction shall be cast-iron body, brass valves with integral check
valves and caps, and calibrated nameplate. Pressure rating shall be 2070 kPa (300 psig).
Temperature rating shall be 120 deg C (250 deg F).
VENTURI FLOW ELEMENTS
2.11.1
Venturi differential-pressure-design flow-element fitting made for installation in piping.

Construction shall be bronze, brass, or factory-primed steel, with brass fittings and attached
tag with flow conversion data. Include ends threaded for 50 mm (2") and smaller elements
and flanged or welded for 65 mm (2-1/2")and larger elements. Pressure rating shall be 1725
kPa (250 psig). Temperature rating shall be 120 deg C (250 deg F).
Page | 5 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.12
FLOW INDICATORS
2.12.1
Instrument for visual verification of flow made for installation in piping systems that
measures flow directly in L/s (gallons/minute). Construction shall be bronze or stainlesssteel body with sight glass and plastic pelton-wheel indicator. Pressure rating shall be 860
kPa (125 psig). Temperature rating shall be 93 deg C (200 deg F).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.3
METER AND GAGE APPLICATIONS

General: Where indicated, install meters and gages of types, sizes, capacities, and with
features indicated.
METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL
Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions for
applications where used.
THERMOMETER INSTALLATION
3.3.1
Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
3.3.2
Install in the following locations and elsewhere as indicated:

A. At domestic hot water as shown on drawings
3.3.3
Thermometer Wells: Install in vertical position in piping tees where thermometers are
indicated.
A. Install wells with stem extending minimum of 50 mm (2") into fluid.
B. Install wells with stem extending to centre of pipe.
C. Fill wells with oil or graphite and secure caps.
3.4 PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION

3.4.1
Install pressure gages in piping tee with pressure gage valve located on pipe at most
readable position.
Page | 6 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.4.2
Install in the following locations and elsewhere as indicated:

A. At suction and discharge of each pump.
B. At building water service entrance.
3.4.3
3.5
3.5.1
3.6
Pressure Gage Needle Valves: Install in piping tee with snubber. Install syphon instead of
snubber for steam pressure gages.
TEST PLUG INSTALLATION
Install test plugs in piping tees where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position.
Secure cap.
FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEM, FLOW ELEMENT AND METER INSTALLATION
3.6.1
General: Install flow meters for piping systems located in accessible locations at most
readable position.
3.6.2
Locations: Install flow measuring elements and meters at discharge of each pump, at inlet
of each hydronic coil in built-up central systems, and elsewhere as indicated.
3.6.3
Differential-Pressure-Type Flow Elements: Install minimum straight lengths of pipe

upstream and downstream from element as prescribed by the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
3.6.4
Wafer-Orifice-Type Flow Elements: Install between two Class 125 pipe flanges,
ASME B16.1, cast iron for ferrous piping or ASME B16.24, bronze, for copper tubing.
3.6.5
Install connection fittings for attachment to portable flow meters in readily accessible
locations.
3.6.6
Permanently Mounted Meters for Flow Elements: Install meters on walls or brackets in
accessible locations.
3.6.7
Install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow elements and meters as
prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7
CONNECTIONS
3.7.1
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. The Drawings
indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
3.7.2
Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow servicing and
maintenance.
Page | 7 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.7.3
Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters.
3.7.4
Connect flow-meter transmitters to meters.
3.7.5
Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated meters and devices.
3.8
3.8.1
Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation.
3.8.2
Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
3.8.3
Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gages and factory-finished surfaces. Replace
cracked and broken windows and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer's
touchup paint.
Page | 8 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15145 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
MSS STANDARD COMPLIANCE
SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
15145-2/10
15145-2/10
15145-2/10
15145-3/10
15145-3/10
PART 2
2.13
2.14
2.15
PRODUCTS
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS, GENERAL
MANUFACTURED UNITS
15145-3/10
15145-4/10
15145-4/10
15145-4/10
PART 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
EXECUTION
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
SPACING OF PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
METAL FABRICATION
ADJUSTING
PAINTING
15145-5/10
15145-5/10
15145-5/10
15145-7/10
15145-9/10
15145-9/10
15145-9/10
15145-9/10
Section 15145 - Hangers And Supports
Page | 1 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15145 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
1.2.1
This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical systems piping and equipment.
1.2.2
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
A. Division 15 Section "Vibration Control" for vibration-isolation hangers and supports.
1.2.3
Approved types of pipe hangers, supports and anchors are shown on the Drawings, and
described in this section. Contractor may provide other types subject to approval by the
1.2.4
Pipe supports and anchors are to be provided following the requirements of this section and
other Division-15 sections irrespective of whether they are indicated on the Drawings or
not.
1.3
MSS STANDARD COMPLIANCE
1.3.1
Terminology used in this Section is defined in MSS SP-90.
1.3.2
Provide pipe hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58.
1.3.3
Select and apply pipe hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-69.
1.3.4
Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-89.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
1.4.1
General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
1.4.2
Product data for each type of hanger and support.
Page | 2 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.4.3
Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's Figure No., size,
location, and features for each required pipe hanger and support.
1.4.4
Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements
specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
1.4.5
Shop drawings for each type of hanger and support, indicating dimensions, weights,
required clearances, and methods of component assembly.
1.5
1.5.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to AWS D1.1 "Structural
Welding Code--Steel".
A. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone re-certification.
1.5.2
Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications".
1.5.3
NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 13 for hangers and supports used as components
of fire protection systems.
1.5.4
UL and FM Compliance: Hangers, supports, and components include listing and labelling
by UL and FM where used for fire protection piping systems.
1.5.5
Listing and Labeling: Provide hangers and supports that are listed and labelled as defined
in NFPA 70, Article 100.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS - GENERAL
2.1.1
Hangers and supports are to allow adjustment of slope of piping and removal without
dismantling pipes.
2.1.2
Hangers and supports to be designed and tested to sustain load 8 times actual supported
load.
2.1.3
Hangers and supports to be steel with smooth flat bearing surfaces, to carry weight of
piping and contents without sagging, swaying, vibrating or deforming, and to allow free
movement of pipes due to expansion and contraction without noise or damage to piping or
construction.
Page | 3 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.1.4
Hangers and supports to be complete with all necessary structural steel, rods, bolts, nuts,
turnbuckles and other components.
2.1.5
Select only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service.
2.1.6
Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit
around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping.
2.1.7
Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper-piping systems.
2.2
2.2.1
MANUFACTURED UNITS
Hangers, Supports, and Components: Factory-fabricated according to MSS SP-58.
A. Components include galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment
that will not have a field-applied finish.
B.
Pipe attachments include nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where

attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
2.2.2
Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with

pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where
used. Fasteners for fire protection systems include UL listing and FM approval.
2.2.3
Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Fasteners for fire
protection systems include UL listing and FM approval.
2.3
2.3.1
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.
2.3.2
Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex-head, track bolts and nuts.
2.3.3
Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
2.3.4
Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink, nonmetallic.

A. Characteristics include post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement-type
grout that is nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous and is recommended for both
interior and exterior applications.
B.
Design Mix: 34.5 MPa (5000 psi), 28-day compressive strength.
C.
Water: Potable.
Page | 4 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
3.1.1
Specific hanger requirements are specified in the Section specifying the equipment and
systems.
3.1.2
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified
in piping specification Sections.
3.1.3
Install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping.
3.1.4
Do not use wire, rope, wood, chain, strap or perforated metal to support piping, and do not
support piping from other piping.
3.2
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
3.2.1
General: Comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and
attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. Provide
intermediate steel where required to transfer loads to areas of structure where they can be
safely accommodated.
3.2.2
Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping supported together on fieldfabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers where possible. Keep pipes in position with Ubolts. Lines subject to extreme thermal expansion to be free to slide or roll.
3.2.3
Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69, and the requirements
of this section. Specified maximum spans are for straight runs of pipe.
3.2.4
Where pipes of various sizes are supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for
smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified
above for individual pipe hangers. Support vertical pipe risers independently of adjacent
horizontal hangers.
3.2.5
Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Space attachments within
maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at
concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at
changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten
insert to forms. Install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
3.2.6
Install concrete inserts in new construction prior to placing concrete.
Page | 5 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.2.7
Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and

completely cured. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's
operating manual. Do not use in lightweight concrete slabs or in concrete slabs less than
100 mm (4") thick.
3.2.8
Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install according to fastener manufacturer's written instructions. Do not use in
lightweight concrete slabs or in concrete slabs less than 100 mm (4") thick.
3.2.9
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
3.2.10
Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Field-fabricate from ASTM A 36 steel shapes selected for
loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.
3.2.11
Support fire protection system piping independent of other piping.
3.2.12
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, permit
freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and facilitate action of expansion joints,
expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
3.2.13
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. Support piping
independently of equipment.
3.2.14
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so that
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" is not
exceeded.
3.2.15
Insulated Piping: Protect pipe insulation at hangers and supports from weight or movement
of pipe. Provide firm attachment to pipe. Comply with the following installation
requirements.
A. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting
through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9.
B.
Saddles: Install protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor
barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match
adjoining pipe insulation.
Page | 6 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
C.
Shields: Install MSS Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields to span an arc of 180 degrees (3.1 rad) and have dimensions in mm (inches)
not less than the following:
PIPE SIZE
(mm)
8 to 90
100
125 and 150
200 to 350
400 to 600
LENGTH
(mm)
THICKNESS
(mm)
300
300
450
600
600
1.22
1.52
1.52
1.91
2.67
D. Pipes 200 mm (8") and Larger: Include wood inserts.
3.3
3.3.1
E.
Insert Material: Length at least as long as the protective shield.
F.
Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping.
SPACING OF PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

Steel Pipe Supports:
A. Support horizontal steel pipes at intervals not exceeding maximum support spacing
and by hanger rod of minimum size as follows:
B.
PIPE
DIAMETER
(mm)
MAXIMUM SUPPORT
SPACING
(m)
MINIMUM SIZE OF
HANGER ROD
(mm)
15
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
200
1.5
1.8
2.0
2.5
2.7
3.0
3.3
3.6
4.2
4.8
5.2
5.8
10
10
10
10
10
10
13
13
16
16
22
25
Support vertical steel pipes at a minimum of every storey height.
Page | 7 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.3.2
Copper Pipe Supports:

A. Support copper pipes at intervals not exceeding maximum support spacing and by
hanger rod of minimum size as follows:
PIPE DIAMETER
(mm)
42 and smaller
54
67
76.1
108-133
B.
3.3.3
MAXIMUM SUPPORT SPACING

HORIZONTAL
VERTICAL
PIPES
PIPES
(m)
(m)
1.8
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
1.2
each storey
"
"
"
MINIMUM
DIAMETER OF
ROD HANGER
(mm)
10
10
13
13
16
Line iron supports with felt between pipe and support to prevent electrolytic
corrosion.
PVC Pipe Supports:

A. Support above ground PVC pipes at intervals not exceeding maximum spacing as
follows:
PIPE DIAMETER
(mm)
15
20
25
32
40
50
82
110
160
MAXIMUM SUPPORT SPACING

HORIZONTAL
VERTICAL
PIPES
PIPES
(mm)
(mm)
600
700
750
800
900
1050
1350
1500
1800
1200
1400
1500
1600
1800
2100
2700
3000
3600
B.
Above ground PVC pipes to be well supported but not tightly clipped to allow
freedom of movement except at anchors. Use soft rubber or other flexible membrane
between pipe and clip. Anchor at changes in direction and at valves. Accommodate
thermal movement by expansion joints or bellows. Comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for above ground supports.
C.
Anchor underground PVC pipes at changes in direction and at valves and stop ends.
Page | 8 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.5
3.5.1
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support
equipment above floor.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment, and make a smooth bearing surface.
METAL FABRICATION
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe and equipment supports.
3.5.2
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot
be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.
3.5.3
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for manual shielded metal-arc
welding, appearance and quality of welds, methods used in correcting welding work, and
the following:
A. Use materials and methods that minimise distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
B.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
C.
Remove welding flux immediately.
D. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing, and
so that contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.6
3.6.1
3.7
3.7.1
ADJUSTING
Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to
achieve indicated slope of pipe.
PAINTING
Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas
immediately after erection of hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
A. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm (2.0 mils)
3.7.2
Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section
"Painting"
Page | 9 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.7.3
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
Page | 10 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15241 - VIBRATION CONTROL

PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
SUBMITTALS
15241-2/7
15241-2/7
15241-2/7
15241-3/7
15241-3/7
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
VIBRATION CONTROL MATERIALS AND
SUPPORTS UNITS
15241-3/7
EXECUTION
INSPECTION
PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS
APPLICATIONS
INSTALLATION
15241-5/7
15241-5/7
15241-6/7
15241-6/7
15241-6/7
15241-7/7
PART 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Section 15241 - Vibration Control
15241-4/7
Page | 1 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15241 - VIBRATION CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1.1
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section.
1.1.2
This section is Division 15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section, and is part of
each Division 15 section making reference to vibration control products specified herein.
1.2
SUMMARY
1.2.1
Extent of vibration control work required by this section is indicated on Drawings and
schedules, and/or specified in other Division 15 sections.
1.2.2
Types of vibration control products specified in this section include the following:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
J.
K.
L.
M.
1.2.3
1.2.4
Neoprene Pads.
Vibration Isolation Springs.
All-Directional Anchors.
Neoprene Mountings.
Spring Isolators, Free-Standing.
Spring Isolators, Housed.
Spring Isolators, Vertically-Restrained.
Equipment Rails.
Fabricated Equipment Bases.
Roof-Curb Isolators.
Isolation Hangers.
Flexible Pipe Connectors.
Vibration control products furnished as integral part of factory-fabricated equipment, are

specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 15 sections.
Refer to other Division 15 sections for equipment foundations, hangers, sealants, gaskets,
and other work related to vibration control work.
1.2.5
Refer to other Division 15 sections for requirements of electrical connections to equipment

isolated on vibration control products.
1.2.6
Refer to other Division 15 sections for requirements of duct connections to air handling
equipment isolated on vibration control products.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Page | 2 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.3.1
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of vibration control

products, of type, size, and capacity required, whose products have been in satisfactory use
in similar service for not less than 5 years.
A. Except as otherwise indicated, obtain vibration control products from single
manufacturer.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
1.4.1
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions
for each type of vibration control product. Submit schedule showing size, type, deflection,
and location for each product furnished.
1.4.2
Shop Drawings:
Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating
dimensions, weights, required clearances, and method of assembly of components. Detail
bases, and show location of equipment anchoring points, coordinated with equipment
manufacturer's shop drawings.
1.4.3
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for each type of vibration control product.
Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance
with requirements of Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VIBRATION CONTROL MATERIALS AND SUPPORTS UNITS
2.1.1
Neoprene Pads: Oil-resistant neoprene sheets, of manufacturer's standard hardness and

cross-ribbed or waffled pattern.
2.1.2
Vibration Isolation Springs: Wound-steel compression springs, or high-strength spring

alloy steel; with spring diameter not less than 0.8 of compressed height of spring at rated
loads. Provide minimum additional travel to solid, equal to 50% of rated deflection.
Provide spring wire with elastic limit stress exceeding at solid deflection.
2.1.3
All-Directional Anchors: Provide all-directional acoustical pipe anchor consisting of

telescopic arrangement of 2 sizes of steel tubing separated by minimum 12.7 mm (1/2")
thickness of heavy-duty neoprene and duck, or neoprene isolation material. Provide
vertical restraints by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction.
Design for maximum 500 psi load on isolation materials, and provide for equal resistance
in any direction. Equip anchor with threaded hole on top and 2 holes in base plate for
bolting down; or provide welding provisions top and bottom, if indicated.
Page | 3 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.1.4
Neoprene Mountings: Provide neoprene mountings consisting of neoprene element bonded

between 2 steel plates that are neoprene-covered to prevent corrosion. Provide minimum
rated deflection of 8.9 mm (0.35"). Provide threaded hole in upper plate and 2 holes in
base plate for securing to equipment and to substrate.
2.1.5
Spring Isolators, Free-Standing: Except as otherwise indicated, provide vibration isolation

spring between top and bottom loading plates, and with pad-type isolator bonded to bottom
of bottom loading plate. Include studs or cups to ensure centering of spring on plates.
Include leveling bolt with lock nuts and washers, centered in top plate, arranged for
leveling and anchoring supported equipment as indicated.
A. Include holes in bottom plate for bolting unit to substrate as indicated.
2.1.6
Spring Isolators, Housed: Except as otherwise indicated, provide vibration isolation spring
between telescoping steel housings with top and bottom loading plates, and with pad-type
isolator bonded to bottom of loading plate. Include resilient inserts to separate and guide
telescoping housings.
A. Equip top loading plate with equipment anchorages as indicated or as required for
support and attachment.
B.
Include pad-type isolator bonded to top of top loading plate, except on units with
leveling bolts.
C.
Include holes in bottom plate for bolting unit to substrate.
2.1.7
Spring Isolators, Vertically-Restrained: Provide spring isolators in housing that includes

vertical limit stops. Design housing to act as blocking during erection, and with installed
height and operating height being equal. Maintain 12.7 mm (1/2") minimum clearance
around restraining bolts, and between housing and springs. Design so limit stops are out of
contact during normal operation.
2.1.8
Equipment Rails: Where rails or beams are indicated for use with isolator units to support
equipment, provide steel beams complying with ASTM A36, with minimum depth of
150 mm (6") or 0.10 x span of beam between isolators (whichever is greater). Provide
welded bracket at each end of beams, and anchor each end to spring isolator unit. Provide
bolt holes in beams matching anchor bolt holes in equipment. Provide beams of section
modulus indicated or, if not indicated, selected for normal-weight equipment loading to
limit static load stress to 110,000 kPa (16,000 psi).
2.1.9 Fabricated Equipment Bases: Where supplementary bases are indicated for use with isolator
units to support equipment (base not integral with equipment), provide welded rectangular
unit, fabricated of structural steel shapes, plates and bars complying with ASTM A36, as
shown. Provide welded support brackets at points indicated, and anchor base to spring
isolator units. Except as otherwise indicated, arrange brackets to result in lowest possible
mounting height for equipment, but provide minimum of 25 mm (1"). Provide bolt holes in
base matching anchor bolt holes in equipment.
Page | 4 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
A. Where indicated, provide for auxiliary motor slide base under motor or motor slide
rails for adjusting belt tension. Design primary base for bolting of rails or slide base
in position.
B.
Where sizes of base framing members are not indicated, fabricate base with depth of
structure not less than 0.10 x longest span of base, rigidly braced to support equipment
without deflections or distortions which would be detrimental to equipment or
equipment performance.
2.1.10
Roof-Curb Isolators: Fabricated frame units sized to match roof curbs as shown, formed
with isolation springs between extruded aluminum upper and lower sections, which are
shaped and positioned to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Provide continuous airtight and
waterproof seal between upper and lower extrusions. Include provisions for anchorage of
frame unit to roof curb, and for anchorage of equipment to unit.
2.1.11
Isolation Hangers: Hanger units formed with brackets and including manufacturer's
standard compression isolators of type indicated. Design brackets for 3 times rated loading
of units. Fabricate units to accept misalignment of 15 degrees off center in any direction
before contacting hanger box, and for use with either rod or strap type members, and
including acoustical washers to prevent metal-to-metal contacts.
A. Provide neoprene element, with minimum deflection of 8.9 mm (0.35"), securely
retained in hanger box.
2.1.12
Flexible Pipe Connectors:

A. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Provide neoprene or EDPM construction consisting of
multiple plies of nylon tire cord fabric and elastomer molded and cured in hydraulic
rubber presses. Provide straight or elbow connector as indicated, rated at 860 kPa
(125 psi) at 104 deg C (220 deg F).
B.
Flexible pipe connectors to have screwed ends for pipes 50 mm (2") and under and
flanged ends for pipes over 50 mm (2").
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
INSPECTION
Examine areas and conditions under which vibration control units are to be installed. Do
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
acceptable to Installer.
Page | 5 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.2
PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS
3.2.1
General: Comply with minimum static deflections recommended by ASHRAE, for

selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated.
3.2.2
Manufacturer's Recommendations:
Except as otherwise indicated, comply with
manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation
materials and units.
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.4
APPLICATIONS
General: Except as otherwise indicated, select vibration control products in accordance
with latest edition of ASHRAE Handbook, HVAC applications, Chapter 34 "Sound and
Vibration Control". Where more than one type of product is offered, selection is
Contractor's option, subject to approval of Contracting Officer.
Piping: For piping connected to equipment mounted on vibration control products, install
isolation hangers for first 3 points of support for pipe sizes 100 mm (4") and less, for first 4
points of support for pipe sizes 125 mm (5") through 200 mm (8"), and for first 6 points of
support for pipe sizes 250 mm (10") and over.
INSTALLATION
3.4.1
General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for

installation and load application to vibration control materials and units. Adjust to ensure
that units have equal deflection, do not bottom out under loading, and are not shortcircuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices
intended for temporary support during installation.
3.4.2
Install units between substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to
prevent displacement by normal forces.
3.4.3
Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim
units as required where substrate is not level.
3.4.4
Install inertia base frames on isolator units as indicated, so that minimum of 25 mm (1")
clearance below base will result when frame is filled with concrete and supported
equipment has been installed and loaded for operation.
3.4.5
For air handling equipment, install thrust restraints as indicated, and also wherever thrust
exceeds 10% of equipment weight.
3.4.6
Locate isolation hangers as near overhead support structure as possible.
3.4.7
Weld riser isolator units in place as required to prevent displacement from loading and
operations.
Page | 6 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.4.8
3.5
Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and
parallel to equipment shafts wherever possible.
3.5.1
Upon completion of vibration control work, prepare report showing measured equipment
deflections for each major item of equipment.
3.5.2
Clean each vibration control unit, and verify that each is working freely, and that there is no
dirt or debris in immediate vicinity of unit that could possibly short-circuit unit isolation.
Page | 7 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15250 - THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL
REFERENCES
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
GENERAL QUALITY CONTROL
SUBMITTALS
STORAGE
15250-2/21
15250-2/21
15250-3/21
15250-4/21
15250-4/21
15250-5/21
PART 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCTS
GENERAL MATERIALS
PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS
DUCT INSULATION MATERIALS
EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS
15250-5/21
15250-5/21
15250-6/21
15250-7/21
15250-8/21
PART 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
EXECUTION
APPLICATION - GENERAL
PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
DUCT INSULATION INSTALLATION
EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION
15250-8/21
15250-8/21
15250-9/21
15250-16/21
15250-20/21
Page | 1 of 21
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15250 - THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
ASTM A167
ASTM A580
ASTM B209
ASTM C449
ASTM C547
ASTM C553
ASTM C612
ASTM C920
ASTM C921
ASTM E84
(1994) Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel

Plate, Sheet, and Strip
(1993) Stainless and Heat Resisting Steel Wire
(1995) Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
(1988) Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and
Finishing Cement
(1995) Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation
(1992) Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications
(1993) Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation
(1994) Elastomeric Joint Sealants
(1989) Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for
Thermal Insulation
(1995) Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

FS L-P-535
(Rev E; Notice 2) Plastic Sheet (Sheeting): Plastic Strip:

Polyvinyl Chloride and Polyvinyl Chloride Vinyl Acetate),
Rigid
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND

INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-69
(1991) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application
MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MICA)

MICA-01
(1993) National Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards

MS MIL-A-3316
MS MIL-A-24179
(Rev C; Am 2) Adhesives, Fire-Resistant, Thermal Insulation

(Rev A; Am 2; Notice 1) Adhesive,
Unicellular-Plastic Thermal I Insulation
Flexible
Page | 2 of 21
WBRJ-12-C-0001
MS MIL-C-19565
(Rev C; Am 1) Coating Compounds, Thermal Insulation,

Fire- and Water-Resistant, Vapor-Barrier
MS MIL-C-20079
(Rev H) Cloth, Glass; Tape, Textile Glass; and Thread, Glass

and Wire-Reinforced Glass
1.2
SASO 1335
Thermal Insulation Conditions for Buildings.
SASO 1554
Expanded polystyrene insulation boards Part 1: Boards

manufactured from expandable beads
SASO 1555
Expanded polystyrene insulation board Part 2: Extruded

boards.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Field-applied insulation and accessories on mechanical systems shall be as specified herein;

factory-applied insulation is specified under the piping, duct or equipment to be insulated.
Field applied insulation materials required for use on Owner-furnished items as listed in the
SPECIAL CLAUSES shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.
1.3
1.3.1
GENERAL QUALITY CONTROL

Standard Products:
Materials shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the
manufacture of such products and shall essentially duplicate items that have been in
satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening.
1.3.2
Installer's Qualifications:
Qualified installers shall have successfully completed three or more similar type
jobs within the last 5 years.
Page | 3 of 21
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.3.3
Surface Burning Characteristics:

Unless otherwise specified, insulation not covered with a jacket shall have a flame
spread rating no higher than 75 and a smoke developed rating no higher than 150.
The outside surface of insulation systems which are located in air plenums, in
ceiling spaces, and in attic spaces shall have a flame spread rating no higher than
25 and a smoke developed rating no higher than 50. Insulation materials located
exterior to the building perimeter are not required to be fire-rated. Flame spread
and smoke developed ratings shall be determined by ASTM E 84. Insulation shall
be tested in the same density and installed thickness as the material that shall be
used in the actual construction. Jackets shall comply with the flame spread and
smoke developed ratings required by ASTM C 921.
1.3.4
Identification of Materials:
Packages or standard containers of insulation, jacket material, cements, adhesives,
and coatings delivered for use, and samples required for approval shall have
manufacturer's stamp or label attached giving the name of the manufacturer and
brand, and a description of the material.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
SD-01 Data
Thermal Insulation Materials; FIO.
A complete list of materials, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature,
performance data, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Materials furnished under this
section of the specification shall be submitted at one time. A schedule indicating the product
number, k-value, thickness and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring
insulation shall be included.
SD-18 Records
Thermal Insulation Materials; FIO.
Three copies of a booklet indicating the types of insulation by referencing MICA-01, at the
job site. The MICA plates shall be marked-up showing the materials to be installed in
accordance with the requirements of this specification for the specific insulation application.
The Contractor shall submit all MICA Plates required to show the entire insulating system,
including Plates required to show insulation penetrations, vessel bottom and top heads, legs,
and skirt insulation as applicable. If the Contractor elects to submit detailed drawings instead
of marked-up MICA Plates, the detail drawings shall show cut-away, section views, and
details indicating each component of the insulation system and showing provisions for
insulating jacketing, and sealing portions of the equipment. The drawings shall be labeled
with a description of each material type with materials and insulating systems, in accordance
Page | 4 of 21
WBRJ-12-C-0001
with this specification. Each material and insulating system that is used shall be identified by
indicating the specification requirement for the material, and the material by each
manufacturer that is intended to meet the requirement. Three copies of the booklet shall be
submitted at the jobsite to the Contracting Officer. One copy of the approved booklet shall
remain with the display sample and two copies shall be provided for Owner use.
1.5
STORAGE
Materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's unopened containers. Materials delivered

and placed in storage shall be provided with protection from weather, humidity, dirt, dust and
other contaminants by the Contractor. Insulation material and supplies that become dirty,
dusty, wet, or otherwise contaminated may be rejected by the Contracting Officer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL MATERIALS
Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise attack
surfaces to which applied in either the wet or dry state. Materials to be used on stainless steel
surfaces shall meet ASTM C 795 requirements. Materials shall be asbestos free and conform
to the following:
2.1.1
Adhesives:
MS MIL-A-3316, Class 1, Grade B, or Class 2 as specified.
2.1.2
Contact Adhesive:
MS MIL-A-24179, Type II, Class 1 or Type III.
2.1.3 Caulking:
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use A.
2.1.4
Corner Angles:
Nominal 0.4064 mm aluminum 25.4 by 25.4 mm with factory applied kraft
backing. Aluminum shall be ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3105, or 5005.
2.1.5
Finishing Cement:
Mineral fiber hydraulic-setting thermal insulating cement ASTM C 449.
2.1.6
Glass Tape:
MS MIL-C-20079 Type II, Class 1 or 3. Tape shall be 101.6 mm wide rolls. Class
3 shall be 0.153 kg per square meter.
Page | 5 of 21
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.1.7
Glass Cloth:
MS MIL-C-20079, Type I, Class 1, untreated.
2.1.8
Staples:
Outward clinching type ASTM A 167, Type 304 or 316 stainless steel.
2.1.9 Jackets
ASTM C 921, Type I, moisture vapor transmission maximum 0.02 perms, puncture
resistance minimum 50 Beach units on all surfaces except concealed ductwork,
where a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is allowable, tensile
strength minimum 6.1 N/mm width; Type II, puncture resistance minimum 25
Beach units, tensile strength minimum 3.5 N/mm width. Aluminum jackets shall
be smooth sheet, 0.8 mm nominal thickness; ASTM B 209, Temper H14, Temper
H16, Alloy 3003, 5005, or 3105 with factory applied moisture barrier. Corrugated
aluminum jacket shall not be used outdoors. Aluminum jacket securing bands
shall be Type 304 stainless steel, 0.8 mm thick, 12.7 mm wide for pipe under 300
mm diameter and 19.1 mm wide for pipe over 300 mm diameter. Aluminum
jacket circumferential seam bands shall be 50.8 by 0.4064 mm aluminum matching
jacket material. The jacket may, at the option of the Contractor, be provided with
a factory fabricated Pittsburg or "Z" type longitudinal joint. When the "Z" joint is
used, the bands at the circumferential joints shall be designed by the manufacturer
to seal the joints and hold the jacket in place.
2.1.10
Vapor Barrier Coating

MS MIL-C-19565, Type II. Color shall be white.
2.1.11
Wire
Soft annealed ASTM A 580 Type 302, 304 or 316 stainless steel, 16 or 18 gauge.
2.2
PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS
Pipe insulation materials shall be as follows:

2.2.1
Aboveground Cold Pipeline: (Insulation not required)
2.2.2
Aboveground Hot Water Pipeline:

For aboveground hot water piping insulation the following requirements shall be
met.
Page | 6 of 21
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.2.2.1
Mineral Fiber:
ASTM C 547, Type I, rigid preformed glass fiber insulation with
factory-applied and all service vapor seal jacket, FS HH-B-100B, Type
I, laminated aluminum foil and glass cloth provided with self-sealing
lap. Thermal conductivity: 0.037 W/m K average maximum at 24 deg.
C mean temperature. Density: 64 kg/cu.m average minimum.
2.2.2
Aboveground / in air conditioned space condensate Drain Piping:

Armaflex/Isoflex type foam rubber insulation, 20 mm thick, with adhesive as
specified by the manufacturer. Insulation shall be installed in strict accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Circumferential butt joints must be glued and
vapor sealed. Longitudinal sections shall be overlapped and glued firmly at the butt
edges.
2.3
DUCT INSULATION MATERIALS
Duct insulation materials shall be as follows:

2.3.1
Exposed to Weather Duct Insulation:

ASTM C 612, Type IB, rigid glass fiber board with factory-applied Foil Reinforced
Kraft (FRK) vapor barrier, 48 kg/m3 density, not less than 50 mm thick - Thermal
Conductivity: 0.037 W/m K average maximum at 24 deg. C mean temperature.
2.3.2
Indoor Duct Insulation:

ASTM C 553, Type I, flexible glass fiber blanket faced with factory-applied Foil
Reinforced Kraft (FRK) vapor barrier, 24 kg/m3 density, not less than 25 mm
thick - Thermal Conductivity: 0.037 W/m K average maximum at 24 deg. C mean
temperature.
2.3.3
Flexible Vaporseal Duct Insulation:

ASTM C 553, Type I, glass fiber blanket, 16 kg/m3 density, minimum 38 nominal
thickness. Insulation shall be sheathed with a vapor barrier having a maximum
permeability of 0.02 perm as per ASTM E 96 - Thermal Conductivity: 0.037 W/m
K average maximum at 24 deg. C mean temperature.
2.3.4
Kitchen Exhaust Duct Insulation:

Rockwool board not less than 70 kg/m3 , minimum 50 mm thick.
2.3.5
Aluminum Cladding (Exposed Ductwork):

ASTM B 209, temper H14, 0.8 mm, either corrugated, embossed, smooth or
equivalent.
Page | 7 of 21
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.4
EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS
Equipment insulation materials shall be as follows:

2.4.1
Cold Equipment Insulation:

For temperatures below 16 degrees C:
2.4.1.1
Rigid Mineral Fiber:

ASTM C 612, Type IB.
2.4.1.2
Flexible Mineral Fiber:

ASTM C 553, Type I.
2.4.2
Hot Equipment Insulation

For temperatures above 16 degrees C.:
2.4.2.1
Rigid Mineral Fiber:

ASTM C 612, Type IB.
2.4.2.2
Flexible Mineral Fiber:

ASTM C 553, Type I.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
APPLICATION - GENERAL
Installation:
Except as otherwise specified, material shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions. Insulation materials shall not be applied until
tests specified in other sections of this specification are completed. Material such
as rust, scale, dirt and moisture shall be removed from surfaces to receive
insulation. Insulation shall be kept clean and dry. Insulation shall not be removed
from its shipping containers until the day it is ready to use and shall be returned to
like containers or equally protected from dirt and moisture at the end of each
workday. Insulation that becomes dirty shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to use. If
insulation becomes wet or if aforementioned cleaning does not restore the surfaces
to like new condition, the insulation may be rejected, and if rejected, shall be
immediately removed from the jobsite. Joints shall be staggered on multilayer
Page | 8 of 21
WBRJ-12-C-0001
insulation. Mineral fiber thermal insulating cement shall be mixed with

demineralized water when used on stainless steel surfaces. Insulation, jacketing
and accessories shall be installed in accordance with MICA-01 standard plates
except where modified herein or on the drawings.
3.1.2
Firestopping:
Where pipes and ducts pass through fire walls, fire partitions, above grade floors,
and fire rated chase walls, the penetration shall be sealed with firestopping
materials as specified in Section 07270 FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.3
Painting and Finishing:

Painting shall be as specified in other sections of the specifications.
3.1.5
Welding:
No welding shall be done on piping, duct or equipment without written approval of
the Contracting Officer. The capacitor discharge welding process may be used for
securing metal fasteners to duct.
3.2
3.2.1
PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

Pipe Insulation
3.2.1.1
General
Pipe insulation shall be continuous and installed on fittings and
appurtenances unless specified otherwise. Installation shall be with full
length units of insulation and using a single cut piece to complete a run.
Cut pieces or scraps abutting each other shall not be used. Pipe
insulation shall be omitted on the following:
a. Pipe used solely for fire protection.
b. Chromium plated pipe to plumbing fixtures. However, fixtures
for use by the physically handicapped shall have the hot water
supply and drain, including the trap, insulated where exposed.
c. Vertical portions of interior roof drains.
d. Sanitary drain lines.
e. Unions in pipe above 16 degrees C.
f.
Strainers in pipe above 16 degrees C.
g. Check valves in pipe above 16 degrees C.

Page | 9 of 21
WBRJ-12-C-0001
h
3.2.1.2
Cold Water Piping.
Pipes Passing Through Sleeves:

a. Pipe insulation shall be continuous through the sleeve .
b. An aluminum jacket with factory applied moisture barrier shall
be provided over the insulation wherever penetrations require
sealing.
c. Where penetrating interior walls, the aluminum jacket shall
extend 50 mm beyond either side of the wall and shall be
secured on each end with a band.
d. Where penetrating floors, the aluminum jacket shall extend
from a point below the backup material to a point 250 mm
above the floor with one band at the floor and one not more
than 25 mm from the end of the aluminum jacket.
e. Where penetrating waterproofed floors, the aluminum jacket
shall extend from below the backup material to a point 50 mm
above the flashing with a band 25 mm from the end of the
aluminum jacket.
f.
3.2.1.3
Where penetrating exterior walls, the aluminum jacket required

for pipe exposed to weather shall continue through the sleeve to
a point 50 mm beyond the interior surface of the wall.
Pipes Passing Through Hangers:

a. Insulation of hot water piping, shall be continuous through
hangers. All horizontal pipes 50 mm and smaller shall be
supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection
shield to protect the insulation in accordance with MSS SP-69.
Whenever insulation shows signs of being compressed, or when
the insulation or jacket shows visible signs of distortion at or
near the support shield, insulation inserts as specified below for
piping larger than 50 mm shall be installed.
b. Horizontal pipes larger than 50 mm at 16 degrees C and above
shall be supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 39
saddle in accordance with MSS SP-69.
Page | 10 of 21
WBRJ-12-C-0001
c. Horizontal pipes larger than 50 mm below 16 degrees C shall be

supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection
shield in accordance with MSS SP-69. An insulation insert of
cellular glass or calcium silicate shall be installed above each
shield. The insert shall cover not less than the bottom 180
degree arc of the pipe. Inserts shall be the same thickness as the
insulation, and shall extend 50 mm on each end beyond the
protection shield. When insulation inserts are required per the
above, and the insulation thickness is less than 25 mm, wooden
or cork dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe and
the shield to prevent the weight of the pipe from crushing the
insulation as an option to installing insulation inserts. The
insulation jacket shall be continuous over the wooden dowel,
wooden block, or insulation insert.
d. Vertical pipes shall be supported with either Type 8 or Type 42
riser clamps with the addition of two Type 40 protection shields
in accordance with MSS SP-69 covering the 360 degree arc of
the insulation. An insulation insert of cellular glass or calcium
silicate shall be installed between each shield and the pipe. The
insert shall cover the 360 degree arc of the pipe. Inserts shall be
the same thickness as the insulation, and shall extend 50 mm on
each end beyond the protection shield. When insulation inserts
are required per the above, and the insulation thickness is less
than 25 mm, wooden or cork dowels or blocks may be installed
between the pipe and the shield to prevent the hanger from
crushing the insulation as an option instead of installing
insulation inserts. The insulation jacket shall be continuous
over the wooden dowel, wooden block, or insulation insert. The
vertical weight of the pipe shall be supported with hangers
located in a horizontal section of the pipe. When the pipe riser
is longer than 9m, the weight of the pipe shall be additionally
supported hangers in the vertical run of the pipe which are
directly clamped to the pipe, penetrating the pipe insulation.
These hangers shall be insulated and the insulation jacket sealed
as indicated herein for anchors in a similar service.
e. Inserts shall be covered with a jacket material of the same
appearance and quality as the adjoining pipe insulation jacket,
shall overlap the adjoining pipe jacket 38 mm, and shall be
sealed as required for the pipe jacket. The jacket material used
to cover inserts in flexible cellular insulation shall conform to
ASTM C921, Type 1, and is allowed to be of a different
material than the adjoining insulation material.
Page | 11 of 21
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.2.2
Aboveground Cold Pipelines:

3.2.2.1
The following shall be included for aboveground cold pipelines:

a. Domestic cold water.
b. Horizontal portions of interior roof drains.
c. Air conditioner condensate drains.
3.2.3
Insulation Thickness:
Provide minimum 25 mm thick insulation for 50 dia. and less pipes and 50 mm
thick for pipes above 50 mm dia.
3.2.3.1
Jacket for Fibrous Glass Insulated Pipe:

Insulation shall be covered with a factory applied vapor barrier jacket
or field applied seal welded PVC jacket. Insulation inside the building
from the finished floor to 1,500 mm above finished floor shall be
protected with an aluminum jacket (cladding) shall have the insulation
and vapor barrier jacket installed as specified herein. The aluminum
jacket shall be installed as specified for piping exposed to weather and
in machine rooms, except sealing of the laps of the aluminum jacket is
not required.
3.2.3.2
Insulation for Straight Runs (Fibrous Glass):

a. Insulation shall be applied to the pipe with joints tightly butted.
The ends of fibrous insulation shall be sealed off with vapor
barrier coating at intervals not to exceed 4.5 m.
b. Longitudinal laps of the jacket material shall overlap not less
than 40 mm. Butt strips 75 mm wide shall be provided for
circumferential joints.
c. Laps and butt strips shall be secured with adhesive and stapled
on 100 mm centers if not factory self-sealing.
d. Factory self-sealing lap systems may be used when the ambient
temperature is between 4 degrees C to 50 degrees C during
installation. The lap system shall be installed in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations. Stapler shall be used
only if specifically recommended by the manufacturer. Where
gaps occur, the section shall be replaced or the gap repaired by
applying adhesive under the lap and then stapling.
e. All Staples, including those used to repair factory self-seal lap
systems, shall be coated with a vapor barrier coating. All
seams, except those on factory self-seal systems shall be coated
with vapor barrier coating.
Page | 12 of 21
WBRJ-12-C-0001
f.
Breaks and punctures in the jacket material shall be patched by

wrapping a strip of jacket material around the pipe and securing
it with adhesive, stapling, and coated with vapor barrier coating.
The patch shall extend not less than 40 mm past the break.
g. At penetrations such as thermometers, the voids in the

insulation shall be filled and sealed with vapor barrier coating.
3.2.3.3
Insulation for Fittings and Accessories:

a. Pipe insulation shall have ends thoroughly coated with a vapor
barrier coating not more than 150 mm from each flange, union,
valve, anchor, or fitting in all directions.
b. Insulation may be pre-molded or segmented. Insulation of the
same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe insulation
shall be used. If nesting size insulation is used, the insulation
should be overlapped 50 mm or one pipe diameter. Loose fill
mineral fiber or insulating cement shall be used to fill the voids.
Insulation for elbows less than 80 mm size shall be pre-molded.
Insulation for elbows 80 mm size and larger shall be either premolded or cemented. Elbows insulated using segments shall
not have less than 3 segments per elbow. Insulation may be
secured by wire or tape until finish is applied.
c. Upon completion of installation of insulation on flanges, unions,
valves, anchors, fittings and accessories, terminations and
insulation not protected by factory vapor barrier jackets or PVC
fitting covers shall be protected with two coats of vapor barrier
coating with a minimum total thickness of 1.6 mm, applied with
glass tape embedded between coats. Tape seams shall overlap
25 mm. The coating shall extend out onto the adjoining pipe
insulation 50 mm.
d. Anchors attached directly to the pipe shall be insulated for a
sufficient distance to prevent condensation but not less than 150
mm from the insulation surface.
3.2.3.4
Optional PVC Fitting Covers:

At the option of the Contractor, pre-molded, one or two piece PVC
fitting covers may be used in lieu of the vapor barrier and embedded
glass tape. Factory pre-molded insulation segments shall be adjoining
pipe insulation and the insulation shall be protected with one coat of
vapor barrier coating under the PVC cover. The covers shall be
secured by PVC vapor barrier tape, adhesive, seal-welding or with
tacks made for securing PVC covers. Seams in the cover, and tacks
and laps to adjoining pipe insulation jacket, shall be sealed with vapor
Page | 13 of 21
WBRJ-12-C-0001
barrier tape to ensure that the assembly has a continuous vapor seal.
Factory or field-cut blanket insulation shall not be used on pipe below
16 degrees C.
3.2.4
Aboveground Hot Water Pipelines:

For hot Water pipelines the following shall be included:
Domestic hot water piping:
3.2.4.1
Insulation Thickness
Provide minimum 25 mm thick insulation for 50 dia. and less pipes and
50 mm thick for pipes above 50 mm dia.
3.2.4.2
Jacket for Insulated Pipe:

Insulation shall be covered with a factory applied Type II jacket or field
applied aluminum jacket where piping is exposed.
3.2.4.3
Insulation for Straight Runs:

a. Insulation shall be applied to the pipe with joints tightly butted.
b. Longitudinal laps of the jacket material shall overlap not less
than 38 mm, and butt strips 75 mm (3 inches) wide shall be
provided for circumferential joints.
c. Laps and butt strips shall be secured with adhesive and stapled
on 100 mm centers if not factory self-sealing. Adhesive may be
omitted where pipe is concealed.
d. Factory self-sealing lap systems may be used when the ambient
temperature is between 4 degrees C and 49 degrees C and shall
be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Laps and butt strips shall be stapled whenever there is - nonadhesion of the system. Where gaps occur, the section shall be
replaced or the gap repaired by applying adhesive under the lap
and then stapling.
e. Breaks and punctures in the jacket material shall be patched by
wrapping a strip of jacket material around the pipe and be
secured with adhesive and stapled on 100 mm centers if not
factory self-sealing. Adhesive may be omitted where pipe is
concealed. Patch shall extend not less than 38 mm past the
break.
Page | 14 of 21
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.2.4.4 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories

a. The run of the line pipe insulation shall have the ends brought
up to the item.
b. Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the
adjoining pipe insulation, either pre-molded or segmented, shall
be placed around the item abutting the adjoining pipe insulation,
or if nesting size insulation is used, overlapping 50 mm or one
pipe diameter. Loose fill mineral fiber or insulating cement
shall be used to fill the voids. Insulation for elbows less than 80
mm size shall be pre-molded. Insulation for elbows 80 mm size
and larger shall be either pre-molded or segmented. Elbows
insulated using segments shall have not less than 3 segments per
elbow. Insulation may be wired or taped on until finish is
applied.
c. Upon completion of installation of insulation on flanges, unions,
valves, anchors, fittings and accessories, terminations and
insulation not protected by factory vapor barrier jackets or PVC
fitting covers shall be protected with two coats of Class 1
adhesive applied with glass tape embedded between coats.
Tape seams shall overlap 25 mm. Adhesive shall extend onto
the adjoining insulation not less than 50 mm. The total dry film
thickness shall be not less than 1.6 mm.
d. Insulation terminations shall be tapered to unions at a 45-degree
angle.
e. At the option of the Contractor, factory premolded one- or
two-piece PVC fitting covers may be used in lieu of the
adhesive and embedded glass tape.
Factory premolded
segments or factory or field cut blanket insert insulation
segments shall be used under the cover and shall be the same
thickness as adjoining pipe insulation. The covers shall be
secured by PVC vapor barrier tape, adhesive, seal-welding or
with tacks made for securing PVC covers.
3.2.5
Piping Exposed to Weather

Piping exposed to weather shall be insulated and jacketed as specified for the
applicable service inside the building. After this procedure, an aluminum jacket
shall be applied. PVC jacketing requires no factory applied jacket beneath it.
Page | 15 of 21
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.2.5.1
Aluminum Jacket
The jacket for hot piping may be factory applied. The jacket shall
overlap not less than 50 mm at longitudinal and circumferential joints
and shall be secured with bands at not more than 300 mm centers.
Longitudinal joints shall be overlapped down to shed water and located
at 4 or 8 o'clock positions. Joints on piping 16 degrees C and below
shall be sealed with caulking while overlapping to prevent moisture
penetration. Where jacketing on piping 16 degrees C and below abuts
an un-insulated surface, joints shall be caulked to prevent moisture
penetration. Joints on piping above 16 egrees C shall be sealed with a
moisture barrier.
3.2.5.2
Insulation for Fittings

Flanges, unions, valves, fittings, and accessories shall be insulated and
finished as specified for the applicable service. Two coats of an
emulsion type weatherproof mastic recommended by the insulation
manufacturer shall be applied with glass tape embedded between coats.
Tape overlaps shall be not less than 25 mm and the adjoining aluminum
jacket not less than 50 mm. Factory preformed aluminum jackets may
be used in lieu of the above. Molded PVC fitting covers shall be used
with PVC lagging and adhesive welded moisture tight.
3.2.5.3
PVC Lagging
PVC lagging shall be ultraviolet resistant and adhesive welded vapor
tight with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Installation shall
include provision for thermal expansion.
3.3
DUCT INSULATION INSTALLATION
Corner angles shall be installed on external corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed

finished spaces before covering with jacket. Duct insulation shall be omitted on the following:
Exhaust air ducts unless noted.
3.3.1
Insulation and Vapor Barrier for Cold Air Duct

Insulation and Vapor Barrier for Cold Air Duct: Ducts and associated equipment
shall be insulated to a thickness of 50 mm thick for exposed to weather ducts and
25 mm thick for indoor ducts. Circular indoor ducts (exposed to view) shall have
powder coated aluminum cladding over 25 mm thick insulation. Fresh air intake
ducts shall be insulated as cold air ducts. The following shall be insulated:
a. Supply ducts.
b. Relief ducts.
c. Plenums.
Page | 16 of 21
WBRJ-12-C-0001
d. Fresh air intake ducts.

e. Ducts exposed to weather.
3.3.1
Insulation for ducts shall be 25 mm thick flexible (blanket) type where concealed
or exposed to view (indoor), minimum density 24 kg per cubic meter and 50 mm
rigid type where exposed to weather, minimum density 48 kg per cubic meter.
Fibrous glass insulation for exposed to weather ducts shall have aluminum
cladding. Fibrous glass insulation on concealed duct shall be provided with a
factory-applied Type I vapor barrier jacket. Vapor barrier coating finish where
indicated to be used shall be accomplished by applying two coats of vapor barrier
coating with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. The total dry film
thickness shall be approximately 1.6 mm. Exposed to view circular ducts shall be
provided with powder coated aluminum cladding, color as approved by Contracting
Officer. Duct insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and prepared openings
except fire wall penetrations. Duct insulation terminating at fire dampers, shall be
continuous over the damper collar and retaining angle of fire dampers, which are
exposed to unconditioned air and which may be prone to condensate formation.
Duct insulation and vapor barrier shall cover the collar, neck, and any un-insulated
surfaces of diffusers, registers and grills. Vapor barrier materials shall be applied to
form a complete unbroken vapor seal over the insulation. All ducts exposed to
weather and in machine rooms shall be aluminum cladded.
3.3.1.1
Installation on Concealed Duct

a. For rectangular, oval or round ducts, insulation shall be attached
by applying Class 2 adhesive around the entire perimeter of the
duct in 150 mm wide strips on 300 mm centers.
b. For rectangular ducts, 600 mm and larger insulation shall be
additionally secured to bottom of ducts by the use of
mechanical fasteners. Fasteners shall be spaced on 450 mm
centers and not more than 450 mm from duct corners.
c. For rectangular, oval and round ducts, mechanical fasteners
shall be provided on sides of duct risers for all duct sizes.
Fasteners shall be spaced on 450 mm centers and not more than
450 mm from duct corners.
d. Insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners where
used and shall be pressed thoroughly into the adhesive. Care
shall be taken to ensure vapor barrier jacket joints overlap 50
mm. Insulation shall be carried over standing seams and
trapeze-type duct hanger.
e. Self-locking washers shall be installed where mechanical
fasteners are used. The pin shall be trimmed back and bent
over.
Page | 17 of 21
WBRJ-12-C-0001
f.
Jacket overlaps shall be secured under the overlap with Class 2

adhesive and stapled on 100 mm centers. Staples and seams
shall be coated with a brush coat of vapor barrier coating.
g. Breaks in the jacket material shall be covered with patches of

the same material as the vapor barrier. The patches shall extend
not less than 50 mm beyond the break or penetration in all
directions and shall be secured with Class 2 adhesive and
staples. Staples and joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of
vapor barrier coating.
h. At jacket penetrations such as hangers thermometers and
damper operating rods, voids in the insulation shall be filled and
the penetration sealed with a brush coat of vapor barrier coating.
i.
Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and

flashed with a reinforced vapor barrier coating finish. The
coating shall overlap the adjoining insulation and uninsulated
surface 50 mm. For rectangular, oval and round ducts,
mechanical fasteners shall be provided on sides of duct risers
for all duct sizes. Fasteners shall be spaced on 450 mm centers
and not more than 450 mm from duct corners.
j.
Insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners where

used and shall be pressed thoroughly into the adhesive. Care
shall be taken to ensure vapor barrier jacket joints overlap 50
mm. Insulation shall be carried over standing seams and
trapeze-type duct hanger.
k. Self-locking washers shall be installed where mechanical

fasteners are used. The pin shall be trimmed back and bent
over.
l.
Jacket overlaps shall be secured under the overlap with Class 2

adhesive and stapled on 100 mm centers. Staples and seams
shall be coated with a brush coat of vapor barrier coating.
m. Breaks in the jacket material shall be covered with patches of

the same material as the vapor barrier. The patches shall extend
not less than 50 mm beyond the break or penetration in all
directions and shall be secured with Class 2 adhesive and
staples. Staples and joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of
vapor barrier coating.
n. At jacket penetrations such as hangers thermometers and
damper operating rods, voids in the insulation shall be filled and
the penetration sealed with a brush coat of vapor barrier coating.
Page | 18 of 21
WBRJ-12-C-0001
o. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and

surface 50 mm. Pin puncture coatings shall extend 50 mm from
the puncture in all directions.
p. Where insulation standoff brackets occur, insulation shall be
extended under the bracket and the jacket terminated at the
bracket.
3.3.1.2
Installation on Exposed Duct Work

a. For rectangular ducts, rigid insulation shall be secured to the
duct by mechanical fasteners on all four sides of the duct,
spaced not more than 300 mm apart and not more than 75 mm
from the edges of the insulation joints. A minimum of two rows
of fasteners shall be provided for each side of duct 300 mm
and larger. One row shall be provided for each side of duct less
than 300 mm.
b. Duct insulation shall be formed with minimum jacket seams.
Each piece of rigid insulation shall be fastened to the duct using
mechanical fasteners. Insulation shall be brought up to standing
seams, reinforcing, and other vertical projections and shall not
be carried over. Vapor barrier jacket shall be continuous across
seams, reinforcing, and projections. When height of projections
is greater than the insulation thickness, insulation and jacket
shall be carried over.
c. Insulation shall be impaled on the fasteners; self-locking
washers shall be installed and the pin trimmed and bent over.
d. Joints in the insulation jacket shall be sealed with a 100 mm
wide strip of the same material as the vapor barrier jacket. The
strip shall be secured with Class 2 adhesive and stapled. Staples
and seams shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor barrier
coating.
e. Breaks and ribs or standing seam penetrations in the jacket
material shall be covered with a patch of the same material as
the jacket. Patches shall extend not less than 50 mm beyond the
break or penetration and shall be secured with Class 2 adhesive
and stapled.
Staples and joints shall be sealed with a brush
coat of vapor barrier coating.
f.
At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and

damper operating rods, the voids in the insulation shall be filled
and the penetrations sealed with a brush coat of vapor barrier
coating.
Page | 19 of 21
WBRJ-12-C-0001
g. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and

surface 50 mm. Pin puncture coatings shall extend 50 mm from
the puncture in all directions.
3.3.3
Ducts Handling Air for Dual Purpose:

For air handling ducts for dual purpose (below and above 16 degrees C, ) ducts
shall be insulated as specified for cold air duct.
3.3.4
Duct Test Holes:

After duct systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced, breaks in the
insulation and jacket shall be repaired in accordance with the applicable section of
this specification for the type of duct insulation to be repaired.
3.4
3.4.1
EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION

General:
Removable insulation sections shall be provided to cover parts of equipment which
must be opened periodically for maintenance including vessel covers, fasteners,
flanges and accessories. Equipment insulation shall be omitted on the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.4.2
Handholes.
Cleanouts.
ASME stamps.
Manufacturer's nameplates.
Insulation for Cold Equipment

Cold equipment below 16 degrees C: Insulation shall be furnished on equipment
handling media below 16 degrees C including the following:
a.
b.
Refrigeration equipment parts that are not factory insulated.

Drip pans under chilled equipment.
3.4.2.1
Insulation Type:
Insulation shall be suitable for the temperature encountered.
Thicknesses shall be as follows:
a. Equipment Handling Media Between 2 and 16 degrees C: 38.1
mm thick mineral fiber, 50.8 mm thick cellular glass, or 38.1
mm thick flexible cellular.
Page | 20 of 21
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.4.2.2 Other Equipment:

a. Insulation shall be formed or fabricated to fit the equipment. To
ensure a tight fit on round equipment, edges shall be beveled
and joints shall be tightly butted and staggered.
b. Insulation shall be secured in place with bands or wires at
intervals as recommended by the manufacturer but not more
than 300 mm centers. Insulation corners shall be protected
under wires and bands with suitable corner angles.
c. Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner
angles.
d.
3.4.2.3
Insulation on equipment with ribs shall be applied over 152.4

by 152.4 mm by 12 gauge welded wire fabric which has been
cinched in place, or if approved by the Contracting Officer, spot
welded to the equipment over the ribs. Insulation shall be
secured to the fabric with J-hooks and 50.8 by 50.8 mm
washers or shall be securely banded or wired in place on 300
mm centers.
Vapor Barrier:
Upon completion of installation of insulation, penetrations shall be
caulked. Two coats of vapor barrier coating shall be applied over
insulation, including removable sections, with a layer of glass cloth
embedded between the coats. The total dry thickness of the finish shall
be 1.6 mm. Caulking shall be applied to parting line between
equipment and removable section insulation.
3.4.3.
Equipment Exposed to Weather:

3.4.3.1
Installation:
Equipment exposed to weather shall be insulated and finished in
accordance with the requirements for ducts exposed to weather in
paragraph DUCT INSULATION INSTALLATION.
-- END OF SECTION 15250 --
Page | 21 of 21
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15411 - WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
15411-2/9
15411-2/9
15411-4/9
15411-4/9
PART 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
PRODUCTS
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
VALVES
PIPING SPECIALTIES
ELECTRICAL WATER HEATERS
WATER METER
PIPE INSULATION
LIFT PUMPS
HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS
PRESSURE TANKS
AIR RELEASE VALVES
AUTOMATIC AIR VENT
LEVEL ALARM FOR WATER TANKS
LEVEL ALARM FOR LIFT STATIONS
STRAINERS
15411-4/9
15411-4/9
15411-4/9
15411-4/9
15411-5/9
15411-5/9
15411-6/9
15411-6/9
15411-6/9
15411-6/9
15411-7/9
15411-7/9
15411-7/9
15411-7/9
15411-7/9
15411-7/9
15411-7/9
PART 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
EXECUTION
WATER SERVICE
INSTALLATION
CLEANING AND DISINFECTION
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
15411-8/9
15411-9/9
15411-8/9
15411-8/9
15411-8/9
15411-9/9
Section 15411 - Water Supply System
Page | 1 of 9
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15411 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
Water supply system, including cold and hot water piping, fittings, and specialties within the building and up
to interface point of site utilities.
1.2
REFERENCES
AIR CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (ARI)
ARI 1010
(1994) Drinking-Fountains and Self-Contained, Mechanically-Refrigerated

Drinking-Water Coolers

ASTM A 53
ASTM B 32
ASTM B 75
ASTM B 88
Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized), Welded
and Seamless.
Specification for Solder Metal.
Seamless Copper Tube.
Seamless Copper Water Tube.

ANSI A21.10A
ANSI A112.26.1
ANSI B2.1
ANSI B16.3
ANSI B16.4
ANSI B16.9
ANSI B16.18
ANSI B16.22
ANSI B16.23
ANSI B16.25
ANSI B31.3
Supplement to ANSI A21.10.

Water Hammer Arrestors.
Pipe Threads (Except Dry Seal).
Malleable-Iron Screwed Fittings, 150 and 300 Pound.
Cast-Iron Screwed Fittings, 125 and 250 Pound.
Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt-welded Fittings.
Cast Bronze Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
Wrought Copper and Bronze solder-Joint Pressure Fittings.
Cast Bronze solder-Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.
Butt-welded Ends.
Code for Pressure Piping.

ASME B1.20.1
ASME B16.3
ASME B16.18
ASME B16.22
ASME B16.23

(1984) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
(1989) Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
(1992; Errata Jan 1994) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV
Page | 2 of 9
WBRJ-12-C-0001
ASME B16.24
ASME B16.29
ASME B31.5
ASME B40.1
(1991; Errata Jun 91) Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges, Class 150, 300, 400, 600, 900,
1500 and 2500, and Flanged Fittings, Class 150 and 300
(1986) Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings DWV
(1992; B31.5a) Refrigeration Piping
(1991) Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)

ASSE 1001
ASSE 1003
ASSE 1005
ASSE 1011
ASSE 1012
ASSE 1013
ASSE 1018
ASSE 1037
(1990) Pipe Applied Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers

(1981) Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water Supply Systems
(1993) Water Heater Drain Valves - 3/4-Inch Iron Pipe Size
(1993) Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers
(1993) Backflow Preventers with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent
(1993) Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers
(1986) Trap Seal Primer Valves Water Supply Fed
(1990) Pressurized Flushing Devices (Flushometers) for Plumbing Fixtures
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

AWWA C606
AWWA C651
AWWA C652
AWWA C700
AWWA C702
AWWA C900
Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints.

Standard for Disinfection of Water Mains.
Standard for Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities.
Standard for Cold-Water Meters Displacement Type.
Standard for Cold-Water Meters Compound Type.
Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 Inch
Through 12 Inch, for Water.
NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF PLUMBING-HEATING-COOLING

CONTRACTORS (NAPHCC)
NAPHCC-01
NAPHCC-02
(1993; Supple 1994) National Standard Plumbing Code (Non-Illustrated Edition)

(1993) National Standard Plumbing Code (Illustrated Edition)
PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI)

PDI WH 201
(1992) Water Hammer Arresters
SAUDI ARABIAN STANDARDS ORGANIZATION

SASO 14
SASO 15
SASO 414
SASO 415
SASO 1178
SASO 1517
SASO 1518
Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (u PVC) pipes for potable water.

Methods of testing unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (u PVC) pipes for potable water.
Methods of test for drinking water coolers.
Drinking water coolers.
Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (u PVC) pipes for potable water supply
Extractability of leas and tin test method.
Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) for hot and cold water uses.
Methods of testing chlorinated polyvinyl chloride pipes (CPVC) for hot and cold
water uses.
Page | 3 of 9
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SASO 237
SASO 238
SASO 774
SASO 775
1.3
Testing and calibration of domestic water meters.

Domestic water meters
Methods of testing fiberglass reinforced polyester meter boxes.
Fiberglass reinforced polyester meter boxes.
SUBMITTALS
Product and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's product and maintenance data for the items specified
herein.
Coordination Drawings: Prepare and submit coordination drawings for the water distribution piping.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) - 1994
Edition, BOCA Basic National Plumbing Code and the local utility authority.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
PIPES AND FITTINGS

2.1.1
For Health Care Facilities: Hot and cold water supply pipes above ground inside
building shall be copper, conforming to ASTM B 88, Type L, hard temper, with
ANSI B 16.22 streamlined pattern wrought-copper fittings with soldered joints
using 95:5 tin:antimony solder; and below ground shall be copper conforming to
ASTM B 88, Type K.
2.1.2
For Military and Other Facilities: Hot and cold water pipes above ground inside
building shall be CPVC Schedule 80.
2.1.3
Pipes and Fittings Outside Building: Refer Section 02668 - WATER

DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
VALVES:
Refer to Section 15100 - VALVES.

2.3
PIPING SPECIALTIES:
2.3.1
Water Hammer Arresters: Bellows type, with stainless steel casing and bellows,
pressure rated for 250 psi, tested and certified in accordance with PDI WH-201.
2.3.2
Flexible Connectors: Stainless steel bellows with a woven flexible bronze wire
reinforcing protective jacket; rated for 150 psig water working pressure, 250oF
operating temperature and suitable for up to maximum 19 mm misalignment.
Connectors shall be a minimum of 300 mm long and have threaded or flanged ends;
sweat ends are not acceptable.
Page | 4 of 9
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.3.3
Hose Bibbs: Bronze body with integrated vacuum breaker, renewable composition
disc, tee handle, 19 mm NPT inlet, 19 mm hose outlet.
2.3.4
Backflow Preventers: Reduced pressure principle assembly consisting of shut-off

valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Assemblies shall include test cocks,
and pressure-differential relief valve located between two positive seating check
valves, and comply with ASSE 1013.
2.3.5
Relief Valves
2.3.6
2.4
2.5
2.3.5.1
Provide proper size for relief valve, in accordance with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Codes, for indicated capacity of the appliance for which
installed.
2.3.5.2
Combined Pressure-Temperature Relief Valves: Bronze body, test lever,

thermostat, complying with ANSI Z21.22 listing requirements for
temperature discharge capacity. Provide temperature relief at 210oF and
pressure relief at 150 psi.
Vacuum Breakers: Atmospheric constant pressure or hose-bib type.
ELECTRICAL WATER HEATERS

2.4.1
Electric water heaters shall be suitable for vertical or horizontal installations (as
required) and provided with lifting lugs and channel skid base. Vessel shall be
constructed to Section IV of the ASME Code, and UL Standards. Vessel shall be
glass-lined with magnesium anode protection, pressure tested to 2 MPa working
pressure. Entire vessel and electrical controls shall be encased in a sheet metal
enclosure with baked enamel finish. Tank shall be insulated with vermin-proof fiber
glass insulation. Units shall be provided with adjustable setting thermostatic controls
and immersed nichrome heating elements. Water heaters shall prewired to
solderless terminal lugs, factory tested, complete with ASME temperature and
pressure relief valves and bear UL label. Water heaters shall meet or exceed the
requirements of ASHRAE 90A-1980 Standard for energy efficiency. Water heaters
shall also meet requirements of SASO 11.
2.4.2
Temperature and pressure relief valves shall comply with the ASME rates and the
vacuum relief valve shall comply with ANSI Z21.22, all valves shall be 3/4 inch in
size and shall be labeled accordingly.
2.4.3
Refer to drawings for specific electric water heater capacities, minimum recovery
and electrical ratings.
WATER METER:
2.5.1
Water meter shall conform to AWWA Standards and the utility company
requirements.
Page | 5 of 9
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.6
PIPE INSULATION:
2.6.1
2.7
2.8
2.9
Insulation of hot water pipes shall be as per requirements of Section 15250

THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
LIFT PUMPS:
2.7.1
Provide horizontal flexible coupled, single stage, end suction, centrifugal pumps,
type and capacity as shown on drawings. Provide all required auxiliary apparatus
and controls to complete the installation. Casing shall be of cast iron to ASTM A
48. Each pumps shall be furnished with a mechanical seal with all metal parts to be
303 stainless steel with "Buna-N" elastomers, Ni-resist seat, and carbon washer.
Pumps shall be equipped with bronze keylocked shaft sleeve. Pump shaft extension
shall be "O" ring sealed from the pump liquid. Bronze impeller shall be vacuum
cast, dynamically balanced, and keylocked to shaft.
2.7.2
Carbon steel shaft to AISI C1045, and locked in cast iron power frame to ASTM A
48. Pump shaft designed minimum deflection not exceeding 0.002" at sealing faces
at maximum load. Oil lubricated ball bearings, having minimum 3 years life
(AFBMA B 10 ) under maximum load and protected by separate oil seals and slinger,
shall be used.
2.7.3
Pumps shall be provided with totally enclosed motor of required capacity and rating.
Pump and motor shall be fitted on common steel baseplate.
HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS:

2.8.1
Provide, quite, in-line, centrifugal, single-stage, direct coupled, hot water circulating
pumps with mechanical seals and rated for 125 psig (860 kPa) working pressure and
225oF (107oC) continuous water temperature. Provide all required auxiliary
apparatus and controls to complete the installation. Pumps shall be of type and
capacity as shown on the drawings.
2.8.2
Pump shaft shall be of stainless steel with mechanical shaft seals having faces of
tungsten carbide. Pump housing shall be of cast iron with a spiral outlet, and shall be
provided with interchangeable EPDM rubber seal ring. Stainless steel impeller shall
have double-curved blades with smooth surfaces and fitted to shaft by means of split
cone and nut. Motor shall be totally enclosed, fan-cooled standard motor complying
with IEC and DIN or equivalent standards, insulation Class F and maximum
ambient temperature 40oC.
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
Refer to Section 02668 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
Page | 6 of 9
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.10
PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS
Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.
2.11
PRESSURE TANKS
Refer to Section 02668 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

2.12
AIR RELEASE VALVES
Air release valves shall be of all bronze body with stainless steel spring and lever. Valves shall be nonadjustable temperature and pressure type conforming to ANSI Z21.22 or equivalent standards. Pressure
rating shall be as recommended by the water heater manufacturer. Sizes shall be as required.
2.13
AUTOMATIC AIR VENT
Automatic air vent with stainless steel check valve or float shall be of chromed brass body with following
features:
2.14
Automatic operation
Quick venting design and positive shut-off check
Suitable for cold and hot water
Easily maintained
Simple two piece construction
Sizes shall be as shown on drawings.
LEVEL ALARM FOR WATER TANKS
Mechanical tilt non-mercury float level switch shall be suitable for level control and alarm applications
for water tanks. Float level switch shall be complete with impact resistant ABS shell and neoprene
jacketed sealed cable of required length. Contacts shall be SPST, Normal Open or Normally Closed
common with N.O & N.C. Power rating shall be as required. Float level switch shall be installed as per
manufacturers written instructions.
2.15
LEVEL ALARM FOR LIFT STATIONS
Mercury tilt float level switch shall be suitable for level control and alarm applications for lift stations.
Float level switch shall be complete with oil-resistant cable of required length soldered to a stainless steel
mercury capsule housed in a polypropylene shell. Contacts shall be SPST, Normally Open or Normal
Closed. Power rating shall be as required. Float level switch shall be installed as per manufacturers
written instructions.
2.16
STRAINERS
Shall be constructed of high tensile ASTM A126, Class B cast iron with blow-off connections and selfaligning cylindrical screens. Strainer shall be suitable for horizontal and vertical installation. Below-off
outlets are tapped FIPT. Stainless steel screens shall be of standard sizes with perforations as approved.
Strainers shall be with flanged ends, epoxy coated, sizes as shown on drawings, pressure rating similar to
piping on site.
Page | 7 of 9
WBRJ-12-C-0001
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WATER SERVICE
Water service shall be extended from valved outlets to main at point of tie-in. All valves, meter, and such
other components as shown shall be installed to provide a complete water supply system.
3.2
3.3
3.4
INSTALLATION
3.2.1
See Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS for general piping

installation instructions. Refer to the drawings for further details.
3.2.2
Install pipe sleeve seals at all foundation and wall penetrations. Piping passing
through exterior building walls shall be caulked weather tight. Seal pipe
penetrations of fire barriers (walls and slab) using fire barrier penetration seals as
specified in relevant Section of the Specifications or as approved by the Contracting
Officer.

3.3.1
General: Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping
system until it has been inspected, tested and approved by the Contracting Officer.
Expose all such work for testing that has been covered or concealed before it has
been inspected, tested and approved by the Contracting Officer. Notify the
Contracting Officer at least 24 hours prior to the time such inspection is to be made.
Prepare inspection and test reports for Contracting Officer's review.
3.3.2
Testing: Test water supply and distribution piping, and water tank(s) prior to
covering or concealment. The entire piping system shall be tested at a hydrostatic
pressure of one and a-half (1-1/2) times the expected operating pressure without
exceeding the pressure rating of the piping system materials, and proven tight at this
pressure. Isolate the test source and allow to stand for a period of 4 hours. If testing
is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with
diagram of portion of the system tested.
3.3.3
Defective Work: Leaks and loss of pressure observed during testing constitute
defects that must be repaired to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer. Repair all
leaks and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
3.3.4
Prepare reports for all tests and required corrective action, and submit to the
Contracting Officer for review and approval.
CLEANING AND DISINFECTION
Clean and disinfect water supply and distribution piping, and water tank(s) as follows:
Page | 8 of 9
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.4.1
Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that
have been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use. Use the purging and
disinfecting procedure described in either AWWA C651, or AWWA C652, or as
described below:
A. Flush the piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not
appear at the points of outlet.
B. Fill the system or part thereof with a water/chlorine solution containing at
least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system or part
thereof and allow to stand for 24 hours.
C. Drain the system or part thereof of the previous solution and refill with a
water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine
and isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.
D. Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean, potable
water until chlorine does not remain in the water coming from the system.
E. Submit water samples in sterile bottles, taken in presence of the Contracting
Officer, to the Independent Testing Laboratory for biological examination.
Repeat the procedure if the biological examination made by the Independent
Testing Laboratory shows evidence of contamination.
F. Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities, and submit to
Contracting Officer for review and approval.
3.5
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:
3.5.1
The Contractor shall prepare and submit as-built drawings in reproducible form to
the Contracting Officer. All revisions, omissions, and/or additions to the various
plumbing installations shall be marked down in red pencil.
3.5.2
Accessories and specialties such as flexible pipe connectors, water hammer

arrestors, water pressure regulators, vacuum breakers, hose bibs, etc. shall be as
approved by the Contracting Officer.
--END OF SECTION 15411--
Page | 9 of 9
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEM

PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
15420-2/7
15420-2/7
15420-3/7
15420-3/7
PART 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
PRODUCTS
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
DRAINS
AUTOMATIC AIR ADMITTANCE VALVES
GREASE INTERCEPTORS
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
VENT CAP
15420-3/7
15420-3/7
15420-4/7
15420-4/7
15420-4/7
15420-4/7
15420-4/7
15420-4/7
PART 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION (GENERAL)
INTERIOR DRAINAGE SYSTEM
EXTERIOR DRAINAGE SYSTEM
INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES
INSTALLATION OF DRAINS
15420-4/7
15420-4/7
15420-4/7
15420-5/7
15420-5/7
15420-6/7
15420-6/7
15420-7/7
Section 15420 Drainage and Vent System
Page | 1 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15420 DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
The complete drainage system including soil, waste, drainage, and vent system up to the interface point as
indicated on the drawings.
1.2
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are
referred to in the text by basic designation only.
ASTM D 2564
ASTM D 2665
ASTM D 2729
ASTM D 3138
Solvent Cement for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
Solvent Cements for Transition Joints Between Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene
(ABS) and Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Non-Pressure Piping Components.
Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fittings Patterns.
ASTM D 3311

ANSI B2.1
ANSI A112.18.1
ANSI A112.18.1M
ANSI A112.14.1
ANSI A112.21.1M
ANSI A112.21.2
Pipe Threads.
Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
Backwater Valves.
Floor Drains.
Roof Drains.
TRADE ASSOCIATION PUBLICATIONS
ASPE
ASSE
CDA
Data Book, 1983-84 Volume I, Fundamentals of Plumbing Design, Chapter 1

"Sanitary Drainage System"; Chapter 2 "Storm Drainage Systems".
Plumbing Dictionary - Standard 1018 0 Performance Requirements for Trap
Seal Primer Valves.
Copper Brass Bronze Design Handbook "Single-Stack Plumbing System".

SASO 827
SASO 877
SASO 882
SASO 1209
Cast iron sanitary pipes and fittings for waste water and ventilation.
Cast iron drainage pipes and fittings Spigot series (Hubless) above ground.
Cast iron drainage pipes and fittings Spigot series (Hubless) underground.
Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (u PVC) pipes for soil, waste and venting
inside buildings
Page | 2 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SASO 1210
SASO 1395
SASO 1396
1.3
1.4
Methods of testing unplasticized polyvinyl (u PVC) pipes for soil, waste and
venting inside building
Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (u PVC) pipes for buried/drains and sewers.
Methods of testing unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (u PVC) pipes for
buried/drains and sewers.
SUBMITTALS
1.3.1.
Product and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's product and maintenance

data for the items specified herein.
1.3.2.
Coordination Drawings: Prepare and submit coordination drawings for the soil,
waste, drainage and vent piping.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) - 1994
Edition, BOCA Basic National Plumbing Code and the local utility authority.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPES AND FITTINGS
Pipes and fittings for soil, waste, drainage and vent lines, inside building, shall be as follows:
2.2
2.1.1
Pipes: Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (uPVC) plastic pipes conforming to ASTM D

2665, Schedule 40 or SASO Class IV.
2.1.2
Pipe Fittings: Socket-type unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (uPVC) plastic fittings

conforming to ASTM D 2665, Schedule to match that of pipe and made ASTM D 3311
drain, waste and vent (DWV) plastic fittings pattern.
2.1.3
Jointing System : Welded joints using solvent cement conforming to ASTM D 2564.
DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

2.2.1
Cleanout Plugs: Cast iron with tapered body for caulking, raised head rough lead seal plug.
2.2.2
Floor Cleanouts: Cast iron body and frame with round adjustable scoriated secured nickelbronze top, closure plug; and spigot outlet.
2.2.3
Wall Cleanouts: Cast iron body adaptable to pipe with cast bronze or brass cleanout plug,
stainless steel cover plate with vandal-proof center screw secured to cleanout plug.
2.2.4
Flashing Flanges and Vent Flashing Sleeves: Manufacturer's standard products as approved
by the Contracting Officer.
Page | 3 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.3
2.4
DRAINS
2.3.1
Floor Drains: Adjustable, cast iron body and flashing collar, with protector top and polished
bronze strainer head with secured, vandal-proof square hold grate.
2.3.2
Roof Drains:Precast concrete scupper with grating.
2.3.3
Floor Drains with Adjustable Tops and Sediment Buckets: Cast iron body and flashing collar
with adjustable 300 mm diameter top and bar grate with sediment bucket.
2.3.4
Area Drain and Trench Drain Outlets: Shall be of cast iron with hinged grate and perforated
sediment bucket.
2.3.5
Trench Drain and Grating: Shall be cast iron with hinged grate and perforated sediment
bucket. Trench drain grating shall be of cast iron, medium duty; size shall be as shown on the
drawings.
AUTOMATIC AIR ADMITTANCE VALVES
Automatic air admittance valves shall be of ASTM B 62 cast bronze. Sizes shall be as required.
2.5
GREASE INTERCEPTORS
Grease interceptors shall be manufacturer's standard fabricated of steel with black duco coating inside and
outside, and shall be complete with flow control fittings and other required accessories to intercept grease
and oil-laden waste discharged from fixtures. Capacity shall be as indicated on the drawings or as approved
by the Contracting Officer. Integral extensions shall permit a greater dimension from centerline of inlets and
outlets to finished floor level to accommodate deeper roughing-in conditions.
2.6
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Pipe hangers and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.
2.7
VENT CAP
Vent cap shall be manufacturers standard fabricated of hot-dipped galvanized steel suitable for pipe sizes
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION (GENERAL)
See Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL for general piping installation instructions. Refer to the
drawings for further details.
3.2
INTERIOR DRAINAGE SYSTEM:

3.2.1
The entire system shall be carefully inspected for damaged materials.
Page | 4 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.3
3.2.2
Piping shall run as direct as possible making changes in direction with long sweeps, 1/8 or
1/16 bends.
3.2.3
Connections shall be made to horizontal lines with Y's and 1/8 bends.
3.2.4
Horizontal lines shall be graded not less than 1% for piping 101 mm and larger, and not less
than 2% per for piping 76 mm and smaller.
3.2.5
Rough fixture connections and open ends of pipe shall be plugged and capped during
construction using approved test plugs.
3.2.6
Open ends of pipe shall be plugged when work is stopped.
3.2.7
Location of floor drains for equipment furnished are diagrammatic. Equipment size and final
location shall be verified prior to installation of roughing for floor drains.
3.2.8
Roof leader expansion joints shall be installed on all roof leaders immediately below drain.
3.2.9
All drip lines or drain tube shall extend to the nearest floor drain or service sink. This shall
include but shall not be limited to the discharge from pressure and temperature relief valves,
automatic air vents, fan coil unit drains, and vent connections on backflow preventers.
EXTERIOR DRAINAGE SYSTEM:
Refer to Section 02730 - SEWRAGE SYSTEM.

3.4
INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES:

3.4.1
Cleanouts
A. Cleanouts shall be installed allowing sufficient clearance behind cleanout plugs to facilitate
use of cleaning tools.
B. Cleanouts shall be located on bases of each soil and waste stacks, change of direction of
piping greater than 45o on all horizontal runs, and intervals on all horizontal runs where
required or shown on drawings.
C. Cleanouts shall be full pipe size up to 100 mm diameter.
D. Cleanouts shall be placed in readily accessible locations.
E. Where they occur in floors, cleanouts shall be piped to just below floor level and shall be
provided with plug and floor access plate flush with floor.
F. Where they occur in walls, cleanouts shall be provided with plug and wall access plate.
3.4.2
Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout
passing through waterproof membrane.
Page | 5 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.4.3
3.5
Vent Flashing Sleeves: Install on stacks passing through roof, secure over stack flashing in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
INSTALLATION OF DRAINS:
3.5.1 Floor Drains
A.
Install floor drains in locations indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops of
drains flush with finished floor.
C.
D.
Trap all drains connected to the sanitary sewer.

Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.
3.5.2.
Roof Drains
A.
Install roof drains at low points of roof areas, in accordance with the roof membrane
manufacturer's installation instructions.
B.
Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between roof drain and
adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.6.1
Inspection: Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system
until it has been inspected, tested and approved by the Contracting Officer or the
authority having jurisdiction. Notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, at least 24 hours
prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the
presence of the Contracting Officer.
3.6.2
Piping System Test

A.
Rough-In Plumbing: Test the piping of plumbing drainage and venting systems upon
completion of the rough piping installation. Tightly close all openings in the piping
system, and fill with water to the point of overflow, but not less than 3048 mm of head.
Water level shall not drop during the period from 15 minutes before the inspection
starts, through completion of the inspection. Inspect all joints for leaks.
B.
Finished Plumbing: After the plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with
water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug the stack
openings on the roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into
piping system equal to a pressure of 250 Pa. Use a U-tube or manometer inserted in the
trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without
the introduction of additional air throughout the period of inspection. Inspect all
plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
Page | 6 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
C.
3.7
Repair all leaks and defects using new materials and retest system or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained. Prepare reports for all tests and required corrective
action.

3.7.1
Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt debris as work progresses. Clean drain
strainers, domes and traps, and remove dirt and debris.
3.7.2 Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and
debris, and to prevent from traffic and construction work. Place plugs on uncompleted
piping at end of day or whenever work stops.
Page | 7 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15488 - COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS

PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
GENERAL
SCOPE
SAUDI PRODUCTS
REFERENCES
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
PART 2
2.1
2.2
PRODUCTS
AIR COMPRESSORS 7.5 KW TO 225 KW UP 12 BAR
AIR COMPRESSOR UNIT LESS THAN 7.5 KW
UP TO 12 KW
AIR RECEIVER
INTAKE AIR FILTER AND SILENCER
DESICCANT AIR DRYERS
LOW PRESSURE COMPRESSED AIR PIPING
AND ACCESSORIES
15488-7/12
EXECUTION
PIPING
VALVES, GAUGES, STRAINERS
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
CLEANING OF SYSTEM
TESTING
15488-10/12
15488-10/12
15488-10/12
15488-10/12
15488-11/12
15488-11/12
15488-11/12
15488-12/12
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
PART 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Section 15488 - Compressed Air Systems
15488-2/12
15488-2/12
15488-2/12
15488-4/12
15488-4/12
15488-5/12
15488-6/12
15488-6/12
15488-6/12
15488-7/12
15488-7/12
15488-7/12
15488-7/12
Page | 1 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15488 - COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
This specification covers requirements for compressed air systems inside of buildings with pressure up
to 12 bar (174 PSIG).
1.2
SAUDI PRODUCTS
The Contractor shall be required to use available equivalent Saudi products in lieu of specified
items. See General Conditions: SAUDI GOODS AND PRODUCTS. Certification of Saudi nonavailability is required for non-Saudi product use. Reference in the Specifications or on Drawings
to a specific manufacturer and his products are given to establish type, quality, materials, sizes and
grades of a product that meets the requirements of the Project. Product of other manufacturers may
be used subject to requirements of General Conditions and to the approval of the Client, provided
that they do not require design changes and do not increase the cost of the Project.
1.3
REFERENCES
Except as modified by this Specification, comply with the latest applicable provisions and
recommendations listed below, but referred to there after by basic designation only. Where the
language in any of the documents referred to herein is in the form of a recommendation or
suggestion, such recommendation or suggestion shall be deemed to be mandatory under this
contract.
1.3.1
1.3.2
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

ANSI B1.20.1
ANSI B16.3
ANSI B16.5
ANSI B16.9
1983
1985
1988
1986
ANSI B16.11
1980
ANSI B16.22
1989
ANSI B16.24
1979
ANSI B16.26
1988
ANSI B16.34
ANSI B31.1
ANSI B40.1
1988
1989
1985
ANSI B49.1
1988
Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)

Malleable iron threaded fittings
Pipe flanges and flanged fittings
Factory-made wrought steel butt-welding
fittings
Forged steel fittings, socket-welding and
threaded
Wrought copper and Copper Alloy Solder
Joint Pressure Fittings
Bronze pipe flanges and flanged fittings class
150 and 300
cast copper alloy fittings for flared copper
tubes
Valves flanged, threaded and welding end
Power piping
gauges pressure indicating dial type elastic
Element
Safety in welding and cutting
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

ASME BPVC SEC
1989 Boiler and pressure vessel code: section VIII
Page | 2 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
VIII D1
ASME BPVC SEC
IX
1.3.3
American society for testing and materials (ASTM)

ASTM A53
ASTM A193/A193M
ASTM A194/A194M
ASTM B88
1.3.4
MSS SP-69
MSS SP-80
MSS SP-84
MSS SP-89
NEMA ICS 6
NEMA MG 1
1988 Industrial control devices, controllers and

Assemblies
1988 (Rev. 1) enclosures for industrial controls and
Systems
1987 (Rev. 1) motors and generators
Plumbing and piping industry council, Inc. (PPIC)

PPIC GFSR
1.3.8
1988 Pipe hangers and supports materials, design

and Manufacture
1983 Pipe hangers and support selection and
application
1987 bronze gate, globe, angle and check valves
1990 Valves socket welding and threaded ends
1985 Pipe hangers and supports fabrication and
Installation practices
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

NEMA ICS 2
1.3.7
1990 Structural welding code steel, twelfth edition
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.

(MSS)
MSS SP-58
1.3.6
1990 Pipe, steel, black and hot-dipped zinc-coated

welded
and seamless
1989 Alloy-steel and stainless steel bolding
materials for
high-temperature service
1988 (Rev. A) carbon and alloy steel nuts for bolts
for high-pressure and high-temperature service
1989 seamless copper water tube
American Welding Society, Inc. (AWS)

AWS D1.1
1.3.5
pressure vessels division 1

1989 boiler and pressure vessel code: section IX
qualifications standard for welding and bracing
procedures, welders, brazers, and welding, and
brazing
operators
1982 guidelines for seismic restraints (GFSR) of

mechanical systems and plumbing piping systems
Steel structures painting council (SSPC)

SSPC SP 10
1989 Near-white blast cleaning
Page | 3 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.3.9

SASO 326
1.4
Industrial safety and health regulations Part 6:

Equipment Sections 6.4, 6.5, 6.6 Tanks,
pressure vessels, boilers and compressed gas
equipment.
Section 15010: BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS, applies to this
section, with the additions and modifications specified herein.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with section 01300: SUBMITTALS
PROCEDURES.
1.5.1
Manufacturers Catalog Data

Compressors
Receivers
Desiccant air dryers
Desiccant
Piping and Tubing
Fittings
Valves
Pressure gages
Hangers and supports
Quick disconnect couplings
Filters
Strainers
Traps
Lubricators
Flexible connections
Dielectric unions
Hose reel assembly
Valve box
For receivers, include Manufacturers Data Report
1.5.2
Manufacturers Instruction
Air receiver
Include manufacturers recommended certification test procedure and recommended
procedure for cleaning, external painting, and delivery preparation.
1.5.3
Statements
Welding procedures
Welding procedure qualifications
Cleaning and flushing procedures
Page | 4 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.5.4
Test Reports
Air compressors
Air receivers
Pressure tests
Leak tightness tests
1.5.5
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Compressors
1.5.5.1 Equipment Data
Submit the following data for equipment listed for
Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
A. Name and address of authorized branch or service department.
B. characteristics curves.
C. Following applicable data completely filled in:
Manufacturer and Model No. __________
Operating Speed ___________
Capacity __________ (L/S)
Type of Bearings in Unit ___________
Type of Lubrication ______________
Type and Adjustment of Drive _______
Capacity of Tank _____
Electric Motor: Manufacturer, Frame and Type_______
Motor Speed _____ RPM
Current Characteristics and HP of Motor _____
Thermal Cut-out Switch: Manufacturer, Type and Model _____
Starter: Manufacturer: Type and Model _____
1.5.6
Administration or Closeout Submittals

a. Posted operating instructions for compressors
b. Posted operating instructions air dryers
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Design, fabrication, installation, and testing of compressed air systems shall conform to
ANSI B31.l, ASME BPVC SEC VIII Dl, and ASME BPVC SEC IX, except as specified
otherwise.
1.6.1
Welding Requirements
Welding of piping shall be performed in accordance with the requirements specified in

AWS D1.1
Page | 5 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.6.2
Qualification of Pressure Vessel (receiver) Inspectors
State certification of competency and active commission from the National board of boiler
and pressure vessel inspectors (NBBI), Columbus, ohio or from local authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.7
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.7.1
Temperature Restriction
Compressors or other equipment shall riot discharge compressed air to the piping systems
above 40C unless approved the contracting officer. After coolers or other devices shall be
provided to comply with the temperature restriction.
1.7.2
Rotating Equipment
Fully guard couplings, motor shafts, gears and other exposed rotating or rapidly moving
parts in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.219 and local regulations. Provide rigid and
suitably secured guard parts readily removable without disassembling guarded unit.
1.7.2
Welding
Safety in welding, and cutting, of pipe shall conform to ANSI Z49.1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
AIR COMPRESSORS 7.5 KW TO 225 KW UP TO 12 BAR

Air compressors shall be the rotary type water or air cooled as indicated complete with
electric motor drive and operating and safety controls. Capacity of the unit shall be as
indicated on drawings. Configuration and dimensions of the air compressors shall be
compatible with the indicated allocated space. Sound level shall not exceed 84dBa one
meter from the unit.
The air compressors shall be complete with heavy duty industrial dry type air filter, air
receiver, intercooler/aftercooler, dryer and the necessary instruments and valving. The
minimum safety controls shall include:
High Lubrication Oil Temperature
High Bearing Temperature
High Discharge Air Temperature
High Discharge Air Temperature
High Discharge Air Pressure
High Motor Temperature
High Intercooler Air Temperature
2.2
AIR COMPRESSOR UNIT LESS THAN 7.5 KW UP TO 12 BAR

Compressor unit shall be one or two stage, double acting, reciprocating type air cooled,
electric motor driven compete with air filter, air receiver and the necessary instruments and
Page | 6 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
valving. Unit shall be package type with compressor and motor mounted on the receiver
with a common sub-base. Capacity of the unit shall be as indicated on drawings.
2.2.1
Nameplate
Nameplate shall be metal, securely fastened to equipment or base, listing:

Manufacturers Name and Address
Model and Serial Numbers
Compressor Operating Data and Rating
2.2.2
Air Receiver
Receiver shall be rated for 1380 kPa per ASME BPVC Section VIII. Receiver shall be
complete with service valves, pressure gage, ASME relief valve and automatic float type
trap.
2.2.3
Motor and Starter
Motor shall be squirrel cage induction motor with drip-proof enclosure and conforming
with NEMA standards suitable for operation on the indicated power supply. The rated
power of the motor shall equal or exceed power required for continuous operation of
compressor at full load. Capacity and characteristics of starter shall be compatible with
motor. Starter shall conform to NEMA standards and shall include thermal overload
protection of all phases.
2.2.4
Noise
Sound level shall not exceed 84dBa at one meter from the unit.
2.3
AIR RECEIVER
The air receiver shall be the vertical type of steel construction per ASME BPVC Section
VIII labeled and rated for 1380 kPa equipped with an ASME rated pressure relief valve,
service valves, pressure gage and automatic float type air valve. Exterior and interior shall
be sand blasted to SSSP SP1O. Lining shall be factory applied 0.2 mm minimum white
epoxy coating. Exterior finish shall be standard factory finish.
2.4
INTAKE AIR FILTER AND SILENCER

Filter shall be dry type combination filter/silencer with backed enamel steel housing. Filter
shall be 99 percent efficient. Silencer shall be the residential quality type.
2.5
DESICCANT AIR DRYERS
Chamber of welded steel, 12 bar working pressure, ASME labeled conforming to ASME BPVC
Sec VIII D1, with flanged or threaded fittings, and manual automatic drain valve. Manufacturers
recommended desiccant in tablet form which will not nest or cake. Contractor shall provide a
supply of desiccant for initial operations in unbroken shipping containers equal to not less than four
charges for the dryer.
2.6
LOW PRESSURE COMPRESSED AIR PIPING AND ACCESSORIES
Page | 7 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.6.1
General Requirements
Compressed air piping 12 bar at 650C:

Piping, fittings, valves, hangers and supports shall be furnished in accordance with Section
15010, 15145 and as specified herein.
2.6.2
Steel piping
Piping shall be ASTM A53, seamless, carbon steel, schedule 40, galvanized.
2.6.3
Valves
2.6.3.1 Gate Valves
A. Bronze globe and angle valves: MSS SP-80, 50 mm ND and
smaller, valves shall have renewable seats and discs except
brazed-end valves which shall have integral seats.
B. Steel globe and angle valves: MSS SP-84, 50 mm ND and smaller, ANSI
B16.34, over 50mm ND, flanged ends, class as recommended by the
manufacturer for the conditions indicated. Provide pilot valve for dome
loaded type if required for proper operations.
2.6.3.2 Safety Valves
ASME BPVC Sec VIII D1 and ASME BPVC Sec IX code stamped safety valve,
861 kpa, bronze, with threaded or flanged connections; factory set and sealed.
2.6.3.3 Check Valves
MSS SP-80, Bronze body with brazed joint or threaded ends or steel body with
flanged end, ANSI B16.34, or threaded ends, MSS SP-84. The check valve shall
have a perforated piston with closed downstream end, in line with the: pipe and
held closed by a steel poppet return spring.
2.6.3.4 Pressure Regulators
Diaphragm type, air loaded, tight closing single seat, brass body with integral filter
and bow. Pressure regulators used to deliver compressed air for cleaning shall be
adjustable to not more than 210 kPa.
2.6.3.5 Needle valves
One-piece bodies with integral or screwed bonnet, stems of hardened stainless
steel with fine thread for metering and ease of adjusting, teflon packing; and shall
be of the pressure balanced type. Needle valves shall be of the slow opening type.
2.6.4
Pressure Gages
ANSI B40.1, Accuracy Grade A, for air, with steel or brass case, and nonshatterable safety
glass, and a pressure blowout back to prevent glass from flying out in case of an explosion.
Page | 8 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Gages shall have an 80 mm minimum diameter dial and a dial range of approximately
twice working pressure.
2.6.5
Hangers and Supports
Provide pipe hangers and supports conforming to MSS SP-58, MSS SP-69, and ANSI
B31.l, except as specified or indicated otherwise. Furnish zinc plated pipe hangers and
supports except for copper plated inserts for copper piping. Provide tubing supports of Ushaped steel bolts and nuts firmly secured to adequately support structures such as walls,
columns, floors, or brackets. Clips shall fit closely around piping but shall have sufficient
clearance to permit longitudinal movement of piping during normal expansion and
contraction. Provide supports at valves, fittings, branch lines, outlets, changes in direction,
equipment, and accessories.
2.6.6
Quick Disconnect Couplings
All brass and suitable for a working pressure of not less than 861 kPa. Female side of
coupling (fixed end) shall have male thread connection with automatic shutoff. Provide
male side of coupling with hose stem and ball check to bleed pressure from hose and
prevent hose whipping.
2.6.7
Single Cartridge Type Filters
Provide cellulose cartridge filters of graded density construction with brass or bronze
housing capable of removing liquids and solids of 5 microns and larger. Filter capacity
shall be compatible with rated flow of equipment or pressure reducing valves provided.
2.6.8
Strainers
Bronze or malleable iron body, Class 125, Style Y, Type II, simplex type, with 20-mesh
Monel or stainless steel screen.
2.6.9
Traps
Type of traps, shall be as indicated, and rated working pressure not less than system
operating pressure.
2.6.10 Lubricators
Brass body, 861 kPa minimum rating, with clear plastic bowl and metal guard, metal bowl.
2.6.11 Flexible Connections
Vibration isolation, wire braid reinforced corrugated metal hose type, line-sized, with
bronze end connections, suitable for pressure indicated. Length as recommended by
manufacturer but not less than 450 mm.
2.6.12 Dielectric Unions
Steel female pipe thread end and copper solderjoint ends. Steel parts shall be galvanized
or plated. Union shall have a water-impervious insulation barrier capable of limiting
galvanic current to one percent of the short-circuit current in a corresponding bimetallic
Page | 9 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
joint. When dry, it shall also be able to withstand a 600-volt breakdown test.
2.6.13 Threading
Tape shall be tetrafluroethylene for screw jointed pipe
2.6.14 Hose Reel Assembly
Complete with 30m hose rated for a minimum of 861 kPa, ball stop, hose extension with
air coupler, hose rollers, reel enclosure, nonsparking ratchet pawl, and required
accessories.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING
Compressed air piping shall be fabricated, installed and tested in accordance with specification
section 15010: BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.2
VALVES, GAUGES, STRAINERS
Install valves at the locations indicated and elsewhere as required for the proper functioning of the
system.
3.2.1
Globe Valves
Install globe valves so that the pressure will be below the disk. Install globe valves with the
stems vertical.
3.2.2
Pressure-Reducing Valves
Provide compressed air entering each pressure-reducing valve with a strainer. Provide each
pressure-reducing valve unit with two block valves and with a globe or angle bypass valve
and bypass pipe. Provide a bypass around a reducing valve of reduced size to restrict its
capacity to approximately that of the reducing valve. Provide each pressure reducing valve
unit with an indicating gage to show the reduced pressure, and a safety valve on the low
pressure side. These requirements do not apply to small pressure regulating valves used to
adjust pressure for pneumatic equipment.
3.2.3
Pressure Gages
Provide pressure gages with a shut-off valve or petcock installed between the gage and the
line.
3.2.4
Strainers
Provide strainers with meshes suitable for the services where indicated, or where dirt might
interfere with the proper operation of valve parts, orifices, or moving parts of equipment.
Page | 10 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.3
Selection, fabrication and installation of piping hanger and supports shall conform to MSS SP58/69
and to the requirements of section 15145 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
3.4
3.4.1
Equipment Foundations
Provide equipment foundations of sufficient size and weight and of proper design to
preclude shifting of equipment under operating conditions or under any abnormal
conditions which could be imposed upon the equipment. Provide foundations which meet
the requirements of the equipment manufacturer, and when required by the Contracting
Officer obtain from the equipment manufacturer approval of the foundation design and
construction for the equipment involved. Equipment vibration shall be maintained within
acceptable limits, and shall be suitably dampened and isolated.
3.4.2
Equipment Foundations
Install equipment strictly in accordance with these Specifications and the manufacturers
installation instructions. Grout equipment mounted
on concrete foundations before
piping is installed. Installed piping in a manner that does not place a strain on any of the
equipment. Do not bolt flanged joints tight unless they match properly. Extend expansion
bends adequately before installation. Grade, anchor, guide and support piping without low
pockets.
3.5
CLEANING OF SYSTEM
3.5.1
General
Clean the various system components before final closing as the installations are
completed. Remove foreign matter from equipment and surrounding areas. Preliminary or
final tests will not be permitted until the cleaning is approved by the contracting officer.
A. Painting of Piping and Equipment
Paint piping and equipment in accordance with Section 09900, Painting.
3.6

3.6.1.
Welding Examinations
In accordance with AWS D1.1 and the following: The Contractor shall perform visual
examinations to detect surface and internal discontinuities in completed welds. Visually
examine all welds. When examination indicates defects in a weld joint, the weld shall be
repaired by a qualified welder. Remove and replace defects as specified in ANSI B31.l,
unless otherwise specified. Repair defects discovered between weld passes before
additional weld material is deposited. Whenever a defect removed, and repair by welding is
not required, blend the affected area into the surrounding surface, eliminating sharp
notches, crevices, or corners. After defect removal is complete and before rewelding,
examine the area by the same methods which first revealed the defect to ensure that the
defect has been eliminated. After rewelding, reexamine the repaired area by the same test
Page | 11 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
methods originally used for that area. Any indication of a defect shall be regarded as a
defect unless reevaluation by surface conditioning and reexamination shows that no
unacceptable defects are present. The use of any foreign material to mask, fill in, seal, or
disguise welding defects will not be permitted.
3.7
TESTING
3.7.1
General Requirements
Perform testing after cleaning. Contractor shall provide everything required for tests. Tests
shall be subject to the approval of the Ministry Representative. Calibrate the test pressure
gages with a dead weight tester within 15 days before use and certify by initial and date on
a sticker applied to dial face. Pressurize each piping system individually and check to
assure that there are no cross-connections between different systems prior to hydrostatic
and operational tests.
3.7.2
Hydrostatic and Leak Tightness Tests
3.7.2.1 Preliminary Preparation

Remove or isolate from the system the compressor, air dryer, filters,
instruments, and equipment which would be damaged by water during
hydrostatic tests and reinstall after successful completion of tests.
3.7.2.2 Performance of Hydrostatic Tests
Hydrostatically test piping systems in accordance with ANSI B3l.1. Vent or
flush air from the piping system. Pressurize system for 10 minutes with water
at one and one-half times design working pressure, then reduce the design
working pressure and check for leaks and weeps.
3.7.2.3 Compressed Air Leak Test
After satisfactory completion of hydrostatic pressure test, blow systems dry
with clean, oil-free compressed air, and test with clean, dry air at design
working pressure. Brush joints with soapy water solution to check for leaks.
Install a calibrated test pressure gage in piping system to observe any loss in
pressure. Maintain required test pressure for a sufficient length of time to
enable an inspection of joints and connections.
3.7.3
Operational Tests
Test equipment as in service to determine compliance with contract requirements and

warranty. During the tests, test equipment under every condition of operation. Test safety
controls to demonstrate performance of their required functions. Completely test system
for compliance with specifications.
Page | 12 of 12
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15780 - PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (ROOF TOP)

PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
PART 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
PART 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
GENERAL
SCOPE
REFERENCES
SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
15780-2/8
15780-2/8
15780-2/8
15780-3/8
15780-3/8
15780-4/8
15780-4/8
PRODUCTS
15780-4/8
AIR CONDITIONER
FILTERS
MOTORS AND STARTERS
ECONOMIZERS
INSULATIONS
FINISHES
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
15780-4/8
15780-6/8
15780-6/8
15780-6/8
15780-7/8
15780-7/8
15780-7/8
EXECUTION
15780-7/8
DRAIN CONNECTIONS AND DRAIN LINES
ACCESS PANELS
AIR FILTERS
FLASHING AND PITCH POCKETS
IDENTIFICATION TAGS AND PLATES
15780-7/8
15780-8/8
15780-8/8
15780-8/8
15780-8/8
15780-8/8
15780-8/8
Section 15780 - Packaged Air Conditioning Units

(Roof Top)
Page | 1 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15780 - PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (ROOF TOP)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
The Contractor shall provide all labor equipment and material required to furnish and install Air
Conditioner of the single package type complete.
1.2
REFERENCES
Except as modified by this Specification, comply with the latest applicable provisions and
recommendations listed below, but referred to there after by basic designation only. Where the
language in any of documents referred to herein is in the form of a recommendation or suggestion,
such recommendation or suggestion shall be deemed to be mandatory under this contract.
1.2.1
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI)
ARI
ARI
360
DCAACP
ARI
DCUAC
1.2.2
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment

Directory of Certified Applied Air-Conditioning Products (Latest
Edition)
Directory of Certified Unitary Air-Conditioner Equipment (Latest
Edition)
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
A123
B88
B117
B280
ASTM C534
ASTM D1654
ASTM E84
Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

Seamless Copper Water Tube
Salt Spray (Fog) Testing
Seamless copper Tube for Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Field
Service
Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet
and Tubular
Form
Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments
Surface Burning Characteristics or Building Materials
1.2.3
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and AirConditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 15
ASHRAE 52
Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration

Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing
Particulate Matter
1.2.4
American Welding Society, Inc. (AWS)
AWS A5.8
Brazing Filler Metal
1.2.5
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
NEMA ICS1
Industrial Control and Systems

(Roof Top)
Page | 2 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
NEMA ICS2
NEMA ICS6
NEMA MG1
1.2.6
UL
UL
UL
UL
Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies

Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems
Motors and Generators
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
109
484
873
900
Tube Fittings for Flammable and Combustible Fluids, Refrigeration

Room Air-Conditioners
Temperature Indicating and Regulating Equipment
Test Performance of Air Filter Units
1.2.7 SAUDI ARABIAN STANDARDS ORGANIZATION (SASO)

SASO 772
Code of Practice for mechanical ventilation and air conditioning in

buildings Part 1:
General basis of design.
buildings Part 2 :
General requirements for installation.
Air Ducts for air conditioning Part I: Definitions, classification and
terminology.
Safety requirements for the installation on air conditioning and
ventilating systems
Part 1: Definitions and technical terms.
Safety requirements for the installation on air conditioning and
ventilating systems Part 2: Requirements of HVAC systems
SASO 773
SASO 1302
SASO 1435
SASO 1436
1.3
Section 15011, Mechanical General Requirements, applies to this section with the additions and
modifications specified herein.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with section 01300, SUBMITTALS PROCEDURES.

D-17,
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
SD-35,
i.
SD-44,
i.
ii.
iii.
Manufacturers Catalog Data

Air conditioners (rooftop). Include noise rating.
Filters
Thermostats
Coatings for finned tube coils
Drawings
Control system wiring diagrams
Manufacturers Instructions
Air conditioners
Filters
Thermostats
SD-73, Factory Test Reports

i.
High efficiency filter tests
(Roof Top)
Page | 3 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
ii.
Salt-spray tests
SD-77, Field Test Reports

i.
Start-up and initial operational tests
SD-80,
i.
ii.
iii.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals

Air conditioners, Data Package 3
Filters, Data Package 2
Thermostats, Data Package 2
Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with section 01730, Operation and
Maintenance Data.
SD-93, Administrative or Closeout Submittals
i.
Posted operating instructions, submit text
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1
Safety
Design, manufacture, and installation of unitary air conditioning equipment shall
conform to ASHRAE 15.
1.6
POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Provide posted operating instructions for each packaged air conditioning unit
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
AIR CONDITIONERS
2.1.1
Single Package Rooftop Type
Provide factory-packaged combination heating and cooling units. Provide units suitable for
roof top installation. Provide units with suitable lifting attachments. Units shall have a
minimum EER of 8 when tested in accordance with ARI 360. Provide capacity, electrical
characteristics, and operating conditions as indicated. Condensers shall provide not less
than 12 degrees C liquid sub-cooling at standard ratings.
2.1.2
Single Zone Units
Provide single zone type units arranged to draw through coil sections.
2.1.3
Heaters
Provide as an integral part of the evaporator-blower unit electric open coils with the factory
installed protection devices such as fuse protection and fusible link air flew switch.
2.1.4
Compressors
For compressors over 20 tons, compressor speed shall not exceed 1750 rpm. For systems
(Roof Top)
Page | 4 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
over 6.5 tons provide automatic capacity reduction of at least 50 percent of rated capacity.
Capacity reduction may be accomplished by cylinder unloading, use of multi-or variable
speed compressors, use of multiple, but not more than four compressors, or a combination
of the two methods. Units with cylinder unloading shall start with capacity reduction
devices in the unloaded position. Units with multiple compressors shall have means to
sequence starting of compressors.
-
Units up to 12.5 tons shall be with hermetically sealed reciprocating compressor.
15 ton or above units shall be with scroll type compressor.
Provide compressors with devices to prevent short cycling when shut down by safety
controls. Device shall delay operation of compressor motor for at least 3 minutes but not
more than 6 minutes. Provide a pump down cycle for units 20 tons and over. Provide
compressors with crankcase heaters. If compressors are paralleled, provide not less than
two independent circuits. Each unit shall be provided with factory install sight glass and
filter drain. Warranty for compressor shall be (5) years from date of handing over the
project, not from date of delivery or installation.
2.1.5
Coils
Coils shall be constructed of seamless copper tubes and aluminum fins bonded to tubes.
Provide a separate air-cooled condenser circuit for each compressor or parallel compressor
installation. Coils shall be protected from hail, flying debris and damage by large objects
without increasing unit clearance.
2.1.6
Controls
Provide start-up and head pressure controls to allow for system operation at ambient
temperatures down to 2 degrees C.
2.1.7
Fans
Provide belt-driven evaporator fans with adjustable pitch pulleys; except for units less than
5-ton capacity, direct drive with at least two speed taps may be used. Select pulleys at
approximately midpoint of the adjustable range.
2.1.8
Filters
Provide filters of the type specified in this section. Shall be included integral with airconditioning units.
2.1.9
Ventilation Damper Assembly
Operated by automatic actuator. Dampers shall close on unit shutdown or loss of power
and shall open on heating or cooling startup.
2.1.10 Controls
Shall be as indicated on the drawings.

(Roof Top)
Page | 5 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.2
FILTERS
Provide filters to filter outside air and return air and locate inside air conditioners. Provide
throwaway high efficiency. Filters shall conform to UL 900, Class 1 or Class 2.
Polyurethane filters shall not be used on units with multi-frame filters: 2.2.1
Washable Type Filters
Washable filter media; standard dust holding capacity, 1.8m/s maximum face velocity, and
50 mm thick. Pressure drop across clean filter shall not exceed 25pa.
2.2.2
High Efficiency Filters
Units 25 ton and above shall be provided with high efficiencies filters. Filters shall have a
mean efficiency of 85 percent when tested in accordance with ASHRAE 52. Filter
assembly shall include; holding frame and fastener assembly, filter cartridge, mounting
frame, and retainer assembly. Reinforce filter media with glass fiber mat. Pressure drop
across clean filter shall not exceed 45 Pa. Precede high efficiency filters with a UL Class 2
replaceable type filter.
2.2.3
Manometers
Provide inclined-type manometers for filter stations of 3400m3/H capacity or larger

including filters furnished as integral parts of air-handling units and filters installed
separately. Provide sufficient length to read at least 250 Pa with major graduations in 25
Pa, and equipped with spirit level. Equip manometers with overpressure safety traps to
prevent loss of fluid, and two three-way vent valves for checking zero setting.
2.3
MOTORS AND STARTERS

Determine specific motor characteristics to ensure provision of correctly sized starters and
overload heaters. Provide motors to operate at full capacity with a voltage variation of plus
or minus 10 percent of the motor voltage rating. Motor size shall be sufficient for the duty
to be performed and shall not exceed its full load nameplate current rating when driven
equipment is operated at specified capacity under the most severe conditions likely to be
encountered. When motor size provided differs from size indicated or specified, the
Contractor shall make the necessary adjustments to the wiring, disconnect devices, and
branch circuit protection to accommodate equipment actually provided. Provide reduced
voltage type motor starters. Provide rain-tight/dust-tight type starter enclosures in
accordance with NEMA ICS6. All motors shall be provided with inherent overload
protection.
2.4
ECONOMIZERS
Provide, where indicated, integrated type capable of simultaneous economizer and
compressor operation to provide cooling with outdoor air, equiped with dampers not to
exceed 3% leakage at 250 Pa peressure differential and capable of introducing 100%
outdoor air. Shall be complete with drybulb temperature controller and mixed sensor that
controls the economizer.

(Roof Top)
Page | 6 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.5
INSULATION
Provide glass fiber insulation in manufacturers standard thickness complying with NFPA
90A.
2.6
FINISHES
Provide steel surfaces of equipment including packaged terminal units, heat pumps, and air
conditioners, that do no have a zinc coating conforming to ASTM A 123, or a duplex
coating of zinc and paint, with a factory applied coating or paint system. Provide a coating
or paint system on actual equipment identical to that on salt-spray test specimens with
respect to materials, conditions of application, and dry-film thickness.
2.7
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

2.7.1
High Efficiency Filter Tests
Test high efficiency filters in accordance with ASHRAE 52.

2.7.2
Salt-Spray Tests
Salt-spray tests the factory-applied coating or paint system of equipment including

packaged terminal units, heat pumps, and air conditioners in accordance with ASTM B117.
Conduct test for 500 hours for equipment installed outdoors or 125 hours for equipment
installed indoors. Test specimens shall have a standard scribe mark as defined in ASTM
D1654. Upon completion of exposure, evaluate and rate the coating or paint system in
accordance with procedures A and B of ASTM D1654. Rating of failure at the scribe mark
shall not be less than six, average creepage not greater than 3mm. Rating of the unscrewed
area shall not be less than 10, no failure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Install equipment and components in a manner to ensure proper and sequential operation of
equipment and equipment controls. Install equipment not covered in this section, or in
manufacturers instructions, as recommended by manufacturers representative. Provide
proper foundations for mounting of equipment, accessories, appurtenances, and controls
including, but not limited to, supports, spring isolators, stands, guides, anchors, clamps and
brackets. Foundations for equipment shall conform to equipment manufacturers
recommendation, unless otherwise indicated. Set anchor bolts and sleeves using templates.
Provide anchor bolts of adequate length, and provide with welded-on plates on the head
end embedded in the concrete. Level equipment bases, using jacks or steel wedges, and
neatly grout-in with a non-shrinking type of grouting mortar. Locate equipment to allow
working space for servicing including shaft removal, disassembling compressor cylinders
and pistons, replacing or adjusting drives, motors, or shaft seals, access to automatic
controls, refrigerant charging, lubrication, oil draining and working clearance under
overhead lines. Provide electric isolation between dissimilar metals for the purpose of
minimizing galvanic corrosion.

(Roof Top)
Page | 7 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.2
DRAIN CONNECTIONS AND DRAIN LINES

Provide separate drain lines for the unit drain. Trap drain pans from the bottom to ensure
complete pan drainage. Provide drain lines full size of drain opening. Traps and piping to
drainage disposal points shall conform to Section 15420 Drainage and Vent.
3.3
ACCESS PANELS
Provide access panels for concealed valves, controls, dampers, and other fittings requiring
inspection and maintenance.
3.4
AIR FILTERS
Allow access space for servicing filters. Install filters with suitable sealing to prevent
bypassing of air.
3.5
FLASHING AND PITCH POCKETS

Provide flashing and pitch pockets for equipment supports and roof penetrations and
flashing where piping or ductwork passes through exterior walls in accordance with
Section 07600, Flashing and Sheet Metal.
3.6
IDENTIFICATION TAGS AND PLATES

Provide equipment and controllers with tags numbered and stamped for their use. Provide
plates and tags of brass or suitable nonferrous material, securely mounted or attached.
Provide minimum letter and numeral size of 3 mm high.
3.7

3.7.1
Startup and Operation Tests
Test the air conditioning systems and systems components for proper operation. Adjust
safety and automatic control instruments as necessary to ensure proper operation
and sequence. Conduct operational tests for not less than 8 hours.
3.7.2
Performance Tests
Upon completion of evacuation, charging, startup, final leak testing and proper adjustment
of controls, test the systems to demonstrate compliance with performance and
capacity requirements.

(Roof Top)
Page | 8 of 8
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15891 METAL DUCTWORK

PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
PART 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
PART 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
RELATED DOCUMENTS
REFERENCES
SUMMARY
DEFINITIONS
SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
GENERAL
15891-2/10
15891-2/10
15891-2/10
15891-2/10
15891-3/10
15891-3/10
15891-3/10
15891-4/10
15891-5/10
PRODUCTS
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
2.1.1
SHEET METAL, GENERAL
2.1.2
GALVANIZED SHEET STEEL
2.1.3
STAINLESS STEEL
2.1.4
REINFORCEMENT SHAPES AND PLATES
2.1.5
TIE RODS
SEALING MATERIALS
FIRE STOPPING
2.4.1
BUILDING ATTACHMENTS
2.4.2
HANGERS
2.4.3
DUCT ATTACHMENTS
2.4.4
TRAPEZE AND RISER SUPPORT
RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
RECTANGULAR DUCT FITTINGS
15891-5/10
15891-5/10
15891-5/10
15891-5/10
15891-5/10
15891-5/10
15891-5/10
15891-5/10
15891-6/10
15891-6/10
15891-6/10
15891-6/10
15891-6/10
15891-6/10
15891-7/10
15891-7/10
EXECUTION
DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL
SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
HANGING AND SUPPORTING
CONNECTIONS
15891-7/10
15891-8/10
15891-8/10
15891-9/10
15891-9/10
15891-9/10
15891-10/10
Section 15891 Metal Ductwork
Page | 1 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15891- METAL DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1.1
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary

REFERENCES
The publication listed below from a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only
SASO 1302
SASO 772
SASO 773
1.3
Air Ducts for Air Conditioning Part I: Definitions, classification and

terminology.
buildings Part 1: General basis of design.
buildings Part 2 : General requirements for installation.
SUMMARY
1.3.1
This Section includes rectangular and round metal ducts and plenums for
heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus
50 mm to plus 254 mm water gage.
1.3.2
Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1.3.2.1 Division 7 Section "Joint Sealing" for fire-resistant sealants for use around
duct penetrations and fire damper installations in fire rated floors,
partitions, and walls.
1.3.2.2 Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for wall- and ceilingmounted access panels and doors for access to concealed ducts.
1.3.2.3 Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for intake and relief louvers and
vents connected to duct systems and installed in exterior walls.
1.3.2.4 Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for exterior duct and plenum
insulation.
1.3.2.5 Division 15 Section "Air Supply, Distribution, Ventilation and Exhaust
System" for flexible ducts, flexible duct connectors, dampers, ductmounted access panels and doors, turning vanes, duct silencers, and
hardware.
1.3.2.6 Division 15 Section " Air Supply, Distribution, Ventilation and Exhaust
System " for constant-volume control boxes, variable-air-volume control
boxes, reheat boxes and outlets and inlets
Page | 2 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.3.2.7 Division 15 Section "Direct Digital Control for HVAC" for automatic
volume control dampers and operators.
1.3.2.8 Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of HVAC &
Plumbing Systems".
1.4
DEFINITIONS
1.4.1
1.5
Sealing Requirements Definitions: For the purposes of duct systems sealing

requirements specified in this Section, the following definitions apply:
1.4.1.1
Seams: A seam is defined as joining of two longitudinally (in the direction

of airflow) oriented edges of duct surface material occurring between two
joints. All other duct surface connections made on the perimeter are
deemed to be joints.
1.4.1.2.
Joints: Joints include girth joints; branch and subbranch intersections; socalled duct collar tap-ins; fitting subsections; louver and air terminal
connections to ducts; access door and access panel frames and jambs; duct,
plenum, and casing abutments to building structures.

1.5.1 The duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air moving
and distribution equipment and other components of the air system. Changes or
alterations to the layout or configuration of the duct system must be specifically
approved in writing.
Accompany requests for layout modifications with
calculations showing that the proposed layout will provide the original design
results without increasing the system total pressure.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
1.6.1
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and

Division 1 Specification Sections.
1.6.2
Product data including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of

individual components, profiles, and finishes for the following items:
1.6.2.1
1.6.2.2
1.6.3
Sealing Materials.
Fire-Stopping Materials.
Shop drawings from duct fabrication shop, drawn to a scale not smaller than
1/50, on drawing sheets same size as the Contract Drawings, detailing:
1.6.3.1
1.6.3.2
1.6.3.3
Fabrication, assembly, and installation details, including plans, elevations,

sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.
Duct layout, indicating pressure classifications and sizes in plan view. For
exhaust ducts systems, indicate the classification of the materials handled
as defined in this Section.
Fittings.
Page | 3 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.6.3.4
1.6.3.5
1.6.3.6
1.6.3.7
1.6.3.8
1.6.4
Coordination drawings for ductwork installation in accordance with Division 15

Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements". In addition to the requirements
specified in "Basic Mechanical Requirements" show the following:
1.6.4.1
1.6.4.2.
1.6.4.3.
1.6.4.4.
1.7
Reinforcing details and spacing.

Seam and joint construction details.
Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations.
Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment,
vibration isolation, and duct attachment.
Coordination with ceiling suspension members.

Spatial coordination with other systems installed in the same space with
the duct systems.
Coordination of ceiling- and wall-mounted access doors and panels
required to provide access to dampers and other operating devices.
Coordination with ceiling-mounted lighting fixtures and air outlets and
inlets.
1.6.5
Record drawings including duct systems routing, fittings details, reinforcing,

support, and installed accessories and devices, in accordance with Division 15
Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements" and Division 1.
1.6.6
Maintenance data for volume control devices, fire dampers, and smoke dampers,
in accordance with Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements" and
Division 1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.7.1 NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA Standards:
1.7.1.1
NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and

Ventilating Systems", except as indicated otherwise.
1.7.1.2
NFPA 96, "Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of
Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapors for Commercial Cooking Equipment",
Chapter 3, "Duct System", for kitchen hood duct systems, except as
indicated otherwise.
Page | 4 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.8
1.8.1 Deliver sealant and fire-stopping materials to site in original unopened containers
or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and
designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing
instructions for multi-component materials.
1.8.2 Store and handle sealant fire-stopping materials in compliance with
manufacturers' recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to
moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
1.8.3 Deliver and store stainless steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective
paper, maintained through fabrication and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
SHEET METAL MATERIALS

2.1.1
Sheet Metal, General: Provide sheet metal in thicknesses indicated, packaged

and marked as specified in ASTM A 700.
2.1.2
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality, ASTM A 653, Coating

Designation G 90. Provide mill phosphatized finish for exposed surfaces of
ducts exposed to view.
2.1.3
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480, Type 316, sheet form, with No. 4 finish on
exposed surface for ducts exposed to view; Type 304, sheet form, with No. 1
finish for concealed ducts.
2.1.4
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Unless otherwise indicated, provide

galvanised steel reinforcing where installed on galvanised sheet metal ducts.
For stainless steel ducts provide reinforcing of compatible materials.
2.1.5
Tie Rods: Galvanised steel, 6 mm minimum diameter for 914 mm length or

less; 9.5 mm minimum diameter for lengths longer than 914 mm .
SEALING MATERIALS
2.2.1
Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term sealant used here is not limited to
materials of adhesive or mastic nature, but also includes tapes and
combinations of open weave fabric strips and mastics.
2.2.2
Joint and Seam Tape: 50 mm wide, glass-fiber-fabric reinforced.
2.2.3
Joint and Seam Sealant:

One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing,
polymerized butyl sealant complying with FS TT-S-001657, Type I;
formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
Page | 5 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.2.4
2.3
FIRE-STOPPING
2.3.1
2.4
Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone elastomeric joint

sealants, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
Fire-Resistant Sealant: Provide two-part, foamed-in-place, fire-stopping

silicone sealant formulated for use in a through-penetration fire-stop system
for filling openings around duct penetrations through walls and floors, having
fire-resistance ratings indicated as established by testing identical assemblies
per ASTM E 814 by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. or other testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.4.1
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder actuated fasteners, or

structural steel fasteners appropriate for building materials. Do not use powder
actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight aggregate concretes or for slabs less
than 100 mm thick.
2.4.2
Hangers: Galvanized sheet steel, or round, uncoated steel, threaded rod.

2.4.2.1
2.4.2.2
2.5
Hangers Installed In Corrosive Atmospheres: Electro-galvanized,

all-thread rod or hot-dipped-galvanized rods with threads painted
after installation.
Straps and Rod Sizes: Conform with Table 4-1 in SMACNA
HVAC Duct Construction Standards for sheet steel width and gage
and steel rod diameters.
2.4.3
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal

screws; compatible with duct materials.
2.4.4
Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes conforming to ASTM A 36.

2.4.4.1
Where galvanised steel ducts are installed, provide hot-dippedgalvanized steel shapes and plates.
2.4.4.2
For stainless steel ducts, provide stainless steel support materials.
RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

2.5.1
General: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet

steel, in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
Metal and Flexible", Tables 1-3 through 1-19, including their associated
details. Kitchen hood and kitchen hood exhaust ducts shall be fabricated of
stainless steel. Conform to the requirements in the referenced standard for
metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie rod applications, and joint
types and intervals.
Page | 6 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.5.1.1
2.5.1.2
2.5.2
Fabricate kitchen hood exhaust ducts with 1.6 mm thick (16 gage), stainless
steel. Weld and flange seams and joints. Conform to NFPA Standard 96.
2.5.3
Fabricate dishwasher hood exhaust ducts with 18 gage stainless steel. Weld
and flange seams and joints.
2.5.4
Static Pressure Classifications: Except where otherwise indicated, construct

duct systems to the following pressure classifications:
2.5.4.1
2.5.4.2
2.5.4.3
2.5.5
2.6
Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement

and rigidity class required for pressure classification.
Provide materials that are free from visual imperfections such as
pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, and discolorations.
Supply Ducts: 76 mm water gage.

Return Ducts: 50 mm water gage, negative pressure.
Exhaust Ducts: 50 mm water gage, negative pressure.
Crossbreaking or Cross Beading: Crossbreak or bead duct sides that are

483 mm and larger and are 1 mm or less, with more than 1 sq.m. of unbraced
panel area, as indicated in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standard",
Figure 1-4, unless they are lined or are externally insulated.
RECTANGULAR DUCT FITTINGS

2.6.1
Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other duct

construction in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Metal Duct Construction
Standard", Figures 2-1 through 2-10.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL

3.1.1
Duct System Pressure Class: Construct and install each duct system for the
specific duct pressure classification indicated.
3.1.2
Install ducts with the fewest possible joints.
3.1.3
Use fabricated fittings for all changes in directions, changes in size and shape,
and connections.
3.1.4
Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with projections into duct at
connections kept to a minimum.
3.1.5
Locate ducts, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally,

parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. Install duct
systems in shortest route that does not obstruct useable space or block access
for servicing building and its equipment.
Page | 7 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.2
3.1.6
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other

structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.
3.1.7
Provide clearance of 25 mm where furring is shown for enclosure or

concealment of ducts, plus allowance for insulation thickness, if any.
3.1.8
Install insulated ducts with 25 mm clearance outside of insulation.
3.1.9
Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces by locating in

mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do
not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown.
3.1.10
Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar
finished work.
3.1.11
Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through

transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
3.1.12
Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass interior partitions

and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between
construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of
same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 38 mm.
SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

3.2.1
General: Seal duct seams and joints as follows:
3.2.2
Pressure Classifications Greater Than 76 mm Water Gage: All transverse

joints, longitudinal seams, and duct penetrations.
3.2.3
Pressure Classification 50 and 76 mm Water Gage: All transverse joints and

longitudinal seams.
1.
Pressure Classification Less Than 50 mm Water Gage: Transverse joints

only.
3.2.4 Seal externally insulated ducts prior to insulation installation.
3.3
HANGING AND SUPPORTING

3.3.1
Install rigid round and rectangular, metal duct with support systems indicated
in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards", Tables 4-1 through 4-3
and Figures 4-1 through 4-8.
3.3.2
Support horizontal ducts within 0.6 m of each elbow and within 1.2 m of each
branch intersection.
3.3.3
Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 4.9 m and at each floor.
Page | 8 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.4
3.3.4
Upper attachments to structures shall have an allowable load not exceeding 1/4
of the failure (proof test) load but are not limited to the specific methods
indicated.
3.3.5
Install concrete insert prior to placing concrete.
3.3.6
Install powder actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and

completely cured.
CONNECTIONS
3.4.1
Equipment Connections: Connect equipment with flexible connectors in

accordance with Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories".
3.4.2
Branch Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards", Figures 2-7 and 2-8.
3.4.3
Outlet and Inlet Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards", Figures 2-16 through 2-18.
Terminal Units Connections:
Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards", Figure 2-19.
3.4.4
3.5

3.5.1
Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of the systems as required to

accommodate leakage testing, and as required for compliance with test
requirements.
3.5.2
Conduct tests, in the presence of the Contracting Officer, at static pressures

equal to the maximum design pressure of the system or the section being
tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test entire system at the
maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above the
maximum design operating pressure. Give 7 days' advanced notice for testing.
3.5.3
Determine leakage from entire system or section of the system by relating

leakage to the surface area of the test section.
3.5.4
Maximum Allowable Leakage: As described in ASHRAE 1997 Handbook,

"Fundamentals" Volume, Chapter 32, Table 6. Comply with requirements for
leakage classification 6 for pressure classifications greater than 75 mm water
gage and less than and equal to 254 mm water gage.
3.5.5
Remake leaking joints as required and apply sealants to achieve specified

maximum allowable leakage.
3.5.6 Leakage Test: Perform volumetric measurements and adjust air systems as
described in ASHRAE 1997 "HVAC Applications" Volume, Chapter 36
"Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and ASHRAE "Fundamentals" Volume,
Chapter 14 Measurement & Instruments.
Page | 9 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

3.6.1
Adjust volume control devices as required by the testing and balancing

procedures to achieve required air flow. Refer to Division 15 Section
"Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for requirements and procedures for
adjusting and balancing air systems.
3.6.2
Vacuum ducts systems prior to final acceptance to remove dust and debris.
Page | 10 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15895 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION AND EXHAUST

SYSTEM
PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL
SCOPE
REFERENCES
COORDINATION OF TRADES
SUBMITTALS
15895-2/27
15895-2/27
15895-6/27
15895-6/27
15895-6/27
15895-6/27
PART 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
PRODUCTS
STANDARD PRODUCTS
ASBESTOS PROHIBITION
NAMEPLATES
EQUIPMENT GUARDS AND ACCESS
PIPING
ELECTRICAL WORK
CONTROLS
DUCTWORK COMPONENTS
AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT
TERMINAL UNITS
SPLIT ROOM AIR CONDITIONERS
SINGLE PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONERS
WINDOW TYPE AIR CONDITIONERS
EVAPORATIVE COOLERS
FACTORY PAINTING
15895-8/27
15895-8/27
15486-8/27
15895-8/27
15895-8/27
15895-8/27
15895-9/27
15895-9/27
15895-9/27
15895-17/27
15895-20/27
15895-21/27
15895-23/27
15895-23/27
15895-24/27
15895-30/27
PART 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
EXECUTION
FIELD PAINTING AND PIPING IDENTIFICATION
PIPING HYDROSTATIC TEST
DUCTWORK LEAK TEST
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PERFORMANCE TESTS
FIELD TRAINING
15895-24/27
15895-24/27
15895-26/27
15895-26/27
15895-27/27
15895-27/27
15895-27/27
15895-27/27
15895-27/27
Section 15895 Air Supply, Distribution, Ventilation And Exhaust System
Page | 1 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15895 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
This Section includes supply and installation of Air Conditioning, Ventilation and Exhaust System,
complete in accordance with the Drawings and as herein specified.
1.2
REFERENCES
AIR CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (ARI)
ARI 210
ARI 260
ARI 350
ARI 360
ARI 430 (1989)
ARI 440 (1989)
ARI 880 (1990)
ARI Guideline D
Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment.

Application, Installation, and Servicing of Unitary Systems
(1986) Sound Rating of Non-Ducted Indoor
Air-Conditioning
Equipment
Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment.
Central-Station Air-Handling Units
Room Fan-Coil Air-Conditioners
Air Terminals
(1987) Application and Installation of Central Station Air-Handling Units
AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA (ACCA)

ACCA Manual 4
(1990) Installation Techniques for Perimeter Heating & Cooling

AIR DIFFUSION COUNCIL (ADC)
ADC 1062:GRD
(1984) Test Codes for Grilles, Registers and Diffusers
AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION (AMCA)

AMCA 210
AMCA 300
(1985) Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating

(1994) Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans
AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABEMA)

ABEMA 9
ABEMA 11
(1990) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings

(1990) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings
ANSI S12.32
(1990) Precision Methods for the Determination of Sound Power Levels of

Discrete Frequency and Narrow-Band Noise Sources in Reverberation
Rooms
Page | 2 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001

ASTM A 47
ASTM A 53
ASTM A 123
ASTM A 167
ASTM A 181
ASTM A 183
ASTM A 525
ASTM A 536
ASTM C 1071
ASTM D 1654
ASTM D 1785
ASTM D 2466
ASTM D 2564
ASTM D 2855
ASTM D 3359
ASTM E 437
ASTM F 872
(1990) Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings

(1993a) Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and
Seamless
(1989a) Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
(1993) Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet,
and Strip
(1993a) Forgings, Carbon Steel, for General-Purpose Piping
(1983; R 1990) Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts
(1993) General Requirement for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by
the Hot-Dip Process
(1984; R 1993) Ductile Iron Castings
(1991) Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct Lining
Material)
(1992) Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive
Environments
(1993) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80,
and 120
(1993) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40
(1993) Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping
Systems
(1993) Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Pipe and
Fittings
(1993) Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test
(1992) Industrial Wire Cloth and Screens (Square Opening Series)
(1984; R 1990) Filter Units, Air-Conditioning: Viscous-Impingement
Type, Cleanable
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND

AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 15
ASHRAE 33
ASHRAE 37
ASHRAE 52.1
ASHRAE 68
ASHRAE 84
(1992) Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration

Methods of Testing Forced Circulation Air Cooling and Heating coils.
Methods of Testing for Rating Unitary Air Conditioning and Heating Pump
Equipment.
(1992) Gravimetric and Duct-Spot Procedures for Air-Cleaning Devices
Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter
(1986) Laboratory Method of Testing In-Duct Sound Power Measurement
Procedures for Fans
(1991) Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers

ASME B1.20.1
ASME B16.3
ASME B16.5
ASME B16.9
ASME B16.11
ASME B16.39

(1988; Errata; B16.5a) Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
(1993) Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings
(1991) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded
(1986) Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions Classes 150, 250, and 300
Page | 3 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

AWWA C606
(1987) Grooved and Shouldered Joints

AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS D1.1
(1994) Structural Welding Code Steel

COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS (CID)
CID A-A-1419
(Rev D) Filter Element, Air Conditioning (Viscous-Impingement and Dry

Types, Replaceable)
FS F-F-320
FS F-F-2790
FS WW-V-35
(Rev B; Notice 1) Filters, Electronic Air Cleaning, Ionizing Plate Type

(Basic) Filter, Air-Extended Area, Initial Installation
(Rev C) Valve, Ball
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE

AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-25
MSS SP-58
MSS SP-69
MSS SP-70
MSS SP-71
MSS SP-80
MSS SP-85
(1993) Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions
(1993) Pipe Hangers and Supports -Materials, Design and Manufacture
(1991) Pipe Hangers and Supports -Selection and Application
(1990) Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
(1990) Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
(1987) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves
(1994) Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
MS MIL-A-3316
MS MIL-E-17813
MS MIL-E-17814
MS MIL-F-51068
MS MIL-P-21035
(Rev C; Am 2) Adhesives, Fire-Resistant, Thermal Insulation

(Rev F) Expansion Joints, Pipe, Metallic Bellows
(Rev F) Expansion Joints, Pipe, Slip-Type Packed
(Rev F; Int Am 3) Filters, Particulate (High-Efficiency Fire Resistant)
(Rev B) Paint, High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair (Metric)
MILITARY STANDARDS (MIL-STD)
MIL-STD 282
(Basic; Notice 1 thru 3) Filter Units, Protective Clothing, Gas-Mask

Components and Related Products: Performance-Test Methods
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

NEMA MG 1
(1993) Motors and Generators

NFPA 70
NFPA 90A
(1993) National Electrical Code

(1993) Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
Page | 4 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
NFPA 96
(1994) Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and

Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment
NORTH AMERICAN INSULATION MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NAIMA)

NAIMA-01
(1993) Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards

SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS'
NATIONAL ASSOCIATION (SMACNA)
SMACNA-01
SMACNA-05
SMACNA-06
SMACNA-10
(1975) Accepted Industry Practice for Industrial Duct Construction

(1992) Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC
Systems
(1985) HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible
(1985) HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual
UL-01
UL-03
UL-05
UL 94
UL 181
UL 214
UL-465
UL 555
UL 586
UL 705
UL-883
UL 900
UL 1995
(1994; Supple) Building Materials Directory

(1994) Electrical Construction Materials Directory
(1994; Supple) Fire Resistance Directory
(1991; Rev thru May 1994) Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for
Parts
in Devices and Appliances
(1994) Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors
(1993) Tests for Flame-Propagation of Fabrics and Films
Central Cooling Air Conditioners.
(1990; Rev thru Nov 1993) Fire Dampers
(1990) High-Efficiency, Particulate, Air Filter Units
(1994; Rev Jun 1994) Power Ventilators
Safety Standards for Fan Coil Units and Room Fan Heaters Units.
(1994) Test Performance of Air Filter Units
(1990) Heating and Cooling Equipment
SASO 772
SASO 773
SASO 1302
SASO 1435
SASO 1436
SASO 1583
Code of Practice for mechanical ventilation and air conditioning in buildings

Part 1: General basis of design.
Part 2 : General requirements for installation.
terminology.
Safety requirements for the installation on air conditioning and ventilating systems
Safety requirements for the installation on air conditioning and ventilating
systems Part 2: Requirements of HVAC systems
Safety requirements for the installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems Part III: Requirements of Air Distribution.
Page | 5 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.3
COORDINATION OF TRADES
Ductwork, piping offsets, fittings, and accessories shall be furnished as required to provide a
complete installation and to eliminate interference with other construction.
1.4
Equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather,
humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
Contracting Officer approval is required for submittals with a "GA" designation; submittals having
with Section 01300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Data
Components and Equipment Data; FIO.
Manufacturer's catalog data shall be included with the detail drawings for the following items. The
data shall be highlighted to show model, size, options, etc., that are intended for consideration.
Data shall be adequate to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements for the following:
a.
b.
c.
Ductwork Components
Air Systems Equipment
Terminal Units
SD-04 Drawings
Air Supply, Distribution, Ventilation, and Exhaust Equipment; FIO.
Drawings shall consist of equipment layout including assembly and installation details and
electrical connection diagrams; ductwork layout showing the location of all supports and hangers,
typical hanger details, gauge reinforcement, reinforcement spacing rigidity classification, and static
pressure and seal classifications; and piping layout showing the location of all guides and anchors,
the load imposed on each support or anchor, and typical support details. Drawings shall include
any information required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly
function as a unit and shall show equipment relationship to other parts of the work, including
clearances required for operation and maintenance.
SD-06 Instructions
Test Procedures; FIO.
Proposed test procedures for piping hydrostatic test, ductwork leak test, and performance tests of
systems, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing.
Welding Procedures; FIO.
A copy of qualified welding procedures, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of welding operations.
Page | 6 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
System Diagrams; GA.

Proposed diagrams, at least 2 weeks prior to start of related testing. System diagrams that show
the layout of equipment, piping, and ductwork, and typed condensed operation manuals explaining
preventative maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal, safe operation,
and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system shall be framed under glass or laminated
plastic. After approval, these items shall be posted where directed.
SD-07 Schedules
Test Schedules; FIO.
Proposed test schedules for hydrostatic test of piping, ductwork leak test, and performance tests, at
least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing.
Field Training Schedule; FIO.
Proposed schedule for field training, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related training.
SD-08 Statements
Similar Services; FIO.
Statement demonstrating successful completion of similar services on at least 5 projects of similar
size and scope, at least 2 weeks prior to submittal of other items required by this section.
Welding Qualification; FIO.
A list of names and identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators, at least 2
weeks prior to the start of welding operations.
SD-09 Reports
Test Reports; FIO.
Test reports for the piping hydrostatic test, ductwork leak test, and performance tests in booklet
form, upon completion of testing. Reports shall document phases of tests performed including
initial test summary, repairs/adjustments made, and final test results.
SD-13 Certificates
Bolts; FIO.
Written certification from the bolt manufacturer that the bolts furnished comply with the
requirements of this specification. The certification shall include illustrations of product markings,
and the number of each type of bolt to be furnished.
Air Supply, Distribution, Ventilation, and Exhaust Manuals; FIO.
Page | 7 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Six manuals listing step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, shutdown, and
routine maintenance, at least 2 weeks prior to field training. The manuals shall include the
manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, list of parts and tools that should be kept in stock by
the owner for routine maintenance including the name of a local supplier, simplified wiring and
controls diagrams, troubleshooting guide, and recommended service organization (including
address and telephone number) for each item of equipment. Each service organization submitted
shall be capable of providing 4 hour onsite response to a service call on an emergency basis.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
STANDARD PRODUCTS
Components and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
manufacturing of products that are of a similar material, design and workmanship. The standard
products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years before bid
opening. The 2-year experience shall include applications of components and equipment under
similar circumstances and of similar size. The 2 years must be satisfactorily completed by a
product which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a 2-year field
service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation, for not less
than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown. The equipment items
shall be supported by a service organization.
2.2
ASBESTOS PROHIBITION
Asbestos and asbestos-containing products shall not be used.
2.3
NAMEPLATES
Equipment shall have a nameplate that identifies the manufacturer's name, address, type or style,
model or serial number, and catalog number.
2.4
EQUIPMENT GUARDS AND ACCESS
Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting sets-crews, keys, and other rotating parts
exposed to personnel contact shall be fully enclosed or guarded according to OSHA requirements.
High temperature equipment and piping exposed to contact by personnel or where it creates a
potential fire hazard shall be properly guarded or covered with insulation of a type specified.
2.5
PIPING
Precharged Tubing: Refrigerant pipes for mini-split air conditioning units shall be Type L, streamlined,
cleaned and dehydrated copper tubing conforming to ASTM B 88, supplied with refrigerant charge
and pressure tight plugs for each length. Insulated tubing shall be supplied by the manufacturer of air
conditioning units.
2.5.1
Insulation:
Shop and field applied insulation shall be as specified in Section 15250 THERMAL
INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
Page | 8 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.5.2
Condensate Drain Lines:
Condensate drainage shall be provided for each item of equipment that generates
condensate as specified for drain, waste, and vent piping systems in Section 15420.
PLUMBING.
2.6
ELECTRICAL WORK
Electrical motor-driven equipment specified shall be provided complete with motor, motor starter,
and controls. Unless otherwise specified, electric equipment, including wiring and motor
efficiencies, shall be according to Section 16415 ELECTRICAL WORK, INTERIOR. Electrical
characteristics and enclosure type shall be as shown. Unless otherwise indicated, motors of 745 W
and above shall be high efficiency type. Motor starters shall be provided complete with thermal
overload protection and other appurtenances necessary. Each motor shall be according to NEMA
MG 1 and shall be of sufficient size to drive the equipment at the specified capacity without
exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal
devices required for the operation specified, and any control wiring required for controls and
devices, but not shown, shall be provided. Where two-speed or variable-speed motors are
indicated, solid-state variable-speed controller may be provided to accomplish the same function.
Solid-state variable-speed controllers shall be utilized for motors rated 7.45 kW or less. Adjustable
frequency drives shall be used for larger motors.
2.7
CONTROLS
Controls shall be provided as specified in Section 15970 CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC.
2.8
DUCTWORK COMPONENTS
2.8.1
Metal Ductwork:
All aspects of metal ductwork construction, including all fittings and components, shall
comply with SMACNA-06 unless otherwise specified. Elbows shall be radius type with a
centerline radius of 1-1/2 times the width or diameter of the duct where space permits.
Otherwise, elbows having a minimum radius equal to the width or diameter of the duct or
square elbows with factory fabricated turning vanes may be used. Static pressure Class
125, 250, and 500 Pa ductwork shall meet the requirements of Seal Class C. Class 750
through 2500 Pa shall meet the requirements of Seal Class A. Sealants shall conform to
fire hazard classification specified in Section 15250 THERMAL INSULATION FOR
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Pressure sensitive tape shall not be used as a sealant. Spiral
lock seam duct, and flat oval shall be made with duct sealant and locked with not less than
3 equally spaced drive screws or other approved methods indicated in SMACNA-06. The
sealant shall be applied to the exposed male part of the fitting collar so that the sealer will
be on the inside of the joint and fully protected by the metal of the duct fitting. One brush
coat of the sealant shall be applied over the outside of the joint to at least 50 mm band
width covering all screw heads and joint gap. Dents in the male portion of the slip fitting
collar will not be acceptable. Outdoor air intake ducts and plenums shall be fabricated
with watertight soldered or brazed joints and seams.
Page | 9 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.8.1.1 Transitions:
Diverging air flow transitions shall be made with each side pitched out a maximum
of 15 degrees, for an included angle of 30 degrees. Transitions for converging air
flow shall be made with each side pitched in a maximum of 30 degrees, for an
included angle of 60 degrees, or shall be as indicated. Factory-fabricated reducing
fittings for systems using round duct sections when formed to the shape of the
ASME short flow nozzle, need not comply with the maximum angles specified.
2.8.1.2 Metallic Flexible Duct:
Metallic type duct shall be spiral-wound spring steel with flameproof vinyl
sheathing or two-ply aluminum. Duct shall be of corrugated/interlocked, folded
and knurled type seam construction, bendable without damage through 180
degrees with a throat radius equal to 1/2 duct diameter. Duct shall conform to UL
181, Class 1 and shall be rated for positive or negative working pressure of 3.75
kPa at 177 degrees C when duct is aluminum, and 343 degrees C when duct is
steel. Duct shall be complete with minimum 38 mm thick continuous flexible
fiberglass sheath insulation, 16 kg/m3 density and vapor barrier jacket.
2.8.1.3 General Service Duct Connectors:
A flexible duct connector approximately 150 mm in width shall be provided where
sheet metal connections are made to fans or where ducts of dissimilar metals are
connected. For round/oval ducts, the flexible material shall be secured by
stainless steel or zinc-coated, iron clinch-type draw bands. For rectangular ducts,
the flexible material locked to metal collars shall be installed using normal duct
construction methods. The composite connector system shall comply with UL 214
and be classified as "flame-retarded fabrics" in UL-01.
2.8.1.4 Turning Vanes:
Provide turning vanes constructed of 38 mm wide curved blades set at 20 mm o.c.,
supported with bars perpendicular to blades set at 50 mm o.c., and set into side strips
suitable for mounting in ductwork.
2.8.2
Ductwork Accessories:
2.8.2.1 Duct Access Doors
Access doors shall be provided in ductwork and plenums where required and at all
air flow measuring primaries, automatic dampers, fire dampers, coils, thermostats,
and other apparatus requiring service and inspection in the duct system, and unless
otherwise shown, shall conform to SMACNA-06. Access doors shall be provided
upstream and downstream of air flow measuring primaries and heating and cooling
coils. Doors shall be minimum 375 by 450 mm, unless otherwise shown. Where
duct size will not accommodate this size door, the doors shall be made as large as
surface shall not be exposed to the air stream. Insulated duct access doors shall be
provided on all insulated ducts.
Page | 10 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.8.2.2 Fire Dampers:

Fire dampers shall be 1-1/2 hour fire rated unless otherwise indicated. Fire
dampers shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A and UL 555. Fire
dampers shall be automatic operating type and shall have a dynamic rating suitable
for the maximum air velocity and pressure differential to which it will be
subjected. Fire dampers shall be approved for the specific application, and shall be
installed according to their listing. Fire dampers shall be equipped with a steel
sleeve or adequately sized frame installed in such a manner that disruption of the
attached ductwork, if any, will not impair the operation of the damper. Sleeves or
frames shall be equipped with perimeter mounting angles attached on both sides of
the wall or floor opening. Ductwork in fire-rated floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling
assembly systems with air ducts that pierce the ceiling of the assemblies shall be
constructed in conformance with UL-05. Fire dampers shall be curtain type with
damper blades out of the air stream. Dampers shall not reduce the duct or the air
transfer opening cross-sectional area. Dampers shall be installed so that the
centerline of the damper depth or thickness is located in the centerline of the wall,
partition or floor slab depth or thickness. Unless otherwise indicated, the
installation details given in SMACNA-05 and in manufacturer's instructions for
fire dampers shall be followed.
2.8.2.3 Splitters and Manual Balancing Dampers:
Splitters and manual balancing dampers shall be furnished with accessible
operating mechanisms. Where operators occur in finished portions of the building,
operators shall be chromium plated with all exposed edges rounded. Splitters shall
be operated by quadrant operators or 5 mm rod brought through the side of the
duct with locking sets-crew and bushing. Two rods are required on splitters over
200 mm. Manual volume control dampers shall be operated by locking-type
quadrant operators. Dampers and splitters shall be 2 gauges heavier than the duct
in which installed. Unless otherwise indicated, multileaf dampers shall be
opposed blade type with maximum blade width of 300 mm. Access doors or
panels shall be provided for all concealed damper operators and locking setscrews. Unless otherwise indicated, the locking-type quadrant operators for
dampers, when installed on ducts to be thermally insulated, shall be provided with
stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters to provide clearance between the
duct surface and the operator not less than the thickness of the insulation.
Stand-off mounting items shall be integral with the operator or standard accessory
of the damper manufacturer. Volume dampers shall be provided where indicated.
2.8.2.4 Smoke Dampers:
Smoke damper shall be designed for the smoke isolation of sections of ducting in
ventilation systems, basically consisting of a flanged casing, shut off blades with
overlapping interlocking joints. Blades are connected by internal linkage for parallel
action. External linkage parallel action also available. Smoke dampers to be leakage
tested as appropriate to the requirements of UL555S.
Casing and blades shall be of a galvanized sheet steel to ASTM A792 or BS EN
10142 or equivalent. Casing bearing made from sintered bronze. Blades shall have
standard face linkage for parallel blade operation. Size and type of damper shall be as
shown on drawings. Dampers shall be electrically operated. All accessories required
Page | 11 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
for electric operation shall be provided.

2.8.2.5 Combination Fire and Smoke Dampers:
Combination fire/smoke dampers shall be designed for the fire/smoke isolation of
sections of ducting in ventilation systems, basically consisting of a flanged casing,
shut off blades with overlapping interlocking joints, with side seals to close off gap
between case and blades. Blades are connected by internal linkage for parallel action.
Damper is fitted with internal jack shaft incorporating fusible link assembly.
Fire dampers to be independently tested as appropriate to the requirements of BS 476
Part 20 1987 and UL555 (Fire rating 2 hours). Additional leakage tested as
appropriate to the requirements of UL555S.
Casing and blade shall be of galvanized sheet steel to ASTM A792 or BS EN 10142
or equivalent. Casing bearings made from sintered bronze. Blades shall have standard
face linkage parallel blade operation. Size of dampers shall be as shown on drawings.
Dampers shall be electrically All accessories required for electric operation shall be
provided.
2.8.2.6 Duct Heaters:
Duct heater, where shown on drawings, shall be complete with all required
accessories. The heater shall be UL listed for zero clearance and shall meet all
applicable requirements of latest National Electric Code. Heater capacity, voltage,
phase and number of steps shall be as indicated on drawings. Elements shall be
constructed of 80% nickel and 20% chromium and steps shall be arranged to prevent
stratification when operating at less than full capacity. Terminal box shall be provided
with solid cover and complete box shall be totally enclosed to minimize dust
infiltration. All safety devices shall be serviceable through terminal box. Duct heater
shall not energize unless the supply air fan is on. All temperature controls shall be as
shown the drawings. Duct heater shall be of size as shown the drawings.
2.8.2.7 Humidifiers:
Supply and install self-contained electronically controlled steam generating
humidifiers of the size(s) shown on the drawings. The humidifier(s) shall be U.L.
listed and CSA certified. Steam shall be generated from tap water in a factory sealed
cylinder containing electrodes. Cylinders shall not require setting of electrode
spacing, cleaning or maintenance and shall be of the disposable type.
The humidifier(s) shall include an automatic drain cycle controlled electronically to
maximize energy efficiency. Drain cycle shall adapt to variations in water conditions
and not require manual setting.
Humidifier(s) shall include overcurrent protection as an integral function of the
solid-state circuit board. In the event of overcurrent, the humidifier shall signal that
a fault condition exists by flashing an abnormal light. Overcurrent protection shall
be resettable. Replaceable type fuses are not acceptable.
Humidifier(s) shall also include secondary magnetic overload switches that shall be
manually resettable and shall be of the type that positively disconnects power to the
steam cylinder. Humidifier(s) shall include a door interlock safety switch to
Page | 12 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
disconnect power to the steam cylinder(s) when cabinet door is opened.

The system shall include one steam distributor pipe for each steam generating
cylinder for mounting in the duct as shown on the plans. Steam distributing pipe(s)
shall be of corrosion resistant design and be designed to provide uniform distribution
over the entire pipe length.
Supply and install remote (or humidifier mounted) fan distribution units to discharge
steam directly into the conditioned area. Provide following components:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Fan motor.
Transformer for required voltage to operate fan motor.
Pressure differential type air flow switch.
Integral on-off control humidistat.
Integral proportional control humidistat.
The system shall include flexible hose to connect the steam cylinder(s) to the stream
distributor pipe(s). A separate condensate return line shall return condensate tot he
humidifier for reuse to minimize energy consumption.
The humidifier(s) shall incorporate a 1" air gap ont he fill water line to prevent
backflow. An air gap fitting shall also be provided on the drain line to isolate the
unit from any backflow in external drain pipes.
The humidifier cabinet(s) shall be constructed of 18 gauge galvanized steel protected
by a gray enamel finish for corrosion resistance. The cabinet door shall be hinged and
provided with a lock and key. A steam output meter calibrated in pounds of steam per
hour, indicator lights and on-off-drain switch shall be accessible with the cabinet door
closed.
The humidifier(s) shall be controlled by a humidistat which operates through the
solid state circuit board. Humidifier(s) shall incorporate terminals for connection
of humidistat, air flow switch and high limit humidistat. Provide following
controls:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Wall mounted humidistat, on-off control.

Wall mounted humidistat, proportional control.
Duct mounted humidistat, proportional control.
Duct mounted humidistat, on-off control, with sail type
air flow switch.
e. High limit duct mounted humidistat.
f. Pressure differential type air flow switch.
g. Paddle type air flow switch.
The fill water line shall include a strainer to remove sediment from incoming water
and a flow regulating control to automatically compensate for water pressures from
20 - 120 psi.
Humidifier(s) electronic circuit shall include automatic controls to compensate for
varying water conditions without changing cylinders or electrode spacing. The control
shall activate the fill and drain solenoid valves to automatically maximize efficiency.
The humidifier(s) shall include a high water sensor to prevent overfilling and loss of
Page | 13 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
water. Abnormal light shall signal if high water level reduces output to less than 50%
of the desired level. The fill solenoid valve shall open whenever the drain solenoid
valve is activated to prevent discharge of boiling water into drainage system.
Abnormal light shall indicate that switch is in drain position.
2.8.2.8 Air Deflectors and Branch Connections
Air deflectors shall be provided at duct mounted supply outlets, at takeoff or
extension collars to supply outlets, at duct branch takeoff connections, and at 90
degree elbows, as well as at locations as indicated on the drawings or otherwise
required. Conical branch connections or 45-degree entry connections may be used
in lieu of deflectors or extractors for branch connections. All air deflectors, except
those installed in 90 degree elbows, shall be provided with an approved means of
adjustment. Adjustment shall be made from easily accessible means inside the
duct or from an adjustment with sturdy lock on the face of the duct. When
installed on ducts to be thermally insulated, external adjustments shall be provided
with stand-off mounting brackets, integral with the adjustment device, to provide
clearance between the duct surface and the adjustment device not less than the
thickness of the thermal insulation. Air deflectors shall be factory-fabricated units
consisting of curved turning vanes or louver blades designed to provide uniform air
distribution and change of direction with minimum turbulence or pressure loss.
Air deflectors shall be factory or field assembled. Blade air deflectors, also called
blade air extractors, shall be approved factory fabricated units consisting of
equalizing grid and adjustable blade and lock. Adjustment shall be easily made
from the face of the diffuser or by position adjustment and lock external to the
duct. Stand-off brackets shall be provided on insulated ducts and are described
herein. Fixed air deflectors, also called turning vanes, shall be provided in 90
degree elbows.
2.8.3
Duct Sleeves, Framed Prepared Openings, Closure Collars:

2.8.3.1 Duct Sleeves
Square and Rectangular ducts passing through floors, walls, ceilings, or roof shall
be installed through framed prepared openings. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the proper size and location of sleeves and prepared openings.
Sleeves and framed openings are also required where grilles, registers, and
diffusers are installed at the openings. Framed prepared openings shall be
fabricated from 1.0 mm galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated. Where
sleeves are installed in bearing walls or partitions, black steel pipe, ASTM A 53,
Schedule 20 shall be used. Sleeve shall provide 25 mm clearance between the
duct and the sleeve or 25 mm clearance between the insulation and the sleeve for
insulated ducts.
2.8.3.2 Framed Prepared Openings:
Openings shall have 25 mm clearance between the duct and the opening or 25 mm
clearance between the insulation and the opening for insulated ducts.
2.8.3.3 Closure Collars:
Collars shall be fabricated of galvanized sheet metal not less than 100 mm wide,
unless otherwise indicated, and shall be installed on exposed ducts on each side of
Page | 14 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
walls or floors where sleeves or prepared openings are provided. Collars shall be
installed tight against surfaces.
Collars shall fit snugly around the duct or
insulation. Sharp edges of the collar around insulated duct shall be ground smooth
to preclude tearing or puncturing the insulation covering or vapor barrier. Collars
for round ducts 375 mm in diameter or less shall be fabricated from 1.0 mm
galvanized steel. Collars for round ducts larger than 375 mm and square, and
rectangular ducts shall be fabricated from 1.3 mm galvanized steel. Collars shall
be installed with fasteners on maximum 150 mm centers, except that not less than
4 fasteners shall be used.
2.8.4
Sound Attenuation Equipment

a.
Systems With Total Pressure Above 1 kPa:
Sound attenuators shall be provided on the discharge duct of each air handling unit and at
each air terminal unit unless calculations demonstrate that room noise levels are below
those required by the criteria. Sound attenuators shall be provided elsewhere as required.
The sound attenuators shall be factory fabricated and shall be tested by an independent
laboratory for sound and performance characteristics. Net sound reduction shall be as
indicated. Sound attenuating equipment serving critical areas shall be "hospital grade",
with acoustical insulation faced by a mylar, Collars shall be fabricated of galvanized sheet
metal not less than 100 mm wide, unless otherwise indicated, and shall be installed on
exposed ducts on each side of walls or floors where sleeves or prepared openings are
provided. Collars shall be installed tight against surfaces. Collars shall fit snugly around
the duct or insulation. Sharp edges of the collar around insulated duct shall be ground
smooth to preclude tearing or puncturing the insulation covering or vapor barrier. Collars
for round ducts 375 mm in diameter or less shall be fabricated from 1.0 mm galvanized
steel. Collars for round ducts larger than 375 mm and square, and rectangular ducts shall
be fabricated from 1.3 mm galvanized steel. Collars shall be installed with fasteners on
maximum 150 mm centers, except that not less than 4 fasteners shall be used.
2.8.5
Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Units shall be factory-fabricated of extruded aluminum and shall distribute the specified
quantity of air evenly over space intended without causing noticeable drafts, air movement
faster than 0.25 m/s in occupied zone, or dead spots anywhere in the conditioned area.
Outlets for diffusion, spread, throw, and noise level shall be as required for specified
performance. Performance shall be certified according to ADC 1062:GRD. Inlets and
outlets shall be sound rated and certified according to ADC 1062:GRD. Sound power
level shall be as indicated. Diffusers and registers shall be provided with volume damper
with accessible operator, unless otherwise indicated; or if standard with the manufacturer,
an automatically controlled device will be acceptable. Volume dampers shall be opposed
blade type for all diffusers and registers, except linear slot diffusers. Linear slot diffusers
shall be provided with round or elliptical balancing dampers. Where the inlet and outlet
openings are located less than 2 m above the floor, they shall be protected by a grille or
screen according to NFPA 90A. Finish shall be factory off-white.
2.8.5.1 Diffusers
Diffuser types shall be as indicated. Ceiling mounted units shall be furnished with
anti-smudge devices, unless the diffuser unit minimizes ceiling smudging through
design features. Diffusers shall be provided with air deflectors of the type
Page | 15 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
indicated. Ceiling mounted units shall be installed with rims tight against ceiling.
Sponge rubber gaskets shall be provided between ceiling and surface mounted
diffusers for air leakage control. Suitable trim shall be provided for flush mounted
diffusers. Duct collar connecting the duct to diffuser shall be airtight and shall not
interfere with volume controller.
2.8.5.2 Swirl Diffusers
The diffuser face shall be made of rolled galvanized sheet steel. The discharge
nozzle shall be made of aluminum. The surface plate and discharge nozzle to be
pre-treated and powder coated, color as approved by Contracting Officer. Swirl
diffusers with circular face with swirling horizontal discharge of supply air with
high induction, consisting of pressed front face with radially angled fixed air guide
blades, connecting ring and volume control damper.
2.8.5.3 Registers and Grilles
Wall mounted units shall be four-way directional-control type, except that return
and exhaust registers may be fixed horizontal or vertical louver type similar in
appearance to the supply register face. Registers shall be provided with
sponge-rubber gasket between flanges and wall or ceiling. Wall supply registers
shall be installed at least 150 mm below the ceiling unless otherwise indicated.
Four-way directional control may be achieved by a grille face which can be rotated
in 4 positions or by adjustment of horizontal and vertical vanes. Units mounted in
ceiling shall be eggcrate with 13 mm by 13 mm spacing with opposed blade
volume damper.Grilles shall be as specified for registers, without volume control
damper.
2.8.6
Louvers
Refer to 2.8.9
2.8.7
Sand Louvers.
Air Vents, Penthouses, and Goosenecks
Air vents, penthouses, and goosenecks shall be fabricated from galvanized steel or
aluminum sheets with galvanized or aluminum structural shapes. Sheet metal thickness,
reinforcement, and fabrication shall conform to SMACNA-06. Louver blades shall be
accurately fitted and secured to frames. Edges of louver blades shall be folded or beaded
for rigidity and baffled to exclude driving rain. Air vents, penthouses, and goosenecks
shall be provided with bird screen, and cleanable filter.
2.8.8
Bird Screens and Frames
Bird screens shall conform to ASTM E 437, Type I, Class 1, 2 by 2 mesh, 1.6 mm diameter
aluminum wire or 0.8 mm inch diameter stainless steel wire. Frames shall be removable
type of stainless steel or extruded aluminum.
2.8.9
Sand Louvers:
Sand louvers shall be provided on each outside air intake. The louvers shall be fixed
vertical blade type a minimum of 300 mm deep. The louvers shall be fabricated from
extruded aluminum members, a minimum of 2 mm thick of 6063-T5 alloy. The louver
Page | 16 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
sub-sill will be formed from 1.25 mm thick aluminum sheet and sloped at such an angle to
direct captured sand to the building exterior.
The louvers shall be tested by an accredited laboratory to indicate the louver system's
ability to reject a minimum of 95 percent of sand grain sizes between 150 and 425 microns
when subjected to a face velocity of .5 meters per second.
The louver finish shall be powder coated for the application.
An indoor screen of stainless steel construction and 12 mm mesh shall be provided on the
inside of each louver.
2.9
AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT

2.9.1
Fans:
Fans shall be tested and rated according to AMCA 210. Fans may be connected to the
motors either directly or indirectly with V-belt drive. V-belt drives shall be designed for
not less than 150 percent of the connected driving capacity. Motor sheaves shall be
variable pitch for 11 kW and below and fixed pitch as defined by ARI Guideline D.
Variable pitch sheaves shall be selected to drive the fan at a speed which will produce the
specified capacity when set at the approximate midpoint of the sheave adjustment. When
fixed pitch sheaves are furnished, a replaceable sheave shall be provided when needed to
achieve system air balance. Motors for V-belt drives shall be provided with adjustable
rails or bases. Removable metal guards shall be provided for all exposed V-belt drives,
and speed-test openings shall be provided at the center of all rotating shafts. Fans shall be
provided with personnel screens or guards on both suction and supply ends, except that the
screens need not be provided, unless otherwise indicated, where ducts are connected to the
fan. Fan and motor assemblies shall be provided with vibration-isolation supports or
mountings as indicated. Vibration-isolation units shall be standard products with published
loading ratings. Each fan shall be selected to produce the capacity required at the fan static
pressure indicated. Sound power level shall be as indicated. The sound power level values
shall be obtained according to AMCA 300. Standard AMCA arrangement, rotation, and
discharge shall be as indicated.
2.9.1.2 Roof-Mounted Centrifugal Exhausters:
The exhaust fans shall be direct/belt drive centrifugal type as shown on drawings.
Ventilator housings shall be of heavy gauge spun aluminum construction and shall be
weatherproof, incorporating an integral weather shield. Ventilators shall be mounted
on manufacturer supplied or field-fabricated roof curbs. Fan wheels shall be
centrifugal design constructed of aluminum that have been statically and dynamically
balanced. Motor and fan assembly shall be on vibration isolation mounts. Fans of
sizes, types and capacities as shown on the drawings.
2.9.1.3 Smoke Exhaust Roof Ventilators:
Fans shall be direct drive, weather shield and base construction is of strong glass
re-inforced polyester resin fire retardant. Fan and motor table suitable for this
application of smoke exhaust and operation up to 300C. Fan wheels shall be
constructed of aluminum. The motor shall be explosion-proof and blades shall be
spark proof.
Page | 17 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.9.1.3.1
Centrifugal Floor Mounted:
The exhaust fans shall be direct drive centrifugal type. Ventilator housings
shall be of heavy gauge spun aluminum construction and shall be
weatherproof, incorporating an integral weather shield. Ventilators shall be
mounted on manufacturer supplied or field-fabricated roof curbs. Fan wheels
shall be centrifugal design constructed of aluminum that have been statically
and dynamically balanced. Motor and fan assembly shall be on vibration
isolation mounts. Fans of sizes, types and capacities as shown on the
drawings.
2.9.1.4 Up-Blast Roof-Mounted Exhausters (Kitchen Exhaust Fan):
Up-blast exhaust fans shall be centrifugal type suitable for roof-mounting.
Housing shall incorporate exterior wind bands to enable velocity to discharge
exhaust. Aluminum impeller shall be spark-proof and of the non-overloading type.
Housing shall be of mill finish spun aluminum construction. Fan wheels shall be
constructed of aluminum. Fans shall be of sizes, and capacities as shown on
drawings and shall be equipped with grease trough, disconnect switch and bird
screen.
2.9.1.5 Make-Up Air Fan (Supply Fans):
Roof-mounted, filtered makeup air units shall have belt driven double width/double
inlet, forward curved centrifugal type supply fans. The entire fan and motor assembly
shall be mounted on a formed, reinforced support structure with vibration isolators to
prevent noise transmission. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, heavy duty, ball
bearing type, carefully matched to the fan load and furnished at the specified voltage,
phase and enclosure. The fan shaft shall be ground and polished steel mounted in
heavy duty, sealed ball bearings. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum (L50) life
in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speeds. Pulleys shall be
of the fully machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and
motor shafts. Motor sheaves shall be adjustable for final system balancing. Drives
shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower.
Fan wheels shall be of the forward curved type, constructed of heavy gauge steel and
statically and dynamically balanced to ensure smooth, vibration free operation.
Housing construction shall be of heavy gauge galvanized steel with removable panels.
Filters shall be one inch aluminum mesh and sized to provide for optimum removal of
contaminated outside air without exceeding the manufacturers recommendations for
maximum velocity.
The prewired control center shall include, but not be limited to, an integral master
disconnect switch with fuse blocks for main power connection, magnetic motor
starters with thermal overloads and manuals reset, fused 115 volt control transformer,
and distribution terminal control strip for control wiring connection. All electrical
components shall be U.L. Labeled where applicable and wired in compliance with the
National Electrical Code (NFPA #70). Wiring shall be complete requiring only one
point field connection for power service and one point field connection for control
voltage. Fans shall be of type and capacity as shown on drawings.
Page | 18 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.9.1.6 Low Silhouette Roof Exhausters (belt-driven):

Roof-mounted exhaust fans shall be centrifugal, belt driven type. Hood construction
shall be heavy extruded aluminum lovers with mitered and welded corners. The hood
shall be aluminum and hingeable for service. The fan wheel and inlet cone shall be
aluminum and of highest performance, centrifugal blower type. Wheel shall overlap
the spun venturi for maximum performance. Fan wheels shall be statically and
dynamically balanced to ensure smooth, vibration free operation. Motors shall be
heavy duty type with permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearings. The wheel shaft
shall be ground and polished steel mounted in heavy duty, permanently sealed pillow
block ball bearings. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven
horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the fully machined cast iron type, keyed and securely
attached to the wheel and motor shafts. Motor pulley shall be adjustable for final
system balancing. The entire drive assembly shall be mounted on vibration isolators.
All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for both sound and air
performance. Fans shall be of types and capacities as shown on the drawings.
2.9.1.7 Low Silhouette Roof Exhausters (direct-driven):
Low silhouette centrifugal roof exhaust fan shall be direct driven type. Hood
construction shall be of arched heavy gauge aluminum sheets with roll formed
interlocking seams for reinforcement. Hood shall have galvanized steel supports and
shall be hinged for service access. The fan wheel, inlet cone and curb shall be of
aluminum construction. The wheel shall be the backward curved nonoverloading
centrifugal type dynamically and statically balanced. The motors shall be heavy duty
type. motor and centrifugal wheels shall be mounted on vibration isolators. Fans shall
bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal for both sound and air performance. Fans shall
be of type and capacity as shown on the drawings.
2.9.1.8 In-Line Cabinet Fans (ceiling-mounted):
Ceiling mounted in-line exhaust fans shall be of the centrifugal direct drive type. The
fan housing shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall include prepunched
mounting brackets. The housing interior shall be lined with 1/2" acoustical insulation
(where applicable). The outlt duct collar shall include aluminum backdraft damper
and shall be adaptable for horizontal or vertical discharge (where applicable). The
grille shall be constructed of non-yellowing high impact polymer or polystyrene or
aluminum as applicable. Access for wiring shall be external. The motor disconnect
shall be internal and of plug in type. The motor shall be mounted on vibration
isolators.
The fan wheel shall be forward curve centrifugal type constructed of high strength
polymer, dynamically balanced for vibration isolation.
performance and shall be UL Listed and C.S.A. approved. Each fan shall bear a
permanently affixed manufacturer's nameplate containing the model number and
individual serial number for future identification. Fans shall be of type and capacity as
Page | 19 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.9.1.9 In-Line Cabinet Fans (duct-mounted);

Duct mounted supply, exhaust or return fans shall be of the centrifugal direct drive
type. The fan housing shall be of the square design constructed of heavy galvanized
steel and shall include prepunched mounting brackets. The housing interior shall be
lined with 1/2" acoustical insulation. The outlet duct collar shall include aluminum
backdraft damper and shall be adaptable for horizontal or vertical discharge. Access
for wiring shall be external. The motor disconnect shall be internal and of plug in
type. The motor shall be mounted on vibration isolators.
The fan wheel shall be forward curve centrifugal type, constructed of galvanized steel
and dynamically balanced.
performance and shall be UL Listed and C.S.A. approved. Each fan shall bear a
permanently affixed manufacturer's nameplate containing the model number and
individual serial number for future identification. Fans shall be of type and capacity as
2.9.1.10Utility Centrifugal Fans:
Supply, exhaust and return air fans shall be of the belt driven utility fan type in
AMCA Arrangement 10 with a single width, single inlet housing in CW or CCW
rotation as specified. The housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel with lock
formed seams permitting no air leakage. The housing shall be field rotatable to any of
the eight standard discharge positions. Housing and bearing supports shall be
constructed of welded steel members to prevent vibration and rigidly support the shaft
and bearings. The fan wheel shall be of the non-overloading backward inclined,
centrifugal fan type and constructed of heavy gauge steel. Wheels shall be statically
and dynamically balanced. The wheel cone and fan inlet cone shall be carefully
matched for maximum performance and operating efficiency.
Motors shall be permanently lubricated, heavy duty, ball bearing type carefully
matched to the fan load and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure.
The fan shaft shall be ground and polished solid steel mounted in heavy duty,
permanently sealed, pillow block ball bearings. Bearings shall be selected for a
minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed.
Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be
of the fully machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and
motor shafts. The motor pulley shall be adjustable for final system balancing. Fan
performance shall be based on tests conducted in accordance with AMCA Standard
210 test code for air moving devices. Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA
Certified Ratings Seal for air performance. Utility fans shall be of type and capacity
as shown on the drawings.
2.9.1.11Wall/Window-Mounted Fan:
Fans shall be propeller type. Propellers shall be of aluminum. Fans shall be provided
with backdraft shutter. Fans shall be of type and capacity as shown on the drawings.
Page | 20 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.10
TERMINAL UNITS
2.10.1 Variable Air Volume (VAV) Relief Type Terminal Units:
VAV terminal units shall be relief type with size, and capacity shown and shall be mounted
in the ceiling cavity and shall be suitable for single duct system applications. Actuators
and controls shall be as specified in Section 15970 CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC .
Unit enclosures shall be constructed of galvanized steel not lighter than 0.85 mm. Single or
multiple discharge outlets may be provided as required. Units with flow limiters are not
acceptable. Unit air volume shall be factory preset and readily field adjustable without
special tools. Reheat coils shall be provided as required. A flow chart shall be attached to
each unit. Acoustic performance of the terminal units shall be based upon units tested
according to ARI 880. Sound power level shall be as indicated. Discharge sound power
shall be shown for minimum and 375 Pa inlet static pressure. Acoustical lining consisting
of minimum 0.10 kg/m3 dual density glassfiber insulation conforming to NFPA 90A. All
units shall be of double wall construction.
2.10.2 Variable Volume, Single Duct:
Variable volume, single duct, terminal units shall be provided with a calibrated air volume
sensing device, air valve or damper, actuator, and accessory relays. Units shall control air
volume to within plus or minus 5 percent of each air set point volume as determined by the
thermostat with variations in inlet pressures from 200 to 1500 Pa. Internal resistance of
units shall not exceed 100 Pa . External differential pressure taps separate from the
control pressure taps shall be provided for air flow measurement with a 0 to 250 Pa range.
Unit volume controller shall be normally open upon loss of D.D.C. signal.
2.10.3 Reheat Units:
a. Electric Resistance Heaters:
Electric resistance heaters shall be of the
duct-mounting type consisting of a nickel-chromium resistor mounted on refractory
material and a steel or aluminum frame for attachment to ductwork. Electric duct
heater shall meet the requirement of Underwriters Laboratories and NFPA 70 and
shall be provided with a built-in or surface-mounted high-limit thermostat. Electric
duct heaters shall be interlocked electrically so that heaters cannot be energized
unless the fan is running.
2.11
SPLIT ROOM AIR CONDITIONERS

2.11.1 Mini-Split Room Air Conditioners: Are suitable for equipment up to nominal
cooling and heating capacity as shown on drawings. Unit shall comprise of an
indoor fan coil unit and an outdoor air cooled condensing unit for application with
R-22 refrigerant. The air conditioning unit shall be capable of handling the cooling
loads when operating in ambient conditions of 45 degrees at the medium fan speed.
Air cooled condensing unit and the matched indoor fan coil unit shall conform to the
requirements of ARI 210 and UL 465.
2.11.2 Indoor Fan Coil Unit (FCU): Cabinet to be constructed of finished steel with baked
resin paint. The cabinet interior to be fully insulated to prevent sweating and to
muffle the sound. (Cabinets made partly out of plastic shall be acceptable).
Page | 21 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Evaporator coil shall be the multi-pass cross finned tube equipped with aluminium
plate fins, mechanically bonded to seamless oxygen - fee copper tubes. The coil
shall be cleaned, dehydrated and tested for leakage at the factory.
Evaporator fan to be forward curved centrifugal type, statically and dynamically
balanced and directly driven by the motor. The fan motor shall be permanently
lubricated. The evaporator fan must be selected to operate quietly with no
overloading of fan motors.
Air filter to be washable type, long life as per manufacturers standard.
Refrigerant circuit to have one-shot couplings or isolating valves at liquid inlet and
gas outlet, a capillary tube and a strainer.
Drain pan to be sturdy metallic, treated for corrosion resistance, insulated and
easily accessible for cleaning/maintenance.
Sound level not exceed 55 dbA (NC50) at low speed and 60 dbA (NC55) at high
speed when measured at one meter distance in a room with normal occupancy and
furnishing.
2.11.3 Unit Control: unit shall be equipped with an operation switch, fan speed selector
switch and a thermostat mounted on the control panel. The control system shall
permit manual starting and automatic continuous operation whenever the
thermostat requires and the protection devices allow.
The ceiling/wall suspended unit shall be equipped with remote type control box
having thermostat, OFF/FAN/COOL and speed selection switch. The floor
mounted unit shall equipped with control panel fitted within the unit. Thermostat
of the type lockable at the extreme setting shall not be acceptable.
2.11.4 Outdoor Air Cooled Condensing Unit (ACCU): Out door air cooled condensing
unit to be factory assembled, piped internally, prewired and shall be designed to
operate at outdoor ambient temperature of 50 degrees C.
Cabinet to be constructed of finished steel with baked synthetic resin paint. The fan
guard shall be adequately protected against corrosion.
Unit to contain a hermetic compressor with internal suspension and welded shell.
Suitable vibration isolators shall be provided external to the compressor.
Condenser coils to be the multi-pass cross-finned type equipped with aluminum
plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes. The coil shall be cleaned,
dehydrated and tested for leakage at the factory.
Condenser fan to be propeller type with aluminum blades, statically and
dynamically balanced and driven directly by fan motor for up-flow or side-flow air
discharge. The motor shall be permanently lubricated and shall be protected from
water invasion.
Refrigerant circuit to have one shot couplings or isolating valves at liquid outlet
and gas inlet.
Page | 22 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.11.5 Refrigerant piping, drain piping, pipe insulation and vibration isolation,
arrangement for indoor and outdoor nits to be provided as per MEW regulations.
Rubber pads for vibration isolation shall be not less than 10 mm thick.
2.12
SINGLE PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONERS

2.12.1 Refer to Section 15780 PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (ROOF
TOP)
2.13
WINDOW TYPE AIR CONDITIONERS
Window type air conditioning units shall be completely wall-mounted packaged units arranged for
electric cooling and heating controlled by an integral thermostat, and shall have air exhaust, four-way
air deflection, and automatic temperature control. Units shall be of capacity as shown on drawings.
Units shall comply with ARI Standard 360. System selector switch shall include OFF-FAN-LOW
COOL-MEDIUM COOL-HIGH COOL- HEAT.
Units shall be factory-wired and completely enclosed. All operating controls shall be located in a
single area on the front of the units. Adjustable thermostats shall automatically cycle compressors to
maintain space conditions, and sensing elements shall extend across the complete faces of the cooling
coils. Three position exhaust/vent control to close the vent, exhaust air from the room, or introduce air
to the room shall be included.
Evaporator and condenser coils shall be of all aluminum, electronically soldered construction.
Compressor motors shall be two-pole, permanent split capacitor type protected against both thermal
and electrical overload.
Air deflection shall be horizontally variable to permit adjustment.
2.14
EVAPORATIVE COOLERS
2.14.1. Evaporative coolers shall be manufacturers standard complete with piping and all
other required accessories, capacity as shown on the drawings. Evaporative
coolers shall comply with following requirements:
Type:
Side discharge
Casing:
Galvanized sheet steel with electrostatic powder coating.
Central Shaft:
Solid bar
Rated Horse power:
As shown on drawings
Voltage:
220V/60Hz
Speed:
2 speed
Air Flow Capacity:
As shown drawings
Water pump:
2 Pump unit
Page | 23 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.15
Evaporation Media:
Aspen cooler pad- 4x40x120 cm, 8PCs/Cooler,

made
USA
Float valve:
Ordinary valve inch with brass bar, one inlet forwater

supply
FACTORY PAINTING
Units which are not of galvanized construction according to ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 525 shall be
factory painted with a corrosion resisting paint finish. Internal and external ferrous metal surfaces
shall be cleaned, phosphatised and coated with a paint finish which has been tested according to
ASTM B 117, ASTM D 1654, and ASTM D 3359. Evidence of satisfactory paint performance for
a minimum of 125 hours for units to be installed indoors and 500 hours for units to be installed
outdoors shall be submitted. Rating of failure at the scribe mark shall be not less than 6, average
creepage not greater than 3 mm. Rating of the inscribed area shall not be less than 10, no failure.
On units constructed of galvanized steel which have been welded, exterior surfaces of welds or
welds that have burned through from the interior shall receive a final shop docket of zinc-rich
protective paint according to MS MIL-P-21035.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Install equipment and components in a manner to ensure proper and sequential operation of
equipment and equipment controls. Install equipment not covered in this section, or in
manufacturers instructions, as recommended by manufacturers representative. Provide proper
foundations for mounting of equipment, accessories, appurtenances, and controls including, but not
limited to, supports, vibration isolators, stands, guides, anchors, clamps and brackets. Foundations
for equipment shall conform to equipment manufacturers recommendation, unless otherwise
indicated. Set anchor bolts and sleeves using templates. Provide anchor bolts of adequate length,
and provide with welded-on plates on the head end embedded in the concrete. Level equipment
bases, using jacks or steel wedges, and neatly grout-in with a non-shrinking type of grouting
mortar. Locate equipment to allow working space for servicing including shaft removal,
disassembling compressor cylinders and pistons, replacing or adjusting drives, motors, or shaft
seals, access to automatic controls, refrigerant charging, lubrication, oil draining and working
clearance under overhead lines. Provide electric isolation between dissimilar metals for the
purpose of minimizing galvanic corrosion.
3.1.1
Auxiliary Drain Pans, Drain Connections and Drain Lines
Provide auxiliary drain pans under units located above finished ceilings or over mechanical
or electrical equipment where condensate overflow will cause damage to ceilings, piping,
and equipment below. Provide separate drain lines for the unit drain an auxiliary drain
pans. Trap drain pans from the bottom to ensure complete pan drainage. Provide drain
lines full size of drain opening. Traps and pipng to drainage disposal points shall conform
to Section 15420 DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEM.
Water seals shall be provided in the condensate drain from all units. The depth of each seal
shall be 50 mm plus 0.1 mm for each Pa, of the total static pressure rating of the unit to
which the drain is connected. Water seals shall be constructed of 2 tees and an appropriate
Page | 24 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
U-bend with the open end of each tee plugged. Pipe cap or plug cleanouts shall be
provided where indicated. Drains indicated to connect to the sanitary waste system shall
be connected by an indirect waste fitting. Air conditioner drain lines shall be insulated as
specified in Section 15250 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
3.1.2
Equipment and Installation
Frames and supports shall be provided for air handling units, fans, coils, dampers, and
other similar items requiring supports. Air handling units shall be floor mounted or ceiling
hung, as required. The method of anchoring and fastening shall be as detailed.
Floor-mounted equipment, unless otherwise indicated, shall be set on not less than 150 mm
concrete pads or curbs doweled in place. Foundation drawings, bolt-setting information,
and foundation bolts shall be furnished prior to concrete foundation construction for all
equipment indicated or required to have concrete foundations. Concrete for foundations
shall be as specified in Section 03300 CAST-IN-SITU CONCRETE.
3.1.3
Access Panels
Access panels shall be provided for concealed controls, dampers, and items requiring
inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of sufficient size and located so that the
concealed items may be serviced and maintained or completely removed and replaced.
Access panels shall be as specified in Section 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS.
3.1.4
Flexible Connectors
Pre-insulated flexible connectors and flexible duct shall be attached to other components in
accordance with the latest printed instructions of the manufacturer to ensure a vapor tight
joint. Hangers, when required to suspend the connectors, shall be of the type
recommended by the connector or duct manufacturer and shall be provided at the intervals
recommended.
3.1.5
Sleeved and Framed Openings
Space between the sleeved or framed opening and the duct or the duct insulation shall be
packed as specified in Section 07270 - FIRESTOPPING for fire rated penetrations. For
non-fire rated penetrations, the space shall be packed as specified in Section 07900 SEALANTS.
3.1.6
Metal Ductwork
Installation shall be according to SMACNA-06 unless otherwise indicated. Duct supports

for sheet metal ductwork shall be according to SMACNA-06, unless otherwise specified.
Friction beam clamps indicated in SMACNA-06 shall not be used. Risers on high velocity
ducts shall be anchored in the center of the vertical run to allow ends of riser to move due
to thermal expansion. Supports on the risers shall allow free vertical movement of the
duct. Supports shall be attached only to structural framing members and concrete slabs.
Supports shall not be anchored to metal decking unless a means is provided and approved
for preventing the anchor from puncturing the metal decking. Where supports are required
between structural framing members, suitable intermediate metal framing shall be
provided. Where C-clamps are used, retainer clips shall be provided.
3.1.6.1 Light Duty Corrosive Exhaust Ductwork
Page | 25 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Light duty corrosive exhaust ductwork for laboratory exhaust shall be PVC
plastisol coated galvanized steel with PVC coating on interior and exterior
surfaces.
3.1.7
Dust Control
To prevent the accumulation of dust, debris and foreign material during construction,
temporary dust control protection shall be provided. The distribution system (supply and
return) shall be protected with temporary seal-offs at all inlets and outlets at the end of each
day's work. Temporary protection shall remain in place until system is ready for startup.
3.1.8
Insulation
Thickness and application of insulation materials for ductwork, piping, and equipment
shall be according to Section 15250 - THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL
SYSTEMS. Outdoor air intake ducts and plenums shall be externally insulated up to the
point where the outdoor air reaches the conditioning unit.
3.1.9
Duct Test Holes
Holes with closures or threaded holes with plugs shall be provided in ducts and plenums as
indicated or where necessary for the use of pilot tube in balancing the air system.
Extensions, complete with cap or plug, shall be provided where the ducts are insulated.
3.1.10 Power Roof Ventilator Mounting
Foamed 13 mm thick, closed-cell, flexible elastomer insulation shall cover width of roof
curb mounting flange. Where wood nailers are used, holes shall be pre-drilled for
fasteners.
3.1.11 Power Transmission Components Adjustment
V-belts and sheaves shall be tested for proper alignment and tension prior to operation and
after 72 hours of operation at final speed. Belts on drive side shall be uniformly loaded,
not bouncing. Alignment of direct driven couplings shall be to within 50 percent of
manufacturer's maximum allowable range of misalignment.
3.2
FIELD PAINTING AND PIPING IDENTIFICATION
Finish painting of items only primed at the factory or surfaces not specifically noted otherwise and
identification for piping are specified in Section 09900 - PAINTING, GENERAL.
3.3
PIPING HYDROSTATIC TEST
After cleaning, water piping shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure equal to 150 percent of the
total system operating pressure for period of time sufficient to inspect every joint in the system and
in no case less than 2 hours. Leaks shall be repaired and piping retested until test is successful. No
loss of pressure will be allowed. Leaks shall be repaired by re-welding or replacing pipe or fittings.
Caulking of joints will not be permitted. Concealed and insulated piping shall be tested in place
before covering or concealing.
Page | 26 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.4
DUCTWORK LEAK TEST
Ductwork leak test shall be performed for the entire air distribution and exhaust system, including
fans, coils, filters, etc. Test procedure, apparatus, and report shall conform to SMACNA-10. The
maximum allowable leakage rate shall be as recommended by SMACNA for all duct systems.
Ductwork smoke leak test shall be completed with satisfactory results prior to applying insulation
to ductwork exterior.
3.5
Inside of air terminal units, ducts, plenums, and casing shall be thoroughly cleaned of debris and
blown free of small particles of rubbish and dust and then shall be vacuum cleaned before installing
outlet faces. Equipment shall be wiped clean, with traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots removed.
Temporary filters shall be provided prior to startup of all fans that are operated during construction,
and new filters shall be installed after all construction dirt has been removed from the building, and
the ducts, plenums, casings, and other items specified have been vacuum cleaned. System shall be
maintained in this clean condition until final acceptance. Bearings shall be properly lubricated with
oil or grease as recommended by the manufacturer. Belts shall be tightened to proper tension.
Control valves and other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment shall be adjusted to setting
indicated or directed. Fans shall be adjusted to the speed indicated by the manufacturer to meet
specified conditions.
3.6
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be as specified in Section 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING
AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS. Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall begin only
when the air supply and distribution, including controls, has been completed, with the exception of
performance tests.
3.7
PERFORMANCE TESTS
After testing, adjusting, and balancing has been completed as specified, each system shall be tested
as a whole to see that all items perform as integral parts of the system and temperatures and
conditions are evenly controlled throughout the building. Corrections and adjustments shall be
made as necessary to produce the conditions indicated or specified. Capacity tests and general
operating tests shall be conducted by an experienced engineer. Tests shall cover a period of not
less than 2 days for each system and shall demonstrate that the entire system is functioning
according to the specifications. Coincidental chart recordings shall be made at points indicated on
the drawings for the duration of the time period and shall record the temperature at space
thermostats or space sensors, the humidity at space humidistats or space sensors and the ambient
temperature and humidity in a shaded and weather protected area.
3.8
FIELD TRAINING
The Contractor shall conduct a training course for operating and maintenance personnel as
designated by the Contracting Officer. Training shall be provided for a period of 8 hours of normal
working time and shall start after the system is functionally complete but prior to the performance
tests. The field instruction shall cover all of the items contained in the approved Operating and
Maintenance Instructions.
Page | 27 of 27
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15970 CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC

PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
REFERENCES
SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
15970-2/10
15970-2/10
15970-2/10
15970-3/10
15970-4/10
15970-4/10
15970-4/10
PART 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
PRODUCTS
DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE CONTROLLERS
PROPORTIONAL TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS
DIGITAL TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
SMOKE DETECTORS
DUCT HUMIDISTAT
DUCT HUMIDITY SENSOR
ROOM THERMOSTATS
DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
REMOTE SETTING UNITS
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE SENSOR
DAMPER ACTUATOR
AIR FLOW SWITCHERS
PRESSURE SENSOR
TRANSFORMER
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS
15970-5/10
15970-5/10
15970-5/10
15970-5/10
15970-5/10
15970-5/10
15970-5/10
15970-6/10
15970-6/10
15970-6/10
15970-6/10
15970-6/10
15970-6/10
15970-6/10
15970-6/10
15970-6/10
15970-7/10
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
3.1.1 GENERAL
3.1.2 START-UP
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR PACKAGE UNIT
15970-9/10
15970-9/10
15970-9/10
15970-9/10
15970-10/10
3.2
Section 15970 Control System For HVAC
Page | 1 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15970
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
The Work under this Section consists of furnishing and installing all the controls and instrumentation
for the ventilating and air conditioning systems as indicated on drawings and as specified herein.
The control system shall consist of modular electronic components assembled into composite systems
to comply with the requirements of the specifications.
The design, selection and supply of the system shall be from a recognized specialist Manufacturer
and/or his accredited agent. The Manufacturer will be required to maintain adequate stocks of
equipment, spares and technical support facilities within the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
The Contractor shall execute the works related to the automatic control system in full compliance with
the project working drawings supplied by his specialist control Manufacturer (after approval by the
Contracting Officer) and shall utilize the supervision services of the Manufacturer at the time of
installation to ensure the correct utilization of the equipment.
The automatic control system shall be commissioned by a specially trained and authorized Engineer of
the specialist control Manufacturer. A detailed commissioning report shall be prepared and issued by
the Manufacturer for the approval of the Contracting Officer.
1.2 REFERENCES
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND
AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
HVAC Systems and Applications Handbook, 1987
Chapter 31 - Automatic Control.
ASHRAE-03
(1993; Errata) Handbook, Fundamentals I-P Edition

NFPA 90A
NFPA 70

National Electrical Code
AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION (AMCA)

AMCA 500
(1989) Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters

ASME B16.34
ASME B40.1
(1988) Valves - Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End

(1991) Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element
Page | 2 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
ASME BPV VIII Div 1 (1992; Addenda Dec 1992, Dec 1993) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code;
Section VIII, Pressure Vessels Division 1 - Basic Coverage
ASME PTC 19.3
(1974; R 1986) Instruments and Apparatus: Part 3 Temperature
Measurement
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE C62.41
IEEE Std 142
(1991) Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC

Power Circuits
(1991) IEEE Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and
Commercial Power Systems
INSTRUMENT SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ISA)
ISA S7.3
(1975; R 1981) Quality Standard for
Instrument Air

NEMA 250
NEMA ICS1
(1991) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

(1993) Industrial Controls and Systems
SHEET METAL & AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS'
SMACNA-07 (1993) HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

UL 94
(1991; Rev thru May 1994) Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials
for Parts in Devices and Appliances
(1993; Rev Sep 1994) Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in
Smoke-Control Systems
(1994; Rev Apr 1994) Energy Management
Equipment
UL 508
UL 916

SASO 772
SASO 773
SASO 1302
SASO 1435
SASO 1436
SASO 1583

Part 1: General basis of design.
Part 2 : General requirements for installation.
terminology.
Safety requirements for the installation on air conditioning and ventilating systems
Safety requirements for the installation on air conditioning and ventilating
systems Part 2: Requirements of HVAC systems
Safety requirements for the installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems Part III: Requirements of Air Distribution.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Page | 3 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SD-01 Data
Equipment Data; FIO.
The equipment data shall be in booklet form, indexed to the unique identifiers, shall consist of data
sheets that document compliance with the specification and shall include a copy of each HVAC
control system bill of materials. Catalog cuts shall be in booklet form indexed by device type.
Where multiple components are shown on a catalog cut, the application specific component shall
be marked. Data shall include a list of qualified service organizations and their qualifications.
Service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment on a regular and emergency
basis, during the warranty period.
SD-04 Data
System drawings, FIO
Submit shop drawings for each electric control system. Provide control system diagrams and
drawings, wiring diagrams, including a detailed description of operation sequences together with all
the engineering data related to the component.
1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Products shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt
and dust, and other contaminants, within the storage-condition limits published by the equipment
manufacturer. Dampers shall be stored so that seal integrity, blade alignment and frame alignment
are maintained.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Bids by Wholesales, Contractors, Franchised Dealers or any firm whose principal business is not that
of manufacturing and installing Control equipment specified herein shall not be acceptable.
The system shall be installed by competent personnel, regularly employed by the Controls
manufacturer with full responsibility for proper operation of the Controls including debugging and
proper calibration of each component in the entire system. Supplier shall have in-place support facility
within 30 km of the site with technical staff, spare parts inventory and all necessary test and diagnostic
equipment.
1.6 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE
All the components of Control System shall be provided in manufacturer's original new and unopened
packing bearing manufacturer's name and label.
Store materials, not in actual use, in covered and well-ventilated area and protect them from dirt, dust,
moisture, direct sunlight and extreme temperatures.
For further requirements follow manufacturer's written instructions regarding storage and handling.
Page | 4 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Sensing element of sensor shall be a negative temperature coefficient thermistor and housing shall be
sealed aluminum tube, alloy head, with plastic cover.
2.2 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE CONTROLLERS
Type 1: Differential pressure controller shall be used to monitor air pressure or airflow. Sensing
element shall be by dual diaphragm. Power supply shall be 220/240V, 60H, 2A, full load ampere, and
with micro-switch SPDT. All pressure controllers shall be supplied with pressure fittings and
brackets.
Type 2: Differential pressure controller shall be used to provide an alarm function or to operate as a
safety limit control on an increase or decrease in pressure difference between high and low side
operating pressure.
2.3 PROPORTIONAL TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS
Proportional temperature controllers shall provide modulating control of liquid or air temperature in
ducts, tanks and similar applications.
2.4 DIGITAL TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
Provide digital temperature with inputs for dedicated sensor connected to controller. The position of
the manual selector switch determines which input is connected to the indicator display. Power
supply: 24V, +10 to -15% at 50/60 Hz. Power consumption: 10VA. Indication Range: -40oC to
+130oC. Indication: 7 segment display, 3 digits (91oC resolution) and sign. Indicator accuracy: 01%
of reading. Input signal: From control temperature sensors at the controllers or separate sensors with
01% sensing accuracy. Number of inputs: 10, selection by manual switching. Output for parallel
operation: 3mA at 0 to 10V over full range. Ambient temperature: 0oC to 50oC. Storage temperature:
-40oC to +70oC. Relative humidity: 5 to 95% RH.
2.5 SMOKE DETECTORS
Furnish and install where indicated on plans solid state circuitry smoke detectors with 2 or 4-wire
operation, low current consumption, and flashing LED for visual supervision locks on in alarm.
Detectors shall have the following features:
-
Auxiliary Contact
Contact Rating
Humidity Range
Temperature Range
Finish
: 2 sets SPDT
: 2A @ 24VDC/227VAC - Resistive
: 20 to 95% Relative Humidity
: 0oC to 37oC
: Finish and color shall be as selected by the Contracting Officer.
2.6 DUCT HUMIDISTAT

Humidistat shall have a sensing element specially treated plastic strands which do not require
regeneration. Humidistat shall be able to switch extract fans or alarms in the event of high or low
humidity level.
Page | 5 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.7 DUCT HUMIDITY SENSOR

Sensing element shall be sensitive at end of stem with membrane filter screw cap. The housing shall
be cast aluminum with stainless steel tube. Equipment shall have high accuracy and has a factory set
output and can be easily adopted in the field to provide a output for Building Management System (if
required). Control range of equipment shall from RH.
2.8 ROOM THERMOSTATS:
Thermostats shall be compatible in design and appearance and shall be of modern, compact design
with option of key locking type conversant concealed temperature set point adjustment. No room
thermostat shall operate on Voltage in excess 24 Volt unless the thermostat is controlling a 120V fan
or unit heater or unless specifically noted otherwise. Thermostat shall have on/off switch, three speed
fan switch and LED's.
2.9 DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Sensing element of sensor shall be a negative temperature coefficient thermistor and housing shall be
sealed aluminum tube, alloy head, with plastic cover.
2.10 REMOTE SETTING UNITS
Remote setting unit shall have tough non-flammable plastic case on back plate suitable for surface or
conduit box mounting. This unit shall enable control adjustments to be from a position remote from
the controller.
2.11 OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Sensing element of sensor shall have a negative temperature coefficient thermistor and housing shall
be sealed aluminum tube, alloy head, with plastic cover.
2.12 DAMPER ACTUATOR
Actuator shall be the reversing type having a rotary output for direct coupling to air dampers. Actuator
shall be modulating and accepting 0-10 Volt DC input signal. Actuator shall have a positive spring
return fail-safe operation.
2.13 AIR FLOW SWITCHERS
Air flow switch shall have a cut-in of 2 m/s and cut-out of 1 m/s for minimum adjustment and a cut-in
of 9 m/s and cut-out of 8 m/s for maximum adjustment. Switching value shall be adjustable by turning
adjusting screw. Media contact parts shall have a steel zinc plated mounting bracket, stainless steel
paddle, brass road and plastic enclosure.
2.14 PRESSURE SENSOR
The pressure sensor shall have a 3/16" diameter barbed connectors suitable for 1/8" pr 5/32" I.D.
polyethane tubing and it shall have an output of 0-5V dc.
2.15 TRANSFORMER
All control wiring shall be low voltage (24 Volts) and a transformer shall be included in the panel(s)
provided.
Page | 6 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.16 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS

A.
General: The control panels shall be manufactured to the minimum standards herein
stated and shall consist of standard current production equipment assembled to comply
in all respects with the specification requirements for construction, sequence of
operation and physical appearance. Panels shall be free-standing or wall-mounted as
appropriate. Provide extra relays and controls as required for critical alarm interface
and Building Management System.
B.
The Contractor shall be required to submit details for the manufacturer as well as
catalogues on all items to be utilised in the assembly, prior to manufacture. After
assembly and satisfactory testing, the Contractor shall be required to arrange for an
inspection visit by the Contracting Officer, prior to packing and despatch from the
factory.
C.
Components mounted on the door of the control cubicle shall be identified by a label
consisting of white 3 mm high lettering on a black plastic background.
D.
The panel identification label shall be white letter 10 mm high on a black plastic
background.
E.
All the control panel internal components shall be labelled noting the diagram,
component, reference number and the set point where applicable.
Control Panel Equipment: Each control panel shall be provided with the following
components:
F.
1. Door:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Door lock/isolator
Run and trip indicator lights
Rotary on/off standby switches
Temperature indicators
2. Internal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f..
g.
G.
Motor starters
Controllers
Transformer
Interface terminal strip
Wiring between internal control and interface terminal strip
Necessary contactors and relays
Interlocks
Cubicles: The cubicles shall be constructed from 1.5 mm cold rolled sheet steel, folded
and spot welded and finished in hammer epoxy powder paint. The cubicle shall be
equipped with the following features:
1.
2.
3.
Removable 2 mm zinc bi-chromate sheet steel equipment back plate.

Detachable door equipped with concealed removable hinges of the
type which permit 120 opening.
Doors shall be equipped with earth terminals, polyamide double bar
locks, sealing gasket, and the handle shall be mechanically
Page | 7 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
4.
interlocked with a panel power isolator to disconnect the power to

panel when the door is opened.
Steel, sealed removable gland plates top and bottom of cubicle.
5.
Zinc bi-chromated steel wall mounting brackets.
H.
Components: The panel components shall be current production models with adequate
spares availability and suitable for operation in the operational climatic conditions.
I.
Indicator Lamps: The holders shall be robustly constructed and equipped with
adequately dimensioned screw terminals for wire connection. The lenses shall be of
minimum 20 mm diameter, easily replaceable in the event of damage or color change
requirements and available in a minimum of six colors. The bulbs shall be of the screw
or bayonet fixing and of the incandescent filament type to provide adequate
illumination for daylight viewing at a distance of two meters.
J.
Selector Switches: The switches shall be of the rotary cam, modular type. The rating
shall be adequate for the specified function with a minimum capacity of 10A.
K.
Contactors and Relays: The construction of the contactors/relays shall comply with the
standards as laid down in BS 5424 or IEC 158-1 and shall have the following
characteristics:
1. Coil markings clearly visible from front.
2. Suitable for DIN rail mounting.
3. Equipped with one normally open and one normally closed auxiliary
contacts as standard.
4. Extra auxiliary contacts easily added (minimum three).
L.
Overloads: The construction of the thermal overloads shall comply with the standards
as laid down on BS 4941 or IEC-292-1 and have the following characteristics:
1. Single phase protection.
2. Manual or automatic trip re-set.
3. Temperature compensation.
4. Volt-free separate normally open and normally closed signal contacts.
M.
Starters: All motor starter shall be in accordance with the relevant codes and shall be
direct-on-line type for motors up to 7.5 HP and star delta or assisted start for larger
motors.
N.
Wiring:
1. The internal wiring of the panel shall be routed in grey plastic molded
channel with slotted sides and snap-on lid. The cable density shall not
exceed 80 percent of the available volume to permit ease of cable
tracing and wiring modifications.
Page | 8 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.
The cable shall be of the color coded flexible single core

variety complying to the following schedule:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------FUNCTION
COLORS
SIZE(mm)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------L1 POWER
RED
2.5 min.
L2 POWER
YELLOW
2.5 min.
L3 POWER
BLUE
2.5 min.
N POWER
BLACK
2.5 min.
PHASE CONTROL
PINK
1.5 min.
PHASE NEUTRAL
BLACK
1.5 min.
EARTH
GREEN/YELLOW 1.5 min.
24V CONTROL LINE
ORANGE
1.5 min.
24V CONTROL NEUTRAL
GREY
1.5 min.
CONTROL DETECTOR
WHITE
1.5 min.
CONTROL SIGNAL
VIOLET
1.5 min.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------3.
O.
All wiring interfacing with external connections shall do so

via numbered DIN rail mounted terminals of adequate
dimensions for the designated purpose. All wiring shall be
fitted with numbered identifications to assist in tracing.
Labelling: All field and panel mounted equipment shall be fitted with labels. These
labels shall carry the equipment control diagram reference numbers. In case of field
mounted equipment the label shall be permanently fixed to the piece of equipment or on
the adjacent structure, subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION:
3.1.1 General: Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
and shop drawings and details on drawings. Install electrical components and use
electrical products complying with requirements of applicable SECTIONS OF
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL. Mount controllers at locations and height as indicated
or instructed by the Contracting Officer.
3.1.2 Start-Up: Start-up, test, and adjust electrical control systems in presence of
manufacturer's Representative. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
equipment. Final Adjustment: After completion of installation, adjust thermostats,
control valves, and similar items.
3.2
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR PACKAGE UNITS

3.2.1
General: The system start-up shall be automatic. All systems control shall be
electronically operated. Whenever the system is turned on, control circuit and
power circuit will be energized. When the system is shut-off, the control circuit
will be de-energized.
3.2.1.1 Summer Cooling:
Switch to cooling position. Ducted mounted

Page | 9 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
temperature sensor shall transmit signal to temperature controller to

actuate the refrigeration circuit to maintain the pre-set return air
temperature precisely.
3.2.1.2 Winter Heating: Switch to heating position to modulate the electric heater.
Step controller to maintain the pre-set return air temperature precisely.
3.2.2
In case of fire alarm or if smoke is detected by the return duct smoke detector,
PAC unit shall be stopped automatically through signal from fire alarm control
panel.
Page | 10 of 10
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF HVAC AND

PLUMBING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.3 INSTRUMENT ACCURACY REQUIREMENTS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
PART 2
15990-2/7
15990-2/7
15990-3/7
15990-3/7
15990-3/7
PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING AND BALANCING
3.1.1 GENERAL
3.1.2 AIR SYSTEMS
3.1.3 MARKING OF SETTING
3.1.4 MARKING OF TEST PORTS
3.1.5 SOUND LEVEL TESTING
3.1.6 TESTING DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPE
SYSTEM
3.1.7 SMOKE CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING
3.1.8 DEMONSTRATION
3.2 CONTROL SYSTEMS
Section 15990 Testing, Adjusting And Balancing HVAC & Plumbing Systems
15990-4/7
15990-4/7
15990-4/7
15990-5/7
15990-5/7
15990-5/7
15990-6/7
15990-6/7
15990-6/7
15990-6/7
15990-7/7
Page | 1 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF HVAC & PLUMBING

SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
ANSI S1.4
ANSI S1.11
(1983; S1.4A) Sound Level Meters

(1986) Octave-Band and FractionalFilters
Octave-Band Analog and Digital
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING

AND AIR CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 111
(1988) Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of

Building
Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems
ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL (AABC)
AABC MN-1
(1989) National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating,

and Air Conditioning Systems
NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB)
NEBB-01
(1991) Procedural Standards for Testing-Adjusting-Balancing of

Environmental Systems
NFPA 90A

SHEET METAL & AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS'
SMACNA-07
(1993) HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

SASO 772
SASO 773

buildings Part 1: General basis of design.
buildings Part 2 : General requirements for installation.
Page | 2 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
The Contractor shall select AABC MN-1, NEBB-01, SMACNA-07 or ASHRAE 111 as the
standard for providing testing, adjusting and balancing of air and water systems. The selected
standard shall be used throughout the project. Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be
accomplished by a firm certified for testing and balancing by Associated Air Balance Council
(AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). Prior to testing, adjusting, and
balancing, the Contractor shall verify that the systems have been installed and are operating as
specified. Approved detail drawings and all other data required for each system and/or component
to be tested shall be made available at the jobsite during the entire testing, adjusting and balancing
effort. The Contractor shall verify that all balancing devices are properly installed to permit
testing, adjusting and balancing and that all duct leakage tests have been completed prior to testing,
adjusting and balancing. The Contracting Officer shall be notified in writing of all equipment,
components, or balancing devices, that are damaged, incorrectly installed, or missing, as well as
any design deficiencies that will prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing.
Testing,
adjusting, and balancing shall not commence until approved by the Contracting Officer.
Instrumentation accuracy shall be in accordance with the standard selected in this paragraph.
Sound level measuring equipment shall be rated in accordance with ANSI S1.4 and ANSI S1.11.
1.3 INSTRUMENT ACCURACY REQUIREMENTS
All instrumentation shall be checked for accuracy before beginning testing, adjusting and balancing
procedures. Instrument accuracy shall be in accordance with the standard selected in paragraph
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. Checks may be carried out against similar equipment maintained
specifically for checking purposes or by the manufacturer or a recognized testing facility. All
instrumentation used for testing shall be calibrated within 6 months of use. Pitot tubes and U-tube
manometers do not require checking. In no case shall the instrumentation accuracy be less than
specified by the instrument manufacturer. Any instrument falling out of calibration during the
process of balancing and testing shall be recalibrated or removed from the site and replaced by a
properly calibrated instrument. No instruments shall be allowed to remain on-site that are not in
calibration.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
SD-09 Reports
Testing and Balancing; FIO.
Three copies of a preliminary report, 30 days before balancing commences. The report shall be
organized by specific systems and shall clearly identify each item of equipment to be tested,
adjusted, and balanced. The appropriate test procedures and measurements to be taken for each
item of equipment shall be listed. Instrument calibration records shall be provided on forms shown
in AABC MN-1 or SMACNA-07. Manufacturer's specified accuracy shall be shown. The report
shall include floor plans showing all measurement locations and types of measurements to be
made. All related data necessary for testing, balancing, and adjusting, including fan curves and
pump curves, shall be included. A system readiness checklist, similar to that shown in
SMACNA-07, shall be included. The report shall contain a listing of the deficiencies of all systems
to be tested, adjusted and balanced and the corrective action taken. The report shall contain a
Page | 3 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
schedule for the testing and balancing. Six copies of the final report on forms shown in AABC
MN-1 or SMACNA-07, 30 days after completion of the test and balance operation. Data shall be
in a hard bound cover identifying the project name, location, date of submittal, name of Contractor,
and a general title indicating the specific area and type of work, and shall be signed by a registered
professional engineer, employed by the test and balance firm, who has a minimum of 2 years
experience in testing, adjusting and balancing work. The final report shall include a summary
describing test methods, test results, and major corrective actions taken. The report shall include
as-tested floor plans showing all measurement locations and types of measurements made. The
Package unit/air handling unit data shall include a static pressure profile diagram, and pitot tube
traverses where possible. The VAV terminal data shall include maximum and minimum air flows,
for design and actual conditions, and shall be supported with summaries which show the air outlet
totals for each VAV terminal and the VAV terminal totals for each package/air handling unit. Air
distribution data shall include coded drawings which show the exact location of each air outlet.
Data for heating and cooling coils, shall include heat balance calculations.
All instruments that are recalibrated and brought back onto the jobsite after being found to be out
of calibration shall have recalibration records submitted on forms shown in AABC MN-1 or
SMACNA-07.
SD-13 Certificates
Qualification; GA.
Qualification data, 90 days prior to testing and balancing operations. The test and balance firm
shall be certified by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or the National Environmental
Balancing Bureau (NEBB). The lead balancing technician shall be qualified by AABC or NEBB
and his qualification data shall include past experience on at least five similar projects.
PART 3 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING AND BALANCING
3.1.1 General
The facility shall be essentially complete with final ceiling, walls, windows, doors and
partitions in place. Doors and windows surrounding each area to be balanced shall be
closed during testing and balancing operations. Air systems shall be complete and
operable with balancing dampers, ducting, diffusers, returns, flow control boxes and
control components in place. Exhaust fans and fume hoods shall be operational.
Hydronic systems shall be complete and operable with balancing valves, flow meters,
coils, pumps, piping and control components in place. All measurements and adjustments
shall be made using procedures described in standard selected in paragraph GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS. Air motion and distribution from air terminals shall be as shown.
Smoke tests may be used to demonstrate proper air distribution from air terminals. All data
including deficiencies encountered and corrective action taken shall be recorded. If a
system cannot be adjusted to meet the design requirements, the Contractor shall promptly
notify the Contracting Officer in writing.
Page | 4 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.1.2 Air Systems

Clean filters shall be installed at the beginning of the testing, adjusting, and balancing
effort. Each system shall be adjusted until all flow quantities are within plus ten percent
and minus zero percent. Dampers shall be checked for tight shutoff. Air leakage around
dampers shall be verified. Fire and smoke dampers shall be open. Fans shall be checked
for correct direction of rotation and proper speed shall be verified. Fire and smoke
dampers shall be tested at system design air flow to ensure proper closure in accordance
with NFPA 90A and manufacturer's instructions prior to building occupancy.
3.1.2.1 General Balancing Methods
In addition to the requirements for specific systems, flows in supply, exhaust and
return air systems shall be balanced using the methods in standard selected in
paragraph GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. Throttling losses shall be limited. Air
flow adjustments shall be made by first adjusting the fan speed to meet the design
flow conditions. Fan speed adjustment may not be required for fan motors which
are less than 746 W, or if throttling results in no greater than an additional 1/3 W
draw above that required if the fan speed were adjusted. Flows and pressures shall
be checked in all main risers and supply ducts at all supply, exhaust and return fan
discharges. All flows shall be recorded before and after eachmay be used to
demonstrate proper air distribution from air terminals. All data including
deficiencies encountered and corrective action taken shall be recorded. If a system
cannot be adjusted to meet the design requirements, the Contractor shall promptly
notify the Contracting Officer in writing.
3.1.2.2 Specific Systems
All special or additional procedures for testing and balancing shall be in
accordance with the applicable requirements of the standard selected in paragraph
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. If a system has diversity, only the required
quantity of wide open terminals shall be used to meet the design air flow.
3.1.3.
Marking of Setting
Following final acceptance of certified reports by the Contracting Officer, the setting of all
HVAC adjustment devices including valves, splitters, and dampers shall be permanently
marked by the testing and balancing engineer so that adjustment can be restored if
disturbed at any time.
3.1.4.Marking of Test Ports
The testing and balancing engineer shall permanently and legibly mark and identify the
location points of the duct test ports. If the ductwork has exterior insulation, these
markings shall be made on the exterior side of the ductwork insulation. All penetrations
through ductwork and ductwork insulation shall be properly sealed to prevent air leakage
or loss of vapor barrier.
Page | 5 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.1.5.
Sound Level Testing
After the systems are properly tested, adjusted and balanced, sound levels shall be checked
in accordance with the applicable provisions of AABC MN-1. Octave-band analysis and
noise-criteria curve data shall be recorded on forms shown in AABC MN-1. All occupied
areas including offices, corridors, auditorium and meeting rooms, and operating rooms
shall be verified to be within the sound levels required. Any areas not meeting the
requirements of AABC MN-1 or the specifications or drawings shall be clearly indicated
on the form and an explanation of all discrepancies shall be provided in test report.
3.1.6.
Testing Drainage And Vent Pipe Systems

3.1.6.1. Before Installing Sanitary Fixtures subject systems to water pressure
test to prove tightness and to flow test to prove freedom from
obstruction.
3.1.6.2. Water Pressure Test: Apply to whole system or in sections, Close all openings
with PVC pipe plugs or by other approved means an fill system with water to point of
overflow at highest opening. Vent all air and ensure that water reaches all parts of system
to be tested. No section to be tested to less than 3 m head of water. Test period to be for at
least 4 hours prior to inspection of system. Inspect all joints and pipes whilst under
pressure and correct leaks or defective joints by replacing with new joints and materials.
Make shift repairs and application of repair compound will not be permitted. Repeat test
after corrections are made and until systems are proven tight. Obstructions in systems are
to be cleared and systems subjected to further test at no extra cost.
3.1.7.
Smoke Control System Testing

3.1.7.1.
Testing of the smoke control system shall consist of two levels.
The first level is to determine that system is operational as it is intended, and the
second level is to check that system is performing under all required modes of
operation. The first level of testing shall consist of activating the smoke control
system and determining that the fans, dampers, and all other components are
functioning properly. The second level of testing shall include the use of the
chemical smoke method commercially known as smoke candle or smoke
bomb. This test shall be conducted by heating the chemical smoke to overcome
little or no-heat induced buoyancy.
3.1.8.
Demonstration
3.1.8.1.
Training:
a) Train the Owners maintenance personnel on
troubleshooting procedures and testing, adjusting, and
balancing procedures. Review with the Owners personnel, the
information contained in the Operating and Maintenance Data
specified in Division 15 Section Basic Mechanical
Page | 6 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Requirements.
b) Schedule training with Owner trough the Engineer with at
least 7 days prior notice.
3.2 CONTROL SYSTEMS
Testing, adjusting, and balancing of the systems shall be coordinated with the control system
installation. All control components shall be verified to be properly installed and operating as
specified before proceeding with testing, adjusting, and balancing. Verification shall be in
accordance with AABC MN-1.
Page | 7 of 7
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 16415 ELECTRICAL WORK, INTERIOR

PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL
REFERENCES
GENERAL
SUBMITTALS
WORKMANSHIP
16415-2/38
16415-2/38
16415-8/38
16415-10/38
16415-11/38
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
16415-11/38
16415-11/38
PART 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
EXECUTION
GROUNDING
WIRING METHODS
BOXES AND SUPPORTS
DEVICE PLATES
RECEPTACLES
WALL SWITCHES
SERVICE EQUIPMENT
PANEL BOARDS
POWER-SWITCHGEAR AND DEAD FRONT
DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS.
FUSES
UNDERGROUND SERVICE CONDUITS
MOTORS
MOTOR CONTROL
MOTOR DISCONNECT MEANS
LAMPS AND LIGHTING FIXTURES
BATTERY CHARGERS
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION
TESTS
ONE-LINE DIAGRAM
ON-SITE TRAINING
16415-21/38
16415-21/38
16415-22/38
16415-26/38
16415-28/38
16415-28/38
16415-29/38
16415-29/38
16415-30/38
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.18
3.19
3.20
3.21
3.22
Section 16415 Electrical Work, Interior
16415-30/38
16415-31/38
16415-31/38
16415-31/38
16415-32/38
16415-33/38
16415-33/38
16415-35/38
16415-35/38
16415-35/38
16415-37/38
16415-37/38
16415-37/38
16415-38/38
Page | 1 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 16415
ELECTRICAL WORK, INTERIOR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
ANSI C12.1
ANSI C12.4
ANSI C12.10
ANSI C37.16
ANSI C39.1
ANSI C57.12.10
ANSI C57.12.13
ANSI C57.12.27
ANSI C57.12.50
ANSI C57.12.51
ANSI C57.12.52
ANSI C57.12.70
ANSI C82.1
ANSI C82.4
ANSI C135.30
1988) Code for Electricity Metering

(1984 R 1990) Mechanical Demand Registers
(1987) Electromechanical Watt-hour Meters
(1988; C37.16a) Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers and AC Power
Circuit Protectors - Preferred Ratings, Related Requirements, and
Application Recommendations
(1981; R 1992) Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments
(1988) 230 kV and Below 833/958 through 8333/10 417 kVA,
Single-Phase, and 750/862 through 60 000/80 000/100 000 kVA,
Three-Phase without Load Tap Changing; and 3750/4687 through 60
000/80 000/100 000 kVA with Load Tap Changing - Safety Requirements
(1982) Conformance Requirements for Liquid-Filled Transformers Used
in Unit Installations, Including Unit Substations
(1982) Conformance Requirements for
Liquid-Filled Distribution
Transformers Used
in Pad-Mounted Installations, Including Unit
Substations
(1981; R 1989) Ventilated Dry-Type Distribution Transformers, 1 to 500
kVA, Single-Phase, and 15 to 500 kVA, Three-Phase, with High-Voltage
601 to 34 500 Volts, Low-Voltage 120 to 600 Volts
(1981; R 1989) Ventilated Dry-Type Power Transformers, 501 kVA and
Larger, Three-Phase, with High-Voltage 601 to 34 500 Volts,
Low-Voltage 208Y/120 to 4160 Volts
(1981; R 1989) Sealed Dry-Type Power Transformers, 501 kVA and
Larger, Three-Phase, with High-Voltage 601 to 34 500 Volts,
Low-Voltage 208Y/120 to 4160 Volts
(1978; R 1993) Terminal Markings and Connections for Distribution and
Power Transformers
(1985; C82.1a; C82.1b; C82.1c; R 1992) Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps
Specifications
(1992) Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium
Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type)
(1988) Zinc-Coated Ferrous Ground Rods for Overhead or Underground
Line Construction
CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)
47 CFR 18
47 CFR 68
Rules and Regulations: Industrial,

Scientific, and Medical Equipment
Connection of Terminal Equipment to the
Telephone Network
Page | 2 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001

FS L-C-530
FS L-P-387
(Rev C) Coating, Pipe, Thermoplastic Resin

(Rev A; Am 1, Int Am 2) Plastic Sheet, Laminated,
Designation Plates)
Thermosetting
(for

IEEE C37.13
IEEE C37.20.1
IEEE C57.12.00
IEEE C57.12.01
IEEE C57.12.80
IEEE C57.12.90
IEEE C57.13
IEEE C57.98
IEEE C57.100
IEEE C57.105
IEEE C62.41
IEEE Std 81
(1990) Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures

(1993) Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit-Breaker Switchgear
(1993) IEEE Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed
Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers
(1989) Dry-Type Distribution and Power
Transformers
Including
Those With Solid Cast and/or Resin - Encapsulated Windings
(1978; R 1992) Terminology for Power and
Distribution Transformers
(1993) Test Code for Liquid-Immersed Distribution,
Power,
and
Regulating
Transformers and Guide for Short-Circuit Testing of
Distribution and Power
Transformers
(1993) Instrument Transformers
(1993) Guide for Transformer Impulse Tests
(1986) Test Procedure for Thermal
Evaluation
of
Oil-Immersed
Distribution Transformers
(1978; R 1987) Transformer Connections in Three-Phase Distribution
Systems
(1991) Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC
Power Circuits
(1983) Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and
Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System
INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (ICEA)
ICEA S-80-576
(1988) Communications Wire and Cable for
Wiring of Premises

NEMA 250
NEMA AB 1
NEMA FU 1
NEMA ICS 1
NEMA ICS 2
NEMA ICS 3
NEMA ICS 6
NEMA LE 4
NEMA MG 1
NEMA MG 10
NEMA OS 1
NEMA OS 2
(1991) Enclosures for Electrical

Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
(1993) Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches
(1986) Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses
(1993) Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies
(1993) Industrial Systems
(1993) Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems
(1987) Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility
(1993) Motors and Generators
(1983; R 1988) Energy Management Guide
for Selection and Use of
Poly-phase Motors
(1989) Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device
Boxes, Covers, and Box
Supports
(1986; Errata Aug 1986; R 1991) Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device
Boxes, Covers and Box Supports
Page | 3 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
NEMA PB 1
NEMA PB 2
NEMA PE 5
NEMA PE 7
NEMA RN 1
(1990) Panelboards
(1989) Deadfront Distribution Switchboards
(1985; R 1991) Utility Type Battery Chargers
(1985; R 1991) Communication Type Battery Chargers
(1989) Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC)
Externally Coated Galvanized
Rigid Steel
Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit
(1990) Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing (EPT) and Conduit
(EPC-40 and EPC-80)
(1993) Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (ENT)
(1983; R 1989) General Requirements for Wiring Devices
(1988) Wiring Devices Dimensional Requirements
NEMA TC 2
NEMA TC 13
NEMA WD 1
NEMA WD 6

NFPA 70
NFPA 101

RURAL ELECTRIFICATION ADMINISTRATION (REA)
REA TE&CM 823
(1980) Electrical Protection by Use of Gas Tube Arresters

SASO 52
SASO 55
SASO 56
SASO 138
SASO 139
SASO 146
SASO 147
SASO 182
SASO 202
SASO 203
SASO 231
SASO 232
SASO 254
SASO 255
SASO 410
SASO 421
SASO 422
SASO 443
SASO 444
SASO 507
SASO 508
SASO 608
SASO 609
SASO 691
Methods of test for switches for domestic purposes

PVC insulated cables with circular copper conductors
Methods of test for PVC-insulated cables and cords with circular copper
conductors.
Methods of test for tubular fluorescent lamps for general lighting purposes
Tubular fluorescent lamps for general lighting purposes
Methods of test for starters for fluorescent lamps.
Starters for fluorescent lamps.
Standard voltages and frequency for A.C. transmission and distribution
systems.
Methods of testing safety measures for electrical installations in residential
premises
Safety measures for electrical installations in residential premises.
Methods of test for adhesive insulating tapes for electrical purposes
Adhesive insulating tapes for electrical purposes
Methods of testing plastic conduits and fittings for electrical installations.
Plastic conduits and fittings for electrical installations.
Basic requirements for telephone sets.
Testing methods for power transformers
Power transformers.
Methods of testing plugs and socket-outlets for household and similar general
use.
Plugs and socket-outlets for household and similar general use.
Methods of test for ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps.
Ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps.
Methods of test for air-cooled electric motors
Air-cooled electric motors
Ballasts for high pressure mercury vapor lamps
Page | 4 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SASO 692
SASO 751
SASO 752
SASO 821
SASO 893
SASO 982
SASO 983
SASO 984
SASO 985
SASO 986
SASO 1131
SASO 1132
SASO 1268
SASO 1269
SASO 1270
SASO 1271
SASO 1272
SASO 1273
SASO 1318
SASO 1319
SASO 1320
SASO 1321
SASO 1345
SASO 1346
SASO 1349
SASO 1350
SASO 1351
SASO 1449
Methods of testing ballasts for high pressure mercury vapor lamps

Conductors of insulated cables.
Tests on electric cables under fire conditions Part 1 : Test on a single
vertical insulated wire or cable.
Cast iron manhole and handhole covers and frames for telephone purposes
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) insulated cables of rated voltages up to and
including 450/750 volts.
Electrical installation s of buildings Part 4: Protection for safety Chapter
(42): protection against thermal effects.
Electrical installations of buildings Part 4: Protection for safety Chapter
(43): protection against over-current.
Electrical installations of buildings - Part 4: Protection for safety Chapter
(45): protection against under-voltage.
Electrical installations of buildings Part 4: Protection for safety Chapter
(46): Isolation and switching
Electrical installations of buildings Part 4: Protection for safety Section
(482): protection against fire.
High pressure mercury vapor lamps.
Methods of testing high pressure mercury vapour lamps.
Electrical installations of buildings: Part 4: Protection for safety Chapter 47:
Application of protective measures for safety Section 473: Measures of
protection against overcurrent.
Electrical installations of buildings: Part 5: Selection and erection of
electrical equipment Chapter 53: Switchgear and control gear Section 537:
Devices for isolation and switching.
Electrical installations of buildings: Part 5: Selection and erection of electrical
equipment Chapter 54: Earthing arrangements and protective conductors.
Electrical installations of buildings: Part 5: Selection and erection of electrical
equipment Chapter 56: Safety Devices.
Electrical installations of buildings: Part 7: Requirements for special
installations or locations Section 701: Locations containing a bath tub or
shower basin.
Electrical installations of buildings: Part 7: Requirements for special
installations or locations Section 702: Swimming pools.
Luminaires Part 1: General requirements and tests.
Polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and including
450/750V Part 1: General requirements.
450/750V Part 3: Non sheathed cables for fixed wiring.
450/750V Part 5: Flexible cables (Cords)
Low frequency cables and wires with PVC insulation and PVC Sheath Part
1: General testing and measuring methods.
Low frequency cables and wires with PVC insulation and PVC sheath Part
2: Telephone wire for inside applications.
Circuit breakers for over current protection for house hold and similar
installations.
High pressure sodium vapour lamps.
Methods of test for high pressure sodium vapour lamps.
450/750V Part 2: Test methods.
Page | 5 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SASO 1484
SASO 1486
SASO 1487
SASO 1489
SASO 1491
SASO 1606
SASO 1607
SASO 1609
SASO 1610
SASO 1612
SASO 1614
Electrical installations of buildings Part 5 Selection and erection of electrical

equipment Chapter 53: Switchgear and control gear
Earthing electrodes.
Methods of testing earthing electrodes.
A.C. Supplied electronic ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps general and
safety requirements.
Ballasts for discharge lamps (excluding tubular fluorescent lamps) general and
safety requirements.
Power transformers Part 1: General
Power transformers Part 3: Insulation Levels and Dielectric Tests Section 1
: External Clearances in Air.
Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies Part 1: Type Tested
and Partially Type Tested Assemblies.
Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies Part 2: Particular
Requirements for Busbar Trunking Systems (Busways)
Circuit-Breakers for Equipment.
Protection of Structures Against Lightning Part 1: General Principles
Section 1 : Guide A. Section of Protection levels for lightning Protection
Systems.
UL-03
UL 1
UL 5
UL 6
UL 20
UL 44
UL 50
UL 67
UL 83
UL 94
UL 98
UL 198B
UL 198C
UL 198D
UL 198E
UL 198F
UL 198G
UL 198H
UL 198L
UL 360
UL 467
UL 486A
UL 486B
(1994; Supple) Electrical Construction Materials Directory

(1993; Rev thru Jan 1995) Flexible Metal Conduit
(1985; Rev thru Sep 1990) Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings
(1993) Rigid Metal Conduit
(1986; Rev thru Jul 1993) General-Use Snap Switches
(1991; Rev thru Jan 1995) Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables
(1992; Rev thru Nov 1994) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1993; Rev thru Dec 1993) Panelboards
(1991; Rev thru Oct 1994) Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables
(1991; Rev thru May 1994) Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts
in Devices and Appliances
(1994) Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches
(1988; Rev Jan 1988) Class H Fuses
(1986; Rev thru Jun 1993) High-Interrupting-Capacity Fuses, Current-Limiting
Types
(1988; Rev Jul 1988) Class K Fuses
(1988; Rev Jul 1988) Class R Fuses
(1988) Plug Fuses
(1988; Rev May 1988) Fuses for Supplementary Overcurrent Protection
(1988; Rev thru Nov 1993) Class T Fuses
(1988; Rev Mar 1988) D-C Fuses for Industrial Use
(1986; Rev thru Dec 1994) Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit
(1993) Grounding and Bonding Equipment
(1991; Rev Oct 1991) Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with
Copper Conductors
(1991; Rev thru Apr 1992) Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum
Conductors
Page | 6 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
UL 486C
UL 489
UL 497
UL 498
UL 506
UL 508
UL 510
UL 512
UL 514A
UL 514B
UL 514C
UL 542
UL 651
UL 651A
UL 674
UL 698
UL 719
UL 797
UL 817
UL 844
UL 845
UL 869A
UL 877
UL 886
UL 891
UL 924
UL 935
UL 943
UL 1004
UL 1010
UL 869A
UL 877
UL 886
UL 891
UL 924
UL 935
UL 943
UL 1004
UL 1010
(1991; Rev thru Sep 1992) Splicing Wire Connectors

(1991; Rev thru Apr 1994) Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit-Breaker
Enclosures
(1991; Rev Sep 1992) Protectors for Paired Conductor Communication Circuits
(1991; Rev thru Oct 1994) Attachment Plugs and Receptacles
(1994; Rev Jul 1994) Specialty Transformers
(1993) Industrial Control Equipment
(1986; Rev Oct 1986) Insulating Tape
(1993) Fuse holders
(1991) Metallic Outlet Boxes
(1992; Rev thru Mar 1993) Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes
(1988; Rev Jun 1989) Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and
Covers
(1994) Lampholders, Starters, and Starter Holders for Fluorescent Lamps
(1989; Rev thru Dec 1989) Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit
(1989; Rev thru Dec 1989) Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE
Conduit
(1994; Rev Aug 1994) Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Division 1
Hazardous (Classified) Locations
(1991; Rev thru May 1993) Industrial Control Equipment for Use in Hazardous
(Classified) Locations
(1985; Rev thru Dec 1994) Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cables
(1993) Electrical Metallic Tubing
(1994; Rev Aug 1994) Cord Sets and Power-Supply Cords
(1990; Rev thru Dec 1993) Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous
(1994) Motor Control Centers
(1993; Rev Apr 1994) Reference Standard for Service Equipment
(1993) Circuit Breakers and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures for Use in Hazardous
(1994; Rev thru Apr 1994) Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous
(1994; Rev thru Jan 1995) Dead-Front Switchboards
(1990; Rev thru Aug 1994) Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
(1993; Rev thru Apr 1994) Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts
(1993; Rev Dec 1994) Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters
(1994) Electric Motors
(1991; Rev thru Feb 1994) Receptacle-Plug Combinations for Use in
(1993; Rev Apr 1994) Reference Standard for Service Equipment
(1993) Circuit Breakers and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures for Use in Hazardous
(1994; Rev thru Apr 1994) Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous
(1994; Rev thru Jan 1995) Dead-Front Switchboards
(1990; Rev thru Aug 1994) Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
(1993; Rev thru Apr 1994) Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts
(1993; Rev Dec 1994) Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters
(1994) Electric Motors
(1991; Rev thru Feb 1994) Receptacle-Plug Combinations for Use in
Page | 7 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
UL 1022
UL 1029
UL 1047
UL 1236
UL 1242
UL 1561
UL 1564
UL 1570
UL 1571
UL 1572
UL 1660
(1979; Rev Jun 1984, Errata Nov 1985)

Line Isolation Monitors
(1994; Rev Oct 1994) High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts
(1995) Isolated Power Systems Equipment
(1994) Battery Chargers for Charging Engine-Starter Batteries
(1983; Rev thru Jul 1993) Intermediate Metal Conduit
(1994) Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers
(1993; Rev Apr 1994) Industrial Battery Chargers
(1988; Rev thru Jul 1994) Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures
(1991; Rev thru Nov 1994) Incandescent Lighting Fixtures
(1991; Rev thru Nov 1994) High Intensity Discharge Lighting Fixtures
(1987) Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit
1.2 GENERAL
1.2.1 Rules
The installation shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 70, NFPA 101, applicable
requirements of the Ministry of Industry and Electric and the Electrical Uniform Building
Code, unless more stringent requirements are indicated herein or shown. Provide space
around equipment in accordance with NFPA 70 and as required by the Saudi Arabian
Standards Organization.
1.2.2 Coordination
The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the work and verify all dimensions
in the field so that the outlets and equipment shall be properly located and readily accessible.
Lighting fixtures, outlets, and other equipment and materials shall be located to avoid
interference with mechanical or structural features; otherwise, lighting fixtures shall be
symmetrically located according to the room arrangement when uniform illumination is
required, or asymmetrically located to suit conditions fixed by design and shown. Raceways,
junction and outlet boxes, and lighting fixtures shall not be supported from sheet metal roof
decks. If any conflicts occur necessitating departures from the drawings, details of and
reasons for departures shall be submitted and approved prior to implementing any change.
The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate the electrical work with all trades and government
furnished equipment and provide all power related wiring.
1.2.3 Special Environments
All furnished items shall be suitable for the extremely high temperatures they will be
subjected to and to the change in temperatures they might experience.
1.2.3.1 Weatherproof Locations
Wiring, Fixtures, and equipment in designated locations shall conform to NFPA 70
requirements for installation in damp or wet locations.
1.2.3.2 Hazardous Locations
Wiring and equipment in hazardous locations shall be suitable for the NFPA 70
classes, groups, divisions, as well as the operating temperature of the environment in
which they are located.
Page | 8 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.2.4 Standard Products

Material and equipment shall be a standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in
the manufacture of the product and shall essentially duplicate items that have been in
1.2.5 Identification Nameplates
Major items of electrical equipment and major components shall be permanently marked
with an identification name to identify the equipment by type or function and specific unit
number in English and Arabic. Designation of motors shall coincide with their designation
in the motor control center or panel. Unless otherwise specified, all identification
nameplates shall be made of laminated plastic in accordance with FS L-P-387 with black
outer layers and a white core. Edges shall be chamfered. Plates shall be fastened with
black-finished round-head drive screws, except motors, or approved non-adhesive metal
fasteners. When the nameplate is to be installed on an irregular-shaped object, the
Contractor shall devise an approved support suitable for the application and ensure the
proper installation of the supports and nameplates. In all instances, the nameplate shall be
installed in a conspicuous location. At the option of the Contractor, the equipment
manufacturer's standard embossed nameplate material with black paint-filled letters may be
furnished in lieu of laminated plastic. The front of each panelboard, motor control center,
switchgear, and switchboard shall have a nameplate to indicate the phase letter,
corresponding color and arrangement of the phase conductors. The following equipment, as
a minimum, shall be provided with identification nameplates:
Minimum 6.4 mm
High Letters
__________________
Panelboards
Starters
Safety Switches
Motor Control Centers
Transformers
Equipment Enclosures
Switchgear
Switchboards
Motors
Minimum 3.2 mm
High Letters
_________________
Control Power Transformers
Control Devices
Instrument Transformers
Each panel, section, or unit in motor control centers, switchgear or similar assemblies shall
be provided with a nameplate in addition to nameplates listed above, which shall be
provided for individual compartments in the respective assembly, including nameplates
which identify "future," "spare," and "dedicated" or "equipped spaces."
1.2.6 As Built Drawings

Following the project completion or turnover, within 30 days the Contractor shall furnish
two sets of as built drawings to the Contracting Officer.
Page | 9 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.3 SUBMITTALS
an "FIO" designation are for information only. The following shall be submitted in accordance with
SD-04 Drawings
Electrical Work; GA.
Detail drawings for all materials and equipment specified. Detail drawings shall consist of a
complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical data;
catalog cuts; and any special installation instructions that may be required. Drawings shall show
applicable schematic diagrams; and equipment layout and anchorage; and conduit and cable tray
runs, anchorage, and support. Power system coordination study, short-circuit analysis or study,
fault-impedance diagrams, and load flow analysis or study shall be included and shall be in
accordance with paragraph COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION. Telephone
system drawings showing actual layout, including locations, type any gauge of cables, and terminal
assignment of wiring, after installation.
SD-09 Reports
Materials and Equipment; GA.
The label or listing of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., shall be accepted as evidence that the
materials or equipment conform to the applicable standards of that agency. In lieu of this label or
listing, a statement from a nationally recognized, adequately equipped testing agency indicating that
the items have been tested in accordance with required procedures and that the materials and
equipment comply with all contract requirements will be accepted. However, materials and
equipment installed in hazardous locations must bear the UL label unless the data submitted from
other testing agency is specifically approved in writing by the Contracting Officer. Materials and
equipment shall be approved based on the manufacturer's published data.
For other than equipment and materials specified to conform to UL publications, a manufacturer's
statement indicating complete compliance with the applicable Federal Specification, or standard of
the American Society for Testing and Materials, National Electrical Manufacturers Association, or
other commercial standard, is acceptable.
SD-13 Certificates
Telephone Installer; GA.
Qualifications of the telephone installer.
1.4
WORKMANSHIP
Materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer
and as shown.
Page | 10 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Materials and equipment shall conform to the respective publications and other requirements
specified below. Materials and equipment not listed below shall be as specified elsewhere in this
section.
2.1.2 Cables and Wires
All wires and cables shall be manufactured as per IEC/DIN/BS/UL standards. Conductors in
cables shall be annealed copper, stranded for all sizes of wire/cable. Aluminum conductors
shall not be used. Size of wire/cable shall be as shown on the drawings. Cables and wires shall
conform to UL 44 or equivalent for rubber-insulated type; UL 83 or equivalent for the
thermoplastic-insulated type (THHN); and UL 719 or equivalent for the
nonmetallic-sheathed cables. THHN type shall be used in buildings. The following types
shall be provided.
2.1.2.1 Grounding Cables
Grounding cables shall have green low-voltage insulation.
2.1.2.2 Cord Sets and Power-Supply Cords
UL 817.
2.1.2.3 Feeder Cables
1. Shall be 600V/1000V copper conductor, XLPE/PVC insulated 90oC,
conforming to Standards mentioned above and shall be installed as
indicated on the drawings.
2.1.2.4 Branch circuit wires for power and lighting shall consist of 600V/750V copper
conductors, Type THHN, PVC insulated, 85oC conforming to Standards mentioned
above.
2.1.3 Cable Trays
Cable trays shall form a wireway system, and shall be of nominal 101.6 mm depth. Cable
trays shall be constructed of steel that has been zinc-coated after fabrication. Trays shall
include risers, splice and end plates, dropouts, and miscellaneous hardware. Edges, fittings,
and hardware shall be finished free from burrs and sharp edges. Fittings shall have not less
than the load-carrying ability of straight tray sections and shall have manufacturer's
minimum standard radius unless otherwise indicated. Size and type of cable tray shall be as
shown on the drawings. Install warning signs with black letters on yellow ground, in English
and Arabic, at visible locations on/or near cable tray stating
"WARNING! NOT TO BE USED AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT FOR
LADDERS OR PERSONNEL".
Page | 11 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.1.3.1 Trough
Trough-type cable trays shall be perforated and shall have a nominal width as shown
on drawings.
2.1.3.2 Ladder
Ladder-type cable trays shall be of nominal width as required. Rung spacing shall
be on 152.4 mm maximum centers.
2.1.3.3 Channel
Channel-type cable trays shall be of width as required. Trays shall be one-piece
construction having slots spaced not more than 114.3 mm on centers.
2.1.3.4 Cantilever
Cantilever-type, center-hung cable trays may be provided at the Contractor's option
in lieu of other cable tray types specified.
2.1.4
Under-Floor Trunking
Shall be manufacturer's standard three-compartment trunking, two piece construction,

manufactured of hot dipped galvanized sheet steel to BS 2989 or ASTM A 123, Class B, and
shall be supplied with covers and accessories, including bends and tees, junction boxes, access
boxes fitted with tray lid, socket outlet plates, bends, rising bends, connectors, stop ends, offsets
and other required fittings. Size shall be as shown on the drawings or as approved by the
Contracting Officer. Trunking shall be provided with multi-purpose access units.
1.
For carpeted areas, provide open trunking system with modular lids flush
with the screed, body minimum 1.6 mm thick and lid minimum 3 mm thick.
2. For stone flooring areas, provide trunking suitable for burial in screed, body
minimum 1 mm thick and lid minimum 1.2 mm thick.
2.1.5 Chargers, Battery
NEMA PE 5, NEMA PE 7, UL 1236, UL 1564. Battery chargers shall be general purpose,
continuous current output, with solid state rectifiers. Means shall be provided to regulate
and to adjust the dc output voltage. Chargers shall have continuous current ratings of 10 to
15 percent higher than battery current outputs based upon an 8-hour discharge.
2.1.6 Circuit Breakers
Circuit breakers shall have voltage, current and interrupting ratings as required for the short
circuit current available. Fully rated circuit breakers shall be provided to obtain the
specified interrupting rating. Series rated circuit breakers, in combinations approved for
series applications by UL, may not used. All breakers shall have adjustable trip elements as
required for proper coordination to achieve coordination required by paragraph "Coordinated
Power Systems Protection". Provide over-voltage and under-voltage protection in the
substations LV main circuit breakers.
Page | 12 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.1.6.1 Molded-Case and Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers

NEMA AB 1 and UL 489 for circuit breakers, and UL 877 for circuit breakers and
circuit breaker enclosures in hazardous (classified) locations.
1.
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: Single-pole breakers shall be full module

size; two poles shall not be installed in a single module. Multi-pole breakers
shall be of the common-trip type having a single operating handle, but for
sizes of 100 amperes or less may consist of single-pole breakers
permanently factory assembled into a multi-pole unit having an internal,
mechanical, non-tamper common-trip mechanism and external handle ties.
Breakers coordinated with current-limiting fuses shall have a combined
interrupting capacity of 100,000 symmetrical amperes. All poles of
associated breakers shall open if any fuse blows.
2.
Insulated-Case, Systems-Type Circuit Breakers: Breakers shall have

continuous, short time withstand, and interrupting current ratings and frame
sizes as required. Breakers shall be stored energy, electrically operated
type.
2.1.6.2 Low-Voltage-Power
IEEE C37.13 and ANSI C37.16. Breakers shall have continuous, short time
withstand, and interrupting current ratings and frame sizes as required. Breakers
shall be stored energy, electrically operated, except solenoid operated breakers are
permitted in 600 amperes frame or smaller electrically operated breakers.
2.1.6.3 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters
UL 943. Breakers equipped with ground fault interrupters shall have ground fault
class, interrupting capacity, and voltage and current ratings as indicated.
2.1.7 Conduit and Tubing
2.1.7.2 Flexible Conduit, Steel
General-purpose type, UL 1; liquid tight, UL 360, and UL 1660
2.1.7.6 Rigid Metal Conduit
Rigid galvanized steel conduit conforming to ANSI C80.1 or .UL 6. Fittings for steel
conduits shall conform to ANSI C80.4.
2.1.7.7 Rigid Plastic
Rigid PVC, Schedule 40, conforming to NEMA TC 2, or UL 651, UL 651A or ASTM
D 1785, with proper type of fittings such as bell ends or terminal adapters.
Page | 13 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.1.7.8 Surface Metal Electrical Raceways and Fittings UL 5.

2.1.8 Conduit and Device Boxes and Fittings
2.1.8.1 Boxes, Metallic Outlet
Shall conform to British Standards.
2.1.8.2 Boxes, Nonmetallic, Outlet and Flush-Device Boxes and Covers
2.1.8.3 Boxes, Outlet for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations
2.1.8.4 Boxes, Switch (Enclosed), Surface-Mounted
2.1.8.5 Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes
2.1.8.6 Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations
2.1.8.7 Fittings, PVC, for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing
2.1.9 Conduit Coatings Plastic Resin System
FS L-C-530 or NEMA RN 1, Type A-40.
2.1.10 Connectors, Wire Pressure
2.1.10.1 Copper Conductors
UL 486A.
2.1.11 Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment
UL 467.
Page | 14 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.1.11.1 Ground Rods

Ground rods shall be of copper-clad steel conforming to UL 467 not less than 19.1
mm in diameter by 3000 mm in length of the sectional type driven full length into
the earth. Provide number of rods and lengths as required to achieve a 5 ohm
ground.
2.1.11.2Ground Bus
The ground bus shall be bare conductor or flat copper in one piece, if practicable.
2.1.12 Enclosures
NEMA ICS 6 or NEMA 250 or UL 698 for use in hazardous (classified) locations, unless
2.1.12.1 Cabinets and Boxes
UL 50.
2.1.12.2 Circuit Breaker
UL 489.
2.1.12.3 Circuit Breaker for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations
UL 877.
2.1.13 Fixtures, Lighting and Fixture Accessories/Components
Refer to drawings for selection of lighting fixtures, and to UL 844 or equivalent for fixtures
to be installed in hazardous (classified) locations. Fixtures, accessories and components,
including ballasts, lamp-holders, lamps, starters and starter holders, shall conform to
industry standards specified below. Standard Drawing 40-06-04 shall be altered by the
Contractor to meet metric designed products if required. The design intent shall remain
unchanged.
2.1.13.1 Fixture, Auxiliary or Emergency
UL 924
2.1.13.2 Incandescent Fixture
NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility of recessed fixtures and UL 1571.
2.1.13.3 Fluorescent
One. Fixture: NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility of recessed fixtures and UL 1570.
Fixtures shall be plainly marked for proper lamp and ballast type to identify lamp
diameter, wattage, color and start type. Marking shall be readily visible to service
personnel, but not visible from normal viewing angles. Only ELECTRONIC ballasts
Page | 15 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
are to be used, magnetic ballasts will not be accepted.

Two. Ballasts:
NOTE: Use only ELECTRONIC ballasts specified in (2) below.
(1)
Magnetic Ballast, Energy-Saving, High Power Factor, Class P, Automatic-Resetting

Type, approved for the application by the Certified Ballast Manufacturers: ANSI
C82.1 and UL 935. Two-lamp ballasts shall be used for each pair of lamps within a
fixture or within continuous mounted fixtures. Single-lamp ballasts shall be used for
individually mounted single-lamp fixtures and where an odd single-lamp fixture
occurs at the end of a continuous group. Magnetic fluorescent lamp ballasts shall have
a Ballast Efficacy Factor (BEF) not less than shown in the following table:
MAGNETIC FLUORESCENT BALLAST EFFICACY FACTORS*

Design starting temperature above 4.4 degrees C with 60 HZ input frequency
________________________________________________________________________________
NUMBER
LAMP
NOMINAL
MAX. LAMP
MIN. BALLAST
OF TYPE
OPERATIONAL OPERATING
EFFICACY
FACTOR
LAMPS
INPUT VOLTAGE
CURRENT
1
1.219 m
120
less than
1.805
(4 ft)
or
1000 m amp
rapid start 220
___________________________________________________________________
2
1.219 m
120
less than
1.060
(4 ft)
1000 m amp
rapid start
___________________________________________________________________
2
1.219 m
220
less than
1.050
(4 ft)
1000 m amp
rapid start
___________________________________________________________________
2
2.438 m
120 - 220
less than
0.570
(8 ft)
1000 m amp
slim-line
___________________________________________________________________
2
2.438 m
120 - 220
less than
0.390
(8 ft)
1000 m amp
high output,
rapid start
___________________________________________________________________
* For ballasts not specifically designed for use with dimming controls
The BEF is calculated using the formula:
BEF = Ballast Factor, (in percent) / Power Input
Where Power Input = Total Wattage of Combined Lamps and Ballasts.
(2)
Electronic Ballast: The ballasts for fluorescent lighting fixtures shall be

electronic ballasts specified as follows: 1-AC Voltage range 198-254V. 2-DC
Voltage range 178-250 for ignition input voltage >198V. 3-Power factor
Page | 16 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
>0.97. 4-Over voltage protection 320V AC 1hr. 5-Over voltage indicator

starting
at
input
voltage
267-306V
AC.
6-Under
voltage
protection(shutdown)below 150V AC/178V DC. 7-Operating frequency
>40Hz. 8-With operating temperature range from -25C to +50C. 9-Automatic
restart after lamp change. 10-Suitable for use in emergency lighting
installation in accordance with VDE 008.
2.1.13.4 High-Intensity-Discharge
a. Fixture: NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility of recessed fixtures and
UL 1572.
b. Ballasts: ANSI C82.4 for multiple supply types and UL 1029.
2.1.14 Fuses and Fuse holders
2.1.14.1 Fuses, Low Voltage Cartridge Type
NEMA FU 1.
2.1.14.2 Fuses, High-Interrupting-Capacity, Current-Limiting Type
UL 198C.
2.1.14.3 Fuses, Class K, High-Interrupting-Capacity Type
UL 198D.
2.1.14.4 Fuses, Class H
UL 198B.
2.1.14.5 Fuses, Class R
UL 198E.
2.1.14.6 Fuses, Class T
UL 198H.
2.1.14.7 Fuses, Plug Type
UL 198F.
2.1.14.8 Fuses for Supplementary Overcurrent Protection
UL 198G.
2.1.14.9 Fuses, D-C for Industrial Use
Page | 17 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
UL 198L.
2.1.14.10 Fuse Holders
UL 512.
2.1.15 Instruments, Electrical Indicating

ANSI C39.1.
2.1.16 Motors, ac, Fractional and Integral
Motors, ac, fractional and integral kilowatt, 373.0 kW (500 hp) and smaller shall conform to
NEMA MG 1 and UL 1004 for motors; NEMA MG 10 for energy management selection of
poly-phase motors; and UL 674 for use of motors in hazardous (classified) locations.
2.1.16.1 Rating
The kilowatt rating of motors should be limited to no more than 125 percent of the
maximum load being served unless a NEMA standard size does not fall within this
range. In this case, the next larger NEMA standard motor size should be used.
2.1.16.2 Motor Efficiencies
All motors shall be of the high efficiency type.
2.1.17 Motor Controls and Motor Control Centers
NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, NEMA ICS 3 and NEMA ICS 6, and UL 508 and UL 845.
2.1.18 Motor Disconnect Means:
1.
Each motor shall be provided with a heavy-duty NEMA 3 for outdoor

disconnection means and NEMA 1 for indoor disconnection means as required
by ANSI/NFPA 70.
2.
For single-phase motors, a single or double pole toggle switch, rated only for
alternating current, shall be acceptable for capacities less than 50 amperes,
provided the ampere rating of the switch is at least 125% of the motor rating.
Switch shall be lockable type.
3.
Enclosed safety switches shall be horsepower rated in conformance with

ANSI/UL 98.
4.
Switches shall disconnect all ungrounded conductors.
2.1.19 Panel boards

Dead-front construction, NEMA PB 1 and UL 67.
Page | 18 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, minimum circuit breaker interrupting

capacities (RMS symmetrical) shall be 10,000 amperes for single-phase 240V
sub-panels and 50,000 main distribution panels. Breaker trip ratings shall be as
shown. For panels with fault levels in excess of 50,000 amperes, a current
limiting incoming breaker shall be installed to limit the short circuit current
amperes to the above level. Breaker trip ratings shall be as shown on the
drawings.
2. Multi-pole circuit breakers shall be of the common trip type having a single
operating handle. Tie handles are not acceptable. Circuit breakers shall bolted
type. Plug-in type circuit breakers are not acceptable.
3. Top of panelboard mounting height shall be 1800 mm.
4. Directories shall be typed to indicate load served by each circuit and mounted in
holder behind protected covering.
2.1.20 Receptacles
2.1.20.1 German Standard
2.1.20.2 Ground Fault Interrupters
BS 7288.
2.1.21 Dimmer Switches
Shall be rotary type, specification grade, flush mounted, British Standards, solid state circuitry,
rated 20 A, 220 V, 60 Hz. Finish shall be similar to that of switches/sockets in that room.
2.1.22
Dimming Panel
1. Dimming panel shall be manufacturer's standard complete with all required
elements and accessories. Rating and areas covered by each dimming panel
shall be as shown on the drawings.
2. Lighting Control Racks: The dimmer racks shall be supplied fully wired with
isolators, primary circuit protection MCB's, pressure pad terminals for
connection to incoming supplies, final load circuits and external control
elements. The racks shall be in the form of free standing enclosure with
segregated termination areas for mains and extra low voltage control wiring.
The racks shall be supplied, fitted with all the necessary control elements,
together with the modules, and MCB protection which shall be suitable rated
according to the rating of the corresponding module.
3. Dimming and Switching Modules: Each module shall be a totally enclosed,
plug-in unit with separate rear connectors for power and for control signals.
Dimming and switching modules shall be continuously rated for a maximum of
20A of tungsten lamp load, or transformer-fed lighting load.
Page | 19 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
4. Scene set Control System: The plug-in modules and associated mounting and
distribution hardware shall be controlled by one or more microprocessor-based
scene set controllers which shall provide all of the following facilities from a
single 3-wire data link (supplied and installed by the electrical contractor)
interconnecting the controller(s) and all associated scene selector outstations used
to initiate the required lighting changes.
The assignment of a discreet intensity level for any or all control channels in
each scene, a fade time for each scene, and all other assignable parameters shall
be by a hand-held scene maker programmer, which shall be plugged into any
scene set controller(s) or any scenes elector outstations.
Scene selector outstations shall have flush-mounting polished brass plates with
either 7, 9, 10 or 11 push buttons, each with LED tell back indication, to initiate
scenes and shall have a miniature jack socket to mate with a scene maker
programmer.
2.1.23 Push Buttons
Push buttons for lighting shall be general purpose, flush mounted, British Standard, standard
duty, non illuminated, watertight, rated 10 A, 220V or as shown on the drawings. Push button
stations shall be for normal ON/OFF operations.
2.1.24 Service Equipment
UL 869A.
2.1.25 Splice, Conductor
UL 486C.
2.1.26 Switchboard, Dead Front Distribution
NEMA PB 2 and UL 891.
2.1.27 Switchgear Assemblies, Power
IEEE C37.20.1.
2.1.28 Snap Switches
UL 20.
2.1.29 Tapes
2.1.29.1 Plastic Tape
UL 510.
2.1.29.2 Rubber Tape
Page | 20 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
UL 510.
2.1.30 Transformers
2.1.30.1 Liquid Filled and Liquid Immersed
IEEE C57.12.00, ANSI C57.12.10, ANSI C57.12.13, ANSI C57.12.27, ANSI
C57.12.70, IEEE C57.12.80, IEEE C57.12.90, IEEE C57.98, IEEE C57.100, and
IEEE C57.105, including transformers having mineral oil, silicone or high molecular
weight hydrocarbon dielectrics to be installed in an interior vault as shown.
2.1.31 Watthour Meters
Watthour meters shall conform to ANSI C12.1 and ANSI C12.10, except numbered terminal
wiring sequence and case size may be the manufacturer's standard. Watt-hour meters shall
be of the drawout switchboard type having a 15-minute, cumulative form, demand register
meeting ANSI C12.4 and provided with not less than two and one-half stators. Watt-hour
demand meters shall have factory-installed electronic pulse initiators meeting the
requirements of ANSI C12.1. Pulse initiators shall be solid-state devices incorporating
light-emitting diodes, phototransistors, and power transistors, except that mercury-wetted
output contacts are acceptable. Initiators shall be totally contained within watt-hour demand
meter enclosures, shall be capable of operating up to speeds of 500 pulses per minute with
no false pulses, and shall require no field adjustments. Initiators shall be calibrated for a
pulse rate output of one pulse per 1/4 disc revolution of the associated meter and shall be
compatible with the indicated equipment.
2.1.32 Wiring Devices
Wiring devices shall conform to British Standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GROUNDING
Grounding shall be in conformance with NFPA 70, the contract drawings, and the following
specifications.
3.1.1 Ground Rods
The resistance to ground shall be measured using the fall-of-potential method described in
IEEE Std 81. The maximum resistance of a driven ground shall not exceed 25 ohms under
normally dry conditions. If this resistance cannot be obtained with a single rod, additional
rods not less than 1.8 meters on centers, or if sectional type rods are used, additional
sections may be coupled and driven with the first rod to achieve the required resistance. In
high-ground-resistance, UL listed chemically charged ground rods may be used. If the
resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall, the
Contracting Officer shall be notified immediately. Connections below grade shall be fusion
welded. Connections above grade shall be fusion welded or shall use UL 467 approved
connectors.
Page | 21 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.1.2 Ground Bus

Ground bus shall be provided in the electrical equipment room. Noncurrent-carrying metal
parts of transformer neutrals and other electrical equipment shall be effectively grounded by
bonding to the bus. The ground bus shall be bonded to both the entrance ground, and to a
ground rod or rods as specified above having the upper ends terminating approximately 100
mm above the floor. Connections and splices shall be of the brazed, welded, bolted, or
pressure-connector type, except that pressure connectors or bolted connections shall be used
for connections to removable equipment. For raised floor equipment rooms in computer and
data processing centers, a minimum of 4, one at each corner, multiple grounding systems
shall be furnished. Connections shall be bolted type in lieu of thermoweld, so they can be
changed as required by additions and/or alterations.
3.1.3 Grounding Conductors
A green ground wire shall be furnished regardless of the type of conduit. All equipment
grounding conductors, including metallic raceway systems used as such, shall be bonded or
joined together in each wiring box or equipment enclosure. Metallic raceways and
grounding conductors shall be checked to assure that they are wired or bonded into a
common junction. Metallic boxes and enclosures, if used, shall also be bonded to these
grounding conductors by an approved means per NFPA 70. When boxes for receptacles,
switches, or other utilization devices are installed, any designated grounding terminal on
these devices shall also be bonded to the equipment grounding conductor junction with a
short jumper.
3.2
WIRING METHODS
3.2.1 General Requirements
Unless otherwise indicated, wiring shall consist of insulated conductors installed in rigid
zinc-coated steel conduit, rigid plastic conduit or intermediate metal conduit.
3.2.2 Conduit and Tubing Systems
Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) conduits shall be used in slabs, walls and under tiles as
permitted by NFPA 70.
Minimum size of raceways shall be 20 mm. Conduits for feeders and branch circuit wires
within building, recessed in concrete and CMU shall be rigid PVC. All surface-mounted and
exposed conduits, including above suspended ceiling and in dry walls, within buildings,
electrical and communication rooms shall be EMT except hazardous and roof areas where rigid
galvanized steel conduits shall be used. Cable trays shall be used where shown on drawings.
Nonmetallic conduit and tubing may be used only in damp, wet or corrosive locations when
permitted by NFPA 70 and the conduit or tubing system is provided with appropriate boxes,
covers, clamps, screws or other appropriate type of fittings. Penetrations of above grade
floor slabs, time-rated partitions and fire walls shall be fire-stopped in accordance with
Section 07270 FIRESTOPPING. Raceways shall not be installed under the fire pits of
boilers and furnaces and shall be kept 150 mm away from parallel runs of flues, steam pipes
and hot-water pipes. Raceways shall be concealed within finished walls, ceilings, and floors
unless otherwise shown. Raceways crossing structural expansion joints shall be provided
with suitable expansion fittings or other suitable means to compensate for the building
Page | 22 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
expansion and contraction and to provide for continuity of grounding. Wiring installed in
underfloor raceway system shall be suitable for installation in wet locations.
3.2.2.1 Below Slab-on-Grade or in the Ground
Electrical wiring below slab-on-grade shall be protected by a conduit system.
Conduit passing vertically through slabs-on-grade shall be rigid galvanized steel
conduits installed below slab-on-grade or in the earth shall be field wrapped with
0.254 mm (0.010 inch) thick pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent
overlay, or shall have a factory-applied polyvinyl chloride, plastic resin, or epoxy
coating system.
3.2.2.2 Installing in Slabs Including Slabs on Grade
Conduits shall be installed as close to the middle of concrete slabs as practicable
without disturbing the reinforcement. Outside diameter shall not exceed 1/3 of the
slab thickness and conduits shall be spaced not closer than 3 diameters on centers
except at cabinet locations where the slab thickness shall be increased as approved
by the Contracting Officer.
3.2.2.3 Exposed Raceways
Exposed raceways shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural
members, or intersections of vertical planes and ceilings. Raceways under raised
floors and above accessible ceilings shall be considered as exposed installations in
accordance with NFPA 70 definitions.
3.2.2.4 Changes in Direction of Runs
Changes in direction of runs shall be made with symmetrical bends or cast-metal
fittings. Field-made bends and offsets shall be made with an approved hickey or
conduit-bending machine. Crushed or deformed raceways shall not be installed.
Trapped raceways in damp and wet locations shall be avoided where possible. Care
shall be taken to prevent the lodgment of plaster, dirt, or trash in raceways, boxes,
fittings and equipment during the course of construction. Clogged raceways shall be
entirely freed of obstructions or shall be replaced.
3.2.2.5 Supports
Metallic conduits and tubing shall be securely and rigidly fastened in place at
intervals of not more than 3 meters and within 900 mm of boxes, cabinets, and
fittings, with approved pipe straps, wall brackets, conduit clamps, conduit hangers,
threaded C-clamps, or ceiling trapeze. C-clamps or beam clamps shall have strap or
rod-type retainers. Rigid plastic conduits shall be supported as indicated above,
except that they will be supported at intervals as indicated in NFPA 70. Loads and
supports shall be coordinated with supporting structure to prevent damage or
deformation to the structures, but no load shall be applied to joist bridging.
Fastenings shall be by wood screws or screw-type nails to wood; by toggle bolts on
hollow masonry units; by expansion bolts on concrete or brick; by machine screws,
welded threaded studs, heat-treated or spring-steel-tension clamps on steel work.
Nail-type nylon anchors or threaded studs driven in by a powder charge and
Page | 23 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in lieu of expansion bolts or
machine screws. Raceways or pipe straps shall not be welded to steel structures.
Holes cut to a depth of more than 40 mm in reinforced concrete beams or to a depth
of more than 20 mm in concrete joists shall avoid cutting the main reinforcing bars.
Holes not used shall be filled. In partitions of light steel construction, sheet-metal
screws may be used. Conduit shall not be supported using wire or nylon ties.
Raceways shall be installed as a complete system and be independently supported
from the structure. Upper raceways shall not be the support of lower raceways.
Supporting means will not be shared between electrical raceways and mechanical
piping or ducts and shall not be fastened to hung ceiling supports. Conduits shall be
fastened to all sheet-metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required by
the NFPA 70, where insulating bushings are used, and where bushings cannot be
brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise, a single locknut and bushing may
be used. Threadless fittings for electrical metallic tubing shall be of a type approved
for the conditions encountered. A pull wire shall be inserted in each empty raceway
in which wiring is to be installed by others if the raceway is more than 15 meters in
length and contains more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends, or where the
raceway is more than 45 meters in length. The pull wire shall be of No. 14 AWG
zinc-coated steel, or of plastic having not less than 1.4 MPa (200 psi) tensile
strength. Not less than 254 mm (10 inches) of slack shall be left at each end of the
pull wire. Additional support for horizontal runs is not required when EMT rests on
steel stud cutouts.
3.2.2.6 Exposed Risers
Exposed risers in wire shafts of multistory buildings shall be supported by U-clamp
hangers at each floor level, and at intervals not to exceed 3 meters.
3.2.2.7 Exposed Lengths of Conduit, Over 600 Volts
Exposed lengths of conduit containing power conductors operating at more than 600
volts shall have two red bands 50 mm wide spaced 200 mm apart painted near each
coupling; the intervening space between the red bands shall be painted white, and
on the white space the voltage shall be stenciled in black.
3.2.2.8 Communications Raceways
Communications raceways indicated shall be installed in accordance with the
previous requirements for conduit and tubing and with the additional requirements
that no length of run shall exceed 15 meters for 15 mm and 20 mm sizes, and 30
meters for 25 mm or larger sizes, and shall not contain more than two 90-degree
bends or the equivalent. Additional pull or junction boxes shall be installed to
comply with these limitations whether or not indicated. Inside radii of bends in
conduits of 25 mm size or larger shall be not less than ten times the nominal
diameter.
3.2.3 Cable Systems
Cables shall be installed concealed behind ceiling or wall finish where practicable. Cables
shall be threaded through holes bored on the approximate centerline of wood members;
notching of surfaces will not be permitted. Sleeves shall be provided through bond beams of
Page | 24 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
masonry-block walls for threading cables through hollow spaces. Exposed cables shall be
installed parallel or at right angles to walls or structural members. In rooms or areas not
provided with ceiling or wall finish, cables and outlets shall be installed so that a room finish
may be applied in the future without disturbing the cables or resetting the boxes. Exposed
nonmetallic-sheathed cables less than 1.2 meters above floors shall be protected from
mechanical injury by installation in conduit or tubing.
3.2.6 Cable Trays

Cable trays shall be supported in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer
but at no more than 1.8 meter intervals. Contact surfaces of aluminum connections shall be
coated with an antioxidant compound prior to assembly. Adjacent cable tray sections shall
be bonded together by connector plates of an identical type as the cable tray sections. The
Contractor shall submit the manufacturer's certification that the cable tray system meets all
requirements of Article 318 of NFPA 70. The cable tray shall be installed and grounded in
accordance with the provisions of Article 318 of NFPA 70. Data submitted by the
Contractor shall demonstrate that the completed cable tray systems will comply with the
specified requirements. Cable trays shall terminate 250 mm from both sides of smoke and
fire partitions. Conductors run through smoke and fire partitions shall be installed in 101.6
mm (4 inch) rigid steel conduits with grounding bushings, extending 300 mm beyond each
side of the partitions. The installation shall be sealed to preserve the smoke and fire rating of
the partitions. Penetrations shall be fire-stopped in accordance with Section 07270
FIRESTOPPING.
3.2.7 Cables and Conductors
Wire connectors of insulating material or solderless pressure connectors properly taped shall
be utilized for all splices.
3.2.7.1 Sizes
All sizes are based on copper conductors. Branch-circuit conductors shall be not
smaller than No. 12 AWG (4mm2). Conductors for branch circuits of 220 volts
more than 70 meters long, from panel to load center, shall be no smaller than No.
10 AWG (6mm2). Class 1 remote control and signal circuit conductors shall be not
less than No. 14 AWG (2.5mm2). Class 2 remote control and signal circuit
conductors shall be not less than No. 16 AWG (1.5mm2).
Higher temperature rated conductors will be permitted to be used, if the UL tested
temperature ratings for which the equipment in the circuit is marked are not
exceeded.
Conductor sizes for nonlinear loads shall be based on the use of minimum 75
degrees C insulated conductors for branch circuits and feeders and neutral
conductors shall be sized at 1.732 times the phase conductors. For branch circuits
individual neutrals may be provided for each circuit rather than oversizing the
neutral.
Page | 25 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.2.7.2 Power Conductor Identification

Phase conductors shall be identified by color coding. The color of the insulation on
phases A, B, and C respectively (for three phase) or phases A and B respectively
(for single phase) of different voltage systems shall be as follows:
127/220 volt, 3-phase: Black, red, and blue.
220/380 volt, 3-phase: Red, yellow, and blue.
Conductor phase and voltage identification shall be made by color-coded insulation
for all conductors smaller than No. 6 AWG. For conductors No. 6 AWG and larger,
identification shall be made by color-coded insulation, or conductors with black
insulation may be furnished and identified by the use of half-lapped bands of
colored electrical tape wrapped around the insulation for a minimum of 75 mm of
length near the end, or other method as submitted by the Contractor and approved
by the Contracting Officer. Conductor identification shall be provided within each
enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made. Phase identification by a
particular color shall be maintained continuously for the length of a circuit,
including junctions.
3.2.7.3 Control Conductor Identification
Control circuit conductor identification shall be made by color-coded insulated
conductors, plastic-coated self-sticking printed markers, permanently attached
stamped metal foil markers, or equivalent means as approved. Control circuit
terminals of equipment shall be properly identified. Terminal and conductor
identification shall match that shown on approved detail drawings. Hand lettering or
marking is not acceptable.
3.3 BOXES AND SUPPORTS
Boxes for receptacles shall conform to BS standards.
Boxes shall be provided in the wiring or raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires,
making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures. Boxes for metallic raceways shall be of
the cast-metal hub type when located in normally wet locations, when flush and surface mounted on
outside of exterior surfaces, or when located in hazardous areas. Boxes in other locations shall be
sheet steel except that aluminum boxes may be used with aluminum conduit, and nonmetallic boxes
may be used with nonmetallic conduit and tubing or nonmetallic sheathed cable system, when
permitted by NFPA 70. In partitions of light steel construction bar hangers with 25 mm long studs,
mounted between metal wall studs or metal stud "C" brackets snapped on and tab-locked to metal
wall studs, shall be used to secure boxes to the building structure. When "C" brackets are used,
additional box support shall be provided on the side of the box opposite the brackets. The edges of
boxes for electrical devices shall be flush with the finished surfaces in gypsum and plasterboard
installations. Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures shall be not less than 100 mm square except
smaller boxes may be installed as required by fixture configuration, as approved. Boxes installed for
concealed wiring shall be provided with suitable extension rings or plaster covers, as required. The
bottom of boxes installed in masonry-block walls for concealed wiring shall be flush with the top of
a block to minimize cutting of blocks, and boxes shall be located horizontally to avoid cutting webs
of block. Indicated elevations are approximate, except where minimum mounting heights for
hazardous areas are required by NFPA 70. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes for wall switches shall
Page | 26 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
be mounted 1.2 meters above finished floors. Switch and outlet boxes on opposite sides of fire rated
walls shall be separated by a minimum horizontal distance of 600 mm. Cast-metal boxes installed
in wet locations and boxes installed flush with the outside of exterior surfaces shall be gasketed.
Separate boxes shall be provided for flush or recessed fixtures when required by the fixture terminal
operating temperature, and fixtures shall be readily removable for access to the boxes unless ceiling
access panels are provided. Boxes and supports shall be fastened to wood with wood screws or
screw-type nails of equal holding strength, with bolts and metal expansion shields on concrete or
brick, with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and with machine screws or welded studs on steel
work. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lockwashers and nuts, or
nail-type nylon anchors may be used in lieu of expansion shields, or machine screws. In open
overhead spaces, cast-metal boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported except
where used for fixture support; cast-metal boxes having threadless connectors and sheet metal
boxes shall be supported directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. Hangers shall not
be fastened to or supported from joist bridging. Cast-metal boxes with 2.4 mm wall thickness are
acceptable. Where bar hangers are used, the bar shall be attached to raceways on opposite sides of
the box and the raceway shall be supported with an approved type fastener not more than 600 mm
from the box. Penetration of more than 38.1 mm into reinforced-concrete beams or more than 19.1
mm into reinforced-concrete joists shall avoid cutting any main reinforcing steel.
3.3.1 Boxes for Use with Raceway Systems
Boxes for use with raceway systems shall be not less than 38.1 mm deep except where
shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved. Sheetmetal boxes for other
than lighting fixtures shall be not less than 101.6 mm square except that 101.6 by 50.8 mm
boxes may be used where only one raceway enters the outlet. Contractor shall size the
telephone outlet boxes as required by the number, size and type of outlets specified and as
required by the outlets furnished by the Contractor.
3.3.2 Boxes for Use with Cable Systems
Boxes for use with cable systems shall be not less than 76.2 by 50.8 mm sectional boxes,
50.8 mm deep.
3.3.3 Pull Boxes
Pull boxes of not less than the minimum size required by NFPA 70 shall be constructed of
aluminum or galvanized sheet steel, except where cast-metal boxes are required in locations
specified above. Boxes shall be furnished with screw-fastened covers. Where several
feeders pass through a common pull box, the feeders shall be tagged to indicate clearly the
electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.
3.3.4 Clock Outlet
Clock outlet, for use in other than a wired clock system, shall consist of an outlet box, a
plaster cover where required, and a single receptacle with clock-outlet plate. The receptacle
shall be recessed sufficiently within the box to allow the complete insertion of a standard
cap, flush with the plate. A suitable clip or support for hanging the clock shall be secured to
the top of the plate. Material and finish of the plate shall be as specified in paragraph
DEVICE PLATES.
Page | 27 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.3.5 Floor Outlets

Floor outlets shall be adjustable and each outlet shall consist of a cast-metal body with
threaded openings for conduits, adjustable ring, or flange ring as appropriate and cover plate
with 15 mm or 20 mm threaded flush plug. Each telephone outlet shall consist of a
horizontal cast housing with a 25 mm bushed side opening. Each receptacle outlet shall
consist of a horizontal cast housing with a receptacle as specified. Gaskets shall be used
where necessary to ensure a watertight installation. Plugs with installation instructions shall
be delivered to the Contracting Officer at the job site for capping outlets upon removal of
service fittings.
3.3.6 Conduit Stub-Ups
Conduits stubbed up through concrete floors for connections to freestanding equipment shall
be provided with a short elbow and an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs,
set flush with the finished floor. Wiring shall be extended in rigid threaded conduit to
equipment, except that where required, flexible conduit may be used 150 mm above the
floor. Screwdriver-operated threaded flush plugs shall be installed in conduits from which
no equipment connections are made to suit the devices installed.
3.4 DEVICE PLATES
3.4.1 All wiring device front plates shall be British Standard and manufactured from metal
fused on to polycarbonate material and the metal finish shall be Matt Silver.
3.4.2 It shall be a requirement of the contract to reduce the amount of dust collection on
the face plate when installed such that:
3.4.2.1 The front face of the plates shall be chamfered away at the top and bottom
edges to touch the surface of the wall.
3.4.2.2 The cover shall clip via. Notches on to screw mounting support frame such
that the screws are not visible.
3.5 RECEPTACLES
3.5.1 Single and Duplex
Single and duplex receptacles shall be to German Standards and rated 13 amperes, 240 volts,
two-pole, three-wire, grounding type with polarized parallel slots as required. Bodies color
shall be matt silver and to match color of switch handles in the same room or to harmonize
with the color of the respective wall, and supported by mounting strap having plaster ears.
Contact arrangement shall be such that contact is made on two sides of an inserted blade.
Receptacle shall be side-wired with two screws per terminal. Back wiring of receptacles
will not be acceptable. The third grounding pole shall be connected to the metal mounting
yoke. Switched receptacles shall be the same as other receptacles specified except that the
ungrounded pole of each suitable receptacle shall be provided with a separate terminal.
Only the top receptacle of a duplex receptacle shall be wired for switching application.
Receptacles with ground fault circuit interrupters shall have the current rating as indicated.
Ground fault circuit protection shall be provided as required by NFPA 70 and as indicated
on the drawings.
Page | 28 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Receptacles connected to emergency power shall be color coded. A stenciled branch circuit
number shall be provided on face plate.
3.5.2 Weatherproof Applications
Weatherproof receptacles shall be suitable for the environment, damp or wet as applicable,
and the housings shall be labeled to identify the allowable use. Receptacles shall be marked
in accordance with British Standards for the type of use indicated; "Damp locations", "Wet
Locations", "Wet Location Only When Cover Closed". Assemblies shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. In damp,wet or outside receptacles
shall be connected with protection against current-GFCI.
3.5.2.1 Damp Locations
Receptacles in damp locations shall be mounted in an outlet box with a gasketed,
weatherproof, cast-metal cover plate and a gasketed cap over each receptacle
opening. The cap shall be either a screw-on type permanently attached to the cover
plate by a short length of bead chain or shall be a flap type attached to the cover with
a spring loaded hinge.
3.5.2.2 Wet Locations
Receptacles in wet locations must be installed in an assembly rated for such use
whether the plug is inserted or withdrawn, unless otherwise indicated. In a duplex
installation, the receptacle cover shall be configured to shield the connections
whether one or both receptacles are in use. Assemblies for a specific piece of
equipment which utilize a self-sealing boot or gasket to maintain wet location rating
shall be furnished with a compatible plug at each receptacle location and a sign
notifying the user that only plugs intended for use with the sealing boot shall be
connected during wet conditions.
3.5.4 Special-Purpose or Heavy-Duty Receptacles
Special-purpose or heavy-duty receptacles shall be of the type and of ratings and number of
poles required for the anticipated purpose. Contact surfaces may be either round or
rectangular. One appropriate straight or angle-type plug shall be furnished with each
receptacle. Locking of receptacles, indicated to be the locking type, shall be accomplished
by the rotation of the plug. Provide matching cord and plug set if equipment is not furnished
with cord and plug. In hazardous locations,provide male adapters,one for each socket outlet.
3.6
WALL SWITCHES
Wall switches shall be of the totally enclosed tumbler type. The wall switch handle and switch plate
color shall be matt silver to harmonize with the color of the respective wall. Wiring terminals shall
be of the screw type. Solderless pressure type having conductor-release arrangement will not be
acceptable. Not more than one switch shall be installed in a single-gang position. Switches shall be
rated 16-ampere 250-volt for use on alternating current only. Pilot lights shall consist of
yoke-mounted candelabra-base sockets fitted with glass or plastic jewels. A clear lamp shall be
furnished and installed in each pilot switch. Jewels for use with switches controlling motors shall be
Page | 29 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
green, and jewels for other purposes shall be red. Dimming switches shall be solid-state flush
mounted, sized for the loads.
3.7
SERVICE EQUIPMENT
Service-disconnecting means shall be of the circuit breaker type with external handle for manual
operation. When service disconnecting means is a part of an assembly, the assembly shall be listed
as suitable for service entrance equipment.
Service disconnecting means may also be main lugs ( disconnect switches). Main lugs shall be nonfusible, air-break switch disconnects, single throw, safety type, housed in separate metallic enclosure
with arc quenching devices on each pole. The operating mechanism shall be quick-make, quickbreak, independent of operator, with external operating handle mechanically interlocked to prevent
opening door unless switch is in open position. Switch disconnects is to have provision for bypassing interlock. Position of handle is to be positive and clearly indicated on cover. The enclosure
shall be general purpose sheet steel for indoor use IP 42, and weather-proof type cast-metal or sheet
steel for outdoor installations IP 65, unless otherwise required or shown on the Drawings. Locking
of operating handle is to be possible in open and closed positions.
3.8
PANELBOARDS
Circuit breakers and switches used as a motor disconnecting means, and not in sight of the motor and
the driven machinery location, shall be capable of being locked in the open position. Door locks
shall be keyed alike. Nameplates shall be as approved. Directories shall be typed to indicate loads
served by each circuit and mounted in a holder behind a clear protective covering. Busses shall be
copper.
Panelboards shall be circuit breaker equipped. Provide a minimum of 20 percent future in all
panelborads. For panelboards which serve a significant amount of non-linear loads, provide neutrals
sized at 1.732 the phase conductors.
3.9
POWER-SWITCHGEAR AND DEAD FRONT DISTRIBUTION

SWITCHBOARDS
Assemblies shall be metal-enclosed, freestanding general-purpose ventilated type and shall be

installed to provide front and/or rear access as required. Busses shall be copper. Assembly shall be
approximately 2.3 meters high. The Ampere Interrupting Capacity (A.I.C.) rating of the switchgear,
switchboards, and circuit breakers shall be based on the maximum fault current available.
3.9.1 Circuit Breakers
Circuit breakers may be stationary or draw-out low-voltage power circuit breakers,
molded-case circuit breakers, molded-case circuit breakers coordinated with current-limiting
fuses, or insulated-case, systems type circuit breakers. Where the circuit breaker is 1000A or
more it shall be required to include GFP as per NEC-230-95.
3.9.2 Auxiliary Equipment
Page | 30 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.9.2.1 Instruments
Instruments shall be long scale, 172.7 mm minimum, semiflush rectangular,
indicating or digital switchboard type, mounted at eye level.
a. Ammeter, complete with selector switch having off position and positions
to read each phase current.
b. Voltmeter, complete with selector switch having off position and
positions to read each phase to phase and phase to neutral voltage.
3.9.2.2 Instrument Transformers
a. Potential transformers shall be rated as required.
b. Current transformers shall be rated as required.
3.9.2.3 Control Switch
A control switch with indicating lights shall be provided for each electrically
operated breaker.
3.10
FUSES
Equipment provided under this contract shall be provided with a complete set of properly rated fuses
when the equipment manufacturer utilize fuses in the manufacture of the equipment, or if
current-limiting fuses are required to be installed to limit the ampere-interrupting capacity of circuit
breakers or equipment to less than the maximum available fault current at the location of the
equipment to be installed. Fuses shall have a voltage rating of not less than the phase-to-phase
circuit voltage, and shall have the time-current characteristics required for effective power system
coordination.
3.10.1 Plug Fuses
Plug fuses shall not be used.
3.10.2 Cartridge Fuses; Noncurrent-Limiting Type
Cartridge fuses of the noncurrent-limiting type shall be Class H, nonrenewable, dual
element, time lag type and shall have interrupting capacity as required for the short circuit
current available. At 500 percent current, cartridge fuses shall not blow in less than 10
seconds.
3.10.3 Cartridge Fuses; Current-Limiting Type
Cartridge fuses, current-limiting type, Class and interrupting capacity as required for the
short circuit current available. Fuse holders shall be the type that will reject all Class H
fuses.
Page | 31 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.11
UNDERGROUND-SERVICE CONDUITS
Conduits and conductors for underground electric-service cable, telephone cable and other utilities
shall be installed as required at the site to serve the building.
3.12
MOTORS
Motors shall be as specified in paragraph Motors, ac, Fractional and Integral Kilowatt, whether or
not motors are separately provided or included in equipment assemblies specified in other sections
of these specifications. Each motor shall conform to the kW) and voltage ratings indicated, and
shall have a service factor and other characteristics that are essential to the proper application and
performance of the motors under conditions shown or specified. Unless otherwise specified, all
motors shall have open frames, and continuous-duty classification based on a 40 degree C ambient
temperature reference. Poly-phase motors shall be squirrel-cage type, having normal-starting-torque
and low-starting-current characteristics, unless other characteristics are specified in other sections of
these specifications or shown on contract drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for
selecting the actual kilowatt (horsepower) ratings and other motor requirements necessary for the
applications indicated. When electrically driven equipment furnished under other sections of these
specifications materially differs from the design, the Contractor shall make the necessary
adjustments to the wiring, disconnect devices and
Branch circuit protection to accommodate the equipment actually installed.
3.13
MOTOR CONTROL
Each motor or group of motors requiring a single control and not controlled from a motor-control
center shall be provided under other sections of these specifications with a suitable controller and
devices that will perform the functions as specified for the respective motors. Each motor of 93 W or
larger shall be provided with thermal-overload protection. Polyphase motors shall have overload
protection in each ungrounded conductor. The overload-protection device shall be provided either
integral with the motor or controller, or shall be mounted in a separate enclosure. Unless otherwise
specified, the protective device shall be of the manually reset type. Single or double pole tumbler
switches specifically designed for alternating-current operation only may be used as manual
controllers for single-phase motors having a current rating not in excess of 80 percent of the switch
rating. Automatic control devices such as thermostats, float or pressure switches may control the
starting and stopping of motors directly, provided the devices used are designed for that purpose and
have an adequate kilowatt rating. When the automatic-control device does not have such a rating, a
magnetic starter shall be used, with the automatic-control device actuating the pilot-control circuit.
When combination manual and automatic control is specified and the automatic-control device
operates the motor directly, a double-throw, three-position tumbler or rotary switch shall be provided
for the manual control; when the automatic-control device actuates the pilot control circuit of a
magnetic starter, the latter shall be provided with a three-position selector switch marked
MANUAL-OFF-AUTOMATIC. Connections to the selector switch shall be such that only the
normal automatic regulatory control devices will be bypassed when the switch is in the Manual
position; all safety control devices, such as low- or high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts,
and motor-overload protective devices, shall be connected in the motor-control circuit in both the
Manual and the Automatic positions of the selector switch. Control circuit connections to any
MANUAL-OFF-AUTOMATIC switch or to more than one automatic regulatory control device
shall be made in accordance with wiring diagram approved by the Contracting Officer unless such
diagram is included on the drawings. All controls shall be 120 volts or less unless otherwise
indicated.
Page | 32 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.13.1 Reduced-Voltage Controllers

Reduced-voltage controllers shall be provided for poly-phase motors 14.9 kW or larger.
Reduced-voltage starters shall be of the single-step autotransformer, reactor, or resistor type
having an adjustable time interval between application of reduced and full voltages to the
motors. Wye-delta reduced voltage starter or part winding increment starter having an
adjustable time delay between application of voltage to first and second winding of motor
may be used in lieu of the reduced voltage starters specified above for starting of
motor-generator sets, centrifugally operated equipment or reciprocating compressors
provided with automatic unloaders.
3.13.2 Motor Control Centers
Control centers shall be indoor type and shall contain combination starters and other
equipment as indicated. Control centers shall be NEMA ICS 2, Class and Type as required.
Each control center shall be mounted on floor sills or mounting channels. Each circuit shall
have a suitable metal or laminated plastic nameplate with white cut letters. Combination
starters shall be provided with circuit breakers, fusible switches, or switches equipped with
high-interrupting-capacity current-limiting fuses. Motor control centers shall be provided
with a full-length ground bus bar.
3.13.3 Contacts
Contacts in miscellaneous control devices such as float switches, pressure switches, and
auxiliary relays shall have current and voltage ratings in accordance with NEMA ICS 2 for
rating designation B300.
3.13.4 Safety Controls
Safety controls for boilers shall be connected to a 2-wire, 120 volt grounded circuit supplied
from the associated boiler-equipment circuit. Where the boiler circuit is more than 120 volts
to ground, safety controls shall be energized through a two-winding transformer having its
120 volt secondary winding grounded. Overcurrent protection shall be provided in the
ungrounded secondary conductor and shall be sized for the load encountered.
3.14
MOTOR-DISCONNECT MEANS
Each motor shall be provided with a disconnecting means when required by NFPA 70 even though
not indicated. For single-phase motors, a single or double pole toggle switch, rated only for
alternating current, will be acceptable for capacities less than 30 amperes, provided the ampere rating
of the switch is at least 125 percent of the motor rating. Switches shall disconnect all ungrounded
conductors.
3.15
LAMPS AND LIGHTING FIXTURES
Ballasted fixtures shall have ballasts which are compatible with the lamps and shall comply with the
applicable provisions of the publications referenced.
Page | 33 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.15.1 Lamps
Lamps shall be delivered to the project in the original cartons and installed in the fixtures
just prior to the completion of the project.
3.15.1.1 Incandescent
Incandescent lamps shall be for 220-volts or 125-volt operation as per site
conditions unless otherwise indicated.
3.15.1.2 Fluorescent
Fluorescent lamps for electronic ballasts shall have standard cool-white color
characteristics except where color improved lamps are required by the "Design
Instructions" and shall be of a type that will not require starter switches. Lamps
shall be of the rapid-start type unless otherwise shown or approved.
3.15.1.3 High-Intensity-Discharge
High-intensity-discharge lamps shall be the high-pressure sodium type unless
otherwise indicated, shown, or approved.
3.15.2 Fixtures
Fixtures shall conform to the following specifications and shall be as detailed on Drawings
which accompanies and forms a part of this specification. Illustrations shown on these
sheets are indicative of the general type desired and are not intended to restrict selection to
fixtures of any particular manufacturer. Fixtures of similar designs and equivalent energy
efficiency, light distribution and brightness characteristics, and of equal finish and quality
will be acceptable if approved. In suspended acoustical ceilings with fluorescent fixtures,
the fluorescent emergency light fixtures shall be furnished with self-contained battery packs.
3.15.2.1 Accessories
Accessories such as straps, mounting plates, nipples, or brackets shall be provided
for proper installation. Open type fluorescent fixtures with exposed lamps shall
have a wire-basket type guard.
3.15.2.2 Suspended Fixtures
Suspended fixtures shall be provided with swivel hangers in order to ensure a plumb
installation. Pendants, rods, or chains 1.2 meters or longer excluding fixture, shall
be braced to limit swinging. Bracing shall be 3 directional, 120 degrees apart.
Single unit suspended fluorescent fixtures shall have twin-stem hangers. Multiple
unit or continuous-row fluorescent units shall have a tubing or stem for wiring at
one point, and a tubing or rod suspension provided for each length of chassis
including one at each end. Maximum distance between adjacent tubing or stems
shall be 3.1 meters. Rods shall be of not less than 4.8 mm diameter. Flexible
raceway shall be installed to each fixture from an overhead junction box. Fixture to
fixture wiring installation is allowed only when fixtures are installed end to end in a
continuous run.
Page | 34 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.15.2.3 Ceiling Fixtures

Ceiling fixtures shall be coordinated with and suitable for installation in, on, or from
the suspended ceiling provided under other sections of these specifications.
Installation and support of fixtures shall be in accordance with the NFPA 70 and
manufacturer's recommendations. Where seismic requirements are specified herein,
fixtures shall be supported as shown or specified. Recessed fixtures shall have
adjustable fittings to permit alignment with ceiling panels. Recessed fixtures
installed in fire-resistive type of suspended ceiling construction shall have the same
fire rating as the ceiling or shall be provided with fireproofing boxes having
materials of the same fire rating as the ceiling panels, in conformance with UL-03.
Surface-mounted fixtures shall be suitable for fastening to the structural support for
ceiling panels.
3.15.2.4 Sockets
Sockets of industrial, strip, and other open type fluorescent fixtures shall be of the
type requiring a forced movement along the longitudinal axis of the lamp for
insertion and removal of the lamp.
3.15.4 Emergency Light Sets
Emergency light sets not integral with fluorescent fixtures shall conform to UL 924 with the
number of heads as required. Sets shall be permanently connected to the wiring system by
conductors installed in short lengths of flexible conduit.
3.16
BATTERY CHARGERS
Battery chargers shall be installed in conformance with NFPA 70.

3.17
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
All wiring not furnished and installed under other sections of the specifications for the connection of
electrical equipment as indicated on the drawings shall be furnished and installed under this section
of the specifications. Connections shall comply with the applicable requirements of paragraph
WIRING METHODS. Flexible conduits 2 m or less in length shall be provided to all electrical
equipment subject to periodic removal, vibration, or movement and for all motors. All motors shall
be provided with separate grounding conductors. Liquid-tight conduits shall be used in damp or
wet locations.
3.17.1 Motors and Motor Control
Control equipment furnished under this section of the specifications, and shown on the
drawings, shall be connected under this section of the specifications unless shown or
specified otherwise. Except as otherwise specifically noted, automatic-control wiring,
signaling, and protective devices are not included in this section of the specifications, but
shall to UL 924 with the number of heads as required. Sets shall be permanently connected
to the wiring system by conductors installed in short lengths of flexible conduit.
3.17.2 Food Service Equipment Provided Under Other Sections
Page | 35 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Wiring shall be extended to the equipment and proper connections made thereto.
3.18 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION
A fault-impedance diagram, a load flow analysis or study, a short-circuit analysis or study, and a
power system coordination study shall be prepared to demonstrate that protective system after
devices have been properly calibrated, adjusted, set and tested. These data, including complete
descriptive and technical data of all protective devices, diagrams, and studies as required to ensure
complete coordination, shall be prepared in conformance with industry practices, standards, or with
other technical data approved by the Contracting Officer, and shall be submitted for approval of the
Contracting Officer in accordance with submittal SD-04, Drawings.
The LV network power coordination study shall achieve total discrimination between upstream and
downstream circuit breakers. All changes of circuit breakers rating and cables/ wires sizes due to the
power coordination study shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
3.18.1 Determination of Facts
The Contractor shall coordinate with the Contracting Officer for short circuit current
availability at the site.
3.18.2 Fault-Impedance Diagram
The diagram shall be prepared to reflect the system impedance of power sources available to
supply the building or facility, and the impedance of the new power system components for
the facility.
3.18.3 Fault Locations and Short-Circuit Current Availability (SCCA)
The fault-impedance diagram shall, as a minimum, show fault locations for each voltage
transformation and at each power distribution bus. The SCCA available at each fault
location shall be shown in tabular form on the diagram for a bolted line-to-line fault and a
line-to-ground fault.
3.18.4 Protective Devices
The time-current characteristics, features, and nameplate data for each existing protective
device, including fuses, circuit breakers, and protective relays shall be determined and
documented when necessary to ensure coordination between existing and new protective
devices. New protective devices proposed, including devices with fixed or adjustable
time-current characteristics and features, shall demonstrate proper coordination with existing
devices and new and related devices required to:
a. Minimize the extent of power outages by the operation of the protective device
nearest the load-side fault location.
b. Provide back-up protection on the supply-side of the protective device if the
protective device nearest the load-side of the fault fails to operate.
Page | 36 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
c. To ensure a minimum of a 0.2-second delay between the operation of the

primary and the back-up, or secondary, protective device unless otherwise approved
to prevent nuisance tripping.
3.18.5 Power System Coordination Study
The study shall include all data related to existing and new protective devices proposed as
such data relates to the nameplate data, time-current characteristics, and the fixed or
adjustable features of the existing or new protective devices. These data shall include:
a. The time-current characteristic curves published by the manufacturer of the
protective devices or equipment having adjustable time-current characteristics.
b. Data published by the manufacturer of circuit breakers or protective relays
which contain installation, operation and maintenance instructions for calibration,
adjustment, setting, and testing of the specific protective device.
c. Composite time-current characteristic curves for primary, secondary and other
related devices, as required to ensure coordinated power system protection between
existing and new protective devices or equipment.
3.18.6 Circuit Protective Devices
The Contractor shall calibrate, adjust, set and test each new adjustable circuit protective
device to ensure that they will function properly prior to the initial energization of the new
power system under actual operating conditions.
3.19 PAINTING AND FINISHING
Field-applied paint on exposed surfaces shall be provided under Section 09900 PAINTING,
GENERAL.
3.20 TESTS
After the interior-wiring-system installation is completed, and at such time as the Contracting
Officer may direct, the Contractor shall conduct an operating test for approval. The equipment shall
be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements of this specification. Continuity test
shall be conducted on the telephone wiring system. The test shall be performed in the presence of
the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for the
tests, and the Owner will furnish the necessary electric power. No part of the electrical distribution
system shall be energized prior to the resistance testing of that system's ground rods and submission
of test results to the Contracting Officer. Test reports shall indicate the location of the rod and the
resistance and the soil conditions at the time the test was performed.
3.21 ONE-LINE DIAGRAM
A one-line diagram with main transformer, building disconnect means, and all feeder
breakers/switches to all building panels shall be provided and shall be located at the building normal
and emergency disconnects shall be provided. Diagram shall be mounted under glass or shall be
plastic laminated. The breaker/switch identification on the diagram shall match nameplate on the
installed equipment.
Page | 37 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.22 ONSITE TRAINING

The Contractor shall conduct training course for operating staff as designated by the Contracting
Officer. The training period shall consist of a total 16 hours of normal working time and shall start
after the system is functionally completed but prior to final acceptance. The course instructions shall
cover pertinent points involved in operating, starting, stopping, servicing the equipment, as well as
major elements of the operation and maintenance manuals. Additionally, the course instructions
shall demonstrate routine maintenance operations. Two copies of a VHS format video tape of the
entire training session shall be submitted.
Page | 38 of 38
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 16528 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM

PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
GENERAL
REFERENCES
SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
SUBMITTALS
16528-2/14
16528-2/14
16528-5/14
16528-6/14
PART 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
PRODUCTS
STANDARD PRODUCT
BRACKET ARMS
POLES
POLE LINE HARDWARE
ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES
ILLUMINATION
LAMPS AND BALLASTS, HIGH INTENSITY
DISCHARGE (HID) SOURCES
LUMINAIRE COMPONENTS
LIGHTING CONTROL COMPONENT
PHOTOMETRIC DISTRIBUTION CLASSIFICATION
LUMINAIRES, FLOODLIGHTING
FIXTURES
LIGHTING CABLES AND DUCTS
16528-7/14
16528-7/14
16528-7/14
16528-7/14
16528-8/14
16528-8/14
16528-9/14
EXECUTION
GENERAL
ENCLOSURE PENETRATIONS
POLE INSTALLATION
LIGHTING
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
GROUNDING
TESTS
ON SITE TRAINING
16528-10/14
16528-11/14
16528-11/14
16528-11/14
16528-12/14
16528-13/14
16528-13/14
16528-14/14
16528-14/14
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
PART 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
Section 16528 Exterior Lighting System
16528-9/14
16528-9/14
16528-9/14
16528-10/14
16528-10/14
16528-10/14
16528-10/14
Page | 1 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 16528
PART 1
1.1
EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
GENERAL
REFERENCES
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND
TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)
AASHTO LTS-2
(1985; Rev 1986, 1987, 1988) Standard Specifications for Structural

Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals
ANSI C2
ANSI C78.1
ANSI C78.40
ANSI C78.1350
ANSI C78.1351
ANSI C78.1352
ANSI C78.1355
ANSI C78.1375
ANSI C78.1376
ANSI C80.1
ANSI C82.4
ANSI C119.1
ANSI C135.1
ANSI C135.14
ANSI C135.30
ANSI C136.2
ANSI C136.3
ANSI C136.6
ANSI C136.9
ANSI C136.10
ANSI C136.11
ANSI C136.13
(1993) National Electrical Safety Code

(1991; C78.1a) Fluorescent Lamps - Papid-Start Types - Dimensional and
Electrical Characteristics
(1992) Mercury Lamps
(1990) 400-Watt, 100-Volt, S51 Single-Ended High-Pressure Sodium
Lamps
(1989) 250-Watt, 100-Volt S50 Single-Ended High-Pressure Sodium
Lamps
(1990) 1000-Watt, 250-Volt, S52 Single-Ended
High-Pressure Sodium Lamps
(1989) 150-Watt, 55-Volt S55 High-Pressure Sodium Lamps
(1990) 400-Watt, M59 Single-Ended Metal-Halide Lamps
(1990) 1000-Watt, M47 Single-Ended Metal-Halide Lamps
(1990) Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc Coated
(1992) Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium
Lamps
(Multiple-Supply Type)
(1986) Sealed Insulated Underground Connector Systems Rated 600 Volts
(1979) Galvanized Steel Bolts and Nuts for Overhead Line Construction
(1979) Staples with Rolled or Slash Points for Overhead Line Construction
Line Construction
(1985) Luminaires Voltage Classification
(1989) Luminaire Attachments - for Roadway Lighting Equipment
(1990) Roadway Lighting Equipment - Metal Heads and Reflector
Assemblies - Mechanical and Optical Interchangeability
(1990) Roadway Lighting Equipment - Socket Support Assemblies for
Metal Heads - Mechanical Interchangeability
(1988) Locking-type Photo control Devices and Mating Receptacles Physical and Electrical Interchangeability and Testing for Roadway
Lighting Equipment
(1988) Multiple Sockets for Roadway Lighting Equipment
(1992) Metal Brackets for Wood Poles
Page | 2 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
ANSI C136.15
ANSI C136.20
ANSI O5.1
(1986) High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps in

Luminaires Field Identification
(1990) Roadway Lighting Equipment - Fiber Reinforced Lighting Poles
(FRP)
(1992) Specifications and Dimensions for Wood Poles

ASTM A 36
ASTM A 48
ASTM A 123
ASTM A 153
ASTM A 575
ASTM A 576
ASTM B 2
ASTM B 8
ASTM B 117
ASTM D 1654
(1994a) Carbon Structural Steel

(1994a) Gray Iron Castings
(1989a) Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
(1982; R 1987) Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
(1989) Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades
(1990b) Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality
(1988) Medium-Hard-Drawn Copper Wire
(1993) Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard,
or Soft
(1994) Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Testing Apparatus
(1992) Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive
Environments
COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS (CID)
CID A-A-341
(Rev A) Pigment, Aluminum, Powder and Paste

ELECTRONIC INDUSTRIES ASSOCIATION (EIA)
EIA 232-E
(1991) Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data

Circuit-Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange
FS L-C-530
FS RR-F-621
FS TT-P-641
FS TT-V-81
FS W-C-586
FS W-F-408
FS W-L-101/GEN
FS W-S-610
(Rev C) Coating, Pipe, Thermoplastic Resin

(Rev E) Frames, Covers, Gratings, Steps, Sump and Catch Basin, Manhole
(Rev G; Am 1) Primer Coating; Zinc Dust-Zinc Oxide (for Galvanized
Surfaces)
(Rev G) Varnish: Mixing, for Aluminum Paint
(Rev D; Am 1) Conduit Outlet Boxes, Bodies, and Entrance Caps,
Electrical: Cast Metal
(Rev E) Fittings for Conduit, Metal, Rigid (Thick-Wall and Thin-Wall
(EMT) Type)
(Rev H; Supple 1) Lamp, Incandescent (Electric, Large
Tungsten-Filament)
(Rev E) Splice Connectors
ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IESNA)

IESNA ARP-8
(1983) Roadway Lighting
Page | 3 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001

IEEE C62.41
IEEE Std 81
(1991) Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits

(1983) Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and
Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System

MS DOD-P-15328
(Rev D; Am 1; Int Am 2; Notice 1) Primer (Wash), Pretreatment (Formula

No. 117 for Metals) (Metric)

NEMA 250
NEMA FB 1
NEMA ICS 1
NEMA ICS 2
NEMA ICS 6
NEMA RN 1
NEMA TC 6
NEMA TC 9
(1991) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

(1993) Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and
Cable Assemblies
(1993) Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies
(1993) Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems
(1989) Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid
Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit
(1990) PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation
(1990) Fittings for ABS and PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground
Installation
NFPA 70

SASO 1318
SASO 1350
SASO 1351
SASO 417
SASO 1495
Luminaries Part 1: General requirements and tests.

High-pressure sodium vapor lamps.
Methods of test for high pressure sodium vapor lamps.
Electric luminaries for road and street lighting.
Steel lighting poles and their testing methods.
UL 6
UL 44
UL 98
UL 467
UL 486A
UL 486B
UL 506
UL 514A
UL 651

(1991; Rev thru Jan 1995) Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables
(1994; Rev Feb 1995) Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches
(1991; Rev Oct 1991) Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with
Copper Conductors
(1991; Rev thru Apr 1992) Wire Connections for Use with Aluminum
Conductors
(1994; Rev Jul 1994) Specialty Transformers
(1991) Metallic Outlet Boxes
(1989; Rev thru Dec 1989) Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit
Page | 4 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
UL 651A
UL 854
UL 870
UL 1029
UL 1449
UL 1571
UL 1572
1.2
(1989; Rev thru Dec 1989) Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE
Conduit
(1991; Rev thru Apr 1993) Service-Entrance Cables
(1991) Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings
(1994) High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts
(1985; Errata Apr 1986) Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors
(1991; Rev thru Jul 1994) Incandescent Lighting Fixtures
(1991; Rev thru Jul 1994) High Intensity Discharge Lighting
Fixtures
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.2.1
Lighting System
The lighting system shall be configured as specified and as required. The system shall
include all fixtures, hardware, poles, cables, connectors, adapters and appurtenances
needed to provide a fully functional lighting system.
1.2.3
Electrical Requirements
The equipment shall operate from a voltage source as shown, plus or minus 10 percent, and
60 Hz, plus or minus 2 percent.
1.2.4
Power Line Surge Protection
Transient voltage surge suppressors shall be provided for all electronic equipment. Surge
suppressors shall meet the requirements of IEEE C62.41, and be UL listed as having been
tested in accordance with UL 1449. Surge suppressor ratings shall be [as indicated]
[380/220 volts rms or as per site power supply, operating voltage; 60 Hz; 3-phase; 4 wire
with ground; transient suppression voltage (peak let-through-voltage) as specified by
equipment manufacturer. Fuses shall not be used as surge suppression.
1.2.5
Interface Between Lighting System and Power Distribution
Conductors shall include all conductors extending from the load side of the primary and
secondary power panels that serve assessment lighting equipment.
1.2.6
Nameplates
Each major component of equipment shall have a nonferrous metal or engraved plastic
nameplate which shall show, as a minimum, the manufacturer's name and address, the
catalog or style number, the electrical rating in volts, and the capacity in amperes or watts.
1.2.7
Standard Products
Materials and equipment shall be standard products of manufacturer regularly engaged in

the manufacture of such products. Items of equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment
that has been in satisfactory use at least 2 years prior to bid opening.
Page | 5 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.3
SUBMITTALS
an "FIO" designation are for information only. The following shall be submitted in accordance with
section 01300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Data
Equipment and Materials; GA.
Data published by the manufacturer of each item on the list of equipment and material, to permit
verification that the item proposed is of the correct size, properly rated or applied, or is otherwise
suitable for the application and fully conforms to the requirements specified.
Spare Parts; FIO.
Spare parts data for each item of material and equipment specified, after approval of detail
drawings for materials and equipment, and not later than 4 months before the date of beneficial
occupancy. The data shall include a complete list of parts, special tools, and supplies, with current
unit prices and sources of supply.
SD-04 Drawings
Lighting System; GA.
Detail drawings for the complete system and for poles, lighting fixtures, transformers, and
controllers.
a. Lamp strike and restrike times.
b. System startup and shutdown operations.
c. A typical zone layout showing light locations, isolux patterns, and lighting
ratios.
As-Built Drawings; FIO.
Final as-built drawings shall be finished drawings on mylar or vellum and shall be delivered with
the final test report.
SD-09 Reports
Operating Test; GA.
Test procedures and reports for the Operating Test. After receipt by the Contractor of written
approval of the test procedures, the Contractor shall schedule the tests. The final test procedures
report shall be delivered after completion of the tests.
Ground Resistance Measurements; GA.
Page | 6 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
The measured resistance to ground of each separate grounding installation, indicating the location
of the rods, the resistance of the soil in ohms per millimeter and the soil conditions at the time the
measurements were made. The information shall be in writing.
Lighting System; FIO.
A draft copy of the operation and maintenance manuals, prior to beginning the tests for use during
site testing. Final copies of the manuals as specified bound in hardback, loose-leaf binders, within
30 days after completing the field test. The draft copy used during site testing shall be updated with
any changes required, prior to final delivery of the manuals. Each manual's contents shall be
identified on the cover. The manual shall include names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each
subcontractor installing equipment and systems, and nearest service representatives for each item
of equipment for each system. The manuals shall have a table of contents and tab sheets. Tab sheets
shall be placed at the beginning of each chapter or section and at the beginning of each appendix.
The final copies delivered after completion of the field test shall include modifications made during
installation checkout and acceptance.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
STANDARD PRODUCT
Material and equipment shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
manufacture of the product and shall essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use
for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Items of the same classification shall be identical including
equipment, assemblies, parts, and components.
2.2
BRACKET ARMS
2.2.1
Galvanized Steel.
Poles shall be provided with bracket arms of the support arm style and of the length
indicated on drawings. Bracket arms shall conform to the design of the pole provided. The
bracket arms shall be capable of supporting the equipment to be mounted on it with the
maximum wind loading encountered at the site. Strength of bracket arms shall be in
accordance with ANSI C136.13. Steel brackets shall be galvanized. Wood bracket arms
shall not be used.
2.2.2
Floodlight Brackets
Floodlight brackets shall be coordinated with the floodlight support provided.

2.3
POLES
Metal poles shall be the pole manufacturer's standard design for supporting the number of fixtures
indicated. Poles shall be designed for a wind velocity equivalent to the 50 year mean for the area at
the base of the pole, for a wind gust factor of 1.3, and for the height and drag factors recommended
by AASHTO LTS-2. The effective projected area of luminaires and other pole-mounted devices
shall be taken into account in pole design. Poles shall have grounding provisions. The type of pole
shaft material provided shall not be mixed on any project. Grounding connection shall be provided
Page | 7 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
near the bottom of each metal pole and at each concrete pole anchor base. Scratched, stained,
chipped, or dented poles shall not be installed.
2.3.1
Galvanized Steel Poles
Poles shall be hot-dipped galvanized in factory in accordance with ASTM A123; thickness
of steel sheet and cross-section of pole shall be suitable for the height of pole and wind
velocity of 160 km/hr. Bases shall be anchor bolt mounted. Pretreatment for galvanized
steel poles shall conform to MS DOD-P-15328 and shall be prepared just before use.
2.3.2
Anchor Bolts
Anchor bolts shall be the pole manufacturer's standard, but not less than necessary to meet
the pole wind and ice loading, herein and other specified design requirements.
2.4
POLE LINE HARDWARE
Zinc coated hardware shall conform to ANSI C135.1 and ANSI C135.14, and steel hardware
material shall conform to ASTM A575 and ASTM A576. Hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A153.
2.5
ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES
The Contractor shall provide metallic enclosures as needed to house the lighting equipment.
Enclosures shall conform to NEMA ICS 6 and NEMA 250. Enclosures shall be provided with
lockable or padlock handles. Keys for lockable enclosures shall be delivered to the Contracting
Officer. The enclosures shall be as specified or as shown on the drawings.
2.5.1
Interior Enclosures
Enclosures to house lighting equipment in an interior environment shall meet the

requirements of a NEMA 12 enclosure as defined in NEMA 250.
2.5.2
Exposed-to-Weather Enclosures
Enclosures to house lighting equipment in an outdoor environment shall meet the

requirements of a NEMA 4 enclosure as defined in NEMA 250.
2.6
ILLUMINATION
2.6.1 General Lighting
Luminaires, ballasts, lamps, and control devices required for general area lighting,
including floodlighting shall be in accordance with Standard Detail No. 40-06-04, attached
to these specifications.
2.7
LAMPS AND BALLASTS, HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) SOURCES

2.7.1
High-Pressure Sodium
Page | 8 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Lamps shall conform to [ANSI C78.1350] [or ANSI C78.1351] [or ANSI C78.1352] [or
ANSI C78.1355]. Ballasts shall conform to ANSI C82.4, or UL 1029. High-pressure
sodium lamps shall be clear.
2.7.2
Metal-Halide
Lamps shall be made by a manufacturer with not less than 5 years experience in making
metal-halide lamps. Metal-halide lamps shall conform to ANSI C78.1375 or ANSI
C78.1376. Ballasts shall conform to ANSI C82.4 or UL 1029.
2.8
LUMINAIRE COMPONENTS
Luminaire components shall conform to the following: attachments, ANSI C136.3; voltage
classification, ANSI C136.2; field identification marking, ANSI C136.15; interchangeability, ANSI
C136.6 and ANSI C136.9; and sockets, ANSI C136.11.
2.9
LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT

2.9.1
Photo-Control Devices
Photo-control devices shall conform to ANSI C136.10. Each photo-control element shall
be a replaceable, weatherproof, plug-in or twist-lock assembly adjustable operation range
of approximately 5.4 to 53.8 lux. Luminaires shall be equipped with weatherproof plug-in
or twist-lock receptacle to receive the photo-control element.
2.9.2
Safety Switches
Switches shall be the heavy-duty type with NEMA Type 1 enclosures and shall be suitable
for operation on a 380 volt, 60 Hz, single-phase system. Switch construction shall be such
that a screwdriver will be required to open the switch door when the switch is on. Blades
shall be visible with door open and shall be of the quick-make, quick-break type. Terminal
lugs shall be coordinated with the wire size. Switches shall conform to UL 98.
2.9.3
Magnetic Contactor
Magnetic contactors shall be mechanically held, electrically operated, and shall conform to
NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2. The contactor shall be suitable for 380 volts, single
phase, 60 Hz. Coil voltage shall be 120 volts. Maximum continuous ampere rating and
number of poles shall be as indicated on drawings. Enclosures for contactors mounted
indoors shall be NEMA, Type 1. Each contactor shall be provided with a spare, normally
open auxiliary contact. Terminal lugs shall be coordinated with the wire size.
2.9.4Time Switch:
Shall be synchronous 24 hour dial time switch with spring reserve to control the operation
and switching sequence of lighting circuits. The time switch shall be rated 10 amps. at
voltage as shown on drawings and operated by a self-starting miniature synchronous motor
rated for operation at line voltage. Switch shall include a spring reserve mechanism
allowing up to 12 hours of operation in event of a power failure. The switch shall be
housed in dust-proof enclosure with a glass window.
Page | 9 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
2.10
PHOTOMETRIC DISTRIBUTION CLASSIFICATION
Photometrics shall conform to IESNA ARP-8.

2.11
LUMINAIRES, FLOODLIGHTING
2.11.1 HID
HID lighting fixtures shall conform to UL 1572.
2.12
FIXTURES
Standard fixtures shall be as detailed on drawings, which accompanies and forms a part of this
specification. Special fixtures shall be as indicated on the drawings. Illustrations shown on these
sheets or on the drawings are indicative of the general type desired and are not intended to restrict
selection to fixtures of any particular manufacturer. Fixtures of similar design, equivalent light
distribution and brightness characteristics, equal finish and quality will be acceptable as approved.
2.12.1 Accessories
Accessories such as straps, mounting plates, nipples, or brackets shall be provided for
proper installation.
2.12.2 In-Line Fuse
An in-line fuse shall be provided for each fixture, and shall consist of a fuse and a UL
approved waterproof fuse holder rated at 30 amperes, 600 volts, with insulated boots. Fuse
rating shall be as indicated.
2.13
LIGHTING CABLE AND DUCTS
Refer to Section 16416- ELECTRICAL WORK, EXTERIOR.

PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
GENERAL
The Contractor shall install all system components and appurtenances in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions, ANSI C2, and contract documents, and shall furnish necessary
hardware, fixtures, cables, wire, connectors, interconnections, services, and adjustments required
for a complete and operable system.
3.1.1
Current Site Conditions
The Contractor shall verify that site conditions are in agreement with the design package.
The Contractor shall report all changes to the site or conditions that will affect performance
of the system to the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall not take any corrective
action without written permission from the Contracting Officer.
3.2
ENCLOSURE PENETRATIONS
Page | 10 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Enclosure penetrations shall be from the bottom unless the system design requires penetrations
from other directions. Penetrations of interior enclosures involving transitions of conduit from
interior to exterior, and penetrations on exterior enclosures shall be sealed with rubber silicone
sealant to preclude the entry of water. The conduit riser shall terminate in a hot-dipped galvanized
metal cable terminator. The terminator shall be filled with an approved sealant as recommended by
the cable manufacturer, and in such a manner that the cable is not damaged.
3.3
POLE INSTALLATION
Pole lengths shall be according to the types of luminares fixed on them and the drawings.
Electrical cabling shall be provided to the light pole as specified in Section 16528. The mount
interfaces shall have ac power connected, and the pole wiring harness shall be connected to the
luminares. Light poles shall not be installed outside the site or inside the perimeter zone. Pole
installation shall conform to the manufacturer's recommendations, NFPA 70, and ANSI C2. Poles
shall be set straight and plumb.
3.3.1
Pole Brackets
Brackets shall be installed as specified by the manufacturer and as shown on drawings.

Mounting hardware shall be sized appropriately to secure the mount, luminaire, and
housing with wind loading normally encountered at the site. Pole brackets for floodlights
shall have the number of tenons indicated, arranged to provide the indicated spread
between each tenon. Where indicated on drawings, adjustable heads shall be installed on
the brackets to position the luminaires. Identical brackets shall be used with one type of
luminaire.
3.3.2
Steel Poles
Steel poles shall be hot-dipped galvanized at factory in accordance with ASTM A123.
After installation of steel poles, the exposed surfaces shall be painted with one coat of
pretreatment to a dry film thickness of 0.0076 to 0.0127 mm, one coat of primer each to a
minimum dry film thickness of 0.0254 mm, and one finish coat of aluminum paint to a
minimum dry film thickness of 0.0381 mm each.
3.3.3
Concrete Foundations
Concrete foundations shall have anchor bolts accurately set in the foundation using a
template supplied by the pole manufacturer. Once the concrete has cured, the pole shall be
set on the foundation, leveled on the foundation bolts, and secured with the holding nuts.
The space between the foundation and the pole base shall be grouted. Concrete and grout
work shall conform to Section 03300 CAST-IN-SITU CONCRETE. Concrete shall be 30
MPa at 28 days.
3.3.4
Galvanized Steel, Pole Installation
Poles shall be mounted on cast-in-place or power-installed screw foundations. Conduit

elbows shall be provided for cable entrances into pole interiors.
3.3.4.1 Cast-In-Place Foundations
Page | 11 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Concrete foundations, shall have anchor bolts accurately set in foundations using
templates supplied by the pole manufacturer. Concrete work and grouting is
specified in Section 03300 CAST-IN-SITU CONCRETE. After the concrete has
cured, pole anchor bases shall be set on foundations and leveled by shimming
between anchor bases and foundations or by setting anchor bases on leveling nuts
and grouting. Poles shall be set plumb. Anchor bolts shall be the manufactures
standard, and not less than necessary to meet the pole wind loading and other
specified design requirements.
3.3.4.2 Power-Installed Screw Foundations
Power-installed screw foundations having the required strength mounting bolt, and
top plate dimensions may be utilized. Screw foundations shall be of at least 6.4
mm thick structural steel conforming to ASTM A 36 and hot-dip galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A 123. Conduit slots in screw foundation shafts and top
plates shall be marked to indicate orientation. Design calculations indicating
adequate strength shall be approved before installation of any screw foundation is
permitted.
3.4
LIGHTING
3.4.1
Lamps
Lamps of the proper type, wattage, and voltage rating shall be delivered to the project in
the original containers and installed in the fixtures just before completion of the project.
3.4.2
Fixture Installation
Standard fixtures shall be installed as detailed on drawings, which accompanies and forms
a part of this specification. Special fixtures shall be as indicated on drawings. Illustrations
shown on these sheets or on the drawings are indicative of the general type desired and are
not intended to restrict selection of fixtures to any particular manufacturer. Fixtures of
similar design, equivalent light-distribution and brightness characteristics, and equal finish
and quality will be acceptable as approved.
3.4.2.1 Accessories
Accessories such as straps, mounting plates, nipples, or brackets shall be installed
as required for proper installation.
3.4.2.2 In-Line Fuses
An in-line fuse shall be provided for each fixture.
3.5
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
Page | 12 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.5.1
Photo-Control
Lighting luminaires shall be controlled in banks by a single photo-control element mounted

within each bank.
3.5.3
Magnetic Contactors
Terminal lugs shall be coordinated with the wire size. Switches shall be securely fastened
to the supporting structure or wall using not less than four 6.4 mm bolts. The use of sheet
metal screws will not be allowed.
3.6
GROUNDING
Grounding shall be in conformance with NFPA 70, the contract drawings, and the following.
Grounding conductors shall be soft-drawn, stranded copper. Ground rods shall be driven into the
earth so that after the installation is complete, the top of the ground rod will be approximately 300
mm below finished grade, except in handholes. But grounds shall not be used.
3.6.1
Ground Rods and Pole Butt Electrodes
The resistance to ground shall be measured using the fall-of-potential method described in
IEEE Std 81. The maximum resistance of a driven ground rod shall not exceed 25 ohms
under normally dry conditions. Whenever the required ground resistance is not met,
additional electrodes shall be provided as indicated, to achieve the specified ground
resistance. The additional electrodes shall be a single extension-type rod, 19.1 mm
diameter, up to 9.1 m long, coupled and driven with the first rod. In high ground resistance,
UL listed chemically charged ground rods may be used. If the resultant resistance exceeds
25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall, the Contracting Officer shall be
notified immediately. Connections below grade shall be fusion welded. Connections above
grade shall be fusion welded or shall use UL 467 approved connectors.
3.6.2
Items to be Grounded
Ground conductors, metallic conduits, junction boxes, and noncurrent-carrying metallic

parts of equipment shall be grounded. Connections above grade shall be made with
solderless connectors, and those below grade shall be made by a fusion-welding process.
3.6.3
Metal Cable Boxes
Metal cable boxes for direct-burial cable shall be connected to adjacent ground rods by
wires with current-carrying capacities of at least 20 percent of the spliced phase
conductors, but not less than No. 6 AWG.
3.7
TESTS
3.7.1
Operating Test
Page | 13 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
After the installation is completed and at such time as the Contracting Officer may direct,
the Contractor shall conduct an operating test for approval. The equipment shall be
demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements specified. The test shall be
performed in the presence of the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall furnish
instruments and personnel required for the test, and the User will furnish the necessary
electric power.
3.7.2
Ground Resistance Measurements
The resistance to ground shall be measured by the fall-of-potential method described in

IEEE Std 81.
The contractor shall maintain a separate set of drawings, elementary diagrams and wiring
diagrams of the lighting to be used for "as-built" drawings. This set shall be accurately kept
up to date by the Contractor with all changes and additions to the lighting system. In
addition to being complete and accurate, this set of drawings shall be kept neat and shall
not be used for installation purposes. Upon completion of the as-built drawings, a
representative of the Contracting Officer will review the as-built work with the Contractor.
If the as-built work is not complete, the Contractor will be so advised and shall complete
the work as required.
3.8
ONSITE TRAINING
The Contractor shall conduct training course for operating staff as designated by the Contracting
Officer. The training period shall consist of a total 4 hours of normal working time and shall start
after the system is functionally completed but prior to final acceptance. The course instructions
shall cover pertinent points involved in operating, starting, stopping, servicing the equipment, as
well as major elements of the operation and maintenance manuals. Additionally, the course
instructions shall demonstrate routine maintenance operations. Two copies of a VHS format
videotape of the entire training session shall be submitted.
Page | 14 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 16721 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
PART 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
PART 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
GENERAL
REFERENCES
1.2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS
1.2.2 NAMEPLATES
1.2.3 KEY AND LOCKS
1.2.4 TAGS
1.2.5 VERIFICATION OF DIMENSIONS
1.2.6 COMPLIANCE
1.2.7 MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
SYSTEM DESIGN
1.3.1 OPERATION
1.3.2 ALARM FUNCTION
1.3.3 PRIMARY POWER
1.3.4 BATTERY BACKUP POWER
SUBMITTALS
16721-2/14
16721-3/14
16721-3/14
16721-3/14
16721-3/14
16721-3/14
16721-3/14
16721-4/14
16721-4/14
16721-4/14
16721-4/14
16721-5/14
16721-5/14
16721-5/14
16721-5/14
16721-5/14
16721-7/14
PRODUCTS
CONVENTIONAL FIRE ALARM CONTROL
PANEL (FACP)
REPEATER PANEL
SMOKE DETECTORS
HEAT DETECTORS
MANUAL FIRE ALARM STATIONS
ALARM BELLS
ELECTRONIC SOUNDERS
DUCT DETECTORS
FLAME DETECTORS
POWER SUPPLY
BETTARY CHARGER CONSOLE
CONDUITS
WIRING
16721-7/14
16721-7/14
16721-8/14
16721- 8/14
16721-9/14
16721-10/14
16721-10/14
16721-11/14
16721-11/14
16721-11/14
16721-11/14
16721-12/14
16721-12/14
16721-12/14
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
3.1.1 POWER SUPPLY FOR THE SYSTEM
3.1.2 WIRING
3.1.3 CONTROL PANEL
3.1.4 DETECTORS
3.1.5 ANNUNCIATOR EQUIPMENT
OVERVOLTAGE AND SURGE PROTECTION
GROUNDING
TESTING
TRAINING
16721-12/14
16721-12/14
16721-12/14
16721-13/14
16721-13/14
16721-13/14
16721-13/14
16721-13/14
16721-13/14
16721-13/14
16721-14/14
Section 16721 Fire Detection And Alarm System
Page | 1 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 16721
PART 1
1.1
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM
GENERAL
REFERENCES
ANSI C18.1
ANSI C135.30
Dry Cells and Batteries

Line Construction
FACTORY MUTUAL ENGINEERING AND RESEARCH (FM)
FM P7825
(1994; Supple 1) Approval Guide

FED-STD 595
(Rev B) Colors Used in Government Procurement

IEEE C62.41
(1991) Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits

NFPA 70
NFPA 71
NFPA 72
NFPA 72A
NFPA 72B
NFPA 72C
NFPA 72D
NFPA 72E
NFPA 72F
NFPA 72-G89
NFPA 90A

Installation, Maintenance and Use of Signaling Systems for
Central Station Service
(1993) National Fire Alarm Code
Installation, Maintenance and Use of Local Protective Signaling Systems
Installation, Maintenance and Use of Auxiliary Protective Signaling
Systems
Installation, Maintenance and Use of Remote Station Protective Signaling
Systems
Installation, Maintenance and Use of Proprietary Protective Signaling
Systems
Automatic Fire Detectors
Installation, Maintenance and Use of Emergency Voice/Alarm
Communication Systems
Installation, Maintenance and Use of Notification Appliances for
Protective Signaling
Systems
Page | 2 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001

UL-04
UL 6
UL 38
(1994) Fire Protection Equipment Directory

(1994; Rev Jan 1994) Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes
for Use with Fire-Protective Signaling Systems
(1993) Door Closers-Holders, with or without Integral
Smoke Detectors
(1989; Rev May 1989) Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective
Signaling Systems
(1990) Audible Signal Appliances
(1993) Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
(1993) Electrical Metallic Tubing
(1991; Rev thru May 1994) Control Units for Fire-Protective
Signaling Systems
(1983; Rev thru Jul 1993) Intermediate Metal Conduit
UL 228
UL 268
UL 464
UL 467
UL 521
UL 797
UL 864
UL 1242
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

NEMA 1985
Publication SB4, Training Manual on Fire Alarm Systems

BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTE (BS)
All applicable codes and standards including BS 5839, BS 5750 and BSEN ISO 9001/2
1.2
1.2.1
Standard Products
Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged
in the manufacture of the products and shall be items that have been in satisfactory use for
at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Equipment shall be supported by a service
organization that can provide service within 24 hours.
1.2.2
Nameplates
Major components of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style,
voltage and current rating, and catalog number on a non-corrosive and nonheat-sensitive
plate which is securely attached to the equipment.
1.2.3
Keys and Locks
Locks shall be keyed alike.

1.2.4
Tags
Tags with stamped identification number shall be furnished for keys and locks.
Page | 3 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
1.2.5
Verification of Dimensions
The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in
the field, and shall advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing the
work.
1.2.6
Compliance
The fire detection and internal alarm system and the central reporting system shall be
configured in accordance with NFPA 72. The equipment furnished shall be compatible and
be UL listed or FM approved or meets the requirements of EN 54 or listed by a nationally
recognized testing laboratory in accordance with the applicable NFPA standards.
1.2.7
Manufacturer's Services
Services of a manufacturer's representative who is experienced in the installation,

adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified shall be provided. The
representative shall supervise the installation, adjustment, and testing of the equipment.
1.3
SYSTEM DESIGN
1.3.1
Operation
The system shall be conventional fire alarm system suitable for number of zones as shown
on drawings. The system shall include fire alarm control panel, fire alarm bells, electric
sounder, manual fire alarm call points, charger and battery, smoke detectors, heat detectors,
flame detectors, fire alarm repeat panels, conduits wiring and all necessary parts to install a
complete fire alarm system. The system shall be electrically supervised type against both
short and open wiring faults in the detection circuit, the alarm circuit and the alarm and
fault relay coils. Activation of the manual call points or any of the automatic alarm
initiating devices shall sound the alarm, relating to the zone in which the station is
energized and shall give indication on the Main Fire Alarm Control Panel and repeater
panels. The maximum load of each alarm sounder circuits shall be rated at 2A (fused). To
enable short and open circuit monitoring and end of line resistor of 1K Ohm is required. In
each circuit, alarm sounders shall be connected in parallel and have polarizing diodes to
allow current to flow when the circuit polarity is reversed in an alarm condition. Each
detection circuit should be monitored for open circuit faults. This requires the remote end
of each circuit to be fitted with an end of line resistor of 2K2 ohm and also that there are
spur circuits wired from the main detection circuit.
The Fire Detection and Alarm System shall provide the following facilities as a minimum:
1. Detect automatically the presence of fire and give local audible and visual
warning.
2. Provide audible and visual warning upon the manual operation of a call point.
3. Automatically shutdown air conditioning plant in the event of fire and/or other
ancillary services, if required.
4. The system shall be capable of monitoring pre-alarm condition and setting
sensitivity of detectors.
Page | 4 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
All component of fire alarm system shall be product of a single manufacturer and shall
conform to the requirements of BS 5839: Part 1 1988 - CODE OF PRACTICE FOR
SYSTEM DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND SERVICING, EN 54, Loss Prevention
Certification Board, UK (LPCB), BS 5750 Quality Assurance Standard, Underwriter's
Laboratories (UL) and Factory Mutual (FM) or equivalent Codes.
The supply breakers for F.A. system shall be marked "DO NOT DISCONNECT, FIRE
ALARM SUPPLY".
1.3.2
Alarm Functions
An alarm condition on a circuit shall automatically initiate functions as described in the

cause and effect matrix shown on drawings.
1.3.3
Primary Power
Operating power shall be provided as required by paragraph Power Supply for the System.
Transfer from normal to emergency power or restoration from emergency to normal power
shall be fully automatic and not cause transmission of a false alarm. Loss of ac power shall
not prevent transmission of a signal via the fire reporting system upon operation of any
initiating circuit.
1.3.4
Battery Backup Power
Battery backup power shall be through use of rechargeable, sealed-type storage batteries
and battery charger.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
an "FI0" designation are for information only. The following shall be submitted in accordance with
SD-01 Data
Battery; GA.
Substantiating battery calculations for supervisory and alarm power requirements. Ampere-hour
requirements for each system component and each panel component, and the battery recharging
period shall be included.
Voltage Drop; GA.
Voltage drop calculations for signaling appliance circuits to indicate that sufficient voltage is
available for proper appliance operation.
Spare Parts; FIO.
Spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified, not later than 2
months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. Data shall include a complete list of parts and
supplies with the current unit prices and source of supply and a list of the parts recommended by
the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 year of service.
Page | 5 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Qualifications; FIO.
Qualifications, with verification of experience and license number, of a Registered Professional
Engineer with at least 4 years of current experience in the design of the fire protection and
detection systems. This engineer must perform the various specification items required by this
section to be performed by a registered Professional Engineer.
SD-04 Drawings
Fire Alarm Reporting System; FIO.
Detail drawings, signed by the Registered Professional Engineer, consisting of a complete list of
equipment and material, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts,
and installation instructions. Note that the contract drawings show layouts based on typical
detectors. The contractor shall check the layout based on the actual detectors to be installed and
make any necessary revisions in the detail drawings. The detail drawings shall also contain
complete wiring and schematic diagrams for the equipment furnished, equipment layout, and any
other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly
function as a unit.
Detailed point-to-point wiring diagram, signed by the Registered Professional Engineer, showing
all points of connection. Diagram shall include connections between system devices, appliances,
control panels, supervised devices, and all equipment that is activated or controlled by the panel.
SD-06 Instructions
Fire Alarm Evacuation System; GA.
Six copies of operating instructions outlining step-by-step procedures required for system startup,
operation, and shutdown. The instructions shall include the manufacturer's name, model number,
service manual, parts list, and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features.
Six copies of maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures, possible
breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guide. The instructions shall include conduit layout,
equipment layout and simplified wiring, and control diagrams of the system as installed.
Instructions shall be approved prior to training.
Training; FIO
Lesson plans and training data, in manual format, for the training courses.
SD-08 Statements
Test Procedures; FIO.
Detailed test procedures, signed by the Registered Professional Engineer, for the fire detection and
alarm system 60 days prior to performing system tests.
SD-09 Reports
Testing; FIO.
Page | 6 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to prove compliance with the
specified performance criteria, upon completion and testing of the installed system. Each test report
shall document all readings, test results and indicate the final position of controls.
SD-13 Certificates
Equipment; FIO.
Certified copies of current approvals or listings issued by UL, FM, LPCB, BS, ISO 9001/2, EN 54
or other nationally recognized testing laboratory, showing compliance with specified NFPA
standards. Upon acceptance by the Contracting Officer, the Contractor shall submit a Certificate of
Acceptance Test Report. The certificate shall be in compliance with NFPA 72, Section 1-7.2.
Installer; FIO.
The Contractor shall provide documentation demonstrating that its fire detection and alarm system
installer has been regularly engaged in the installation of fire detection and alarm systems meeting
NFPA standards for a minimum of three years immediately preceding commencement of this
contract. Such documentation shall specifically include proof of satisfactory performance on at
least three projects similar to that required by these specifications, including the names and
telephone numbers of using agency points of contact for each of these projects. Documentation
shall indicate the type of each system installed and include a written certificate that each system has
performed satisfactorily in the manner specified for a period of not less than 12 months following
completion. All such data shall be submitted 30 days prior to commencement of installation for
approval of the Contracting Officer. Listing of the installer under "Protective Signaling Services Local, Auxiliary, Remote Station Proprietary (UUJS)" of UL-04 shall be accepted as equivalent
proof of compliance with the foregoing experience requirements.
1.5
All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather,
humidity and temperature variation, dirt and dust, and any other contaminants.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
CONVENTIONAL ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP) PANEL
.
2.1.1 The system shall be exceptionally versatile offering a choice of zones of fire
protection as shown on drawings. The case of the control panel shall be constructed of
painted mild steel and its door shall be of painted mild steel, hinged at the side. The control
panel shall be provided with all necessary relays, resistors, fuses, transformer, rectifiers and
all other components to assure full and proper functioning of the system.
2.1.2 If the system is such that the removal of a trigger device (fire alarm initiating
device) from the circuit could affect the operation of other trigger devices a fault signal
shall be generated at the control panel.
2.1.3 Each alarm sounder circuit in the 1, 2 and 4 zone panels shall be rated at 750mA,
but the maximum alarm sounder current shall be 1 Amp distributed between the 2 circuits.
Each alarm sounder circuit in the 8 and more zones panel is rated at 1.5Amps with a
maximum alarm sounder current of 2 Amps distributed between the 2 circuits. Indicator
Page | 7 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
lamps shall be the LED type for long working life.
2.1.4
Standard features should include:
- One man commissioning
The commissioning made shall allow detectors in

an individual zone and sounders to be rest after
the alarm is initiated - enabling one man to carry
out the commissioning single handedly, zone by
zone.
- Auxiliary Contacts
Enabling other facilities to be

automatically operated when alarm occurs for
example Manned Center Links or extinguishing
systems.
- Zone Isolation
Allowing individual zones to be disabled for

maintenance or other works to be carried out.
- Comprehensive Fault
Including both open and short circuit

Monitoring
monitoring on zones and sounder wiring; battery
monitoring and processor fault monitoring.
- Zonal Fault LEDs
Enabling system fault to be quickly located and

rectified.
- External Evacuation Facility Enabling panel to operate sounders
2.2
The integral charger and batteries shall provide at

least 72 hours of standby, in case of mains failure.
- Repeat Indicator
Matching repeat units, enabling essential signals

from main panel to be repeated at other key
locations on site for greater safety.
REPEATER PANEL
2.2.1
2.3
- Integral Power Supply
The repeater panel shall permit the remote status signaling of fire alarm devices
and shall be connected to the main control panel. Zone indicators shall be provided
for each zone for the system being annunciated. Indicator lamps shall be LED type
for long working life.
SMOKE DETECTORS
2.3.1
Detectors shall be of the optical chamber smoke detection type. Inside the optical
chamber there shall be an infra red beam and photosensor, fitted at an obtuse angel.
Normally no light from the beam reaches the sensor, but when smoke enters the
chamber, the beam shall be scattered and reach the sensor, triggering the alarm.
2.3.2
The detectors shall have a pulsed light source to keep power consumption low and
Page | 8 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
enabling more detectors to be used per circuits. To reduce the risk of false alarm 3
pulses from the light source must reach the photosensor before the alarm is
activated.
2.3.3
The detectors shall be designed to meet BS 5445 Part 7. They shall be easy to
install with generously sized mounting base to accommodate fire resistant cable
and fitting standard 2" BESA box or 2 and 3 quarter inch square switch box. The
optical smoke detector shall have the following technical features:
Supply voltage
Supervisory Current (At 28V Nom)
Max. Alarm Current
Min. Current in Alarm Mode
:
:
:
:
16-32Vdc.
9A
75 mA
10 mA.
Nominal Alarm Voltage developed the detectors in Fired Condition at

limiting currents as shown.
10mA
20mA
50mA
75mA
:
:
:
:
5.5v
7.7v
13.7v
18.4v
Fire indication - White when

inactivated
Ambient temp. Range
Base Connection casing
IP Rating
2.4
:
:
:
:
Red LED on casing

0C-50C
ABS Engineering Plastic
32
HEAT DETECTORS
2.4.1
Detectors shall be suitable for most normal property protection purposes and
provide a high degree of protection in areas where the temperature is normally
fairly stable. They shall be useful for low ambient temperature areas where the
response of fixed temperature may be slower. Detectors shall respond to rises in
temperature and shall include a fixed temperature "backstop circuit" present at
57C for even greater safety.
2.4.2
Detectors shall have electronic thermistor detector elements guaranteeing high

accuracy. For excellent reliability they shall no moving parts. They shall have
sensitivity to BS 5445 Part 5 Grade 2 allowing them to be used at maximum
ceiling heights as specified by BS 5839 Part 1 : 1988.
2.4.3
The detectors shall be designed to meet BS 5445 Part 5. They shall be easy to
install with generously sized mounting base to accommodate fire resistant cables
and fitting standard 2" BESA box or 2 and 3 quarter inch square switch box. The
heat detectors shall have the following technical features:
Supply voltage
Supervisory current (At 28V Nom)
Maximum Alarm Current
Minimum Current in Alarm Mode
:
:
:
:
16-32V dc.
45A.
75mA
10mA
Page | 9 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
Nominal Alarm Voltage developed the detectors in Fired Condition at

limiting currents as shown.
10mA
20mA
50mA
75mA
:
:
:
:
5.5v
7.7v
13.7v
18.4v
Fire Indication - White when

inactivated
Red LED on casing
Ambient Temp. Range
0C-40C
:
:

22
Base Connection
IP
2.5
2.6
MANUAL FIRE ALARM STATIONS

2.5.1
The Manual Call Point shall be designed to provide total peace of mind to the end
user combined with ease of installation and maximum flexibility.They shall be
fully compliant with BS 5839 and kite marked. For safe simple operation in
emergency conditions no hammer needed but shall be provided with Plastic
covered Push to break glass. An Arabic/English Text is to be on the Break Glass
Unit. An extra layer of polycarbonate cover shall be provided to prevent false
alarms caused by accidental pressure on glass.
2.5.2
The contact assembly in the Manual Call Point shall utilize a direct mechanical
arrangement with only one moving part thereby operating after long periods of
disuse without the risk of non-operation or sticking associated with some forms of
micro switch. The Manual Call Point shall have the following technical features.
Case
Cable Entry
Centers for punching or drilling
Terminals
Double Terminals for cable to 4
Ratings
10 Amps at 250v ac
10 Amps at 12/24v dc
3 amps at 48v dc
Minimum Voltage : 8v or 8v dc
Maximum Contact Resistance :
ALARM BELLS
2.6.1
Bells shall be manufactured from sturdy die cast aluminum housing. Bells shall be
surface mounted, wiring shall be electrically supervised. Bells shall be 24v dc
vibrating type with a minimum 65db(A) or 5 db (A) ABOVE any other noise likely
to persist for a period longer than 30 seconds as required by BS 5839.
2.6.2
For external mounting weatherproof type shall be used to IP55. Inside the casing
the bell shall conceal a control microcircuit which significantly should improve its
sound output, while greatly reducing its current consumption allowing more bells
Page | 10 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
to be used on each circuit.

2.6.3
2.7
2.8
ELECTRONIC SOUNDERS
2.7.1
Electronic Sounders shall have a high impact black base molding with red horn.
Electronic Sounders shall be surface mounted, wiring shall be electrically
supervised.
2.7.2
Electronics Sounders shall be 24v dc,3 Sound settings(Continuous, Intermittent, or

warble) with a sitting of 100db(A) or 5 dB (A) ABOVE any other noise likely to
persist for a period longer than 30 seconds as required by BS 5839. For external
mounting weatherproof type shall be used to IP55. Electronic sounder power
consumption shall be 20mA.And-frequency output of 800 Hz
DUCT DETECTORS
2.8.1
2.9
Bells shall have no mechanical contacts so that it will go on for years without
adjustment. Bells shall be capable of being used for the widest variety of
applications - not only as a fire alarm but also for security and industrial signaling.
They shall also have a concealed fixing, preventing tampering or idle interference.
Duct Smoke Housing shall be installed On the return of the air duct units. Air
sampling tubes shall be installed depending on the duct width. Only optical smoke
detectors shall be used as a duct detector Refer to section 2.03 for detector
specification. Duct sampling unit shall be mounted in a visible location and easy to
reach for maintenance. Duct detector shall comply with EN 54 Part 7 And should
detect smoke for air speed of 1 to 10 m/sec.
FLAME DETECTORS
2.9.1
Flame Detector shall be Ultra Violate Intrinsically Safe (Ex) type, complete with
electronic relay output for alarm and trouble, automatic optical self-monitoring.
Reset module is required to reset the flame detector after operation. Flame detector
shall have the following specifications:
Operating voltage
Quiescent current
Alarm current
Range
Viewing angle
Ex class
IP rating
2.10
: 24vdc.
: 40mA appr.
: 90mA appr.
: 10 M
: 80 Deg.
: Eex d IIB T6
: IP 66
POWER SUPPLY
2.10.1 The complete power supply unit shall be contained in a ventilated sheet steel
enclosure designed to ensure adequate heat dissipation. All steel shall be treated to
be acid corrosion resistant. The enclosure shall be of painted finish.
2.10.2 The power supply unit shall comprise of the:
Page | 11 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
*
*
*
*
*
2.11
Constant potential charger.

Pre-charged battery of nickel cadmium or sealed lead acid cells contained
within the power unit or alternatively in a separate box.
Output fuses.
A general alarm contact for mains power failure indication.
Mains 'ON' condition by green light visible without opening the panel.
BATTERY CHARGER CONSOLE

2.11.1 Battery Charger console shall be provided where it is not an integral part of the
control panel and in which case it shall be completely self contained console
housing both batteries ( SLA) and automatic charger for dc power.
2.11.2 The charger shall be two rate constant potential unit maintaining the batteries fully
charged under all service conditions. After an ac power failure longer than 10
seconds a timer shall automatically switch the charger to its high rate mode.
Following the pre-determined high rate charge period, the timer shall automatically
return the batteries to float charge.
2.12
CONDUIT
2.12.1 Conduit and fittings shall comply with UL 6, UL 1242 and UL 797. Refer to
Section 16415 and 16416.
2.13
WIRING
Wiring for 220V ac power shall be No. 12 AWG minimum. Wiring for low voltage dc circuits shall
be No. 16 AWG minimum. Power wiring (over 28 volts) and control wiring shall be isolated. All
wiring shall conform to NFPA 70. System field wiring shall be solid copper and installed in
metallic conduit or electrical metallic tubing, except rigid plastic conduit may be used under
slab-on-grade. All conductors shall be color coded. Conductors used for the same functions shall be
similarly color coded. Wiring code color shall remain uniform throughout the circuit. Pigtail or
T-tap connections to alarm initiating, supervisory circuits, and alarm indicating circuits are
prohibited. T-tapping using screw terminal blocks is allowed for addressable systems.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
All work shall be installed as shown and in accordance with the manufacturer's diagrams and
recommendations, unless otherwise specified. Smoke detectors shall not be installed until the
building has been thoroughly cleaned.
3.1.1
Power Supply for the System
A single dedicated circuit connection for supplying power to each building fire alarm
system shall be provided. The primary power shall be supplied as shown on the drawings.
The power supply shall be equipped with a locking mechanism and marked "FIRE
ALARM CIRCUIT CONTROL".
Page | 12 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
3.1.2
Wiring
Conduit size for wiring shall be in accordance with NFPA 70. Wiring for the fire alarm
system shall not be installed in conduits, junction boxes, or outlet boxes with conductors of
lighting and power systems. No more than one conductor shall be installed under any
screw terminal. All circuit conductors entering or leaving any mounting box, outlet box
enclosure or cabinet shall be connected to screw terminals with each terminal marked in
accordance with the wiring diagram. Connections and splices shall be made using screw
terminal blocks. The use of wire nut type connectors is prohibited in the system. Wiring
within any control equipment shall be readily accessible without removing any component
parts. The fire alarm equipment manufacturer's representative shall be present for the
connection of wiring to the control panel.
3.1.3
Control Panel
The control panel and its assorted components shall be mounted so that no part of the
enclosing cabinet is less than 300 mm nor more than 2 m above the finished floor. All
manually operable controls shall be between 900 mm to 1.1 m above the finished floor.
Panel shall be installed to comply with the requirements of UL 864.
3.1.4
Detectors
Detectors shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 72. Detectors hall be at least 300 mm
from any part of any lighting fixture. Detectors shall be located at least 900 mm from
diffusers of air handling systems. Each detector shall be provided with appropriate
mounting hardware as required by its mounting location. Detectors which mount in free
space shall be mounted directly to the end of the stubbed down rigid conduit drop. Conduit
drops shall be firmly secured to minimize detector sway. Where length of conduit drop
from ceiling or wall surface exceeds 900 mm, way bracing shall be provided.
3.1.5
Annunciator Equipment
Annunciator equipment provided shall be mounted where indicated.

3.2
OVERVOLTAGE AND SURGE PROTECTION
All equipment connected to alternating current circuits shall be protected from surges per IEEE
C62.41 and NFPA 70. All cables and conductors which serve as communications links, except
fiber optics, shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end. Fuses shall not be used for
surge protection.
3.3
GROUNDING
Grounding shall be provided to building ground. Maximum impedance to ground shall be 25 ohms.
3.4
TESTING
The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer 30 days before the preliminary and acceptance
tests are to be conducted. The tests shall be performed in accordance with the approved test
procedures in the presence of the Contracting Officer. The control panel manufacturer's
Page | 13 of 14
WBRJ-12-C-0001
representative shall be present to supervise all tests. The Contractor shall furnish all instruments
and personnel required for the tests.
3.4.1
Preliminary Tests
Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be subjected to functional and
operational performance tests including tests of each installed initiating and notification
appliance. Tests shall include the meggering of all system conductors to determine that the
system is free from grounded, shorted, or open circuits. The megger test shall be conducted
prior to the installation of fire alarm equipment. If deficiencies are found, corrections shall
be made and the system shall be retested to assure that it is functional.
3.4.2
Acceptance Test
Testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72. The recommended tests in NFPA 72 shall be
considered mandatory and shall verify that all previous deficiencies have been corrected.
The test shall include the following:
a. Test of each function of the control panel.
b. Test of each circuit in both trouble and normal modes.
c. Tests of alarm initiating devices in both normal and trouble conditions.
d. Tests of each control circuit and device.
e. Tests of each repeater panel.
f. Tests of the battery charger and batteries.
g. Complete operational tests under emergency power supply.
h. Visual inspection of all wiring connections.
i. Opening the circuit at each alarm initiating device and notification appliance to
test the wiring supervisory feature.
j. Ground fault
k. Short circuit faults
l. Stray voltage
3.5
TRAINING
Training course shall be provided for the operations and maintenance staff. The course shall be
conducted in the building where the system is installed or as designated by the Contracting Officer.
The training period shall consist of 3 training days (8 hours per day) and shall start after the system
is functionally completed but prior to final acceptance tests. The instructions shall cover all of the
items contained in the operating and maintenance instructions.
Page | 14 of 14
W90BRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 16740 TELEPHONE SYSTEM

PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL
REFERENCES
OPERATING CONDITIONS
SUBMITTALS
PART 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
PRODUCTS
STANDARD PRODUCTS
NAMEPLATE
HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
POWER REQUIREMENTS
WIRING SYSTEM
2.5.1 TELEPHONE OUTLETS
2.5.2 TELEPHONE CABLES
2.5.3 STATION LINE CORD
2.5.4 TELEPHONE BACKBOARD
2.5.5 COMMUNICATION CABINETS
2.6
VOICE INSTRUMENTS
2.6.1 SINGLE LINE
2.6.2 ELECTRONIC
2.6.3 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
2.7
CABLE SPLICE KITS
2.8
BATTERY AND CHARGER
2.9
TEST EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS
2.10 MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)
2.11 TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINETS
PART 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
WIRING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
GROUNDING
TRAINING
3.4.1 PRE-OPERATIONAL TRAINING
3.4.2 USER TRAINING
TESTING
3.5.1 TEST PLAN
3.5.2 TEST REPORTS
3.5.3 TESTS
Section 16740 Telephone System
16740-2/13
16740-2/13
16740-3/13
16740-3/13
16740-5/13
16740-5/13
16740-5/13
16740-5/13
16740-5/13
16740-9/13
16740-9/13
16740-9/13
16740-10/13
16740-10/13
16740-10/13
16740-10/13
16740-10/13
16740-10/13
16740-11/13
16740-11/13
16740-11/13
16740-11/13
16740-11/13
16740-11/13
16740-12/13
16740-12/13
16740-12/13
16740-12/13
16740-12/13
16740-12/13
16740-12/13
16740-12/13
16740-12/13
16740-12/13
16740-12/13
16740-13/13
Page | 1 of 13
W90BRJ-12-C-0001
SECTION 16740
PART 1
1.1
TELEPHONE SYSTEM
GENERAL
REFERENCES
CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)
47 CFR 68
Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network
ELECTRONIC INDUSTRIES ASSOCIATION (EIA)

EIA/TIA 568 A
RS-453
RS-464
Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard

Dimensional, Mechanical and Electrical Characteristics Deferring Phone Plugs and
Jacks
Private Branch Exchange (PBX) Switching Equipment for Voice ban
Applications
INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (ICEA)

ICEA S-80-576
(1988) Communications Wire and Cable for the Wiring of Premises

NFPA 70

SASO 410
SASO 969
SASO 1346
Basic requirements for telephone sets.

Methods of test for telephone sets.
Low frequency cables and wires with PVC insulation and PVC sheath Part 2:
Telephone wire for inside applications.
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY (UL)

UL 50
(1992; Rev thru Nov 1994) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC ENGINEERS (IEEE)

Measuring Transmission Performance of Telephone Sets
Page | 2 of 13
W90BRJ-12-C-0001
INTERNATIONAL TELEGRAPH AND TELEPHONE

CONSULTATIVE COMMITTEE (CCITT)
All Relevant Publications
MINISTRY OF PTT, KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA (PTT)
Material Specifications
1.2
OPERATING CONDITIONS
The electronic equipment designed for office environments shall be rated for continuous operation under
ambient environment conditions of 10 to 30 degrees C and 35 to 65 percent relative humidity,
noncondensing.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Contracting Officer approval is required for submittals with a "GA" designation; submittals having an
"FI0" designation are for information only. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Data
Telephone System; GA.
Equipment calculations for such items as line cards, trunk cards, and memory. Traffic calculations
indicating the system capacity in hundred call seconds (CCS) of proposed equipment versus requirement
in CCS of proposed line and trunk capacities. Requirements for ac and dc power, battery, and charger
sizing calculations.
Spare Parts; FIO.
Data lists of spare parts, tools and test equipment for each different item of material and equipment
specified, after approval of detail drawings, and not later than 2 months prior to the date of beneficial
occupancy. The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source
of supply, and a list of the parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 year of service.
SD-04 Drawings
Telephone System; GA.
Detail drawings shall include a complete list of equipment and material, including manufacturer's
descriptive and technical literature, performance charts and curves, catalog cuts, and installation
instructions. Detail drawings shall contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams and any other details
required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit.
Drawings shall show proposed layout and anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment
relationship to other parts of the work including clearance for maintenance and operations.
System drawings showing final configuration, including location, type, gauge, and block and terminal
assignment of inside wiring, and floor plan layout for the equipment and battery room, after installation.
Page | 3 of 13
W90BRJ-12-C-0001
The ac power consumption and heat dissipation shall be shown under both normal and maximum
operating conditions.
SD-06 Instructions
Manufacturer's Recommendations; GA.
Where installation procedures, or any part thereof, are required to be in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these
recommendations shall be forwarded prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to
proceed until the recommendations are received and approved.
Operation and Maintenance Instructions; FIO.
Appropriate user flyers in a quantity of one per telephone plus 20 percent. Material suitable for use with
telephone directories. Six copies of operating instructions outlining the step-by-step procedures required
for system operation including description of each subsystem in its operating mode. Instructions shall
include the manufacturer's name, service manual, parts list, and a brief description of equipment,
components, and their basic operating features. Six copies of the maintenance instructions listing regular
maintenance procedures, possible system failures, a troubleshooting guide for repairs, and simplified
wiring diagrams for the system as installed.
SD-08 Statements
Test Plan; GA.
Test plan shall define all tests required to ensure that the system meets technical, operational, and
performance specifications. The test plan shall identify the capabilities and functions to be tested.
Training Data; FIO.
A schedule of courses to be taught and their duration, 30 days prior to the start of the training courses.
SD-09 Reports
Test Reports; FIO.
Test reports in booklet form showing field tests performed to adjust each component and field tests
performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon completion and testing of
the installed system.
SD-14 Certificates
Telephone Systems; FIO. Horizontal Cables; FIO. Backbone Cables; FIO. Telecommunication Outlets;
FIO. Communication Cabinets; FIO. Connecting Hardware; FIO. Instruments; FIO.
Manufacturer's certificate indicating compliance with transmission and reliability requirements. Where
equipment or materials are specified to conform to the standards or publications and requirements of
Page | 4 of 13
W90BRJ-12-C-0001
CFR, EIA, ICEA, and UL, certificates shall be provided attesting that the items furnished under this
section of the specification conform to the specified requirements.
1.4
Equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and
temperature variation, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
STANDARD PRODUCTS
Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
manufacture of the products and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design that has been in
2.2
NAMEPLATE
Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, model number, and serial
number on a plate secured to the equipment.
2.3
HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

2.3.1
2.3.2
Provide complete digital Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX) of capacity as

shown on the drawings, and shall include, but not limited to following:
PABX Switching Equipment

Operator's Consoles (Minimum 2 Nos.)
Main Distribution Frame (MDF)
Power Supply and Backup Power
Telephone Sets
Cables and Raceways up to MDF
Local Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Port with TTY, Remote O&M Port
with Dial-up Modem
software package
Power plant and Test Equipment
Special Tools
PABX Equipment:
A.
PABX Equipment: The Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX) shall be

manufacturer's standard 220V AC 60Hz complete with group switches and related
accessories and all other necessary works to complete the system as shown on the
drawings and specified herein confirming to Reference Codes and Standards. The
system shall have spare capacity of 25% and capability of extending the capacity by
50% at any time.
B.
The system shall be modular digital communication system of decenterlized control

supporting simultaneous voice and data transmission over single pair of wires.
Page | 5 of 13
W90BRJ-12-C-0001
Modular architecture shall consist of Line Interface Modules (LIM) and Group
Switch (GS). A LIM can function as autonomous system or part of larger network.
Each LIM shall contain all the processors, memory circuits, service circuits, line
circuits and trunk circuits necessary for call processing. Group switches shall be
provided for interconnecting LIMs, and shall be possible to support remote LIM
operation.
C.
PABX hardware shall be of compact design, i.e minimum of 16 digital/analog

extensions per PCB and 8 analog PTT lines per PCB with built-in filter. Each LIM
switch shall be totally non-blocking and of at least 1 Kilo time slot.
D.
The system shall be manufactured for optimum video conference system (of other
manufacturers) via highest performance using 384 KB/s data steams from the
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN2) signaling system suitable for Video
Conferences and employs intelligent data system allocation for vision, data and
control so as to ensure at least 8 KHz (analog equivalent) audio bandwidth. It shall
also be capable of higher data rates using Ethernet or satellite circuits.
E.
The system shall accommodate rotary dialing, Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
and Digital system telephone sets.
PABX equipment shall consist of a free standing cabinet(s) of modular construction
to facilitate maintenance, repair, replacement of parts, and expansion. Standard
commercial parts shall be utilized to the maximum extent possible.
2.3.3
F.
Network System: The switching system shall be digital on high-speed multiplexed

busses, industry standard 2 Mbps pulse code modulation. The equipment shall have
given a reliable and efficient service to a reputable user carrying similar loads for a
period of at least two years.
G.
The switching system shall employ stored program control (SPC). The modular
software executed by 32-bit processor shall control all telephone functions. The
software operating features and system configuration shall be changeable from
either the attendant console or from a maintenance console. The program must be
backed-up on built-in hard disk unit for quick reload after main power failure, i.e
reload shall not exceed 5-7 minutes. Program shall be easily updated as new
features are developed.
Line Requirements: As indicated on the drawings.
2.3.4System Configurations:
A. Public Exchange Trunks: Two-way trunks to public exchange using loop start seizure of
public exchange and Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) pulsing of selected numbers
to public exchange. Loop disconnected pulsing to PABX for direct inward dialing.
Trunks shall be universal in that they provide Central Office Interface, Direct Inward
Dialing (DID), Recorded Announcement and Paging Interface features in addition to
direct seizure of PABX attendant trunks on incoming side and Direct Out Dialing (DOD)
and attendant access outgoing. The system shall support integrated Automatic Call
Page | 6 of 13
W90BRJ-12-C-0001
Distribution (ACD) package to direct incoming calls to specific departments, should it be

required by the Owner in future. The system shall provided Message Intercept facility,
automated attendant function and voice mail system, if required by Owner. Dial tone will
be furnished from public exchange on seizure. Addition of unequipped trunks shall
consist of plugging in circuit boards and activating circuit by software change. Number of
trunk lines shall be as shown on the drawings. The system shall be capable of
connections with Digital Trunks. The System shall meet Saudi Telecom Practice N0.
3530.021.280.
2.3.5System Features:
A. All plug-in modules (cards) must be inspected by hand and by computer. All cards must
be subjected to a minimum of 100 hour full operating time as a burn-in procedure before
placing in the PABX for acceptance tests. All cards must be shipped to site either plugged
into the exact position used for factory acceptance testing or individually identified as to
specific position used for acceptance testing.
B. Station Restriction from Trunk: All stations may be denied the ability to place call on
public exchange and/or tie line trunk group.
C. All public exchange and PABX tie lines shall be transferred to pre-selected stations on
total PABX power failure.
D. Automatic Station Release with Lockouts: Any station going off-hook and not keying a
digit within 15 (max.) seconds between digits shall be released and transferred to line
lockout. Identification of station on lockout shall be given to attendant.
E. System shall support international interfaces, i.e ISDN, S0, PRI, BRI, DPNSS, ISDNQSIG, CAS and CCS.
F. Maintenance Capacity: Faults shall be identified by time and date diagnosed, circuit
board to be replaced and then all function or replaced board shall be retested.
G. The subsequent commissioning of additional trunk plates, station line circuit board to be
replaced and then all function or replaced board shall be retested.
H. Timed supervision to disconnect an extension line and apply lockout condition in the
following circumstances.
1. The extension is seized and after 15 (max.) seconds no digit has been keyed.
2. An incomplete number is keyed 15 (max.) seconds.
3. A fault condition on the extension line, e.g. a permanent loop.
I. Emergency blocking to provide a method of degrading service to non-priority
extensions in the event of a major system fault.
J. A first party release on extension to extension calls.
Page | 7 of 13
W90BRJ-12-C-0001
K. Extension Line Testing: The system shall allow manual testing of extension lines.
L. Trunk Line Testing: The system shall allow manual and automatic testing of exchange
trunks.
M. Traffic Measurement: The system shall provide a traffic measurement of exchange
trunks.
O. Fault Diagnosis: The system shall provide a means for detecting and diagnosing faults
automatically.
2.3.6
Basic Facilities and Requirements: The electronic key set shall be capable of functioning
either as a satellite of a PABX or for direct connection to the public telephone exchange.
It shall be suitable for executive/ secretarial systems, queuing systems and multi-line
groups for internal communications via local trunks and for external communications via
direct exchange lines.
The system shall include the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
Last number redialing

Music on hold with recorder
Hands free telephone sets
Paging interface
Manual Message waiting
Display the dialing number and intercom calling station number for some sets
Ring again
Follow me
Facilities of tie lines with other PABX
Facility of using extension lines as data lines for computer
Classification of extensions
Extension to operator calls
Outgoing calls
Booking outgoing calls
Operator to extension calls
Inquiry calls
Transfer calls
Conference calls up to 8 parties per call
Priority
Common night service
Universal night service
Individual night service
Direct in lines
Automatic call back
Individual call diversion
Individual call diversion when no answer
Flexible numbering
Line lockout
Choice of individual trunkline
Page | 8 of 13
W90BRJ-12-C-0001
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
Group hunting
Control of long-distance dialing
Direct speech connection
Call pick up
Grouping of trunk lines
Call waiting indication to extension
Common abbreviated dialing
Hot line
Trunk to trunk transfer
Calling names numbers display on digital instruments
Disa facility
Disa announcer
Alarm unit
Fault searching display
Internal power equipment
PCM
Incoming external calls with:

Camp-on busy
Break-in and forced release
Operator recall
2.3.7Additional Facilities:
2.4
1.
Push-button dialing
2.
Night time classification of extension
POWER REQUIREMENTS
The system shall operate on commercial 240 Vac, 60 Hz.

2.5
WIRING SYSTEM
2.5.1
Telephone Outlets
2.5.1.1 Outlet Plates
Wall and desk outlet plates shall come equipped modular jack labeled "voice". Modular
jacks shall meet the requirements of EIA/TIA 568 A. Modular jack pin/pair configuration
shall be T568B per EIA/TIA 568 A. Modular jacks shall be unkeyed. Faceplates shall be
provided and shall be matt silver in color, impact resistant plastic, single gang RJ12
module. Mounting plates shall be provided for system furniture and shall match the
system furniture in color.
2.5.1.2 Outlet Assemblies
Outlet assemblies used in the premises distribution system shall consist of 8 pin modular
jacks assembled into both simplex and duplex outlet assemblies as specified in this
Page | 9 of 13
W90BRJ-12-C-0001
section and as indicated on the drawings. The modular jacks shall conform to the
requirements of EIA/TIA-568 A, IEC 603-7 part 7, NFPA 70, FCC CFR47, part 68,
subpart F, and UL 1763.
2.5.2
Telephone Cables
2.5.2.1 Riser Cable and Outdoor Distribution Cable
Multi-pair unshielded cables shall be of solid untinned copper 24 AWG conductors,
polyethylene insulated, twisted into pairs, stranded into 25-pair groups. Cable shall meet the
requirements of ICEA S-80-576 and EIA/TIA 568A for Category 3. Core shall be protected
by a polyester film, longitudinally applied shield of copper, polyethylene outer jacket.
Underground outdoor cables shall be filled with petroleum jelly to prevent moisture ingress.
2.5.2.2 Horizontal Cables
Building wire from telephone terminal cabinets to outlets shall be Unshielded Twisted Pair
(UTP), 3pair (minimum), 0.6 mm with drain wire, Category 3 with solid copper conductors,
polyethylene insulated, PVC shielded, twisted into pairs.
2.5.3
Station Line Cord
Station line cord, between the telecommunications outlet and the base of the instrument, shall be
identical to the horizontal wiring. Station line cord shall be at least 1.8 m in length but no more
than 3 m in length.
2.5.4
Telephone Backboard
Plywood backboards shall be provided, sized as shown, coated on both sides with two coats of
insulating varnish as a minimum and painted with white or light colored paint. Plywood and paint
shall both be fire retardant.
2.5.5
Communication Cabinets
Cabinets shall conform to UL 50 or equal and have boxes constructed of zinc-coated sheet steel
with interior dimensions not less than shown on drawings. Trim shall be fitted with hinged door
and flush catch. Doors shall provide maximum openings to the box interiors. Boxes shall be
provided with 19 mm ACX plywood backboard having a two-coat insulating finish.
2.6
VOICE INSTRUMENTS
Instruments shall be listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.

2.6.1
Single Line
Voice instruments shall be of push-button dials, desk type, with 12 DTMF push buttons, and shall
have adjustments for volume control. Units shall be provided with plug-in, coiled, PVC covered
handset cords and 2 meters minimum instrument line cords.
Page | 10 of 13
W90BRJ-12-C-0001
DTMF sets shall be provided for all other areas, except for Commander Offices.
2.6.2
Electronic
Digital Executive Telephone sets shall be of push button dials, desk type, with programmable feature
keys, hands free operation, display unit, and shall have adjustable ringing/speaker volume control.
Units shall be provided with plug-in, coiled, PVC covered handset cords and 2 meters minimum
instrument line cords.
Digital Executive Telephone sets shall be provided for Commander Offices.
2.6.3
Attendant Console
Each console shall utilize construction technology of the same state-of-the-art of the PBX.
Attendant console is primarily used for answering and extending incoming calls, dialing out for
restricted stations and general assistance. The console shall have Visual Display Unit (VDU)
indicating station and trunk status when dialing. Audible tones shall be adjustable in volume level.
Console shall be digital and capable of operating with handset and/or headset. Operator console shall
be handwired over 2 wires only. .A handset and headset shall be included with each attendant
console.
2.7
CABLE SPLICE KITS
Cable splicing kits shall be as per cable manufacturer's recommendations. Closure sleeves shall be heatshrinkable types.
2.8
BATTERY AND CHARGER
Battery back-up shall consist of the required number of Lead Acid cells mounted on a steel rack; DC voltage
shall be as per manufacturer's written recommendations, but shall not be in any case lower than 48 VDC.
Battery shall be suitable for a minimum of 8 busy hours operation of PABX and all services in case of power
failure. Battery charger, of solid state circuitry, shall have 220 VAC input.
2.9
TEST EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS
The manufacturer shall provide all test equipment required to install the PABX and associated equipment.
The manufacturer shall provide all specialized tools required to install the PABX and associated equipment.
2.10
MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)
Shall be manufacturers's standard wall mounted MDF for equipment termination including carbon protection
on trunks only; capacity as shown on the drawings. MDF shall be compatible with telephone system
equipment.
Page | 11 of 13
W90BRJ-12-C-0001
2.11 TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINETS

Shall be manufacturer's standard fabricated of painted galvanized sheet steel with hinged door and locking
arrangements and shall be provided with terminal blocks. Weathertight cabinets shall be provided for external
installations. Size of cabinets shall be as shown on the drawings or as approved by the Contracting Officer.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
System components and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. Necessary interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable
telephone system shall be provided. Installation work shall be done in accordance with the safety
requirements set forth in the general requirements of NFPA 70.
3.2
WIRING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Wiring shall be installed in accordance with EIA/TIA 568A and as specified in Section 16415
ELECTRICAL WORK, INTERIOR. EIA/TIA 568A, Appendix C shall be considered mandatory. Cables
shall not be installed in the same cable tray, utility pole compartment, or floor trench compartment with
ac power cables. Cables not installed in conduit or wire ways shall be properly secured and neat in
appearance.
3.3
GROUNDING
The telecommunications equipment ground shall be connected to the electrical service equipment ground
following the most direct route utilizing a minimum No. 6 gauge copper wire conductor. Resistance of the
conductor only shall be 5 ohms or less.
3.4
TRAINING
3.4.1
Pre-Operational Training
After inspection and before placing the equipment in operation, the Contractor shall provide
separate operation and maintenance courses for a maximum of 10 persons designated by the
Contracting Officer in the operation and maintenance of the system. The two training courses
shall be conducted by the manufacturer of the equipment and shall be conducted at the project
site. The training shall include operation and troubleshooting of the system. The Contractor shall
provide for all text, workbooks, pamphlets, and written instruction required for the training. The
Contractor shall arrange for classrooms, training instructors, and other miscellaneous items
required for the training. The training shall cover a minimum of 10 working days and shall
include hands-on experience in laboratories as well as classroom instruction. Training days shall
be 8 hours a day.
3.4.2
User Training
After the system is installed and ready for use, and prior to cutover, the Contractor shall conduct
detailed training sessions covering orientation for 10 persons designated by the Contracting
Officer. The orientation, as a minimum, shall include an explanation of basic principles, theory,
Page | 12 of 13
W90BRJ-12-C-0001
and structure of the system, as well as demonstrations of equipment operations. The Contractor
shall provide onsite-training personnel for a 1 day period after system cutover.
3.5
TESTING
Notification of planned testing shall be given at least 14 days prior to any test. Tests shall be witnessed by
Contracting Officer's onsite representative. Any discrepancies noted during testing shall be corrected, and
those tests rerun, within 14 days.
3.5.1
Test Plan
The test plan shall define the tests required to ensure that the system meets technical, operational,
and performance specifications. The test plan shall define milestones for each test, equipment,
personnel, facilities, and supplies required. The test plan shall identify the capabilities and
functions to be tested.
3.5.2
Test Reports
A report detailing the results of testing shall be delivered within 7 days after completion of each
phase of testing. The report shall contain sign-off/completion sheets for each test indicating test
results, reason for failure, and signature blocks for both the contractor and Contracting Officer
witness.
3.5.3
Tests
3.5.3.1 Basic System Tests
Basic system tests shall verify that the basic types of calls can be made and to ensure
confidence in system operations. All wired lines shall be verified to receive dial tone,
receive ringback tone, talk to the called line, receive ringing, and trip ringing as required.
To ensure a successful cutover, 100 percent verification of subscriber records and cable
locations for the system shall be completed prior to cutover.
3.5.3.2 CO Line Call-Through Tests
Line call-through tests shall be done to verify all line groups can be accessed as required,
and that the lines interface properly with the connecting system.
3.5.3.3 Station Feature Tests
Station feature tests shall verify that the equipped station and system features function as
required. These tests require the use of several telephones, with each being assigned
classes of service to verify the appropriate feature.
Page | 13 of 13

OPM Technical Specification Sections

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OPM Technical Specification Sections

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WBRJ-12-C-0001

OPM Classroom & Conference Facility

SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK

SECTION 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK

This Section includes the following:

Related Sections include the following:

Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

Section 02300 - Earthwork

Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic

Product Data: For the following:

Section 02300 - Earthwork

Each type of plastic warning tape.

Pre-excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction

Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified

Pre-excavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Section 02300 - Earthwork

Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand.

Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Non-woven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for

Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications,

Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.

Section 02300 - Earthwork

Puncture Strength: 400 N; ASTM D 4833.

Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil,

Section 02300 - Earthwork

Explosives: Do not use explosives.

Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface

EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.

Section 02300 - Earthwork

EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

Clearance: 300 mm each side of pipe or conduit.

Complete backfill operations in accordance with Section 3.12.

Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction

Section 02300 - Earthwork

Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or

STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

Section 02300 - Earthwork

Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.

Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

Section 02300 - Earthwork

COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 25 mm.

Section 02300 - Earthwork

Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

Place drainage course 150 mm or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Section 02300 - Earthwork

DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK

Section 02300 - Earthwork

SECTION 02510 - WATER SYSTEMS

Division 15 Sections for water distribution systems inside building.

Section 15 410 Pipe-work Specialties

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Underground Piping: 1035 kPa.

General: Submit the following under the provisions of Section 01 301.

Test reports specified in 'Field Quality Control' Article in Part 3.